Argyle ES#4 Specs 04212023 V2

Argyle Elementary School #4 75 Percent Package Project Manual
ProjectVolume 2
22296.0000
16 March 2023 Corgan Associates, Inc.
90 Percent Progress Set 22296.0000
20 April 2023
401 North Houston Street
Dallas, Texas 75202
214 748 2000
Contract Conditions and Specifications for the general

construction of
Argyle Elementary School No. 04

For Argyle Independent School District
Cover v2 00 01 02 - 1
Argyle Elementary School #4 Project 22296.0000
90 Percent Progress Set 20 April 2023
SECTION 00 01 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTIONS ISSUE DATE REVISED
DIVISION 00 — PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 01 01 Cover v1 .........................................................................................
00 01 02 Cover v2 .........................................................................................
00 01 03 Project Directory .............................................................................
00 01 10 Table of Contents............................................................................
00 11 13 Advertisement for CSP....................................................................
00 21 13 Instructions to Proposers ................................................................
00 31 00 Available Information ......................................................................
00 31 32 Geotech Data Preamble..................................................................
00 31 32a Geotech Report G23-2009 Argyle Isd Elementary School No.5 - Argyle, Tx
00 41 00 Proposal Form ................................................................................

00 43 13 Proposal Bond ................................................................................
DIVISION 01 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00 Summary of Work ...........................................................................
01 21 00 Allowances......................................................................................
01 23 00 Alternates .......................................................................................
01 25 00 Substitution Procedures ..................................................................
01 29 00 Measurement and Payment ............................................................
01 31 00 Project Coordination .......................................................................
01 31 19 Project Meetings .............................................................................
01 32 00 Construction Progress Schedules ...................................................
01 33 23 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples ...................................
01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements ...............................................................
01 42 00 References .....................................................................................
01 43 39 Mock-Up Wall Construction .............................................................
01 45 16 Contractor's Quality Control ............................................................
01 45 23 Structural Testing and Inspection Services .....................................
01 45 29 Testing Agency Services.................................................................
01 50 00 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls ..............................
01 58 00 Project Identification and Signs .......................................................
01 60 00 Product Requirements ....................................................................
01 71 23 Field Engineering ............................................................................
01 73 29 Cutting and Patching.......................................................................
01 74 13 Construction Cleaning .....................................................................
01 74 23 Final Cleaning .................................................................................
01 77 00 Closeout Procedures ......................................................................
01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data ...................................................
01 78 30 Warranties and Bonds ....................................................................
01 78 39 Project Record Documents .............................................................
01 78 46 Extra Materials ................................................................................
01 79 00 Systems Demonstrations and Training............................................
01 91 00 Building Systems Commissioning ...................................................
Table of Contents 00 01 10 - 1
DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE
03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories ................................................
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing ......................................................................
03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete ...................................................................
03 39 00 Concrete Sealer ..............................................................................
03 54 16 Hydraulic Cement Underlayment ....................................................
DIVISION 04 — MASONRY
04 20 00 Unit Masonry...................................................................................
04 27 23 Through-Wall Flashing ....................................................................
DIVISION 05 — METALS
05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing .................................................................
05 12 13 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing............................
05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing .........................................................................
05 31 00 Steel Decking..................................................................................
05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing ...........................................................
05 43 00 Slotted Channel Framing ................................................................
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications...........................................................................
05 51 13 Metal Pan Stair Assemblies ............................................................
05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings ...................................................................
05 53 00 Gratings ..........................................................................................
DIVISION 06 — WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry .....................................................
06 15 33 Wood Patio Decking .......................................................................
06 16 63 Moisture Resistant Sheathing .........................................................
06 20 23 Interior Finish Carpentry..................................................................
06 41 16 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets .................................
06 64 00 Plastic Paneling (FRP) ....................................................................
DIVISION 07 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 16 16 Crystalline Waterproofing ................................................................
07 21 00 Thermal Insulation ..........................................................................
07 21 19 Foamed-In-Place Insulation ............................................................
07 22 16 Roof Board Insulation .....................................................................
07 27 26 Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers-Stpe ......................................
07 42 13 Formed Metal Wall Panels ..............................................................
07 52 16 Modified Asphalt Bituminous Roofing ..............................................
07 61 13 Standing Seam Metal Roof System ................................................
07 62 00 Sheet Metal & Misc. Accessories ....................................................
07 62 13 Gutters & Downspouts ....................................................................
07 72 00 Roof Accessories ............................................................................
07 72 16 Roof Portals ....................................................................................
07 81 16 Spray-Applied Fireproofing .............................................................
07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping .................................................................
07 84 46 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems ...........................................................
07 92 00 Joint Sealants .................................................................................
07 95 00 Exterior Expansion Control .............................................................
07 95 13 Interior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies .....................................
DIVISION 08 — OPENINGS
08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames .....................................................
08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors ..........................................................................
08 17 34 Frp Flush Doors ..............................................................................
08 31 13 Access Doors..................................................................................
08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors ..................................................................
08 33 26 Overhead Coiling Grilles .................................................................
08 34 73 Metal Sound Control Door Assemblies ............................................
08 39 06 Tornado Resistant Doors and Frames ............................................
08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts ................................
08 55 14 Tornado-Resistant Aluminum Windows ..........................................
08 56 53 Fixed Security Windows ..................................................................
08 71 00 Door Hardware ...............................................................................
08 80 00 Glazing ...........................................................................................
08 91 19 Fixed Louvers .................................................................................
DIVISION 09 — FINISHES
09 05 61 Moisture Vapor Emission and Alkalinity Control ..............................
09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies .............................................................
09 21 19 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies ............................................
09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling .................................................................................
09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings ................................................................
09 51 84 Acoustical Baffle Ceiling System .....................................................
09 64 66 Athletic Wood Flooring Systems .....................................................
09 65 13.13 Rubber Base and Accessories ........................................................
09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring .....................................................................
09 65 66 Resilient Athletic Flooring................................................................
09 67 23 Resinous Flooring ...........................................................................
09 68 13 Tile Carpeting .................................................................................
09 84 33 Sound-Absorbing Wall Units ...........................................................
09 91 13 Exterior Painting .............................................................................
09 91 23 Interior Painting ...............................................................................
09 96 23 Antigraffiti Coating...........................................................................
09 96 53 Elastomeric Paint Coatings .............................................................
09 96 59 High Performance Coatings ............................................................
DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES
10 11 00 Visual Display Units ........................................................................
10 11 17 Glass Markerboards........................................................................
10 14 16 Plaques ...........................................................................................
10 14 21 Illuminated Dimension Letter Signage .............................................
10 14 23 Panel Signage ................................................................................
10 14 24 First Responder Panel Signage ......................................................
10 14 30 Digital Marquee ...............................................................................
10 21 17 Plastic Toilet Compartments ...........................................................
10 21 23 Cubicle Curtain and Track...............................................................
10 26 00 Wall and Door Protection ................................................................
10 26 41 Ballistics Resistant Panels ..............................................................
10 28 13 Toilet Accessories ...........................................................................
10 41 16 Emergency Key Cabinet-Alum ........................................................
10 43 00 Safety Equipment............................................................................
10 44 13 Fire Protection Cabinets..................................................................

10 51 13 Athletic Lockers ..............................................................................
10 51 23 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Lockers........................................................
10 56 13 Metal Storage Shelving Full ............................................................
10 73 17 Metal Shade Canopies ....................................................................
10 73 26 Walkway Cover ...............................................................................
10 75 00 Flagpoles ........................................................................................
DIVISION 11 — EQUIPMENT
11 12 33 Lift Arm Gates .................................................................................
11 30 00 Appliances and Equipment .............................................................
11 40 00 Foodservice Equipment ..................................................................
11 50 00 Kilns and Vent Hoods .....................................................................
11 52 14 Projector and Projection Screens ....................................................
11 61 43 Stage Curtain and Tracks ...............................................................
11 66 00 Athletic Equipment ..........................................................................
11 68 13 Playground Equipment ....................................................................
11 68 13a Materialspec- Argyle #4 Es Playgrounds - 1170450-01-04..............
DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS
12 24 13 Roller Window Shades ....................................................................
12 36 61.16 Solid Surfacing Countertops ...........................................................
12 64 26 Upholstered Seating .......................................................................
12 66 00 Telescoping Gym Seats ..................................................................
12 93 13 Bicycle Racks .................................................................................
DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 03 40 Audiometric Rooms.........................................................................
13 31 10 Pre-Engineered Fabric Shade Structure .........................................
13 34 15 Grandstand Seating ........................................................................
DIVISION 14 — CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

14 21 23 Machine Roomless Electric Traction Passenger Elevators..............
DIVISION 21 — FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 00 10 Basic Fire Protection System Requirements ...................................
21 00 90 Fire Protection System Submittal Procedures .................................
21 13 16 Fire Protection System ....................................................................
DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING
22 00 10 Basic Plumbing Requirements ........................................................
22 00 90 Plumbing Submittal Procedures ......................................................
22 05 24 Valves - General .............................................................................
22 05 30 Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General .....................................................
22 05 54 Plumbing Identification ....................................................................
22 07 20 Piping Insulation .............................................................................
22 08 00 Commissioning of Plumbing ............................................................
22 11 17 Domestic Water Piping and Appurtenances ....................................
22 13 17 Soil, Waste and Sanitary Drain Piping, Vent Piping and Appurtenances
22 13 18 Condensate Piping..........................................................................
22 14 01 Roof Drainage and Appurtenances .................................................
22 16 01 Natural Gas Piping and Appurtenances ..........................................

22 33 34 Access Doors..................................................................................
22 40 01 Plumbing Fixtures and Fixture Carriers ...........................................
DIVISION 23 — HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 00 00 Basic Mechanical Requirements .....................................................
23 00 90 Hvac Submittal Procedures .............................................................
23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Hvac Piping and Equipment ..................
23 05 32 Roof Curbs......................................................................................
23 05 53 Identification for Hvac Piping and Equipment ..................................
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for Hvac ......................................
23 07 13 Duct and Grille Insulation ................................................................
23 07 21 Refrigerant Piping Insulation ...........................................................
23 08 00 Commissioning of Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning ...........
23 09 23 Energy Management Control System..............................................
23 09 63 Safe Shelter Emergency Systems Controls.....................................
23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping ...........................................................................
23 31 13 Metal Ductwork ...............................................................................
23 33 33 Access Doors..................................................................................
23 34 16 Hvac Fans.......................................................................................
23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles .......................................................
23 38 13 Commercial Kitchen Hoods .............................................................
23 43 23 Bipolar Ionization Air Purification System ........................................
23 74 33 Packaged Dedicated Outdoor Air Handling Units ............................
23 81 19 Packaged Hvac Units ......................................................................
23 81 26 Split System Hvac Units ..................................................................
23 82 39 Electric Unit Heaters .......................................................................
DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL
26 00 00 Electrical .........................................................................................
26 00 30 Warranty Period ..............................................................................
26 00 90 Electrical Submittal Procedures ......................................................
26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables ....................
26 05 19.19 Metal Clad Cable ............................................................................
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems ...............................
26 05 33.11 Raceways and Conduits for Electrical Systems ..............................
26 05 33.13 Boxes and Fittings for Electrical Systems .......................................
26 05 34 Provisions for Communication, Security and Safety Systems .........
26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems .................................................
26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems..............................................
26 08 11 Testing of Electrical System ............................................................
26 09 13 Electrical Power Monitoring and Control .........................................
26 09 16 Time Switches ................................................................................
26 09 21 Contactors ......................................................................................
26 09 41 Lighting Controls .............................................................................
26 21 00 Low Voltage Electrical Service Entrance .........................................
26 22 13 Low Voltage Distribution Transformers ...........................................
26 24 16 Panelboards for Distribution Switchgear .........................................
26 27 26 Wiring Devices ................................................................................
26 28 13 Fuses ..............................................................................................
26 28 16 Enclosed Safety Switches and Circuit Breakers ..............................
26 28 19 Ground Fault Protection System .....................................................

26 33 53 Static Uninterruptible Power Supply ................................................
26 43 00 Surge Protective Devices ................................................................
26 50 00 Lighting ...........................................................................................
26 55 61 Theatrical Lighting...........................................................................
26 56 23 Area Lighting...................................................................................
DIVISION 27 — COMMUNICATIONS
27 05 00 General Communication Systems Requirements ............................
27 10 30 Data and Telephone Cable Plant ....................................................
27 40 18 Audio-Video Equipment, Brackets and Cabling ...............................
27 51 25 Sound Reinforcement Systems .......................................................
27 53 13 Clock System ..................................................................................
DIVISION 28 — ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 05 00 General Electronic Safety and Security System Requirements .......
28 05 44 Emergency Responder Radio Coverage System ............................
28 13 27 Building Access Control System .....................................................
28 21 23 Video Surveillance System .............................................................
28 32 22 Elevator Lobby Emergency Call System .........................................
28 46 21 Fire Detection and Alarm System ....................................................
DIVISION 31 — EARTHWORK
31 10 00 Site Clearing ...................................................................................
31 22 00 Grading ...........................................................................................
31 22 19 Finish Grading ................................................................................
31 63 29 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts ...................................................
DIVISION 32 — EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 01 90 Landscape Grounds Maintenance 90%Aes4 ..................................
32 11 13 Subgrade Modification (Lime) .........................................................
32 13 00 Rigid Paving....................................................................................
32 13 23 Stamped Concrete Paving ..............................................................
32 17 23 Pavement Markings ........................................................................
32 18 13 Nonathletic Synthetic Grass Surfacing ............................................
32 18 16 Playground Surface ........................................................................
32 80 00 Irrigation 90%Aes4..........................................................................
32 92 00 Lawns and Grasses 90%Aes4 ........................................................
32 93 00 Planting 90%Aes4...........................................................................
DIVISION 33 — UTILITIES
33 00 00 Utilities ............................................................................................
33 40 00 Storm Drainage Utilities ..................................................................
END OF SECTION
90 Percent
90% ReviewProgress Set 20 April 2023
SECTION 21 00 10
BASIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions, Division 1 Specifications and Section 21, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic fire protection requirements necessary to provide complete installation of all

Division 21 work.
1.3 WORK INCLUDED
A. This section of work comprises furnishing of all materials, equipment, tools,

scaffolding, rigging, hoisting, labor and transportation necessary for the complete
installation of the fire protection system as shown on the plans and as specified
herein.
B. Bidders shall determine the contents of a complete set of drawings and specifications
and be aware that they may be bidding from a partial set of drawings, applicable only
to the various separate contracts, subcontracts, or trades as may be issued for
bidding purposes only. The contract documents and the complete scope of work for
the project are illustrated on the combined Architectural, Structural, Plumbing,
Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning and Electrical, and each Bidder shall thoroughly
acquaint himself with all the details of the complete set of drawings and specifications
before submitting his bid. All drawings and specifications form a part of the contract
documents for each separate contract and shall be considered as bound therewith in
the event partial sets of plans and specifications are issued for bidding only. The
submission of bids shall be deemed evidence of the review and examination of all
drawings, specifications, and addenda issued for this project as no allowances will be
made because of unfamiliarity with any portion of the complete set of documents.
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The conditions of the Division 1 requirements and the contract requirements which
include the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions apply to the work
of this division.
Basic Fire Protection System Requirements 21 00 10 - 1

EMA Engineering & Consulting
90 Percent
1.5 CODES & REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. General:
1. Perform all Division 21 work in strict accordance with the requirements and
recommendations stated in the codes and standards except when requirements
are modified by the contract documents.
2. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed to permit work not
conforming to these codes.
3. When two or more codes or standards are applicable to the same work, then the
stricter code or standard shall govern.
4. The date of the code or standard that is in effect on the date of issue of the
contract documents except when a particular publication date is specified.
5. The Contractor shall be held responsible for verifying all local codes and
ordinances that may alter any part of the plans or specifications. The Contractor
shall bear all costs for correcting the deficiencies.
6. Where local codes and ordinances are not in writing or on record but a local
precedence has been set, the Owner shall pay for any additional cost incurred.
B. Applicable Codes and Standards for All Division 21 Work:

1. International Building Code
2. International Gas Code
3. International Plumbing Code
4. International Mechanical Code
5. International Energy Conservation Code
C. National Electrical Code
D. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards:

1. OSHA Standard 2207 - Construction Industry Standards
2. OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926 – Regulation of Excavation
3. Texas Underground Facility Damage Prevention Act (H.B. 2295)
4. All other applicable standards
E. National Fire Protection Association
F. Fire Sprinkler System:

1. NFPA 13
2. NFPA 14
3. NFPA Life Safety Code 101 Section 8-3
4. All other applicable codes
G. National Appliance Energy Conservation Act of 1987
H. Texas State Board of Insurance Standards
I. Clean Air Act and Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990
J. Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators

90 Percent
K. State Codes:
1. Texas Department of Labor Boiler Rules and Regulations
L. Local Municipal Codes and Ordinances
1.6 SCHEDULE OF ABBREVIATIONS
A. Reference Standards are listed in Section 21 using abbreviations listed below:

AABC Associated Air Balance Council
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
ADC Air Diffusion Council
AGA American Gas Association
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWE American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
CGA Compressed Gas Association
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
CS Commercial Standard
CSA Canadian Standards Association
DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association
DOT Department of Transportation
DOC Department of Commerce
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FM Factory Mutual
FS Federal Specification
IBC International Building Code
ITL Independent Testing Laboratories
NEC National Electric Code
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Association
TCEQ Texas Commission on Environmental Quality
TDH Texas Department of Health
TWC Texas Water Commission
UL Underwriters Laboratories
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide complete installations of all systems.

90 Percent
B. Furnish all items of equipment, material, and labor to complete the Contract even
though each and every item necessary is not specifically mentioned or shown.
C. In case of any conflict between the specifications, plans and ordinances, the
ordinances shall govern.
D. All materials furnished under this Contract shall be new, free from defects of any kind,
of the quality and design hereinafter specified, and shall conform to the standards of
Underwriter's Laboratories Inc., except for equipment which U.L. does not list or
provide label service.
E. All fire sprinkler equipment and sprinkler heads shall be the same brand.
F. Contractor's Responsibility
1. Erect barricades, protective fencing, and signs to prevent injury to personnel on
site.
2. Make permanent connection to utilities or existing lines. Determine depth and
location, and bid accordingly.
3. Relocate and repair any existing lines cut by general construction work.
4. Pay all costs in connection with double check detector assembly.
5. Plans do not show exact location and elevations of lines, nor do they show all
offsets required.
6. Deviate from plans as required to conform to the general construction and
provide proper grading.
7. Maintain all utility services during construction to existing portions of job that
remain.
8. Procure and pay for all necessary permits or licenses to carry out the work.
9. Obtain and pay for all the necessary certificates of approval which must be
delivered to the Architect before final acceptance of the work.
10. Periodically remove rubbish, clean or repair all surfaces marred by the work
required under this contract.
11. Protect work from damage by other trades.
12. Make all tests required by law; pay all costs in connection with the testing.
13. Where job conditions require changes in indicated locations and arrangement,
make such changes without extra cost to Owner.
14. Provide controls, relays, all low-voltage wiring, conduit and wiring related to fire
sprinkler system, and other equipment and devices to form a complete working
system.
1.8 DEFINITIONS
A. Approval:
1. It is understood that approval must be obtained from the Architect in writing
before proceeding with the proposed work.
2. Approval by the Architect of any changes, submitted by the Contractor will be
considered as general only to aid the Contractor in expediting his work.
3. Contractor:

90 Percent
a. The Contractor engaged to execute the work included in a particular section

only, even though he may be technically described as a Subcontractor to the
General Contractor.
b. If the Contractor engaged to execute said work employs Sub-Contractors to
perform various portions of the work included under this Section, he shall be
held responsible for the execution of same, in full conformity with Contract
Document requirements.
c. The Contractor shall cooperate at all times and shall be responsible for the
satisfactory cooperation of his Subcontractors with the other Contractors on
the job so that all of the various phases of the work may be properly
coordinated without unnecessary delays or damage to any parts of the work
of any Contractor.
4. Provide:
a. Defined as requiring the furnishing and installing of the item or facility
indicated, complete in all respects and ready for operation unless otherwise
specifically noted.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warranty his work against defective materials and workmanship
for a period of one year from date of acceptance of the job.
B. Neither the final payment nor any provisions in Contract Documents shall relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship.
C. He shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work
resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one year from date of
substantial completion.
D. The Owner shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness.
E. This Guarantee shall not be construed to include the normal maintenance of the
various components of the system covered by these specifications.
1.10 SITE VISIT
A. Before submitting his proposal, each bidder shall examine all plans and specifications
relating to the work, shall visit the site of the project and become fully informed of the
extent and character of the work required.
B. No consideration will be granted for any alleged misunderstanding of the materials to

be furnished or the amount of work to be done, it being fully understood that the tender
of a proposal carries with it the agreement to all items and conditions referred to
herein, or indicated on the accompanying plans or required by nature of the site of
which may be fairly implied as essential to the execution and completion of any and
all parts of the work.
1.11 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Procedures:

90 Percent
1. Bidding requirements, contract forms, conditions of the contract, Division 1 -

General Requirements and Division 21 apply to work of this division, in addition
to the following:
a. The materials, workmanship, design, and arrangement of all work installed
under this contract shall be subject to the review of the Architect, Engineer
and Owner.
b. Where specified materials, process, or methods of construction or
manufactured article is specified by name or by reference to the catalog
number of a manufacturer, the specifications are to be used as a guide and
are not intended to take precedence over the basic duty and performance
specified or noted on the Drawings.
c. In all cases, the Contractor shall verify the duty and available electric
characteristics with the specific characteristics of the equipment offered for
review. All component parts of each item of equipment or device shall bear
the manufacturer's name plate giving name of manufacturer, description,
size, type, serial or model number, electrical characteristics, etc., in order to
facilitate maintenance or replacement.
d. Unapproved Products: If materials or equipment are installed before being
reviewed and approved by the engineer, the contractor shall be liable for the
removal and replacement of such unapproved materials and equipment, at
no additional expense to the owner. Additionally, if the removal and
replacement of unapproved materials or equipment necessitates the
removal and replacement of other related materials or equipment, then the
contractor shall be liable for the removal and replacement of the related
materials and equipment at no additional expense to the owner.
e. This Contractor shall call to the attention of the Architect/Engineer by letter
or on shop drawing submittals, any instance in which the shop drawings
differ from the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications.
f. Data and shop drawings shall be coordinated and included in a single
submission. Multiple submissions are not acceptable except where prior
approval has been obtained from the Architect/Engineer. In such cases, a
list of data to be submitted later shall be included with the first submission.
Failure to submit shop drawings that meet the requirements of the Drawings
and Specifications in ample time for review shall not entitle the Contractor to
an extension of contract time, and no claim for extension by reason of such
default shall be allowed.
g. Catalogs, pamphlets, or other documents submitted to describe items on
which review is being requested shall be specific and identifications in
catalog, pamphlets, etc., of items submitted shall be clearly made in a
contrasting ink. Data of a general nature shall not be acceptable. Data and
shop drawings shall be identified in accordance with Division 01. In addition,
shop drawings shall be identified by the name of the item and system and
the applicable Specification paragraph number.
h. Electronic Submittals: Electronic submittal requirements will be determined
by the Architect. If this method is required then the procedures described in
this section shall be modified as follows:

90 Percent
(1) The contractor shall supply only one copy of the submittal, rather than
the six copies described in this section. The submittal shall be
accompanied by a letter stating that the contractor desires the response
in electronic form, and that prior approval for this method has been
granted.
(2) After reviewing the submittal, the engineer will create electronic files
from the reviewed submittal material.
(3) The electronic files will either be mailed to the architect, or posted to a
web site, depending on the architect’s requirements. The architect and
contractor can distribute copies of the files as desired.
(4) The engineer will retain the paper copy of the submittal as a file copy.
B. Product Data:
1. Where the content of manufacturer submittal literature includes data not pertinent
to the submittal, clearly indicate which portions of the contents are being
submitted for review. Catalogs, pamphlets, or other documents submitted to
describe items on which review is being requested shall be specific and
identifications in catalog, pamphlets, etc., of items submitted shall be clearly
made in a contrasting ink or highlighting. Data of a general nature shall not be
acceptable.
C. Coordination Correspondence: The contractor may desire to verify the acceptability

of a particular item prior to assembling the initial submittal package. The contractor
may send material directly to the engineer for comments and feedback. This
communication, whether by mail, fax, or e-mail, will be treated as normal coordination
correspondence and will not be tracked or documented as a formal submittal. The
engineer may or may not respond to such correspondence. If the engineer agrees, in
writing, to the use of a particular item, then that same material shall be included in the
initial submittal package along with a copy of the correspondence.
1.12 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. The Contractor shall keep a set of plans on the job, noting daily all changes made in
connection with the final installation including exact dimensioned locations of all new
and uncovered existing utility piping outside the building.
B. Upon submitting his request for final payment, he shall turn over to the
Architect/Engineer, for subsequent transmittal to the Owner, a clean, neatly marked
set of reproducible plans showing "as installed" work and an electronic file with
changes of materials.
C. In addition to the above, the Contractor shall accumulate during the job's progress the
following data, in duplication (2 each), prepared in 3 ring binders of sufficient size,
black in color, neat in appearance, and turned over to the Architect/Engineer for
checking and subsequent delivery to the Owner:
1. All warranties, guarantees and manufacturer's directions on equipment and
material covered by the Contract.
2. Approved fixture brochures.
3. Copies of approved shop drawings.

90 Percent
4. Set of operating instructions. Operating instructions shall also include

recommended maintenance and seasonal changeover procedures.
5. Any and all other data and/or plans required during construction.
6. Repair parts lists of all major items and equipment including name, address and
telephone number of local supplier or agent.
D. The first page, or pages, shall have the names, addresses, and telephone numbers
of the following:
1. General Contractor and all sub-contractors.
2. Major Equipment Suppliers.
1.13 TRAINING
A. Upon completion of the work and at a time designated by the Owner's representative,
provide a formal training session for the Owner's operating personnel to include
location, operation, and maintenance of all fire protection equipment and systems,
some sections have further instructions.
B. Before proceeding with instruction, prepare a typed outline in triplicate listing the
subjects that will be covered. Submit the outline for review by the Owner's
representative.
C. At the conclusion of the instruction, obtain the signatures of the attendees on each
copy of the outline to signify that they have a proper understanding of the operation
and maintenance of the system. Submit the signed outlines to the Owner's
representative and Engineer as a condition of final acceptance.
1.14 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various lines, ducts, conduits,
fixtures, and equipment and the method of connecting and controlling them.
B. It is not intended to show every connection in detail and all fittings required for a
complete system.
C. The systems shall include but are not limited to the items shown on the plans.
D. Exact locations of these items shall be determined by reference to the general plans
and measurements of the building and in cooperation with other contractors, and in
all cases, shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
E. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to make any reasonable change in the
location of any part of this work without additional cost to the Owner.
F. Contractor, subcontractor, vendors and suppliers are required to waive subrogation

against Owner and Engineer.

90 Percent
1.15 UTILITIES, LOCATIONS, AND ELEVATIONS
A. Locations and elevations of the various utilities within the scope of this work have
been obtained from the City and/or other substantially reliable sources and are offered
separately from the Contract documents, as a general guide only, without guarantees
as to accuracy.
B. The Contractor shall examine the site, shall verify to his own satisfaction the locations,
elevations and availability of all utilities and services required, and shall adequately
inform himself as to their relation to the work; the submission of bids shall be deemed
evidence thereof.
C. The Contractor shall coordinate all services with the Utility Companies during
construction, coordinate changes made by Utility Companies to the design of project,
and coordinate with the Owner, Architect/Engineer, and Utility the scheduling of any
shutdowns or delays that may occur in providing service.
D. The Contractor shall verify location, conduct all necessary tests, inspections,
coordinate with Owner's representatives and utilities, and check for existing
underground utilities and lines before ditching.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for repair of any cut or damaged lines or utilities
he uncovers. There are lines and utilities not shown on any plans.
1.16 SUBSTITUTION OF PRODUCTS
A. Substitution of products specified herein will be considered only when a complete list
of proposed alternative equipment is submitted to the Engineer in writing, supported
by adequate technical and cost data. This includes a complete description of the
proposed substitution, drawings, catalog cuts, performance data, test data, or any
other data or information necessary for evaluation.
B. All proposed substitutions and data must be received by the Engineer no less than
ten working days prior to the schedule date for opening of bids.
C. The Engineer will consider all such submittals and the Architect will issue an
addendum listing items which the Engineer considers acceptable. Only such items as
specified or approved as acceptable will be installed on this project.
D. Manufacturers' names are listed herein and on the plans to establish a standard of
quality and design. Where a manufacturer's name is mentioned, products of other
manufacturers will be acceptable, if in the opinion of the Engineer, the substitute
material is of equivalent quality or better than that of the material specified.
E. The Contractor's Bid represents that the bid price is based solely upon the materials
and equipment described in the Bid Documents (including addenda, if any) and that
he contemplates no substitutions or extras.
F. Requests for substitution are understood to mean that the Contractor:

90 Percent
1. Has personally investigated the proposed substitution and determined that it is

equal or superior in all respects to that specified.
2. Will provide the same guarantee for the substitution that he would for that
specified.
3. Will, at no cost to the Owner, replace the substitute item with the specified product
if the substitute item fails to perform satisfactorily.
G. After Award of the Contract, substitutions will be considered only under one or more
of the following circumstances:
1. The substitution is required for compliance with subsequent interpretations of
code or insurance requirements.
2. The specified product is unavailable through no fault of the Contractor.
3. The manufacturer refuses to warranty the specified products as required.
4. Subsequent information that the specified product is unable to perform properly
or to fit in the designated space.
5. In the Engineer's sole judgment, the substitution would be in the Owner's best
interest.
H. Revisions to the fire protection system shall be under the supervision of the Engineer
at a standard hourly rate charged by the Engineer and shall be paid by the Contractor
originating the changes.
1.17 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. The Contractor shall take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect
his apparatus from damage.
B. This shall include the creation of all required temporary shelters to adequately protect
any apparatus above the floor of the construction and the covering of apparatus in
the completed building with tarpaulins or other protective covering.
C. Failure to comply with the above to the satisfaction of the Owner's inspector will be
sufficient cause for the rejection of the equipment in question and its complete
replacement by this Contractor.
D. All apparatus shall be cribbed up from the floor or ground by the Contractor and
covered with tarpaulins or other protective covering where necessary or directed.
1.18 FINAL INSPECTION
A. It shall be the duty of this Contractor to make a careful inspection trip of the entire
project, assuring himself that the work on the project is ready for final acceptance
before calling upon the Architect/Engineer to make a final inspection.
B. To avoid delay of final acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall have all necessary
bonds, warranties, receipts, affidavits, etc., called for in the various articles of these
specifications, prepared and signed in advance, together with a letter of transmittal,
listing each paper included, and shall deliver the same to the Architect/Engineer at or
before the time of said final inspection. The Contractor is cautioned to check over
each bond, receipt, etc., before preparing for submission to verify that the terms check
with the requirements of the specifications.

90 Percent
1.19 ASBESTOS
A. No asbestos or asbestos containing materials shall be permitted in this project.
1.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. All Subcontractors shall notify the General Contractor sufficiently ahead of

construction of any floors, walls, ceiling, roof, etc., of any openings that will be
required for his work.
B. He shall see that all sleeves required for his work are set at proper times so as to
avoid delay of the job.
C. All necessary cutting of walls, floors, partitions, ceilings, etc., as required for the
proper installation of the work under this Contract shall be done at the Subcontractor's
expense in a neat and workmanlike manner, and as approved by the
Architect/Engineer.
D. No joists, beams, girders or columns shall be cut by any Contractor without first
obtaining written permission of the Architect/Engineer.
E. Patching of openings and/or alterations shall be provided by the General Contractor.
F. All openings in firewalls and floors, such as thimbles, shall be completely sealed after
installation for a completely airtight installation. Sealing material shall be
non-combustible and UL approved. The installed sealing assembly shall not cause
the fire rating of the penetrated structure to be decreased.
G. All openings in exterior walls shall be sealed watertight.
1.21 IDENTIFICATION
A. Refer to Section 22 05 54.
1.22 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. All equipment and devices shall be installed in accordance with these plans and
specifications, manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.
B. Where specifications call for installation of a product to be in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions and/or where manufacturer's instructions are required for
installation of a product, it shall be the contractor's responsibility to obtain the
necessary applicable manufacturer's instructions and install the product in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
C. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to install all equipment, materials, and

devices shown on the plans and as called out in these specifications even if
manufacturer's instructions are absolutely unattainable.

90 Percent
1.23 RELATED WORK
A. The various specification sections for this division may or may not include related
work listings.
B. All related work shall be coordinated and provided by the Fire Protection Contractor
regardless whether specifically identified or not.
1.24 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND EQUIPMENT FOR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS (FIRE
PUMPS)
A. All wiring, conduit, boxes, equipment (controls, relays, contactors, motor starters,
heaters, switches) and any other control devices or equipment required to form a
complete and properly operating system, shall be the responsibility of this Contractor.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall only provide line voltage (including hook-up) to all fire
protection equipment.
C. All fire protection controls and devices shall be low voltage unless otherwise noted or
shown on the plans. Where line voltage controls or devices are noted, the Contractor
shall provide complete wiring diagrams (approved by the Engineer) to the Electrical
Contractor prior to final hook-up.
D. The Fire Protection and Electrical plans are based on a performance specification
and preliminary flow test. Should any fire protection equipment or device be changed
or approved from those which are shown or noted, all electrical and/or fire protection
changes shall be made at the expense of the trade or contractor initiating the change
with no expense to the Owner, Architect, Engineer or their representatives.
E. All wiring provided by this Contractor shall be installed in a workmanlike manner using
tie wraps, labels, anchors and etc. Loose wiring is not acceptable. All wiring in
exposed areas shall be installed in conduits.
F. All conduit and boxes required in all walls for control purposes shall be provided by
electrical contractor. All conduit required in attic, clear spaces, or on roof shall be by
mechanical contractor.
1.25 OPERATION PRIOR TO COMPLETION
A. When any piece of fire protection equipment is operable and the Contractor needs to
operate the equipment, he may do so providing that he properly supervises the
operation.
B. The warranty period shall, however, not commence until such time as the equipment
is operated for the beneficial use of the Owner.
C. Regardless of whether or not the equipment has or has not been operated, the
Contractor shall properly clean the equipment, install clean filter media, properly
adjust and complete all punch list items before final acceptance by the Owner.
D. The date of acceptance and the start of the warranty may not be the same date.

90 Percent
1.26 SAFETY GUARDS
A. Contractor shall furnish and install all safety guards required. All belt driven
equipment, projecting shafts and other rotating parts shall be enclosed or adequately
guarded.
1.27 FLAME SPREAD PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS
A. All materials and adhesives used in fire sprinkler system shall conform to NFPA and
UL life and flame spread properties of materials.
B. The composite classifications shall not exceed 25 for a flame spread rating and 50 for
a smoke developed rating as listed for the basic material, the finishes, adhesives,
etc., specified for each system and shall be such when completely assembled.
1.28 LEAD MATERIALS
A. No lead or lead containing materials shall be allowed in any domestic or potable water
supply piping, valves, fixtures, components, equipment or any other item.
1.29 ACCESS CLEARANCE
A. Proper access to all installed equipment shall be provided. The Fire Sprinkler
Contractor shall label all points of access immediately upon installation with a marker
pen.
B. This contractor is responsible for providing coordinated clearances with all other
trades.
C. If another trade violates this space, the General Contractor shall be notified
immediately.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Not Applicable
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING
A. After the fire protection system has been completed and put into operation, subject
system to an operating test under design conditions to check for system leaks.
B. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of all systems.
C. Special tests on individual systems are specified under individual sections.

90 Percent
D. Obtain all state and city permits and approvals.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 21 00 90
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section supplements Division 01 Submittal Procedures and contains additional

requirements applicable to Division 21 submittals.
A. This section includes, but is not limited to:

1. Fire protection submittal procedures
2. List of required Division 21 submittals to the engineer
3. This section applies only to the Division 21 specifications. Submittals required by
other specification divisions are not included here, even though the same
subcontractor may be providing work under other divisions.
1.3 RELATED SECTION
A. Division 01 – Submittal Procedures
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Product Data: Illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, and

brochures furnished by the contractor, subcontractor, manufacturer, or supplier to
illustrate materials or equipment or to illustrate some portion of the work. Provide a
summary of scheduled items with all data in schedules.
B. Shop Drawings: Drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specifically prepared
for the work by the contractor, subcontractor, manufacturer, or supplier to illustrate
some portion of the work.
C. Equipment/Material Submittal Package: A compilation of the product data, shop

drawings, and other items as required by the specifications, submitted near the start
of the work. Typically, the specifications require the initial submittal package to be
submitted within a certain number of days after the work starts.
D. Quality Assurance Submittal: Items submitted before and during the execution of a
particular portion of the work for the purpose of guarding against defects and
deficiencies.
E. Quality Control Submittal: Items submitted at the completion of a particular portion of

the work for the purpose of evaluating completed activities and elements of the work
for conformance with contract requirements (e.g. start up reports).
F. Closeout Submittals: Items submitted at or near the completion of the contract.
Fire Protection System Submittal Procedures 21 00 90 - 1

90 Percent
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The materials, workmanship, design, and arrangement of all work installed under this
contract shall be subject to the review of the architect, engineer and owner.
B. Manufacturers: Manufacturers submitted shall be as per the acceptable

manufacturers listed in each specification section or referenced schedule. For
additional manufacturers requiring approval, reference the Substitution of Products
article in Section 21 00 10.
C. Required Submittals: Refer to the Submittals article of each individual Division 21

specification section for the required items to be submitted.
D. Contractor’s Coordination Submittals: The contractor may require his subcontractors

to provide drawings, setting diagrams, and similar information to help coordinate the
project, but such data shall remain between the contractor and his subcontractors and
will not be reviewed by the engineer.
E. Electronic Submittals: Fax, e-mail, or other electronic forms of submittals from the
contractor are not acceptable. With the prior approval of the architect and the
engineer, the contractor may request that the review comments of the engineer be
returned in electronic form. If this method is agreed upon, then the procedures
described in this section shall be modified as follows:
1. The contractor shall supply only one copy of the submittal, rather than the six
copies described in this section. The submittal shall be accompanied by a letter
stating that the contractor desires the response in electronic form, and that prior
approval for this method has been granted.
2. After reviewing the submittal, the engineer will create electronic files from the
reviewed submittal material.
3. The electronic files will either be mailed to the architect, or posted to a web site,
depending on the architect’s requirements. The architect and contractor can
distribute copies of the files as desired.
4. The engineer will retain the paper copy of the submittal as a file copy.
F. Coordination Correspondence: The contractor may desire to verify the acceptability

communication, whether by mail, fax, or e-mail, will be treated as normal coordination
correspondence and will not be tracked or documented as a formal submittal. The
engineer may or may not respond to such correspondence. If the engineer agrees, in
writing, to the use of a particular item, then that same material shall be included in the
initial submittal package along with a copy of the correspondence.

90 Percent
G. Unapproved Products: If materials or equipment are installed before being reviewed

and approved by the engineer, the contractor shall be liable for the removal and
replacement of such unapproved materials and equipment, at no additional expense
to the owner. Additionally, if the removal and replacement of unapproved materials or
equipment necessitates the removal and replacement of other related materials or
equipment, then the contractor shall be liable for the removal and replacement of the
related materials and equipment at no additional expense to the owner.
H. Product Data:
acceptable.
I. Shop Drawings:
1. Scale and measurements: Make shop drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently
large to show all pertinent aspects of the item.
2. Types of prints required: Submit shop drawings in blue-line or black-line prints,
minimum of six (6) sets blue-line or black-line prints of each sheet.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE / CONTROL SUBMITTALS
A. Quality assurance and quality control submittals may be in the form of documentation,
or may be in the form of completed physical work that is offered for review by the
engineer, architect, or owner.
B. If documentation is the subject, then submit in a manner similar to the initial submittal
package.
C. If completed physical work is the subject, then the work shall not be concealed, nor
shall subsequent work be performed, until the engineer’s representative has reviewed
the work. If the work is concealed, or if subsequent work is performed, before the
engineer’s representative has reviewed the work, then the contractor shall be liable
for removal and replacement at no additional expense to the owner.
D. Sequencing:
1. Within 30 calendar days after the contractor has received the owner’s notice to
proceed, provide the complete submittal package.
2. Submit to local authority having jurisdiction and then submit to Engineer.
3. After the engineer has reviewed the submittal package, make necessary
revisions to the submittals as directed by the engineer and resubmit.
4. After the submittal has been reviewed by the engineer, proceed to purchase
materials and perform the work.

90 Percent
E. Scheduling:
1. Failure to submit items that meet the requirements of the contract documents in
ample time for review shall not entitle the contractor to an extension of contract
time, and no claim for extension by reason of such default shall be allowed. The
contractor may be held liable for delays so occasioned.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Not applicable
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit all drawings and design criteria to local authority having jurisdiction prior to
submitting to Engineer.
B. Make submittals of product data, shop drawings, samples, quality assurance

submittals, quality control submittals, and other items in accordance with the
requirements of this section, applicable sections in Division 22, and additional
requirements of each individual Division 21 specification section.
C. Grouping of Submittals:
1. The submittal package shall be coordinated and included in a single submission.
Multiple submissions are not acceptable except where prior written approval has
been obtained from the engineer. Partial submittals may be rejected, without
being reviewed, as not complying with the provisions of the contract.
D. Submittal Organization:
1. Provide a submittal cover sheet that lists at least the following:
a. Project name
b. Date
c. Name and address of architect
d. Name and address of engineer
e. Name, address and telephone number of prime contractor
f. Name, address and telephone number of fire protection contractor
g. Name, address and telephone number of fire protection supplier
2. The second and third sheet shall be blank for stamping of submittals
3. Provide an index sheet listing all items submitted.
4. The contractor shall call to the attention of the engineer by letter, included in the
submittal after the index sheet, any instance in which the submittals are known
to differ from the requirements of the contract documents.
5. Organize all required items by specification section. The material for each
specification section shall be organized as follows:
a. Provide a tabbed index divider with the specification number and title.

90 Percent
b. Provide a section cover sheet that lists the same information as the
submittal cover sheet, plus the specification number and title and the
name, address and telephone number of the vendor or vendor’s
representative, if applicable.
c. Refer to the individual Division 21 specification sections for any required
organization of the submittal material within each tabbed submittal section.
d. Tabbed sections shall be arranged by specification section number in
numerical order.
e. Organize all required data in a 3-ring hard cover binder suitable for filing.
Soft binders are not acceptable.
f. Provide a minimum of six copies, each in a separate binder.
g. Submit in accordance with the procedures described in Division 01
Submittal Procedures.
h. Submittals not organized as described here may be rejected, without being
reviewed, as not complying with the provisions of the contract.
E. Response to engineer’s review:

1. Review comments: Review comments of the engineer will either be shown on the
returned sets to the contractor or shown on a document attached to the sets. If
the comments are on an attached document, then the engineer will place a note
on the submittal referring to the attached comments. In such cases, the
engineer’s signature will appear only on the attached document. If the attached,
signed document becomes physically separated from the submittal, then the
submittal will no longer be considered as being a reviewed submittal.
2. Complete rejection: If the submittal is not complete or does not meet the
requirements of this specification section, then the engineer may reject the entire
submittal and return the submittal without further review or comment. In such
cases, the entire submittal shall be completely revised and resubmitted. The
resubmittal shall be given a new submittal number and shall be documented and
processed as a separate submittal from the original.
3. Held for completion: If the submittal is not complete, but is only missing some
minor item, the engineer may, at the engineer’s sole discretion, hold the submittal
rather than rejecting and returning the submittal. In such cases, the engineer will
notify the architect and contractor that the submittal is being held for completion.
The contractor will be given a predetermined amount of time to provide the
missing item. Upon receipt of the missing item, the engineer will insert the missing
item into the submittal package and proceed with the review process.
4. Partial rejection: The engineer may reject only certain portions of the submittal.
In such cases, only those rejected portions or items need to be revised and
resubmitted.
5. Provide as corrected: The engineer may note a required change to a submitted
item, but may not consider the change serious enough to require a resubmittal.
In such cases, the engineer will note that the item is to be provided as noted or
corrected. In such cases, the contractor may proceed to provide the item.
However, if subsequent observations reveal that the noted change was not
made, then the contractor shall be liable for removal and replacement of the item
at no additional cost to the owner.
6. Reviewed without comment: The contractor may proceed to provide all materials
and equipment.

90 Percent
F. Quality Assurance / Quality Control Submittals:

1. Provide quality assurance and quality control submittals at those points in the
progress of the work in accordance with the requirements of individual Division
22 specification sections.
2. If the subject of the submittal is completed physical work, then submit the work
for review by notifying the engineer’s representative in sufficient time to schedule
the site visit. The engineer’s representative will document the review in an
observation report. Make noted corrections to the work and resubmit the work for
review before covering the work or proceeding with subsequent work.
G. Close-out Submittals:
1. Provide close-out submittals in accordance with the requirements of Division 1.

Section
90 Percent
90% Submit on
ReviewProgress Set the following 1 2 3 4 Arch Sub # 20 April 2023
21 13 Fire Protection System
16
Black steel piping
Schedule 10 black steel main line
piping
Schedule 40 black steel branch
line piping
Schedule 10 galvanized steel main
line piping-pools
Schedule 40 galvanized steel
branch line piping
Alarm valves (wet or dry)
Check valves
Fire department connections
Water gongs on systems without
fire alarm system
Fire valve cabinets-Class 1
Air compressors for dry systems
Fire pumps
Hangers- see 22 05 30
Hydraulic calculations for each
sprinkler zone
Shop drawing of each sprinkler
zone, site plan entry
Backflow preventers
Inspectors ports
Sprinkler supply riser entry elbow
Sprinkler heads
-semi recessed sprinkler head
-concealed sprinkler head with
cover
-upright sprinkler heads
-dry sidewall sprinkler head
Flexible sprinkler head fittings
Sprinkler guards for exposed areas
(i.e. gymnasiums)
Extra materials (6 heads, 12
escutcheons, sprinkler head
wrench in box mounted on wall in
riser room)
1 - Reviewed
2 - Furnish as corrected in comments, resubmit not required
3 - Revise and Resubmit based on comments
4 - Rejected based on comments
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 21 13 16
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL

Conditions, Division 1 Specifications and Section 21 00 10, apply to this Section.
A. Furnish and install complete fire protection system, as described on Page 2 and the
remainder of this specification.
A. Section 21 00 10 - Basic Fire Protection System Requirements
B. Section 22 33 34 - Access Doors
C. Section 28 46 21 - Fire Detection and Alarm System Performance Specification
1.4 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 10 - Fire Extinguisher Cabinet
B. NFPA 13 - Sprinkler System
C. NFPA 14 – Stand Pipes
D. NFPA 20 - Fire Pumps
E. NFPA 24 - Underground Mains
F. NFPA 1961 - Fire Hose
G. NFPA 1963 - Fire Hose Connections
H. NFPA 1964 - Spray Nozzles
I. UL 2443 – Standard for Flexible Sprinkler Hose
J. UL - Underwriter Laboratory
K. FM - Factory Mutual
L. State Fire Marshall's Office
Fire Protection System 21 13 16 - 1

90 Percent
M. Insurance Services Office
N. ASTM C-150 - Pipe and Fittings
O. ASTM A-53 - Steel Pipe Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless
P. ASTM A-795 - Black and Hot Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Welded and
Seamless Steel Pipe For Fire Protection Use
Q. AWWA C-502 - Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants
1.5 WORK REQUIRED
A. Multi Story School:

1. This new school will have both light and ordinary hazards. There will be 1
sprinkler zones and allow for 1 future zone(s). The school is multi story so
intermediate stair landing Class One fire valve cabinets will be required. Class
One fire valve cabinets will be required at all entry points from the means of
ingress and those locations interior to the entry points as required by NFPA14.
All work to include connection to city main, risers, double check detector
assembly, alarm checks, alarm valves, fire department connection, all exterior
water piping, all interior water piping, sprinkler heads, hangers, unions, fittings,
approved OS&Y valves, flow switches, escutcheons for a complete turnkey job.
B. Manifold Riser System:

1. All zone risers are manifolded and located in the sprinkler riser room. The fire
sprinkler water supply also enters in the sprinkler riser room. The double check
detector assembly is located in the sprinkler riser room. Manifold riser system to
be designed and installed to meet all clearance requirements per NFPA 13.
Piping zone alarm valves, check valve, flow switch, fire department connection,
inspector’s test, and main drain to all be located in sprinkler riser room.
C. The double check detector assembly will be installed at interior of building. Coordinate
installation with city and construction manager. Forward flow testing equipment.
D. Freeze Protection:
1. The work shall include all freeze protection as required in accordance with NFPA.
E. Performance Specification:
1. This is a Performance Specification to meet the requirements of authorities listed
in Section 21 00 10. The drawings are prepared as diagrammatic and are drawn
for coordination with the mechanical, electrical and other trades. They are
suggested arrangements only. The Fire Protection Contractor shall coordinate
the installation of all items of the fire protection system with all other trades, so
that all components will be installed to avoid conflict. Components improperly
installed shall be removed and/or relocated as directed by Architect and/or
Engineer at no additional cost.

90 Percent
F. Review Construction Documents

1. Become thoroughly familiar with the construction details illustrated on the
drawings before submitting your bid as no allowance will be made because of the
Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details.
2. Construction and installation drawings shall be prepared according to standard
practice. Changes from these drawings necessary to accomplish the work of the
various trades or to conform to the rules of authorities having jurisdiction shall be
made without additional cost to the Owner.
3. Exact final location of all exposed fire sprinkler piping, equipment, etc. shall be
verified with the Architect and/or Engineer.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittal data on all items specified in this section in accordance with
Specification Section 21 00 10, General Conditions, and Division 1.
B. Fire Sprinkler Contractor to provide building shop drawings to Mechanical, Electrical

and Plumbing Contractors for coordination.
C. Submit fully-dimensioned shop drawings in accordance with general conditions.

Densities and spacing as required by NFPA 13 and City Fire Department.
D. All piping on shop drawing to be labeled with pipe elevation above finished floor and
shall be coordinated with all trades before installation.
E. The system shall be a hydraulically calculated system for the hazard categories, and
hydraulic calculations shall be submitted.
F. Shop Drawings to show piping, materials, heads, pipe elevations, pipe hangers,
fittings, appurtenances, hydraulic calculation, etc. Show all details as required by
NFPA 13.
G. Submit and obtain approval from the local approving authority before submission to
the Architect and/or Engineer.
H. Submit data books showing sprinkler heads, alarm valves, pipe, fittings, hangers,
switches, and other specialty items for review and approval.
I. Provide “as built” drawings at the end of project with disk using PDF files.
A. Sprinkler Contractor to be licensed and have a minimum of 3 years’ experience

installing fire protection systems.
B. All piping shall be new materials.
C. All products meet U.L. or F.M. and display labels.
D. Conform to NFPA #10, #13, #14, #20 and #24.

90 Percent
E. Meet or exceed State Fire Marshall's Office and Insurance Services Office.
F. Meet or exceed all local codes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SPRINKLER PIPING ABOVE GROUND
A. Type:
1. Black steel per ASTM A53 or ASTM A795.
B. Wall Thickness and Joining System:

1. Per NFPA 13 requirements.
C. Sleeves:
1. Above Grade:
a. Galvanized steel.
2. Below Grade:
a. Cast iron.
D. Hangers:
1. Per NFPA 13 requirements
E. Fittings:
1. Screwed fittings to be 125 lb. cast iron.
2. Grooved fittings and couplings to be Victaulic or equal.
3. Welded outlets may be used.
4. Any other joining system requires prior approval.
2.2 DOUBLE CHECK DETECTOR ASSEMBLY:
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Watts
2. Mifab
3. Febco
4. Wilkins
5. Ames
6. Zurn
2.3 VALVES
1. Nibco
2. Victaulic
3. Ames
4. Milwaukee
B. Backflow Preventers:
1. Ames 2000SS, or as approved by local municipalities.

90 Percent
2. B.F.P. must be certified by approved testing personnel and testing report

submitted for Owner’s records.
C. Backflow Preventer Forward Flow Test Equipment

1. To be sized for 1 x 2½ inch outlet for each 250 gpm of system demand.
D. Control Valves:
1. Grooved butterfly valves only
2. Manufacturers:
a. Victaulic
b. Milwaukee
c. NIBCO
3. The use of O.S.& Y. valves to be avoided if possible.
E. Check Valves:
1. To be grooved type for appropriate pressures.
F. Inspector’s Test Connections:

1. AGF or Victaulic one handle type complete unit that allows testing and draining.
G. Alarm Valves:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Reliable or TYCO
b. Valves to be pre-trimmed grooved type if possible complete with variable
pressure trim and retard chamber are required.
c. External Reset
H. Dry Valves:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Reliable or TYCO
b. Valves to be pre-trimmed grooved type if possible and include all necessary
pressure switches as required.
I. Fire Pump:
1. The fire sprinkler contractor that is awarded this project is required to obtain their
own water flow test at this property or as close as possible to the property and
extrapolate pressure drops to determine available pressures and flow rates.
Based on the flow test utilized for this design a fire pump may be required.
2.4 PIPING
A. Exterior Piping:
1. Exterior underground piping shall be domestic made C900 or Blue Brute piping
utilizing thrust blocks at changes in direction.
2. The 5’-0” stub out piece of underground fireline to be a stainless steel in building
riser made as one piece. This is to be installed per NFPA 24.
B. Interior Piping:

90 Percent
1. Piping to meet the ASTM requirements for welded steel piping. The sprinkler
mains to be Schedule 10 black piping joined with grooved fittings. The branchline
piping to be Schedule 40 black piping joined with threaded cast iron fittings.
Piping and fittings are to be UL listed. No mixing of black and galvanized piping.
2. Piping for dry systems if any are required to be black and/or galvanized with same
scheduling and joining process as listed above for the wet systems.
2.5 FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER HOSE FITTINGS
A. Manufacturer
1. Flex Head or equal
B. Product: Hose fittings are to be:

1. FM approved,
2. Compliance with UL 2443,
3. 100% type 304 stainless steel, pressure tested in accordance to meet all NFPA
standards.
4. Fully welded non-mechanical fittings, braided or corrugated and leak tested.
2.6 FITTINGS AND COUPLINGS
1. Victaulic
2. Anvil
3. Star
4. Tx Line
5. All fittings must be U.L. listed and FM approved for use in fire sprinkler systems
and be from the same manufacturer.
B. No mixing of black and galvanized fittings allowed.
2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. All hangers and supporting materials to be per NFPA and code requirements.
B. All hanger attachments on steel beams and bar joists are to be attached at the top of
the beam or joist. No attachments to bottom of steel structure or wind bracing.
C. All thread rod to be plated type to prevent corrosion.
D. Trapeze material to be per NFPA 13 requirements.
2.8 FIRE VALVES
A. Type:
1. Standard 2½ inch fire department valves with caps and chains mounted in valve
cabinets where required by NFPA and/or Local authority having jurisdiction (LAJ).
B. Inlet Threads:
1. Standard National Pipe Threads.

90 Percent
C. Outlet Threads:
1. Standard National Fire Hose Threads.
D. Manufacturers:
1. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
2. Potter Roemer
E. Location and placement of all fire valves to be coordinated with the Construction
Manager/General Contractor before installing fire valve/cabinets.
2.9 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Type:
1. Recessed pendant sprinkler heads conforming to NFPA 13. Escutcheons to be
positive locking. Friction type not acceptable.
2. In sloped ceilings under stairs and ceilings less than 9’-0” are penal / institutional
heads.
B. Cover plate finish to be special color to match architectural paint scheme. Sprinkler
head rating to be 155°F and cover plate rating to be 135°F.
C. Upright heads for areas with no ceilings to conform to NFPA 13.
D. Guards:
1. Chrome metal guards on all heads with exposed pipes. (e.g., gymnasiums,
pavilions, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms).
E. Temperature Ratings:
1. Minimum of 155°F - Ordinary
2. Intermediate – Mechanical, electrical and all similar rooms.
2.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide Owner with 12 heads and 12 escutcheons in a head box located in sprinkler
riser room. Provide one head wrench for each type of head.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The Sprinkler Systems Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with all trades.
All elevations shown on sprinkler shop drawings are void unless elevations are
coordinated with all trades.
3.2 ACCESS DOORS
A. Provide access doors for concealed valves, controls, and other parts requiring
accessibility for operation and maintenance.

90 Percent
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install piping in a neat and workmanlike manner. All piping routing and elevations to
be coordinated with Electrical, Mechanical, and Ceiling Contractors before installation
of any piping.
B. Run the interior fire lines concealed and support from the beams and joists. Exposed
piping except in mechanical rooms shall require specific approval of the Architect
and/or Engineer.
C. Cut all pipe accurately to measurements established at the building. Install pipe
without forcing or springing.
D. Place all inserts to accommodate the ultimate installation of pipe hangers in the forms
before concrete is provided. Set sleeves in place before concrete is poured and
masonry walls while they are under construction. Provide sleeves for all pipe passing
through foundations, walls, partitions and ceilings.
E. Caulk pipes through outside walls and floors between pipe and sleeve.
F. All drains and test connections shall be piped to outside of building.
G. Paint exposed drain fittings on outside walls to match wall color. Architect to select
color.
H. Provide unions and flanged connections as required.
I. Space all hangers according to NFPA requirements.
J. Flexible hose connections shall be one (1) piece from factory. No field modifications.
K. Install all heads in the center of ceiling tiles.
L. Coordinate with Electrical and Mechanical Contractor to produce the building sprinkler
shop drawings.
3.4 FIRE VALVE CABINETS
A. Provide Class One fire valve cabinets at all locations in building where 200’ point of
ingress is exceeded inside the building per NFPA 14 (reference 7.3.2.11).
3.5 DOUBLE CHECK DETECTOR ASSEMBLY:
A. Coordinate installation with manufacturer and plumbing contractor.
3.6 TESTING
A. Perform such tests as required by the Architect/Engineer, State Fire Marshall's Office,
Insurance Services Office, NFPA 13, and local municipal requirements.

90 Percent
B. Provide all apparatus, temporary pipeline and all other requirements necessary for
such tests. Take all due precautions to prevent damage to the building or its contents
incurred by such tests. The Contractor will be required to repay and make good any
damage so caused at his own expense.
C. Repair and make good any leaks, defects or deficiencies discovered as a result of the
tests. Repeat the tests until all requirements have been fully satisfied.
D. The following tests will be required by the Engineer, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Subject all water piping to a 2-hour hydrostatic pressure test at 200 psig. Check
all horizontal piping to determine if proper drainage is provided. Test piping for
tightness before being concealed.
2. Flow tests, water supply capability tests, and any other test required by NFPA
13, Texas State Board of Insurance, or local authorities.
3.7 INSPECTION
A. The Architect/Engineer shall have the right to inspect the work whenever advisable.
B. The Contractor shall have a representative present on each inspection and shall give
assistance as may be required.
C. Any piping installed that is in direct conflict with building configuration, design, and
intent, and conflicts with installation of mechanical plumbing and electrical
components is to be removed and not reinstalled until all parties (sprinkler,
mechanical, plumbing, electrical, etc.) are in agreement with utilization of ceiling/attic
space. Sprinkler piping to be installed as high as possible and out of the direct path
of any HVAC ductwork, plumbing, and electrical pull boxes/j-boxes.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 22 00 10
BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

A. Basic plumbing requirements necessary to provide complete installation of all Division

22 work.
1.3 WORK INCLUDED

installation of the plumbing systems as shown on the plans and as specified herein.
the project are illustrated on the combined Architectural, Structural, Mechanical,
Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, Plumbing and Electrical, and each Bidder shall
thoroughly acquaint himself with all the details of the complete set of drawings and
specifications before submitting his bid.
C. All drawings and specifications form a part of the contract documents for each
separate contract and shall be considered as bound therewith in the event partial sets
of plans and specifications are issued for bidding only. The submission of bids shall
be deemed evidence of the review and examination of all drawings, specifications,
and addenda issued for this project as no allowances will be made because of
unfamiliarity with any portion of the complete set of documents.
D. Plumbing Contractor is responsible for all final connections to specified plumbing

fixtures and all owner furnished equipment requiring plumbing (drain, water, gas,
condensate, air).
A. The conditions of the Division 01 requirements and the contract requirements which
include the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions apply to the work
of this division.
Basic Plumbing Requirements 22 00 10 - 1

90 Percent
A. General
1.6 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS FOR ALL DIVISIONS 22 WORK
A. International Building Code
B. International Gas Code
C. International Plumbing Code
D. International Mechanical Code
E. International Energy Conservation Code
F. National Electrical Code
G. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers

Standards.
H. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards:

1. OSHA Standard 2207 - Construction Industry Standards
2. OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926 - Regulation of Excavation
4. All other applicable standards
I. National Fire Protection Association:

1. NFPA No. 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
J. Fire Sprinkler System:

1. NFPA 13
2. NFPA 14
3. NFPA Life Safety Code 101 Section 8-3

90 Percent
K. National Appliance Energy Conservation Act of 1987
L. Texas State Board of Insurance Standards
M. Clean Air Act and Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990
N. State Codes:
1. Texas Department of Labor Boiler Rules and Regulations
O. Local Municipal Codes and Ordinances
P. Schedule of Abbreviations:
1. Reference Standards are listed in Division 22 using abbreviations listed below:
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
FM Factory Mutual

90 Percent
E. All plumbing equipment and fixtures shall be the same brand unless scheduled
differently on plans.
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
A. Erect barricades, protective fencing, and signs to prevent injury to personnel on site.
B. Make permanent connection to utilities or existing lines. Determine depth and

C. Relocate and repair any existing lines cut by general construction work.
D. Pay all costs in connection with metering devices.
E. Plans do not show exact location and elevations of lines, nor do they show all offsets
required.
F. Deviate from plans as required to conform to the general construction and provide
proper grading.
G. Maintain all utility services during construction to existing portions of job that remain.
H. Procure and pay for all necessary permits or licenses to carry out the work.
I. Obtain and pay for all the necessary certificates of approval which must be delivered
to the Architect before final acceptance of the work.
J. Periodically remove rubbish, clean or repair all surfaces marred by the work required
under this contract.
K. Protect work from damage by other trades.
L. Make all tests required by law; pay all costs in connection with the testing.
M. Where job conditions require changes in indicated locations and arrangement, make
such changes without extra cost to Owner.

90 Percent
N. Provide motor starters, controls, relays, all low-voltage wiring, conduit and wiring
related to plumbing and other equipment and devices to form a complete working
system. See Division 26 00 00.
1.9 DEFINITIONS
A. Approval:
1. It is understood that approval must be obtained from the Architect in writing
before proceeding with the proposed work.
2. Approval by the Architect of any changes, submitted by the Contractor will be
B. Contractor:
1. The Contractor engaged to execute the work included in a particular section only,
even though he may be technically described as a Subcontractor to the General
Contractor.
2. If the Contractor engaged to execute said work employs Sub-Contractors to
perform various portions of the work included under this Section, he shall be held
responsible for the execution of same, in full conformity with Contract Document
requirements.
3. The Contractor shall cooperate at all times and shall be responsible for the
satisfactory cooperation of his Subcontractors with the other Contractors on the
job so that all of the various phases of the work may be properly coordinated
without unnecessary delays or damage to any parts of the work of any Contractor.
C. Provide:
1. Defined as requiring the furnishing and installing of the item or facility indicated,
complete in all respects and ready for operation unless otherwise specifically
noted.
1.10 WARRANTY

90 Percent
1.11 SITE VISIT

Architect/Engineer, for subsequent transmittal to the Owner, a clean, neatly marked
set of reproducible plans showing "as installed" work and an electronic file with
changes of materials.
black in color, neat in appearance, and turned over to the Architect/Engineer for
checking and subsequent delivery to the Owner:
3. Copies of reviewed shop drawings.
recommended maintenance.
7. The first page, or pages, shall have the names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of the following:
a. General Contractor and all sub-contractors.
b. Major Equipment Suppliers.
1.13 TRAINING
location, operation, and maintenance of all plumbing equipment and systems, some
sections have further instructions.

90 Percent
representative.
complete system.
and measurements of the building and in cooperation with other Contractors, and in
all cases, shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
E. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to make any reasonable change in the

as to accuracy.
evidence thereof.
and coordinate with the Owner, Architect/Engineer, and Utility the scheduling of any
shutdowns or delays that may occur in providing service.

90 Percent
F. Contractor is responsible for coordination of all existing and new utilities at site.
Contractor is responsible for protecting and repairing any utilities damaged by
installation of pipe. All existing and new landscaping/trees to remain and to be
protected unless directed otherwise by Architect/Owner.

specified.
G. After Award of the Contract, substitutions will be considered only under one or more
of the following circumstances:
interest.

90 Percent
H. Revisions to the plumbing system shall be under the supervision of the Engineer at a
standard hourly rate charged by the Engineer and shall be paid by the Contractor
originating the changes.
before calling upon the Architect/Engineer to make a final inspection.
listing each paper included, and shall deliver the same to the Architect/Engineer at or
before the time of said final inspection. The Contractor is cautioned to check over
each bond, receipt, etc., before preparing for submission to verify that the terms check
with the requirements of the specifications.

expense in a neat and workmanlike manner, and as approved by the
Architect/Engineer.

90 Percent
F. All openings in firewalls and floors, such as thimbles, shall be completely sealed after
installation for a completely airtight and watertight installation. Sealing material shall
be non-combustible and UL approved. The installed sealing assembly shall not cause
the fire rating of the penetrated structure to be decreased.
1.20 IDENTIFICATION

installation of a product, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain the

1.22 RELATED WORK
A. The various specification sections for this division may or may not include related
work listings.
B. All related work shall be coordinated and provided by the Contractor regardless
whether specifically identified or not.
1.23 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND EQUIPMENT FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS
A. All wiring, conduit, boxes, equipment (controls, thermostats, relays, contactors, motor
starters, heaters, switches) and any other control devices or equipment required to
form a complete and properly operating system, shall be the responsibility of this
Contractor.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall only provide line voltage (including hook-up) to all
plumbing equipment.

90 Percent
C. All controls and devices shall be low voltage unless otherwise noted or shown on the
plans. Where line voltage controls or devices are noted, the Contractor shall provide
complete wiring diagrams (approved by the Engineer) to the Electrical Contractor prior
to final hook-up.
D. The Plumbing and Electrical plans are based on the equipment and devices
scheduled as shown on the plans or as called for in the specifications. Should any
plumbing equipment or device be changed or approved from those which are shown
or noted, all electrical and/or plumbing changes shall be made at the expense of the
trade or Contractor initiating the change with no expense to the Owner, Architect,
Engineer or their representatives.
E. All wiring provided by this Contractor shall be installed in a workmanlike manner using
tie wraps, labels, anchors and etc. Loose wiring is not acceptable.
F. All conduit and boxes required in all walls for control purposes (thermostats, switches,
etc.) shall be provided by electrical contractor.
G. All conduit required in attic, clear spaces, or on roof shall be by electrical Contractor.
A. When any piece of plumbing equipment is operable and the Contractor needs to
operate the equipment, he may do so providing that he properly supervises the
operation.
1.25 SAFETY GUARDS
guarded.
A. All materials and adhesives used for plumbing and insulation shall conform to NFPA
and UL life and flame spread properties of materials.
B. The composite classifications shall not exceed 25 for a flame spread rating and 50 for
a smoke developed rating as listed for the basic material, the finishes, adhesives,
etc., specified for each system and shall be such when completely assembled.

90 Percent
1.27 ASBESTOS
1.28 LEAD MATERIALS
1.29 REFRIGERANTS
A. Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) shall not be allowed in any equipment on this project.
B. Comply with ASHRAE Standards 15 and 34.
1.30 REFRIGERANT RECOVERY AND RECYCLE
A. Refrigerants shall not be released to the environment.
B. Contractor shall provide recovery and recycle equipment that has been certified by
the Electrical Testing Laboratories or Underwriters Laboratories.
C. Contractor shall also provide properly trained and certified (in accordance with EPA)
personnel for refrigerant work during installation, demolition, start-up, servicing, etc.
A. Proper access to all installed equipment shall be provided. This Contractor shall label
all points of access immediately upon installation with a marker pen.
B. A minimum of 3 feet shall be maintained in front of all access points.
C. If another trade violates this space, this Contractor shall immediately notify the
General Contractor to correct this condition.
D. When equipment is installed above lay-in ceiling this Contractor shall coordinate with
the Ceiling Contractor to provide access without removing part of T-bar ceiling.
E. No speakers, lights, fire alarm equipment, etc. shall be installed in lay-in ceiling tiles
where access is to be gained.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Not Applicable
PART 3 EXECUTION

90 Percent
3.1 TESTING
A. After all plumbing systems have been completed and put into operation, subject each
system to an operating test under design conditions to ensure proper sequence and
operation throughout the range of operation regardless of the season the Contractor
shall test all plumbing equipment.
B. Perform a smoke test on all sanitary sewers and camera all lines and provide owner
with a video tape.
C. Perform gas piping pressure test to comply with HB 1611 and all required City or
governing body tests.
D. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of all systems.
E. Special tests on individual systems are specified under individual sections.
3.2 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Upon substantial completion, Contractor shall submit as built drawings showing all
deviations between contract drawings and actual installed conditions.
B. Show location of all valves in gas and water piping. Submit to Owner.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 22 00 90
PLUMBING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY


1. Plumbing submittal procedures
1.3 RELATED SECTION
A. Division 01 - Submittal Procedures
1.4 DEFINITIONS


deficiencies.

for conformance with contract requirements (e.g. start-up reports).
Plumbing Submittal Procedures 22 00 90 - 1

90 Percent
1.5 SUBMITTALS



E. Electronic Submittals: E-mail or other electronic forms of submittals from the

contractor are required. The procedures described in this section shall be as follows:
1. The contractor shall supply one electronic copy of the submittal.
2. The electronic files will either be e-mailed to the architect or posted to a project
management and information exchange web site, depending on the architect’s
requirements. The architect and contractor can distribute copies of the files as
desired.
3. The engineer will retain an electronic copy of the submittal and all responses.

communication will be treated as normal coordination correspondence and will not be
tracked or documented as a formal submittal. The engineer may or may not respond
to such correspondence. If the engineer agrees, in writing, to the use of a particular
item, then that same material shall be included in the initial submittal package along
with a copy of the correspondence.


90 Percent
H. Product Data:
acceptable.
I. Shop Drawings:
2. Electronic shop drawing submittals are required.
3. Shop drawings must include domestic water entry rooms with backflow
prevention and all water heater rooms.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE / CONTROL SUBMITTALS
A. Quality assurance and quality control submittals may be in the form of documentation,
or may be in the form of completed physical work that is offered for review by the
engineer, architect, or owner.
B. If documentation is the subject, then submit in a manner similar to the initial submittal
package.
C. If completed physical work is the subject, then the work shall not be concealed, nor
shall subsequent work be performed, until the engineer’s representative has reviewed
the work. If the work is concealed, or if subsequent work is performed, before the
engineer’s representative has reviewed the work, then the contractor shall be liable
for removal and replacement at no additional expense to the owner.
D. Sequencing:
1. Within 30 calendar days after the contractor has received the owner’s notice to
proceed, provide the complete submittal package.
2. After the engineer has reviewed the submittal package, make necessary
revisions to the submittals as directed by the engineer and resubmit.
3. After the submittal has been reviewed by the engineer, proceed to purchase
materials and perform the work.
E. Scheduling:
1. Failure to submit items that meet the requirements of the contract documents in
ample time for review shall not entitle the contractor to an extension of contract
time, and no claim for extension by reason of such default shall be allowed. The
contractor may be held liable for delays so occasioned.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Not applicable

90 Percent
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals of product data, shop drawings, samples, quality assurance

B. Grouping of Submittals:
2. In the case that multiple submissions are approved, it is the responsibility of the
contractor to maintain and update a submittal check list. The contractor shall
ensure that all applicable submittal sections are submitted to the Engineer. If a
submittal section is not submitted, it will be considered rejected until reviewed by
the Engineer.
3. If submittal sections are submitted as individual submittal files, the submittal
sections will be grouped and returned as one file with one set of submittal
responses.
C. Electronic Submittal Organization:

1. Electronic submittals are to be submitted as a single PDF file. Within the PDF
file, each section shall be bookmarked.
2. Provide an electronic submittal cover sheet that lists at least the following:
a. Project name
b. Date
f. Name, address and telephone number of HVAC contractor
g. Name, address and telephone number of HVAC supplier
3. Provide an electronic index sheet listing all items submitted.
4. The contractor shall call to the attention of the engineer, clouded in the submittal
and noted after the index sheet, any instance in which the submittals are known
a. Provide an electronic section cover sheet that lists the same information as
the submittal cover sheet, plus the specification number and title and the
b. Refer to the individual Division 22 specification sections for any required
organization of the submittal material within each submittal section.
c. Bookmarked sections shall be arranged by specification section number in
numerical order.
d. Submit in accordance with these procedures and procedures described in
Division 01 Submittal Procedures.

90 Percent
e. Submittals not organized as described here may be rejected, without being

D. Response to engineer’s review:

1. Review comments:
a. Review comments of the engineer will either be shown on the returned sets
to the contractor, or shown on a document attached to the sets. If the
comments are on an attached document, then the engineer will place a note
engineer’s signature will appear only on the attached document. If the
attached, signed document becomes physically separated from the
submittal, then the submittal will no longer be considered as being a
reviewed submittal.
2. Complete rejection:
a. If the submittal is not complete or does not meet the requirements of this
specification section, then the engineer may reject the entire submittal and
return the submittal without further review or comment. In such cases, the
entire submittal shall be completely revised and resubmitted. The resubmittal
shall be given a new submittal number and shall be documented and
3. Held for completion:
a. If the submittal is not complete, but is only missing some minor item, the
engineer may, at the engineer’s sole discretion, hold the submittal rather
than rejecting and returning the submittal. In such cases, the engineer will
notify the architect and contractor that the submittal is being held for
completion. The contractor will be given a predetermined amount of time to
provide the missing item. Upon receipt of the missing item, the engineer will
insert the missing item into the submittal package and proceed with the
review process.
4. Partial rejection:
a. The engineer may reject only certain portions of the submittal. In such cases,
only those rejected portions or items need to be revised and resubmitted.
5. Provide as corrected:
a. The engineer may note a required change to a submitted item, but may not
consider the change serious enough to require a resubmittal. In such cases,
the engineer will note that the item is to be provided as noted or corrected.
In such cases, the contractor may proceed to provide the item. However, if
subsequent observations reveal that the noted change was not made, then
the contractor shall be liable for removal and replacement of the item at no
additional cost to the owner.
6. Reviewed without comment:
a. The contractor may proceed to provide all materials and equipment.
E. Close-out Submittals:

90 Percent
Section Submit on the following 1 2 3 4 Arch Sub #

22 05 24 Valves
Full port
Bronzed body
Ball valves
22 05 30 Pipe and Pipe Fittings
Hangers
Dissimilar Metals Union
Unions
Escutcheons
Sleeves
Hanger rods
Concrete anchors
Beam Clamps
Fire Penetration Products
22 05 54 Plumbing Identification
Valve tags and chains
Valve chart
Piping markers
18 gauge copper wire for
underground gas piping
Equipment labels
Nametag fasteners
Underground warning tape
22 07 20 Piping Insulation
Closed cell only in concrete
masonry walls
2” wrap for concealed roof drain
piping
2” wrap at roof drain deck pan
2” rigid on exposed roof drains
or
2” wrap with PVC jacketing on
exposed roof drains
Domestic hot and cold water
pipe insulation
(1” for hot water and 1” for lines
in exterior walls)
Flange, fitting, valve Insulation
Insulation metal shield
Sealant, adhesive, finish
22 11 17 Domestic Water Piping and
Appurtenances
Type K- underslab
Type L- underground/above
slab
Pipe Fittings

90 Percent

a. Up to 1-1/2”- 95-1/2% tin,
4% copper, 1/2% silver
b. 2” and up- SILFOS 15%
silver, 80% copper, 5%
phosphorus
c. Pressfit fittings
Valves-same as valve general
Water hammer arrestors
Freeze protection heat trace
22 13 17 Soil, Waste & Sanitary Drain
Piping & Appurtenances
Schedule 40 PVC pipe and
fittings
Schedule 40 cast iron pipe and
fittings
No hub and bell spigot
CPVC/cast iron on first 20’ of
dishwasher discharge
Cleanouts
Closet Flanges
Trap primers
Pressure differential
(automatic)
Electronic
Automatic flush valve
Sand backfill embedment
Copper DWV on exposed
kitchen indirect waste
22 13 18 Condensate Piping
Copper type M or DWV
Insulation thickness and
thermal conductivity (K)
Insulation-See piping insulation
Fittings, unions
22 14 01 Roof Drainage &
Appurtenances
Primary roof drains
Emergency roof drains
Schedule 40 PVC pipe and
fittings
Schedule 40 cast iron pipe and
fittings
Schedule 40 perforated PVC
pipe
Black Swan adhesive

90 Percent

Downspout Nozzles
Insulation-See piping insulation
Plumbing Void Systems
22 16 01 Natural Gas Piping and
Appurtenances
Schedule 40 black steel pipe
and fittings
Gas regulators
Paint for roof and up wall
installations
Cut off valves, unions,
inspection ports
Polyethylene gas piping below
grade
Roof supports
22 33 34 Access Doors
Stainless steel for kitchens and
locker/shower areas
Primer steel access doors for
general use
Verify sizes per specification
22 40 01 Plumbing Fixtures and
Carriers
Water heaters
Gas-BTUH, tank size, electrical
Electric-KW size, electrical,
tank size
Expansion tanks
Circulating pumps
Water closets-wall or floor
mount
Urinals- wall mount
Lavatories- wall mount or
counter mount
Floor drains and sinks
Mop sinks with stainless steel
backsplash
Sinks-standard, ADA, TAS
Faucets-standard, ADA, TAS,
sensor type
Electric water coolers-standard,
ADA, TAS
Plaster traps
Oil and sand separators with
alarm panel
Oil separators with alarm panel
Grease interceptors

90 Percent

Hose bibbs-exterior, interior,
roof
Acid dilution basin
Carriers
Sump pumps-gpm, total head,
electrical
Commercial washer, dryer
Whirlpools
Showers-ADA, one, two, three,
column
Thermostatic mixing valves
Wash fountains-120 volt
Shop drawings for all water
heater rooms and domestic
water entry with RPZ backflow
preventer, and booster pumps
1 - Reviewed
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 22 05 24
VALVES - GENERAL
PART 1 GENERAL

A. General requirements for valves
A. Section 22 00 10 - Basic Plumbing Requirements
B. Section 22 05 30 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General
C. Section 22 11 17 - Domestic Water Piping and Appurtenances
D. Section 22 16 01 - Natural Gas Piping and Appurtenances
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM 763 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for Valve
Applications
B. ASTM 61 - Standard Specification For Steam or Valve Bronze Castings
C. ASTM C27450 - Standard Specification for Brass Rod, Bar & Shapes
D. ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges &
Pipe Fittings
E. ASTM A105 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping
Applications
F. ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials
G. ASTM A216 - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion
Welding, for High Temperature Service
H. ASTM B813-00e1 - Standard Specification for Liquid & Paste Fluxes for Soldering of
Copper & Copper Alloy Tube
Valves - General 22 05 24 - 1
90 Percent
I. ASTM B828-02 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of

Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings
J. ASTM B88-02 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
K. ASTM B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings
L. CSA - Canadian Standards Association
M. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute
A. Manufacturer to stamp valve to show that shell and seat tests have been successfully
completed.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
A. Bronze - 150 psi maximum: ASTM B62
B. Bronze - 300 psi maximum: ASTM B61
C. Cast Iron: ASTM A126, Class B
D. Cast Carbon Steel: ASTM A216, Grade WCB
E. Forged Carbon Steel: ASTM A105, Grade II
F. Brass - Lead free, dezincification resistant arsenical brass, 125 psi maximum, ASTM
763 or B283.
2.2 CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide valves designed for repacking under pressure when fully opened.
B. Equip with packing suitable for intended service.
C. Furnish with gland followers.
D. Provide valves rated greater than the design temperature and pressure for the
intended system.
90 Percent
E. All domestic cold water and hot water valves 2" and less shall be full port ball valves
with stainless steel ball.
F. All domestic cold water and hot water valves 2-1/2” and larger to gate valves.
2.3 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Apollo
B. Crane
C. Grinnell
D. Jenkins
E. Jomar, T-100NGDZ
F. Kennedy
G. Milwaukee Valve Company
H. Nibco
I. Stockham
J. Walworth
K. Watts
L. Hammond
M. Kitz
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves and stops in accessible locations.
B. Provide where shown or as required to make system complete and readily

maintained.
C. Provide access doors for all inaccessible valves.
D. Provide as built drawings locating all valves in gas and water lines.
END OF SECTION
90 Percent
SECTION 22 05 30
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS - GENERAL
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Pipe
B. Pipe fittings
B. Section 22 05 24 - Valves - General
C. Section 22 07 20 - Piping Insulation
D. Section 22 11 17 - Domestic Water Piping and Appurtenances
E. Section 22 13 17 - Soil, Waste, and Sanitary Drain Piping, Vent Piping, and
Appurtenances
F. Section 22 13 18 - Condensate Piping
G. Section 22 16 01 - Natural Gas Piping and Appurtenances
H. Section 22 40 01 - Plumbing Fixtures and Fixture Carriers
1.4 REFERENCES

ASTM C564-97 Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe
and Fittings
ASTM D2665-02a Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain,
Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
ASTM E84-01 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
UL Underwriters Laboratory
NFPA 90 A & B Installation of Air Conditioning & Ventilation Systems and
Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems
CISPI-310 Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General 22 05 30 - 1

90 Percent
A. Valves:
1. All valves to be from a single manufacturer.
B. The welder, employed on this project, shall have passed qualification tests as
prescribed by the National Pipe Welding Bureau, or other reputable testing laboratory
using qualification procedures as recommended by the ASME Boiler Construction
Code or the American Welding Society Standards.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit product data indicating dimensions, general assembly and use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. The type of pipe and fittings necessary for each system is specified in the section on
that system.
2.2 DISSIMILAR MATERIALS
A. Use approved adapters such as Di-Electric Unions manufactured for making piping
connections between dissimilar materials such as copper and brass or copper and
steel.
2.3 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Usage:
1. All exposed lines passing through floors, walls and ceilings.
B. Material:
1. Chrome plated steel
C. Flange size:
1. As necessary to cover penetrated openings.
D. Plate size:
1. As necessary to fit pipe or insulation and securely lock in place.
E. Manufacturer/Model:
1. Engineered Brass Company, Type CF

90 Percent
2.4 SLEEVES
A. Application:
1. Provide sleeves for all pipes and conduits which pass through a concrete slab,
masonry wall/concrete wall, sheetrock wall (fire rated or not fire rated), roof or
other portion of the building structure.
B. Above Grade and/or dry locations:

1. Material:
a. 20 or 22 gauge galvanized steel.
2. Size:
a. As necessary to allow free passage of the insulated pipe.
C. Below Grade and/or moist locations:

1. Material:
a. ASTM D-2665 Schedule 40 PVC. When PVC not allowed by code, use
schedule 40 galvanized steel.
b. Return Air Plenum:
(1) Schedule 40 galvanized steel.
D. Passing through fire-rated enclosures:

1. Material:
a. Galvanized or black steel pipe.
b. Non-combustible.
c. PVC will not be allowed.
E. Penetration Seal: (All Sleeved Penetration Locations- fire rated or non-fire rated)
1. Seal penetration with 3M Fire Barrier Sealant CP 25WB+ or one-component
ceramic fiber-based putty fill, void or cavity material, UL rated material classified
for use in through-penetration firestop systems nos. 124, 125, 150 and 151.
2. Flame Spread/Smoke Contribution:
a. 0/0 in accordance with ASTM E-84.
2.5 VALVES, UNIONS, STOP COCKS, ETC.
A. Applications:
1. Ball Valves:
a. Provide accessible valves at each group of plumbing fixtures and at each
piece of equipment on all piping systems for isolation of fixtures and
equipment. All valves shall be full port valves.
B. All Other Valves, Unions, Stop Cocks, Etc.:

1. Provide at each group of plumbing fixtures and at each individual fixture, at each
piece of equipment, at all inlet and outlet connections for hot and cold water and
gas.
2. Provide Di-Electric Unions at connection of dissimilar pipe materials to prevent
electrolysis.
C. Type:
1. Suitable for 125 lbs. working pressure.

90 Percent
2.6 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Hangers:
1. 2" and Smaller Piping:
a. May be split cast ring type with fastening device in walls and chases.
2. Copper Piping:
a. Copper plated ferrous hangers.
3. All Other Above Ceiling Locations:
a. Adjustable clevis type. Hangers to accommodate circumference of pipe and
saddles.
B. Hanger Rods:
1. Type:
a. Minimum 3/8 inch diameter with machine threads.
C. Minimum Steel Hanger Rod Diameter for Individually Suspended Horizontal Pipes:
1. 2" and smaller diameter pipe:
a. 3/8"
2. 2-1/2" to 3 - 1/2" diameter pipe:
a. 1/2"
3. 4" to 5" diameter pipe:
a. 5/8"
4. 6" diameter pipe or larger:
a. 3/4"
D. Hanger Manufacturers:
1. Anvil
2. Elcen
3. ERICO
4. F&S Manufacturing
5. Fee & Mason
6. PHD
E. In wall pipe supports:

1. Metal strut, manufactured pipe clamps
F. In wall pipe support manufacturer:

1. Holdrite or Equivalent
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Install piping in a neat and workmanlike manner.
B. Install each of the piping systems to provide for expansion and contraction.
C. Solder all joints when the system is not under strain.
D. Expansion Offsets:

90 Percent
1. Copper Piping:
a. Use developed length Copper Tube Handbook 411-R as published by
Copper Development Association, Inc.
2. Steel Piping:
a. Use developed per Carrier System Design Manual, Part 3 Piping Design.
E. Furnish necessary spring pieces and offsets as required.
F. Conceal all of the piping systems in chases, above ceilings, in walls and in finished
areas.
G. Run Exposed piping only in machinery spaces and unfinished areas as specified or
as shown on the plans.
H. Install all necessary fittings and offsets to hold the piping close to walls and ceilings.
I. Where these lines run exposed, obtain a clearance from the Engineer in writing before
making the installation.
J. Install piping in the most advantageous manner possible with respect to headroom,
valve access, openings, equipment clearances, and clearances for other work.
K. Give particular attention to piping in the vicinity of equipment.
L. Preserve the maximum access to various equipment parts for maintenance.
M. Do not cut or weaken any structural member.
N. Cut all pipes accurately to measurement determined at the site.
O. After cutting pipe, ream it to remove burrs.
P. Install piping neatly, free from unnecessary traps and pockets. Work into place without
springing or forcing.
Q. Use fittings to make all changes in direction.
R. Field bending and mitering are prohibited.
S. Make all connections to equipment using flanged joints or unions.
T. Make reducing connections with reducing fittings only.
U. Do not allow piping to pass through or over designated electrical rooms.
V. Compression fittings are not allowed.
3.2 VALVES, UNIONS, STOP COCKS, ETC.
A. Locate all valves so that their bonnets may be easily removed.

90 Percent
B. Move all flange valves shown in horizontal positions so that valve stem is inclined one
bolt hole above the horizontal position.
C. Make-up all screwed pattern valves placed in horizontal lines so that their valve stem
is inclined at an angle of 30 degrees above the horizontal position.
D. All valve stems must be true and straight at the time the system is tested for final
acceptance.
E. Pack all valves and leave perfectly tight at the completion of the work.
F. Provide access doors as required for these valves.
G. Furnish locations of all access doors to the Architect/Engineer.
3.3 PIPING JOINTS
A. Screwed Pipe Joints:

1. Provide full cut pipe threads.
2. Assemble joints with an approved compound applied to only the male threads.
3. Leave a maximum of three pipe threads exposed where the joint is assembled.
B. Welded Pipe Joints:

1. Fuse weld by using a metallic arc welding process.
2. Conform to the current recommendations of the American Welding Society for all
welding operations.
C. Mechanical Coupling Joints:

1. Assemble in strict accordance with the recommendations of the coupling joint
manufacturer.
2. Use bolts, fasteners, gaskets and lubricants that are a product of or adhere rigidly
to the specification requirements of the joint manufacturer.
D. Solder Joints:
1. Assemble with square cut pipe using a pipe cutter.
2. Hacksaw-cut pipe ends will not be acceptable.
3. Ream open pipe end to full size.
4. Burnish both the pipe and fitting absolutely clean.
5. Apply brazing flux to both the pipe and the fittings.
6. The use of corrosive acid flux will not be permitted.
7. Charge the pipe and fittings with nitrogen gas during the brazing.
E. Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe Joints:

1. Make with an approved neoprene gasket and stainless steel retaining sleeve.
2. Mark no-hub gaskets with the manufacturer's name, ASTM C 564, the word
"No-Hub", nominal diameter and the CI symbol of the Cast Iron Soil Institute
indicating it meets the standard.
3. Mark stainless steel couplings for no-hub "All Stainless", name of manufacturer,
words "No-Hub", nominal diameter and the CI symbol indicating it conforms to
CISPI Standard 310.

90 Percent
4. Install the hubless cast iron soil pipe systems in accordance with CISPI Pamphlet
100 - Installation Suggestions for CI No-Hub Pipe and Fittings.
5. Provide identifying markers for stainless steel couplings and neoprene gaskets
to indicate compliance with CISPI-310.
F. Positive-Seal One Piece Elastomeric Compression-Type Gasket:

1. May be used for joining hub and spigot cast iron soil pipe as an alternate for lead
or oakum joints or for drainage and waste system above and below ground.
2. Form the joint by inserting an approved gasket in the hub.
3. Lubricate the inside of the gasket and push the spigot end of the pipe into the
gasket until seated, thus effecting a positive seal.
4. Use neoprene compression gaskets for cast iron soil pipe, marked as such, with
ASTM C564 and the CI symbol of Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute to indicate the
gasket meets the standard.
G. PVC Pipe Joints:

1. May be solvent cemented using the proper cement recommended for the
particular materials.
2. Cut all pipe square and clean both pipe and fittings of all soil, dirt, oil and grease.
3. Make solvent joints in accordance with the applicable ASTM Standards.
4. Allow joints to dry before testing.
5. If any leak occurs during the water test, then replace the defective joint.
6. Comply with requirements of the NSF Standard 14 for all solvent cements and
primers and label to identify the laboratory certifying compliance for the particular
cement and primer being used.
7. Plastic pipe and fittings for sewer and water pressure lines may also be joined by
use of elastomeric (O-ring gasket) joints when the respective standards for the
materials so specify. No-Hub fittings are not allowed on PVC sanitary sewer and
storm drain piping under slab or underground.
8. Do not use pipes with cracked bells.
9. PVC pipe and pipe fittings are not allowed in any return air plenum serving
mechanical systems. Use cast iron piping above slab for these
installations.
3.4 SLEEVES
A. Above Grade and/or Dry Locations:

1. Walls:
a. Mount flush on both sides.
2. Floors:
a. Mount 2 inches above finished floor in pipe chases.
B. Below Grade and/or Moist Locations:
1. Install suitable flange in the center of wall or floor to form a waterproof passage.
2. Fill the void space around the pipe with jute twine or Oakum caulk or an asphalt
based compound to insure a waterproof penetration.
C. Passing Through Fire-Rated Enclosure:

1. Fill the void space around the pipe in accordance with NFPA requirements.
2. Do not allow the sleeve installation to lower the fire rating of the assembly.

90 Percent
3.5 SECURING AND SUPPORTING OF PIPE
A. Support all pipe from the building structure by means of approved hangers and
supports while maintaining required grade and pitch, preventing vibration and
providing for expansion and contraction.
B. Secure all hangers to approved inserts wherever possible.
C. Set hanger inserts in place when the concrete is poured.
D. If Joists Are Used for Attachment:

1. 2" diameter or smaller:
a. May be attached to the bottom of joists.
2. Greater than 2" diameter:
a. Must be attached to the top cord of the joists.
3. Do not support any piping and trapeze hangers from joist bridging on roof and
floor deck.
E. If Structural Steel Framing Is Used for Attachment:

1. Use approved beam clamps.
2. Where required, install channels to span between framing members.
3. Do not attach hangers to the roof deck or cross bracing.
F. Hanger Spacing:
1. Schedule 40 PVC Piping:
a. All Sizes:
(1) 4'-0"
2. Ferrous (Schedule 40) Piping:
a. 1/2" diameter pipe:
(1) 6'-0" or less
b. 3/4" diameter pipe:
(1) 8'-0" or less
c. 1-1/4" diameter pipe:
(1) 10’-0” or less
d. Vertical:
(1) Every Floor Level Minimum
3. Copper (Water Tube) Piping:
a. Smaller Than 1¼”:
(1) 6'-0"
b. 1 ½” and Larger:
(1) 10'-0"
c. Vertical:
(1) 10'-0"
4. Cast Iron Piping:
a. All pipe sizes:
(1) One hanger per length of pipe and not exceeding 5'-0" O.C.
b. Vertical:
G. Vertical Lines:

90 Percent
1. Adequately support at their bases, either by a suitable hanger placed in the

horizontal line near the riser, or by a base fitting set on a pedestal or foundation.
2. Support from each floor slab by means of an approved clamp-type support which
bears on the slab or beam.
H. Change of Direction:
1. Install supports within two feet of change of direction.
2. Brackets of approved type may be used along the walls.
3. Install hangers within 2 feet of each change in vertical or horizontal direction, pipe
tees and on each side of valves, strainers, etc.
4. Multiple horizontal pipes, smaller than 12" diameter pipe, may be supported on
trapeze hangers. Space trapeze hangers in accordance with the schedule for
pipe spacing based upon the smallest size pipe.
5. Properly size the trapeze members for the piping load they are to support. The
number of pipes on the trapeze must be approved by the Engineer to prevent
overloading of the building structure.
6. Where pipes are insulated, oversize the hanger accordingly to accommodate the
outside diameter of the insulation. Provide half-round 16 gauge galvanized steel
shields, not less than 12" long and rolled to fit the insulation diameter, between
the insulation and the hanger.
7. When pipe is guided at top and bottom, cover the entire pipe circumference with
metal shields.
8. Adhere metal shield to the insulation so that the metal will not slide with respect
to the insulation.
9. Wood struts shall not be used to support piping in walls.
3.6 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
A. Excavation:
1. Call utility companies before digging.
2. Call Notifications Center before digging.
3. Excavate trenches for underground piping to the required depths with bell holes
being provided as necessary to insure uniform bearing. Dig all bell holes after the
trench has been graded.
4. Refill excavation below the required grade of piping with fine granular material to
the pipe grade.
5. Where rock is encountered, excavate to a grade 3 inches below the lowermost
part of the pipe and refill with fine granular materials to the pipe grade.
6. Sheath, brace, pump or bail the trenches as required to protect workmen and
structures and to permit execution of the work. A trench greater than 5 feet deep
will not be permitted unless the sides are cutback at 45 degrees to 5 feet or less.
If this cannot be accomplished, hire a Registered Engineer to design shoring.
7. Install all underground piping below the frost line and in no case less than 18
inches below the surface.
B. Pea Gravel Embedment

1. Refer to Specification Sections 22 13 17 and 22 14 01 for Pea Gravel Embedment
for schedule 40 PVC piping below slab.

90 Percent
3.7 EQUIPMENT PLUMBING CONNECTIONS
A. Make all final connections to all pieces of equipment which require natural gas, water,
drain, waste or vent connections.
B. Provide all required shut-off cocks, valves, drain valves and traps.
3.8 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Perform all tests as specified in Division 22 or as required by the Engineer or by the

Local, Federal, and State Bureaus having jurisdiction and under their supervision
during the progress and upon completion of work.
B. Include costs of all required tests in your bid.
C. Provide all apparatus, temporary pipeline and all other requirements necessary for
such tests.
D. Take all due precautions to prevent damage to the building or its contents incurred by
such tests as the Contractor will be required to repay and make good any damage so
caused at his own expense.
E. Immediately repair any leaks, defects or deficiencies discovered as a result of the

tests. Repeat until test requirements are in full compliance.
3.9 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Mark all piping to show the service and direction of flow.
B. Place markers at each branch of tees, at equipment connections, and change of

direction and at 20 foot intervals. Minimum of one (1) marker in each room.
C. Install valve tags on all valves.
D. Frame under glass cover and hang a type written list including the valve number, type
of service, and location of each valve in the boiler mechanical room.
E. Mark all valve numbers corresponding to this system of identification on the as-built
drawings which will be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the work.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 22 05 54
PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Identification required for plumbing systems.
B. Code required identification not shown on plans nor specified herein shall be
provided.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit wording of nameplates with submittals.
C. Submit list of all products incorporated in this section.
1.5 REFERENCES
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1
B. USAS Code B31.8
C. NTSB-PSS-73-1
D. AGA
E. API
Plumbing Identification 22 05 54 - 1
90 Percent
1.6 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide signs for the following equipment identification:

1. Water Heaters
2. Piping
3. Pumps
4. Starters
5. Valves
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Seton
B. Brady
C. Marking Services, Inc.
2.2 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Type:
1. Engraving-Stock, melamine plastic laminate, 3 layer.
a. Thickness:
(1) Less than 25 square inches: 1/16 inch
(2) 25 square inches or more: 1/8 inch
B. Color:
1. Black
C. Conform to FS L-P-287
2.3 LETTERING
A. Style:
1. Engraved standard print, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Size:
1. 3/16 inch to 1/4 inch
C. Color:
1. White letters, black background
90 Percent
2.4 SIGN INFORMATION
A. Plumbing Equipment:
1. Unit mark from Drawings/Owner
2. Voltage - Phase
3. Manufacturer and Model Number
2.5 NAMEPLATE FASTENERS
A. Securely attach nameplates to equipment with non-corroding stainless steel screws.
B. Non-corroding pop rivets are acceptable.
C. Stick-ons or adhesives will not be allowed.
2.6 PIPING AND CONTROL DIAGRAM SIGNS
A. Material:
1. 1/4 inch acrylic cover and backing screwed together with brass screw/bolts.
2. Size:
a. Minimum:
(1) 12" x 17"
b. Maximum:
(1) 24" x 36"
B. Provide a diagram in each mechanical room similar to the diagrams shown on the
plans, and/or as required for the area served.
C. Provide pipe markers with the following features.

1. Letters from 1/2" to 3-1/2":
a. Size letters to afford readability from the appropriate viewing position.
2. Repeated and reversed words for viewing from 360º around pipe.
3. Self-clinging, coiled markers that snap into place around pipe and do not require
any other securement.
4. Integral directional arrows.
D. Letters on Field:
1. Identify the specific material conveyed, e.g., "Domestic Cold Water", "Domestic
Hot Water", etc.
E. Model:
1. Less than 3/4":
a. Tags, same as Paragraph. Piping System Devices, color codes for hazard.
2. 3/4" up to 6":
a. Seton Setmark SNA snap-on.
3. Over 6":
a. Seton Setmark STR strap-on, with stainless steel spring straps.
4. Use Seton Ultra-Mark for outdoor use.
F. Piping System Devices (Valves, Thermometers, Pressure Gages, etc., and Pipe Less
90 Percent
Than 3/4"):
1. Identify with the following:
a. Tags:
(1) Not less than 1-1/2 inch brass or aluminum tags, round, square, or
octagonal.
b. Stamp tags with minimum 1/2" high descriptive characters, 1/2" high
numbers with black enamel-filled indentations.
G. Attachment:
1. Stainless steel or solid brass jack chain; Seton JA16, or stainless steel or brass
"S" hooks
H. Underground Warning Tapes:

1. Provide materials that meet the codes or have the approvals listed below:
a. Office of Pipeline Safety Regulation, USAS Code B31.8.
b. GSA Public Building Service Guide Specification.
c. National Transportation Safety Board Report NTSB-PSS-73-1.
d. AGA Report 72-D-56.
e. API Report API RP 1109.
2. Material:
a. Plastic, continuous tape, color-coded, marked for hazard.
b. For Non-metallic Piping System:
(1) Aluminum foil core encased in plastic.
c. Metallic Piping:
(1) Plastic tape.
3. Color:
a. Colored (not printed color) plastic, coded for material conveyed by piping.
4. Width:
a. As scheduled for piping system burial depth.
5. Legend:
a. "Caution [System Name] Line Buried Below".
6. Tape Colors:
Utility Color
Natural Gas, Oil, Dangerous Materials Hi Visibility Safety Yellow
Communications Safety Alert Orange
Water Systems Safety Precaution Blue
Sewer Systems Safety Green
7. Model:
a. Metallic Piping System: Seton Polyethylene Tape.
b. Non-Metallic Piping System: Seton Metallic Detection Tape.
I. Underground Gas Piping:

1. Attach No. 18 gauge copper tracer wire to the piping and terminate above grade
at each end.
90 Percent
J. Pipeline Markers for Pipe Beneath Pavement and Slabs:

1. Minimum 2" round, square, or octagonal, same as specified in Subparagraph:
Piping System Devices.
2. Attachment:
a. 1-1/2" screw, bolted to tag as anchor.
b. Anchor Setting Compound: Epoxy or epoxy grout, compatible with the
pavement.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Contractor shall verify room numbers with Owner/Engineer before nameplates are
fabricated.
B. The following shall be permanently and clearly identified:

1. Each valve and pump.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install signs on non-removable panels. Attach to equipment with pop rivets or

stainless steel screws.
B. Mount in an easily visible location.
C. All labeling identification shall conform to final room numbers. Coordinate with
General Contractor, Architect and Owner to secure construction room numbers.
D. Provide all additional signage required by local authority at no cost to the Owner.
E. Complete installation in accordance with ANSI A13.1 and manufacturer's installation

instructions and with the Drawings. Fasten each unit securely in place with stainless
steel screws.
F. Equipment Labeling:
1. Install on scheduled items of equipment, including the following:
a. Water heaters
b. Pumps
c. Control panels and major control components
d. Other items of equipment
e. Include Mark Number and descriptive name from Drawing and Specification
schedules
f. Attach with corrosion resistant, stainless steel screws or pop rivets
g. Install 1/2" diameter adhesive marker (color to be approved by Architect),
and apply to T-bar below any mechanical equipment, valves, and fire
dampers above lay-in ceilings.
2. Spacing:
a. Where pipe passes through walls, floors, and other barriers.
b. In Tunnel Vaults and Equipment Rooms:
90 Percent
(1) Maximum spacing, 10 feet; closer where piping is congested, and where
piping continuity is obscured from view.
c. Piping in Tunnels:
(1) Maximum spacing 100 feet
d. Other Places:
(1) Maximum spacing 50 feet
G. Piping System Color Coding:

1. Designate for painter the following:
a. Types of piping services
b. Direction of flow
c. Other information required for proper identification.
H. Surfaces to be Painted:
1. Bare piping
2. Insulation covering of insulated piping
I. Paint according to the following schedule:
Pastel
System Color
Exposed Domestic Cold Water Blue
Waste and Vent None
Exposed Gas Piping Black
J. Piping System Devices (Valves, Thermometers, Pressure Gages, etc.):

1. Identify with the following information:
a. System
b. Device number
c. Device Function
2. Device Chart:
a. Key devices to device chart
b. Give complete description of device function and system.
K. Key devices to drawings as follows:

1. Floor plans
2. Schematic drawings of piping systems
L. Underground Warning Tapes:
1. Tape Widths:
Piping Burial Depth Tape Width
10" 2"
20" 3"
27" 6"
30" 9"
40" 12"
50" or more 18"
M. Recommended Tape Bury Depth:
90 Percent
1. Minimum Depth:
a. 6".
2. Distance Between Pipe and Tape:
a. Minimum 12".
3. Maximum Depth:
a. 12".
N. Tie tape to pipe where pipe leaves the ground.
O. Pipeline Markers for Pipe Beneath Pavement and Slabs.

1. Location:
a. Accuracy:
(1) Plus or minus 6" from piping centerline.
b. Flat Edge Pavement and Slabs:
(1) Set within 6" of pavement or slab edge.
c. Concrete Curbs:
(1) Set in top of curb.
d. Spacing:
(1) Each change in direction, each edge of pavement or slab, maximum
spacing of 100'.
P. Legend:
1. Same as tags plus an engraved or stamped line; set marker with line parallel to
buried line.
Q. Attachment:
1. Drill hole for anchor bolt, full depth of bolt plus 1/2"; set full tag and bolt in
epoxy, flush with pavement or slab.
END OF SECTION
90 Percent
SECTION 22 07 20
PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Fiberglass insulation
1. Applications:
a. Above ground domestic cold water
b. Roof drains
c. Horizontal portions of waste lines above grade which receive condensate
from air handling units
d. Condensate drain lines
e. Domestic hot water piping
B. Closed Cell Insulation

1. Closed cell insulation for piping in concrete masonry unit walls only.
B. Section 22 11 17 - Domestic Water Piping and Appurtenances
C. Section 22 13 17 - Soil, Waste, and Sanitary Drain Piping, Vent Piping, and
Appurtenances
D. Section 22 14 01 - Roof Drainage Piping and Appurtenances
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Provide submittal data on all equipment specified in this section in accordance
with Section 22 00 10, General Conditions, and Division 01.
2. Submit product data indicating typical catalog of information.
3. Submit product data sheets indicating dimensions, general assembly, and
ratings.
4. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and method of application.
Plumbing Insulation 22 07 20 - 1
90 Percent
1.5 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Section 22 00 10 for complete names of references identified in this section.
ASTM E 84 Fire and Smoke Ratings

ASTM C 547 Standard Specifications for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation
ASTM C 585 Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid
Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS
System)
ASTM C 795 Standard Specifications for Thermal Insulation for Use in
Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel
ASTM C 1136 Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor
Retarders for Thermal Insulation
NFPA 255 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
UL 723 Composite Surface Burning Characteristics
1.6 DEFINITIONS
A. Concealed:
1. Hidden from sight as in trenches, chases, furred spaces, walls, pipe shafts, or
hung ceilings.
B. Exposed:
1. Not "concealed" as defined above. Normally open and visible to building
occupants (such as gymnasiums).
A. Fire Hazard Rating:

1. All insulation used on the project must have a flame spread rating not exceeding
25 and a smoke developed rating not exceeding 50 as determined by test
procedures ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723.
2. These ratings must be tested on the composite of insulation, jacket or facing, and
adhesive.
3. Components such as adhesives, mastics and cements must meet the same
individual ratings as minimum requirements.
B. Quality Controls:
1. All insulation shall be the product of reputable manufacturers.
2. All insulation shall be applied by mechanics skilled in the use of various materials,
and in the employ of a concern regularly engaged in the insulating business.
Submit qualifications of insulator with insulation submittals.
3. The materials shall be applied in accordance with the special materials as
required by these specifications and by the manufacturer standards.
4. Poor workmanship or appearance will be cause for rejection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
90 Percent
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fiberglass Products:
1. Armstrong
2. Johns Manville
3. Knauf
4. Owens/Corning
B. Closed Cell Products:

1. Armacell
2. Aeroflex
2.2 GENERAL
A. Molded pipe insulation shall be manufactured to meet ASTM C 585 and ASTM C 547
for sizes required for the particular system and shall be suitable for installation on
piping systems defined.
2.3 ABOVE GROUND PIPE INSULATION
A. Density- 3 pounds per cubic foot.
B. Construction:
1. Fiberglass pipe insulation complying with ASTM C 547
2. Vapor retarding jacket with self-sealing longitudinal closure laps and butt strips
complying with ASTM C 1136.
C. Construction for Fiberglass Insulation (for all installations other than concrete
masonry walls):
1. Fiberglass with factory-applied, all service reinforced vapor barrier jacket having
integral laminated aluminum vapor barrier and double adhesive self-sealing lap.
Roof drain not exposed to have FRK type foil reinforced Kraft vapor barrier jacket.
2. Thickness:
a. Domestic Cold Water Piping:
(1) Interior walls and above ceilings: 1/2 inch
(2) Exterior walls: 1 inch
b. Condensate Lines: 1/2 inch
c. Waste Lines Which Receive Condensate: 1/2 inch
d. Roof Drain Piping:
(1) Exposed: 2 inch
(2) Not exposed: 2 inch
e. Domestic Hot Water Piping (Up to 169° F):
(1) 2" diameter and larger:
• Interior walls and above ceilings: 1-1/2 inch
• Exterior walls: 1-1/2 inch
(2) 1-1/2 inch diameter and smaller: 1-1/2inch
f. Outdoor:
(1) 2 inch
D. Construction for Closed Cell Insulation (for concrete masonry wall installations only):
90 Percent
1. Type: Closed-cell polyethylene pipe insulation.

2. Performance Criteria: Resistant to ultraviolet and biological degradation.
3. Temperature Range: -90ºF to 212ºF
4. Water Vapor Permeability (Dry Cup): Less than 0.03 per inch when measured by
ASTM C355.
5. Thermal Conductivity: 0.265 BTU-IN/HR-F2-ºF or less at 75ºF mean temperature
2.4 FLANGE, VALVE AND FITTING INSULATION
A. Exposed Piping:
1. Provide molded or mitered covers with full thickness matching adjacent covering.
2. Finish with white glass, reinforced white vapor barrier coating
B. 2½ Inch Diameter and Larger Concealed Piping:

1. Insulate fittings and valves with molded or mitered fitting covers.
2. Finish with white vapor barrier coating reinforced with white 10" x 10" reinforced
mesh.
C. 2 Inch Diameter and Smaller Concealed Piping:

1. Insulate fittings and valves with mineral wool and insulating cement to a thickness
equal to or greater than adjoining straight pipe.
2. Molded or mitered fittings finished with white vapor barrier coating reinforced with
reinforced mesh may be provided.
D. Underground Piping (hot water only):

1. Provide mitered covers with full thickness matching adjacent covering.
2. Field fabricated miter joints are not acceptable.
3. No insulation is required on underground domestic cold water piping.
E. Outdoor Piping:
1. Metal jacketing shall be 0.016" minimum aluminum or stainless steel with
moisture barrier, secured in accordance with jacket manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Use preformed fitting covers matching jacket used on straight pipe, with all joints
sealed with metal jacketing sealant.
2.5 SEALANT, ADHESIVE, AND FINISH
A. Sealant:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Foster 95-44
b. Childers CP-76
2. Usage:
a. Valve Covers
b. Anchors
c. Hangers
d. Metal Jacketing
e. Flashing Penetrations
B. Adhesive:
90 Percent
1. Manufacturers:
a. Foster 85-20/85-60 and Childers CP-127
2. Usage:
a. Longitudinal laps of the vapor barrier jacket
b. Butt joint covers.
C. Weather Barrier Mastic

1. Manufacturers:
a. Foster 46-50
b. Childers CP-10
2. Usage:
a. Used on above ambient piping/duct to protect insulation from weather.
b. Use in conjunction with reinforcing mesh.
D. Vapor Barrier Coating:

1. Manufacturers:
a. Foster 30-33 Vapor Out
b. Childers CP-33 Chil Out
2. Usage:
a. Glass fabric reinforcement.
E. Reinforcing Mesh
1. Manufacturers:
a. Foster Mast Afab
b. Childers Chil-glass #10
2.6 INSULATION SHIELD
A. Field-fabricated:
1. Material:
a. High-density fiberglass insulation
2. Construction:
a. Insulation to support the bearing area at hangers and supports with a shield
of galvanized metal extending not less than 4 inches on either side of the
support bearing area, covering at least half of the pipe circumference. When
pipe is guided at top and bottom, metal shields should cover the whole pipe
circumference. Adhere metal shield to insulation so that metal will not slide
with respect to insulation.
3. Schedule:
a. 3" and smaller pipe diameter:
(1) 12 inch insulated section, 18 gauge metal shield
b. Greater than 3" pipe diameter:
(1) 12 inch insulated section, 16 gauge metal shield
B. Factory-made:
1. Manufacturer:
a. Pipe Shields, Inc. or equal.
2. Type:
a. Proper shield for service and pipe span.
3. Construction:
90 Percent
a. Extend insulation at least 1 inch beyond metal.
C. Insulation shall not compress at hanger.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SITE INSPECTION
A. Before starting work under this section, carefully inspect the site and installed work of
other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where installation of
materials and accessories under this section can begin.
B. Verify that all materials and accessories can be installed in accordance with project
drawings and specifications and material manufacturers' recommendations.
C. Verify, by inspecting product labeling, submittal data, and/or certifications which may
accompany the shipments, that all materials and accessories to be installed on the
project comply with applicable specifications and standards and meet specified
thermal and physical properties.
3.2 PROPERTIES
A. Ensure that all pipe and fitting surfaces over which insulation is to be installed are
clean and dry.
B. Ensure that insulation is clean, dry, and in good mechanical condition with all factory-
applied vapor or weather barriers intact and undamaged. Wet, dirty, or damaged
insulation shall not be acceptable for installation.
C. Ensure that pressure testing of piping and fittings has been completed prior to
installing insulation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install all insulation materials and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's
published instruction and recognized industry practices to ensure that it will serve
its intended purpose.
2. Install insulation on piping subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, and
acceptance tests.
3. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each
continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece
to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. Butt
insulation joints firmly to ensure complete, tight fit over all piping surfaces.
4. Maintain the integrity of factory-applied vapor barrier jacketing on all pipe
insulation, protecting it against puncture, tears or other damage. All staples used
on cold pipe insulation shall be coated with suitable vapor barrier coating to
maintain vapor barrier integrity.
90 Percent
5. All cold water, hot water and condensate drains routed in concrete masonry units
shall be insulated using closed cell insulation as noted in this specification.
3.4 PIPE
A. Insulation size shall match pipe size.
B. Insulation to be continuous through wall and ceiling penetrations.
C. Apply insulation to clean, dry pipes.
D. Butt insulation joints firmly together and apply butt strip. All pipe insulation ends shall
be tapered and sealed.
E. Butt pipe insulation against hanger inserts. Seal jacketing according to type used.
F. Seal longitudinal laps and butt strips with sealant in addition to the self-sealing laps.
G. Seal joints with adhesive and staple at 2" O.C. with outwardly clenching staples.
H. Seal all joints with vapor barrier coating.
3.5 VALVES, FLANGES, AND FITTINGS
A. Insulate all valves, flanges, and fittings with covers secured with Velcro with
equivalent thickness and composition installation on straight pipes.
B. Finish with 1/4 inch layer of Foster 30-33 or Childers CP-33 reinforced with reinforcing
mesh.
C. Factory made covers equal to Schuller Zeston are acceptable.
3.6 CONTROL VALVE COVERS
A. Fabricate special covers, complete with troweled-on vapor seal, shaped to

accommodate the valve stem. Insulation thickness shall be same thickness as
adjoining pipe.
B. Seal covers to valve insulation properly with adhesive so that the seal may be broken
with a knife blade without damage to either part. Arrange so that cover can be
removed and replaced as necessary for operation of the valve.
C. Finish valve cover with glass cloth and two coats of vapor barrier coating.
D. Factory made covers are acceptable. Provide submittal.
3.7 ROOF DRAIN PIPING
A. Wrap insulation tightly on the pipe with all circumferential joints butted and longitudinal
joints overlapped a minimum of 2 inches.
90 Percent
B. Adhere insulation to metal with 4 inch strips of insulation bonding adhesive at 8 inch
on centers. On circumferential joints, the 2 inch flange of the facing shall be secured
and taped with a minimum of 3 inch wide foil reinforced Kraft tape. On longitudinal
joints, the overlap shall be secured using 9/16" flared door staples applied 6" on
centers and taped with minimum 3" wide foil reinforced Kraft tape.
C. Seal vapor tight to prevent any moisture from leaking out from under the insulation.
D. Roof drains for canopies do not require insulation.
E. Roof drains that are exposed shall be insulated as described in the paragraph on
exposed piping.
F. Roof drain laterals which serve primary roof drains shall be insulated.
G. No insulation is required on secondary roof drains.
H. Insulate all roof drain bodies (primary and secondary) and first 3-feet of vertical pipe.
3.8 WASTE LINES WHICH RECEIVE CONDENSATE
A. Insulate from the drain receptor (i.e. floor sink, hub drain) all the way to where the
drain line changes to a vertical stack.
3.9 REPAIRS AND REPLACEMENT
A. Replace any insulation that gets wet, whether now dry or not.
B. Repair any damage caused by condensation due to improper insulating.

3.10 ALL EXPOSED PIPING
A. All exposed piping insulation to be pre-formed pipe insulation with white PVC jacket
and white PVC fittings (no exceptions). All exposed roof drain downspouts, water
piping, condensate piping, and any other piping that requires insulation shall be
insulated down to the floor level using the pre-formed pipe insulation and PVC jackets
and fittings.
3.11 OUTDOOR PIPING
A. Metal jacket shall be applied per manufacturer's recommendations. Longitudinal joints

shall be applied so they will shed water completely and be sealed completely with
1/8” bead of metal jacketing sealant under each lap. Circumferential joints shall be
closed using preformed butt strips in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.12 SHIELDS
90 Percent
A. Metal jacketing shall be 0.016-inch minimum aluminum or stainless steel with

moisture barrier, secured in accordance with jacket manufacturer's
recommendations. Use bands and seals of the same material. Use preformed fitting
covers matching jacket used on straight pipe, with all joints weather sealed with 1/8”
bead of metal jacketing sealant under each lap.
3.13 SHIELDS AND HANGERS
A. Piping hangers or anchors are not to be in direct contact with pipe. Hangers are to on
the outside of the insulation with pipe shields at each hanger.
B. At the location of hangers or supports for pipes run above ground and finished with a
vapor seal insulation, provide rigid sections of cork, high density fiberglass, Foamglas,
calcium silicate or high density polyurethane, the same thickness as adjacent
insulating material to adequately support the pipe without compression of the
insulating material and cover with a vapor seal that is bonded to the adjacent
insulation as described for fittings in the lines. Wood inserts shall not be allowed.
Hangers and supports for piping insulation to receive a vapor barrier shall be installed
exterior to the insulation.
C. Material Changes:
1. Wherever there is a change in materials on lines that are vapor sealed, apply a
suitable adhesive that is compatible with both materials, tapes, etc., as required
to maintain the vapor barrier.
D. Apply insulation around the hanger ring or anchor and pipe and carry vapor barrier
upward and outward along the hanger rod or anchor members to a point not less than
12 inches from the adjacent pipe.
E. Take care to avoid puncturing the vapor seal.
F. Finish insulation as specified for flanges, and seal over adjacent vapor barrier jacket.
3.14 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Upon completion of all insulation work covered by this specification, visually inspect
the work and verify that it has been correctly installed. This may be done while work
is in progress, to assure compliance with requirements herein to cover and protect
insulation materials during installation.
3.15 PROTECTION
A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, including

insulation with vapor barrier damage and moisture-saturated insulation.
B. The insulation contractor shall advise the general and/or the mechanical/plumbing
contractor as to requirements for protection of the insulation work during the
remainder of the construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration of the
finished insulation work.
END OF SECTION
90 Percent
SECTION 22 08 00
COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
section.
B. Division 01 section ‘Building Systems Commissioning’.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes commissioning process requirements for Plumbing systems,

assemblies, and equipment.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Building Systems Commissioning" for general
commissioning process requirements.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for the description of

commissioning.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for definitions.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for CxA’s role.
B. Refer to Division 01 Section “Submittals” for specific requirements. In addition,

provide the following:
1. Certificates of readiness
2. Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities.
3. O&M manuals
4. Test reports
Commissioning of Plumbing 22 08 00 - 1
90 Percent
A. Test Equipment Calibration Requirements: Contractors will comply with test

manufacturer’s calibration procedures and intervals. Recalibrate test instruments
immediately after instruments have been repaired resulting from being dropped or
damaged. Affix calibration tags to test instruments. Furnish calibration records to CxA
upon request.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for requirements

pertaining to coordination during the commissioning process.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup, initial checkout and
functional performance testing shall be provided by the Contractor for the equipment
being tested. For example, the plumbing contractor of Division 22 shall ultimately be
responsible for all standard testing equipment for the plumbing systems and controls
systems in Division 22. A sufficient quantity of two-way radios shall be provided by
each contractor.
B. Special equipment, tools and instruments (specific to a piece of equipment and only
available from vendor) required for testing shall be included in the base bid price to
the Owner and left on site, except for stand-alone data logging equipment that may
be used by the CxA.
C. Proprietary test equipment and software required by any equipment manufacturer for
programming and/or start-up, whether specified or not, shall be provided by the
manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment,
demonstrate its use, and assist in the commissioning process as needed. Proprietary
test equipment (and software) shall become the property of the Owner upon
completion of the commissioning process.
D. Data logging equipment and software required to test equipment will be provided by
the CxA, but shall not become the property of the Owner.
E. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure
system performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not
otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: Temperature sensors
and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an
accuracy of 0.5ºF and a resolution of + or - 0.1ºF. Pressure sensors shall have an
accuracy of + or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter)
and have been calibrated within the last year.
90 Percent
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
A. With assistance from the installing contractors, the CxA will prepare Functional
Testing Forms for all commissioned components, equipment, and systems
B. Red-lined Drawings:
1. The contractor will verify all equipment, systems, instrumentation, wiring and
components are shown correctly on red-lined drawings.
2. Preliminary red-lined drawings must be made available to the Commissioning
Team for use prior to the start of Functional Performance Testing.
3. Changes, as a result of Functional Testing, must be incorporated into the final
as-built drawings, which will be created from the red-lined drawings.
4. The contracted party, as defined in the Contract Documents will create the as-
built drawings.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Contractor will provide a copy of O&M literature within 45 days of each submittal
acceptance for use during the commissioning process for all commissioned
equipment and systems.
2. The CxA will review the O&M literature once for conformance to project
requirements.
3. The CxA will receive a copy of the final approved O&M literature once corrections
have been made by the Contractor.
D. Systems manual requirements:

1. The Systems Manual is intended to be a usable information resource containing
all of the information related to the systems, assemblies, and Commissioning
Process in one place with indexes and cross references.
2. The GC shall include final approved versions of the following information for the
Systems Manual:
a. As-Built System Schematics
b. Verified Record Drawings
c. Test Results (not otherwise included in Cx Record)
d. Periodic Maintenance Information for computer maintenance management
system
e. Recommendations for recalibration frequency of sensors and actuators
f. A list of contractors, subcontractors, suppliers, architects, and engineers
involved in the project along with their contact information
g. Training Records, Information on training provided, attendees list, and any
on-going training
3. This information shall be organized and arranged by building system, such as fire
alarm, chilled water, heating hot water, etc.
4. Information should be provided in an electronic version to the extent possible.
Legible, scanned images are acceptable for non-electronic documentation to
facilitate this deliverable.
3.2 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
90 Percent
A. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA.
B. Attend construction phase controls coordination meetings.
C. Participate in Plumbing systems, assemblies, equipment, and component

maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.
D. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation.
E. Include requirements for submittal data, operation and maintenance data, and training
in each purchase order or sub-contract written.
F. Prepare preliminary schedule for Plumbing system orientations and inspections,

operation and maintenance manual submissions, training sessions, equipment start-
up and task completion for owner.
G. Update schedule as required throughout the construction period.
H. Perform and clearly document all completed startup and system operational checkout
procedures, providing a copy to the CxA.
I. Assist the CxA in all verification and functional performance tests.
J. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data and provide
data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the
required test period.
K. Gather operation and maintenance literature on all equipment and assemble in

binders as required by the specifications. Submit to CxA 45 days after submittal
acceptance.
L. Participate in, and schedule vendors and contractors to participate in the training
sessions.
M. Provide written notification to the CM/GC and CxA that the following work has been
completed in accordance with the contract documents, and that the equipment,
systems, and sub-system are operating as required.
1. Service Water Heating Systems and components such as hot water heaters,
circulation pumps and controls.
N. The equipment supplier shall document the performance of his equipment.
O. Provide a complete set of red-lined drawings to the CxA prior to the start of Functional
Performance Testing.
P. Provide training of the Owner’s operating staff using expert qualified personnel, as
specified.
Q. Equipment Suppliers
90 Percent
1. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and
specific responsibilities of the Owner, to keep warranties in force.
2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with contractors.
3. Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence of
operation and testing procedures.
R. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for additional

Contractor responsibilities.
3.3 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for Owner’s

Responsibilities.
3.4 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for Design

Professional’s Responsibilities.
3.5 CXA'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for CxA’s

Responsibilities.
3.6 TESTING PREPARATION
A. Certify in writing to the CxA that Plumbing systems, subsystems, and equipment have
been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract
Documents.
B. Certify in writing to the CxA that Plumbing instrumentation and control systems have
been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract
Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded.
C. Certify in writing that testing procedures have been completed and that testing reports
have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.
D. Place systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g.,
normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle,
emergency power, and alarm conditions).
E. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety
systems during each mode of operation.
F. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record

test data as directed by the CxA.
3.7 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS
90 Percent
A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the

direction of the CxA.
B. Scope of Plumbing testing shall include the service water heating system.
C. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal
or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system
controllers and sensors.
D. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible.
E. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not
practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate
testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions
as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of
simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions.
F. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not
practical.
G. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design
or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical.
H. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the

Plumbing system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After
deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.
I. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial
performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.
3.8 PLUMBING SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES
A. Functional Performance Tests: The CxA may modify these procedures during the
Construction Phase once all systems are known and all required documentation has
been provided.
B. Plumbing Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Assist the CxA with
preparation of testing plans.
3.9 DEFICIENCIES/NON-CONFORMANCE, COST OF RETESTING, FAILURE DUE TO

MANUFACTURER DEFECT

pertaining to deficiencies/non-conformance, cost of retesting, or failure due to
manufacturer defect.
3.10 APPROVAL
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for approval

procedures.
90 Percent
3.11 DEFERRED TESTING

pertaining to deferred testing.
3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall conform to Contract Documents

requirements as stated in Division 01.
B. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for the AE and CxA
roles in the Operation and Maintenance Manual contribution, review and approval
process.
END OF SECTION
90 Percent
SECTION 22 11 17
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Domestic hot water piping.
B. Domestic cold water piping.
C. Section 22 05 30 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General
D. Section 22 33 34 - Access Doors
E. Section 22 40 01 - Plumbing Fixtures and Fixture Carriers
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM 763 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for Valve
Applications
B. ASTM 61 - Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings
C. ASTM C27450 - Standard Specification for Brass Rod, Bar & Shapes
D. ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges &
Pipe Fittings
E. ASTM A105 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping
Applications
F. ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials
G. ASTM B813-00e1 - Standard Specification for Liquid & Paste Fluxes for Soldering of
Copper & Copper Alloy Tube
Domestic Water Piping and Appurtenances 22 11 17 - 1

90 Percent
H. ASTM B828-02 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of

Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings
I. ASTM B88-02 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
J. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute
K. NSF/ANSI Standard 61
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit product data sheets.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 UNDERGROUND PIPING
A. Type:
1. 2 Inch Diameter and Smaller:
a. Type "L" soft drawn commercially pure copper
2. 2½ Inch Diameter:
a. Type "L" hard drawn commercially pure copper
3. 3 Inch Diameter or Larger:
a. Type "L" hard drawn commercially pure copper
B. All copper meets ASTM B88 Standards.
2.2 UNDER SLAB PIPING
A. Type:
1. 2 Inch Diameter and Smaller:
a. Type "K" soft drawn commercially pure copper
2. 2½ Inch Diameter and Larger:
a. Type "K" hard drawn commercially pure copper
B. No joints will be permitted in piping runs beneath concrete slabs. All joints shall be
made in accessible areas above the slab (behind access doors in walls, in mechanical
closets, etc.).
C. All copper meets ASTM B88 Standards.

2.3 INTERIOR PIPING
A. Type:
1. Type "L" hard drawn commercially pure copper
B. All copper meets ASTM B88 Standards.

90 Percent
2.4 PIPE FITTINGS
A. Copper Piping:
1. Unions:
a. 150 lb. standard, 300 lb. water-oil-gas service copper with ground joints.
B. Dissimilar Metal:
1. Di-Electric Unions
2.5 PIPE JOINTS
A. Copper Piping:
1. Type: Solder fittings
a. Solid string, hard solder
b. Wire, hard solder
c. Cored solder will not be allowed
2. Type: Press-connect fittings
a. Copper and copper alloy fittings with EPDM elastomeric sealing element.
b. Unpressed fittings shall leak and not hold pressure.
c. Press connect fittings may not be used on elbow at main water entry under
slab. Use Silfos sweat fittings on all elbows on main water entry.
d. Press connect fittings may not be used on pipes that are 2 ½” or larger.
3. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Viega ProPress
b. Nibco
c. Mueller Industries Streamline PRS
d. Solder (1½” and Smaller):
(1) 95-1/2% tin, 4% copper and 1/2% silver
e. Solder (2” and Larger):
(1) “SILFOS15”, 15% silver, 80% copper, 5% phosphorous
f. Flux:
(1) Non-corrosive, lead-free paste
4. Use a cast brass adapter when connecting copper pipe to screwed brass pipe.
5. Brand:
a. Silvabrite or similar brand
B. Conform to ASTM B813 and ASTM B828.
2.6 VALVES
A. Type:
1. Check Valves:
a. 125 lb. bronze check valve with "Buna-N" disc.
2. Ball Valves:
a. 150 psi, bronze 1/4 turn ball valve with full port, stainless steel ball.
b. 300 psi, bronze 1/4 turn ball valve with full port, stainless steel ball. ASTM
61
c. 125 psi, lead free dezincification resistant arsenical brass ¼ turn ball valve
with full port, stainless steel ball C46500 or CW 511L, ASTM 763, or C46750.
3. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves:

90 Percent
a. ASME rated valve

4. Gate Valves:
a. 125 lb. rising stem, double-disc bronze gate valves larger than 3 inches.
5. Water Main Valves:
a. 150 lb. AWWA valve.
6. Pressure Reducing Valves
a. 300 lb. bronze sealed spring cage, strainer
7. Cast Iron: ASTM A126, Class B
8. Cast Carbon Steel: ASTM A216, Grade WCB
9. Forged Carbon Steel: ASTM A105, Grade II
10. Backflow Preventers: Refer to Section 22 40 01 - Plumbing Fixtures and Fixture
Carriers.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Apollo
2. Crane
3. Grinnell
4. Jenkins
5. Jomar, T-100NGDZ
6. Kennedy
7. Milwaukee Valve Company
8. Nibco
9. Stockham
10. Walworth
11. Watts
12. Hammond
13. Kitz
C. Provide valves where required to adequately control and isolate the various domestic
water piping systems.
D. Provide valves at the connection point of all equipment.
E. Provide Di-Electric Unions at connection of dissimilar metal.
2.7 CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide valves designed for repacking under pressure when fully opened.
B. Equip with packing suitable for intended service.
C. Furnish with gland followers.
D. Provide valves rated greater than the design temperature and pressure for the
intended system.
E. All domestic cold water and hot water valves 2" and less shall be full port ball valves.

90 Percent
2.8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. Water Hammer Protective Devices:

1. Usage:
a. Provide on hot and cold water supply lines. Locate between last two
flush/solenoid valves on supply lines or per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
b. In single toilets locate within 3-feet of fixture or per manufacturer’s
recommendation.
2. Type:
a. As recommended by the manufacturer for the particular application.
b. Locate arrestor on shop drawings with size.
3. Manufacturer/Model:
a. Wade "Shokstop"
b. Sioux Chief “Hydra-Rester”
c. PPP “SC Series”
d. Mifab “MWH Series”
4. Air chambers are not allowed.
2.9 FREEZE PROTECTION HEAT TRACE
A. Freeze Protection Heat Trace Tape:

1. Usage:
a. Provide on hot and cold water supply lines where freezing of the piping is a
concern.
2. Type:
a. Self-regulating heating cable, 5 watt per liner foot. Provide control panel and
all necessary controls and wiring.
a. Raychem XL-Trace
B. Domestic Hot Water Layout for IECC 2015
1. Usage:
a. At all sinks/lavatories associated with water closets and/or urinals and
handwashing lavatories in kitchens require the domestic hot water circulation
loop will be routed down in wall to within two feet of the faucet, routed
horizontally for multiple sinks/lavatories, then routed back up to above ceiling
in order to meet the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All products to comply with NSF/ANSI Standard 61.
B. Install in accordance with the plans and Section 22 05 30.
C. Drainage:
1. Minimum Slope:
a. 1/8 inch per 10 feet.

90 Percent
2. Where constant pitch cannot be maintained for long runs, establish intermediate
low points and rise to higher level.
3. Slope branches to drain toward mains or risers.
4. Terminate low points of risers with drain valve piped to nearest hub or floor drain
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Water Hammer Arrestors:

1. Install in accordance with PDI Standard WH201.
3.2 VALVES
A. All valves, etc. that are located behind access doors shall be located directly behind
door and within 24” of plane of door.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. ProPress elbow is not acceptable on water supply elbows at location of main water
stub up. Use SilFos sweated fittings on all water supply elbows larger than 2”. 2” water
supply line can be soft drawn copper with no elbow.
B. Install valves and stops in accessible locations.
C. Provide where shown or as required to make system complete and readily

maintained.
D. Provide pressure reducing valve on domestic water main where hydrostatic pressure
exceeds 80 psi.
E. Isolation valves shall be located:

1. Restroom Gang - Above lay-in ceilings adjacent to gang restrooms. When hard
ceilings are present provide 18”x18” (minimum) ceiling access panel to access
valves.
2. Individual (private) Restrooms - Above lay-in ceilings adjacent to restroom.
When hard ceilings are present provide 18”x18” (minimum) ceiling access panel
to access valve.
3. Individual Fixtures - Above lay-in ceilings adjacent to restroom. When hard
ceilings are present provide 18”x18” (minimum) ceiling access panel to access
valve
4. Isolation valves on the domestic cold water shall be provided in corridors to
allow isolation of buildings wings, sections, areas. Locate over
5. Provide cut-off valve on main water entry upstream of strainer and backflow
preventer (if backflow preventer is inside building).
6. Each exterior wall hydrant and each roof hydrant shall be provided with an
accessible cut-off valve.
F. Press fitting manufacturer shall provide a duplicate set of all tools required to maintain
and/ or modify press fittings. Required tools are to be given to the owner. One set of
tools shall be provided for each campus.

90 Percent
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Properly test water distribution systems with 80 PSI hydrostatic pressure test.
B. Do not install, flush valves or other pressure sensitive devices until all tests are
completed.
C. Repair all leaks in pipes, fittings and accessories during this test period.
D. Repeat 80 PSI hydrostatic test until no leaks are found for an entire 8 hour period.
E. Make joints in accordance with ASTM B828.
3.5 STERILIZATION
A. Solution:
1. Strength:
a. Minimum 50 parts per million
2. Agents:
a. Liquid Chlorine:
(1) Conform to U.S. Army Specification #4-1
b. Calcium Hydrochloride:
(1) Federal Specification O-C-114
c. Chlorinated Lime:
(1) Federal Specification O-C-114
B. Procedure:
1. Perform sterilization after testing has been satisfactorily completed.
2. Pump solution into a 1/4 inch opening provided in the water main next to the
water meter.
3. Conduct the sterilization process under the direction of the local health
department.
4. After sterilization, flush the system with clean water until the residual chlorine
content is less than 3 ppm.
5. After flushing, the local health department will test and verify the cleanliness of
the system.
3.6 PLUMBING SCHEDULE
A. Minimum Size:
1. Water Closets (flush valve):
a. 1-1/4" cold water
2. Urinals:
a. 3/4" cold water
3. Sinks:
a. 1/2" cold water, 1/2" hot water
4. Mop & Service Sinks:
5. Hose Bibbs:
a. 3/4" cold water

90 Percent
6. Drinking Fountains:
a. 1/2" cold water
7. Lavatories:
3.7 EMCS FLOW SENSOR
A. EMCS contractor to furnish flow sensor (full water main size) and the plumbing
contractor to install inside the building downstream of the backflow preventer (RPZ)
or downstream of the initial water main stub up inside the building if the backflow
prevention device is located in the yard. EMCS contractor to make all necessary
connections for EMCS interface.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 22 13 17
SOIL, WASTE AND SANITARY DRAIN PIPING, VENT PIPING, AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Drain and vent piping within the building and underground laterals.
B. Pea gravel embedment for schedule 40 PVC piping below slab.
B. Section 22 11 17 - Domestic Water Piping and Appurtenances
C. Section 22 13 18 - Condensate Piping
1.4 REFERENCES

Commercial Standard CS-188-59
ASTM D-2665-04 Standard Specifications for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Drain, Waste & Vent Pipe & Fittings
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit product data on pipe, pipe fittings, trap primers, covers, cleanouts, etc.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Soil, Waste and Sanitary Draining Piping, Vent Piping and Appurtenances 22 13 17 - 1
90 Percent
2.1 DRAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Material: (Pipe material for above and below slab for ducted return mechanical
system)
1. Schedule 40 PVC pipe and fittings conform to ASTM D-2665.
2. “Foam Core PVC” not allowed.
2.2 VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Material: (Pipe material for above and below slab for ducted return mechanical
system)
1. Schedule 40 PVC pipe and fittings conform to ASTM D-2665.
2.3 CLEANOUTS
A. Size:
1. Identical with the line size up to a maximum diameter of 4 inches.
B. Type:
1. Compatible with the surrounding floor/wall.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Jay R. Smith
2. Josam
3. Mifab
4. Sioux Chief
5. Wade W-6000
6. Watts
7. Zurn
2.4 PLUGS
A. Wade 8590, Tapped brass cleanout plug only. PVC plugs not allowed.
B. Applications:
1. Each change in direction of soil lines
2. End of each continuous waste line
3. Foot of each riser within the building
4. 50 ft. intervals in interior horizontal lines
C. Construction: Secure covers with vandal-proof screws
D. Finished Floors:
1. Covers: Chromium plated, flush mounted, cast bronze with scoriated top surface.
E. Walls/Painted Surfaces:
1. Covers:
a. Furnish chromium plated covers.
F. Exterior Locations:
90 Percent
1. Traffic Areas:
a. Covers: Flush mounted, cast bronze covers with scoriated top surface
2. Non-Traffic Areas:
a. Encase in a 14" x 14" x 6" concrete pad
b. Manufacturer/Model:
(1) Wade W-8500 series
2.5 CLOSET FLANGE
A. Size: 4” to match sanitary sewer piping.
B. Type:
1. PVC or cast iron to match sanitary sewer piping.
2. PVC flanges to be provided with stainless steel ring for reinforcement.
3. Offset toilet flanges are not allowed.
2.6 TRAP PRIMERS - AUTOMATIC
A. Type:
1. Fully automatic valve with diaphragm operated piston.
B. Size:
1. Inlet:
a. 1/2 inch
2. Outlet:
a. 1/2 inch
C. Features:
1. Activated by a pressure drop.
2. No adjustment required.
3. Equipped with distribution unit for 1 to 4 traps.
4. Can be located anywhere in an active cold water line of 1½ inch or less that is
directly serving one or more flush valves.
5. Provide copper tubing (type K) from trap primer to protected trap.
D. Application:
1. Provide automatic trap primers at all floor drains and floor sinks on entire project
that are within 20 feet of a water closet supply line.
2. Provide a minimum of one union on each side of each trap primer, unless a
means of detaching the trap primer is provided integrally in the trap primer, in
which one union is permissible.
1. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. PO-500.
F. Furnished with AG-500 air gap fitting with alignment legs.
90 Percent
2.7 TRAP PRIMERS - FLUSH VALVE AUTOMATIC
A. Type
1. Fully automatic flush valve primer
B. Size
1. Inlet
a. 1/2 inch
2. Outlet
a. ½ inch
C. Features
1. Activated by flush valve operation
2. No adjustment required
3. Equipped with distribution for one trap
4. Provide copper tubing from flush valve trap primer to protected trap.
5. Include vacuum breaker with flush valve primer assembly.
D. Application
1. Provide flush valve automatic trap primers at all floor drains and floor sinks on
entire project that are within 20 feet of a water closet supply line.
E. Manufacturer /Model
1. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. FVP-1VB
2. Flush valve manufacturer (if applicable).
2.8 SAND BACKFILL/EMBEDMENT FOR CAST IRON PIPING BELOW SLAB
A. Sand for embedment shall be a free flowing material which contains no clay, is
reasonably free from organic material and does not form a muck or mud when wet.
The gradation shall be such that a minimum of 95% is retained on a #100 sieve. The
P.I. of the soil fraction passing the No. 40 sieve shall not be greater than 5.
2.9 EXPOSED INDIRECT WASTE LINES IN KITCHENS AND CONCESSIONS:
A. All exposed indirect waste lines in kitchens and concessions to be DWV copper
material. All joints to be soldered and turned down with elbow above floor sink or hub
drain (discharge below elbow to be cut at 45-degree angle).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Location:
1. Install a 12-gauge copper tracer wire on all underground sewers outside of
building.
B. Slope:
1. Desired: 1/4 inch per foot
90 Percent
2. Minimum:
a. 1/8 inch per foot for diameter of 4 inch and larger if approved by local
authority and it is impractical to use 1/4 inch per foot.
C. Drain Pipe and Fittings:

1. Reduction fittings:
a. Use to connect two pipes of different diameter.
2. Directional changes:
a. Use 45 degree wyes, long sweep quarter bends, and sixth, eighth, and
sixteenth bends. Sanitary tees may be used on vertical stacks. Use long
sweeps at all locations sanitary tees are used.
b. Embed pipe on sand cushion approximately 2 pipe diameters below
(minimum 4”) and at least one diameter on each side and top in trench.
c. No hub couplings of any type cannot be used underground.
D. In kitchens install a minimum of 20-feet of Schedule 40 CPVC or Schedule 40 cast

iron pipe and fittings from dishwasher, braising pans, and steamer discharges. This
includes all connected piping to a point 20-feet from initial discharge.
E. Traps:
1. Provide at each fixture unless a trap is built into the fixture.
2. Provide a deep seal trap and trap primers at each floor drain and hub drain.
3. Place traps so that the discharge from any fixture will pass through only one trap
before reaching a building drain.
4. Place each trap as near to the fixture as possible. Do not exceed the distances
stated in the governing codes up to a maximum of 8 feet.
F. Trap Primers:
1. Provide trap primers at all floor drains, floor sinks and hub drains on entire project.
2. Provide unions on each side of trap primer for service.
3. Manufacturer shall provide field start-up and review of installation on trap primers.
G. Hub Drains:
1. Install with the top of the hub 1/2 inch above the finished floor, unless otherwise
shown on the drawings.
H. Cleanouts:
1. See table below for cleanout requirements whether shown on plans or not.
2. Install so that they open in a direction opposite to the pipe flow or at a right angle.
3. At all wall cleanouts install tapped brass cleanout plug behind wall escutcheons.
4. Install vertically above the flow line of the pipe for "wye" branch and end-of-line
cleanouts.
5. Place cleanouts above the floors in pipe chases so that they will be accessible
through doors or bring through a wall and provide with flush covers.
6. Set cleanouts flush in floor slabs.
7. Place cleanouts in accessible locations. Exact locations of each shall be
approved by the Architect before installation. Locate all cleanouts within 2-feetof
access door or cover.
8. Location of all cleanouts shall be shown on the shop drawings.
90 Percent
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR CLEANOUTS

LOCATION DESCRIPTION ACCESSORIES
Interior horizontal drain Every 100’-0” (O.C.) All cleanouts in walkways
lines. and floors to have
scoriated non-slip cover.
Change in direction of the At the change in direction greater than
building drain. 45 degrees. If multiple changes in
direction occur in a maximum of 40 feet
only one cleanout is required.
Base of stack. A cleanout shall be provided at the Provide with access door
base of each waste or soil stack. or escutcheon. No more
than 2 inches from
cleanout.
Junction of building drain Provide a two way cleanout exterior of Two way cleanout to be
and building sewer building at junction of building drain installed per detail with
and sewer. concrete cover.
Concealed piping cleanouts. Cleanouts on concealed piping or Provide with scoriated
under a floor less than 24 inches in non-slip cover.
height must extend up through the
finished wall or floor.
9. All cleanouts must be the same size as the piping they serve. On all lines larger
than 4 inches, the cleanout shall not be less than 4 inches.
10. Cleanouts up to 4 inches in diameter must have 18 inch clearance. All cleanouts
larger than 4 inches must have 36 inch clearance.
11. Access shall be provided at all cleanouts.
12. All cleanouts shall have long radius sweeps at change in direction to allow the
insertion of the plumbing snake for cleaning purposes. Short radius fittings will
not be allowed.
I. Plugs:
1. Install temporary plugs in all open sanitary drain pipes during construction to
prevent any foreign objects from entering the pipe.
2. All floor drains to have plugs until substantial completion.
J. Vent Piping:
1. Connections:
a. Connect two or more vents together and extend as one vent through the
roof, where practical.
b. Make vent and waste connections to stacks by using 45 degree wyes, long
sweep quarter bends, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends. Sanitary tees may
be used on the vertical stacks.
2. Flashing:
a. Use minimum 10-inch square, 4-pound lead flashing.
b. Flange the flashing to the lead sleeve.
c. Extend the flashing up and around the vent pipe.
d. Turn the flashing down inside the pipe at least 2 inches to make an
absolutely watertight joint.
e. For single-ply rooftop systems, flash according to the roofing specifications.
3. Location:
90 Percent
a. Do not locate any vent within 15 feet of an outside air intake.

4. Mop Sinks:
a. Mop sinks to be installed after substantial completion.
5. Termination:
a. 12 inch above roof deck or 2 inch above parapet, whichever is greater.
3.2 TESTING
A. Temporarily plug sanitary drain piping.
B. Fill the pipes with water.
C. Test the system in sections so that no section has a pressure less than 10 feet of
water.
D. If the level of water has been decreased by leakage after a 24-hour period, then locate
and repair all leaks.
E. Repeat the test until there is no perceptible decrease in the water level over a 24-hour
period.
F. Sewer Pressurization Test:

1. Provide smoke pressure test after plumbing top out/before sheetrock is installed
and again at substantial completion.
2. All smoke test on the sanitary sewer system is to be performed before ceiling
tiles are installed, no exception.
3. After all water tests are complete, perform smoke test to ensure there are no air
leaks in building. Fill all p-traps with water and temporarily cap all vents prior to
testing.
4. Procedure for Plumbing Sewer Pressurization Test Using a Visual Smoke
Indicator:
a. Contact your local city water department, some cities may provide and
supervise a smoke test for your facility.
b. Prior to the test, notify the local fire and police departments that you are
conducting a smoke test of the facility.
c. Prior to the test, turn off the fire alarms. The smoke will activate the alarm.
After the test is complete the building will have to be ventilated to clear smoke
and then the alarm can be reactivated.
d. You are required to have a blower with an adjustable pressure control and
liquid smoke or white smoke bombs.
e. Inflatable ball stops are required to block off the sewer line at the building
manhole that connects to the city sewer main line.
f. All sewer vents on the facility have to be sealed to properly conduct the test.
(Duct tape over the openings is acceptable.)
g. Ladders, portable lights, two-way radio communication and standard hand
tools are required for access above ceilings, floor drains, etc.
h. A minimum of three helpers are required to conduct the test.
i. Prior to the test, identify rooms or problem areas that should be observed
first. Plumbing drawings are required to identify the locations of vents, traps,
restrooms, etc.
90 Percent
j. This test will pressurize the sewer piping (approximately 1.25” S.P.) and
identify any deficiencies.
k. If there are questions, contact EMA Engineering & Consulting: Phone 903-
581-2677.
5. Provide TV video of all main sanitary sewers in building and to city main. Notify
Owner’s representative when video is to be made 48 hours prior to work.
G. Job Photographs:
1. Contractor is to provide digital photographs of all pipe showing sand embedment
prior to covering trenches.
3.3 PLUMBING BRANCH SCHEDULES
A. Minimum size:
1. Water Closets (flush valve):
a. 3" waste, 2" vent
2. Urinals:
a. 2" waste, 1-1/2" vent
3. Sinks:
4. Mops & Service Sinks:
5. Floor Drains:
6. Drinking Fountains:
7. Lavatories:
END OF SECTION
90 Percent
SECTION 22 13 18
CONDENSATE PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Condensate piping for cooling units.
C. Section 22 07 20 - Piping Insulation
D. Section 22 13 17 - Soil, Waste, and Sanitary Drain Piping, Vent Piping, and
Appurtenances
E. Section 22 33 34 - Access Doors
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Tube for Water, Gas & Sanitation
B. ASTM B306 - Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Draw-through Unit:
1. A unit in which the cooling coil operates under a negative static pressure.
B. Blow-through Unit:
1. A unit in which the cooling coil operates under a positive static pressure.
Condensate Piping 22 13 18 - 1
90 Percent
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
ratings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide condensate lines for all cooling units even if not shown on the plans.
B. Provide a secondary condensate drain pan and secondary condensate piping for all
horizontal air handlers above ceiling, even if not shown on plans.
C. Minimum size:
1. 1", but no smaller than the coil nipple.
2.2 PIPING
A. Type:
1. Hard drawn type DWV or type M copper
2. Other type as noted on plans
3. Conform to ASTM B306 or ASTM B88.
2.3 FITTINGS
A. Type: Wrought copper joint

1. Provide dielectric insulating couplings between ferrous and copper piping
systems.
2.4 INSULATION
A. All condensate lines shall be insulated per Section 22 07 20.
2.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Type:
1. Solid string hard solder
2. Wire hard solder
3. Cored solder will not be allowed.
90 Percent
B. Material:
1. Solder:
a. 95% tin and 5% antimony
2. Flux:
a. Non-corrosive paste type
C. Use a cast adapter when connecting soldered copper piping to screwed brass pipe.
2.6 ROOF PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. MAPA MS-5
2. Miro Industries Model 3 RAH (3-inch or less)
3. Pipe Hangers and Devices (PHP) Model PP10
4. Portable Pipe Hangers (PHP) Model PP10
5. ERICO RPS 360407
B. All roof supports to be equal to MAPA Products Model MS-5, adjustable height, select
size designed for size of pipe supported. MS-5 for 4” and smaller.
1. Install ½” rubber walk pad under each pipe support.
C. MAPA MWP ½” thick rubber walk pad.

1. Coordinate exact locations of supports with roofing contractor.
D. Roof supports to support all gas piping a minimum of 6" above roof.
E. Spacing of Supports (Horizontal):

½” 6 feet or less
¾” or 1” 8 feet or less
1¼” or larger 10 feet or less
Install supports within 2 feet of every change of direction.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Traps:
1. Draw-through units:
a. Required on all units, unless noted otherwise on plans.
2. Blow-through units:
a. As recommended by the unit manufacturer or as shown on the plans.
B. Clean-outs
C. Unions
PART 3 EXECUTION
90 Percent
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Traps:
1. Install in each line serving a draw-through unit. Coordinate size and configuration
with air conditioning unit manufacturer.
B. Cleanouts:
1. Install cleanouts as shown on plans.
2. Install cleanouts at changes in direction (greater than 45⁰).
3. Provide insulation caps on cleanouts for easy removal and reinstall.
C. Unions:
1. Install unions on both sides of the trap.
D. Minimum Drain Line Slope:

1. 1/8 inch per foot
2. Insulate all condensate lines inside buildings.
E. Size and install Neutralization kits per manufacture’s recommendations.
F. At all rooftop units on the roof, contractor to connect to the side outlet on the rooftop
unit condensate drain pan and then route condensate drain down through roof in roof
penetration per the roofing consultant’s roof penetration detail. The bottom outlet on
the rooftop unit condensate drain pan is unacceptable. The P-trap must be accessible
on the roof.
G. TESTING:
1. Pressure test all sections of the condensate drainage system at a 10 foot head
pressure for a 24 hour period. Repeat test until no leaks exist.
END OF SECTION
90 Percent
SECTION 22 14 01
ROOF DRAINAGE AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Roof drains
B. Drain piping within the building
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D2665-02a - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Provide submittal data on all items specified in this section in accordance with
Section 22 00 10, General Conditions, and Division 01.
2. Submit product data sheets.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Material: Pipe material for above and below slab for ducted return mechanical system)
1. Material: Schedule 40 PVC pipe and pipe fittings conform to ASTM D-2665.
2. “Foam Core PVC” not allowed.
B. Conform to ASTM A74, ASTM 888 and ASTM C564.
C. Primary Roof Drains

1. Type:
a. Cast Iron
Roof Drainage and Appurtenances 22 14 01 - 1

90 Percent
b. Straight down outlet

c. Side outlet
d. Select type based on application and clearance
2. Construction:
a. Equip with low dome strainer
b. Provide cast iron mushroom dome.
c. Provide inside screw connections with underdeck clamping rings
d. Use corrosion resistant bolts
e. Coordinate roof attachment with Architect for proper installation.
a. Straight Down Outlet:
(1) Wade W-3000
(2) Watts RD-300
(3) Mifab R1200
(4) Josam 21500
(5) J.R. Smith 1010
(6) Zurn Z100
b. Side Outlet:
(1) Wade W-3030
(2) Watts RD-100-SD
(3) Mifab R1200-90
(4) Josam 21500-66
(5) J.R. Smith 1020
(6) Zurn Z100-90
D. Secondary Roof Drains

1. Type:
a. Cast Iron
2. Features:
a. Flashing ring and gravel stop
b. Adjustable plastic standpipe
3. Height:
a. 2 inches above top of roof grade at a point 10 feet out from roof drain.
b. Cast iron mushroom dome
a. Wade W-3004-SD
b. Watts RD-300-W
c. Mifab R1204-W
d. Josam 21500-16
e. Jay R. Smith 1080
f. Zurn Z100-W2
E. Storm Shelter Roof Drains

1. Roof Penetration Housings, LLC
a. Primary Roof Drain- CRD series
b. Secondary Roof Drain-COFRD series
F. Insulation
1. Provide insulation per Section 22 07 20.

90 Percent
G. Downspout Nozzles
1. Material
a. Cast Bronze
b. Provide bird screen on sizes 6 inch and larger.
2. Manufacturers
a. J. R. Smith
b. Mifab
c. Wade
d. Watts
e. Josam
f. Zurn
H. Roof Drain Ty-Seal and No-Hub Fitting Adhesive

1. Manufacturer:
a. Black Swan No-Hub Sealant
2.2 3/8 INCH PEA CLEAN PEA GRAVEL FOR SCHEDULE 40 PVC PIPING BELOW SLAB
A. Provide 3/8” clean pea gravel aggregate.as backfill for all schedule 40 PVC piping
below slab. Provide a minimum of 6 inches of pea gravel cover over pipe and under
pipe. Compact to 85% to 95%.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Minimum Slope:
1. 1/8 inch per foot unless otherwise shown
B. Drain Pipe and Fittings:

1. Use reduction fittings to connect pipes of different diameter
2. Use 45 degree wyes, long-sweep quarter bends, and sixth, eighth, and
sixteenth-bends to change directions.
3. Use long sweeps at the base of risers.
4. Provide cleanouts at every 100’ of piping and every change of direction.
C. Downspout nozzles:
1. To be installed no higher than 18” above adjacent grade to bottom of nozzle.
Contractor to be sure to coordinate rough-in for all projects with stem walls and
low brick ledges so that the pipe and elbow is roughed in before grade beam/stem
wall is poured.
D. Cleanouts
1. Provide cleanouts as required by applicable code and/or authority having
jurisdiction.
E. Painting
1. Paint any visible pipe in all drains or downspout nozzles flat black.

90 Percent
F. Roof Drains:
1. Secure flashing and roof material to drain with an underdeck clamp ring.
G. Field Quality Control

1. Test new drainage system before backfilling and connecting to storm sewers.
2. Maintain greater than 15 feet of hydrostatic head for 2 hours without a leak.
3. Any leaks detected shall be repaired and the system shall be retested until no
leaks are found.
4. Check and record heights of all emergency roof drains above roof grade and 10
feet from roof drain.
5. Submit test report and record of heights with close-out documents for Owner.
6. Camera all roof drains at substantial completion in the presence of Owner’s
representative.
7. Refer to Section 22 00 10 for backfilling and excavation.
H. Sand Embedment Backfill:

1. Sand for embedment shall be a free flowing material which contains no clay, is
reasonably free from organic material and does not form a muck or mud when
wet. The gradation shall be such that a minimum of 95% is retained on a #100
sieve. The P.I. of the soil fraction passing the No. 40 sieve shall not be greater
than 5.
I. Apply “Black Swan Sealant” to Ty-Seal, roof drain pipe and/or No-Hub coupling before
installing roof drain pipe to roof drain. Only apply at initial roof drain pipe to roof drain
connection.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 22 16 01
NATURAL GAS PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Natural gas piping
C. Section 22 05 30 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General
1.4 REFERENCES
ASTM A-53 Pipe, steel, black and hot-dipped, zinc coated, welded and
seamless
ASTM A-240/A240M-09b Standard specification for chromium and chromium-nickel
stainless steel plate, sheet, and strip for pressure vessels and
for general applications
ASTM D-2774 Underground installation of thermoplastic pressure piping
ASTM E84-09c Standard test method for surface burning characteristics of
building materials
ASTM F-1668 Construction procedures for buried plastic pipe
UL 181BM Procedures for HVAC system design and installation
NFPA - 54 National Fuel Gas Code
AWS American Welding Society
ASTM D2513 Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure
Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
ASME B16.44 Manually operated metallic gas valves for use in gas piping
systems up to 5 psi.
ANSI Z21.15 Manually operated gas valves for appliances, appliance
connector valves, and hose end valves.
Natural Gas Piping and Appurtenances 22 16 01 - 1

90 Percent
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
B. Submittals shall include:

1. Pipe
2. Pipe Supports
3. Fittings
4. Regulators
5. Sleeving Materials
6. All accessories
C. Submit product data indicating typical catalog of information including arrangements.
D. Submit product data sheets indicating dimensions, general assembly, and materials
used in fabrication.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of the gas piping with the City.
B. Obtain approval from the City of all pipe sizes before installing any piping.
C. Call gas company and Notification Center before digging.
A. All welders shall be certified by AWS or other accredited program.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. Press type fittings (equal to Megapress) will not be accepted as an equal to

welded and threaded fittings.
B. Above the slab and within the interior of the building:

1. Standard weight, Schedule 40 black steel pipe with malleable iron fittings.
Conform to ASTM A-53. Threaded on all gas piping on roof 2 inches in diameter
and smaller, butt joint welded on roof on all 2-1/2” diameter and larger, and socket
welded fittings on ALL fittings and joints inside the building.
C. Outside of the building and below grade:

1. Polyethylene gas pressure pipe and fittings with fused joints.

90 Percent
D. Transition Service Riser:

a. Central Plastics Co. (Shawnee, OK) 610-0111
2. Use for the underground riser leading into the building.
2.2 GAS COCKS
A. Type:
1. Brass with tee or square head for wrench operation.
2.3 UNIONS
A. Type:
1. Malleable iron, insulating type.
2.4 VALVES
A. Provide an approved design which does not allow locking in the open position.
B. Larger than 2 inches:

1. Provide with a lubricated stop.
2.5 GAS PIPE SLEEVING
A. Weld all joints of sleeves.
B. Pipe:
1. 10 gauge steel pipe, welded.
2. Sleeving material in accordance with Local Authority having jurisdiction.
C. Prior to installation verify with City all approved methods of gas pipe sleeving.
2.6 SOCKET WELD FITTINGS
A. Manufacturer
1. Anvil
2.7 ROOF PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. MAPA MS-5
2. Miro Industries Model 3 RAH (3-inch or less)
3. Pipe Hangers and Devices (PHP) Model PP10
4. Portable Pipe Hangers (PHP) Model PP10
5. ERICO RPS 360407
B. Manufacturer to select correct size for size and weight of pipes.
C. Pipe models listed above are for 3-inch or smaller gas pipe.
D. All roof supports to be equal to MAPA Products Model MS-5, adjustable height, select
size designed for size of pipe supported. MS-5 for 4” and smaller.

90 Percent
E. MAPA MWP ½” thick rubber walk pad.

F. Roof supports to support all gas piping a minimum of 6" above roof.
3. Spacing of Supports (Horizontal):
4. Spacing of Supports (Vertical):
At least every floor level install supports within 2-feet of every direction.
2.8 MEDIUM PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Itron B34 Series or as shown on drawings.
2. Fisher or equivalent
2.9 GAS METERS
A. Make all arrangements with local gas utility company to obtain gas service.
Coordinate exact location of meter, correct size, and pressure with gas utility company
as indicated on plans.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 POLYETHYLENE PIPING
A. Install a minimum of 18 inches deep.
B. Attach a number 18 copper tracer wire to the piping and terminate above grade at
both ends.
C. Do not bend the piping to a radius of less than 20 times the nominal diameter of the
pipe.
D. Installed piping with enough slack to ensure that it will not be subjected to thermally
induced strain which could damage the piping system.
E. Fusion joints according to manufacturer’s instruction.

90 Percent
3.2 BLACK STEEL PIPING
A. Make all joints above grade and on roof gas piping 2-1/2" and larger by welding.
B. Do not install steel piping underground, except at risers.
C. Protect all underground black steel piping, (including underground riser to a point at
least 6 inches above grade) where exposed on the exterior against corrosion by
means of yellow "polyken" wrapping, 3M #51 "Scotchwrap", or Republic Steel's
"X-Tru-Coat". Gas pipe protective coatings shall be approved types, machine applied
conforming to recognized standards.
D. Field wrapping shall provide equivalent protection and is restricted to those short
sections and fittings necessarily stripped for threading or welding.
E. Provide a #17 anode, insulating fittings, etc., for cathodic protection at the meter and
each entry underground.
3.3 GAS COCKS
A. Provide all final connections with gas cocks.
B. Mount gas cocks in vertical pipes only on all rooftop gas-fired equipment.
3.4 GAS TURRETS IN SCIENCE/BIOLOGY/CHEMISTRY LABS
A. Plumbing contractor to provide low pressure gas piping, routed behind casework or
in wall to each and every gas turret on laboratory casework. Coordinate all turret
locations with the architects laboratory casework plan.
3.5 VALVES
A. Provide all outlets at individual sites and any building supplied by the system with a
readily accessible approved valve.
B. Install valves in the gas piping within 3 feet of each appliance and ahead of the union
connection.
3.6 MEDIUM PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. All regulators shall be located in mechanical rooms, or on roofs as shown on plans.
B. Each regulator shall have a separate vent to the outside.
C. Each regulator shall be installed with an approved gas valve upstream of each
regulator.
D. Gas regulators to be installed no closer than 10’-0” to any outside air intake.

90 Percent
3.7 GAS PIPE SLEEVING LOCATIONS
A. Sleeve all gas piping routed in concrete masonry walls and extend vent up through
gooseneck roof termination. Gas piping routed down ICF or tilt wall panels shall not
be routed in these walls. Route down along these wall types in chase wall.
B. Vent all science/biology/chemistry valve enclosures up thru roof and terminate on roof
with a gooseneck. Coordinate all valve enclosures with electrical contractor.
Furnished by the electrical contractor and installed by the plumbing contractor.
C. Sleeve all gas pipe roof penetrations from the hooded roof penetration thru the roof
decking. Penetration at decking to be cut neatly and shall match the perimeter of pipe
to allow fire putty application.
D. At the main gas line building entry up to roof, sleeve gas piping from the point of entry
up to the hooded roof penetration.
E. All gas lines serving science/biology/chemistry demonstration desk will be sleeved in

schedule 40 PVC pipe and fittings. Pipe and fittings to be glued and tested for leaks
before backfilling. Sleeve ends to extend no less than 6” above slab.
F. Sleeve all gas piping routed down in walls that are fire rated or are sound walls that
have sheetrock extending up to the bottom side of the roof decking. Sleeve to
terminate on room side of entry point and exit point of gas piping.
3.8 SOCKET WELD FITTING LOCATIONS
A. All interior gas piping in all locations (other than those locations in section 3.6 of this
specification) to be installed using socket weld fittings. Install per manufacturers
recommendations.
3.9 UNIONS
A. Install a union at every fifty feet of roof piping, every change in direction, and at each
gas regulator assembly, as noted on gas regulator detail.
3.10 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
A. Connect the gas piping with pipe fittings.
B. Provide for thermal expansion for straight runs of pipe over 100 feet.
C. Flexible connectors will not be allowed to any equipment. Connect with black steel
pipe and unions.
3.11 GAS METER
A. Coordinate with gas utility.

90 Percent
3.12 SLOPE
A. Slope all pipe a minimum of 1/4 inch per 15 feet to prevent traps. All horizontal lines
shall slope to the risers and slope from the risers to the meter or to a service regulator
when a meter is not provided.
B. If a trap is unavoidable, a drip leg shall be installed. Drip legs shall be installed at the
meter and at all appliances. Drip leg to be a minimum of 4” from tee turn down to cap.
3.13 PAINTING
A. Paint in accordance with architectural specifications and color selected by Architect.

Color to be flat black on roof and to match wall color on vertical riser to roof if color
not otherwise instructed.
3.14 INSPECTION
A. Do not enclose or cover any work until it has been inspected, tested and accepted by
local authority having jurisdiction.
3.15 TESTING
A. Procedure:
1. Subject gas piping systems to a pneumatic pressure test of 60 pounds per square
inch for 30 minutes.
2. While the systems are subject to this air pressure, apply a soapy water solution
to all welded joints for the purpose of detecting minute, as well as larger leaks.
3. If leaks are found in welded lines, repair by chipping and rewelding operations.
4. Repeat alternate testing and rewelding operations until the gas piping systems
are absolutely tight.
5. If leaks occur at threaded joints, eliminate such leaks by replacing the fittings or
properly tightening them.
6. Finally, subject the entire gas piping system to a pneumatic pressure test of 50
psi for a period of 24 hours and demonstrate that the piping system is absolutely
tight.
B. Perform any other tests as required by the City or other governing bodies.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 22 33 34
ACCESS DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Access doors
Appurtenances
E. Section 22 13 18 - Condensate Piping
F. Section 22 16 01 - Natural Gas Piping and Appurtenances
G. Section 22 40 01 - Plumbing Fixtures and Fixture Carriers
1.4 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acudor
B. Elmdor
C. Mifab
2.2 ACCESS DOORS
Access Doors 22 33 34 - 1
90 Percent
A. Locations requiring access doors:

1. Concealed valves
2. Traps
3. Trap primers
4. Controls
5. Cleanouts
6. Equipment above hard ceilings.
7. Other equipment requiring accessibility for operation and maintenance.
B. Type:
1. Hinged flush-type steel framed door with straps and exposed narrow border.
C. Minimum size:
1. 18" x 18" unless otherwise indicated.
2. 24” x 24” for equipment above hard ceilings.
3. Conform to architectural panel pattern for acoustical ceilings.
4. Confirm size with Building Inspector and Engineer.
D. Construction:
1. Hinges:
a. Concealed continuous type.
2. Locking Device:
a. Flush cam type, screw driver operated.
E. Fire Rating:
1. Same or better fire rating than the surrounding area.
F. Access doors located in kitchens, restrooms or areas where water is present shall be
stainless steel.
2.3 FACTORY PAINTING
A. Apply prime coat of rust inhibiting paint, unless located in wet area.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B. In suspended acoustical ceilings, provide a beaded pin or other approved means for
identification and easy removal where necessary.
C. Access doors shall only be installed in areas/locations that are readily accessible.
D. Doors shall be installed in such a manner that door will open 180 degrees.
90 Percent
E. Access doors in walls, serving cut-off valves, trap primers, cleanouts shall be
coordinated with the architect/engineer. Top of access doors to be below bottom of
wall mount lavatory apron. Access doors will not be allowed in walls above this height
unless coordinated with the architect/engineer.
END OF SECTION
90 Percent
SECTION 22 40 01
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE CARRIERS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Water Heaters
B. Thermometers
C. Pressure Gages
D. Pete’s Plugs
E. Expansion Tanks
F. Circulating Pumps
G. ADA Accessories
H. Water Closets
I. Urinals
J. Mop sinks
K. Lavatories
L. Wash Fountains
M. Electric Drinking Fountains
N. Sinks
O. Fixture carriers
P. Thermostatic Mixing Valves
Q. Back Flow Preventers
R. Other Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment
Plumbing Fixtures and Fixture Carriers 22 40 01 - 1

90 Percent
S. Floor Drains and Floor Sinks
T. Commercial Washers and Dryers
U. Ice Makers
V. Interceptors
Appurtenances
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE 90-75 - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air Conditioning

Engineers, Inc. (Energy Conservation Standard in New Buildings)
B. PDI WH201 - Plumbing & Drainage Institute (Water Hammer Arresters)
C. ANSI Z21.22 - American National Standards Institute (Relief Valves & Automatic Gas
Shutoff Devices)
D. AGA - American Gas Association
E. ADA - Americans With Disabilities Act
F. TAS - Texas Accessibility Standards
G. ASSE 1069 - Performance Requirements for Automatic Temperature Control Mixing

Valves
H. ASSE 1070 - Water Temperature Limiting Devices
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 22 00 10,
General Conditions, and Division 01.
B. Indicate on submittal construction materials, finishes, sizes, quantities, and related

hardware.

90 Percent
C. Product Data:
1. Plumbing fixtures
2. Carriers
3. Fixture trim
D. Certification:
1. Submit certification that complete system complies with test requirements of
municipality, State, and other public authorities having jurisdiction over system.
E. Provide closeout documents as required in Division 01, Section 22 00 10.
A. Provide faucets, fittings, supply stops and similar devices of one manufacturer.
B. Verify that the voltage is the same as scheduled on the electrical drawings. If not,
change at no cost to the Owner.
C. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with requirements in following order of precedence:
a. Codes, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority
having jurisdiction over installation, inspection, and testing, including local
codes.
b. Provisions specified in this section.
c. Local Plumbing Code.
1.7 HANDLING
A. Deliver fixtures crated and in undamaged condition.
B. Replace damaged fixtures with new fixtures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All plumbing fixtures shall be new and as shown on the plans.
B. Furnish plumbing fixtures with carriers shown and all necessary trimming.
C. All porcelain enameled cast iron to be acid resistant.
D. All supplies shall be IPS brass with stops.
E. All exposed finished metal parts shall be chromium plated.
F. Rough bodied parts shall be heavily nickel plated.
G. Galvanized nipples will not be permitted.

90 Percent
H. Traps for lavatories, sinks, etc. shall be 17 gauge three-piece chrome plated cast
brass with cleanout and IPS tailpiece and chrome plated sleeve.
I. All escutcheons on supplies and waste shall be heavy cast brass set-screw type.
J. Furnish faucets and supply stops with renewable seats.
K. All storage tanks and/or tank type water heaters to be installed with heat traps either
in the vertical piping at the water heater connection or in the water heater inlet/outlet
connection port.
2.2 WATER HEATERS
A. Type:
1. Commercial Grade Electric:
a. ASME Code Section IV (more than 58 KW)
b. Minimum Working Pressure:
(1) 160 psi
2. Commercial Grade Gas:
a. ASME Code Section IV (more than 200,000 BTU input)
b. AGA Seal of Certification
c. Minimum Working Pressure:
(1) 150 psi
B. Tank Construction:
1. Insulation:
a. Heavy density fiberglass insulation trimmed with a baked enamel steel
jacket.
2. Cleanout:
a. Boiler type hand-hole
3. Temperature and Relief Valve:
a. Comply with ANSI Z21.22
b. Discharge line from valve to be same size as valve outlet
4. Coatings:
a. Multiple coats of a high-temperature or 316 stainless steel tank construction.
C. Low NOx Requirements:

1. All water heaters/boilers shall meet the TNRCC and TCEQ standards for low NOx
as follows:
a. ≤ 75 MBTU 55 PPM
b. > 75 ≤ 400 MBTU 55 PPM
c. > 400 MBTU 30 PPM
2. Boilers/water heaters not meeting these standards will be rejected.
D. Approved Manufacturers:
1. A.O. Smith
2. Bradford White
3. Heat Transfer Products
4. Larrs

90 Percent
5. Lochinvar
6. Rheem
7. State
8. Noritz
9. Rinnai
10. Takagi
11. EEMAX (Electric Tankless)
12. Chronomite (Electric Tankless)
E. Warranties:
1. Commercial Grade Electric:
a. 3-year warranty on storage tank
b. 1-year warranty on parts
2. Commercial Grade Gas:
a. 5-year warranty on heat exchanger
b. 1-year warranty on parts
F. Provide a 4-inch thick concrete housekeeping pad and drain pan for all floor mount
water heaters.
G. Neutralization kits on condensate drain line for all high efficient (90% AFUE or greater)
water heaters, equal to JJM Boiler Works, Inc.
2.3 EXPANSION TANK
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Thrush-Amtrol
2. Watts - DETA Series
3. Bell & Gossett PTA Series
4. Watts-PLT
B. Provide and install expansion tank at each water heater installation per
manufacturer's requirements. All expansion tanks shall bear ASME seal that serve
boilers (greater than 200,000 BTUH or 120 gallons of storage).
2.4 CIRCULATING PUMPS
1. Armstrong
2. Bell & Gossett PL Series
3. Grundfos
4. Astro
B. Pumps are to be 100% bronze construction (Lead Free).
C. Provide time clock for circulation pump control if pump is not controlled by a central
building energy management system.
2.5 THERMOMETERS

90 Percent
A. Type:
1. 9" adjustable angle thermometer
B. Construction:
1. Temperature range:
a. Fahrenheit degrees as approved by the Engineer.
2. Window:
a. Unbreakable Plexiglas.
b. Furnish with separable socket.
a. Trerice BX91403 ½
b. MILJOCO SX935\
2.6 VACUUM RELIEF VALVES
A. Type:
1. Male NPT, low profile, and lead free.
B. Manufacturer/Model
1. Watts LFN36
2. Mifab
3. Cash Acme
C. Construction:
1. Low profile
2. All lead free brass body
3. Protective cap
4. Testes and rated to ANSI Z21.22
5. CSA certified
6. Maximum temperature 250 degrees F.
2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Type:
1. 4" dial type pressure gauge
B. Manufacturer/Model:
1. Trerice 500X
2. MILJOCO P4509LX
3. Range is minimum 1 ½ times working pressure of T & P Valve.
C. Construction:
1. Pressure range:
a. As approved by the Engineer.
2. Cast aluminum case
3. Double strength clear glass window
4. Stainless steel movement
5. Phosphor bronze tube
6. Brass socket
7. Furnish with a Trerice No. 880 lever handle gauge cock.

90 Percent
D. Accuracy: 1/2 of 1% of scale range.
2.8 PETE'S PLUGS
A. Provide two sets of suitable pressure and temperature gauges for use with the
plugs.
2.9 ADA ACCESSORIES
A. P-Trap and water supplies with stop guards

1. Usage: Each ADA lavatory
2. Size: Verify with fixture
a. Truebro Lav-Guard 102 or 105 (verify usage)
b. Plumberex Pro Extreme #X4333 and X4114 (verify usage)
2.10 WATER CLOSETS, URINALS AND LAVATORIES
1. American Standard
2. Kohler
3. Sloan
4. Zurn
2.11 CARRIERS FOR WATER CLOSETS, URINALS, LAVATORIES AND ELECTRIC

WATER COOLERS
A. Water Closets:
1. Wade 300 Series
2. Watts
3. Mifab
4. Zurn
5. Josam
B. Urinals:
1. Wade 400 Series
2. Watts
3. JR Smith
4. Mifab
5. Zurn
6. Josam
C. Lavatories:
1. Wade 520 Series
2. Watts
3. JR Smith
4. Mifab
5. Zurn
6. Josam

90 Percent
D. Electric Water Coolers:

1. Wade 400
2. Watts
3. J.R. Smith
4. Mifab
5. Zurn
6. Josam
2.12 WATER HYDRANTS
1. Woodford
2. Wade
3. MAPA
4. Mifab
5. Josam
6. JR Smith
7. Zurn
8. Prier Products
B. All frost proof water hydrants mounted in building or roof shall be designed to not
require an independent drain line, unless specifically stated on construction drawings.
2.13 FAUCETS
1. American Standard
2. Chicago
3. Delta
4. Symmons
5. Moen
6. T & S Brass
7. Zurn AquaSpec
8. Speakman
9. Elkay
10. Just
2.14 SINKS
1. Elkay
2. Just
2.15 KITCHEN HAND SINK
A. Approved Manufacturer:
1. Advance Tabco

90 Percent
2.16 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS
1. Elkay
2. Halsey-Taylor
3. Oasis
4. Acorn
5. Murdock
B. All electric water coolers shall have vandal resistant bubbler and pushbutton
activation mechanism.
C. All electric water coolers shall have mechanical control valves to provide operation
and water flow in the event of loss of electrical power.
2.17 MOP SINKS
1. Fiat
2. Stern Williams
3. Acorn
4. Creative Industries Terrazzo Products, Inc.
2.18 SHOWERS
1. Acorn
2. Bradley
2.19 WASH FOUNTAINS
1. Acorn
2. Bradley
3. Willoughby
4. Sloan
2.20 FLOOR DRAINS/FLOOR SINKS
1. J.R. Smith
2. Josam
3. Mifab
4. Sioux Chief
5. Wade
6. Watts
7. Zurn

90 Percent
2.21 FLUSH VALVES
1. Manual:
a. Sloan #111 Series Water Closets, #186 Series Urinals
b. Zurn #Z6000, WSI Water Closets, #Z-6003-WSI Urinals
2. Automatic Sensor Type: Battery Top Mount:
a. Sloan Water Closets: 8111, Urinals: Sloan 8186-0.5
b. (No Zurn Equals) 8111-1.28
2.22 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES
1. Acorn Controls
2. Apollo
3. Bradley
4. Conbraco
5. Leonard
6. Powers
7. Symmons
8. Watts
B. Thermostatic mixing valves for showers shall comply with ASSE 1069.
C. Thermostatic mixing valves for lavatories and sinks shall comply with ASSE 1070.
Provide inlet checkstops and inlet y-strainers.
D. Thermostatic mixing valves for emergency fixtures shall comply with ASSE 1071.
2.23 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Reduced Pressure Zone

1. Bronze or FDA approved epoxy coated cast iron body.
2. Maximum Working Pressure: 175 psi
3. Provide full line size strainer before reduced pressure zone assembly.
4. Provide air gap assembly.
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Apollo
2. Conbraco
3. Watts
4. Zurn
5. Ames
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. All equipment surfaces coming in contact with walls, floors, or surfaces of other

90 Percent
fixtures shall be ground truly flat and shall be bedded with fine dental plaster.
B. Install an approved vacuum breaker or backflow preventer on each water supply line
serving a plumbing fixture which has a water supply below the rim of the fixture.
Vacuum breakers shall be designed to prevent any possible backflow through them.
Where these are installed in chrome plated lines, they shall be chrome plated to
match.
C. Provide and install a check valve on the cold water supply serving each and every
water heater on project.
D. Temperature and pressure relief line to be piped full sized and in copper to exterior of
building, or as noted on plans.
E. Set water heater storage temperature to 140°F.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and completely install all fixtures shown on plans and as specified.
B. Properly anchor all fixtures, lines, or equipment to construction.
C. Clean all plumbing fixtures before final inspection and acceptance by the Architect.
D. Install all fixtures to proper heights as shown on the plans and in the codes. Refer to
Texas Accessibility Standards. Coordinate height with plans. If different from
engineering plans, contact the Architect for the correct height. Do not install until
written approval is issued by the Architect. If fixture cannot be installed to proper
height given, contact Architect for direction. No cost changes will be allowed for
changes to piping to correct the problem.
E. Install Handi Lav-Guard Kits per manufacturer on ADA lavatories.
F. Provide and install thermostatic mixing valves at all ADA lavatories, sinks, wash
stations and lavatory systems. Set tempered water supply to 90 to 95 degrees
F(tempered), unless noted otherwise by owner.
G. Provide and install thermostatic mixing valves at all emergency shower/eyewashes to

85 degrees F (tepid), unless noted otherwise by owner.
H. Install water heater expansion tank on cold water entering the water heater or storage
tank.
I. Provide timeclock to control shutdown of water heater and circulation pumps per
energy code.
J. All tankless water heaters to be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations. All

multiple tankless water heater arrangements must be provided with manufacturer’s
shop drawings showing all components, piping arrangement, and controllers.

90 Percent
K. Horizontal Y-Strainers shall be located:

1. On domestic water main entry into the building provide a horizontal Y-strainer
downstream of the building isolation valve and upstream of the backflow
preventer.
2. Where infrared controlled lavatories or hand sinks are provided downstream of
the supply stops exposed under the fixture.
3. In gang or private (individual) restrooms directly downstream of the isolation
valves behind the access panel.
L. Provide backflow preventer (reduced pressure zone) at all ice maker/machines,

coffee/drink dispensers where shown on architectural and plumbing drawings.
Discharge from R.P.Z. to be drained to nearest floor sink/drain.
M. Provide framing support attached to building structure for all roof hose bibs. Install per
manufacturers recommendations.
N. Install vacuum relief valves on the cold water supply line at an elevation no less than
12” above top of storage tank/water heater.
A. Inspect all faucets, flush valves, stop valves and other equipment for proper amount
of water discharged. Adjust as required to meet low water consumption and
ADA/Texas Accessibility Standards.
B. Correct any faucet or other equipment as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
C. Protect all drains during construction. Install covers on all floor drains and floor sinks
until substantial completion.
D. Do not install mop sinks until substantial completion.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 23 00 00
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL

Conditions, and Division 01 Specifications apply to this Section.
A. Basic mechanical requirements necessary to provide complete installation of all

Division 23 work.
1.3 WORK INCLUDED

installation of the mechanical systems as shown on the plans and as specified herein.
A. General:
Basic Mechanical Requirements 23 00 00 - 1

90 Percent
B. Applicable Codes and Standards for All Division 23 Work:

1. International Building Code
2. International Gas Code
3. International Plumbing Code
4. International Mechanical Code
5. International Energy Conservation Code
6. National Electrical Code
7. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
Standards.
8. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards:
a. OSHA Standard 2207 - Construction Industry Standards
b. OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926 - Regulation of Excavation
c. Texas Underground Facility Damage Prevention Act (H.B. 2295)
d. All other applicable standards
9. National Fire Protection Association:
a. NFPA No. 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
10. Texas State Board of Insurance Standards
11. Clean Air Act and Clean Air Act Amendments
12. State Codes:
a. Texas Department of Labor Boiler Rules and Regulations
b. All other applicable codes
13. Local Municipal Codes and Ordinances
1.5 SCHEDULE OF ABBREVIATIONS
A. Reference Standards are listed in Section 23 using abbreviations listed below:

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ADC Air Diffusion Council
A/E Architect/ Engineer
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
AHRI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers
CGA Compressed Gas Association

90 Percent
FM Factory Mutual
GSHPA Ground Source Heat Pump Association
TCEQ Texas Commission on Environmental Quality
UBC Uniform Building Code
E. All mechanical equipment and fixtures shall be the same brand unless scheduled
differently on plans.
F. Contractor's Responsibility:
1. Erect barricades, protective fencing, and signs to prevent injury to personnel on
site.
2. Make permanent connection to utilities or existing lines. Determine depth and
3. Relocate and repair any existing lines cut by general construction work.
4. Pay all costs in connection with metering devices.
5. Plans do not show exact location and elevations of lines, nor do they show all
offsets required.

90 Percent
6. Deviate from plans as required to conform to the general construction and

provide proper grading.
7. Maintain all utility services during construction to existing portions of job that
remain.
8. Procure and pay for all necessary permits or licenses to carry out the work.
9. Obtain and pay for all the necessary certificates of approval which must be
delivered to the A/E before final acceptance of the work.
10. Periodically remove rubbish, clean or repair all surfaces marred by the work
required under this contract.
11. Protect work from damage by other trades.
12. Make all tests required by law; pay all costs in connection with the testing.
13. Where job conditions require changes in indicated locations and arrangement,
make such changes without extra cost to Owner.
14. Provide motor starters, controls, relays, all low-voltage wiring, conduit and wiring
related to HVAC and other equipment and devices to form a complete working
system. See Section 26 00 00.
1.7 DEFINITIONS
A. Approval:
1. It is understood that approval must be obtained from the A/E in writing before
proceeding with the proposed work.
2. Approval by the A/E of any changes, submitted by the Contractor will be
B. Contractor:
1. The Contractor engaged to execute the work included in a particular section only,
even though he may be technically described as a Subcontractor to the General
Contractor.
2. If the Contractor engaged to execute said work employs Sub-Contractors to
perform various portions of the work included under this Section, he shall be held
responsible for the execution of same, in full conformity with Contract Document
requirements.
3. The Contractor shall cooperate at all times and shall be responsible for the
satisfactory cooperation of his Subcontractors with the other Contractors on the
job so that all of the various phases of the work may be properly coordinated
without unnecessary delays or damage to any parts of the work of any Contractor.
C. Provide:
1. Defined as requiring the furnishing and installing of the item or facility indicated,
complete in all respects and ready for operation unless otherwise specifically
noted.
1.8 WARRANTY

90 Percent
1.9 SITE VISIT

1.10 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 23 00 90 for submittal procedures.
B. Upon submitting his request for final payment, he shall turn over to the A/E, for
subsequent transmittal to the Owner, a clean, neatly marked set of reproducible plans
showing "as installed" work and an electronic file with changes of materials.
black in color, neat in appearance, and turned over to the A/E for checking and
subsequent delivery to the Owner. Electronic copies of the following are also
acceptable, but they must be saved to a single flash drive or external hard drive:
3. Copies of approved shop drawings.

90 Percent
of the following:
1.12 TRAINING
location, operation, and maintenance of all mechanical equipment and systems, some
sections have further instructions.
representative.
complete system.
and measurements of the building and in cooperation with other contractors, and in
all cases, shall be subject to the approval of the A/E.
E. The A/E reserves the right to make any reasonable change in the location of any part
of this work without additional cost to the Owner.

as to accuracy.

90 Percent
evidence thereof.
and coordinate with the Owner, A/E, and Utility the scheduling of any shutdowns or
delays that may occur in providing service.
C. The Engineer will consider all such submittals and the A/E will issue an addendum
listing items which the Engineer considers acceptable. Only such items as specified
or approved as acceptable will be installed on this project.

specified.

90 Percent
4. After Award of the Contract, substitutions will be considered only under one or
more of the following circumstances:
a. The substitution is required for compliance with subsequent interpretations
of code or insurance requirements.
b. The specified product is unavailable through no fault of the Contractor.
c. The manufacturer refuses to warranty the specified products as required.
d. Subsequent information that the specified product is unable to perform
properly or to fit in the designated space.
e. In the Engineer's sole judgment, the substitution would be in the Owner's
best interest.
5. Revisions to the mechanical system shall be under the supervision of the
Engineer at a standard hourly rate charged by the Engineer and shall be paid by
the Contractor originating the changes.
before calling upon the A/E to make a final inspection.
listing each paper included, and shall deliver the same to the A/E at or before the time
of said final inspection. The Contractor is cautioned to check over each bond, receipt,
etc., before preparing for submission to verify that the terms check with the
requirements of the specifications.
1.18 ASBESTOS

90 Percent

expense in a neat and workmanlike manner, and as approved by the A/E.
obtaining written permission of the A/E.
F. All openings in firewalls and floors shall be completely sealed after installation for a
completely airtight installation. Sealing material shall be non-combustible and UL
approved. The installed sealing assembly shall not cause the fire rating of the
penetrated structure to be decreased.
1.20 IDENTIFICATION


1.22 RELATED WORK
A. Whether specifically identified or not, it is the responsibility of the Mechanical

Contractor to coordinate all mechanical work with all related trades.
1.23 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND EQUIPMENT FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

90 Percent
A. All wiring, conduit, boxes, equipment (controls, thermostats, relays, contactors, motor
starters, heaters, switches) and any other control devices or equipment required to
form a complete and properly operating system, shall be the responsibility of the
Mechanical Contractor.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall only provide line voltage (including hook-up) to all
mechanical equipment.
C. All mechanical controls and devices shall be low voltage unless otherwise noted or
shown on the plans. Where line voltage controls or devices are noted, the Contractor
shall provide complete wiring diagrams (approved by the Engineer) to the Electrical
Contractor prior to final hook-up.
D. All electrical resistance heating elements which are scheduled to be served by

three-phase electrical power shall impose an equal electrical load on all phases.
Electrical resistance elements which are not balanced over all three phases are not
acceptable.
E. The Mechanical and Electrical plans are based on the equipment and devices
scheduled as shown on the plans or as called for in the specifications. Should any
mechanical equipment or device be changed or approved from those which are
shown or noted, all electrical and/or mechanical changes shall be made at the
expense of the trade or contractor initiating the change with no expense to the Owner,
Architect, Engineer or their representatives.
F. All wiring provided by this Contractor shall be installed in a workmanlike manner using
tie wraps, labels, anchors and etc. Loose wiring is not acceptable.
G. All conduit and boxes required in all walls for control purposes (thermostats, etc.) shall
be provided by electrical contractor. All conduit required in attic, clear spaces, or on
roof shall be by mechanical contractor.
A. When any piece of mechanical or electrical equipment is operable and the

Contractor needs to operate the equipment, he may do so providing that he properly
supervises the operation.

90 Percent
1.25 SAFETY GUARDS
guarded.
A. All materials and adhesives used for air conditioning filters, acoustical lining and
insulation shall conform to NFPA and UL life and flame spread properties of materials.
B. The composite classifications shall not exceed the flame spread rating and the smoke
development rating as outlined by NFPA 255/ ASTM E-84 for the basic material, the
finishes, adhesives, etc., specified for each system, and shall be such when
completely assembled.
1.27 FILTER ASSEMBLIES
A. All filter housings and assemblies shall be factory built and supplied with the unit. A
separate filter rack may be required and is the responsibility of the mechanical
contractor to provide.
B. Access doors (panels) which must be opened to change the air filters shall be labeled
"Filter Access" and the number and size of required filters shall be identified.
C. No piping conduit etc. shall be installed in front of this access door.
D. Install clean filters prior to substantial completion.
E. All air handlers shall have filters installed upstream of all coils.
1.28 LEAD MATERIALS
1.29 REFRIGERANTS
A. Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) and Hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs) shall not be

allowed in any equipment on this project.
B. Comply with ASHRAE Standards 15 and 34.
1.30 REFRIGERANT RECOVERY AND RECYCLE
A. Refrigerants shall not be released to the environment.
B. Contractor shall provide recovery and recycle equipment that has been certified by
the Electrical Testing Laboratories or Underwriters Laboratories.

90 Percent
C. Contractor shall also provide properly trained and certified (in accordance with EPA)
personnel for refrigerant work during installation, demolition, start-up, servicing, etc.
A. Proper access to all installed equipment shall be provided. The Mechanical

Contractor shall label all points of access immediately upon installation with a marker
pen.
B. A minimum of 3 feet shall be maintained in front of all access points.
C. If another trade violates this space, the Mechanical Contractor shall immediately
notify the General Contractor to correct this condition.
D. When equipment is installed above lay-in ceiling the Mechanical Contractor shall
coordinate with the Ceiling Contractor to provide access without removing part of T-
bar ceiling.
E. No speakers, lights, fire alarm equipment, etc. shall be installed in lay-in ceiling tiles
where access is to be gained.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Not Applicable
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING
A. After all mechanical systems have been completed and put into operation, subject
each system to an operating test under design conditions to ensure proper sequence
and operation throughout the range of operation regardless of the season the
contractor shall test all HVAC equipment in both heating and cooling modes.
B. Each and every phase of the new air conditioning, heating and ventilating systems
shall be operated separately, or in conjunction with the other, for a period of time, to
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the A/E the ability of the equipment to meet the
capacity and performance requirements while maintaining design conditions in
accordance with the true intent and purpose of these specifications.
C. Previous to such performance tests, the Contractor shall have set all valves, dampers,
motors, controllers, thermostats, etc., and shall have the system operating and
maintaining design temperatures, humidity and air circulation throughout all areas of
the building.
D. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of all systems.
E. Special tests on individual systems are specified under individual sections.

90 Percent
F. See Section 23 05 93 for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 23 00 90
HVAC SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY


1. HVAC submittal procedures
1.3 RELATED SECTION
A. Division 01 - Submittal Procedures
1.4 DEFINITIONS


deficiencies.

for conformance with contract requirements (e.g. start-up reports).
HVAC Submittal Procedures 23 00 90 - 1

90 Percent
1.5 SUBMITTALS



E. Electronic Submittals: E-mail or other electronic forms of submittals from the

desired.

communication will be treated as normal coordination correspondence and will not be
tracked or documented as a formal submittal. The engineer may or may not respond
to such correspondence. If the engineer agrees, in writing, to the use of a particular
item, then that same material shall be included in the initial submittal package along
with a copy of the correspondence.

by the engineer, the contractor shall be liable for the removal and replacement of such
unapproved materials and equipment, at no additional expense to the owner.
Additionally, if the removal and replacement of rejected materials or equipment
necessitates the removal and replacement of other related materials or equipment,
then the contractor shall be liable for the removal and replacement of the related
materials and equipment at no additional expense to the owner.
H. Product Data: Where the content of manufacturer submittal literature includes data
not pertinent to the submittal, clearly indicate which portions of the contents are being
submitted for review. Catalogs, pamphlets, or other documents submitted to describe
items on which review is being requested shall be specific and identifications in
catalog, pamphlets, etc., of items submitted shall be clearly made in a contrasting ink
or highlighting. Data of a general nature shall not be acceptable.

90 Percent
I. Shop Drawings:
2. Electronic shop drawing submittals are required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Not applicable
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals of product data, shop drawings, samples, quality assurance

B. Grouping of Submittals:
2. In the case that multiple submissions are approved, it is the responsibility of the
contractor to maintain and update a submittal check list. The contractor shall
ensure that all applicable submittal sections are submitted to the Engineer. If a
submittal section is not submitted, it will be considered rejected until reviewed by
the Engineer.
3. If submittal sections are submitted as individual submittal files, the submittal
sections will be grouped and returned as one file with one set of submittal
responses.
C. Electronic Submittal Organization:

1. Electronic submittals are to be submitted as a single PDF file. Within the PDF
file, each section shall be bookmarked.
2. Provide an electronic submittal cover sheet that lists at least the following:
a. Project name
b. Date
f. Name, address and telephone number of HVAC contractor
g. Name, address and telephone number of HVAC supplier
3. Provide an electronic index sheet listing all items submitted.
4. The contractor shall call to the attention of the engineer, clouded in the submittal
and noted after the index sheet, any instance in which the submittals are known

90 Percent
a. Provide an electronic section cover sheet that lists the same information as
the submittal cover sheet, plus the specification number and title and the
b. Refer to the individual Division 23 specification sections for any required
c. Bookmarked sections shall be arranged by specification section number in
numerical order.
d. Submit in accordance with these procedures and procedures described in
Division 01 Submittal Procedures.
e. Submittals not organized as described here may be rejected, without being
D. Response to engineer’s review:

1. Review comments: Review comments of the engineer will either be shown on the
returned sets to the contractor or shown on a document attached to the sets. If
the comments are on an attached document, then the engineer will place a note
engineer’s signature will appear only on the attached document. If the attached,
signed document becomes physically separated from the submittal, then the
submittal will no longer be considered as being a reviewed submittal.
2. Complete rejection: If the submittal is not complete or does not meet the
requirements of this specification section, then the engineer may reject the entire
submittal and return the submittal without further review or comment. In such
cases, the entire submittal shall be completely revised and resubmitted. The
resubmittal shall be given a new submittal number and shall be documented and
3. Held for completion: If the submittal is not complete, but is only missing some
minor item, the engineer may, at the engineer’s sole discretion, hold the submittal
rather than rejecting and returning the submittal. In such cases, the engineer will
notify the architect and contractor that the submittal is being held for completion.
The contractor will be given a predetermined amount of time to provide the
missing item. Upon receipt of the missing item, the engineer will insert the missing
item into the submittal package and proceed with the review process.
4. Partial rejection: The engineer may reject only certain portions of the submittal.
In such cases, only those rejected portions or items need to be revised and
resubmitted.
5. Provide as noted and corrected: The engineer may note a required change to a
submitted item but may not consider the change serious enough to require a
resubmittal. In such cases, the engineer will note that the item is to be provided
as noted or corrected. In such cases, the contractor may proceed to provide the
item. However, if subsequent observations reveal that the noted change was not
made, then the contractor shall be liable for removal and replacement of the item
at no additional cost to the owner.
6. Reviewed without comment: The contractor may proceed to provide all materials
and equipment as submitted.

90 Percent
E. Close-out Submittals:

90 Percent

23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and
Equipment
Isolation Devices
Piping hangers and supports
23 05 32 Roof Curbs
Roof curbs
23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
Label material and attachment method (No
adhesives)
Sample identification tag(s)
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
Test and Balance Company
Sample test and balance forms
23 07 13 Duct and Grille Insulation
Insulation thickness and R-value
23 07 21 Refrigerant Piping Insulation
23 09 23 Energy Management Control System
Energy Management Controls company
Control Devices
System configuration drawings
Sequences of Operation
23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping
Piping material
23 31 13 Metal Ductwork
Ductwork material
Type of ductwork
23 33 33 Access Doors
Access door material
23 34 16 HVAC Fans
Fan manufacturer
Voltage/ phase
Fan CFM
Fan static pressure
23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Grille manufacturer
23 43 23 Bipolar Ionization Air Purification System
Bipolar ionization manufacturer
Bipolar ionization type
23 81 19 Packaged HVAC Units
Unit manufacturer
Voltage/ phase
Unit capacity
Unit options and specifics
23 81 26 Split System HVAC Units

90 Percent

Unit manufacturer
Voltage/ phase
Unit capacity
Unit options and specifics
23 82 39 Electric Unit Heaters
Unit manufacturer
Voltage/ phase
Unit capacity
1 - Reviewed
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Isolation pads
B. Concrete bases
C. Expansion joints
D. Chilled water, Hot water, and Refrigerant Piping supports
E. Other supports
A. Section 23 00 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements
B. Section 23 09 23 - Energy Management Control System
C. Section 23 31 13 - Metal Ductwork
D. Section 23 34 16 - HVAC Fans
E. Section 23 81 26 - Split System HVAC Units
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Provide submittal data on all items specified in this section in accordance with
Section 23 00 90, General Conditions, and Division 1.
2. Submit shop drawings and catalog data with locations of use.
Hangers and Supports For HVAC Piping And Equipment 23 05 29 - 1

90 Percent
1.5 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Section 23 00 00 for complete names of references identified in this

section.
B. SMACNA Standards
C. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

Engineers
A. Isolation devices must be provided by a company whose sole business is to provide

isolation equipment.
B. All equipment and materials to be installed in workmanlike manner by experienced

mechanics and as recommended by the manufacturers.
C. Design Data: Complete design of isolation equipment including confirmation that no

noise will be transmitted to structure of building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide isolation and support devices as required for all mechanical equipment.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Amber/Booth
B. Anvil
C. Kenetics
D. Korfund Vibration Mountings
E. Mason
F. Peabody
G. Vibro Acoustics
2.3 CONDENSING UNIT ISOLATION
A. Provide isolation pad between unit and structure as shown on plans.

90 Percent
2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Use "Ventglas" fabric, fireproof, waterproof, and mildew resistant, approximately 30

ounces per square yard.
B. Comply with SMACNA standards.
2.5 ISOLATION FOR AIR HANDLERS ABOVE 5 TONS
A. Spring isolators:
1. Type:
a. Open stable steel spring type with a minimum deflection of one inch.
B. Concrete Pad:
1. Type:
a. 5 inch housekeeping pad
2.6 HVAC PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Hangers:
1. All Copper Piping
a. Copper plated ferrous hangers.
2. 2" and smaller piping in walls:
a. May be split cast ring type with fastening device in walls and chases.
3. All Other Above Ceiling Locations:
a. Adjustable clevis type. Hangers to accommodate circumference of pipe
and saddles.
B. Hanger Rods:
1. Type:
a. Minimum 3/8 inch diameter with machine threads.
C. Minimum Steel Hanger Rod Diameter for Individually Suspended Horizontal Pipes:
1. 2" and smaller diameter pipe:
a. 3/8"
2. 2-1/2" to 3-1/2" diameter pipe:
a. 1/2"
3. 4" to 5" diameter pipe:
a. 5/8"
4. 6" diameter pipe or larger:
a. 3/4"
2.7 SLEEVES
A. Application:
1. Provide sleeves for all pipes and conduits which pass through a concrete slab,
masonry wall/concrete wall, roof or other portion of the building structure.
B. Above Grade and/or dry locations:
1. Material:
a. 20 or 22 gauge galvanized steel.

90 Percent
2. Size:
a. As necessary to allow free passage of the insulated pipe.
C. Passing through fire-rated enclosures:

1. Material:
a. Galvanized or black steel pipe.
b. Non-combustible.
c. PVC will not be allowed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ISOLATION DEVICES AND PAD INSTALLATION
A. Install isolation pads between floor and equipment pads according to manufacturer's
recommendations and approved shop drawings.
B. Install flexible duct connections where ducts connect to fans or air handling units.
C. All joints to be airtight.
D. Provide a minimum of 1/2" slack in connections, and a minimum of 2½" distance

between the edges of ducts.
E. Comply with recommendations of ASHRAE for the selection and application of

vibration materials and units.
3.2 SECURING AND SUPPORTING OF HVAC PIPING
A. Support all pipe from the building structure by means of approved hangers and
supports while maintaining required grade and pitch, preventing vibration and
providing for expansion and contraction.
B. Secure all hangers to approved inserts wherever possible.
C. Set hanger inserts in place when the concrete is poured.
D. If Joists Are Used for Attachment:

1. 2" diameter or smaller:
a. May be attached to the bottom of joists.
2. Greater than 2" diameter:
a. Must be attached to the top cord of the joists.
3. Do not support any piping and trapeze hangers from joist bridging on roof and
floor deck.
E. If Structural Steel Framing Is Used for Attachment:
1. Use approved beam clamps.
2. Where required, install channels to span between framing members.
3. Do not attach hangers to the roof deck or cross bracing.
F. Hanger Spacing:

90 Percent
1. Schedule 40 Black Steel Piping (Chilled water/ Hot water piping):

a. 1/2" diameter pipe → 6'-0" or less
b. 3/4" diameter pipe → 8'-0" or less
c. 1-1/4" diameter pipe → 10’-0” or less
d. Vertical:
(2) Adequately support at their bases, either by a suitable hanger placed
in the horizontal line near the riser, or by a base fitting set on a
pedestal or foundation.
(3) Support from each floor slab by means of an approved clamp-type
support which bears on the slab or beam.
2. Copper Piping (Refrigerant Piping):
a. Smaller Than 1¼” → 6'-0" or less
b. 1 ½” and Larger → 10'-0" or less
c. Vertical → 10'-0" or less
G. Change of Direction:
1. Install supports within two feet of change of direction.
2. Brackets of approved type may be used along the walls.
3. Install hangers within 2 feet of each change in vertical or horizontal direction, pipe
tees and on each side of valves, strainers, etc.
4. Multiple horizontal pipes, smaller than 12" diameter pipe, may be supported on
trapeze hangers. Space trapeze hangers in accordance with the schedule for
pipe spacing based upon the smallest size pipe.
5. Properly size the trapeze members for the piping load they are to support. The
number of pipes on the trapeze must be approved by the Engineer to prevent
overloading of the building structure.
6. Where pipes are insulated, oversize the hanger accordingly to accommodate the
outside diameter of the insulation. Provide half-round 16 gauge galvanized steel
shields, not less than 12" long and rolled to fit the insulation diameter, between
the insulation and the hanger.
7. When pipe is guided at top and bottom, cover the entire pipe circumference with
metal shields.
8. Adhere metal shield to the insulation so that the metal will not slide with respect
to the insulation.
9. Wood struts shall not be used to support piping in walls.
3.3 SLEEVES
A. Above Grade and/or Dry Locations:

1. Walls:
a. Mount flush on both sides.
2. Floors:
a. Mount 2 inches above finished floor in pipe chases.
B. Passing Through Fire-Rated Enclosure:

1. Fill the void space around the pipe in accordance with NFPA requirements.
2. Do not allow the sleeve installation to lower the fire rating of the assembly.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 23 05 32
ROOF CURBS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Roof curbs for rooftop packaged HVAC units, exhaust fans, and supply fans.
B. Section 23 34 16 - HVAC Fans
C. Section 23 81 19 - Packaged HVAC Units
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D4586 - Fibrated Asphalt Roof Cement
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer's product data sheets, including installation instructions, in
accordance with Section 23 00 90, General Conditions, and Division 01.
2. Submit with equipment that curb is used with.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit for prefabricated equipment supports in accordance with Section
23 00 90, General Conditions and Division 01.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOF CURBS FOR ROOFTOP PACKAGED HVAC UNITS
A. Insulated and Non-insulated Roof Decks:

1. Type - Prefabricated non insulated curb
2. Material - Minimum 18 gauge prime galvanized steel.
3. Construction:
a. Designed to meet local wind zone load/rating
b. Designed to support full weight of the rooftop unit.
Roof Curbs 23 05 32 - 1
90 Percent
c. Seal between bottom of unit and curb with gasket.

d. Factory welded or hinged corners.
e. Internally reinforced
f. Factory installed 1” x 4” treated wood nailers fastened from the underside
with TEK screws.
g. Top of all curbs to be level with pitch built into the curb when deck slopes
¼” per foot or greater.
h. Full perimeter curbs only.
i. Curbs higher than 18” and curbs for sloped roofs shall have factory welded
corners.
4. Height - 18 inches above the roof deck or as shown on plans.
5. Manufacturers:
a. HVAC unit manufacturer
b. TECO Metal Products
c. ThyCurb
d. Rooftop Systems
2.2 ISOLATION DEVICES
A. Where required on the drawings, the unit shall be mounted on a spring isolation curb.
The lower member shall consist of a sheet metal Z section containing adjustable and
removable steel springs that support the upper floating section. The upper frame must
provide continuous support for the equipment and must be captive so as to resiliently
resist wind forces. All directional neoprene snubber bushings shall be a minimum of
1/4"(6 mm) thick. Steel springs shall be laterally stable and rest on 1/4"(6 mm) thick
neoprene acoustical pads. Hardware must be plated and the springs provided with a
rust resistant finish. The curbs waterproofing shall consist of a continuous galvanized
flexible counter flashing nailed over the lower curbs waterproofing and joined at the
corners by EPDM bellows. All spring locations shall have access ports with removable
waterproof covers. Lower curbs shall have provision for 2"(50 mm) of insulation. Curb
shall be type RSC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. or approved equal.
2.3 ROOF CURBS FOR EXHAUST AND SUPPLY FANS
A. Insulated and Non-insulated Roof Decks:

1. Type - Prefabricated insulated curb.
3. Construction:
b. Designed to support weight of the exhaust or supply fan.
c. Factory-welded or hinged corners.
d. Internally reinforced.
e. Factory-installed 1” x 4” treated wood nailers fastened from the underside
with TEK screws.
f. Top of all curbs to be level with pitch built into the curb when deck slopes ¼
inch per foot or greater.
4. Fiberglass Insulation:
a. Thickness - 1 ½ inches
b. Density - 3 lbs.
c. Factory installed.
Roof Curbs 23 05 32 - 2
90 Percent
5. Height - 18 inches above the roof deck or as shown on plans.

6. Manufacturers:
a. TECO Metal Products
b. ThyCurb
c. Rooftop Systems
d. Fan Manufacturer
B. Roof Curbs For Single-Ply Roofing:

1. Type - Prefabricated insulated curb.
3. Construction:
b. Designed to support weight of the exhaust or supply fan.
c. Welded corners and seams joined by continuous welds.
d. Internally reinforced.
e. Factory-installed 2” x 4” treated wood nailers fastened from the underside
with TEK screws.
f. Top of all curbs to be level with pitch built into the curb when deck slopes ¼
inch per foot or greater.
4. Fiberglass Insulation:
a. Thickness - 1 ½ inches
b. Density - 3 lbs.
c. Factory installed.
5. Height - 16 inches above roof deck or as shown on plans.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Fan manufacturer
b. TECO Metal Products
c. ThyCurb
d. Rooftop Systems
C. Kitchen Exhaust Fan Curb:

1. Designed to meet local wind zone load/rating
2. All kitchen exhaust fans to have extended vented curb extension.
2.4 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Nails:
1. Type:
a. Stainless steel, flathead, wire, barbed, slating type.
2. Washers:
a. Neoprene.
B. Flashing Cement:
1. ASTM D4586 - Type 1
2. Asbestos free
Roof Curbs 23 05 32 - 3
90 Percent
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrates are smooth and clean to extent needed for work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install prefabricated roof curbs beneath new exhaust fans, supply fans, and all
other mechanical equipment on the roof.
2. Install work watertight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or
distortion.
3. Allow for expansion and contraction.
4. Coat contact surfaces of dissimilar metals with zinc chromate paint.
5. Set LEVEL and square on structural framing beneath roof deck.
6. Securely fasten curb flanges with bolts through flanges.
7. Seal bolt heads with flashing cement.
B. Roof Curbs for Rooftop Packaged HVAC Units:

1. Roofing contractor to install 1½ inch, 3 lb. density fiberglass insulation between
unit and roof deck.
2. Roofing material is not to be placed over top of curb.
C. Roof Curb Heights:

1. Verify roofing insulation thickness where curbs are to be installed. Coordinate
height above roof to meet roofing manufacturer's specifications.
2. Minimum Height:
a. 12-inches above finished roof.
END OF SECTION
Roof Curbs 23 05 32 - 4
90 Percent
SECTION 23 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Identification required for mechanical systems.
provided.
1.3 RELATED SECTION
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit wording of nameplates with submittals.
C. Submit list of all products incorporated in this section.
1.5 REFERENCES
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1
B. USAS Code B31.8
C. NTSB-PSS-73-1
D. AGA
A. Nameplates and tags are to be provided for all mechanical equipment and piping in
the project. Identification is also required for the following, but is not limited to:
1. Air Handlers
2. Boilers/Water Heaters
3. Condensing Units
4. Duct Dampers
Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53 - 1

90 Percent
5. Filter Sizes for Air Handlers

6. Fire Dampers
7. Heat Exchangers
8. Outside Air Units
9. Piping
10. Pumps
11. Starters
12. Supply/Exhaust Fans
13. Valves
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Seton
B. Brady
C. MSI
2.2 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Type: Engraving-Stock, melamine plastic laminate, 3 layer.

1. Thickness:
a. Less than 25 square inches: 1/16 inch
b. 25 square inches or more: 1/8 inch
B. Color:
1. Black
C. Conform to FS L-P-387A
2.3 LETTERING
A. Style:
1. Engraved standard print.
B. Size:
1. 3/16 inch to 1/4 inch
C. Color:
1. White letters, black background
2.4 NAMEPLATE/TAG INFORMATION
A. HVAC Equipment:
1. Unit mark from Drawings/Owner
2. Voltage - Phase
3. Manufacturer and Model Number

90 Percent
4. Filter size
2.5 NAMEPLATE FASTENERS
A. Securely attach nameplates to equipment with non-corroding stainless steel screws.
B. Non-corroding pop rivets are acceptable.
C. Stick-ons or adhesives will not be allowed.
2.6 PIPING AND CONTROL DIAGRAM SIGNS
A. Material: 1/4 inch acrylic cover and backing screwed together with brass screw/bolts.
1. Size:
a. Minimum: 12" x 17"
b. Maximum: 24" x 36"
B. Provide a diagram in each mechanical room similar to the diagrams shown on the
plans, and/or as required for the area served. This diagram to reflect as built
conditions.
2.7 IDENTIFICATION OF PRODUCTS
A. Provide pipe markers with the following features.

1. Letters from 1/2" to 3-1/2"; size letters to afford readability from the appropriate
viewing position.
2. Repeated and reversed words for viewing from 360o around pipe.
3. Self-clinging, coiled markers that snap into place around pipe and do not require
any other securement.
4. Integral directional arrows.
B. Letters on Field:
1. Identify the specific material conveyed. (i.e. "Domestic Cold Water", "Sprinkler",
etc.)
C. Model:
1. Less than 3/4":
a. Tags: Piping System Devices, color codes for hazard.
2. 3/4" up to 6"; snap-on.
3. Over 6"; strap-on, with stainless steel spring straps.
4. Use tags and/or nameplates that are scratch resistant and UV resistant for
outdoor equipment and piping.
D. Piping System Devices (Valves, Thermometers, Pressure Gages, etc., and Pipe Less
Than 3/4"):
1. Identify with the following:
a. Tags:
(1) Not less than 1-1/2 inch brass or aluminum tags, round, square, or
octagonal.

90 Percent
b. Stamp tags with minimum 1/2" high descriptive characters, 1/2" high
numbers with black enamel-filled indentations.
E. Attachment:
1. Stainless steel or solid brass jack chain, or stainless steel or brass "S" hooks
F. Ductwork:
1. Stenciled letters or self-adhesive labels, minimum 1" high characters.
2. Red ribbon at each balancing damper.
G. Underground Warning Tapes:

1. Provide materials that meet the codes or have the approvals listed below:
a. Office of Pipeline Safety Regulation, USAS Code B31.8.
b. GSA Public Building Service Guide Specification.
c. National Transportation Safety Board Report NTSB-PSS-73-1.
d. AGA Report 72-D-56.
e. API Report API RP 1109.
2. Material:
a. Plastic, continuous tape, color-coded, marked for hazard.
b. For Non-metallic Piping System:
(1) Aluminum foil core encased in plastic.
c. Metallic Piping:
(1) Plastic tape.
3. Color:
a. Colored (not printed color) plastic, coded for material conveyed by piping.
4. Width:
a. As scheduled for piping system burial depth.
5. Legend:
a. "Caution [System Name] Line Buried Below".
6. Tape Colors:
Utility Color
Natural Gas, Oil, Dangerous Materials Hi Visibility Safety Yellow
Communications Safety Alert Orange
7. Model:
a. Metallic Piping System:
(1) Polyethylene Tape.
b. Non-Metallic Piping System:
(1) Metallic Detection Tape.
H. Underground Gas Piping:

1. Attach No. 18 gauge copper tracer wire to the piping and terminate above grade
at each end.
I. Pipeline Markers for Pipe Beneath Pavement and Slabs:

1. Minimum 2" round, square, or octagonal, same as specified in Subparagraph:
Piping System Devices.

90 Percent
J. Attachment:
1. 1-1/2" screw, bolted to tag as anchor.
2. Anchor Setting Compound:
a. Epoxy or epoxy grout, compatible with the pavement.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Contractor shall verify room numbers with Owner/Engineer before nameplates are
fabricated.
B. The following shall be permanently and clearly identified:

1. Each air handler, condensing unit, compressor, exhaust fan, and pump.
2. Each zone duct, outside air duct, and return air duct whose duty is not
immediately apparent.
3. Each valve whose service and/or duty is not immediately apparent.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install signs on non-removable panels. Attach to equipment with pop rivets or

stainless steel screws.
B. Mount in an easily visible location.
C. All labeling identification shall conform to final room numbers. Coordinate with
General Contractor, A/E and Owner to secure construction room numbers.
D. Provide all additional signage required by local authority at no cost to the Owner.
E. Provide filter sizes and quantity on all air handlers.
F. Complete installation in accordance with ANSI A13.1 and manufacturer's installation

instructions and with the Drawings. Fasten each unit securely in place with stainless
steel screws.
G. Equipment Labeling:
1. Install on scheduled items of equipment, including the following:
a. Air conditioning equipment
b. Pumps
c. Control panels and major control components
d. Include Mark Number and descriptive name from Drawing and Specification
schedules
e. Attach with corrosion resistant, stainless steel screws or pop rivets
f. Install 1/2" diameter adhesive marker (color to be approved by A/E), and
apply to T-bar below any mechanical equipment and fire dampers above lay-
in ceiling.

90 Percent
H. Piping System Color Coding:

1. Designate for painter the following:
a. Types of piping services
b. Direction of flow
c. Other information required for proper identification.
I. Surfaces to be Painted:
1. Bare piping
2. Insulation covering of insulated piping
J. Paint according to the following schedule:
Pastel
System Color
Gas Piping on Roof Black or as required by local authority having jurisdiction
K. Piping System Devices (Valves, Thermometers, Pressure Gages, etc.):

1. Identify with the following information:
a. System
b. Device number
c. Device Function
L. Device Chart:
1. Key devices to device chart
2. Give complete description of device function and system.
M. Key devices to drawings as follows:

1. Floor plans
2. Schematic drawings of piping systems
N. Underground Warning Tapes:
1. Tape Widths:
Piping Burial Depth Tape Width

10" 2"
20" 3"
27" 6"
30" 9"
40" 12"
50" or more 18"
O. Recommended Tape Bury Depth:

1. Minimum Depth:
a. 6".
2. Distance Between Pipe and Tape:
a. Minimum 12".
b. Maximum Depth: 12".
3. Tie tape to pipe where pipe leaves the ground.

90 Percent
P. Pipeline Markers for Pipe Beneath Pavement and Slabs.

1. Location:
a. Accuracy:
(1) Plus or minus 6" from piping centerline.
b. Flat Edge Pavement and Slabs:
(1) Set within 6" of pavement or slab edge.
c. Concrete Curbs:
(1) Set in top of curb.
d. Spacing:
(1) Each change in direction, each edge of pavement or slab, maximum
spacing of 100'.
2. Legend:
a. Same as tags plus an engraved or stamped line; set marker with line parallel
to buried line.
3. Attachment:
a. Drill hole for anchor bolt, full depth of bolt plus 1/2"; set full tag and bolt in
epoxy, flush with pavement or slab.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Testing and balancing services for the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning
(HVAC) systems of this project.
B. The testing and balancing agency will be responsible for the satisfactory execution of
testing and balancing of the HVAC systems.
C. The following are acceptable agencies:

1. Complete System Balance
2. Delta-T, Inc.
3. Engineered Air Balance
4. PHI Service Agency, Inc.
5. Air Balancing Company, Inc.
B. Section 23 07 13 - Duct and Grille Insulation
C. Section 23 09 23 - Energy Management Control System
D. Section 23 31 13 - Metal Ductwork
E. Section 23 34 16 - HVAC Fans
F. Section 23 37 13 - Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
G. Section 23 81 19 - Packaged HVAC Units
H. Section 23 81 26 - Split System HVAC Units

1.4 STANDARDS
A. The balancing agency shall perform the services specified herein in accordance with
the Associated Air Balance Council's National Standards, including revisions, to the
date of the contract.
Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing for HVAC 23 05 93 - 1

90 Percent
B. All terms in this specification shall have their meaning defined as stated in the National
Standards.
C. If these specifications set forth more stringent requirements than the AABC National
Standards, these specifications shall prevail.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS OF THE BALANCING AGENCY
A. The balancing agency shall be a member of the Associated Air Balance Council
(AABC) and/or certified by the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB).
B. To perform required professional services, the balancing agency shall have a

minimum of one "Test and Balance Engineer" certified by the Associated Air Balance
Council and/or the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB).
C. This certified "Test and Balance Engineer" shall be responsible for supervision and
certification for the total work herein specified.
D. The balancing agency shall submit records of experience in the field of air and
hydronic system balancing or any other data as requested by the Owner/Engineer.
The supervisory personnel for the firm shall have at least five (5) years’ experience,
and be a full time employee for a minimum of six (6) months prior to the project. All
employees used in this project shall be qualified technicians in this specific field.
E. The balancing agency shall furnish all necessary calibrated instrumentation to

adequately perform the specified services. An inventory of all instruments and devices
in possession of the balancing agency may be required by the Owner to determine
the balancing agency's performance capability.
F. The balancing agency shall have operated for a minimum of five (5) years under its
current name.
1.6 DOCUMENTS
A. The General Contractor will provide the balancing agency one copy of the following
documents:
1. Project drawings (mechanical sepias if requested) and specifications.
2. Reviewed construction revisions pertaining to the HVAC systems.
3. Reviewed submittal data on HVAC equipment and systems to be installed by the
Mechanical Subcontractor.
4. Reviewed HVAC shop drawings.
5. Reviewed HVAC wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and equipment brochures,
as appropriate.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. It will be necessary for the balancing agency to perform its services in close
coordination with the Mechanical Subcontractor.

90 Percent
B. The plans and specifications indicate meters, valves, dampers, and other devices for
the purpose of adjusting the system to obtain optimum operating conditions. It will be
the responsibility of the Mechanical Subcontractor to install these devices in a manner
that will leave them accessible, readily adjustable and complete. The balancing
agency shall provide guidance if there is a questionable arrangement of a control or
balancing device.
C. The General Contractor, Mechanical Contractor, Temperature Controls

Subcontractor, and the suppliers of the HVAC equipment shall all cooperate with the
balancing agency to provide all necessary data on the design and proper application
of the system components. In addition, they shall furnish all labor and materials
required to eliminate any system deficiencies.
1.8 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall complete the installation and start all HVAC systems
to ensure they are working properly and shall perform all other items as described
hereinafter to assist the balancing agency in performing the testing and balancing of
the HVAC systems.
B. Air Distribution Systems:

1. Verify installation for conformity to design.
2. Terminate all supply, return, and exhaust ducts, and pressure test them, for
leakage, as required by specification.
3. Ensure that all splitters, extractors, and volume and fire dampers are properly
located and functional. Dampers serving requirements of minimum and maximum
outside, return, relief, and exhaust air shall provide tight closure and full opening,
with a smooth and free operation.
4. Verify that all supply, return, exhaust, and transfer grilles; registers; diffusers; and
high-pressure terminal units are installed and operational.
5. Ensure that air-handling systems, units, and associated apparatus, such as
heating and cooling coils, filter sections, access doors, etc., are blanked and/or
sealed to eliminate excessive bypass or leakage of air.
6. Ensure that all fans (supply, return, relief, and exhaust) are operating and free of
vibration. All fans and drives shall be checked for proper fan rotation and belt
tension. Overload protection shall be of proper size and rating. A record of motor
current and voltage shall be made to verify that the motors do not exceed
nameplate rating.
7. Make any necessary changes to the sheaves, belts, and dampers, as required
by the balancing agency, at no additional cost to the Owner.
8. Install clean filters.
1.9 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE TEMPERATURE CONTROLS CONTRACTOR
A. The Temperature-Controls Contractor shall allow sufficient time in the project to

provide assistance and instruction to the balancing agency in the proper use and
setting of control components such as, but not limited to, computers, static pressure
controllers, or any other device that may need set points changed so that the testing
and balancing work can be performed.

90 Percent
B. Furnish to the balancing agency any software and cables required to make
adjustments to controls. Any unique micro-processor required to set controls shall be
furnished by Temperature Controls Contractor.
C. The Temperature Controls Contractor shall complete the installation of the

temperature control system and operate and test all control systems to ensure they
are functioning properly as designed. The Temperature Controls Contractor shall
assist the balancing agency in testing and balancing the HVAC systems, as described
hereinafter.
1. Verify that all control components are installed in accordance with project
requirements and are functional, including all electrical interlocks, damper
sequences, air and water reset, and fire and freeze-stats.
2. Verify that all controlling instruments are calibrated and set for design operating
conditions.
3. Calibrate room thermostats/sensors after installation, and before the thermostat
control verification tests are performed. The balancing agency shall prove the
accuracy of final settings by taking temperature readings. The readings shall be
in a typical conditioned space for each separately controlled zone.
1.10 PRE-BALANCING CONFERENCE
A. Prior to beginning of the testing, adjusting and balancing procedures, schedule and
conduct a conference with the Architect/Engineer, General Contractor, Mechanical
Contractor, Electrical Contractor and Temperature Controls Contractor. The objective
of the conference is final coordination and verification of system operation and
readiness for testing, adjusting, and balancing.
1.11 NOTIFICATION FOR TESTING AND BALANCING WORK TO BEGIN
A. The general contractor shall notify the balancing agency in writing when all heating,
ventilating, and air conditioning systems are complete and ready for testing and
balancing. The Mechanical Contractor shall attest that he has completed all items as
described in "RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR" Section
of these specifications.
B. If, upon commencing the work, the balancing agency finds that the systems are not
ready, or if a dispute occurs as to the readiness of the systems, the balancing agency
shall request an inspection to be made by the Mechanical Engineer. This inspection
shall establish to the satisfaction of the represented parties whether or not the
systems meet the basic requirements for testing and balancing. Should the inspection
reveal the notification to have been premature, the balancing agency shall be
reimbursed for all costs for the inspection and work previously accomplished.
Furthermore, such items that are not ready for testing and balancing shall be
completed and placed in operational readiness before testing and balancing services
shall again be requested.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Not Applicable

90 Percent
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SCOPE
A. In accordance with Project Drawings and Specifications and as specified herein, the
balancing agency shall provide all supervision, personnel, instruments, calibration
equipment, and all other materials and services necessary to perform all testing and
balancing of the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. All test data
including all pertinent calculations shall be reported on appropriate forms.
3.2 GENERAL
A. The testing and balancing of the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems
shall be performed by an independent balancing agency approved by the Engineer.
The balancing agency shall have a minimum of five years specialized experience in
air and hydronic system balancing, possess calibrated instruments, certified "Test and
Balance Engineers", and skilled technicians to perform all required tests. The
balancing agency shall be a certified member of the Associated Air Balance Council
and/or the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB).
B. The tests shall demonstrate the specified capacities and operation of all equipment
and materials comprising the systems. The balancing agency shall then make
available to the Owner's representative such instruments and technicians as are
required for spot checks of the system.
C. The balancing agency shall not instruct or direct the Mechanical Contractor in any of
the work. Any proposed changes or revision in the work shall be submitted to the
Architect and General Contractor in writing.
D. Document Review:
1. The Test and Balance Firm shall be responsible for reviewing the HVAC plans
and specifications relating to the test and balance services for proper
arrangement and adequate provisions of devices for testing, adjusting and
balancing.
2. Test and Balance Firm shall review HVAC manufacturers’ submittals data relative
to balance ability.
3. Test and Balance Firm shall review submitted HVAC automatic temperature
control sequences for conformity to the specifications.
3.3 SERVICES
A. During construction, the balancing agency shall inspect the installation of pipe
systems, sheet metal work, temperature controls, and other component parts of the
heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems.
B. The inspections shall be performed periodically as the work progresses. A minimum

of two inspections are required as follows: (1) when 60 percent of the duct work is
installed; (2) when 90 percent of the equipment is installed. The balancing agency

90 Percent
shall submit a brief written report of each inspection to the General Contractor and
Engineer.
C. Upon completion of the installation and start-up of the mechanical equipment by the
Mechanical Contractor, the balancing agency shall test and balance the system
components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space in the building.
3.4 DEFICIENCIES
A. If in the process of performing the TAB work, any deficiencies encountered shall be
brought to the attention of the contractor responsible through defined procedures and
entered in the punch list of deficiencies on the next daily Status Report. If correction
of the deficiency is urgent, the matter shall be brought to the attention of all involved
parties for quick resolution. The General Contractor shall provide and coordinate
services of qualified responsible subcontractors, suppliers and personnel as required
to correct, repair or replace any and all deficient items or conditions during the testing,
adjusting and balancing period.
B. The notification may be for single or multiple deficiencies. The work necessary to
correct items on the listing shall be performed and verified in writing by the affected
trade.
C. All deficiencies that prevent proper TAB work from being completed shall be corrected
prior to submittal of the Final TAB Report, unless the correction of such deficiencies
cannot be accomplished in a reasonable period of time, in which case the Mechanical
Engineer may grant permission to submit the Final TAB Report with the deficiencies
detailed in the report.
3.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURES
A. The balancing agency shall perform the following testing and balancing functions in
accordance with the Associated Air Balance Council's National Standards:
1. Fan Speeds:
a. Test and adjust fan RPM to achieve design CFM requirements.
2. Current and Voltage:
a. Measure and record motor current and voltage.
3. Pitot-tube Traverse:
a. Perform a Pitot-tube traverse of main supply and return ducts to obtain total
CFM. If a Pitot-tube traverse is not practical, the summation of the outlets or
inlets may be used. An explanation why a traverse was not made must
appear on the appropriate data sheet.
4. Outside Air:
a. Test and adjust system minimum outside air by Pitot-tube traverse. If a Pitot-
tube traverse is not practical, the percentage of outside air may be
determined by calculations from the return air, outside air, and mixed air
temperatures. Make allowances for heat of compression and motor heat
where applicable.
5. Static Pressure:
a. Test and record system static pressures, including suction and discharge
static pressure of each fan.

90 Percent
6. Air Temperature:
a. Take wet-bulb and dry-bulb air temperatures on the entering and leaving side
of each cooling coil. Dry-bulb temperature shall be taken on the entering and
leaving side of each heating coil.
7. Zone Ducts:
a. Adjust zone ducts to within design CFM requirements. At least one zone
balancing damper shall be completely open.
8. Main Ducts:
a. Adjust main ducts to within design CFM requirements and traverse for total
CFM quantities.
9. Branch Ducts:
a. Adjust branch ducts to within design CFM requirements. Multi-diffuser
branch ducts shall have at least one outlet or inlet volume damper completely
open.
10. Tolerances:
a. Test and balance each diffuser, grille, and register to within 10 percent of
design requirements.
11. Identification:
a. Identify the location and area of each grille, diffuser, register, and terminal
box. This information shall be recorded on air outlet data sheets.
12. Description:
a. Record the size, type, and manufacturer of each diffuser, grille, and register
on air outlet data sheets.
13. Terminal Boxes:
a. Set volume regulators on all terminal boxes to meet design maximum and
minimum CFM requirements. All associated temperature controls shall be
checked for proper operation and calibration. If the terminal boxes have
separate settings for heating and cooling CFM, the CFM quantities for each
shall be recorded on air outlet data sheets. All diffusers connected to the
terminal box shall be read in the heating and cooling modes and their
readings recorded on air outlet data sheets.
14. Minimizing Drafts:
a. Adjust all diffusers, grilles, and registers to minimize drafts in all areas.
15. Verification Of Temperature Control
B. The balancing agency shall be assisted by the Temperature Controls Contractor in

verifying the operation and calibration of all temperature control systems. The
following tests shall be conducted:
1. Verify that all control components are installed in accordance with project
requirements and are functional, including all electrical interlocks, damper
sequences, air and water reset, and fire and freeze stats.
2. Verify that all controlling instruments are calibrated and set for design operating
conditions.
3. Verify the accuracy of the final settings by taking temperature readings. The
readings shall be in a typical conditioned space for each separately controlled
zone.
C. In the process of performing the TAB work, the balancing agency firm shall:
1. Verify that all dampers, valves and other controlled devices are operated by the
intended controller.

90 Percent
2. Verify that all dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller
(open, closed, or modulating).
3. Verify the integrity of valves and dampers in terms of tightness of close-off and
of full-open position. This includes dampers in VAV terminals.
4. Check that all valves are properly installed in the piping system in relation to
direction of flow and location.
5. Verify the proper application of all normally open and normally closed valves.
6. Check the locations of all thermostats and humidistats for potential erratic
operation from outside influences such as sunlight, drafts, or cold/hot walls.
7. Check the locations of all sensors to determine whether their position will allow
them to sense only the intended temperatures or pressures of the media.
8. Check the sequence of operation for any control mode to ensure that it is in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
D. Verify that all controller set points meet the design intent. Record observations of
systems under DDC control. Record all default set points if different from operating
set points.
E. Check all dampers for free and full operation, record any obstructions.
F. Verify the operation of all interlock systems.
G. Perform all system verifications to assure the safety of the system and its
components.
H. Verify that the changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs as specified.
3.6 TEST AND BALANCE REPORT
A. The test and balance report shall be complete with logs, data, and records as required
herein. All logs, data, and records shall be typed on white bond paper and bound and
submitted in a single PDF file. The report shall be certified, accurate and complete by
the balancing agency's certified Test and Balance Engineer.
B. The report shall contain the following general data in a format selected by the
balancing agency:
1. Project number
2. Contract number
3. Project title
4. Project location
5. Project Architect
6. Project Mechanical Engineer
7. Test & Balance agency
8. Test & Balance Engineer
9. General Contractor
10. Mechanical Subcontractor
11. Dates tests were performed
12. Certification

90 Percent
C. The test and balance report shall be recorded on report forms conforming to the
recommended forms in the AABC National Standards. At a minimum, the report shall
include:
1. Preface
a. A general discussion of the system, any abnormalities and problems
encountered.
b. A deficiency log detailing system abnormalities that do not meet these
specifications.
c. The list of instruments including type, model, manufacturer, serial number,
and calibration dates.
2. Air System Data
a. All test and balance data indicating design conditions, and actual conditions
of operation for each device and/or piece of HVAC equipment.
b. Outside Air Temperatures, dry bulb and wet bulb.
c. Entering Air Temperatures, dry bulb and wet bulb.
d. Discharge Air Temperatures, dry bulb and wet bulb.
e. Suction and discharge static pressures across each fan.
3. System Identification
a. In each report, the zones, supply, return, and exhaust openings, and traverse
points shall be numbered and/or lettered on mechanical drawings to
correspond to the numbers and letters used on the report data sheets.
4. Controls
a. Document verification of controls.
5. Occupancy Inspection
a. Make a total of three (3) inspections within ninety (90) days after occupancy
of the building, and make adjustments if required, to insure that satisfactory
conditions are being maintained throughout. Inspections to be coordinated
with Architect/Engineer and Owner and shall be documented with a
supplemental report containing data and information as required.
6. Instructions to Operating Personnel
a. Test and Balance Firm shall instruct the operating personnel regarding the
following:
(1) Systems Operation
(2) Unusual Operating Conditions.
(3) System Troubleshooting Procedures.
3.7 REPORT SUBMITTAL
A. The test and balance report are required and shall be submitted to the General
Contractor for distribution to the Owner, Architect and Mechanical Engineer. The test
and balance report shall be submitted in a single, fully bound PDF file.
3.8 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. At the time of final inspection, the balancing agency shall recheck, in the presence of
the Owner's representative, specific and random selections of data recorded in the
certified test and balance report.
B. Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the Owner's representative.

90 Percent
C. Measurements and test procedures shall be the same as the original test and
balance.
D. Selections for recheck, specific plus random, shall not normally exceed 15 percent of
the total number tabulated in the report, except where special air systems require a
complete recheck for safety reasons.
E. If random tests demonstrate a measured flow deviation of 10 percent or more from

that recorded in the certified test and balance report, the report shall automatically be
rejected. In the event the report is rejected, all systems shall be readjusted and tested,
new data recorded, a new certified test and balance report submitted, and a new
inspection test made, all at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.9 OPPOSITE SEASON TEST
A. Opposite season test and balance work shall be required for systems that cannot be
tested and balanced due to climate or seasonal conditions. An example would be
Chiller operation in the winter season, or Boiler operation in the summer season. In
such case, the balancing agency shall perform an inspection of the buildings HVAC
system during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were
made. The balancing agency shall make any necessary modifications to the initial
adjustments to produce optimum system operation in compliance with the contract
documents. The TAB agency shall contact the Owner’s Commissioning Agent, to
coordinate such work, no less than 14 calendar days prior to any Opposite Season
Testing.
B. Opposite Season Testing is not required if the Owner’s Commissioning Agent can
simulate off season conditions via the building automated controls system.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 23 07 13
DUCT AND GRILLE INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL

A. External duct insulation
B. Internal duct liner
C. Kitchen exhaust duct
B. Section 23 31 13 - Metal Ductwork
C. Section 23 37 13 - Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
ratings.
4. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
5. Submit kitchen exhaust duct wrap to City for approval prior to submitting to
Engineer.
1.5 REFERENCES

ASTM E84 Standard test for surface burning characteristics of
building materials.
NFPA 221 Fire walls and fire barrier walls.
NFPA 255 Surface burning characteristics of building materials.
Duct and Grille Insulation 23 07 13 - 1

90 Percent
NFPA 96 Ventilation control and fire protection of commercial

cooking operations.
UL 723 Test for surface burning characteristics of building
materials.
UL 1978 First Edition Standard for Grease Ducts
ASTM C553 Standard specification for mineral fiber blanket thermal
insulation for commercial and industrial applications.
ASTM C1071 Fibrous glass duct lining insulation (thermal and sound).
IECC International Energy Conservation Code
ASTM C355 Water Vapor Permeance
ASTM C916-85(2001)e1 Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal
Insulation
ASTM C1136-02 Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance
Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation
ASTM A635/A635M-02 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-
Thickness Coils, Carbon, Commercial Steel, Drawing
Steel, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and
High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Hot-
Rolled, General Requirements
ASTM A924 Hot Dip Galvanized Coils & Sheets - Tolerances
A. Fire Hazard Rating:

1. All insulation used on the project must have a flame spread rating not exceeding
25 and a smoke developed rating not exceeding 50 as determined by test
procedures ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723. Bear UL label. All insulation must
meet ASTM C553.
2. These ratings must be as tested on the composite of insulation, jacket or facing,
and adhesive.
3. Components such as adhesives, mastics and cements must meet the same
individual ratings as minimum requirements.
4. Install in accordance with SMACNA standards.
B. Kitchen Exhaust Insulation Performance Requirements:

1. Two-hour rated resistive enclosure assembly, ASTM E119: Large scale Wall
Panel Test and Total Engulfment Test.
2. Zero inch clearance to combustible, maximum allowable surface temperature on
unexposed side, UL 1978.
3. Class I interior finish materials, ASTM E84.
4. Through-penetration protection systems for grease and air ducts, ASTM E814
and UL 1479.
5. Non-combustibility, ASTM E136.
6. ISO-6944-1985, Fire Resistance Tests - Ventilation Ducts.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original sealed containers or unopened packages, and clearly

labeled with manufacturer's name, product identification, and lot numbers.

90 Percent
B. Store materials out of weather and in an enclosed shelter.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Supply ducts
B. Return ducts
C. Outside air ducts
D. Supply and return diffusers
E. Grilles
F. Registers with exposed surfaces in unconditioned areas
G. Kitchen exhaust ducts
H. General exhaust ducts do not receive insulation
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Owens Corning
B. Knauf
C. Johns Manville
2.3 EXTERNAL DUCT WRAP AND GRILLE INSULATION
A. Minimum Density:
1. 3/4 pound per cubic foot
B. Material:
1. Fiberglass blanket with type FRK foil reinforced Kraft vapor barrier jacket
C. Thickness:
1. 2.0 inch, Minimum Value R-6.0
D. Comply with ASTM C553 standard
E. Comply with ASTM C1136-02
F. Comply with ASTM E84
G. Comply with IECC

90 Percent
2.4 INTERNAL DUCT LINER
A. Use only where specifically noted, or with written approval of Engineer.
B. Install internal duct liner that extends no more than 2’-0” below roof deck at each
rooftop unit.
C. Thickness:
1. 1½ inch thick, Minimum Value R-6.0
D. Fasteners:
1. Pronged straps.
E. Comply With ASTM C916-85(2001)e1
F. Comply with ASTM C1071 standard
G. Comply with ASTM C553 standard
H. Comply with ASTM C1136-02
I. Comply with ASTM E84
J. Comply with IECC
2.5 FIREPROOFING KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTS
A. Manufacturer:
1. Thermal Ceramics - Firemaster Duct Wrap
2. 3M Fire Barrier Duct Wrap
3. John Manville Firetemp Wrap
B. Materials:
1. Fire Resistive duct wrap: Duct Wrap, 1.5" thick or 2” thick, 24" or 48" wide x 300"
long rolls, foil encapsulated with logo identification. Duct Wrap Collar, 8" wide for
air duct butt alternate wrap method (see Part 3).
2. Tapes:
a. High performance filament: Tape No. 898, 1" wide, manufactured by 3M
Company, St. Paul, MN, or equal and approved.
b. Aluminum foil tape: Minimum 3" wide to seal cut blanket edges.
3. Banding Material:
a. 304 Stainless Steel banding: 3/4" wide x 0.015" thick minimum.
4. Insulation Pins/Washers:
a. Pins: 10 gage, 5 inches long, copper coated steel; washers: 1.5" x 1.5"
square or 1.5” diameter galvanized steel speed clip.
5. Through-Penetration Fire Stop Materials:
a. Packing Material: Scrap pieces, Duct wrap, 1.5" thick or 3 pcf mineral wool
as packing material.
b. 3M FB-2000+Silicone or FireMaster Putty, ceramic fiber based sealant.

90 Percent
6. Grease Duct Access Door:

a. Steel angle opening frame
b. Access over, minimum 16 gage
c. Insulation Pins
d. Speed Clips, minimum 1.5" x 1.5" or 1.5" diameter galvanized steel
7. Hardware:
a. Threaded rods: 4" to 5" long, 1/4" diameter galvanized steel with 1/4" wing
nuts and 1/4" metal washers.
b. Four inch long steel hollow tubing to fit threaded rods.
c. 1/4" wing nuts.
2.6 FIREPROOFING HAZARDOUS EXHAUST DUCTS (SCIENCE FUME HOODS)
A. Hazardous exhaust ductwork shall only be wrapped with fireproof insulation if the
hazardous exhaust ductwork must pass through a fire rated wall.
B. Manufacturer:
1. Thermal Ceramics - Firemaster Duct Wrap
2. 3M Fire Barrier Duct Wrap
3. John Manville Firetemp Wrap
C. Materials:
1. Fire Resistive duct wrap: Duct Wrap, 1.5" thick or 2” thick, 24" or 48" wide x 300"
long rolls, foil encapsulated with logo identification. Duct Wrap Collar, 8" wide for
air duct butt alternate wrap method (see Part 3).
2. Tapes:
a. High performance filament: Tape No. 898, 1" wide, manufactured by 3M
Company, St. Paul, MN, or equal and approved.
b. Aluminum foil tape: Minimum 3" wide to seal cut blanket edges.
3. Banding Material:
a. 304 Stainless Steel banding: 3/4" wide x 0.015" thick minimum.
4. Insulation Pins/Washers:
a. Pins: 10 gage, 5 inches long, copper coated steel; washers: 1.5" x 1.5"
square or 1.5” diameter galvanized steel speed clip.
5. Through-Penetration Fire Stop Materials:
a. Packing Material: Scrap pieces, Duct wrap, 1.5" thick or 3 pcf mineral wool
as packing material.
b. 3M FB-2000+Silicone or FireMaster Putty, ceramic fiber based sealant.
6. Hardware:
a. Threaded rods: 4" to 5" long, 1/4" diameter galvanized steel with 1/4" wing
nuts and 1/4" metal washers.
b. Four inch long steel hollow tubing to fit threaded rods.
c. 1/4" wing nuts.
PART 3 EXECUTION

90 Percent
3.1 DUCT WRAP INSTALLATION
A. Wrap insulation tightly on the ductwork with all circumferential joints butted and
longitudinal joints overlapped a minimum of 3 inches.
B. Adhere insulation to metal with 4 inch strips of insulation bonding, using adhesive at
8 inch centers.
C. On circumferential joints, secure the 2-inch flange of the facing and tape with a
minimum of 3 inch wide foil reinforced Kraft tape.
D. On longitudinal joints, secure the overlap using 9/16 inch flared door staples applied
6 inches on centers and taped with minimum 3 inch wide foil reinforced Kraft tape.
E. Tape all pin penetrations or punctures in facing.
F. The duct wrap insulation on all rectangular/square ducts 24-inch or wider shall be
additionally secured to the bottom of the duct with mechanical fasteners such as pins
and speed clip washers. Spacing at 18-inch on center each direction to prevent
sagging.
G. Fasten insulation installed on diffusers, grilles, and registers using 3-inch minimum
wide foil reinforced Kraft tape.
H. Extend insulation 1 inch beyond each outer surface of diffuser, grille, and register.
3.2 INTERNAL DUCT LINER
A. Provide internal duct liner as indicated on the plans.
B. Install internal duct liner on rooftop unit supply and return ducts no more than 2’-0”
below roof deck.
C. Apply the liner to the inside of the duct with heavy density side to the air stream and
secure to the duct with adhesive Insul-Coustic No. 225 completely coating the clean
sheet metal.
D. Do not use duct liner in kitchen or other areas that may have excess moisture present.
E. Secure fasteners to the ducts with adhesive.
F. Conform to SMACNA Standards for all duct construction standards.
G. Accurately cut the liner and thoroughly coat the ends with adhesive to make a firmly
butted and tightly sealed joint.
H. Where ducts are lined, exterior insulation will not be needed except as otherwise
specified.
I. Install duct liner in accordance with SMACNA standards.

90 Percent
3.3 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTS
A. Install Duct wrap system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

referenced standards.
B. Install Duct wrap in direct contact with the duct it enclosed. Protect every portion of
duct with manufacturer specified layers for grease duct applications. Overlap both
perimeter and longitudinal joints minimum 3" per layer of material.
C. Air Duct Enclosure Alternate Wrap:

1. Follow same traditional wrap method with exception of utilizing a 3" perimeter
overlap in conjunction with longitudinal butt joint wrap plus Duct wrap Collar over
exterior layer joints. Filament tape is used as temporary hold on both layers until
banding hardware is in place. Band exterior layer spaced minimum 10½" on
center. For duct widths greater than 24", weld insulation pins to bottom horizontal
and outer vertical duct runs. Impale Duct wrap over pins and secure with
galvanized steel speed clips until banding is applied.
D. Locate grease duct access doors at horizontal cleanouts as required by local codes.
Protect with minimum of 2 layers of Duct wrap, each layer overlapping previous by 1"
on all sides and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Sections of grease ducts that are inaccessible from the hood or discharge openings
shall be provided with cleanout openings spaced not more than 20 feet apart and not
more than 10 feet from changes in direction greater than 45 degrees.
F. Cleanouts and openings shall be equipped with tight-fitting doors constructed of steel
having a thickness not less than that required for the duct.
G. Cleanout doors shall be installed liquid tight.
H. Door assemblies including any frames and gaskets shall be approved for the
application and shall not have fasteners that penetrate the duct.
I. Gasket and sealing materials shall be rated for not less than 1500ºF (816ºC).
J. Protect floor and wall penetrations with an approved through-penetration system

having an F and T hourly rating not less than that of assembly penetrated and installed
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as follows:
1. Grease Ducts - 2 hour Enclosure: Alternate A: 2 layers Duct wrap per
manufacturer's installation instructions, maintaining 3" transverse and
longitudinal overlaps continuous through the penetration. Alternate B: Tightly butt
Duct wrap to the floor or wall on both sides of the assembly. Fill remaining annular
space (3" maximum) between the wrapped duct (Alternate A) or bare steel duct
(Alternate B) and periphery of the opening with 4¼" thickness of scrap Duct wrap,
or 4¼" 3 pcf mineral wool batt, firmly packed into opening. Apply 1/4" minimum
2000+ Silicone over packing material, within the annulus, flush with top surface
of floor or both surfaces of wall.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 23 07 21
REFRIGERANT PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Elastomeric closed-cell structure insulation
B. Applications - Refrigerant suction lines serving cooling units
B. Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
ratings.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit 1/4" per foot shop drawing(s) showing all piping and equipment shown by
plans and specifications. The drawings shall be coordinated with structural, electrical,
and fire sprinkler drawings.
1.6 REFERENCES
B. ASTM E 84-03 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
C. ASTM C 355 - Water Vapor Permeability
Refrigerant Piping Insulation 23 07 21 - 1

90 Percent
A. Fire Endurance Rating: The composite classifications shall not exceed the flame
spread rating and the smoke development rating as outlined by NFPA 255/ ASTM E-
84 for the basic material, the finishes, adhesives, etc., specified for each system, and
shall be such when completely assembled.
B. Components such as adhesives, mastics and cement must meet the same
requirement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE INSULATION
A. Type: Closed-cell polyethylene pipe insulation.
B. Performance Criteria: Resistant to ultra-violet and biological degradation.
C. Temperature Range: -90°F to 200°F
D. Water Vapor Permeability (Dry Cup): Less than 0.03 per inch when measured by
ASTM C355.
E. Thermal Conductivity: 0.25 - 0.29 BTU-IN/HR-FT2-°F.
F. Refrigerant Suction Lines Insulation thickness - 1½-inches
G. Manufacturer/Model:
1. Armacell
2. Aeroflex
2.2 SEALANT & ADHESIVE
A. Manufacturer/Model:
1. Therma-Cel
2. Armstrong
3. Aeroflex
2.3 FINISHES
A. Manufacturers:
1. WB Armstrong Finish - White
2. Aeroflex
3. VentureClad

90 Percent
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE
A. Where straps or hangers are used, provide insulation shield.
B. Apply insulation to clean, dry pipes.
C. Butt insulation joints firmly together.
D. Seal butt seams with sealant. Duct tape or electrical tape will not be permitted.
E. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Accomplish in a good workmanship manner and be neat in appearance.
G. Insulation not neat in appearance will be rejected by the Engineer.
H. Do not stretch insulation around elbows.
I. Install insulation on piping prior to final connection.
J. Longitudinal joints installed after pipe is assembled are not acceptable.
K. Refer to plans for installation of shields around pipe hangers.
L. Do not allow liquid lines to come in contact with any structural members or steel stubs.
Use plastic ties to secure liquid lines to insulation on vapor line. Do not crush
insulation.
3.2 FINISH
A. All insulation to be painted with WB Armstrong Finish, or equivalent. Apply as

recommended by the manufacturer, to protect the insulation on exterior of building.
Apply above 50°F. Apply to dry insulation only.
3.3 VALVES, FLANGES & FITTINGS
A. Insulate all valves, flanges, and fittings in a neat manner.
3.4 REPAIRS & REPLACEMENT
A. Replace any insulation that has ever been wet.
B. Repair any damage caused by condensation due to improper insulating.
C. Replace any insulation which is cut or torn during construction.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 23 08 00
COMMISSIONING OF HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL

Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
section.
B. Division 01 section ‘Building Systems Commissioning’.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes commissioning process requirements for Mechanical systems,

assemblies, and equipment.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Building Systems Commissioning" for general
commissioning process requirements.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for the description of

commissioning.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for definitions.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for CxA’s role.
B. Refer to Division 01 Section “Submittals” for specific requirements. In addition,

provide the following:
1. Certificates of readiness
2. Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities.
3. O&M manuals
4. Test reports
Commissioning of Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning 23 08 00 - 1

90 Percent
A. Test Equipment Calibration Requirements: Contractors will comply with test

manufacturer’s calibration procedures and intervals. Recalibrate test instruments
immediately after instruments have been repaired resulting from being dropped or
damaged. Affix calibration tags to test instruments. Furnish calibration records to CxA
upon request.
1.7 COORDINATION

pertaining to coordination during the commissioning process.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup, initial checkout and
functional performance testing shall be provided by the Contractor for the equipment
being tested. For example, the mechanical contractor of Division 23 shall ultimately
be responsible for all standard testing equipment for the mechanical systems and
controls systems in Division 23. A sufficient quantity of two-way radios shall be
provided by each contractor.
B. Special equipment, tools and instruments (specific to a piece of equipment and only
available from vendor) required for testing shall be included in the base bid price to
the Owner and left on site, except for stand-alone data logging equipment that may
be used by the CxA.
C. Proprietary test equipment and software required by any equipment manufacturer for
programming and/or start-up, whether specified or not, shall be provided by the
manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment,
demonstrate its use, and assist in the commissioning process as needed. Proprietary
test equipment (and software) shall become the property of the Owner upon
completion of the commissioning process.
D. Data logging equipment and software required to test equipment will be provided by
the CxA, but shall not become the property of the Owner.
E. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure
system performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not
otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: Temperature sensors
and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an
accuracy of 0.5ºF and a resolution of + or - 0.1ºF. Pressure sensors shall have an
accuracy of + or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter)
and have been calibrated within the last year.

90 Percent
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
A. With assistance from the installing contractors, the CxA will prepare Functional
Testing Forms for all commissioned components, equipment, and systems.
B. Red-lined Drawings:
1. The contractor will verify all equipment, systems, instrumentation, wiring and
components are shown correctly on red-lined drawings.
2. Preliminary red-lined drawings must be made available to the Commissioning
Team for use prior to the start of Functional Performance Testing.
3. Changes, as a result of Functional Testing, must be incorporated into the final
as-built drawings, which will be created from the red-lined drawings.
4. The contracted party, as defined in the Contract Documents will create the as-
built drawings.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Contractor will provide a copy of O&M literature within 45 days of each submittal
acceptance for use during the commissioning process for all commissioned
2. The CxA will review the O&M literature once for conformance to project
requirements.
3. The CxA will receive a copy of the final approved O&M literature once corrections
have been made by the Contractor.
D. Systems manual requirements:

1. The Systems Manual is intended to be a usable information resource containing
all of the information related to the systems, assemblies, and Commissioning
Process in one place with indexes and cross references.
2. The GC shall include final approved versions of the following information for the
Systems Manual:
a. As-Built System Schematics
b. Verified Record Drawings
c. Test Results (not otherwise included in Cx Record)
d. Periodic Maintenance Information for computer maintenance management
system
e. Recommendations for recalibration frequency of sensors and actuators
f. A list of contractors, subcontractors, suppliers, architects, and engineers
involved in the project along with their contact information
g. Training Records, Information on training provided, attendees list, and any
on-going training
3. This information shall be organized and arranged by building system, such as fire
alarm, chilled water, heating hot water, etc.
4. Information should be provided in an electronic version to the extent possible.
Legible, scanned images are acceptable for non-electronic documentation to
facilitate this deliverable.

90 Percent
3.2 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA.
B. Attend construction phase controls coordination meetings.
C. Participate in Mechanical systems, assemblies, equipment, and component

maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.
D. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation.
E. Include requirements for submittal data, operation and maintenance data, and training
in each purchase order or sub-contract written.
F. Prepare preliminary schedule for Mechanical system orientations and inspections,

operation and maintenance manual submissions, training sessions, equipment start-
up and task completion for owner.
G. Update schedule as required throughout the construction period.
H. Perform and clearly document all completed startup and system operational checkout
procedures, providing a copy to the CxA.
I. Assist the CxA in all verification and functional performance tests.
J. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data and provide
data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the
required test period.
K. Gather operation and maintenance literature on all equipment and assemble in

binders as required by the specifications. Submit to CxA 45 days after submittal
acceptance.
L. Participate in, and schedule vendors and contractors to participate in the training
sessions.
M. Provide written notification to the CM/GC and CxA that the following work has been
completed in accordance with the contract documents, and that the equipment,
systems, and sub-system are operating as required.
Cx Systems Require Items Tested

Fx
Testing
HVAC
__ Chilled Water Plants Yes Controls, Sequence
of Operations,
Alarms
__ Hot Water Plants Yes Controls, Sequence
of Operations,
Alarms

90 Percent
Cx Systems Require Items Tested

Fx
Testing
__ Air Handling Units Yes Controls, Sequence
of Operations,
Alarms, Economizer
__ Packaged Units (RTU and HP) Yes Controls, Sequence
of Operations,
Alarms, Economizer
__ Terminal Units/VAV’s Yes Controls, Sequence
of Operations,
Alarms, Economizer
__ Exhaust and Relief fans Yes Controls, Sequence
of Operations,
Alarms
__ DDC Control System (Component installation Yes System calibration
and System Operation) and function
N. The equipment supplier shall document the performance of his equipment.
O. Provide a complete set of red-lined drawings to the CxA prior to the start of Functional
Performance Testing.
P. Provide training of the Owner’s operating staff using expert qualified personnel, as
specified.
Q. Equipment Suppliers
specific responsibilities of the Owner, to keep warranties in force.
2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with contractors.
3. Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence of
operation and testing procedures.
R. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for additional

Contractor responsibilities.
3.3 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for Owner’s

Responsibilities.
3.4 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for Design

Professional’s Responsibilities.
3.5 CXA'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for CxA’s

Responsibilities.

90 Percent
3.6 TESTING PREPARATION
A. Certify in writing to the CxA that Mechanical systems, subsystems, and equipment
have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the
Contract Documents.
B. Certify in writing to the CxA that Mechanical instrumentation and control systems have
been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract
Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded.
C. Certify in writing that testing procedures have been completed and that testing reports
have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.
D. Place systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g.,
normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle,
emergency power, and alarm conditions).
E. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety
systems during each mode of operation.
F. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record

test data as directed by the CxA.
3.7 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the

direction of the CxA.
B. Scope of Mechanical testing shall include sequence of operations for HVAC

equipment, HVAC building automation control system, economizers; etc.
C. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal
or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system
controllers and sensors.
D. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible.
E. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not
practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate
testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions
as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of
simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions.
F. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not
practical.
G. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design
or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical.

90 Percent
H. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the

Mechanical system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After
deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.
I. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial
performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.
3.8 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING

PROCEDURES
A. Functional Performance Tests: Sample functional performance testing procedures

are included in Part 3.13. These procedures are representative of those that will be
implemented in the Cx process. The CxA may modify these procedures during the
Construction Phase once all systems are known and all required documentation has
been provided.
B. Mechanical Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Assist the CxA with
preparation of testing plans.
3.9 DEFICIENCIES/NON-CONFORMANCE, COST OF RETESTING, FAILURE DUE TO

MANUFACTURER DEFECT

pertaining to deficiencies/non-conformance, cost of retesting, or failure due to
manufacturer defect.
3.10 APPROVAL
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for approval

procedures.
3.11 DEFERRED TESTING

pertaining to deferred testing.
3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall conform to Contract Documents

requirements as stated in Division 01.
B. Refer to Division 01 Section “Building Systems Commissioning” for the AE and CxA
roles in the Operation and Maintenance Manual contribution, review and approval
process.
3.13 SAMPLE FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING PROCEDURES
A. These testing procedures are representative of those that will be implemented in the
Cx process. The CxA may modify these procedures during the Construction Phase
once all systems are known and all required documentation has been provided.

90 Percent
Example Systems Electronic File Name
AHU AHU-FT

90 Percent
Functional Test Record- ________________________________
Project Owner: _______________
Project Type: ________________
Project Address:
List Building Systems to Test:
CH-1 & CH-2 Cooling Only Generator Run Status

VAV Terminal
BL-1 & BL-2 Electrical Room Lighting
Exhaust Fans
AHU-A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, Boiler Room Fire Alarm Monitoring
C2, D1, D2 Supply Fan
AHU-B3, E1, E2 Packaged Utility Monitoring
Computer Room
Units (MDF/IDF)
AHU-E3 Freezer/Cooler Relief Dampers
OAHU-A1, B1, E1 Kitchen Power Monitoring

Exhaust/Supply
Fans
FCU-1 Dishwasher Outside Air Conditions
Exhaust
Constant Volume Terminal Building
Unit with Hot Water Emergency
Reheat Shutdown
Constant Volume Terminal General Exhaust
Unit with Electric Reheat Fans
Beginning O. A. Temp: Ending O.A. % RH:

Temp:
______________ (F) ____________ (HI)_______ (LO)________
(F)

90 Percent
List Weather conditions at the project site: Mostly dry conditions with a short shower.
List Controls and HVAC

___________________, ____________________,
Testing Spec Sections:
___________________, ____________________,
___________________
Building Environmental Conditions:
□ Clean □ Dirty □ Dry □ Wet

□ Other In Construction
Verify the following Yes No If No is checked, list reason

conditions prior to
testing
□ AHU/O.A/CV Boxes □ □
have clean filters installed
□ Final Filters are as □ □
specified
□ Ductwork protective □ □
covers have been removed
□ TAB is Complete for □ □
systems being tested
□ Controls are complete □ □
and system is controlled
from DDC control
panel/laptop

90 Percent
Verify the following documentation Yes No

requirements have been met prior to
testing
Checklists have been sampled for review by □ □
the CxA to determine the operational
readiness for systems being tested
TAB Draft Field Report has been reviewed □ □
and all know TAB deficiencies are corrected or
noted by the Cx Agent
Controls Contractor completed Pre- □ □
Commissioning Checklist has been reviewed
by the CxA
General Contractor has been notified of the □ □
CxA scheduled testing dates and times. This
is related to coordination with Life Safety
Systems testing by the AHJ or Fire Marshal.
All issues identified and recorded on the Cx □ □
Issues Log or reported to the GC have been
resolved
COMMISSIONING CHECKLISTS:
□ REVIEWED by CxA
□ COMPLETE
□ INCOMPLETE
TAB FIELD REPORT:
□ SUBMITTED □ NOT SUBMITTED

□ REVIEWED □ NOT REVIEWED
CEILING SYSTEMS/GRID INSTALLED IN ALL AREAS UNDER TEST
□ YES □ NO
LIGHTING SYSTEMS:
□ INDOOR □ EXTERIOR □ SITE □ NOT TESTED
□ INSTALLED □ FULLY OPERATIONAL □ PRE-TESTED BY CONTROLS SUB

90 Percent
□ NOT INSTALLED □ NOT FULLY OPERATIONAL □ NOT PRE-TESTED
COMMENTS:
CxA Note: Items found noncompliant, incomplete, in variance to the contract documents or
fail to perform as intended per the contract documents and engineer approved control
sequences, will be documented in writing, and the GC, Owner’s PM and Engineer of record
will be notified of the discrepancy. The GC will be responsible for ensuring his sub-contractors
resolve issues reported, in a timely manner and to notify the CxA that the system is made
ready for Functional Retest.
Building Occupied/Unoccupied Schedule:
Day of Week Area System Occ Syst. Un-Occ

Enabled Disabled
Monday - Friday Admin 6:00 AM 7:00 3:30 PM 4:00 PM
AM
Classrooms
Gym
Cafeteria
General Spaces
Weekend Scheduled as requested per facility request
Holidays Scheduled as requested per facility request
Note:
Optimum Start Program: Yes No Comments

Yes No
Required □ □

90 Percent
Programmed □ □
Designated Temperature Setpoints:
Occupied:
Cooling Setpoint °F 74 +/- 1°
Heating Setpoint °F 69 +/- 1°
Unoccupied:
Cooling Setpoint °F 95
Heating Setpoint °F 55
Night Setback
Setpoint °F 95/55
CxA Note: Testing

sequences may be
conducted
simultaneously where
systems are connected
or operate in conjunction
with one another. This
includes Chillers,
Boilers, AHU's, TU's and
Exhaust fans.
Testing Sequence
Variable Volume Air Handling Unit Pass Fail Note

Sequence of Operation
Unit: VAV AHU #
Fan Control

90 Percent
When the air handling unit is requested to run,

the BAS shall start the fan. A current switch
shall prove status to the BAS and shall alarm
at the central site if the switch is not made
within 40 seconds (adjustable).
Cold Deck Temperature Control

When the air handling unit is in occupied
mode and cooling is required, the BAS shall
send a
request for cooling to the chiller plant and shall
modulate the chilled water control valve to
maintain leaving air temperature set point (55
°F, adjustable).
Air Volume Control

While the air handling unit is active, the BAS
shall maintain the duct static pressure set
point at 1.5" w.g. (adjustable) by modulating
the speed of the supply fan through a variable
speed drive (VSD). A static pressure sensor,
mounted two-thirds down the longest duct run,
shall monitor the duct static pressure. A
manual-reset static pressure high limit switch,
shall monitor the static pressure of the supply
ducts. If the duct static pressure rises above
3.0" w.g. (locally adjustable) the air handling
unit shall be de-energized via hard-wire
interlock to the VFD safety circuit. The BAS
shall monitor the high static limit switch and
shall display an alarm at the central site. The
static pressure high limit switch must be
manually reset.
Demand Control Ventilation

When the air handler is running in the
occupied mode, the OA damper control shall
be enabled. CO2 sensors mounted as
indicated on drawings, shall monitor the CO2
levels. Where multiple sensors are provided
for a particular AHU, the BAS shall select the
highest level for control. The BAS shall
modulate the outdoor air damper from its
minimum position to its maximum position as
required to maintain the CO2 level between
850 ppm and 1000 ppm (all adjustable). The
OA dampers minimum and maximum
positions shall be determined by the T.A.B.

90 Percent
contractor to be the positions that allow the

scheduled minimum and maximum OA CFM.
The system shall have the ability to perform a
“Purge Mode” at a scheduled time for a
scheduled duration. The BAS will monitor
Outside Airflow via the Airflow Monitoring
Station.
Humidity Control
The BAS shall monitor humidity in 2
representative zones for each AHU. If either
humidity
transmitter senses humidity above 55%
(adjustable), the BAS shall command 40% of
the
associated terminal units to 100% cooling
(adjustable), and the terminal unit controller
shall
utilize the terminal unit reheat to maintain
space setpoint.
Auxiliary DX Cooling Coil (If Available)

The air handling unit serving the
administration area shall be provided with an
auxiliary DX
cooling coil in addition to the hydronic coil.
When the system is operating after hours, the
BAS shall utilize the DX cooling for supply air
temperature control and shall not send a
request to the chiller plant.
Reversed valve, DX coil not started up

Associated Equipment
During the occupied time period, any
associated exhaust fans shall be
energized.
End of Testing
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 23 09 23
ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. It is the intent of this specification to describe the basic architecture and performance
requirements of the Energy Management Control System (EMCS). The turn-key
EMCS shall include Control Units, Distributed Controllers, Unitary Controllers, Local
Area Networks (LANs), sensors, modems, wiring, connectors, control devices,
actuators, installation and calibration, supervision, adjustments and fine tuning
necessary for a complete and fully operational system.
B. A distributed logic control system complete with all software and hardware functions
shall be provided and installed. System shall be completely based on ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 135-2001, BACnet. This system is to control all mechanical equipment,
including all unitary equipment such as VAV boxes, heat pumps, fan-coils, AC units,
etc. and all air handlers, boilers, chillers, and any other listed equipment using Native
BACnet-compliant components.
C. All systems shall be complete true stand-alone systems.
D. LonWorks or proprietary protocol software is not allowed.
E. Everything shall be reprogrammed through software without change of any hardware.

The owner shall have all the tools necessary to reprogram without any additional
costs.
F. A PC computer (Remote Workstation) is required at every school. A central work

station (CPU) shall be installed in the Energy Manager's office and provided by the
owner.
G. EMCS shall have backward and forward compatibility.
H. Systems shall be furnished and installed complete in all respects, including any and
all equipment, controls, wiring, instrumentation, enclosures, labor, engineering,
training, commissioning, programming, supervision, calibration, coordination with
other trades, etc. No information given in (or omitted from) these specifications shall
relieve the contractor of this absolute requirement. Include all associated electrical
work except as noted. Work includes furnishing of all labor, superintendence,
materials, tools, equipment and sources necessary for the complete installation or
modification of the following systems as herein specified. It is the intent of these
Energy Management Control System 23 09 23 - 1

90 Percent
specifications that the Contractor shall furnish and install the systems complete in
every respect and ready to operate. All equipment, miscellaneous items and
accessories required for such installation and for the correct and convenient operation
of the entire installation whether or not each such item or accessory is shown on the
plans or mentioned in these specifications shall be furnished and installed.
I. Should discrepancies or ambiguities arise within these specifications, the most

stringent condition with regard to cost shall govern the bid. Obtain clarification from
the Engineer prior to purchasing equipment and proceeding with the work.
J. Where drawings are provided as part of or supplement to these specifications, such

drawings are inherently schematic only and not intended to convey all controls, wiring,
installation, details, etc. It shall be the responsibility of the EMCS contractor to verify
that control approaches presented are appropriate for the HVAC systems involved,
and that bids include all work described, specified, or otherwise necessary for a
complete and functioning system.
K. Schedule: Contractor acknowledges that submission of bid constitutes agreement

with and conformance to the completion dates.
L. Codes, Permits, and Fees: This contractor shall comply with all local, state and
national codes, and shall secure and pay or all applicable costs, fees, permits, and
licenses. No additional costs shall be allowed for these items.
M. Other Conditions:
1. Safety: Execute all work with the highest regard to safety. Comply with all laws
governing safety, including the "Occupational Safety and Health Standards" and
the "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction", State and federal. All
applicable power tools used during construction shall have current approval
under an approved Equipment Grounding Program and shall bear the tag relating
such. Contractor is solely responsible for all means and methods.
2. Coordination and Supervision: Each bid shall include the necessary detail and
interconnection work to coordinate his work with the work of other trades.
Contractor shall keep competent supervisory personnel on the job whenever
work is being performed which affects his trade.
3. Storage of Materials: Each Contractor shall provide temporary storage facilities
suitable for equipment stored at the job site. Storage facilities shall be
weatherproof and lockable as required.
4. Protection of Building and Materials: Each Contractor shall take necessary
precautions to prevent damage to existing buildings and to work of other trades.
5. Observations: Site observation by Owner or Engineer is for express purpose of
verifying compliance by Contractor with Contract Documents and shall not be
construed as construction supervision nor indication of approval of manner or
location in which work is being performed as being safe practice or place.
6. Contractor is reminded that he shall also comply with all respects to the Invitation
to Bid, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Notice of Bidders,
Instructions to Bidders, and all other governing parts of these specifications and
the contract documents. These sections are included as part of the contract.

90 Percent
7. Where the term "Contractor" is used within these specifications, it shall be

understood to mean an approved controls manufacturer/contractor, and facility
management systems contractor.
N. The entire system shall be approved and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,
under UL916 for energy management systems and FCC-Part 15 Subparagraph J
Class A Emissions Requirements.
O. Equipment and Software Updates/Upgrades:

1. Equipment: All equipment, components, parts, materials, etc. provided
throughout the period of Work (as governed in the Agreement) shall be fully
compatible with all other equipment, etc. provided at any other time throughout
the period of Work. Should updated versions of equipment be provided which are
not fully compatible with earlier equipment provided, Contractor shall replace
earlier equipment with the later version at no cost to Owner.
2. Software: All software upgrades applicable to system and offered by the
manufacturer/contractor for this system shall be provided at no cost to the Owner
throughout the period of work. This no cost upgrade shall include installation,
programming, modifications to field equipment, data base revisions, training, etc.
as appropriate.
P. The Engineer shall reserve all authority regarding approval, conditional approval, or
rejection of systems not fully complying with these specifications.
1.3 WORK INCLUDED
A. The EMCS shall be a totally Native BACnet-based system based on a distributed

control system in accordance with this specification. All building controllers,
application controllers, and all input/output devices shall communicate using the
protocols and network standards as defined by ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001,
BACnet. In other words, all controllers, including unitary controllers, shall be Native
BACnet devices. No gateways shall be used for communication to controllers installed
under this section. Gateways may be used for communication to existing systems or
to systems installed under other sections.
B. The installing contractor shall provide the new web-based software and software
updates required for this project. Additionally, the installing contractor shall provide all
computer related components (BAS Web server) for the new software platform to
function in a peer-to-peer environment.
C. The owner will provide reserved DHCP addresses and any other network
configuration information necessary to each control contractor for the purpose of
configuring each building controller and/or server on the owner’s network. The
controls contractor shall coordinate the IP address for each building controller and/or
server. It shall be the responsibility of each control contractor to coordinate with the
owner for network connectivity.
D. The Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) application program shall be
written to communicate specifically utilizing BACnet protocols. Software shall include
password protection, alarming, logging of historical data, full graphics including

90 Percent
animation, full suite of field engineering tools including graphical programming and
applications. Systems using operating systems other than that described above are
strictly prohibited.
E. Building controllers shall include complete energy management software, including

scheduling building control strategies and logging routines. All energy management
software and firmware shall be resident in field hardware and shall not be dependent
on the operator’s terminal. Operator’s terminal software is to be used for access to
field-based energy management functions only. Provide zone-by-zone direct digital
logic control of space temperature, scheduling, runtime accumulation, equipment
alarm reporting, and override timers for after-hours usage.
F. All application controllers for every terminal unit (VAV, HP, UV, etc.) air handler, all
central plant equipment, and any other piece of controlled equipment shall be fully
programmable. Application controllers shall be mounted next to controlled equipment
and communicate with building controller via BACnet LAN.
G. Provide all necessary BACnet-compliant hardware and software to meet the system’s
functional specifications. Provide Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
(PICS) for Windows-based control software and every controller in system, including
unitary controllers.
H. Prepare individual hardware layouts, interconnection drawings, and software

configuration from project design data.
I. Implement the detailed design for all analog and binary objects, system databases,
graphic displays, logs, and management reports based on control descriptions, logic
drawings, configuration data, and bid documents.
J. Design, provide, and install all equipment cabinets, panels, data communication
network cables needed, and all associated hardware.
K. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between supplied cabinets, application
controllers, and input/output devices.
L. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between all operator’s terminals and
peripheral devices (such as printers, etc.) supplied under this section.
M. Provide complete manufacturer’s specifications for all items that are supplied. Include
vendor name of every item supplied.
N. Provide supervisory specialists and technicians at the job site to assist in all phases
of system installation, startup, and commissioning.
O. Provide a comprehensive operator and technician training program as described

herein.
P. Provide as-built documentation, operator’s terminal software, diagrams, and all other
associated project operational documentation (such as technical manuals) on
approved media, the sum total of which accurately represents the final system.

90 Percent
Q. Provide new sensors, dampers, valves, and install only new electronic actuators. No
used components shall be used as any part or piece of installed system.
R. Unless otherwise specified, all products shall be of single manufacturer where

possible with substitutions approved by Engineer/Owner.
S. Provide all indicating devices, interface equipment, and other apparatus required to
operate mechanical system and to perform functions specified and to operate other
items specified.
T. Provide protective devices to prevent damage to the EMCS as a result of lightning.
U. The Energy Management Control system shall allow full user operation with minimum
of training. It shall have an English language display, with both user prompts and a
"help" user tutorial. It shall contain management reports for the monitoring of both
current and historical energy usage, heating and cooling degree day, building status
and after hours occupancy information.
V. All applications programs shall be pre-engineered and pretested. Program entries

shall utilize graphical templates.
W. Workmanship:
1. Contractor shall use only thoroughly trained and experienced workmen
completely familiar with the items required and with the manufacturers
recommended methods of installation. In all respects, the workmanship shall be
of the highest grade, and all construction shall be done according to the best
practice of the trade. Unless otherwise noted, conduit shall be concealed and
installed square to the building lines. Any work not meeting these requirements
shall be replaced or rebuilt without extra expense to the Owner
B. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
C. Section 23 81 19 - Packaged HVAC Units
D. Section 23 81 26 - Split System HVAC Units
E. Section 26 00 00 - Basic Electrical Requirements
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Energy Management Control System, Facility Management System, Control System

are to be considered the same.
1.6 REFERENCES
A. The latest edition of the following standards and codes in effect and amended as of

90 Percent
supplier's proposal date, and any applicable subsections thereof, shall govern design
and selection of equipment and material supplied:
1. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE).
2. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001, BACnet.
3. Uniform Building Code (UBC), including local amendments.
4. UL 916 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Energy Management Equipment.
Canada and the US.
5. National Electrical Code (NEC).
6. FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A.
7. EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (European CE Mark).
8. City, county, state, and federal regulations and codes in effect as of contract date.
9. Except as otherwise indicated the system supplier shall secure and pay for all
permits, inspections, and certifications required for his work and arrange for
necessary approvals by the governing authorities.
1.7 SPECIFICATION NOMENCLATURE
EMCS Energy Management and Control System

WAN Wide Area Network
RWS Remote Work Station
HHI Hand Held Interface
LAN Local Area Network
A. Responsibility:
1. The supplier of the EMCS shall be responsible for inspection and Quality
Assurance (QA) for all materials and workmanship furnished.
B. Component Testing:
1. Maximum reliability shall be achieved through extensive use of high-quality, pre-
tested components. Each and every controller, sensor, and all other DDC
components shall be individually tested by the manufacturer prior to shipment.
C. Tools, Testing and Calibration Equipment:

1. The EMCS supplier shall provide all tools, testing, and calibration equipment
necessary to ensure reliability and accuracy of the system.
1.9 SUBMITTALS
A. Drawings
1. The system supplier shall submit detailed complete, engineered drawings,
control sequence, and bill of materials for approval.
desired.

90 Percent
B. System Documentation
1. Include the following in submittal package:
a. Data sheets for all pieces of equipment.
b. System configuration diagrams in simplified block format.
c. All input/output object listings and an alarm point summary listing.
d. Electrical drawings that show all system internal and external connection
points, terminal block layouts, and terminal identification.
e. Complete bill of materials, valve schedule and damper schedule.
f. Manufacturer's instructions and drawings for installation, maintenance, and
operation of all purchased items.
g. Overall system operation and maintenance instructions including preventive
maintenance and troubleshooting instructions.
C. For all system elements - operator’s workstation(s), building controller(s), application

controllers, routers, and repeaters, provide BACnet Protocol Implementation
Conformance Statements (PICS) as per ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001.
D. Provide complete description and documentation of any proprietary (non-BACnet)

services and/or objects used in the system.
E. A list of all functions available and a sample of function block programming that shall
be part of delivered system.
1. Scheduling
a. The vendor shall provide a detailed project design and installation schedule
with time markings and details for hardware items and software development
phases. Schedule shall show all the target dates for transmission of project
information and documents and shall indicate timing and dates for system
installation, debugging, and commissioning.
2. Drawings and Manuals:
a. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with
"record" layouts for the system. Layouts shall indicate all equipment and the
function of each item shall be indicated.
3. Operating instructions and as-built system flow diagrams and drawings shall be
prepared, bound and delivered to the Owner. Each sensor, relay, switch, motor,
controller, indicator (when inside panel), and item of equipment, etc., shall be
identified with a number or mark identical to one which shall be tagged on each
item. Large items of equipment may be identified by a suitable symbol listed in a
legend on the control diagram.
1.10 EMCS CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Energy Management Control System Manufacturer/Contractor, to be acceptable

to this project, must have had an established engineering and service office serving
the Owner's area for a minimum of five years prior to bid date of this project and be
the authorized installing contractor for the manufacturer of the BACnet components.
This office shall have a staff of factory trained technicians fully capable of rendering
training, instruction, calibration procedures and routine and emergency maintenance
service on all system components furnished.

90 Percent
B. Installers shall have not less than five years’ experience with electronic and pneumatic
controls.
C. The entire system shall be provided by a qualified and approved Controls

Manufacturer/Contractor. It shall be designed by engineers and installed by
competent technicians, all of which are regularly employed by the manufacturer of the
control equipment. The Manufacturer/Contractor shall maintain permanent local
facilities for engineering, installation, and 24 hour maintenance and service. Submit
required Qualifications Form as specified. The manufacturer shall provide evidence
of the ability to support and service the work in the Owner's facilities.
D. The Bidder/Contractor shall be certified by the manufacturer of the equipment and

have factory trained installers
E. Equipment and performance are intended as a standard of quality, but not as a means
of excluding other approved Manufacturers/Control Contractors.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. The temperature control contractor shall guarantee all workmanship and material in
the installed temperature regulation system for a period of one (1) year, such
guarantee dating from the date of final acceptance of the entire air conditioning
system by the Architect/Engineer.
B. This warranty shall cover the repair or replacement without additional costs to the
Owner of any defective materials, parts, etc. of facility workmanship.
C. During the warranty period, the temperature controls contractor shall respond to calls
for warranty service within eight (8) working hours. Emergency service shall be
obtainable within four (4) hours of notification by the Owner. Emergency service shall
be obtainable on a 24 hour basis, seven (7) days per week.
D. The temperature control contractor's office shall be within a 150-mile radius of the job
site.
E. Warranty Access:
1. The Owner shall grant to the Contractor, reasonable access to the EMCS system
during the warranty period. The owner shall provide, at no cost to the contractor,
remote software access to an on-site computer or VPN access for the following
functions:
a. Access to the entire facility control system by the contractor to provide
service and diagnostic support.
F. Service:
1. All service of the system shall be furnished by the Contractor, at no cost to the
Owner, for a period of one (1) year, concurrent with the warranty period specified
above.
PART 2 PRODUCTS

90 Percent
2.1 ACCEPTABLE EMCS VENDORS
A. Reliable Controls - Enviromatic Systems
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, of regular
manufacture for this application. All systems and components shall have been
thoroughly tested and proven in actual use.
B. Exceptions to the specification will qualify bid as unacceptable.
2.3 OPERATOR’S WORKSTATION
A. Software:
1. EMS software shall be provided as an all-inclusive package. Software package
shall allow the owner to have all the software modules/software tools that the
controls contractor has for installation. The district shall have the software tools
to be 100% self-sufficient when it comes to programming the systems, modifying
DDC and graphics, creating reports and trends, etc. Provisions to provide
software at each school campus at no additional charge in the future must be
included as a part of this bid.
B. Software shall include the following, but not be limited to:

1. DDC Programming tool
2. All points binding and interoperability software to make the system truly open
3. Graphic editing tools
4. Energy management tools
5. Trending tools
C. Graphics:
1. Graphics pages shall consist of the following graphics at a minimum:
2. District Map
3. Floor plans (typical of every school for both space temperature and humidity)
4. Animated Unit Summary Pages (one per piece of HVAC equipment)
5. Text Summary Pages (one per piece HVAC equipment)
6. Time Schedule Pages
7. Run times Page
8. Graphics Editing Mode
9. Trendlog Page
D. General structure of workstation interaction shall be a standard client/server

relationship. Server shall be used to archive data and store system database. Clients
shall access server for all archived data. Each client shall include flexibility to access
graphics from server or local drive. Server shall support a minimum of 50 clients
simultaneously. Provide software licenses for server and 20 clients.

90 Percent
E. BACnet Conformance:
1. Operator’s workstation shall as a minimum support Point-to-Point (PTP) and
Ethernet BACnet LAN types. It shall communicate directly via these BACnet
LANs as a Native BACnet device. Operator’s terminal shall comply with the
requirements of a BACnet conformance class 3 device and support all BACnet
services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional groups:
a. Clock Functional Group
b. Event Response Functional Group
c. Time Master Functional Group
d. Device Communications
2. Refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard for a
complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of
the functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system,
shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All
necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.
3. Standard BACnet object types accessed by the workstation shall include as a
minimum: Analog Value, Analog Input, Analog Output, Binary Value, Binary
Input, Binary Output, Calendar, Device, Event Enrollment, File, Notification
Class, Program and Schedule object types. All proprietary object types, if used
in the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the
submittal data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary
information.
4. The Operator Workstation shall comply with Annex J of the BACnet specification
for IP connections. This device shall use Ethernet to connect to the IP
internetwork, while using the same Ethernet LAN for non-IP communications to
other BACnet devices on the LAN. Must support interoperability on wide area
networks (WANs) and campus area networks (CANs). Workstation shall support
Foreign Device Registration to allow temporary workstation connection to IP
network.
F. Displays:
1. Operator’s workstation shall display all data associated with project as called out
on drawings and/or object type list supplied. Graphic files shall be created using
digital, full color photographs of system installation, AutoCAD or Visio drawing
files of field installation drawings and wiring diagrams from as-built drawings.
Operator’s workstation shall display all data using three-dimensional graphic
representations of all mechanical equipment. System shall be capable of
displaying graphic file, text, and dynamic object data together on each display
and shall include animation. Information shall be labeled with descriptors and
shall be shown with the appropriate engineering units. All information on any
display shall be dynamically updated without any action by the user. Workstation
shall allow user to change all field-resident EMCS functions associated with the
project, such as setpoints, weekly schedules, exception schedules, etc. from any
screen no matter if that screen shows all text or a complete graphic display. This
shall be done without any reference to object addresses or other
numeric/mnemonic indications.
2. All displays and programming shall be generated and customized by the local
EMCS supplier and installer. Systems requiring factory programming for graphics
or DDC logic are specifically prohibited.

90 Percent
3. Binary objects shall be displayed as ACTIVE/INACTIVE/NULL or with

customized text. Text shall be justified left, right or center as selected by the user.
Also, allow binary objects to be displayed as individual change-of-state graphic
objects on the display screen such that they overlay the system graphic. Each
binary object displayed in this manner shall be assigned up to three graphic files
for display when the point is ON, OFF or in alarm. For binary outputs, toggle the
object’s commanded status when the graphic item is selected with the system
mouse. Similarly, allow the workstation operator to toggle the binary object’s
status by selecting with the mouse a graphic of a switch or light, for example,
which then displays a different graphic (such as an “ON” switch or lighted lamp).
Additionally, allow binary objects to be displayed as an animated graphic.
Animated graphic objects shall be displayed as a sequence of multiple graphics
to simulate motion. For example, when a pump is in the OFF condition, display a
stationary graphic of the pump. When the operator selects the pump graphic with
the mouse, the represented object’s status is toggled and the graphic of the
pump’s impeller rotates in a time-based animation. The operator shall be able to
click on an animated graphical object or switch it from the OFF position to ON, or
ON to OFF. Allow operator to change graphic file assignment and also create
new and original graphics online. System shall be supplied with a library of
standard graphics, which may be used unaltered or modified by the operator.
Systems that do not allow customization or creation of new graphic objects by
the operator (or with third-party software) shall not be allowed.
4. Analog objects shall be displayed with operator modifiable units. Analog input
objects may also be displayed as individual graphic items on the display screen
as an overlay to the system graphic. Each analog input object may be assigned
to a minimum of five graphic files, each with high/low limits for automatic selection
and display of these graphics. As an example, a graphic representation of a
thermometer would rise and fall in response to either the room temperature or its
deviation from the controlling setpoint. Analog output objects, when selected with
the mouse, shall be displayed as a prompted dialog (text only) box. Selection for
display type shall be individual for each object. Analog object values may be
changed by selecting either the “increase” or “decrease” arrow in the analog
object spinner box without using the keypad. Pressing the button on the right side
of the analog object spinner box allows direct entry of an analog value and
accesses various menus where the analog value may be used, such as
trendlogs.
5. Analog objects may also be assigned to an area of a system graphic, where the
color of the defined area changes based on the analog object’s value. For
example, an area of a floor-plan graphic served by a single control zone would
change color with respect to the temperature of the zone or its deviation from
setpoint. All editing and area assignment shall be created or modified online
using simple icon tools.
6. A customized menu label (push-button) shall be used for display selection. Menu
items on a display shall allow penetration to lower level displays or additional
menus. Dynamic point information and menu label push buttons may be mixed
on the same display to allow sub-displays to exist for each item. Each display
may be protected from viewing unless operator has appropriate security level. A
security level may be assigned to each display and system object. The menu
label shall not appear on the graphic if the operator does not have the appropriate
security level.

90 Percent
7. A mouse shall be used to move the pointer arrow to the desired item for selection
of new display or to allow the operator to make changes to object data.
G. Password Protection:
1. Provide security system that prevents unauthorized use unless operator is logged
on. Access shall be limited to operator’s assigned functions when user is logged
on. This includes displays as outlined above.
2. Each operator’s terminal shall provide security for 200 users minimum. Each user
shall have an individual User ID, User Name and Password. Entries are
alphanumeric characters only and are case sensitive (except for User ID). User
ID shall be 0-8 characters, User Name shall be 0-29 characters, and Password
shall be 4-8 characters long. Each system user shall be allowed individual
assignment of only those control functions and menu items to which that user
requires access. All passwords, user names, and access assignments shall be
adjustable online at the operator’s terminal. Each user shall also have a set
security level, which defines access to displays and individual objects the user
may control. System shall include 10 separate and distinct security levels for
assignment to users.
H. Operator Activity Log:

1. Operator Activity Log shall be included with system that tracks all operator
changes and activities. System shall track what is changed in the system, who
performed this change, date and time of system activity and value of the change
before and after operator activity. Operator shall be able to display all activity,
sort the changes by user and also by operation.
2. Log shall be gathered and archived to hard drive on operator workstation as
needed. Operator shall be able to export data for display and sorting in a
spreadsheet.
3. Any displayed data, that is changeable by the operator, may be selected using
the right mouse button and the operator activity log shall then be selectable on
the screen. Selection of the operator activity log using this method shall show all
operator changes of just that displayed data.
I. Scheduling:
1. Operator’s workstation shall show all information in easy-to-read daily format
including calendar of this month and next. All schedules shall show actual
ON/OFF times for day based on scheduling priority. Priority for scheduling shall
be events, holidays and daily with events being the highest.
2. Scheduling tool shall allow scheduling of events up to 2 calendar years in
advance.
3. Holiday and special event schedules shall display data in calendar format.
Operator shall be able to schedule holidays and special events directly from
these calendars.
4. Operator shall be able to change all information for a given weekly or exception
schedule if logged on with the appropriate security access.
5. System shall include a Schedule Wizard for set up of schedules. Wizard shall
walk user through all steps necessary for schedule generation. Wizard shall have
its own pull-down selection for startup or may be started by right clicking on value
displayed on graphic and then selecting Schedule.

90 Percent
J. Alarm Indication and Handling:

1. Operator’s workstation shall provide audible, visual, and printed means of alarm
indication. The alarm dialog box shall always become the top dialog box
regardless of the application(s), currently running. Printout of alarms shall be sent
to the assigned terminal and port.
2. System shall provide log of alarm messages. Alarm log shall be archived to the
hard disk of the system operator’s terminal. Each entry shall include a description
of the event-initiating object generating the alarm. Description shall be an alarm
message of at least 256 characters in length. Entry shall include time and date
of alarm occurrence, time and date of object state return to normal, time and date
of alarm acknowledgment and identification of operator acknowledging alarm.
3. Alarm messages shall be in user-definable text (English or other specified
language) and shall be entered either at the operator’s terminal or via remote
communication.
4. System shall include an Alarm Wizard for set up of alarms. Wizard shall walk user
through all steps necessary for alarm generation. Wizard shall have its own pull-
down selection for startup or may be started by right clicking on value displayed
on graphic and then selecting alarm setup.
K. Trendlog Information:
1. System server shall periodically gather historically recorded data stored in the
building controllers and field controllers and archive the information Archived files
shall be appended with new sample data, allowing samples to be accumulated.
Systems that write over archived data shall not be allowed, unless limited file size
is specified. Samples may be viewed at the operator’s workstation. Operator shall
be able to scroll through all trended data. All trendlog information shall be
displayed in standard engineering units.
2. Software shall be included that is capable of graphing the trend logged object
data. Software shall be capable of creating two-axis (x, y) graphs that display up
to ten object types at the same time in different colors. Graphs shall show object
values relative to time.
3. Operator shall be able to change trend log setup information. This includes the
information to be logged as well as the interval at which it is to be logged. All
input, output, and value object types in the system may be logged. All operations
shall be password protected. Setup and viewing may be accessed directly from
any and all graphics on which object is displayed.
4. System shall include a trend Wizard for setup of logs. Wizard shall walk user
through all necessary steps. Wizard shall have its own pull-down selection for
startup, or may be started by right clicking on value displayed on graphic, and
then selecting Trendlogs from the displayed menu.
L. Energy Log Information:

1. System server shall be capable of periodically gathering energy log data stored
in the field equipment and archive the information. Archive files shall be
appended with new data, allowing data to be accumulated. Systems that write
over archived data shall not be allowed unless limited file size is specified.
Display all energy log information in standard engineering units.
2. All data shall be stored in data base file format for direct use by third-party
programs. Operation of system shall stay completely online during all graphing
operations.

90 Percent
3. Operator shall be able to change the energy log setup information as well. This
includes the meters to be logged, meter pulse value, and the type of energy units
to be logged. All meters monitored by the system may be logged. System shall
support using flow and temperature sensors for BTU monitoring.
4. System shall display archived data in tabular format form for both consumption
and peak values. Data shall be shown in hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and yearly
formats. In each format the user shall be able to select a specific period of data
to view.
M. Configuration/Setup:
1. Provide means for operator to display and change system configuration. This
shall include, but not be limited to, system time, day of the week, date of daylight
savings set forward/set back, printer termination, port addresses, modem port
and speed, etc. Items shall be modified using understandable terminology with
simple mouse/cursor key movements.
N. Field Engineering Tools:

1. Operator’s workstation software shall include field-engineering tools for
programming all controllers supplied. All controllers shall be programmed using
graphical tools that allow the user to connect function blocks on screen that
provide sequencing of all control logic. Function blocks shall be represented by
graphical displays that are easily identified and distinct from other types of blocks.
Graphical programming that uses simple rectangles and squares is not
acceptable.
2. User shall be able to pick graphical function block from menu and place on
screen. Provide zoom in and zoom out capabilities. Function blocks shall be
downloaded to controller without any reentry of data.
3. Programming tools shall include a real time operation mode. Function blocks
shall display real time data and be animated to show status of data inputs and
outputs when in real time operation. Animation shall show change of status on
logic devices and countdown of timer devices in graphical format.
4. Field engineering tools shall also include a database manager of applications that
include logic files for controllers and associated graphics. Operator shall be able
to select unit type, input/output configuration and other items that define unit to
be controlled. Supply minimum of 250 applications as part of workstation
software.
5. Field engineering tool shall include Device Manager for automatic detection of
devices connected anywhere on the BACnet network by scanning of the entire
network. This function shall display device instance, network identification, model
number and description of connected devices. It shall record and display software
file loaded into each controller. A copy of each file shall be stored on the
computer’s hard drive. If needed, this file shall be downloaded to the appropriate
controller by selection using the mouse.
O. Software:
1. At the conclusion of project, contractor shall leave with owner a CD ROM or flash
drive that includes the complete software operation system and project graphics,
setpoints, system parameters, etc. This backup shall allow the owner to
completely restore the system in the case of a computer malfunction.

90 Percent
2.4 BUILDING CONTROLLER
A. General:
1. All communication with operator workstation and all application controllers shall
be via BACnet. Building controller shall incorporate as a minimum, the functions
of a 3-way BACnet router. Controller shall route BACnet messages between the
high-speed LAN (Ethernet 10/100MHz), at least 4 master slave token passing
(MS/TP) LANs, a point-to-point (PTP - RS-232) connection and an on-board
modem.
a. Each MS/TP LAN must be software configurable from 9.6 to 76.8Kbps.
b. The RJ-45 Ethernet connection must accept either 10Base-T or 100Base-
TX BACnet over twisted pair cable (UTP).
c. The direct access port must be a female DB-9 connector supporting BACnet
temporary PTP connection of a portable BACnet operator terminal at 9.6 to
115.2 Kbps over RS-232 null modem cable.
2. Building controller shall be capable of providing global control strategies for the
system based on information from any objects in the system regardless if the
object is directly monitored by the controller or by another controller. The program
that implements these strategies shall be completely flexible and user definable.
Any systems utilizing factory pre-programmed global strategies that cannot be
modified by field personnel on-site or downloaded via remote communications
are not acceptable. Changing global strategies via firmware changes is also
unacceptable.
3. Programming shall be object-oriented using control function blocks, supporting
DDC functions, 1000 Analog Values and 1000 Binary Values. All flowcharts shall
be generated and automatically downloaded to controller. Programming tool shall
be resident on workstation and the same tool used for all controllers.
4. Provide means to graphically view inputs and outputs to each program block in
real-time as program is executing. This function may be performed via the
operator’s workstation or field computer.
5. Building controller shall provide battery-backed real-time (hardware) clock
functions.
6. Controller shall have a memory needed to ensure high performance and data
reliability. Battery shall retain static RAM memory and real-time clock functions
for a minimum of 1.5 years (cumulative).
7. Global control algorithms and automated control functions should execute via 32-
bit processor.
8. Controller installation shall include memory-free gel-cell battery providing
ongoing power conditioning and noise filtering for operation data integrity. It shall
provide up to 5 minutes of powerless operation for orderly shutdown and data
backup.
9. BACnet Conformance:
a. Building Controller shall as a minimum support Point-to-Point (PTP), MS/TP
and Ethernet BACnet LAN types. It shall communicate directly via these
BACnet LANs as a Native BACnet device and shall support simultaneous
routing functions between all supported LAN types. Global controller shall be
a BACnet conformance class 3 device and support all BACnet services
necessary to provide the following BACnet functional groups:
b. Clock Functional Group
(1) Files Functional Group

90 Percent
(2) Reinitialize Functional Group

(3) Device Communications Functional Group
(4) Event Initiation Functional Group
10. Refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard for a
11. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum: Analog
Value, Binary Value, Calendar, Device, File, Group, Notification Class, Program
and Schedule object types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system,
12. The Building Controller shall comply with Annex J of the BACnet specification for
IP connections. This device shall use Ethernet to connect to the IP internetwork,
while using the same Ethernet LAN for non-IP communications to other BACnet
devices on the LAN. Must support interoperability on wide area networks (WANs)
and campus area networks (CANs) and function as a BACnet Broadcast
Management Device (BBMD).
B. Schedules:
1. Each building controller shall support a minimum of 250 BACnet Schedule
Objects and 250 BACnet Calendar Objects.
C. Logging Capabilities:
1. Each building controller shall log as minimum 1000 trendlogs. Any object in the
system (real or calculated) may be logged. Sample time interval shall be
adjustable at the operator’s workstation.
2. Logs may be viewed both on-site or off-site via remote communication.
3. Building controller shall periodically upload trended data to networked operator’s
workstation for long term archiving if desired.
4. Archived data stored in database format shall be available for use in third-party
spreadsheet or database programs.
5. Alarm Generation:
a. Alarms may be generated within the system for any object change of value
or state either real or calculated. This includes things such as analog object
value changes, binary object state changes, and various controller
communication failures.
b. Each alarm may be dialed out as noted in paragraph 2 above.
c. Alarm log shall be provided for alarm viewing. Log may be viewed on-site at
the operator’s terminal or off-site via remote communications.
d. Controller must be able to handle up to 1500 alarm setups stored as BACnet
event enrollment objects - system destination and actions individually
configurable.
2.5 WEB BROWSER CLIENTS
A. The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using a

standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer™ or Mozilla Firefox™. Systems
requiring additional software (to enable a standard Web browser) to be resident on

90 Percent
the client machine, or manufacture-specific browsers shall not be acceptable.
B. The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system
configuration that is supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific
machine requirements in terms of processor speed, memory, etc., to allow the Web
browser to function with the EMCS shall not be acceptable.
C. The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics,
schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is
provided by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that
require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall
not be permitted.
D. The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions:
1. User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user
attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security authentication
and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be implemented.
2. Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the
Web browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI shall
be supported by the Web browser interface.
3. HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on
a Web page. HTML editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires
a specific look or format.
4. Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Network Area Controller (NAC),
without requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. Systems that
require graphics storage on each client are not acceptable.
5. Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without
requiring a manual “refresh” of the Web page.
6. Users shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the
access privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following:
a. Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set
points in a graphical manner.
(1) Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without
requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.
(2) Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring
any keyboard entry from the operator.
b. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking
the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up
menu. No entry of text shall be required.
c. View logs and charts
d. View and acknowledge alarms
7. The system shall provide the capability to specify a user’s (as determined by the
log-on user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user
to just their defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or
pages in the system shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator.
8. Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other
locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource
Locator (URL) for the desired link.

90 Percent
2.6 TERMINAL UNIT APPLICATION CONTROLLERS (ROOFTOPS, HEAT PUMPS, AC

UNITS, FAN COILS)
A. General:
1. Provide one Native BACnet application controller for each piece of unitary
mechanical equipment that adequately covers all objects listed in object list for
unit. All controllers shall interface to building controller via MS/TP LAN using
BACnet protocol. No gateways shall be used. Controllers shall include input,
output and self-contained logic program as needed for complete control of unit.
B. BACnet Conformance:
1. Application controllers shall as a minimum support MS/TP BACnet LAN types.
They shall communicate directly via this BACnet LAN at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 and 76.8
Kbps, as a Native BACnet device. Application controllers shall be of BACnet
conformance class 3 and support all BACnet services necessary to provide the
following BACnet functional groups:
a. Files Functional Group
b. Reinitialize Functional Group
c. Device Communications Functional Group
2. Refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups in the BACnet standard for a
3. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum-Analog
Input, Analog Output, Analog Value, Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value,
Device, File and Program Object Types. All proprietary object types, if used in
the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal
data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary
information.
4. Application controllers shall include universal inputs with 10-bit resolution that
can accept 3K and 10K thermistors, 0-5 VDC, 4-20 mA, dry contact signals and
a minimum of 3 pulse inputs. Any input on controller may be either analog or
digital. Controller shall also include support and modifiable programming for
interface to intelligent room sensor. Controller shall include binary outputs on
board with analog outputs as needed.
5. All program sequences shall be stored on board controller in EEPROM. No
batteries shall be needed to retain logic program. All program sequences shall
be executed by controller 10 times per second and shall be capable of multiple
PID loops for control of multiple devices. Programming of application controller
shall be completely modifiable in the field over installed BACnet LANs or remotely
via modem interface. Operator shall program logic sequences by graphically
moving function blocks on screen and tying blocks together on screen.
Application controller shall be programmed using same programming tools as
building controller and as described in operator workstation section. All
programming tools shall be provided and installed as part of system.

90 Percent
6. Application controller shall include support for intelligent room sensor (see
Section 2.9.B.). Display on room sensor shall be programmable at controller and
include an operating mode and a field service mode. All button functions and
display data shall be programmable to show specific controller data in each mode
based on which button is pressed on the sensor. See sequence of operation for
specific display requirements at intelligent room sensor.
C. Smoke Detectors:
1. Smoke detectors (duct and area type) shall be provided, installed, and wired into
the Fire Alarm System by the Electrical Contractor. The Controls Contractor shall
be responsible for interlock wiring between duct smoke detectors and control
relays, and starter safety circuits.
2.7 ELECTRONIC ACTUATORS
A. General:
1. Shall be Electric unless otherwise specified. Shall be manufactured by Belimo.
Five-year manufacturer’s warranty. Two-year unconditional and three-year
product defect from date of installation.
2. Furnish a Freeze-stat and install “Hard Wire” interlock to disconnect the
mechanical spring return actuator power circuit for fail-safe operation. Use of the
control signal to drive the actuators closed is not acceptable.
3. VAV box damper actuation shall be Floating type or Analog (2-10vdc, 4-20ma)
and provide to VAV box manufactured for factory installation.
4. Booster-heat valve actuation shall be Floating type or Analog (2-10vdc, 4-20ma).
5. Primary valve control shall be Analog (2-10vdc, 4-20ma).
6. UL Listed Standard 873 and Canadian Standards Association Class 481302 shall
certify Actuators.
7. Mechanical spring shall be provided when specified. Capacitors or other non-
mechanical forms of fail-safe are not acceptable.
8. Position indicator device shall be installed and made visible to the exposed side
of the Actuator. For damper short shaft mounting, a separate indicator shall be
provided to the exposed side of the Actuator.
9. Overload Protection: Actuators shall provide protection against actuator burnout
by using an internal current limiting circuit or digital motor rotation sensing circuit.
Circuit shall insure that actuators cannot burn out due to stalled damper or
mechanical and electrical paralleling. End switches to deactivate the actuator at
the end of rotation are acceptable only for Butterfly Valve actuators.
10. A push button gearbox release shall be provided for all non-spring actuators.
11. Modulating actuators shall be 24VAC and consume 10VA power or less.
12. Conduit connectors are required when specified and when code requires it.
B. Damper Actuators:
1. Electronic damper actuators shall be direct-coupled rotary type, suitable for
mounting directly on the damper end shaft. Electronic damper actuators shall be
properly sized to provide sufficient torque to position the damper throughout its
operating range. Damper actuators used on economizer and/or outside air
dampers shall be spring return.
2. Terminal unit damper actuators shall be electric, low voltage, utilizing floating
control.

90 Percent
3. Outside Air and Exhaust Air Damper Actuators shall be Mechanical Spring
Return. Capacitors or other non-mechanical forms of fail-safe are not acceptable.
The actuator mounting arrangement and spring return feature shall permit
normally open or normally closed positions of the damper as required.
4. Economizer Actuators shall be provided and installed by EMCS contractor.
Actuators shall utilize Analog control 2-10 VDC and shall give position feedback
for FDD monitoring. Floating control is not acceptable. Actuators shall be
Mechanical Spring Return. Equal to Belimo LF-24-SR.
5. Electric damper actuators (including VAV box actuators) shall be direct shaft
mounted and use a V-bolt and toothed V-clamp causing a cold weld effect for
positive gripping. Single bolt or setscrew type fasteners are not acceptable.
6. One electronic actuator shall be direct shaft mounted per damper section. No
connecting rods or jackshafts shall be needed. Small outside air and return air
economizer dampers may be mechanically linked together if one actuator has
sufficient torque to drive both and damper drive shafts are both horizontal
installed.
7. Multi-section dampers with electric actuators shall be arranged so that each
damper section operates individually. One electronic actuator shall be direct shaft
mounted per damper section. (See below execution section for more installation
details.)
C. Valve Actuators ½" to 6":

1. Electronic valve actuators shall be suitable for direct-coupled mounting to the
valve bonnet. Valve actuators shall be properly sized to provide sufficient torque
to position the valve throughout its operating range. Where butterfly valves are
specified, double acting non-spring return actuators may be used. Unless
otherwise stated, provide normally open valves for heating water applications and
normally closed valves for chilled water applications.
2. Terminal unit reheat valve actuators shall be suitable for direct-coupled mounting
to the valve bonnet. Valve actuators shall be properly sized to provide sufficient
torque to position the valve throughout its operating range. Non-spring return tri-
state floating valve actuators may be used on terminal units where the valve is
less than 1 inch.
3. Mechanical spring shall be provided on all actuators for pre-heat coil and
actuators for AHU heating or cooling coil when units are mounted outside. See
plans for fail save flow function: Normal Open or Normal Closed. Capacitors or
other non-mechanical forms of fail-safe are not acceptable.
4. All zone service actuators shall be non-spring return unless otherwise specified.
5. The valve actuator shall be capable of providing the minimum torque required for
proper valve close off for the required application.
6. All control valves actuators shall have an attached 3-foot cable for easy
installation to a junction box.
7. Override handle and gearbox release shall be provided for all non-spring return
valve actuators.
D. Butterfly Valve Industrial Actuators:

1. Actuators shall be approved under Canadian Standards Association or other
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory to UL standards. CSA Class 4813 02
or equal. Enclosure shall be NEMA 4 (weatherproof) enclosure and will have an
industrial quality coating.

90 Percent
2. Actuator shall have a motor rated for continuous duty. The motor shall be
fractional horsepower; permanent split capacitor type designed to operate on a
120 VAC, 1-phase, 60 Hz supply. Two adjustable cam actuated end travel limit
switches shall be provided to control direction of travel. A self-resetting thermal
switch shall be imbedded in the motor for overload protection.
3. Reduction gearing shall be designed to withstand the actual motor stall torque.
Gears shall be hardened alloy steel, permanently lubricated. A self-locking gear
assembly or a brake shall be supplied.
4. Actuator shall have a 6 ft wiring harness provided for ease in field wiring (above
1500 in-lbs). Two adjustable SPDT cam-actuated auxiliary switches, rated at 250
VAC shall be provided for indication of open and closed position. Actuator shall
have heater and thermostat to minimize condensation within the actuator
housing.
5. Actuator shall be equipped with a hand wheel for manual override to permit
operation of the valve in the event of electrical power failure or system
malfunction. Hand wheel must be permanently attached to the actuator and when
in manual operation electrical power to the actuator will be permanently
interrupted. The hand wheel will not rotate while the actuator is electrically driven.
6. The actuator shall be Analog, floating, or two position as called out in the control
sequence of operation. All Analog valves shall be positive positioning, and
respond to a 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, or adjustable signal as required. Analog
actuators shall have a digital control card allowing any voltage input for control
and any DC voltage feedback signal for position indication.
7. Performance Verification Test
a. Control loops shall cause productive actuation with each movement of the
actuator and actuators shall modulate at a rate which is stable and
responsive. Actuator movement shall not occur before the effects of previous
movement have affected the sensor.
b. Actuator shall have capability of signaling a trouble alarm when the actuator
Stop-Go Ratio exceeds 30%.
2.8 DAMPERS AND VALVES
A. Control Dampers:
1. Control air dampers shall be parallel blade for two-position control and opposed
blade for modulating control applications. Dampers shall be galvanized with nylon
bearings. Blade edge and tip seals shall be included for all dampers. Leakage
through the damper shall not exceed 4 CFM per square foot at 1" w.c. Blades
shall be 16-gauge minimum and 10" wide maximum and frame shall be of welded
channel iron. Dampers over 48" wide shall be equipped with a jackshaft to
provide sufficient force throughout the intended operating range.
2. All dampers used for modulating service shall be opposed blade type arrange for
normally open or normally closed operation as required. The damper is to be
sized so that when wide open the pressure drop is a sufficient amount of its close-
off pressure drop for effective throttling.
3. All dampers used for two-position or open-close control shall be parallel blade
type arranged for normally open or closed operation as required.
4. Damper linkage hardware shall be constructed of aluminum or corrosion resistant
zinc & nickel-plated steel and furnished as follows:
a. Bearing support bracket and drive blade pin extension shall be provided for

90 Percent
each damper section. Sheet metal contractor shall install bearing support
bracket and drive blade pin extension. Sheet metal contractor shall provide
permanent indication of blade position by scratching or marking the visible
end of the drive blade pin extension.
b. Drive pin may be round only if V-bolt and toothed V-clamp is used to cause
a cold weld effect for positive gripping. For single bolt or set-screw type
actuator fasteners, round damper pin shafts must be milled with at least one
side flat to avoid slippage.
B. Multiple Section Dampers:

1. Size damper sections based on actuator manufacturers specific
recommendations for face velocity, differential pressure and damper type. In
general:
a. Damper section shall not exceed 24 ft-sq. with face velocity £ 1500 FPM.
b. Damper section shall not exceed 18 ft-sq. with face velocity £ 2500 FPM.
c. Damper section shall not exceed 13 ft-sq. with face velocity £ 3000 FPM.
2. Damper manufacturer shall supply alignment plates for all multi-section dampers.
3. Multiple section dampers of two or more shall be arranged to allow actuators to
be direct shaft mounted on the outside of the duct.
4. Multiple section dampers of three or more sections wide shall be arranged with a
3-sided vertical channel (8’’ wide by 6” deep) within the duct or fan housing and
between adjacent damper sections. Vertical channel shall be anchored at the top
and bottom to the fan housing or building structure for support. The sides of each
damper frame shall be connected to the channels. Holes in the channel shall
allow damper drive blade shafts to pass through channel for direct shaft mounting
of actuators. Open side of channel shall be faced down stream of the airflow,
except for exhaust air dampers.
5. Multiple section dampers to be mounted flush within a wall or housing opening
shall receive either vertical channel supports as descried above or sheet metal
standout collars. Sheet metal collars (12” minimum) shall bring each damper
section out of the wall to allow direct shaft mounting of the actuator on the side
of the collar.
C. Actuator mounting for damper arrangements shall comply to the following:

1. Damper Actuators: Shall not be installed in the air stream
2. A weather shield shall be used if actuators are located outside. For Damper
Actuators use clear plastic enclosure.
3. Damper or valve actuator ambient temperature shall not exceed 122°F through
any combination of medium temperature or surrounding air. Appropriate air gaps,
thermal isolation washers or spacers, standoff legs, or insulation shall be
provided as necessary.
4. Actuator cords or conduit shall incorporate a drip leg if condensation is possible.
Water shall not be allowed to contact actuator or internal parts. Location of
conduits in temperatures dropping below dew point shall be avoided to prevent
water from condensing in conduit and running into actuator.
5. Damper mounting arrangements shall comply to the following:
a. The ventilation subcontractor shall furnish and install damper channel
supports and sheet metal collars.
b. No jack shafting of damper sections shall be allowed.
c. Multi-section dampers shall be arranged so that each damper section

90 Percent
operates individually. One electronic actuator shall be direct shaft mounted

per section.
2.9 ENCLOSURES
A. NEMA 2 rated enclosures for inside mounting, provide with weather shield for outside
mounting.
B. All controllers, power supplies and relays shall be mounted in enclosures.
C. Enclosures may be NEMA 1 when located in a clean, dry, indoor environment. Indoor
enclosures shall be NEMA 12 when installed in other than a clean environment.
D. Enclosures shall have hinged, locking doors.
E. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for all enclosures in any mechanical room or
electrical room. Include location and unit served on nameplate. Laminated plastic
shall be 1/8” thick sized appropriately to make label easy to read.
F. All direct digital controllers located indoors shall be installed in NEMA 1 enclosures.
All direct digital controllers located outdoors shall be installed in NEMA 3R enclosures.
Enclosures shall be of suitable size to accommodate all power supplies, relays and
accessories required for the application. Each enclosure shall include a perforated
subpanel for direct mounting of the enclosed devices. Include matched key locks for
all enclosures provided.
2.10 SENSORS, SWITCHES, CONTROLLERS, TRANSDUCERS, AND MISCELLANEOUS

DEVICES
A. Temperature Sensors:
1. All temperature sensors to be solid state electronic, factory-calibrated to within
0.5°F, totally interchangeable with housing appropriate for application. Wall
sensors to be installed as indicated on drawings. Mount 48 inches above finished
floor. Duct sensors to be installed such that the sensing element is in the main
air stream. Immersion sensors to be installed in wells provided by control
contractor, but installed by mechanical contractor. Immersion wells shall be filled
with thermal compound before installation of immersion sensors. Outside air
sensors shall be installed away from exhaust or relief vents, not in an outside air
intake and in a location that is in the shade most of the day.
B. Intelligent Room Sensor with LCD Readout:

1. Sensor shall contain a backlit LCD digital display and user function keys along
with temperature sensor. Controller shall function as room control unit, and shall
allow occupant to raise and lower setpoint, and activate terminal unit for override
use—all within limits as programmed by building operator. Sensor shall also allow
service technician access to hidden functions as described in sequence of
operation.

90 Percent
2. The Intelligent Room Sensor shall simultaneously display room setpoint, room
temperature, outside temperature, and fan status (if applicable) at each
controller. This unit shall be programmable, allowing site developers the flexibility
to configure the display to match their application. The site developer should be
able to program the unit to display time-of-day, room humidity and outdoor
humidity. Unit must have the capability to show temperatures in Fahrenheit or
Centigrade.
3. Override time may be set and viewed in half-hour increments. Override time
count down shall be automatic but may be reset to zero by occupant from the
sensor. Time remaining shall be displayed. Display shall show the word “OFF” in
unoccupied mode unless a function button is pressed.
4. See sequence of operation for specific operation of LCD displays and function
keys in field service mode and in normal occupant mode. Provide intelligent room
sensors as specified in point list.
5. Field service mode shall be customizable to fit different applications.
C. LCD Operator Terminal:

1. The LCD operator terminal is a small wall- or panel-mounted operator terminal
that connects directly to the BACnet LAN. The communication design and
messaging structure shall comply with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-1995,
BACnet. Each operator terminal shall be able to display any BACnet object from
anywhere in the BACnet network.
2. Each of these operator’s terminals shall have a keypad and an adjustable backlit
LCD, with a simple menu structure to give occupants and technicians intuitive
access to system information. It shall have a minimum 4-line by 20-character
display to allow an operator to query and adjust system values.
3. The system shall allow the connection of up to 16 LCD operator terminals to each
Building Controller. The operator shall have the ability to connect to each of these
operator terminals with a laptop computer via an RS-232 cable to gain system
access, troubleshooting, and display programming.
D. Field Service Tool:

1. Field service tool shall allow technician to view and modify all setpoints and tuning
parameters stored in application controller. In addition, technician shall be able
to view status of all inputs and outputs on digital readout. Each piece of data shall
have a data code associated with it that is customizable.
2. Field service tool shall plug into wall sensor and provide all the functionality
specified. Operator workstation shall include the capability to disable operation
of the field service tool.
3. Provide Field Service Tool(s) for this project.
E. Network Connection Tool:

1. Network connection tool shall allow technician to connect a laptop to any MS/TP
network or at any MS/TP device and view and modify all information throughout
the entire BACnet network. Laptop connection to tool shall be via Ethernet or
PTP.
2. Provide quick connect to MS/TP LAN at each controller. Tool shall be able to
adjust to all MS/TP baud rates specified in the BACnet standard.
3. Proved 1 Network Connection Tool for this project.

90 Percent
F. Differential Pressure Switches (Air):

1. Provide differential pressure switches across fans and filters for status indication.
Differential pressure switches shall have an adjustable setpoint from 0.05” w.c.
to 2” w.c. with a switch differential that progressively increases from 0.02” w.c. at
minimum to 0.8” w.c. at maximum. Switch shall be SPDT rated for 15A (non-
inductive) at 277VAC.
G. Differential Pressure Switches (Liquid):

1. Provide differential pressure switches across pumps and chillers to prove flow.
Differential pressure switches shall have a 0-150 psig working differential
pressure and have an adjustable setpoint from 4” w.c. to 43.5” w.c. on a fall and
5.5” w.c. to 45” w.c. on a rise. Liquid differential pressure switch enclosure shall
carry a NEMA 4 rating. Switch shall be SPDT rated for 5A (inductive) at 125VAC.
H. Float Switches:
1. Provide float switches in condensate drain pans as required by code. Float
switches shall utilize a magnetically actuated dry reed switch. Float shall be
constructed of seamless polypropylene. Switch shall be SPDT rated for 16A
(non-inductive) at 120VAC.
I. Mixed Air Low Limit Controllers (Freezestats):

1. Mixed air low limit controllers shall be manual reset, adjustable setpoint with 20-
foot element serpentined across the entering air face of center cooling coil.
Control shall be responsive only to the lowest temperature along the element.
J. Static High Limit Controllers:

1. Discharge static high limit controllers shall be provided on all VAV AHU systems.
When discharge static pressure exceeds setpoint, the supply fan shall be de-
energized. Manual reset shall be required.
K. Static Pressure Transducers (Air):

1. Provide static pressure transducers for monitoring supply duct static pressure.
Static pressure transducers shall be 100% solid state and shall include glass on
silicon, ultra stable capacitance sensors. Each static pressure transducer shall
incorporate short circuit and reverse polarity protection. Transmitter output shall
be either 0-10VDC or 4-20mA. Static pressure transducers are to be provided in
an enclosure that is suitable for duct mounting. The desired setpoint is to be in
the top 50% of the transmitter’s operating range.
L. Differential Pressure Transducers (Air):

1. Provide differential pressure transducers for monitoring air system and airflow
measuring station differential pressures. Differential pressure transducers shall
be 100% solid state and shall include glass on silicon, ultra stable capacitance
sensors. Each differential pressure transducer shall incorporate short circuit and
reverse polarity protection. Transducer output shall be either 0-10VDC or
4-20mA. Differential pressure transducers are to be provided in an enclosure that
is suitable for duct mounting. The desired setpoint is to be in the top 50% of the
transducer’s operating range.

90 Percent
M. Current Sensing Relays:

1. Provide current switches for indication of equipment status. Amperage ratings
shall be adjustable with the desired setpoint to be in the top 50% of the current
relay’s operating range. Current sensing relays shall incorporate trip indication
LED’s and shall be sized for proper operation with the equipment served.
N. Relative Humidity Sensors:

1. Relative humidity sensors shall have an accuracy of +/- 2% from 5 to 95% RH.
Output signal shall be either be 0-10VDC or 4-20mA. Humidity transmitters shall
be factory calibrated and require no field setting.
O. CO2 Sensors:
1. CO2 sensors shall be space or duct mounted carbon dioxide sensors as required
by the application. Space CO2 sensors shall be mounted next to space
temperature sensors. The sensor shall have a range of 0-2000 ppm with an
accuracy of ±5%. The response time for the sensor shall be less than one minute.
The sensor shall be capable of providing an analog signal proportional to the
CO2 level sensed. The signal shall be either 0-10VDC or 4-20mA.
P. Duct/Well Sensors:
1. Sensors for duct and water temperature sensing shall incorporate either RTD or
Thermistor sensing devices. Sensing element accuracy shall be 0.1% over the
sensor span or better. Where the element is being used for sensing mixed air or
coil discharge temperatures and/or the duct cross sectional area is in excess of
14 square feet, the element shall be of the averaging type. Averaging duct
sensors shall utilize a 6, 12 or 24 foot sensing element. Immersion sensors shall
use matched 316 stainless steel bulb wells. All duct and immersion sensors shall
be provided with conduit connection housings. Sensors shall be provided with
adequate standoffs for insulation installation.
Q. Selector Switches:
1. Selector switches shall be 2 or 3-position, knob or key type as required by the
sequence of operation. Selector switches shall feature oil tight construction and
be fitted with snap-fit contact blocks rated for 10A, 600VAC/DC operation. Labels
shall be provided indicating switch position.
R. Pushbutton Switches:
1. Pushbutton switches shall be either maintained or momentary as required by the
sequence of operation. Pushbutton switches shall feature oil tight construction
and be fitted with snap-fit contact blocks rated for 10A, 600VAC/DC operation.
Labels shall be provided indicating switch function.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that
such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly
commence.

90 Percent
B. Notify the owners' representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work.
C. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved.
3.2 OPERATION
A. BACnet Object List:

1. The following points as defined for each piece of equipment are designated as
follows:
a. Binary Out (BO) - Defined as any two-state output (start/stop)
(enable/disable), etc.
b. Binary In (BI) - Defined as any two-state input (alarm, status), etc.
c. Analog In (AI) - Defined as any variable input (temperature) (position), etc.
d. Analog Out (AO) - Defined as any electrical variable output. 0-20mA, 4-20mA
and 0-10VDC are the only acceptable analog outputs. The driver for analog
outputs must come from both hardware and software resident in the
controllers. Transducers will not be acceptable under any circumstance.
2. Each and every point will be checked out by the Contractor and the Owner's
Representative will inspect each point with the bidder prior to acceptance.
Provide complete written documented inspections, test and checkout report.
Calibrate all equipment.
B. DDC Object Type Summary:

1. Provide all database generation.
2. Displays:
a. System displays shall show all analog and binary object types within the
system. They shall be logically laid out for easy use by the owner. Provide
outside air temperature indication on all system displays associated with
economizer cycles.
3. Run Time Totalization:
a. At a minimum, run time totalization shall be incorporated for each monitored
supply fan, return fan, exhaust fan, hot water and chilled water pumps.
Warning limits for each point shall be entered for alarm and or maintenance
purposes.
4. Trendlog:
a. All binary and analog object types (including zones) shall have the capability
to be automatically trended.
5. Alarm:
a. All analog inputs (High/Low Limits) and selected binary input alarm points
shall be prioritized and routed (locally or remotely) with alarm message per
owner's requirements.
6. Database Save:
a. Provide back-up database for all stand-alone application controllers on disk.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

90 Percent
2. Provide all miscellaneous devices, hardware, software, interconnections

installation and programming required to ensure a complete operating system in
accordance with the sequences of operation and point schedules.
3. Provide a complete and operational temperature control and building automation
system based on the following points and sequence of operation. The system
shall be complete as to sequences and standard control practices. The
determined point list is the minimum amount of points that are to be provided. If
additional points are required to meet the sequence of operation, they will be
provided.
B. Location and Installation of Components:

1. Locate and install components for easy accessibility; in general, mount 48 inches
above floor with minimum 3'-0" clear access space in front of units. Obtain
approval on locations from owner’s representative prior to installation.
2. Enclosures and hardware or wiring shall not block or limit accessibility to service
compartments of any other equipment.
3. The work shall be coordinated fully, as it pertains to the fire protection system,
fire alarm system, and electrical power system. All items shall be terminated in
the DDC controllers in a predetermined order as indicated in the submittal
drawings.
4. All instruments, switches, transmitters, etc., shall be suitably wired and mounted
to protect them from vibration, moisture and high or low temperatures.
5. Identify all equipment and panels. Provide permanently mounted tags for all
panels.
6. Provide stainless steel or brass thermowells suitable for respective application
and for installation under other sections - sized to suit pipe diameter without
restricting flow.
C. Interlocking and Control Wiring:

1. Provide all interlock and control wiring. All wiring shall be installed neatly and
professionally, in accordance with Specification Division 26 and all national, state
and local electrical codes.
2. Provide wiring as required by functions as specified and as recommended by
equipment manufacturers, to serve specified control functions. Provide shielded
low capacitance wire for all communications trunks.
3. Control wiring shall not be installed in power circuit raceways. Magnetic starters
and disconnect switches shall not be used as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary
junction boxes as required. Coordinate location and arrangement of all control
equipment with the owner's representative prior to rough-in.
4. Provide auxiliary pilot duty relays on motor starters as required for control
function.
5. Provide power for all control components from nearest electrical control panel or
as indicated on the electrical drawings. Coordinate with electrical contractor.
6. All control wiring in the mechanical, electrical, telephone and boiler rooms to be
installed in conduit. All other wiring to be installed neatly and inconspicuously per
local code requirements. If local code allows, control wiring above accessible
ceiling spaces may be run with plenum rated cable (without conduit).

90 Percent
D. Installation Requirements:
1. Any panels associated with the control system shall be furnished and installed
under this section of the work. Panel wiring shall be terminated by connecting to
numbered terminals strips. Wire nut connections shall not be allowed. All wiring
shall be color coded and shall be tagged for future identification.
2. Unless otherwise specified, all devices, panels, etc., furnished and/or installed by
the Contractor shall be located where they can be calibrated and maintained from
the floor without use of a ladder. These items shall be identified by means of
plates made of plastic suitably engraved, embossed or punched, plastic tape will
not be acceptable. At completion of job, the Contractor shall submit record
drawings of any changes made during construction. This submittal shall be a
condition of final payment.
3. Any conduit on roof shall be absolute minimum and shall have prior written
approval.
4. All conduit used indoor and outdoor shall be metal and shall be of type and fittings
to minimize corrosion and moisture entry.
E. Cable Installation and Attachments:

1. Control System wiring and equipment installation shall be in accordance with
good engineering practices as established by the TIA/EIA and the NEC. Wiring
shall meet all state and local electrical codes. All wiring shall test free from all
grounds and shorts. All cable shall be supported from the building structure and
bundled.
2. The support system shall provide a protective pathway to eliminate stress that
could damage the cabling. The cable shall not be crushed, deformed, skinned,
crimped, twisted, or formed into tight radius bends that could compromise the
integrity of the cabling. Controls cables shall not be run loose on ceiling grid or
ceiling tiles. Support shall be provided by mounting appropriate fasteners which
may be loaded with multiple cables. Provided that the weight load is carried by
the support rod or wire, the support assembly may attach to the ceiling grid for
lateral stabilization. The required support wires for the ceiling grid or light fixtures
shall not be utilized. Any fastener attached to the ceiling grid shall not interfere
with inserting or removing ceiling tiles. All cabling and supports must be
positioned at least 12 inches above the ceiling grid.
3. Controls cables shall be run in bundles above accessible ceilings and supported
from building structure. Cabling shall be loosely bundled with wire wraps
randomly spaced at 30 to 48 inches on center, wire wraps shall not be tight
enough to deform cabling and shall not be used to support the cabling.
4. Attachments for cabling support shall be spaced at 48 to 60 inches on center.
The cable bundle shall not be allowed to sag more than 12 inches mid-span
between attachments. Attachments shall be sized as follows:
Bundles up to 1/2" dia. (Ten 1/4" cables) 2" bridle ring, Caddy
#4BRT32 or equivalent
Bundles up to 3/4" dia. (Sixteen 1/4" cables) 3/4" J-Hook, Caddy #CAT12
or equivalent
Bundles up to 1-5/16" dia. (Fifty 1/4" cables) 1-5/16" J-Hook, Caddy
#CAT21 or equivalent
Bundles up to 2" dia. (Eighty 1/4" cables) 2" J-Hook, Caddy #CAT21 or
equivalent
Split bundles greater than 2" dia. or provide cable tray.

90 Percent
5. Do not mix different signal strength cables on the same J-Hook (i.e. fire alarm,
25 volt speaker cable). Multiple J-Hooks can be on the same attachment point
up to the rated weight of the attachment device.
6. Controls cables shall be run in conduit stubs, where stubs are provided, from wall
mounted devices to above accessible ceilings. Conduit shall be required only
within walls and concealed spaces to provide access. Provide a plastic snap
bushing or sleeve on the end of each conduit stub such as Thomas & Betts
Catalog no. 443 - 3/4", 424 - 1", 425 - 1 1/4", 427 - 2" or equivalent.
7. Conduit, duct or track shall be used for controls cable in exposed areas.
8. All conduit, ducts, track and raceways shall be supported from the structure at
industry standard intervals for the size specified, utilizing proper anchoring
devices and techniques for each type of cable used.
9. All penetrations through fire rated walls or floors shall feature a short length of
metal conduit. The hole shall be neatly cut, not oversize or irregular. Seal the
interior of the conduit sleeve around the cables and around the outside of the
sleeve on each side of the penetration with fire-stop caulk or putty, such as
Minnesota Mining & Mfg. Co. (3M) - CP 25WB+ caulk, MPS-2+ putty, or
equivalent. Install according to the manufacturers' instructions.
10. All cable shall have a label on both ends utilizing self-laminating, flexible vinyl film
and non-smear nylon marking pens. Utilize Tyton Corporation Part No. RO175
Rite-On labels and Part No. FTP1 nylon marking pens or equivalent.
11. Each cable run shall include a three foot service loop with wire tie located in the
ceiling above the control unit panel. This is to allow for future re-termination or
repair.
12. No terminations or splices shall be installed in or above ceilings. Cable shall be
continuous from one device termination to the next.
13. Mount all equipment firmly in place. Route cable in a professional, neat and
orderly installation.
14. All cabling shall be placed with regard to the environment, EMI/RFI (interference)
and its effect on communication signal transmission.
15. Do not route any controls cable within two feet of any light fixture, HVAC unit
service access area, electric panel, or any device containing a motor or
transformer.
16. Low voltage controls cable will not be installed in the same conduit, duct or track
with line voltage electrical cable.
17. Maximum pulling tension should not exceed 25 lb/ft. or manufactures
recommendation, whichever is less.
18. Any pulling compounds utilized must be approved by the cable manufacturer and
shall not degrade the strength or electrical characteristics of the cable.
19. Cable bends shall not exceed the manufacturers' suggested bend radius.
20. Provide for adequate ventilation in all equipment panels.
21. Provide wiremold where wiring must run exposed. Obtain advance approval from
Architect and Owner before running exposed. Coordinate with Owner and
Architect.
22. For all wiring, provide numbering on all terminations (both ends).
23. Label all panels, cans, enclosures, controllers and correlate with air conditioning
units served. Labeling shall relate to shop drawings and equipment served.
Provide wiring diagram inside each enclosure.
24. Provide a rain-tight enclosure for each rooftop unit controller.
25. Locate outdoor air sensors shielded and on northern exposure.

90 Percent
F. Termination practices:
1. Strip back only as much cable jacket as required to terminate.
2. Preserve wire twists as closely as possible to point of termination (0.5" maximum)
to keep signal impairment to a minimum.
3. Avoid twisting cable during installation.
4. Electrical Interlocks:
a. All electrical interlocks shall be provided as specified. All electrical interlocks
shall be made by means of motor starters or shall be accomplished by
separate relays. No motor power lead shall be utilized in an interlock circuit.
3.4 SERVICES
A. Field Services:
1. Prepare and start logic control system under provisions of this section.
2. Start-up and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and
commissioning prior to placing control systems in permanent operation.
3. Provide the capability for off-site monitoring at control contractor's local or main
office. At a minimum, off-site facility shall be capable of system diagnostics and
software download. Owner shall provide phone line for this service for 1 year or
as specified.
4. Provide Owner's Representative with spare parts list. Identify equipment critical
to maintaining the integrity of the operating system.
B. HVAC Training:
1. Provide application engineer to instruct owner in operation of systems and
equipment.
2. Provide system operator’s training to include (but not limited to) such items as
the following: modification of data displays, alarm and status descriptors,
requesting data, execution of commands and request of logs. Provide this
training to a minimum of 3 persons.
3. Provide on-site training above as required, up to 40 hours as part of this contract.
4. Provide tuition for at least one individual for a one-week factory training class. If
applicable, costs for travel, lodging and meals will be the responsibility of the
Owner.
5. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 40 hours of on-site training to discuss
the specifics of the installed system. This training shall occur within thirty days of
completion of the work. Price lists for additional factory training shall be made
available to the owner upon request. After six (6) months of first installation
completion, Contractor shall spend one (1) day on-site for training update.
C. Demonstration:
1. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 23 00 00.
2. Demonstrate complete operating system to owner's representative.
3. Provide certificate stating that control system has been tested and adjusted for
proper operation.

90 Percent
D. Programming:
1. Prior to completion of the control installation, schedule time with Owner's
designated representatives to evaluate and select programming options and
requirements. Contractor shall provide engineer for such meetings and
consultations on an as-needed basis. Preparation time for the conference shall
be in addition to the "in conference" time, and shall be provided on an as-needed
basis without additional cost to the Owner.
2. The Contractor shall also provide additional coordination as needed with the
Owner's representative and Engineer to formulate and determine functions,
reports, graphics, and alarms most desirable and suitable for the school district
and writing the software capability. Programming of these items shall be
provided. The Contractor shall program the system using coordinated Owner
provided schedules for time of day and holidays.
3. No hardware change shall be required for program changes.
E. Documentation:
1. The Contractor shall provide a complete documentation package to the owner
which shall include floor plans indicating location of EMCS equipment, wiring
diagrams, bill of materials, data base information, and sequences of operation.
The sequences of operation shall be submitted and approved by the owner in
writing prior to installation and programming.
F. Coordination:
1. For construction project installations where electrical and mechanical contractors
are responsible for their respective trade, the electrical contractor is to provide
line voltage to required equipment and the mechanical contractor is to install any
devices that are to be included in systems. It is the controls contractor’s
responsibility to provide all devices with diagrams for location and coordinate with
mechanical contractor prior to mechanical contractor starting installations.
Controls contractor shall coordinate and provide all required work and wiring for
duct mounted smoke detectors, control relays for unit shutdown, and interface
with any fire alarm system. For installations where controls only work is provided,
all necessary work shall be performed by the controls contractor.
PART 4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
4.1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. The following are sequences of operations which will be accomplished by the EMCS.
Coordinate with Owner in operating equipment to maximize comfort and economy. All
points required to accomplish the sequences will be provided and connected to the
EMCS.
B. DDC Control - Rooftop Units, Split Systems and DX Units, and Heat Pumps: Each
unit shall be started and stopped by the EMCS. Automatic override during low or high
ambient temperatures shall be provided. Provide one outdoor air sensor per school.
Provide an indoor air space sensor for every unit to monitor space temperature and
be capable of remote resetting space temperature by Owner.

90 Percent
C. Provide one outside air relative humidity sensor and temperature sensor per campus.
It is also acceptable to obtain outside air ambient conditions from a nearby weather
station.
D. ACRONYMS:
EMCS Energy Management Control System. The EMCS controls all of the HVAC
functions as well as lighting schedules and lawn sprinkler schedules.
TCS Temperature Control Sensor. This is the device that controls the
temperature in the space.
VFD Variable Frequency Drive.
DDC Direct Digital Control.
OAU Outside Air Unit.
CO2 Carbon Dioxide.
CFM Cubic Feet per Minute
GPM Gallons Per Minute
A/H Air Handler
F/C Fan Coil Unit
CHW Chilled Water
HW Hot Water
VAV Variable Air Volume
UCP Unit Control Panel
ppm Parts Per Million - A measurement of the concentration of one substance
within another. In this case, it is the number of CO2 particles in a sample
of one million air particles.
Adj Adjustable - All set points are assumed to be adjustable whether specified
or not. The set points specified are values that should be programmed
initially but can be changed if necessary.
E. DEFINITIONS:
1. Occupancy Period:
a. The period of the day that the owner wants the environmental conditions
acceptable for occupancy. Outside air ventilation may not be enabled at all
times during the occupancy period. This schedule will be defined for each
component of the HVAC system and will not be the same for all components.
2. Outside Air Schedule:
a. The period of the day that outside air ventilation is enabled. This schedule
will be defined for each component of the HVAC system.
3. Warm-up Mode:
a. The time between the end of the unoccupied and start of the occupied period
during which the space temperature is increased (night setback) to the
normal occupancy temperature.
4. Cool-down Mode:
a. The time between the end of the unoccupied and start of the occupied period
during which the space temperature is lowered (night setup) to the normal
occupied temperature.
5. Unoccupied Period:
a. The period of the day that the temperature control setting is lowered
(heating) or raised (cooling) to conserve on the amount of energy required
to condition the building. The fans are also turned “OFF” to conserve energy.

90 Percent
F. DOCUMENTATION
1. The Contractor shall provide a complete documentation package to the owner
which shall include floor plans indicating location of EMCS equipment, wiring
diagrams, bill of materials, data base information, and sequences of operation.
The sequences of operation shall be submitted and approved by the owner in
writing prior to installation and programming.
G. MONITORING
1. Domestic Water Supply Monitoring
a. The EMCS shall monitor low flow from the primary domestic water supply to
each building during unoccupied schedules for leaks. When the amount of
flow is greater than programmed (adj.) for more than 5 minutes (adj.), the
EMCS shall send an alarm. The alarm shall be sent both as a text and email
message stating the time & date. Provide all flow meters using floating ball
technology (Omni Compound C2 water flow meter or equivalent) and
controls points for a complete system. Meter shall be provided by controls
contractor and installed by plumbing contractor.
2. Electric Meter Monitoring :
a. The EMCS shall monitor the electrical energy consumption at the buildings
main electric feed. Pulse generator shall be furnished by the utility company
and paid for by the owner. The temperature control contractor shall be
responsible for coordinating requirements with utility company. The EMCS
shall monitor pulse counts and broadcast signal to HMI operator workstation.
The Division 26 contractor shall provide a dedicated 1” buried conduit from
building to main electrical service for use by the temperature controls
contractor. Pulse meters may be located on the MSB, coordinate with
electrical contractor.
3. Cooler/Freezer Monitoring:
a. The walk-in cooler and the walk-in freezer shall each be monitored for space
temperature. The EMCS shall generate an alarm should the space
temperature exceed or drop below its assigned alarm limits (adj.).
4. Kitchen Hood Exhaust Fan/ Makeup Unit
a. The kitchen hood exhaust fan(s) and makeup air unit(s) shall be monitored
for operation. The EMCS shall generate an alarm should the internal hood
controls generate an alarm signaling an exhaust fan or makeup air unit is not
working.
5. Economizer Operation with FDD (Fault Detection and Diagnostics):
a. Each rooftop unit shall have its economizer status monitored by the EMCS.
The unit’s internal fault detection and diagnostics shall be capable of
generating a visible alarm to be seen by the EMCS should the unit be in
economizer when conditions are not met, or vice versa.
H. CONTROL
1. Domestic Hot Water:

90 Percent
a. The domestic hot water heater (s) and associated circulating pump(s) shall
be disabled/enabled by the EMCS based on a time schedule. The domestic
hot water supply for the hot water heater shall be monitored and shall
generate an alarm upon exceeding above or dropping below its assigned
alarm limits (adjustable). The points required to accomplish this sequence
shall be connected to the nearest available EMCS controller. The price for
this sequence shall not include a controller.
2. Freeze Protection:
a. Upon the outside air temperature dropping below an adjustable setpoint, all
pumps in the building shall be started by the EMCS, all outside air dampers
shall be closed, and all valves shall be opened to full flow through the water
coil (s). Each building shall be provided with a temperature sensor located
outside (northern exposure) to monitor outside air temperature.
3. Outside Lighting:
a. Provide auxiliary contactor(s) to control lighting. Include all hardware and
software required and connect to nearest EMCS controller. Coordinate with
4. Gang Toilet Exhaust Fans
a. Fans to be disabled/enabled by the EMCS based on a time schedule. The
points required to accomplish this sequence shall be connected to the
nearest available EMCS controller.
5. Crawlspace Exhaust Fans:
a. Fans are to operate continuously down to 35°F outside air temperature.
Measure R.H. and temperature in the crawlspace and outside. Above 35°F
outside air, if the outside air has more grains of moisture than the crawlspace
then have the capability to turn fans off. Provide alarms to measure airflow
(via sail switch) to alert Owner.
4.2 SINGLE ZONE DX/ GAS, DIGITAL SCROLL COMPRESSOR RTU WITH BIPOLAR
IONIZATION
A. GENERAL:
1. Each rooftop unit shall be provided with a digital scroll compressor, cooling
section, heating section, supply fan section, microprocessor control board and
an outside air damper by the unit manufacturer. The unit manufacturer shall
provide a 0-100% modulating outside air damper with spring return. The unit
manufacturer shall provide a 0-100% actuator. The temperature control system
contractor shall provide all temperature sensors. The space temperature sensor
shall be provided with a local override button. The temperature control system
contractor shall provide a dedicated stand-alone DDC controller for each unit.
The occupied/unoccupied mode of operation shall be defined by the EMCS
optimum start/stop schedule.
B. FAN CONTROL:
1. Fan speed shall be controlled by the RTU, based on its internal controls. The
RTU fan shall be provided with a VFD and shall cycle based on the spaces
demand for heating or cooling.
C. OUTSIDE AIR CONTROL:

1. During unoccupied operation, the outside air damper shall be fully closed.

90 Percent
2. During occupied mode, the outside air damper shall be closed when the outside
air temperature is below 20°F (adj.).
3. During occupied operation, the outside air damper shall be set to its minimum
position (reference scheduled CFM).
4. Bipolar Ionization Unit shall be enabled any time the RTU fan is enabled.
D. TEMPERATURE CONTROL:
1. Warm-up: The EMCS shall determine the required warm-up period based on the
optimized start algorithm. In this mode, the outside air damper shall be fully
closed and the EMCS will control the unit to reach occupied heating setpoint of
70°F (adjustable). Once the occupied heating setpoint temperature has been
reached, the EMCS shall switch the unit to the occupied mode.
2. Cool-down: The EMCS shall determine the required cool-down period based on
the optimized start algorithm. In this mode, the outside air damper shall be fully
closed and the EMCS will control the unit to reach occupied cooling setpoint
temperature of 74°F (adjustable). Once the occupied cooling setpoint
temperature has been reached, the EMCS shall switch the unit to the occupied
mode.
3. Unoccupied Mode: In the unoccupied mode of operation, the unit outside air
damper shall be fully closed and the supply fan shall cycle with the unit’s heating
and cooling modes. The DDC controller shall enable the heating or cooling as
required to maintain the unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints (initially 55°F
heating and 82°F cooling) as sensed by the space temperature sensor. Upon a
rise in space temperature above the unoccupied cooling setpoint, the DDC
controller shall enable the mechanical cooling. On a drop in space temperature
below the unoccupied heating setpoint, the DDC controller shall enable the gas
heating.
4. The space temperature sensor shall have an override pushbutton. Whenever the
override pushbutton is depressed, the unit shall be indexed to the occupied mode
for an adjustable period of time (initially 1 hour). After the override time period
has expired, the unit shall revert back to the unoccupied mode.
5. Occupied Mode: In the occupied mode of operation, the unit supply fan shall
cycle with a call for heating or cooling. The DDC controller shall energize the
heating and cooling as required to maintain the occupied heating and cooling
setpoints (initially 70°F heating, 74°F cooling) as sensed by a space temperature
sensor. On a rise in space temperature above the occupied cooling setpoint, the
DDC controller shall energize the mechanical cooling. The unit controller will
engage/ disengage the digital scroll compressor and will modulate the supply fan
in order to supply 55°F (adj.) supply air. On a drop in space temperature below
the occupied heating setpoint, the DDC controller shall energize the first stage of
gas heating. Upon a further drop in space temperature below the occupied
heating setpoint, the DDC controller shall energize the second stage of gas
heating. On a rise in space temperature above the heating setpoint, the reverse
shall occur.
6. Economizer Mode: In unoccupied or occupied mode, anytime there is a call for
cooling in the space, and the outside air temperature is 55°F (adj.) or below, the
unit’s economizer mode is to provide free cooling to the space until the space is
satisfied. For the larger units equipped with a power exhauster, the power
exhauster is to be enabled any time the unit is in economizer mode. The power
exhauster is to only be enabled during economizer mode.

90 Percent
4.3 SINGLE ZONE HEAT PUMP SPLIT SYSTEM WITH 2 STAGE COMPRESSOR AND
BIPOLAR IONIZATION
A. GENERAL:
1. Each unit shall be provided with a cooling section, heating section, supply fan
section, microprocessor control board. The mechanical contractor shall provide
the outside air/ return air damper section(s). The controls contractor shall provide
the 0-100% motorized, modulating outside air damper actuator(s) with spring
return. The controls contractor shall provide the motorized return air damper
actuator(s) with spring return. The mechanical contractor shall install the damper
section. The space temperature sensor shall be provided with a local override
button. The temperature control system contractor shall provide a dedicated
stand-alone DDC controller for each unit. The occupied/unoccupied mode of
operation shall be defined by the EMCS optimum start/stop schedule.
B. FAN CONTROL:
1. Fan speed shall be controlled by the air handler, based on its internal controls.
The fan shall run in low speed during first stage cooling and high speed during
second stage cooling.
C. OUTSIDE AIR CONTROL:

1. During unoccupied operation, the outside air damper shall be fully closed.
2. During occupied mode, the outside air damper shall be closed when the outside
air temperature is below 20°F (adj.).
3. During occupied operation, the outside air damper shall be set to its minimum
position (reference scheduled CFM).
4. Bipolar Ionization Unit shall be enabled any time the air handler fan is enabled.
D. TEMPERATURE CONTROL:
1. Warm-up: The EMCS shall determine the required warm-up period based on the
optimized start algorithm. In this mode, the outside air damper shall be fully
closed and the EMCS will control the unit to reach occupied heating setpoint of
70°F (adjustable). Once the occupied heating setpoint temperature has been
reached, the EMCS shall switch the unit to the occupied mode.
2. Cool-down: The EMCS shall determine the required cool-down period based on
the optimized start algorithm. In this mode, the outside air damper shall be fully
closed and the EMCS will control the unit to reach occupied cooling setpoint
temperature of 74°F (adjustable). Once the occupied cooling setpoint
temperature has been reached, the EMCS shall switch the unit to the occupied
mode.
3. Unoccupied Mode: In the unoccupied mode of operation, the unit outside air
damper shall be fully closed and the supply fan shall cycle with the unit’s heating
and cooling modes. The DDC controller shall enable the heating or cooling as
required to maintain the unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints (initially 55°F
heating and 82°F cooling) as sensed by the space temperature sensor. Upon a
rise in space temperature above the unoccupied cooling setpoint, the DDC
controller shall enable the mechanical cooling. On a drop in space temperature
below the unoccupied heating setpoint, the DDC controller shall enable the
heating. First stage of heating shall be to activate the reversing valve and operate

90 Percent
in heat pump mode. Upon a further drop in space temperature, the electric heat
shall be energized.
4. The space temperature sensor shall have an override pushbutton. Whenever the
override pushbutton is depressed, the unit shall be indexed to the occupied mode
for an adjustable period of time (initially 1 hour). After the override time period
has expired, the unit shall revert back to the unoccupied mode.
5. Occupied Mode: In the occupied mode of operation, the unit supply fan shall
cycle with a call for heating or cooling. The DDC controller shall energize the
heating and cooling as required to maintain the occupied heating and cooling
setpoints (initially 70°F heating, 74°F cooling) as sensed by a space temperature
sensor with digital display and pushbutton override. Space set point shall be user
adjustable within ±2°F (adj.). On a rise in space temperature above the occupied
cooling setpoint, the DDC controller shall energize the first stage of mechanical
cooling. Upon a further rise in space temperature of 2°F (adj.) above the occupied
cooling setpoint, the DDC controller shall energize the second stage of
mechanical cooling. On a drop in space temperature below the occupied cooling
setpoint, the reverse shall occur. On a further drop in space temperature below
the occupied heating setpoint, the DDC controller shall operate the reversing
valve and operate in heat pump mode. Upon a further drop in space temperature
below the occupied heating setpoint, the DDC controller shall energize the
electric heat. On a rise in space temperature above the heating setpoint, the
reverse shall occur.
6. Economizer Mode: In unoccupied or occupied mode, anytime there is a call for
cooling in the space, and the outside air temperature is 55°F (adj.) or below, the
motorized outside air damper is to open to provide half of the total cooling CFM,
and provide free cooling to the space until the space is satisfied.
4.4 PACKAGED MAKEUP AIR UNIT FOR KITCHEN HOODS
A. GENERAL:
1. The packaged make up air unit consists of a DX packaged unit for 100% outside
/ makeup air supplied to kitchen hoods. The makeup air unit shall have a cooling
section, heating section, supply fan section with VFD, integral control board, and
an outside air damper with actuator provided by the unit manufacturer. The unit
manufacturer shall provide an outdoor air temperature sensor. The EMCS
contractor shall monitor occupied/ unoccupied operation, supply fan status,
compressor status, supply air temperature, and outside air temperature.
2. The makeup air unit shall be enabled any time the associated kitchen exhaust
hood is in operation. EMCS contractor shall interlock the hood’s exhaust fan with
the associated makeup air unit.
3. Bacnet controller shall communicate with energy management control system.
B. FAN CONTROL:
1. During occupied operation, the fan shall be enabled. During unoccupied
operation, the fan is to remain disabled. The units VFD shall modulate to maintain
a constant static pressure in the makeup air ductwork. The control contractor
shall provide and install pressure sensor in ductwork. Coordinate location of
pressure sensor with engineer.

90 Percent
C. TEMPERATURE CONTROL:
1. Unoccupied Operation:
a. The outside air unit supply fan shall remain off during unoccupied mode. The
outside air damper shall remain fully closed.
2. Occupied Cooling Operation:
a. The outside air units cooling mode is enabled when the outside air
temperature rises one deadband above the cooling set point (initially 74°F
adj.). Cooling is disabled when the outside air temperature falls one
deadband below the cooling set point. Set points and deadbands are user
adjustable. In the cooling mode, as supply air temperature rises above the
supply air cooling setpoint, the compressors shall stage on and modulate to
control the supply air temperature. If additional cooling is required, the unit’s
compressors shall stage to maintain the cooling supply air setpoint (74°F
adj.).
3. Occupied Heating Operation:
a. The outside air units heating mode is enabled when the outside air
temperature falls one dead band below the heating set point (initially 58°F
adj.). Heating is disabled when the outside air temperature rises one
deadband above the heating set point. Set points and deadbands are user
adjustable. In the heating mode, as the supply air temperature falls below
the supply air heating set point, the heating shall modulate to maintain the
supply air heating setpoint (58°F adj.).
4. Occupied Ventilation Operation:
a. The outside air unit’s ventilation mode is enabled any time there is no
demand for heating or cooling. This initially occurs when the outside air
temperature is between 58°F and 74°. All temperature set points shall be
user adjustable.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 23 09 63
SAFE SHELTER EMERGENCY SYSTEMS CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL

Conditions, Division 1 Specifications, and Section 23 00 00, apply to this Section.
B. Section 23 09 23 Energy Management Control System (BACnet).
A. Safe shelter emergency control system as provided turn-key, fully integrated and
compatible with the Energy Management Control System provided under section 23
09 23.
A. Section 23 09 23 - Energy Management Control System
1.4 CODES AND REGULATIONS
A. Perform all work in strict accordance with the requirements and recommendations
stated in the codes and standards except when requirements are exceeded by the
contract documents.
B. The equipment, materials, and installation shall confirm to the latest version of all
applicable codes, standards and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction
including the following:
1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
2. NFPA 101, Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures.
3. Americans with Disabilities Act.
4. Texas Accessibility Standards.
5. International Building Codes (IBC).
6. Local and State Building Codes.
7. All requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a complete submittal package within 30 calendar days after award of this work
for review. Equipment is not to be ordered without review. Partial submittals are not
acceptable for review. Each submittal shall include a dated transmittal.
B. Electronic Submittals: E-mail or other electronic forms of submittals from the

Safe Shelter Emergency Systems Controls 23 09 63 - 1

90 Percent
desired.
C. Product Data Submittal including special boxes, cable, and other material as
requested by the Architect including:
1. A cover sheet with the name and location of the project, the name, address, and
telephone number of the Contractor, and the name, address, and telephone
number of the submitting sub-contractor. Include on or after the cover sheet
sufficient space for review stamps.
2. An indication of any deviations from Contract Document requirements, including
variations and limitations. Show any revisions to equipment layout required by
use of selected equipment.
3. A product data index and complete equipment list including for each product
submitted for approval the manufactures name and part number, including
options and selections.
4. Cut-sheets or catalog data illustrating the physical appearance, size, function,
compatibility, standards compliance, and other relevant characteristics of each
product on the equipment list. Indicate by prominent notation (an arrow, circle, or
other means) on each sheet the exact product and options being submitted.
5. Submit design data, when the scope of work requires, including calculations,
schematics, risers, sequences, or other data.
6. Any resubmittal shall include a complete revised equipment list and any product
data that is revised.
D. Submit shop drawings locating all components of the system, indicating circuit
routing, cable type, and gauge. Shop or coordination drawings shall include
information that will allow to the Contractor to coordinate interdisciplinary work and
when necessary guide the manufacturer or fabricator in producing the product. Shop
or coordination drawings shall be specifically prepared to illustrate the submitted
portion of work, this may require diagrams, schedules, details, and accurate to scale
equipment and device layouts prepared using a CAD or BIM engineering drawing
program.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUMMARY
A. It is the intent of this specification to describe the Safe Shelter Emergency Systems
Controls system shall be a turn-key fully integrated and compatible sub-section of the
Section 23 09 23 Energy Management Control System (Bacnet).

90 Percent
B. Systems shall be furnished and installed complete in all respects, including any and
all equipment, controls, wiring, instrumentation, enclosures, labor, engineering,
training, commissioning, programming, supervision, calibration, coordination with
other trades, etc. It is the intent of these specifications that the Contractor shall furnish
and install the systems complete in every respect and ready to operate. All equipment,
miscellaneous items and accessories required for such installation and for the correct
and convenient operation of the entire installation whether or not each such item or
accessory is shown on the plans or mentioned in these specifications shall be
furnished and installed.
C. Codes, Permits, and Fees: This contractor shall comply with all local, state, and
national codes, and shall secure and pay or all applicable costs, fees, permits, and
licenses. No additional costs shall be allowed for these items.
D. All basic equipment for which there are Underwriters' Laboratories Standard
requirements shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and be so labeled, or shall
conform to their requirements, in which case, certified statements to the effect shall
be furnished by the manufacturer with a copy of an examination report by a
recognized laboratory acceptable to the Local Authority.
2.2 SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
A. Programmable BACnet Controller (See Section 23 09 23 for acceptable

manufacturers):
8 VAC/VDC Power feed.
Input 1 - Button 1 SHELTER DOOR LOCKDOWN ACTIVATION.
Input 2 - Button 2 MECHANICAL VENTILATION SYSTEM.
Input 3 - Button 3 NATURAL GAS SHUT OFF
Input 4 - Button 4 PRESSURIZATION TANK
Input 5 - spare
Input 6 - spare
Input 7 - spare
Input 8 - spare
Output 1 - SHELTER DOOR LOCKDOWN ACTIVATION.
Output 2 - MECHANICAL VENTILATION SYSTEM

90 Percent
Output 3 - NATURAL GAS SHUT OFF
Output 4 - PRESSURIZATION TANK
Output 5 -
Output 6 -
Output 7 - Natural Gas Shut Off Activation Indicator Light.
Output 8 – Pressurization Tank Activation Indicator Light.
Additional Outputs - Door Position Switches (verify quantity with

drawings).
SMART Sensor Input - Carbon Dioxide sensor: Reliable SMART sensor

model
SS-P-CO2, or equivalent.
2.3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Wall flush mount control housings: Provide two (2) Hoffa CONCEPT Flush-Mounted
Steel Enclosures model CP1612 with wall mounting brackets and key lock kits.
B. System Controller: Programmable BACnet Controller (See Section 23 09 23 for

acceptable manufacturers): Stand-alone controller to be provided by the awarded
EMCS contractor and shall be powered by emergency power. Coordinate installation
and wiring with electrical contractor.
C. EMCS contractor is responsible for all necessary wiring and programming of stand-
alone controller to building EMCS. Storm shelter system status shall be displayed and
monitored through EMCS front end. All activation and control of safe shelter
emergency system shall be through stand-alone controller.
D. EMCS contractor shall provide and install all necessary actuators and control wiring
between stand-alone controller and storm shelter devices. Including, but not limited
to: exhaust fans, roll up door motors, damper actuators, valve actuators, door status
contacts, etc.
E. EMCS contractor shall coordinate with access control contractor to add open contact
to allow access as needed during “storm mode”. EMCS contractor shall provide all
necessary control wiring.
F. 1" conduits installed from the nearest accessible ceiling space to the inside of the wall
cabinet. All conduit and protective bushings to be provided and installed by electrical
contractor. Install single gang back boxes inside the wall cabinet for a dedicated
pathway for each wire that will run to a specific button.
G. Carbon Dioxide sensor: Reliable SMART sensor model SS-P-CO2, or equivalent.

90 Percent
H. Mount one (1) color-coded indicator light below each large mushroom-button
specified below:
1. Menics LED Indicator Light model M06F24R, or equivalent, Indicator LED Red
24VDC, for Button 1.
2. Menics LED Indicator Light model M06F24B, or equivalent, Indicator LED Blue
3. Menics LED Indicator Light model M06F24Y, or equivalent, Indicator LED Yellow
4. Menics LED Indicator Light model M06F24W, or equivalent, Indicator LED White
I. Door Position Magnetic Contract Switches: Sentrol 1084D Natural, DPDT screw
mount with leads, 2.56” long x .056” wide, x 0.50” each half 0.5” thick.
J. The Safe Shelter Emergency Systems Control inputs shall be comprised of a flush
wall mount enclosure with three buttons as follows:
1. One large mushroom-button marked SHELTER DOOR LOCKDOWN
ACTIVATION.
2. One large mushroom-button marked LOUVER ROLL UP DOORS.
3. One large mushroom-button marked NATURAL GAS SHUT OFF.
K. Button 1 SHELTER DOOR LOCKDOWN ACTIVATION switch. This switch shall be

colored red and secure all shelter perimeter doors.
L. For each door within storm shelter, provide door position magnetic switch and
indicator light. When Button 1 is activated, indicator lights will indicate door closure.
Lights should be identified with each door and placed within the same enclosure as
Button
M. Button 2 LOUVER ROLL UP DOORS switch shall be colored blue and control the
opening of the louver roll up doors and activate the ventilation system through the
EMS system. When the key reset is initiated the interior Exhaust Fans should turn off
and the Ventilation Doors should begin to close. These roll up doors and exhaust fans
shall only be activated via this button or through the EMS software and through no
other interface. STI model SS2400ZA-EN, Blue Shell, No cover, Push Button #0 Key
to Reset, Custom English Two Line Label: “2 LOUVER ROLL” “UP DOORS”.
N. When the button is depressed, the roll up doors and exhaust fans shall remain
disabled unless carbon dioxide sensor reading is above 1100 ppm. If Button 2 is
activated, the roll up doors shall be opened and exhaust fans shall be started when
the carbon dioxide readings are above 1100 ppm and be closed/stopped when the
sensor is below 1000ppm.
O. Button 3 NATURAL GAS SHUT OFF switch shall be colored yellow and activate the
natural gas shutoff valve. When the key reset is initiated this valve shall return to
normal operation. STI model SS2200ZA-EN, Yellow Shell, no cover, Push Button #0
Key to Reset, Custom English Two Line Label: “3 NATURAL GAS” “SHUT OFF”.
Natural gas valve shall be provided by EMS contractor and installed by Plumbing
Contractor. See Section 23 09 23 and drawings for gas valve location.

90 Percent
P. Adjacent to the Safe Shelter Emergency Systems Control enclosure, mount a single
button flush wall mount with one large mushroom button as follows:
1. One large mushroom-button marked “4 PRESSURIZATION TANK”. When
Button 4 is pressed, the button indicator light turns on up to indicate that the
Pressurization Tank has begun to empty pressurized air into the water storage
tank serving toilets and sinks. If this button is ever pressed, the District will need
to replace/refill the Pressurization Tank. and, the button should be reset by the
Maintenance Department at that time.
2. Warning Light: If the large button to the left is pressed or if the air pressure in the
tank is insufficient, the WARNING Light to the left should turn on to indicate that
the Pressurization Tank needs to be replaced/refilled.
3. Button # 4 - air pressure release button for water pressure. This button is in its
own enclosure. Reference drawings for button location. Pushing this button will
activate the EMS system to engage the release of pressurized air into the water
tanks that provide water to the toilets in the shelter. The LED light will come on
when the pressure in the air tank is below 55 psi or when the button to release
the air pressure has been pressed and the air has been released. Key reset will
shut the warning light off. Water pressurization panel enclosure - contractor shall
provide and install a white label with red text on the exterior lid of the enclosure.
The text shall read “press the button in this box only if necessary to re-pressurize
the water in the toilets/sinks”.
Q. Each switch cover plate shall have an adjacent label containing written instructions
on what the button will do when pressed and how the button should be reset and
when. Coordinate with the owner on all final texts for this direction. All labeling shall
be machine generated.
R. Wall enclosure for the shelter control panel buttons shall be mounted at 44" OFF
measured from the bottom of the enclosure. The main control panel enclosure shall
include a white label with red text on the exterior lid of the enclosure. The text shall
read “Press all buttons in this box to activate tornado shelter”. Do not place the label
over the Plexiglas door in such a manner that the operator cannot see the switch
illumination lights.
S. For all Safe Shelter Emergency Systems Control functions other than the exhaust
fans, each relay shall be mounted in a surface mount metal enclosure with conduit
knockouts. Relays shall be UL recognized and rated for ten million mechanical
operations. At each location provide two Air Products & Controls models # MR-201/C
relays, or equivalent, one for the emergency function, and one for the reset function.
Relays shall be operated by a multi-voltage coil (24 VDC), feature DODD dry Form C
contacts rated 10 Amps @ 120 VAC, and a status LED to indicate that the relay is
energized.

90 Percent
T. For the exhaust fan Safe Shelter Emergency Systems Control function, provide
Square Latching Plug-In Relays. The latching relays shall perform a basic memory
function and maintain their contact position after the control power has been removed.
To be 24VDC control coil, 8-pin square base latching plug-in relay with an AC contact
rating of 16A @ 277V, Dayton model # 1EHY3 or equivalent. Provide a base, to be
Dayton model # 1FC13 or equivalent, finger safe 8-pin square socket, rated at 16A
@ 300VAC.
2.4 DAMPERS AND VALVES CONTROL:
A. Control air dampers:

1. The sheet metal contractor shall furnish and size all automatic control dampers
unless provided with packaged equipment.
2. The sheet metal contractor shall install all dampers unless provided with
packaged equipment.
3. Control air dampers shall be parallel blade for two-position control and opposed
blade for modulating control applications. Dampers shall be galvanized with nylon
bearings. Blade edge and tip seals shall be included for all dampers. Leakage
through the damper shall not exceed 4 CFM per square foot at 1" wick Blades
shall be 16-gauge minimum and 10" wide maximum and frame shall be of welded
channel iron. Dampers over 48" wide shall be equipped with a jackshaft to
provide sufficient force throughout the intended operating range.
4. All dampers used for modulating service shall be opposed blade type arrange for
normally open or normally closed operation as required. The damper is to be
sized so that when wide open the pressure drop is an enough its close-off
pressure drops for effective throttling.
5. All dampers used for two-position or open-close control shall be parallel blade
type arranged for normally open or closed operation as required.
6. Damper linkage hardware shall be constructed of aluminum or corrosion resistant
zinc & nickel-plated steel and furnished as follows:
a. Bearing support bracket and drive blade pin extension shall be provided for
each damper section. Sheet metal contractor shall install bearing support
bracket and drive blade pin extension. Sheet metal contractor shall provide
permanent indication of blade position by scratching or marking the visible
end of the drive blade pin extension.
B. Drive pin may be round only if V-bolt and toothed V-clamp is used to cause a cold
weld effect for positive gripping. For single bolt or set-screw type actuator fasteners,
round damper pin shafts must be milled with at least one side flat to avoid slippage.
2.5 INSTALLATION AND SUPPORT
A. System equipment installation shall be in accordance with good engineering practices

as established by the NEC and the TIA/EIA. Wiring shall meet all state and local
electrical code requirements.
B. All devices shall be supported from the building structure. Do not attach any supports
to joist bridging or other lightweight members.

90 Percent
C. In all exposed areas such as gymnasiums, shops, field houses, janitors’ closets, or
mechanical / electrical rooms all safety and security system cable shall be fully
enclosed in conduit.
D. Support shall be provided by mounting appropriate fasteners. If the weight load is

carried by the support rod or wire, the support assembly may attach to the ceiling grid
for lateral stabilization. The required support wires for the ceiling grid or light fixtures
shall not be utilized. Any fastener attached to the ceiling grid shall not interfere with
inserting or removing ceiling tiles. The cable pathway of supports must be positioned
at least 12 inches above the ceiling grid.
E. All devices shall be placed with regard to the environment, EMI/RFI interference, and
its effect on safety and security system signal transmission.
F. Mount all equipment firmly in place such that vibration or jarring will not interfere with
system operation.
G. Devices mounted on a drop ceiling shall feature a back box fitted with a support
hanger (Caddy #512 or #512A for deep boxes), or equivalent with independent drop
wires to support the weight of the device.
2.6 FIRE STOPPING, DRAFT/NOISE STOPPING, PENETRATIONS, AND CORING
A. UL Listed fire stopping methods that match the fire rating of the wall or floor being
penetrated are to be used at all fire barrier penetrations. Seal the interior of the conduit
sleeve around the cables and around the outside of the sleeve on each side of the
penetration with fire-stop caulk or putty, install according to the manufacturers’
instructions.
B. All penetrations through fire rated walls or floors shall feature a suitable length of
metal conduit. Hole diameter shall not exceed ½” larger than the conduit or sleeve to
be installed. The hole shall be neatly cut, not oversize or irregular. Do not share
wall/floor penetrations with ductwork, piping, line voltage electrical conduits, etc.
C. All gypsum board or plaster penetrations shall tool cut using an appropriate hole saw
/ mandrel or manufactured assembly.
D. Draft/Noise Stopping - All penetrations through non-rated walls shall include

draft/noise stopping to minimize the transfer of air and sound between enclosed
areas. This shall include but not limited to:
1. Neatly cutting all non-rated wall penetrations with a 1" maximum clearance. All
gypsum board or plaster penetrations shall be tool cut using an appropriate hole
saw / mandrel or manufactured assembly. The hole shall be neatly cut and not
oversize or irregular. Do not share wall penetrations with other types of ductwork,
piping, line voltage electrical conduits, safety and security systems cabling, etc.
2. Provide and install non-combustible mineral wool, fiberglass, cellulose insulation,
caulk, and/or sealant as required. Seal the interior of conduit sleeves around the
cables and around the outside of the sleeve on each side of the penetration with
caulk or putty, install materials according to the manufacturers' instructions.

90 Percent
E. The Contractor shall make every effort to coordinate with the building Architect,
Engineer, Builder, and Electrical Contractor to have sleeves placed in new
construction so that later coring or drilling of building structural members will not be
required. The Contractor must consult with the building Architect, Engineer, and
Builder prior to drilling, coring, or sawing of any wall, floor, etc. All penetrations shall
be made at approved, appropriate, locations.
F. Upon approval, the Contractor shall be required to supply all labor, equipment, tools,
and materials to create any additional penetrations, and shall provide the sleeve,
temporary and final fire stopping. Exceptional care shall be taken not to stress,
overheat, or penetrate any building support member. Coring shall be made with
equipment appropriate for the dry penetration of concrete and block materials. Under
no circumstances shall penetrations be made utilizing a chisel or percussion type
equipment. Concrete, block, or plaster cores shall be made by dry saw/core methods
only.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WARRANTY
A. The Safe Shelter Emergency Systems Control shall guarantee all workmanship and
material in the installed system for a period of one (1) year, such guarantee dating
from the date of final acceptance by the Architect/Engineer.
B. This warranty shall cover the repair or replacement without additional costs to the
Owner of any defective materials, parts, etc. of facility workmanship.
C. During the warranty period, this contractor shall respond to calls for warranty service
within eight (8) working hours. Emergency service shall be obtainable within four (4)
hours of notification by the Owner. Emergency service shall be obtainable on a 24
hour basis, seven (7) days per week.
D. The temperature control contractor's office shall be within a 150-mile radius of the job
site.
E. Warranty Access:
1. The Owner shall grant to the Contractor, reasonable access to the EMCS system
during the warranty period. The owner shall provide, at no cost to the contractor,
remote software access to an on-site computer or VPN access for the following
functions:
a. Access to the entire facility control system by the contractor to provide
service and
b. diagnostic support.
c. Service: All service of the system shall be furnished by the Contractor, at no
cost to the Owner, for a period of one (1) year, concurrent with the warranty
period specified above.

90 Percent
d. Testing and Warranty Service: A factory trained service technician shall

supervise the final connections and testing of the system and it shall be
subject to the final acceptance of the Architect, Engineer, and local
authorities.
e. Testing shall ensure the following: Before energizing the cables and wires,
check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults,
continuity, and insulation.
f. Complete and functional system.
F. Installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 DRAWINGS, MANUALS, AND TRAINING
A. As-built drawings and operating and maintenance manuals may be electronically

transmitted in PDF file format (preferred) or paper copies may be provided in
quantities indicated in Division 1. Paper copies shall be organized including index
tabs in a 3-ring black binder of sufficient size.
B. Upon completion of the installation, and prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall
furnish as-built drawings.
C. In addition, the contractor shall furnish complete operating and maintenance manuals
listing the manufacturer's name(s), including technical data sheets. Manuals shall
include wiring diagrams to indicate internal wiring for each device and the
interconnections between the items of equipment. Provide a clear and concise
description of operation that gives, in detail, the information required to properly
operate the equipment and system. Provide a parts list with manufacturer and model
number for commonly replaced parts. Include complete instructions for the inspection,
testing, and maintenance of the system. Include copies of all programming sheets
used to configure the system.
D. The Contractor shall conduct a formal on-site training session for the Owners
Representative/Maintenance personnel, which shall include instruction in the
operation, testing, location, inspection, and maintenance, of all system components.
Provide a minimum of two (2) hours of documented general instruction.
END SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 23 23 00
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Refrigerant piping for split system (including heat pumps) cooling/heating units.
A. Section 22 05 24 - Valves - General
C. Section 23 00 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements
D. Section 23 07 21 - Refrigerant Piping Insulation
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Service
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the refrigerant line sizing, lengths, traps, and all other aspects of the
refrigerant systems with the air conditioning unit manufacturer to ensure a completely
working and reliable system.
B. Submit product data on piping materials and fittings.
C. Provide letter stating air conditioning manufacturer has reviewed refrigerant line
design. Provide drawings on any lines that are longer than 80 feet.
D. If units have to be moved due to line lengths, then all associated costs will be at the
Contractor's expense.
Refrigerant Piping 23 23 00 - 1
90 Percent
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING
A. ACR hard drawn copper tubing, conform to ASTM B280.
B. ACR soft drawn copper tubing is allowed in concealed locations, such as behind walls.
Above ceiling is not considered a concealed location.
2.2 FITTINGS
A. Wrought copper fittings
B. Use silver solder at connections
2.3 VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Alco Controls
2. Sporlan Valve Company
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 MATERIAL PREPARATION
A. Cut tubing with a sharp pipe cutter.
B. Ream and thoroughly clean to remove all burrs, filings, dirt and grease before
assembly and soldering.
C. Remove oxide and discoloration prior to assembly.
3.2 SLEEVES
A. Sleeve piping as required in accordance with Section 23 05 29 - Pipe and Pipe

Fittings.
B. All refrigerant piping passing under slab shall be sleeved.
C. Sleeves shall be of an adequate size to permit removal of the piping at a later date.
90 Percent
3.3 HANGER SUPPORTS
A. Support as required in accordance with Section 23 05 29 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings.
B. Do not fasten liquid and suction lines together unless there is insulation between
them. Use wire ties. Duct tape not allowed.
C. Insulate all refrigerant lines from structure.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Route with building lines, vertical lines to be plumb, grade horizontal suction lines to
compressor.
B. All brazing shall be done with 2-8 psig dry nitrogen purge.
C. Protect all valves and paint from excessive heat.
D. Keep refrigerant lines sealed from atmosphere during construction.
E. All suction lines to receive insulation.
F. No welded or mechanical joints in concealed areas, such as walls. Soft drawn copper
is acceptable.
G. Follow A/C manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
90 Percent
SECTION 23 31 13
METAL DUCTWORK
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Furnishing and installation of all ductwork as shown on the construction documents.

Acoustical and thermal linings and wrappings; flexible ductwork and connections;
combination smoke and fire dampers, smoke dampers, and fire dampers; duct access
doors; air diffusers, grilles and registers; air volume control devices; hangers and
supports; plenums and casings; turning vanes; air filters; installation of temperature
control dampers, and other appurtenances necessary for a complete and operational
system.
B. All work shall be preceded by taking measurements at the job site, fully coordinating
all work with other disciplines, verifying available spaces for ductwork, and developing
shop drawings.
B. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
C. Section 23 07 13 - Duct and Grille Insulation
E. Section 23 34 16 - HVAC Fans
F. Section 23 37 13 - Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
G. Section 23 38 13 - Commercial Kitchen Hoods
H. Section 23 81 19 - Packaged HVAC Units
I. Section 23 81 26 - Split System HVAC Units
1.4 REFERENCES
A. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters
Metal Ductwork 23 31 13 - 1
90 Percent
B. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices
C. ASTM 653 - Sheet Metal, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated
(Galvanized) by the Hot-Dipped Process
D. ASTM A924 - Hot Dip Galvanized Coils & Sheets - Tolerances
E. ASTM A463 - Steel Sheet Aluminum Coated by the Hot Dip Process
F. NFPA 90A - National Fire Protection Association - Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilation Systems
G. NFPA 92A - Smoke-Control Systems
H. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors Association
I. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Latest Edition, for Metal and Flexible
Ducts
J. U.L. - Underwriter's Laboratories
K. UL 555 - Standard for Safety; Fire Dampers
L. UL 555S - Standard for Safety; Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control
Systems
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design static pressure:

1. 1 inch w.g. minimum for all low pressure ductwork applications.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
2. Submit product data indicating typical catalog of information including
arrangements.
materials used in fabrication.
4. Indicate mechanical and electrical service locations and requirements of
equipment.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit 1/4" per foot shop drawing(s) showing all ducts, piping and equipment
shown by plans and specifications. Submit drawings on all mechanical rooms.
The drawings shall be coordinated with structural and electrical. Provide sections
for all congested areas and mechanical rooms. Submit prior to construction of
ductwork.
90 Percent
A. All equipment and materials shall be new and of the quality as specified herein. All
work shall comply with the Local Building Code, Mechanical Code, Fire Code, and all
other applicable State and Local Codes or ordinances.
B. All equipment and materials shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by trained

and experienced sheet metal technicians and mechanics as recommended by the
manufacturers of the products installed.
C. All ductwork to be manufactured in accordance with SMACNA standards.
D. Where the standards and requirements of this specification exceed those of

SMACNA, the requirements herein shall govern.
E. Except where specified otherwise, all sheet metal used shall be constructed from
prime galvanized steel sheets or coils up to 60 inches in width. Each sheet shall be
stenciled with manufacturer's name and gauge. Coils of sheet steel shall be stenciled
throughout on 10 foot centers with manufacturer's name and gauge tolerances in
inches.
F. Spiral pipe:
1. All pipe and fittings must be from a single manufacturer.
G. Flexible:
1. The composite assembly including insulation, vapor barrier, and glass scrim shall
meet the Class 1 requirements of the latest NFPA Bulletin #90A and be labeled
for a spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke development rating of 50 or under.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warranty all ductwork and dampers for 1 year from the date of final acceptance. The
warranty will cover workmanship, noise, chatter, whistling, and vibration. Ductwork
must be free from pulsation under all conditions of operation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 RECTANGULAR AND ROUND RIGID DUCTS:
A. Material:
1. New, prime grade sheet or coil steel
B. Gauge:
1. Select gauge in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards Tables
1-3 to 1-9 and Appendix- page 2.
C. Auditorium and stages:

1. Increase two gauges (heavier) for the first 20 feet of supply and return duct.
90 Percent
D. Coating:
1. Type:
a. Continuous, hot-dip, galvanized coating
E. Application:
1. 1-1/4 ounces per 1 square foot, two-sided sheet
2. Comply with ASTM A 653.
F. Identification:
1. Sheet steel:
a. Stencil each sheet with manufacturer's name and gauge.
G. Coil steel:
1. Stencil coils on 10 foot centers with manufacturer's name and gauge.
H. Construction:
1. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA Round Duct Standards, Tables 3-2A,
3-2B, and 3-3, Figures 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, and 3-5.
2. Pre-manufactured round duct may be used if approved by the Architect/Engineer.
2.2 EXHAUST DUCTS FOR TYPE I KITCHEN HOODS
A. Material:
1. Stainless steel - 18 ga. welded
2. Black steel - 16 ga. welded
3. Conform to NFPA 90A
B. Accessories:
1. Provide and install backdraft damper in kitchen hood exhaust ductwork.
C. Interlock:
1. Provide for automatic activation of all Type I kitchen hood exhaust fans by heat
sensor(s) interlocked with the manual fan switch. Provide off delay relay set to
run a minimum of y 5 minutes to prevent quick cycling and to clear the hood if
heat remains after the fan is switched off. Provide temperature sensors in each
hood section and space maximum 6’-0” O.C. Temperature sensors to be tested
and set so that exhaust fan(s) activate not more than 15 minutes after the first
appliance served by Type I hood has been turned on. Temperature sensor
arrangements installed by the hood manufacturer are acceptable.
2.3 ACCESS DOORS
A. Install access doors to facilitate cleaning as required by code.
B. Install access doors as required for access to fire protection devices.
2.4 EXHAUST DUCTS FOR DISHWASHER DUCT SYSTEMS
A. Aluminum:
1. Gauge in accordance with SMACNA Standards.
90 Percent
2.5 DOUBLE-WALL INSULATED SPIRAL/RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK
A. Types:
1. Round
2. Flat Oval
3. Rectangular
B. Materials:
1. Duct: Sheet metal, select gauge in accordance with SMACNA Standards.
2. Perforated: Galvanized steel
3. Insulation liner:
a. 1-inch fiberglass with R-value greater than 4.0 for conditioned areas (gyms)
b. 2-inch fiberglass with R-value greater than 5.0 inside building
unconditioned space.
c. 3-inch fiberglass with R value greater than 8.0 for exterior duct.
C. Conform to ASTM A653 and ASTM A924.
D. Conform to ASTM 463 for aluminized ductwork
E. Construction:
1. Double wall insulated
2. Spiral with lockseams
3. "Paint grip" finish on outer shell for exposed ductwork
4. Conform to ASTM A653
5. Fittings:
a. Spot welded and bonded construction
6. Outer joints:
a. Use flanged couplings that will withstand the maximum design pressure
with no leakage.
7. Inner Liner Joints:
a. Use a separate slip coupling to connect the inner liner sections at duct to
duct joints to allow for expansion/contraction.
b. Do not mechanically fix or seal inner lining couplings.
F. Flanged Joints:
1. Seal with a duct sealant that has a synthetic elastomeric base.
2. Sealant:
a. Formulated to withstand temperatures from -20 to 150 degrees F.
b. Formulated so that no surface preparation or solvent cleaning is necessary.
c. UL classified.
G. Control Dampers:
1. Construct with a 2 inch insulation layer and a solid inner liner.
2. Press stainless steel bearing sleeves into the frame of the outer shell to support
the damper axle.
3. Extend the axle 6 inches from the outer shell body.
4. Attach a 1½ inch x 1½ inch reinforcement to the damper.
90 Percent
H. Elbow Radius:
1. 90-degree: 1-1/2 times duct diameter with 5 gores
2. 45-degree: 1-1/2 times duct diameter with 3 gores
I. Manufacturer/Model:
1. United McGill Corporation
2. Lewis & Lambert, LLP
3. Linx Industries
4. Precision Spiral Pipe
5. Spiral Pipe of Texas Corporation, Inc.
2.6 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Material: In accordance with SMACNA Metal and Flexible Duct Standards, Latest
Edition.
B. Construction:
1. Factory insulate with high density fiberglass to a minimum R value of 5.79.
2. Provide a positive interior air seal permanently bonded to a carbon steel spring
helix.
3. Sheath seal in a Class 1 vapor barrier and factory seal at both ends.
4. Conform to U.L. 181, NFPA 90A
C. Manufacturer/Model:
1. ATCO 30 Series
2.7 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Manufacturer:
1. Nailor Industries Series 1020, 1021 or equal.
B. Type:
1. Manually operated single blade or multi-blade
2. Conform to SMACNA Duct Standards (Metal & Flexible), Figures 2-12 & 2-13.
C. Application:
1. Provide in all branches, splits and taps whether indicated on plans or not.
D. Construction:
1. Provide an indicating device with lock to hold damper in proper position.
2. All manual dampers installed above hard ceilings or at other inaccessible areas
shall be supplied with a cable operated damper equal to Young Regulator Model
830A-CC. Damper(s) to be opposed blade type constructed of .050 minimum
heavy duty extruded aluminum frames and blades. All necessary hardware to
ensure compatibility with remote cable control system shall be included. Damper
blades to include individual blade bushings for smooth and quiet operation.
Damper blades shall rotate between a matched pair of formed and punched 306
stainless steel connecting slide rails which facilitate smooth blade movement and
ensure alignment.
90 Percent
2.8 TURNING VANES
A. Provide in all rectangular supply elbows. Turning vanes in return air ductwork is not
necessary.
B. Conform to SMACNA Duct Standards, Figures 2-3 and 2-4.
2.9 DUCT SEALANT
A. Equal to Glenkote "Seal-Flex" duct sealer, Hardcast "Irongrip 601", Foster 32-19” or
”Childers CP-146”
2.10 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Manufacturer/Model:
1. Fire Dampers - Pottorff, Ruskin, Greenheck, National Controlled Air or Nailor
2. Ceiling Fire Dampers/Thermal Blankets - CK-2000-1 thermal blanket and Model
CFSR-2 ceiling damper for supply outlets (round or square) and CFSR-2 for
return outlets (square).
B. Type:
1. 212ºF fusible link fire damper.
2. Fire protection rating: 1.5 hours
3. Conform to UL Standard 555 and be UL labeled
4. Tested in accordance with AMCA 500.
C. Application:
1. Provide at locations shown on plans and where required by Local and State
ordinances.
D. Features:
1. Maximum leakage 8 cfm at 4-inch S.P.
2. Vertical or horizontal installation
3. Radiation blanket
4. Blades 16 gauge galvanized, maximum 6-inch width.
5. 5 year warranty.
1. Ceiling Fire Dampers:
a. Pottorff Ceiling Fire Dampers/Thermal Blankets - Series CFD
b. Equals by Nailor Industries, NCA, United Air, Ruskin, Greenheck
2.11 DUCT SILENCERS / SOUND ATTENUATORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. McGill Airflow LLC.
2. Ruskin Co.
3. Vibro-Acoustics
90 Percent
B. Rectangular Silencer Outer Casing:

1. ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 Galvanized sheet steel, 0.034 inch thick.
C. Inner Casing and Baffles:

1. ASTM A 653/ A 653M, G90 Galvanized sheet metal, 0.034 inch thick, with 1/8-
inch diameter perforations.
D. Connection size: Match connecting ductwork, unless otherwise noted.
E. Sound Absorbing Mechanism:

1. Controlled impedance membranes and broadly tuned resonators without
absorptive media.
2. Dissipative type with fill media
a. Fill material - inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed under
moisture-proof non-fibrous material.
b. Erosion barrier - polymer bag enclosing fill, heat sealed before assembly.
F. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or react to
system pressure variations. Do not use mechanical fasteners for unit assemblies.
Units shall be completely factory fabricated. No field assembly required.
2.12 FIRE SAFETY FUNCTIONS - DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS, CONTROL

RELAYS, AND SMOKE FIRE DAMPER CONTROL
A. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall provide the Duct Mounted Smoke Detectors, Control
Modules, Power Relays, and Control Relay devices and perform the final low-voltage
hook-up to the fire alarm system.
B. Duct mounted smoke detector housings and sample tubes shall be furnished by the
Fire Alarm Contractor and mounted by the Mechanical Contractor.
C. Line voltage hook-up shall be by the Electrical Contractor.
D. Fire Alarm Safety Control Functions, which may include the operation of fire alarm
Control Relays [CR] associated with duct mounted smoke detector [D]/air handler
shut down, high volume low speed (HVLS) fan shut down, fire door hold-back and
release, smoke fire damper motor control, et cetera, shall be initiated via Control
Relays which shall be de-energized under fire alarm conditions. These Control Relays
shall be provided and mounted by the Fire Alarm Contractor and located within three
feet of the unit. These Control Relays shall be controlled by a fail-safe Fire Safety
Control Function circuit. For each controlled device the contractor providing the
device shall wire it internally for fail-safe shut-down and provide a labeled 3' coil of
cable outside the unit to allow the fire alarm contractor to make final connection to the
Common and N.O. or N.C. dry contacts on the fire alarm SPDT Control Relay. Each
Fire Safety Control Function circuit controlled device shall be configured such that
when the fire alarm system safety control circuit is re-energized, by the fire alarm
control panel, the device shall return to normal operation (e.g. be ready to re-start)
without a need for manual or environmental control system intervention.
90 Percent
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Erect all ductwork in the general locations shown.
B. Conform to all structural and finish conditions of the building.
C. Ductwork shall not be allowed to pass through or over designated electrical rooms.
D. Before fabricating any ductwork, check the physical conditions at the job site and
make all necessary changes in cross sections, offsets, and similar items, whether
they are specifically indicated or not.
E. Where ductwork is shown to be lined on the inside with duct liner, the sizes shown on
the plans are the inside dimensions. Therefore, sheet metal dimensions shall be
increased accordingly.
F. Seal all joints both transverse and longitudinal seams, with duct sealant in accordance
to Table 1-2 Class B.
G. Install 1” roll type filter media on all return duct openings prior to starting blowers.
Leave in place and change as necessary during construction.
H. Before installing grilles, operate air conditioning unit fans and remove all debris or
foreign matter.
I. Rectangular ductwork:
1. Construct in accordance with SMACNA, Duct Construction Standards for the
specific duct pressure classification involved (see pressure classification). Do not
use radius ells with square throats.
J. Round ductwork:
1. Connect with slip type joints using a minimum of three sheet metal screws
per joint and in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards.
K. Flexible ductwork:
1. All flexible ducts shall be demountable and individual lengths shall not be in
excess of seven feet. Flexible ducts are not allowed to substitute rectangular
return air ductwork, unless approved by engineer.
2. Use only factory-made connectors.
3. Flexible ducts should be installed fully extended, free of sags and kinks.
L. Kitchen Hood Exhaust Ductwork:

1. Provide a liquid tight continuous external weld or braze on all seams and joints
in the ductwork. Weld to be made on the external surface of the duct system.
2. All horizontal ductwork to be sloped in accordance with NFPA #96 - 7.1.4. A
minimum 2 percent slope for ductwork up to 75’-0”. A minimum 8 percent slope
for ductwork over 75’-0”.
90 Percent
3. Provide grease duct reservoir below all horizontal ductwork. Must comply with
the following:
a. Extend across full width of the ductwork with a length not less than 12
inches.
b. Have a minimum depth of 1 inch.
c. Must slope to a drain.
d. Must be provided with a cleanout opening located on the side or on top of
the duct to provide direct access to the reservoir to permit cleaning of the
reservoir.
4. Sections of grease ducts that are inaccessible from the hood or discharge
openings shall be provided with cleanout openings spaced not more than 10’-0”
from any change in direction greater than 45 degrees.
5. Cleanouts and openings shall be equipped with liquid tight doors constructed of
steel having thickness not less than that required for that duct.
6. Prior to the use or concealment of any portion of a grease duct system, a leakage
test shall be performed. Ducts shall be considered concealed where installed in
shafts or covered by coatings, wraps, or insulation that prevents the ductwork
from being visually inspected on all sides. The permit holder shall be responsible
to provide the necessary equipment al perform the grease duct leakage test. A
light test shall be performed to determine that all welded and brazed joints are
liquid tight.
M. Dishwasher Exhaust Ductwork:

1. Provide dishwasher and shower room with aluminum or stainless steel exhaust
ductwork as specified for standard duct construction for sheet metal ductwork.
2. Make all joints in the bottom of horizontal runs watertight.
3. Slope horizontal runs to exhaust grille.
4. Use unlined duct in all dishwasher and shower room installations.
N. Double-wall insulated spiral/rectangular ductwork:

1. Install without exposed insulation in all exposed ceiling areas.
2. Provide ductwork installation that is high quality, very neat, and aesthetically
pleasing.
3. The final appearance of the ductwork shall be approved by the
Architect/Engineer.
O. Reinforcement:
1. Reinforce all ducts to prevent buckling, breathing, vibration, or unnecessary
noise.
2. Reinforcing shall be in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards
(Metal and Flexible), Tables 1-3, 1-4, 1-5, 1-6, 1-7, 1-8, and 1-9 plus any
additional reinforcing to meet job conditions.
3. All ducts shall be supported in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction
Standards (Metal and Flexible), Tables 4-1, 4-2, 4-3.
P. Flexible Connections:
1. Where ducts connect to fans or air handling units, make flexible airtight
connections using "Ventglas" fabric.
2. The fabric must be fire-resistant, waterproof and mildew resistant with a weight
of approximately 30 ounces per square yard.
90 Percent
3. Provide a minimum of 1/2 inch slack in the connections, and a minimum of 2-1/2
inches distance between the edges of the ducts.
4. Provide a minimum of 1 inch slack for each inch of static pressure on the fan
system.
5. Securely fasten fabric to apparatus and to adjacent ductwork by means of
galvanized flats or draw bands.
6. Do not install outdoors, except where detailed on plans.
7. Where connections are made in outdoor locations, seal fabric to metal with
mastic.
Q. Access Doors:
1. Install ductwork access doors in structural angle frames and provide with sash
locks and hinges arranged for convenient access.
2. Construct doors which occur in insulated ducts with an insulation filler.
3. All access doors shall be appropriately labeled.
R. Flashing and Opening Sealing:

1. Ducts passing through roofs or exterior walls:
a. Provide suitable flashing to prevent rain or air currents from entering the
building as detailed on plans.
b. The flashing shall be minimum No. 24 gauge galvanized steel.
S. Ducts passing through mezzanine walls:

1. Completely seal the penetration with acoustic sealant and fill all gaps between
the ductwork and the wall materials.
2. Sealant must be capable of preventing sound from exiting the mechanical rooms
through these openings.
T. Ducts penetrating the floor:

1. Make the entire penetration watertight by installing appropriate flashing and/or
application of G.E. silicone sealant.
2. The penetration must be capable of maintaining standing water in the mechanical
area without allowing any water through the opening.
U. Duct Leakage:
1. Seal ductwork in accordance with Table 1-2 of the SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
2. Minimal leakage is expected for ductwork constructed to these standards but in
no case shall the total leakage exceed 1% of designed CFM.
3. All joints to be sealed with duct sealant.
V. Fire and Smoke Dampers:

1. Install fire and smoke dampers at locations shown on plans, and where required
by local and state ordinances.
2. Do not compress or stretch SFD, FD frame into duct or opening.
3. Install dampers square and free from racking with blade running horizontally.
4. Handle damper suing sleeve or frame. Do not lift damper using blades actuator,
or jackshaft.
5. Install bracing for multiple section assemblies to support assembly weight and to
hold against system pressure. Install bracing as needed.
90 Percent
6. Provide access doors in attached ductwork for inspection.

7. Stencil each door "Fire Damper Access" per U. L. 555 standard.
8. Install fire dampers in openings utilizing steel angles, sleeves, and other
materials, and practices required to provide an installation equivalent that used
by manufacturer when dampers were tested at UL.
9. Install in accordance with damper manufacturer's published recommendations
and instructions and NFPA Standard 90A.
3.2 BALANCING DAMPERS
A. Volume Control Dampers:

1. Install manually operated volume control dampers in all branch ducts, splits or
taps whether indicated on the drawings or not. Install a minimum of 5’-0” from
grille/diffuser.
2. Provide indicating device with lock to hold damper in position.
B. Cable Operated Dampers:

1. Install a minimum of 5’-0” from grille/diffuser.
2. Install to facilitate smooth blade movement and ensure alignment.
C. Back Draft Dampers:

1. Install back draft dampers as shown on plans.
2. Manufacturer: Nailor Industries Series 1300 or equal.
D. Air Intake Ducts:

1. Insulate all outside air intake ducts.
3.3 DAMPER IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide a securely attached red band and a label reading "Damper Location" at the
location of all concealed manual dampers.
B. All manual dampers which are not readily visible after duct insulation installation shall
be identified in this manner.
3.4 DUCTWORK SUPPORT
A. All ducting must be supported from building structure.
B. Duct straps are not allowed to be screwed to roof decks, support from cross bridging
or supported from bottom chord of joists.
C. Do not support from roof or floor deck joist bridging.
D. Support sizes and spacing shall conform to SMACNA Standards.
END OF SECTION
90 Percent
SECTION 23 33 33
ACCESS DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Access doors and their installation requirements.
A. Division 28 - Fire Alarm System
Appurtenances
E. Section 22 13 18 - Condensate Piping
F. Section 22 16 01 - Natural Gas Piping and Appurtenances
G. Section 22 40 01 - Plumbing Fixtures and Fixture Carriers
H. Section 23 00 00 - Basic Mechanical Requirements
I. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
J. Section 23 09 23 - Energy Management Control System
K. Section 23 31 13 - Metal Ductwork
1.4 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
90 Percent
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acudor
B. Elmdor
C. Mifab
2.2 ACCESS DOORS:
A. Locations requiring access doors:

1. Concealed valves
2. Traps
3. Trap primers
4. Controls
5. Cleanouts
6. Dampers
7. Ducts adjacent to fire doors, fire dampers, and smoke detectors.
8. Equipment above hard ceilings.
9. Other equipment requiring accessibility for operation and maintenance.
B. Type:
1. Hinged flush-type steel framed door with straps and exposed narrow border.
C. Minimum size:
1. 18" x 18" unless otherwise indicated.
2. 24” x 24” for equipment above hard ceilings.
3. Conform to architectural panel pattern for acoustical ceilings.
4. Confirm size with Building Inspector and Engineer.
D. Construction:
1. Hinges: Concealed continuous type.
2. Locking Device: Flush cam type, screw driver operated.
E. Fire Rating:
1. Same or better fire rating than the surrounding area.
F. Access doors located in kitchens, restrooms or areas where water is present shall
be stainless steel.
2.3 FACTORY PAINTING
A. Apply prime coat of rust inhibiting paint, unless located in wet area.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
90 Percent
B. In suspended acoustical ceilings, provide a beaded pin or other approved means for
identification and easy removal where necessary.
C. Access doors shall only be installed in areas/locations that are readily accessible.
D. Doors shall be installed in such a manner that door will open 180 degrees.
END OF SECTION
90 Percent
SECTION 23 34 16
HVAC FANS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Centrifugal fans
B. Axial fans
C. Propeller fans
D. Section 23 37 13 - Diffusers, Registers and Grilles
E. Section 23 38 13 - Commercial Kitchen Hoods
1.4 REFERENCES
A. AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc.
B. UL - Underwriter’s Laboratory
A. UL Listed and Bear Label
B. Tested in accordance with AMCA standards
1.6 SUBMITTALS
HVAC Fans 23 34 16 - 1
90 Percent
B. Submit product data indicating typical catalog data, including arrangements,

dimensions, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication.
C. Provide in table form a schedule similar to drawings with data listing all fans,
information, accessories, etc.
D. Indicate mechanical and electrical service locations and requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acme
B. Cook
C. Greenheck
D. PennBarry
E. Twin City Fans
2.2 GENERAL
A. Provide fan type, arrangement, capacity, size, motor horsepower, and motor voltage
as shown on the drawings.
B. Rate fans according to appropriate Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc.
(AMCA) approved test codes and procedures. Seal to be attached.
C. Supply fans with sound ratings below the maximums permitted by AMCA standards.
D. All fans provided must bear the UL Label.
E. Sound levels shall be as listed or quieter. Fans with excessive noise will be replaced
at Contractor's expense.
F. Fans are to be supplied with engraved aluminum nameplates indicating CFM, static
pressure, manufacturer, serial number, and model number.
2.3 ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUST FANS
A. Type:
1. Roof mounted, direct driven centrifugal exhaust ventilator. Fan shall be spun
aluminum and mounted on vibration isolators.
B. Motors:
1. NEMA design B with a minimum of Class B insulation rated for continuous duty
and furnished at the scheduled voltage.
HVAC Fans 23 34 16 - 2
90 Percent
2. Motor shall be electronically commutated motor rated for continuous duty and
furnished either with internally mounted potentiometer speed controller, or with
leads for connection to 0-10 VDC external controller.
3. Exhaust fan motor to be located outside of the exhaust airstream and enclosed
in a weather-tight compartment.
C. Mounting:
1. Resilient mounts outside the air stream.
D. Cooling:
1. Forced air cooling.
E. Bearing Rating:
1. Heavy duty regreasable ball type in a cast iron pillowblock housing selected for
a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum catalogued operating
speed.
F. Construction:
1. Fan shall be bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion resistant
fasteners.
2. Spun aluminum structural components shall be constructed of minimum 18
gauge marine alloy aluminum, and bolted to a rigid aluminum support structure.
3. Aluminum base shall have continuously welded curb cap corners for maximum
leak protection.
4. Fan wheel shall be backward inclined, constructed of 100% aluminum, and
provided with an aerodynamic aluminum inlet cone.
5. Integral conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap and into the motor
compartment to facilitate wiring connections.
6. Provide 1/2 inch galvanized mesh bird screen over openings
G. Features:
1. Disconnect switch: Factory wire the switch and motor to the junction box
2. Automatic dampers with curb flanges
3. Insulated, prefabricated curb with cant strips and with resilient gasket on top
flange.
4. Minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel or aluminum.
5. Factory installed variable speed controller.
6. Minimum 18 inch curb height.
7. Lifting lugs.
H. Verify roof slope so that fans are installed in a level condition.
I. Coordinate and furnish curbs that are compatible with roof being installed.
2.4 CEILING MOUNTED EXHAUST FANS
A. Type:
1. Centrifugal, direct driven exhaust fans
HVAC Fans 23 34 16 - 3
90 Percent
B. Motors:
1. Motor shall be totally enclosed type with permanently lubricated bearings and
built-in thermal overload protection.
C. Construction:
1. Fan housing shall be minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel and acoustically
insulated.
2. Blower and motor assembly shall be mounted to a minimum 14 gauge reinforcing
channel.
3. Fan wheels shall be twin DWDI centrifugal forward curved type, constructed of
galvanized steel.
4. Integral aluminum backdraft damper.
D. Features:
1. Disconnect switch: Internal wiring box with switch.
2. Blower assembly to be easily removed without disconnecting the ductwork.
3. Factory tested prior to shipment.
4. Powder painted white steel grille.
5. Factory installed variable speed controller.
6. Provide 277 volt to 120 volt transformer.
2.5 KITCHEN EXHAUST FANS
A. Type:
1. Roof mounted, upblast centrifugal exhaust ventilator. Fan shall be spun
aluminum and mounted on vibration isolators.
B. Motor:
1. NEMA design B with a minimum of Class B insulation rated for continuous duty
and furnished at the scheduled voltage.
2. Motor shall be electronically commutated motor rated for continuous duty and
furnished either with internally mounted potentiometer speed controller, or with
leads for connection to 0-10 VDC external controller.
3. Exhaust fan motor to be located outside of the exhaust airstream.
C. Mounting:
1. Resilient mounts.
D. Cooling:
1. Forced air cooling.
E. Bearing Rating:
1. Heavy duty regreasable ball type in a cast iron pillowblock housing selected for
a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum catalogued operating
speed.
F. Construction:
1. Spun aluminum cover and inlet cone. Minimum 16 gauge marine alloy aluminum,
bolted to a rigid aluminum support structure.
HVAC Fans 23 34 16 - 4
90 Percent
2. Aluminum base shall have a one piece inlet spinning and continuously welded
curb cap corner for maximum leak protection.
3. Centrifugal, backward inclined wheel, aluminum construction. Wheel inlet shall
overlap an aerodynamic aluminum inlet cone. Wheel to be non-overloading static
and dynamically balanced.
4. Stainless steel quick release latches to provide access into the motor
compartment without the use of tools.
5. External wiring compartment with integral conduit chase shall be provided into
the motor compartment to facilitate wiring connections.
G. Features:
1. Disconnect switch: Internal wiring box with switch.
2. Blower assembly to be easily removed without disconnecting the ductwork.
3. Factory tested prior to shipment.
4. Vented extension roof curb (minimum 8”).
5. Hinged base.
6. Lifting lugs.
7. Grease trough.
2.6 SUPPLEMENTAL EQUIPMENT
A. Weatherproof motor covers for outdoor installations:

1. Apply the same finish as used on the fan.
B. Belt driven fans:

1. Equip the fan motors with variable pitch sheaves. Select the sheave size for the
approximate midpoint of adjustment and to provide not less than 20 percent
speed variation from full open to full closed.
C. Nonadjustable motor sheaves:

1. Use for motor sizes over 15 horsepower.
D. Factory wired, safety disconnect switch on each unit.
E. Heaters with starters.
F. Internal overload protection circuit.
2.7 PROTECTIVE COATINGS
A. Apply manufacturer's standard prime coat and finish to all fans, motors and
accessories, except on aluminum surfaces or where special coatings are required.
B. Galvanizing:
1. Hot dip coat all surfaces which require galvanizing.
2. Where galvanizing is specified, a zinc coating may be used.
3. After fabrication, apply the zinc coating and air dry the coating to 95 percent pure
zinc.
a. Zinc Coatings:
(1) Amercoat
HVAC Fans 23 34 16 - 5
90 Percent
(2) Diametcoat
(3) Sealube
(4) Zincilate
C. All exhaust fans which will operate in a corrosive environment (Science Labs, etc.)
shall have a factory applied acid resistant coating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans according to the manufacturer's instructions and in the locations shown
on the drawings.
B. All roof mounted fans shall have electrical wiring and conduit internal to roof
curb and fan housing. No external wiring or conduit will be allowed on roof.
C. Verify compliance of “in Situ” vibration readings with AMCA Standard 204-05.
D. All fans shall be air balanced in accordance with Section 23 05 93.
E. Top of level curb to have minimum 11” from finished roof to top of curb.
F. Screw fans to curbs with gasketed screws.
3.2 START-UP
A. Start fans to verify rotation and operation sequence prior to test and balance.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide identification per Section 23 05 53.
END OF SECTION
HVAC Fans 23 34 16 - 6
90 Percent
SECTION 23 37 13
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Grilles
B. Diffusers
C. Registers
D. Storm Rated FEMA Louvers
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ARI Standard 890-94 Rating of Air Diffusers and Air Assembles.
B. ICC 500 - 2014
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Product data for review prior to placement of purchase order:

1. Outlets
2. Grilles
3. Registers
4. Control devices
5. Diffusers
6. Storm Rated FEMA Louvers
Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 23 37 13 - 1

90 Percent
7. Similar equipment
C. Product data shall be submitted for each device specified. Data shall be arranged to
match grille schedule.
D. If a manufacturer other than the one scheduled on the plan is used, the sizes shown
on the plans shall be checked for performance, noise level, face velocity, throw,
pressure drop, etc., before the submittal is made.
E. Selections shall meet the manufacturer's own published data for the above
performance criteria.
F. If grilles other than those scheduled by name are furnished, manufacturer shall be
prepared to demonstrate compliance with noise criteria at Engineer's request and to
Engineer's satisfaction.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate this work with work under Division 26 to insure that intended functions of
lighting and air systems are achieved.
B. Locations of outlets on plans are approximate and shall be coordinated with other
trades to make symmetrical patterns.
C. Locations shall be governed by the established pattern of the lighting fixtures or

architectural reflected ceiling plan.
D. The Contractor shall move any grille, register, or outlet up to four feet in any direction
as directed by the Engineer at no additional cost.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide grilles, registers and diffusers as shown or scheduled on the plans. Conform
to ARI 890-94.
B. All air distribution devices in kitchen and any wet areas such as locker rooms, showers
and restrooms shall be 100% aluminum construction.
C. All air distribution devices for 1-hour structures (walls or ceilings) shall be steel
construction conforming to all codes and standards.
D. Provide storm rated FEMA louvers in all wall and/or roof penetrations of FEMA 361
or FEMA 320 compliant storm shelters or safe rooms.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Metalaire

90 Percent
B. Krueger
C. Titus
D. Nailor
E. Price
F. Greenheck
G. Pottorff
H. United Enertech
2.3 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Throw: Velocity at the end of the throw, in the 5’-0” occupancy zone, will be between
25 to 50 FPM.
B. Noise levels (NC Curve):

1. Not to exceed those scheduled below.
a. Classrooms, Libraries, and Offices - 25 N.C.
b. Cafeterias - 30 N.C.
c. Gymnasiums - 40 N.C.
C. All devices shall be tested per Air Diffusion Council and labeled as such.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Paint exposed devices with factory standard prime coat or factory finish coat.
Architect/ Engineer to determine final color of grille.
2.5 STORM RATED FEMA LOUVERS
A. Construction:
1. Aluminum construction with inverted V-blades
2. 5 ½” frame depth x ¼” frame thickness
B. Mount Configuration:
1. Cantilevered. Flush mount installation will not be allowed.
C. Pressure Drop:
1. Maximum pressure drop of 0.25 in. w.g. across storm rated louver.
2. Louver size and pressure drop to be coordinated with engineer prior to submittal
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION

90 Percent
A. Where called for on the schedules, the grilles, registers and ceiling outlets shall be
provided with deflecting devices and manual dampers. These shall be the standard
product of the manufacturer, subject to review by the Engineer.
B. All ceiling devices shall be furnished to be compatible with the ceilings in which they
are installed.
C. All storm rated FEMA louver(s) dimensions and pressure drops to be coordinated with
engineer.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 23 38 13
COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Type I Kitchen Hoods. These type hoods shall be installed where cooking appliances
produce grease or smoke as a result of the cooking process.
E. Section 23 74 33 - Packaged Dedicated Outdoor Air Units
1.4 REFERENCES
A. AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc.
B. UL - Underwriter’s Laboratory
C. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
A. ETL Listed
B. Complies with UL 710 and ULC S646 Standards
C. Built and tested in compliance with NSF/ ANSI Standard 2.

1.6 SUBMITTALS
Commercial Kitchen Hoods 23 38 13 - 1

90 Percent
C. Submit shop drawings at 1/4" = 1’-0” scale. Shop drawings shall illustrate plan views,
elevation views, appropriate sections, service and maintenance requirements and
duct connection sizes. Plumbing and electrical connection sizes. Detail equipment
assemblies, dimensions, and weights, as well as filter and baffle locations and lighting
fixtures.
E. Indicate performance, exhaust and make up airflows, as well as pressure losses.
F. Indicate fire protection cylinders, piping, actuation devices, and manual control
devices. Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to illustrate fire-suppression
nozzle locations.
G. Indicate location and sizes of all field connections. Include all necessary wiring and
piping diagrams.
H. Shop drawings shall be coordinated with all adjacent work, including, but not limited
to: lighting fixtures, HVAC equipment, plumbing, and fire-suppression equipment and
components.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Hood equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in materials and

workmanship, under normal use and service, for a period of 24 months from the date
of shipment. Equipment shall be installed by a qualified installer and per
manufacturer’s installation requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Captive-Aire Systems
B. Greenheck
C. K-Tech
D. LC Systems, Inc.
E. Any product substitutions must be submitted in writing within a minimum 10 days prior
to bid. All product substitutions must meet and/or exceed all scheduled and specified
data.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Construction shall be type 430 stainless steel. All seams, joints, and penetrations of
the hood enclosure to the lower outermost perimeter that directs and captures grease-

90 Percent
laden vapor and exhaust gases shall have a liquid-tight, continuous external weld in
accordance with NFPA 96.
B. Finish shall be free from tool and die marks and stretch lines, and shall have uniform,
directionally textured polished finish. All exposed surfaces shall conform to ASTM A
480/ A 480M, No. 3 or No.4 polished finish.
C. Elastomeric sealant shall be NSF certified for commercial kitchen hood application.
Sealants, when cured and washed, shall comply with requirements in 21 CFR, for use
in areas that come in contact with food.
D. Gaskets shall be NSF certified for end-use application of resilient rubber, neoprene,
or PVC that is non-toxic, stable, odorless, non-absorbent, and unaffected by exposure
to foods and cleaning compounds as tested according to UL 710.
2.3 GENERAL HOOD FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Welding: Use welding rod of same composition as metal being welded. Make ductile
welds free of mechanical imperfections such as gas holes, pits, or cracks.
1. Welded butt joints: Full penetration welds for full joint length. Joints shall be flat
and continuous with sheet metal. No straps under seams, filling in with solder, or
spot welding will be allowed.
2. Grind exposed welded joints flush with adjoining material and polish to match
adjoining surfaces.
3. Coat concealed stainless steel welded joints with metallic-based paint to prevent
corrosion.
B. Metal butt joints shall comply with SMACNA’s “Kitchen Ventilation Systems & Food
Service Equipment Guidelines.”
C. Where stainless steel is joined to a dissimilar metal, use stainless steel welding
material or fastening devices.
D. Any surface marred by breaks shall be grinded, polished, and finished to appear
uniform with adjoining surfaces.
E. All surfaces and edges shall be free of burrs, fins, and any irregular protrusions.
F. Cap exposed fastener threads, including those inside cabinets, with stainless steel
lock washers and stainless-steel cap nuts.
G. Fabricate pipe slots on equipment with turned-up edges sized to accommodate

service and utility lines and mechanical connections.
H. Fabricate enclosures, including panels, housing, and skirts to conceal service lines,
operating components, and mechanical and electrical devices, including those inside
cabinets.
I. Fabricate equipment edges and backsplashes according to SMACNA’s “Kitchen

Ventilation Systems & Food Service Equipment Guidelines.”

90 Percent
J. Fabricate enclosure panels to ceiling and wall as follows:

1. Fabricate panels on all exposed sides with same material as hood, and extend
from top of hood to ceiling, and from canopy to adjacent wall(s).
2. Wall offset spacer: Minimum of 3-inches.
2.4 TYPE I EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION
A. Hood Configuration: Wall-mounted canopy with Exhaust and Makeup Air.
B. Type I hoods shall be fabricated in accordance with NSF-2, “Food Equipment”. Hoods
shall be listed and labeled according to UL 710.
C. All welded joints exposed to grease shall be continuous welds. All filters/ baffles,
grease extractors, and make up air diffusers shall be easily accessible for cleaning.
D. Exhaust duct collar(s) shall be a minimum 3-inches high with a minimum 1-inch
flange. Duct collars shall be continuously welded to top of hood and at corners.
E. Double wall insulated front to eliminate condensate and increase rigidity.
F. Filters and baffles shall be stainless steel construction and removable.
G. Front baffle shall direct grease laden vapors toward exhaust filter bank and removable
collection cup and pitched trough. Exposed surfaces shall be pitched to drain to
collection cup. Collection cup shall be easily removable for cleaning or replacement.
Filter and baffles shall be tested in accordance with UL 1046, “Grease Filters for
Exhaust Ducts.”
H. Lighting fixtures shall be incandescent fixtures. Incandescent light fixtures and globes
shall be installed and pre-wired to a junction box. All wiring shall be installed in
conduit, exterior to hood cabinet. Number and location of fixtures shall provide a
minimum 70 foot-candles at 30-inches above finished floor.
1. Light switches shall be mounted on front panel of hood canopy.
2. Light fixtures shall be installed with a maximum of 4’-0” spacing on center and
shall allow up to a 100 watt standard light bulb.
I. Hood Controls:
1. Provide on/ off switch for exhaust fan control.
2. Provide on/ off switch for hood lights.
3. Provide with remote mounted, factory wired, stainless steel control panel. Panel
shall be wired to accomplish the following.
a. Exhaust fan control - Hood manufacturer shall provide starter for exhaust
fan. Starter to be interlocked with hood mounted exhaust fan switch. Further,
exhaust fan(s) shall be equipped with automatic controls that will activate the
fan(s) when any appliance that requires such Type I hood is turned on.
Where one or more temperature or radiant energy sensors are used to
activate a Type I hood exhaust fan, the fan shall activate not more than 15
minutes after the first appliance served by that Type I hood has been turned
on.

90 Percent
b. Make-up air control - Hood manufacturer shall provide starter for make-up
air fan/ unit. Interlock make-up air fan with exhaust fan to operate
simultaneously.
c. Interlock exhaust fan with fire-suppression system to operate fan(s) during
fire-suppression agent release. Exhaust fan(s) shall remain in operation until
manually stopped. Include red pilot light to indicate fan operation.
d. In the event that exhaust fan(s) are not working when exhaust fan controls
are activated, a visual or audible alarm shall indicate exhaust fans are not
working.
4. Provide all required contactors and relays as required to operate and control
exhaust fan(s) and interface with fire-suppression system.
2.5 WET CHEMICAL FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
A. MANUFACTURERS’
1. Ansul Incorporated; a Tyco International Ltd. Company
2. Kidde Fire Systems
3. Core Fire Protection
B. The basic system shall consist of a regulated release assembly which includes a
regulated release mechanism and a wet chemical storage tank housed within a single
enclosure. Nozzles, blow off caps, detectors, cartridges, agent, fusible links, and
pulley elbows shall be supplied in separate packages in quantities needed for fire
suppression system arrangements. Additional equipment shall include remote
manual pull station, mechanical and electrical gas valves, pressure switches, and
electrical switches for automatic equipment and gas line shut-off.
C. Wet chemical agent: The extinguishing agent shall be a specifically formulated,

aqueous solution of organic salts with a pH range between 7.8-8.2, designed for flame
knockdown and foam securement of grease related fires.
D. Agent Tank: The agent tank shall be installed in a stainless steel enclosure or wall
bracket. Agent tank shall be constructed of stainless steel. The tank(s) shall have a
working pressure of 110 psi, a test pressure of 330 psi, and a minimum burst pressure
of 600 psi. The tank shall include an adaptor/ tube assembly containing a burst disc
union.
E. Regulated Release Mechanism: The regulated release mechanism shall be spring-

loaded, mechanical/ pneumatic type. The release mechanism shall be capable of
automatic actuation by a fusible link detection system, and remote manual actuation
by a mechanical pull station.
F. Discharge Nozzles: Each discharge nozzle shall be tested and listed with the R-102
system for a specific application. Each nozzle shall have a metal or rubber blow-off
cap to keep the nozzle tip orifice free of cooking grease build-up.
G. Distribution Piping: Distribution piping shall be schedule 40 black iron, chrome-plated,

or stainless steel pipe conforming to ASTM A120, A53, or A106.

90 Percent
H. Pull Station Assembly: The pull station shall be designed to include a built-in guard to
protect the pull handle. The pull station shall also be designed with a pull handle to
allow for three finger operation and shall be red in color for quick visibility.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all hoods and associated lights, piping, ductwork, etc. with clearances and
access for maintenance, cleaning, and service. All clearances to be followed per
manufacturer’s written instructions and requirements.
B. Securely anchor and attach items and accessories to walls, floors, or bases with
stainless steel fasteners.
C. Install hoods to operate free of vibration.
D. Install trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant. All fasteners
to be stainless steel.
E. Install sealant in joints between equipment and adjoining surfaces with continuous
joint backing. Seals to be airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, sanitary joints.
F. Install lamps with maximum recommended wattage in hoods with integral lighting.
G. Install temperature sensors and calibrate to appropriate temperatures.
H. Adjustable switches to be installed and calibrated.
I. Piping installation requirements specified in Division 22 and Division 23 shall be

followed during hood installation.
J. Ductwork requirements specified in section 23 31 13 shall be followed during hood

installation. Flexible ductwork connections are allowed on makeup air supply
ductwork. All exhaust ductwork shall be welded continuously with a liquid tight joint.
K. Install fire-suppression piping for remote mounted suppression systems according to

NFPA 17A.
L. The R-102 fire suppression system shall be designed, installed, inspected,

maintained, and recharged in accordance with manufacturer’s listed instructions.
3.2 START-UP
A. Factory authorized service representative shall be employed to inspect and test

kitchen exhaust hood. Representative shall adjust components, assemblies, and
equipment installations, including connections, as necessary.

90 Percent
B. Test each equipment item for proper operation. Repair or replace equipment that is
defective or operates with excessive noise or vibration.
C. Test and adjust hood controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
D. Test water, drain, gas, and other liquid carrying components for leaks. Repair or
replace leaking components.
E. Perform hood performance tests as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Perform fire-suppression tests as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Prepare and submit start up report to architect/ engineer.
H. Factory authorized service representative(s) shall be employed to train owner’s

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial kitchen hood(s).
Training shall include operation, maintenance, and service of fire suppression system.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 23 43 23
BIPOLAR IONIZATION AIR PURIFICATION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL

A. This section describes the design, performance and installation of a bipolar ionization
air purification system intended for use on the project. Ionization units shall be
supplied to provide between 500 and 1500 negative ions per cubic centimeter in the
areas served.
B. Where the air purification system is intended to reduce outside ventilation air in
accordance with the International Mechanical Code and ASHRAE 62.1, the
manufacturer shall provide calculations to justify such reduction.
D. Section 23 37 13 - Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
1.4 SUBMITTALS

C. Provide in table form a schedule similar to drawings with data listing all units,
information, accessories, etc.
Bipolar Ionization Air Purification System 23 43 23 - 1

90 Percent
A. The air purification system shall be a product of an established manufacturer with a

minimum of 10 outside air reduction installations in successful operation in the USA.
Technologies that do not operate through a gas disassociation process like UV lights,
powered particulate filters, and/or polarized media filters, will not be considered.
B. A qualified representative from the manufacturer shall be available to inspect the

installation of the air purification system to ensure installation in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendation.
C. The air purification system products shall be tested and listed by UL and ETL
according to UL Standard 867 - Electrostatic Air Cleaners. Air purification system
products shall specifically be tested and passed UL 2043 to ensure plenum rating.
D. The operation of bi-polar ionization units shall conform to UL 867 with respect to
ozone generation.
E. The manufacturer must submit Indoor Air Quality calculations to confirm acceptable
indoor conditions at the scheduled air flows in accordance with ASHRAE Standard
62.1. The calculations shall be independently validated to verify accuracy of the IAQ
calculations and conformance with Standard 62.1 by third party testing on a previous
installation.
1.6 RELATED WORK PERTAINING TO OTHER SPECIFICATIONS
A. Electrical wiring
B. Ductwork
1.7 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS
A. UL Standard 867 and Standard 2043
B. National Electric Code NFPA 70
C. ASHRAE Standard 62.1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Plasma Air International
B. Global Plasma Solutions
C. Bioclimatic
D. Phenomenal Air

90 Percent
E. Air Oasis
F. Other qualified manufacturer’s meeting the requirements of this specification may be

submitted for approval 10 business days prior to bid date.
2.2 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Each piece of air handling equipment, so designated on the plans, details, equipment
schedules and/or specifications shall contain a plasma ion generator with bipolar
ionization output as described here within.
B. The Bi-polar Ionization system shall be capable of:

1. Effectively killing microorganisms downstream of the bipolar ionization
equipment (mold, bacteria, virus, etc.).
2. Controlling gas phase contaminants generated from human occupants, building
structure, furnishings and outside air contaminants.
3. Reducing space static charges.
4. Reducing space particle counts.
5. When mounted to the air entering side of a cooling coil, keep the coil free from
pathogen and mold growth.
6. All manufacturers shall provide documentation by an independent accredited
laboratory that proves the product has minimum kill rates for the following
pathogens given the allotted time and in space conditions.
a. MRSA - 99.75% in 30 minutes
b. Influenza Virus (H1N1) - 80.5% in 30 minutes, 86.6% in 60 minutes
c. E. Coli - 99.43 % in 120 minutes
d. Cladosporium Cladosporiodes - 97.7% in 120 minutes
e. Aspergillus Niger - 97.1% in 120 minutes
f. Staphylococcus Aureus - 81.7% in 120 minutes
7. Manufacturers not providing the equivalent space kill rates shall not be
acceptable. All manufacturers requesting prior approval shall provide to the
engineer independent test data from an accredited independent lab confirming
the kill rates and time per the above.
C. The bipolar ionization system shall operate in such a manner that equal amounts of
positive and negative ions are produced. Single pole ion devices shall not be
acceptable.
1. Airflow rates may vary through the full operating range of a VAV system. The
quantity of air exchange shall not be increased due to requirements of the air
purification system.
2. Velocity Profile: The air purification device shall not have a maximum velocity
profile.
D. Humidity: Plasma Generators shall not require preheat protection when the relative
humidity of the entering air exceeds 85%. Relative humidity from 0 - 100%,
condensing, shall not cause damage, deterioration or dangerous conditions to the air
purification system.

90 Percent
2.3 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrode Specifications (Bi-polar Ionization):

1. Each plasma generator with bipolar ionization output shall include the required
number of electrodes and power generators sized to the air handling equipment
capacity. Bipolar ionization tubes manufactured of glass and steel mesh
shall not be acceptable due to replacement requirements, maintenance,
and performance output reduction over time.
2. Electrodes shall be energized when the main unit disconnect is turned on and
the fan is operating.
3. Ionization output from each electrode shall be a minimum of 5 million ions/cc
when tested at 2” from the ion generator.
4. Manufacturer shall demonstrate that no voltage potential exists due to exposed
electrical components in the duct system or plenum. Exposed needles
protruding into the air steam will not be accepted.
B. Air Handler mounted units

1. Where so indicated on the plans and/or schedules, Plasma generators shall be
supplied and installed. Ion generators for air handling units shall be furnished in
a linear or rack mounted configuration so as to minimize the space required for
installation. Ionization "rack" shall be no more than 3" deep in the direction of
airflow.
2. The mechanical contractor shall mount the plasma ionization rack and wire it to
the remote mount power supply panel using only low voltage wiring. Low voltage
wiring shall be defined as 12V. The use of line voltage (120V or 230V) or high
voltage cabling (600V or higher) shall not be acceptable due to safety concerns.
3. The remote mount power supply panel shall be capable of accepting voltage
ratings of 12V DC, 24V AC, 120V AC or 230V AC. The panel shall have an on/off
switch, power indicator LED, and a set of dry contacts which will indicate ionizer
functionality. Dry contacts that indicate power available only shall not be
acceptable.
C. Duct mounted units

1. Where so indicated on the plans and/or schedules, plasma ion generators shall
be supplied and installed by the mechanical contractor. The contractor shall
follow all manufacturer IOM instructions during installation.
2. Ion generators shall be furnished with a factory-equipped gasketed mounting
flange to prevent air leakage. Gasketed flange shall be a minimum of 1 1/8" wide
around the perimeter of the ionizer to insure no leakage occurs.
3. Ion generators shall be field installed in a location that is convenient for visual
inspection, removal, and servicing. They shall include an ion indicator light clearly
visible from below the installed location.
4. Ion generators shall be wired from the 24V AC fan and common terminal of the
control power circuit. Ion generators shall be capable of directly accepting 24V
AC power. The use of loose step down transformers or power converters shall
not be acceptable.
2.4 ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
A. Ion generators shall contain a built-in power supply and operate on 24V AC and shall

90 Percent
connect to the fan and common terminals of the fan coil unit or air handling unit
served. Ion generators requiring a loose 24V, 120V or 230V transformer or power
supply will not be accepted.
B. Wiring, conduit and junction boxes shall be furnished and installed by the electrical
contractor within housing plenums and shall be UL and NEC NFPA 70 approved.
C. All plasma ion generators shall include internal short circuit protection, overload
protection, and automatic fault reset. Overload protection and associated automatic
fault reset shall occur internally to the unit and be performed through circuitry on the
unit's PCB. Manual fuse replacement and manual fault reset of each unit shall not be
accepted.
D. All plasma ion generators shall include an external BMS interface to indicate ion
generator status and alarm. Light emitting diode shall be visible from the ground for
each unit and shall be on any time power is on to the unit and ions are being
generated. Light signaling unit power only shall not be acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Ionization units shall be installed per manufacturer's installation instructions and

requirements.
3.2 ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
A. Assemble ionization units and install in supply ductwork downstream of all coils and
upstream of the first supply tap. Ionization units are not to be installed in return air
ductwork.
B. Electrical contractor shall complete single point power connections.
C. Protect equipment from water and damage before and after installation.
3.3 COMMISSIONING & TRAINING
A. A manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide start-up supervision and

training of owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of all
equipment.
B. Provide 5 copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
C. OPTIONAL ADD FOR HANDHELD ION COUNTER. Provide to the owner a portable
hand held ion counter with a calibrated range of 0 to 20,000 ions/cm3 and an accuracy
of +/- 25% within the specified range. Ion counter shall have automatic zeroing
capability on 10 minute intervals.

90 Percent
3.4 WARRANTY
A. Equipment shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defects in material and

workmanship for a period of twelve months after shipment or eighteen months from
owner acceptance, whichever occurs first. Labor to replace equipment under warranty
shall be provided by the installing contractor
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 23 74 33
PACKAGED DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Rooftop packaged 100% outdoor air and economizer units.
B. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
C. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
D. Section 23 09 23 - Energy Management Control System
E. Section 23 31 13 - Metal Ductwork
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ARI 430 - Standard for Central Station Air Handling Units.
B. ARI 410 - Standard for Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
C. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
D. UL 1995 - Heating and Cooling Equipment
E. ANSI/AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
F. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
G. ANSI/UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
H. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Method for Sound Testing of Fans.
I. AMCA 301 - Method for Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices.
J. ASHRAE 68 - Laboratory Method of Testing In-Duct Sound Power Measurement

Procedure for Fans.
Packaged Dedicated Outdoor Air Handling Units 23 74 33 - 1

90 Percent
K. Ul1995 - Heating and Cooling Equipment
A. Air Handling Units: Product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of

components who issues complete catalog data on product offering.
B. Constant Volume and Variable Air Volume Air Handling Units: Certify air volume,
static pressure, fan speed, brake horsepower and selection procedures in accordance
with ARI 430. If air handling units are not certified in accordance with ARI 430,
contractor shall be responsible for expenses associated with testing of units after
installation to verify performance of fans. Any costs incurred to adjust fans to meet
scheduled capacities shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor.
C. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures in accordance
with ARI 410-91.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit unit performance including: capacity, nominal and operating performance.
C. Submit Mechanical Specifications for unit and accessories describing construction,

components and options.
D. Submit shop drawings indicating overall dimensions as well as installation, operation

and service clearances. Indicate lift points and recommendations and center of
gravity. Indicate unit shipping, installation and operating weights including
dimensions.
E. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted.
F. Submit data on electrical requirements and connection points. Include recommended

wire and fuse sizes or MCA, sequence of operation, safety and start-up instructions.
A. Deliver products to site under provisions the contract documents. Units shall ship fully
assembled up to practical shipping and rigging limitations. Units not shipped fully
assembled shall have tags and airflow arrows on each section to indicate location and
orientation in direction of airflow. Each section shall have lifting lugs to allow for field
rigging and final placement of section.
B. Deliver units to site with fan motors, sheaves, and belts completely assembled and
mounted in units. Mount motors as specified in these contract documents.
C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle

90 Percent
carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. The contractor shall
be responsible for the repair of the units if any damage occurs due to improper storage
and handling. The contractor shall protect the units with tarpaulins, not plastic
covering.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean,
filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
1.9 EXTRA FILTERS
A. Provide two (2) sets of unit filters. One set, minimum, shall be utilized during the
construction phase of the project. During the construction phase of the project the
contractor shall maintain clean filters in the unit. The construction filters shall be
replaced at time of owner occupancy with clean unused filters.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Unit manufacturer shall warrant unit and factory packaged controls for eighteen (18)
months from date of shipments or twelve (12) months from manufacturer supervised
on-site start-up.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Aaon
B. Daikin
C. Carrier
D. Trane
E. Captiveaire
F. Greenheck
2.2 GENERAL
A. Manufacturer must clearly define any exceptions made to Plans and Specifications.
Mechanical Contractor is responsible for expenses that occur due to exceptions
made.
B. Packaged outdoor air ventilation unit shall be complete with Variable Speed Driven
(VSD) fan(s), motors, coils, dampers, access doors and other components/ options
as described and scheduled on drawings.

90 Percent
C. Unit must be specifically designed for outdoor installation.
D. Fabricate draw-thru type air handling units with fan sections.
E. Factory fabricate air handling units of sizes, capacities, and configurations as

scheduled on drawings.
F. The unit shall be able to withstand up to 1.5 times design static pressure, or 8-inch
w.g. whichever is less, with no more than 0.005 inch deflection per inch of panel span.
2.3 UNIT BASE
A. Base shall be welded supporting the entire length and width of the unit. Units shipped
in one piece shall have at a minimum six points of lift. These lift points shall be
designed to accept standard rigging devices.
B. The unit base design shall allow unit to rest on top of roof curb when field installed.
Entire length and width under base shall be sealed in the field with curb gasketing for
weather tight seal.
2.4 CASING
A. All panels shall be double wall construction. Interior and exterior panels shall be
constructed of galvanized steel. Panel insulation system shall provide a minimum R
value of 12. Insulation shall conform to NFPA 90 requirements.
B. Access doors shall be constructed with a double-wall of solid G90 galvanized steel
interior panel. Gasketing around the full perimeter of the access door shall be used to
prevent air and water leakage. Door handle shall not penetrate door casing with
single-handle latch.
C. Perforated interior liner with fiberglass insulation shall be applied to all discharge
plenum and fan sections.
D. External surface of unit casing shall be prepared and factory coated with a minimum
1.5 mil enamel finish or equal. Unit casing exterior with factory coating shall be able
to withstand a salt spray test in accordance with ASTM B117 for a minimum of 672
consecutive hours. Unit casing will be provided with manufacturer's standard color.
E. Unit roof shall be sloped a minimum 0.25 inch per foot either from one side of unit to
other or from center to sides of the unit. Roof assembly shall overhang all walls of
units by 2 inch minimum.
F. For units with outside air requirements, manufacturer shall provide inlet hood with
high performance sine wave moisture eliminator to prevent water carryover into unit
casing from outside air. Hoods shall be sized for 100% outside air capacity.
G. Galvanized steel roof mounting curb with wood nailing strip, and neoprene gasket
shall be supplied by the unit manufacturer. If unit requires external piping cabinet, a
separate curb shall be supplied for support of the external cabinet. The minimum

90 Percent
height of the roof mounting curb shall be EIGHTEEN (18) inches, unless otherwise
specified.
2.5 DRAIN PAN CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide sealed double wall drain pans constructed of G90-U galvanized steel exterior
panels and G90-U galvanized steel interior liner. Encase insulation between exterior
and interior walls. Drain pans shall be sloped in 2 planes; cross break interior pans
and pitch toward drain connections to ensure complete condensate drainage. Units
with cooling coils shall have drain pans under complete cooling coil section. Units with
heating coils shall have a drain pan under complete heating coil segment to ensure
proper drainage during cleaning. Units with cooling and heating coils shall be provided
with an access section between coils that shall also have a sloped drain pan as
described herein. All drain pan connections will be to the side of the unit to enable
proper trapping. Units without 2-way sloped drain pans shall coat drain pans with anti-
microbial treatment.
2.6 FAN SECTIONS
A. For units scheduled with housed fans, provide supply fan section and exhaust fans (if
shown or scheduled on the plans) with forward curved (FC) or airfoil (AF) double
width, double inlet centrifugal fan designed and suitable for class of service indicated
in the unit schedule. Fan shaft to be properly sized and protectively coated with
lubricating oil. Fan shafts shall be solid and properly designed so that fan shaft does
not pass through first critical speed as unit comes up to rated RPM. Fans shall be
statically and dynamically tested as an assembly at the required RPM to meet design
specifications. Key fan wheels to fan shaft to prevent slipping.
B. Provide self-aligning, grease lubricated pillow-block ball bearings selected for L-50
200,000 hour average life per ANSI/AFBMA 9. Extend both grease lubrication fittings
to drive side of unit with plastic tubes and zerk fittings rigidly attached to drive side
bearing support.
C. On units scheduled with plug fans, provide supply fan sections with AF single width,
single inlet centrifugal plug fans designed and suitable for class of service indicated
on unit schedule. Fan shaft to be properly sized and protectively coated width
lubricating oil. Fan shafts shall be solid and properly designed so that fan shaft does
not pass through first critical speed as unit comes up to rated RPM. Fans shall be
statically and dynamically tested as an assembly at the required RPM to meet design
specifications. Key fan wheels to fan shaft to prevent slipping.
D. Equip centrifugal plug fans with self-aligning, grease lubricated pillow-block ball
bearings selected for L-50 400,000 hour average life per ANSI/AFBMA 9. Extend both
grease lubrication fittings to drive side of unit with plastic tubes and zerk fittings rigidly
attached to drive side bearing support.
E. Mount fans on isolation bases. Internally mount motors on same isolation bases and
internally isolate fans and motors with one (1) inch spring isolators. Install flexible
canvas ducts between fan and casings to ensure complete isolation. Flexible canvas
ducts shall comply with NFPA 90A. If no isolators or flexible canvas duct is provided,

90 Percent
then the entire unit shall be externally isolated from the supply duct work and piping
by contractor in order to avoid transmission of noise and vibration through the
ductwork.
F. Fan sections shall have full height, double wall, hinged doors on drive side for
inspection and maintenance of internal components. Construct doors in accordance
with these contract documents.
G. Fan sections with plug fans shall have galvanized expanded metal access door
guards to prevent unauthorized entry into fan sections when access doors are
opened. Design access door guards for removal from outside of unit. On plug fan
sections with vertical down discharge, a safety grate shall cover the entire discharge
opening to prevent service personnel from falling into supply air ductwork.
H. Weigh fan and motor assembly at AHU manufacturer's factory for isolator selection.
Statically and dynamically balance fan section assemblies. Fan section assemblies
include fan wheels, shafts, bearings, drives, belts, isolation bases and isolators. Allow
isolators to free float when performing fan balance. Measure vibration at each fan
shaft bearing in horizontal, vertical and axial directions. Balance at design RPM as
scheduled on drawings.
I. For fan sections controlled by variable frequency drives, balance the fan assembly at
speeds between 25% and 100% of design RPM.
2.7 MOTORS AND DRIVES
A. Factory install all motors on slide base to permit adjustment of belt tension.
B. Fan Motors shall be heavy duty, HIGH EFFICIENCY (minimum 92% at full load) open
drip-proof, operable at the scheduled electrical requirements.
C. V-Belt Drive shall be fixed pitch rated at 1.2 times the motor nameplate for all fans
controlled with a variable frequency drive. All fans that are constant volume, including
exhaust fans, shall be provided with variable pitch drives rated at 1.2 times the motor
nameplate HP.
2.8 COILS SECTION
A. Coils shall be manufactured by the same company as the supplier of the air handling
unit. Install coils such that headers and return bends are enclosed by unit casings.
B. All coils shall have capacity and pressure drop performance certified in accordance
with AHRI Standard 410.
C. Maximum face velocity across coils shall be 490 fpm.
D. Coils shall be manufactured by the same company as the supplier of the air handling
unit. Install coils such that headers and return bends are fully enclosed by unit
casings.

90 Percent
E. Coils shall have aluminum fins and seamless copper tubes. Fins shall have collars
drawn, belled, and firmly bonded to tubes by mechanical expansion of tubes. Do not
use soldering or tinning in bonding process.
F. Construct coil casings of stainless steel with formed end supports and top and bottom
channels.
G. Coils will be removable from the side of the unit via removable air handling unit panel.
No more than one panel must be removed in order to remove coil.
H. DX Coils:
1. Clearly label suction and discharge headers on outside of unit.
2. Coils shall be proof tested to 450 psig and leak tested under water to 300 psig
air pressure.
3. After testing, the inside of the coils shall be dried, all connections shall be sealed,
and the coil shall be shipped with a charge of dry nitrogen.
4. Suction headers shall be constructed of copper tubing with connections
penetrating unit casing to permit sweat connections to refrigerant lines.
5. Construct tubes of 1/2 inch O.D. minimum 0.016 inch thick copper and construct
fins of aluminum.
6. If two or more coils are stacked in unit, install intermediate drain channels
between coils to drain condensate to main drain pans without flooding lower coils
or passing condensate through airstream.
7. Unit shall be provided with modulating hot gas reheat.
2.9 GAS HEAT SECTION
A. The gas heat section construction shall match the rest of the air handling unit and be
an integral part of the air handling unit.
B. Indirect fired gas heaters shall be completely factory assembled, piped, and
operationally fire tested at the factory prior to shipment.
C. Heat exchanger primary drum and secondary tubes shall be constructed of 14 gauge,
409 stainless steel. Industrial burner shall be UL listed, force draft, and fully
modulating.
D. The entire gas heating section shall bear a UL label for Commercial-Industrial Gas
Heating Equipment (ANSI/ UL Standard 795) and Industrial Gas-Fired Package
Furnaces (CGA Standard 3.2-1976).
2.10 EXTERNAL PIPING ENCLOSURE
A. Piping enclosure shall be supplied by the manufacturer factory assembled and shall
be of the same construction as the main unit casing. Piping cabinet shall be external
to the unit and be shipped separate for field installation in order to facilitate piping of
the unit coils. Piping cabinet to cover all coils and access sections located between
the coils. All piping enclosures shall have access doors.

90 Percent
2.11 FILTERS
A. Provide factory-fabricated filter section of the same construction and finish as unit
casings. Filter sections shall have filter guides and full height, double-wall, hinged
doors for filter removal. Construct doors in accordance with all other access doors
described herein. Filter sections shall flange to other unit components. Provide filter
blockoffs as required to prevent air bypass around filters.
B. Provide two (2) sets of unit filters. One set, minimum, shall be utilized during the
construction phase of the project. During the construction phase of the project the
contractor shall maintain clean filters in the unit. The construction filters shall be
replaced at time of owner occupancy with clean unused filters.
2.12 DAMPERS AND MIXING BOXES
A. Provide dampers to modulate the volume of outside air and relief air, if applicable.
Damper blades shall be galvanized steel, housed in a galvanized steel frame and
mechanically fastened to an axle rod rotating on bearings. Blade seals are required
to assure tight closure. All dampers shall be rated for a maximum leakage rate of less
than 1 percent of nominal CFM at one-inch w.g. All dampers shall be rated for the full
airflow volume of the unit. Mixing boxes shall be included to properly mix the various
air streams.
2.13 ACCESS SECTIONS
A. Access for inspection and cleaning of the unit drain pan, coils and fan section shall
be provided. The minimum depth of access section shall be FIFTEEN (15) inches
between the coils. Procedures for proper access, inspection and cleaning of the unit
shall be included in the maintenance manual. Access sections shall have double wall,
hinged doors on one side of sections. The access section shall be placed between
cooling and heating coils.
2.14 DISCHARGE PLENUM SECTIONS
A. All units unless otherwise noted, shall be provided with discharge plenum sections
located downstream of the fan section. The discharge plenum shall be constructed
the same as the unit casing. The unit interior shall be constructed with a perforated
liner over the insulation. The fan outlet shall be on the bottom of the section. The
contractor shall insert bell mouth outlets into the openings for discharge into the duct
system. Most units will have multiple openings required.
B. An access door shall be provided on the plenum section constructed the same as the
other access doors. The access door shall be capable of withstanding the operating
pressure of the fan without deflection. The door shall be labeled “High Pressure
Section - FAN MUST BE OFF BEFORE OPENING”. This label shall be permanently
affixed to the unit and be written in both English and Spanish.
PART 3 EXECUTION

90 Percent
3.1 INSTALLATION AND OPERATION
A. Install per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Start up to be provided by unit manufacturer.
C. Install temporary roll filter media on all return air ducts prior to start-up. Replace as
necessary during construction.
D. Inspect unit for any damage and notify the vendor of same. Repair or replace and
damaged components.
E. Cover all units with tarpaulins prior to operation to protect from weather and jobsite
damage.
F. Check and maintain required clearances required by the local and National Electric
Codes.
G. Verify the height of roof curb for proper trapping of the condensate drain.
H. Verify power requirements and voltage.
I. Lifting lugs shall be provided where required for proper lifting.
J. Pipe the coils per the detail diagrams in the contract documents.
K. Connect electrical power wiring to the motor and the electric heater (as required).
Connect electrical power wiring to the electric heater. Two separate power supplies
are required for each fan motor.
L. Connect all control wiring and control components.
M. Install filters prior to operation of the system.
N. Flush all chilled water lines of debris and cutting oils. Properly clean the piping with
surfactant prior to use.
O. Release the shipping bolts from the fan isolation base and assure the fan is free
floating.
P. Commission the unit and assure that all control algorithms operate properly.
Q. Coordinate with Test and Balance Contractor.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 23 81 19
PACKAGED HVAC UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Rooftop mounted or ground mounted packaged HVAC units.
A. Section 22 13 18 - Condensate Piping
B. Section 22 16 01 - Natural Gas Piping and Appurtenances
D. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
E. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
F. Section 23 09 23 - Energy Management Control System
G. Section 23 31 13 - Metal Ductwork
1.4 REFERENCES
Underwriters Laboratory UL Listed

NFPA 90 A & B Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems and
Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
ANSI/ASHRAE 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
AHRI 360 Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment
testing and rating standard.
AHRI 340 Commercial and Industrial Unitary Heat pump Equipment.
ANSI/ASHRAE 37 Testing Unitary Air Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment.
ANSI/ASHRAE/IES 90.1A Energy Conservation in New Building Design Standard.
ANSI/UL 465 Central Cooling Air Conditioners Standard for safety
requirements.
AHRI 210/240 Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment and Air-Source Heat Pump
Equipment.
AHRI 270 Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
ANSI/NFPA 70-1990 National Electric Code (NEC).
Packaged HVAC Units 23 81 19 - 1

90 Percent
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
2. Submit product data indicating typical catalog of information including
arrangements.
materials used in fabrication. List all accessories available for units and clearly
mark accessories being provided. List all field-installed items.
4. Provide in table form a schedule similar to drawings with data listing all
information, capacities, fan data, voltages, accessories, etc.
5. Indicate mechanical and electrical service locations and requirements.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit 1/4" per foot shop drawing(s) showing all piping, ductwork, and equipment
shown by drawings and specifications. Submit drawings on all mechanical rooms.
The drawings shall be coordinated with structural, and electrical, and fire sprinkler
drawings.
C. Equipment Start-up Report

1. Submit an equipment start up report as provided by the equipment manufacturer.
Start- up report shall include the following, but not limited to: verification of system
air flow, proper operation of all motors and fans, proper tensioning of belts and
pulleys, proper operation of on-board microprocessor control system, proper
control of economizer damper, proper compressor operation, and proper
operation of cooling, heating, and dehumidification modes.
A. UL listed and must display UL label on all units.
B. All units must comply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1 and the applicable International
Energy Conservation Code.
C. Unit performance data must be rated in accordance with AHRI Standard 210/240, and
must display the AHRI symbol on all standard units.
D. Conform to applicable ANSI/NFPA 70 code for internal wiring of factory wired

equipment.
E. AGA, with label.
F. Tested in accordance with DOE.
G. The air-conditioning equipment manufacturer shall be solely responsible for their

equipment that does not comply with the performance of their published catalogues
and specifications.

90 Percent
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data.
B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation

instructions, maintenance and repair data, including filter replacement and unit
lubrication.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Complete 1-year parts and labor warranty on all equipment
B. Additional 4-year warranty provided for the compressors.
C. Additional 14-year warranty provided for heat exchangers.
1.9 ADD ALTERNATE BID
A. Manufacturer to provide 10 year parts and labor warranty on all equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
A. All units are to comply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1.
B. All units are to be tested in accordance with AHRI 360, AHRI 340, AHRI 210/240 and
Bear Label.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS: GAS/ELECTRIC
A. 1½ to 2 ½ tons - 13.0 SEER:

1. Aaon – Base Bid
2. Lennox - Alternate
3. Trane - Alternate
B. 3 to 5 tons - 17.0 SEER:

4. Units to have two stage compressor and a minimum two speed fan.
5. Units to have bipolar ionization.
C. 6 ton and up - High Efficiency EER:

4. Units to have bipolar ionization.

90 Percent
5. All units 7½ ton and larger are to have two compressors with dual refrigeration
circuits.
6. Greater than 65,000 BTU/hr and less than 135,000 BTU/hr - Minimum 11.2 EER
7. Greater than 135,000 BTU/hr - Minimum 11.0 EER
2.3 MANUFACTURERS: ELECTRIC/ELECTRIC
A. 1½ to 2 ½ tons - 13.0 SEER:

B. 3 to 5 tons - 17.0 SEER:

2.4 PACKAGED HEATING/COOLING UNITS
A. Minimum Cooling Efficiencies:

1. EER ratings by AHRI Standard 210/ 240 and AHRI Standard 340/360:
a. All units to comply with ASHRAE 90.1.
b. All units to comply with International Energy Conservation Code 2018.
B. Gas Furnace Design:

1. Heating capacities:
a. Equal to or greater than those shown on plans. Bear AGA label.
2. Ignition:
a. Electronic pilot ignition
b. Standing pilot not allowed
3. Efficiency:
a. Minimum 80% A.F.U.E. rating.
C. Construction:
1. Design for roof curb mounting with "downshot" duct connection. Full perimeter
curb only.
2. Units which require the installation of a separate plenum (such as side discharge
units) are not acceptable.
3. Coils: copper tubes, aluminum fins, factory test 450 psig, metal hail guards for all
condenser coils. Aluminum microchannel condenser coils are acceptable.
a. Features:
(1) Easy access to filters, 2" filter rack
(2) Factory installed 1" filters
(3) Low voltage terminal board
(4) All blowers shall deliver a minimum of 450 cfm/ton at .5" E.S.P.
(5) Filter racks to be provided at each unit.
(6) High efficiency motors.

90 Percent
4. Class I motorized outside air dampers. All outside air dampers to be low leak
dampers. Dampers shall have an air leakage rate not greater than 4 CFM/ sqft.
and shall be labeled by an approved agency when tested in accordance with
AMCA 500D.
5. Stainless steel heat exchanger.
6. Single point electrical power entry through bottom of unit inside curb perimeter.
7. Cabinet: Galvanized Steel, enamel paint, all sides & edges.
8. Hinged service doors.
9. Top of cabinet to be one piece, level, no step downs.
10. Unit to be completely wired, piped, etc.
11. Designated location to install electrical disconnect
12. Fused disconnect provided by electrical contractor. Do not install fused
disconnect on any access panels or over unit information tag(s).
13. All sides shall be enclosed. All access panels shall be metal.
14. R-410A refrigerant.
15. Comply with ASHRAE 62.
16. Comply with NFPA 90A.
17. Condensate drain pan with float switch.
18. All unit components to be U.L. listed.
D. Accessories:
1. Digital Scroll Compressor Unit:
a. All rooftop units with digital scroll compressors are to have a variable speed
drive fan. The digital scroll compressor will stage on and modulate to control
to supply air temperature setpoint. Supply fan shall modulate to maintain
space temperature, while digital scroll compressor shall engage/ disengage
to maintain supply air temperature setpoint.
2. Unit without CO2 Sensor:
a. RTU motorized outside dampers to open to maximum position when fan is
ON, and spring return closed when fan is OFF. All outside air to be filtered.
3. Unit with Economizer Module and Fault Detection and Diagnostics.
a. All cooling only units are to be provided with a dry bulb economizer. When
outdoor dry bulb conditions are met, and the space temperature sensor is
calling for cooling, the economizer mode of the unit shall provide free cooling
to the space.
b. All units 3 tons and above are to be provided with a dry bulb economizer.
When outdoor dry bulb conditions are met, and the temperature sensor is
calling for cooling, the economizer shall provide free cooling to the space.
The
dehumidification cycle and heating modes shall be disabled during

economizer mode.
c. All units 10 tons and above are to be provided with a dry bulb economizer
and a power exhaust fan. The powered exhaust fan shall only be enabled
during economizer mode.
d. All economizers must be equipped with fault detection and diagnostics. The
unit shall be capable of reporting faults to a fault management application
system or displayed on the zones thermostat. The fault detection system
shall be capable of detecting the following faults:
(1) Air temperature sensor failure.

90 Percent
(2) Not economizing when the unit should be economizing.

(3) Economizing when the unit should not be economizing.
(4) Dampers not modulating.
(5) Excess outdoor air.
E. Other
1. Furnish crankcase heaters, timed off control, freeze thermostats, low ambient to
45°F, high pressure switch and expansion valves on all units.
2. Provide extra set of filters MERV 8, pleated 2” thick.
3. List all accessories available for units and identify which accessories are being
provided in submittals.
F. See Specification Section 23 05 32 for roof curb requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor is not to open refrigeration system to install accessories.
B. Install in accordance with all manufacturer's instructions and requirements.
C. Install all units so that they are LEVEL on curbs.
3.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Unit Without CO2 Sensor:

1. Furnish motorized outside air dampers to allow scheduled amount of outside air
on all units. Dampers to open to maximum position when fan is on, spring close
when fan is off. All outside air to be filtered.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
3.4 EQUIPMENT START UP
A. Follow all manufacturers’ directions.
B. Equipment manufacturer to provide start-up.
C. Equipment manufacturer/supplier to provide equipment performance checkout with

contractor and provide report to Engineer.
D. Make wiring changes as required to control transformer to accommodate job voltage.
E. Provide 1” roll filter media on each return air opening during construction if blower is
operational. Replace as required.

90 Percent
F. Start-up Data and Report:

1. Follow all manufacturers’ directions and requirements.
G. Measure:
1. Outside air temperature, entering and leaving conditions of evaporators and
condensers, compressor amps, indoor blower amps, gas pressure, pressure
drop across evaporator coil.
2. Operate all units in heating and cooling modes with make-up air units operating.
3. Provide report with final request for payment.
4. Install new, clean MERV 8 - 2” thick filters prior to test and balance.
H. Test and Balance:

1. Coordinate with Test and Balance Contractor after units are started.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 23 81 26
SPLIT SYSTEM HVAC UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Split system HVAC units.
A. Section 22 13 18 - Condensate Piping
B. Section 22 16 01 - Natural Gas Piping and Appurtenances
D. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
E. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
F. Section 23 09 23 - Energy Management Control System
G. Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping
H. Section 23 31 13 - Metal Ductwork
1.4 REFERENCES

AHRI 210/240 Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air Source Heat Pump Equipment
AHRI 270 Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment
ANSI/ASHRAE 15 Safety Code of Mechanical Refrigeration
ASHRAE90.01-2001 Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low Rise Residential
Buildings
ASHRAE 62-2001 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
D.O.E. Department of Energy
IECC International Energy Conservation Code
NFPA 70 N.E.C. National Electrical Code
UL Underwriters Laboratory
Split System HVAC Units 23 81 26 - 1

90 Percent
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
B. Submittals shall include:

1. Unit model number
2. Refrigerant type
3. Sound rating in accordance with AHRI 270
4. Cooling efficiency in accordance with AHRI Standard 210
5. All accessories
C. Submit product data indicating typical catalog of information including arrangements.
D. Submit product data sheets indicating dimensions, general assembly, and materials
used in fabrication.
E. Provide in table form a schedule similar to drawings with data listing all unit
information, data, accessories, etc.
F. Indicate mechanical and electrical service locations and requirements.
G. Submit letter from air conditioning manufacturer stating refrigerant line design has
been reviewed.
H. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
I. Shop Drawings: (adjust as required)

1. Submit 1/4" per foot shop drawing(s) showing all piping, ductwork, and equipment
shown by drawings and specifications. Submit drawings on all mechanical rooms.
The drawings shall be coordinated with structural, and electrical, and fire sprinkler
drawings.
A. UL listed and must display UL label on all units.
B. All units must comply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1 and the applicable International
Energy Conservation Code.
C. Unit performance data must be rated in accordance with AHRI Standard 210/240, and
must display the AHRI symbol on all standard units.
D. Conform to applicable ANSI/NFPA 70 code for internal wiring of factory wired

equipment.
E. Air conditioning manufacturer to visit site and inspect installation of units and
refrigerant lines, and provide letter stating installation conforms to installation
instructions.

90 Percent
F. Tested in accordance with the Department of Energy.
G. The air conditioning equipment manufacturer shall be solely responsible for their
equipment that does not comply with the performance of their published catalogues
and specifications.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data.

1. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation
instructions, maintenance and repair data, including filter replacement and unit
lubrication.
B. Air conditioning manufacturer to visit site and inspect installation of units and
refrigerant lines, and provide letter stating installation conforms to installation
instructions.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Complete 1 year warranty on all equipment.
B. Additional 4 year warranty provided for the compressors and heat exchangers.
C. Additional 9-year warranty provided for galvanized heat exchangers.
D. Additional 14-year warranty provided for stainless steel heat exchangers.
E. The warranted compressor assembly consists of the starter, rotor, eccentric shaft,
eccentric rods, pistons, wrist pins, suction valves, discharge valves, unloading
mechanisms, oil pump, and the housing in which these parts are enclosed.
F. The warranty shall indicate model, serial number of the unit and commencing date.
The commencing date of the warranty shall be after the building has been accepted
for occupancy.
1.9 ADD ALTERNATE BID
A. Manufacturer to provide 10 year parts and labor warranty on all equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS: HEAT PUMP
A. 1½ to 2 ½ tons - 13.0 SEER:

1. Lennox
2. Trane
3. JCI

90 Percent
B. 3 to 5 tons – 15.75 SEER or higher.

1. Lennox
2. Trane
3. JCI
C. 6 tons and up - High Efficiency EER:

1. Lennox
2. Trane
3. JCI
4. All units 7½ ton and larger are to have two compressors with dual refrigeration
circuits.
5. Greater than 65,000 BTU/hr and less than 135,000 BTU/hr - Minimum 11.0 EER
6. Greater than 135,000 BTU/hr - Minimum 10.6 EER
2.2 SPLIT SYSTEM HEATING/ COOLING UNITS
A. Minimum Cooling Efficiencies:

1. EER ratings by AHRI Standard 210/ 240 and AHRI Standard 340/360:
a. All units to comply with ASHRAE 90.1.
b. All units to comply with International Energy Conservation Code 2018.
B. Electric Furnaces/Air Handlers:

1. Heating capacities:
a. As scheduled on plans at rated voltage.
2. Three-phase electrical power:
a. Impose an equal electrical load on all phases of heater.
b. Electrical resistance elements which are not balanced over all three phases
are not acceptable.
C. Heat Pump Units

1. Features:
a. Crankcase heaters
b. Timed off control
c. Low Ambient cooling to 45°F
d. Hi/Low pressure switches
e. Over current protection
f. Filter Dryer
g. Provide hail guards on all condensing units on the roof
h. Factory installed defrost control to operate on demand
i. Provide any reference specialties that manufacturer requires
j. Refrigerant R-410A
D. Condensing Units:
1. Features:
a. Crankcase heaters
b. Timed off control
c. Low Ambient cooling to 45°F
d. Hi/Low pressure switches
e. Over current protection

90 Percent
f. Filter Dryer
g. Provide Hail Guards on all Condensing Units
h. Provide any reference specialties that manufacturer requires
i. Refrigerant 410-A
E. All Air Handlers:

1. Features:
a. 2 inch filter racks to be provided at each air handler.
b. Easy access to filters
c. Provide extra set of filters, Farr 3030 pleated 2” thick. MERV ≥ 6.0.
d. Low voltage terminal strip
e. All blowers shall deliver a minimum of 450 cfm/ton at .5" E.S.P.
f. Furnish and install auxiliary drain pans below each air handler. Provide float
switches for all auxiliary drain pans.
2. Class I motorized outside air dampers. All outside air dampers to be low leak
dampers. Dampers shall have an air leakage rate not greater than 4 CFM/ sqft.
and shall be labeled by an approved agency when tested in accordance with
AMCA 500D.
F. Accessories:
1. 2-Stage Compressor Unit:
a. All split system units with two stage compressors are to have a minimum of
two fan speeds. In first stage cooling, the compressor is to be in first stage,
and the fan is to be set to low speed. In second stage cooling, the
compressor is to be in second stage, and the fan is to be set to high speed.
Set differential temperature between first stage cooling and second stage
cooling at 2°F (adj.).
2. Unit without CO2 Sensor:
a. RTU motorized outside dampers to open to maximum position when fan is
ON, and spring return closed when fan is OFF. All outside air to be filtered.
3. Unit with Economizer Mode and Fault Detection and Diagnostics.
a. All cooling only units are to be provided with a dry bulb economizer. When
outdoor dry bulb conditions are met, and the space temperature sensor is
calling for cooling, the economizer mode of the unit shall provide free cooling
to the space.
b. All units 3 tons and above are to be provided with a dry bulb economizer.
When outdoor dry bulb conditions are met, and the temperature sensor is
calling for cooling, the economizer shall provide free cooling to the space.
The dehumidification cycle and heating modes shall be disabled during
economizer mode.
c. All units 10 tons and above are to be provided with a dry bulb economizer
and a power exhaust fan. The powered exhaust fan shall only be enabled
during economizer mode.
d. All economizers must be equipped with fault detection and diagnostics. The
unit shall be capable of reporting faults to a fault management application
system or displayed on the zones thermostat. The fault detection system
shall be capable of detecting the following faults:
(1) Air temperature sensor failure.
(2) Not economizing when the unit should be economizing.
(3) Economizing when the unit should not be economizing.

90 Percent
(4) Dampers not modulating.

(5) Excess outdoor air.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with the plans, manufacturer's instructions and approved shop
drawings.
B. Contractor to provide and install thermostat wire from air handler to condensing units.
C. Contractor to provide and install flexible watertight conduit for wiring.
D. Coordinate with plumbing contractor on all condensate piping.
E. Install roll type filter media over all return air openings during construction if unit is
operated. Replace as required.
F. Accessories:
1. Unit Without CO2 Sensor:
a. Furnish motorized outside air dampers to allow scheduled amount of outside
air on all units. Dampers to open to maximum position when fan is on, spring
close when fan is off. All outside air to be filtered.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
3.3 EQUIPMENT START UP
A. Equipment manufacturer to provide start-up.
B. Install and make hook-up to float switches.
C. Measure:
1. Outside air temperature, entering and leaving conditions of evaporators and
condensers, compressor amps, indoor blower amps, gas pressure, pressure
drop across evaporator coil.
2. Operate all units in heating and cooling modes with outside air in operation.
3. Provide report with final request for payment.
4. Install new, clean filters prior to test and balance.
5. Provide connection to refrigeration piping system and evaporators.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 23 82 39
ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Electric unit heaters.
B. Section 23 09 23 - Energy Management Control System
1.4 REFERENCES
A. UL - Underwriters Laboratories and Bear Label
B. NEC - National Electric Code
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit product data with ratings, capacities, electrical connections, etc.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Berko
B. Indeeco
C. Markel
D. Qmark
E. Redd-i
Electric Unit Heaters 23 82 39 - 1

90 Percent
F. Trane
2.2 GENERAL
A. Provide electric unit heater with capacity, horsepower, and motor voltage as shown
on schedule.
2.3 FEATURES
A. Draw through design.
B. Fan and limit safety controls.
C. Supply voltage as shown on drawings.
D. 24 Volt transformer and terminal block.
E. All elements 80/20 nichrome wire and copper clad steel sheath.
F. Automatic reset thermal overloads - instantaneous de-energizing.
G. Fan guard.
H. Mounting brackets.
I. Horizontal directional louvers.
J. Threaded suspension couplings (2, 1" ISP).
K. Baked enamel finish. Cabinet 18 ga. baked enamel finish.
L. Manual summer winter switch on thermostat base with relay.
M. Units to bear UL listing and meet NEC requirements.
2.4 MOTORS
A. Totally enclosed, designed for continuous duty, built-in overload protection.
B. 25 kW and larger to have 2-speed motors.
C. Heaters that draw 48 amps or greater shall be provided with factory installed,
subdivided and fused circuits.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install per manufacturer's instructions and locations shown on plans.

90 Percent
B. Install for service access to any electrical control panel, etc.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Per Section 23 05 53.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 26 00 00
ELECTRICAL
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Bidding requirements, contract forms, conditions of the contract, Division 1 - General

Requirements apply to work of this division.
A. Furnishing of all materials, equipment, tools, scaffolding, labor and transportation

required for the complete installation of the electrical systems as shown on the
drawings and as specified herein.
C. It is the intent of these specifications to provide complete installations even though

each and every item necessary is not specifically mentioned or shown. In general, the
work specified in this section shall consist of, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Systems of raceways, conductors, cables, boxes, receptacles, wiring devices,
and cover plates.
2. Relays, wiring, devices, contactors, conduit and other required equipment for all
systems and details shown on the electrical drawings.
3. Electrical identification.
4. Surge Protective Devices (SPDs)
5. Utility services, utility requirements, including conduit and coordination.
6. Switchgear including switchboards and panelboards.
7. Secondary electrical service and distribution system including wiring.
8. Lighting fixtures, lamps and ballasts.
9. Coordination and final connection to all line voltage systems or equipment
provided under other divisions.
10. Testing of wire and cable installation.
11. Submittals and shop drawings.
Electrical 26 00 00 - 1
90 Percent
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Control wiring of HVAC and related equipment as specified in other sections.
B. Motor starters required on HVAC and related equipment as specified in other divisions
and sections.
1.4 CODES, STANDARDS AND THEIR ABBREVIATIONS
A. Perform all Division 26 work in strict accordance with the requirements and
recommendations stated in the codes and standards except when requirements are
modified by the contract documents.
B. In addition to the requirements outlined in other sections of the specifications the

following standards are imposed as applicable to the work in each instance:
1. NECA standards for installation.
2. NFPA No. 70, National Electric Code.
3. Local Codes and Ordinances.
4. COG Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.
5. Title 25, Health Services, Part 2, Texas Department of Health, Chapter 145, Long
Term Care Subchapter Q.
6. OSHA Standard 2207 – Construction Industry Standard
7. OSHA 29 CFR 1926 - Regulation of Excavation
C. Where local codes or practices exceed or conflict with the NEC, it shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to perform the work in accordance with the local code
prevailing and local interpretations thereof. Any such additional work shall be
performed at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Materials and components shall be UL listed and approved for the purpose intended.
E. The Contractor shall obtain all permits required to commence work and, upon
completion of the Work, obtain and deliver to the Owner's Representative a Certificate
of Inspection and Approval from the State Board of Fire Underwriters, the City of
Flower Mound, Texas and other authority having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall pay
required permit fees.
1.5 LIST OF ASSOCIATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. The following abbreviations are applicable for this entire division.

1. ANSI - American National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway; New York, NY
10018.
2. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street;
Philadelphia, PA 19103.
3. CBM - Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association, 2116 Keith Building;
Cleveland, Ohio 44115.
4. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, 345 East 47th Street;
New York, NY 10017.
90 Percent
5. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, P.O. Box P; South Yarmouth, MA

02664.
6. NEC - National Electrical Code; NFPA No. 70.
7. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association, Inc., 7315 Wisconsin Ave.;
Washington, DC 20014.
8. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 155 East 44th Street;
New York, NY 10017.
9. NESC - National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI 2.
10. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association, 60 Batterymarch Street; Boston, MA
02110.
11. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration, US Department of
Labor; Washington, DC 20402.
12. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 333 Pfigsten Road; Northbrook, IL 60062.
B. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed to permit work not conforming
to these codes. When two or more codes or standards are applicable to the same
work, then the stricter code or standard shall govern.
C. The date of the code or standard is that in effect on the date of issue of the contract
documents except when a particular publication date is specified.
D. This Contractor shall comply with all State, Federal, NFPA, local codes and
ordinances that may alter any part of the plans or specifications. This Contractor shall
bear all costs for correcting any deficiencies due to non-compliance.
E. Where local codes and ordinances are not in writing or on record but a local
precedence has been set, the Owner shall pay for any additional resulting cost.
1.6 DEFINITIONS
A. Approval: It is understood that approval must be obtained from the Architect in writing
before proceeding with the proposed work. Approval by the Architect of any changes,
submitted by the Contractor, will be considered as general only to aid the Contractor
in expediting his work.
B. Directed: Terms such as directed, requested, authorized, selected, approved,

required, and permitted mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect,
and similar phrases.
C. Furnish: The term furnish means to equip with what is needed, supply and deliver to
the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar
operations.
D. Install: The term install describes operations at the Project site including setting in
position, connecting on adjusting for use, the actual unloading, unpacking, assembly,
erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
90 Percent
E. Provide: Defined as requiring the furnishing, supplying, to make available, and

installation of the item or facility indicated, complete in all respects and ready for
operation unless otherwise specifically noted.
F. Indicated: The term indicated refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules

on the Drawings, or other Paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar
requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as shown, noted, scheduled,
and specified are used to help the reader locate the reference. There is no limitation
on location.
1.7 ABBREVIATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
A Amperes
ALT Alternate
AFF Above finish floor
AFG Above finished grade
AWG American wire gauge
ATS Automatic transfer switch
CLG Ceiling
CKT Circuit
CCTV Closed circuit television
DFA Down from above
DISC Disconnect
EWC Electric water cooler
EXIST Existing
FAP Fire alarm plan
FACP Fire alarm control panel
FAGA Fire alarm graphic annunciator
FARA Fire alarm remote annunciator
FPC Fire protection contractor
GRN Ground
GFCI Ground-fault circuit interrupters
GFP Ground-fault protection
HP Horsepower
HPS High pressure sodium
KW Kilowatts
KES Kitchen equipment supplier
MTS Manual transfer switch
MH Metal Halide
MCC Motor control center
NC Normally closed
NO Normally open
NTS Not to scale
NIC Not in contract
PNL Panel
SFD Smoke/Fire Damper
SU Stub up above finish floor
SWBD Switchboard
TV Television
TX Transformer
90 Percent
TYP Typical
1.8 NEMA CLASSIFICATIONS
A. For complete definitions and listing see NEMA Standards.

Type 1 General Purpose, Indoor.
Type 2 Drip-proof, Non corrosive, Indoor.
Type 3R Rain proof, Outdoor.
Type 4 Watertight and dust tight, Non corrosive. Indoor and outdoor.
Type 4X Watertight and dust tight, Corrosion resistant. Indoor and outdoor.
Type 12 Dust tight, Drip-tight, Non corrosive, Indoor. See NEC 2008 110.22 FPN.
1.9 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Before submitting a proposal, each bidder shall examine all plans and specifications
extent and character of the work required, including all required utilities.

1.10 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 26 00 90, Electrical Submittal Procedures.
A. Provide complete installations of and verify that all systems, comply with NFPA 70,
latest edition. The more stringent of the N.E.C. or specifications shall apply to this
project.
B. All materials furnished under this Contract shall be new, free from defects of any kind,
C. Submit a bid on the basis of a complete installation including all labor, material,
delivery, insurance, permits, inspection fees and tests required even though each and
every item necessary is not specifically mentioned or shown.
D. In case of any conflict between the specifications, plans and ordinances, the
ordinances shall govern. In case of any conflict between the specifications and plans,
the Engineer shall make the final decision. Refer to Division 1 - General
Requirements.
90 Percent
1.12 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY
A. Erect barricades, protective fencing, and signs as required to prevent injury to

personnel on site.
B. Coordinate all utility services and/or revisions with utility companies for base bid.
C. Make permanent connection to new utilities or existing lines. Determine depth and
location and bid accordingly. Relocate and repair any existing lines cut by general
construction work.
D. Plans do not show exact location and elevations of lines. Deviate from plans as
required to conform to the general construction, provide proper grading and
installation.
E. Procure and pay for all necessary permits or licenses to carry out the work. Pay all
costs in connection with metering.
F. Obtain and pay for all the necessary certificates of approval which must be delivered
to the Architect before final acceptance of the work.
G. Periodically remove rubbish, clean or repair all surfaces marred by the work required
under this contract.
H. Where job conditions require changes in indicated locations and arrangement, make
such changes without extra cost to Owner.
I. Exposed piping and/or other materials will not be permitted in the finished job
J. Provide required hook-up to line voltage at all electromagnetic door holder/release,

fire/smoke dampers, and smoke dampers. Provide required relays and wiring to fire
alarm panels and coordinate with other specified work.
1.13 ELEVATOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Elevator Pit: The contractor shall provide the following requirements.

1. Coordinate with Section 620 - NEC.
2. Elevator pit light with switch.
3. Elevator pit GFCI outlet for general use.
4. Elevator pit GFCI outlet for sump pump.
5. Telephone line outlet box/phone system to meet ADA 4.10.14 thru one company
equal to Kings of America (800-354-6473).
6. Heat detector outlet boxes in machine room, corridors in front of elevators and
hoistway(s). Provide a shunt trip breaker to elevator motor(s) where rooms are
sprinkled.
B. Machine Room: The contractor shall provide the following requirements.

1. Light switch located adjacent to the lock jamb side of door.
2. Elevator motor disconnect switch, three phase, lockable in off position, with
separate equipment grounding conductor, located adjacent to lock side of door.
90 Percent
3. Duplex 20A GFCI outlet.

4. Elevator cab lighting switch (Square D No. FGIP manual switch with handle
guard/lock-off), one per elevator. Each elevator cab on separate circuit.
5. Only equipment directly required in the function or support of the elevator system
is allowed in or through the machine room of hoistways.
F. Items noted as "No Substitutes" shall be as specified only.
G. Samples shall be provided by the manufacturer of the proposed substitute unit for
evaluation when required at no charge and non-returnable.
H. Requests for substitution are understood to mean that the Contractor:

equivalent or superior in all respects to that specified.
specified.
I. After Award of the Contract, substitutions will be considered only under one or more
of the following circumstances.
90 Percent

interest.
J. Revisions to the electrical system caused by substitutions shall be under the

supervision of the Engineer at a standard hourly rate charged by the Engineer and
shall be paid by the Contractor originating the changes.
A. This Contractor shall keep a set of plans on the job, noting daily all changes made in
and existing switchgear, devices, fixtures, equipment and new or existing site utilities
and lights.
B. Upon submitting his request for final payment, he shall turn over to the Architect,
record document submittals as outlined in Division 1 - General Requirements of the
Specifications.
following data, in duplication. Two (2) each prepared in a three inch (3"), 3-ring binder,
neat in appearance of sufficient size and turned over to the Architect for checking and
subsequent delivery to the Owner:
2. All shop drawings.
of the following:
3. Submit megger reading log copies in accordance with Section 26 08 11.
4. Submit ground tests methods and results in accordance with Section 26 08 11 &
26 05 26.
5. Submit testing of electrical system results in accordance with Section 26 08 11.
6. Submit conductor insulation test results in accordance with Section 26 05 19.
7. Submit SPD warranty in accordance with Section 26 43 00.
8. Submit test data results for transformers in accordance with Section 26 22 13.
A. The intent of the drawings is to establish the types of systems and functions, but not
to set forth each item essential to the functioning of the system.
90 Percent
B. Electrical drawings are generally diagrammatic and show approximate location and
extent of work.
C. Install the work complete including minor details necessary to perform the function
indicated. Provide an electrical system (including all hook ups) complete in every
respect and ready to operate.
D. If clarification is needed, consult the Engineer.
E. Review pertinent drawings and adjust the work to conditions shown. Where
discrepancies occur between drawings, specifications, and actual field conditions,
immediately notify the Engineer for his interpretation.
F. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in the location of any
part of this work without additional cost to the Owner.
G. Contractor, subcontractor, vendors and suppliers are required to waive subrogation

1.17 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND EQUIPMENT FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
A. Electrical Contractor To Provide

1. Line Voltage and hook-up to all plumbing equipment (Division 22), HVAC
equipment (Division 23), and building automation equipment (Division 25),
including required manual safety switches with fuses/heaters of required size.
2. All conduit into accessible attic space for thermostats and sensors.
3. All lighting contactors, mechanically held with control relay, required coil voltage
coordinated with controls contractor.
4. Junction Boxes (Standard One or Two Gang) required for controls contractor,
and coordination with controls contractor.
B. Mechanical Contractor to Provide
1. All motor starters (with heaters as required).
2. All thermostats.
3. All HVAC Equipment.
4. All relays, contactors, and switches required to start/stop Mechanical Equipment
other than switches shown on and required by Division 26.
C. Controls Contractor to Provide

1. All required relays associated with Controls in specifications.
2. All sensors.
3. All conduit required above ceiling.
4. All control wiring.
D. The Electrical plans are based on the equipment and devices scheduled shown on
the drawings or as called for in the specifications. Should any mechanical equipment
or device associated devices be changed or accepted from those which are shown or
noted, all electrical and/or mechanical changes shall be made at the expense of the
trade or contractor initiating the change with no expense to the Owner, Architect,
Engineer or their representatives.
90 Percent
E. All conduit and boxes for thermostats and/or sensors shall be provided by this
contractor. A thermostat or sensor junction box and 1/2" conduit to accessible attic
and/or to corridor shall be provided for each room served with HVAC equipment.
Coordinate with Division 23 for exact locations and requirements.
F. Details on Electrical drawings showing HVAC/Mechanical/Control Equipment

providing of various relays devices, wiring and other equipment shall be provided by
this Contractor as directed and as required per drawing.
1.18 UTILITIES, LOCATIONS, AND EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Location of power company electrical service poles, transformers, telephone service

pedestal, cable television service, and any existing underground services, where
shown, have been obtained from substantially reliable sources, are shown as a
general guide only, without guarantees as to accuracy.
B. The Contractor will examine the site, verify all requirements, service points, and
availability of all services required to complete this project. No consideration will be
granted for any alleged misunderstanding of the materials and labor to be provided
as necessitated by nature of the site including those items which may be fairly implied
as essential to the execution and completion of any and all parts of this project. All
proposals shall take these existing conditions into consideration and the lack of
specific information on the drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of any
responsibility. Verify location and check for existing underground utilities and lines
before ditching.
C. Coordinate all services with the Utility Companies during construction, coordinate
changes made by utility companies to the design of the project, check for existing
underground utilities and lines before ditching, be responsible for repair of any cut or
damaged lines or utilities uncovered. Coordinate with the owner, architect and utility
company the scheduling of any shut-downs or delays in providing service that may
occur.
D. The owner shall be responsible for all costs of the public utility companies' changes
and/or unforeseen site utility repairs under the following circumstances except for
negligence on part of the contractor:
1. Public utility service requirements or changes which alter the scope of this project
from original design and agreement/approach.
2. Existing conditions which require that certain assumptions be made that could
not be verified at the site.
3. Changes/repairs during construction as a result of utility companies not
conforming to their agreements, methods, locations, etc., established during
design.
1.19 FINAL COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS
A. The following will be required at time of final completion.

1. Refer to general conditions.
90 Percent
2. Final clean up completed.

3. All systems are fully operational, all material and devices installed and tested.
4. Ground tests (megger readings) performed, two copies of method used, and
results attached.
5. Project Record Documents submitted to the Architect.
6. Spare material delivered to the Owner and documented.
7. Owner instructions completed.
1.20 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. All equipment and devices shall be installed in accordance with the drawings and

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. It shall be the Contractor's
responsibility to install all equipment, materials, and devices shown on the plans and
as called out in these specifications even if manufacturer's instructions are absolutely
unattainable.
1.21 INSTALLATION
A. Cooperation with trades of adjacent, related or affected materials or operations, and

or trades performing continuations of this work under subsequent contracts is
considered a part of this work in order to effect timely and accurate placing of work
and to bring together, in proper and correct sequence, the work of such trades,
including under the general contractor Division 1, and Division 23.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate installation of the electrical system with the
General Contractor, Mechanical, Plumbing, and Communications Contractors to
insure a complete working system for the Owner.
C. Where required, all conduit and boxes for all systems, except mechanical controls
specified otherwise, shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor. Any and all
allowances shall be included.
D. All wiring shall be enclosed in conduit or raceway in all exposed areas such as
gymnasium, shops, stages, or field houses.
E. Work must be performed by workmen skilled in their trade. The installation must be
complete whether the work is concealed or exposed.
F. The Contractor shall construct foundations for floor mounted equipment where
indicated on the Drawings. Foundations generally shall be built up from structural floor
slabs and shall be made of 3000 psi concrete four (4) inches thick unless otherwise
indicated or specified. Top edges shall be beveled. All exposed surfaces shall be
finished with cement mortar troweled smooth. Reinforcing shall be 6 x 6-10/10 welded
wire mesh.
90 Percent
G. Equipment shall be secured to foundations by this Contractor with anchor bolts

embedded in the concrete of ample size and proper arrangements to suit equipment
furnished.
H. Conceal electrical work in walls, floors, chases, under floors, underground and above
ceilings. Branch circuits shall not be installed in or under the slab and will not be
accepted unless shown or required on the drawings.
I. Coordinate the actual locations of electrical outlets and equipment with building
features and mechanical equipment as indicated on architectural, structural and
mechanical drawings. Review with the Architect any proposed changes in outlet or
equipment location. Relocation of outlets before installation, of up to 3 feet from the
position indicated, may be directed without additional cost. Remove and relocate
outlets placed in an unsuitable location when so requested by the Architect.
1.22 TEMPORARY SERVICE AND LIGHTING
A. Electrical service to all portions of existing buildings at the construction site not
involved with the project shall remain in operation throughout construction. Provide
all required temporary electrical service in the base bid to all required areas so as to
satisfy OSHA requirements.
B. All metering and temporary electrical service charges and/or costs of utilities shall be
paid by The Contractor/Managing Construction Contractor.
1.23 ADDITIONAL MATERIALS:
A. Include in the Base Bid:

1. All costs to provide 15 additional communication outlet or signal locations, all
required boxes, labor and conduit as directed by the Architect. Devices, plates,
and wiring by Communications Contractor(s).
2. All costs to provide one (1) additional electrical circuit as required for fire alarm
system signal power expanders or fire safety control circuits including all required
circuit breakers, wiring, conduit, labor and devices as specified and directed by
Architect.
3. All costs to provide 5 additional electrical circuits, all required circuit breakers,
wiring, conduit, labor and devices as specified and directed by Architect. Each
circuit to be priced with a rating of 20 amps and at a distance of 100 feet to
furthermost device. Each circuit to include (8) duplex receptacles.
4. All costs to provide 2 additional lighting circuits, all required circuit breakers,
wiring, conduit, labor and devices as specified and directed by Architect. Each
circuit to be priced with a rating of 20 amps and at a distance of 100 feet to
furthermost device. Each circuit to include 12 light fixtures equal in value to fixture
type “B5”.
5. All costs to provide 10 additional exit fixtures equal in value to exits type 'X' as
noted on drawings, all required wiring, conduit, labor and devices as specified
and directed by the Architect. Wiring and conduit to be priced at a distance of 50
feet.
6. All costs to provide 10 additional light fixtures with battery equal in value to fixture
90 Percent
type “B5E”.
7. All costs to provide 10 additional light switches equal to the type denoted on the
drawings.
8. All costs to provide 10 additional 3 way light switches equal to the type denoted
on the drawings.
9. Provide 3 relay packs and 6 occupancy sensors to the owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All electrical connections shall be made per NEC 110.14. Additionally, where torque
values are listed in manufacturer instructions, a calibrated torque tool shall be used
to achieve indicated torque values.
END OF SECTION
90 Percent
SECTION 26 00 30
WARRANTY PERIOD
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Procedures during the warranty period.

Conditions, Division 1 Specifications and Division 26, Section 26 00 00, apply to this
Section.
1. Section 26 00 00 - Electrical
1.3 WARRANTY
A. This Contractor shall warranty all work against defective materials and workmanship
for a period of one year from and after date of acceptance of the installation by the
owner.
B. Neither the final payment nor any provisions in Contract Documents shall relieve this
Contractor, or the Contractor, of the responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship.
C. The contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other
work resulting there from, which shall appear.
D. This Warranty shall not be construed to include the normal maintenance of the various
components of the system covered by these specifications.
1.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Provide normal maintenance services recommended by the manufacturer at no

additional cost to the Owner during the warranty period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Warranty Period 26 00 30 - 1
90 Percent
SECTION 26 00 90
ELECTRICAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section supplements section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures and contains

additional requirements applicable to Division 26 submittals.

1. Electrical submittal procedures
B. This section applies only to the Division 26 specifications. Submittals required by

1.3 RELATED SECTION
A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
1.4 SUBMITTALS

article in section 26 00 00.
C. Required submittals: Refer to the Submittals article of each individual Division 26

D. Color selection: Some products require that a color selection be coordinated with the
architect. Information regarding such products shall be submitted to the architect.
E. Contractor’s coordination submittals: The contractor may require his subcontractors

F. Electronic Submittals: Provide submittals in pdf format. Paper submittals will be

rejected.
Electrical Submittal Procedures 26 00 90 - 1

90 Percent
G. Coordination correspondence: The contractor may desire to verify the acceptability of

a particular item prior to assembling the submittal package. The contractor may send
material directly to the engineer for comments and feedback. This communication,
whether by mail, fax, or e-mail, will be treated as normal coordination correspondence
and will not be tracked or documented as a formal submittal. The engineer may or
may not respond to such correspondence. If the engineer agrees, in writing, to the
use of a particular item, then that same material shall be included in the submittal
package along with a copy of the correspondence.
H. Unapproved products: If materials or equipment are installed before being reviewed

1.5 PRODUCT DATA
A. Where the content of manufacturer submittal literature includes data not pertinent to
the submittal, clearly indicate which portions of the contents are being submitted for
review. Catalogs, pamphlets, or other documents submitted to describe items on
which review is being requested shall be specific and identifications in catalog,
pamphlets, etc., of items submitted shall be clearly made in a contrasting color or
highlighting. Data of a general nature shall not be acceptable.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Scale and measurements: Make shop drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently large
to show all pertinent aspects of the item.
B. Types of prints required: Submit in pdf format.
1.7 SEQUENCING
A. Submit product information within 30 calendar days after the contractor has received
the owner’s notice to proceed or in accordance with Architect’s requirements,
whichever is sooner.
B. After the engineer has reviewed the submittals, make necessary revisions as directed
by the engineer and resubmit.
C. After the submittal has been reviewed and approved by the engineer, proceed to
purchase materials and perform the work.

90 Percent
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Failure to submit items that meet the requirements of the contract documents in ample
time for review shall not entitle the contractor to an extension of contract time, and no
claim for extension by reason of such default shall be allowed. The contractor may be
held liable for delays so occasioned.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Not applicable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Submit product data, shop drawings, samples, quality assurance submittals, quality
control submittals, and other items in accordance with the requirements of this
section, applicable sections in Division 1, and additional requirements of each
individual Division 26 specification section.
3.2 SUBMITTAL ORGANIZATION
A. Provide a submittal cover page that lists at least the following:

1. Project name
2. Date
3. Name and address of architect
4. Name and address of engineer
5. Name, address and telephone number of electrical distributor
6. Name, address and telephone number of prime contractor
7. Name, address and telephone number of electrical contractor
B. Provide an index page listing all items submitted.
C. The contractor shall call to the attention of the engineer by letter, included in the
submittal after the index page, any instance in which the submittals are known to differ
from the requirements of the contract documents.
D. Organize all required items by specification section. All material for each specification
section shall be in one single pdf file. Material for multiple specification sections may
be combined into one file.
E. The material for each specification section shall be organized as follows:

1. The first page shall indicate the specification number and title and the name,
address and telephone number of the vendor or vendor’s representative, if
applicable.
2. Refer to the individual Division 26 specification sections for any required

90 Percent
F. Submit in accordance with the procedures described in specification section 01 33 00

Submittal Procedures. PDF files are preferred.
G. Submittals not organized as described here may be rejected, without being reviewed,
as not complying with the provisions of the contract.
3.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Provide close-out submittals in accordance with the requirements of Division 1.
3.4 SCHEDULES
A. Division 26 Submittal Schedule: The Division 26 submittal shall include the following
items for each Division 26 specification section that is in the contract documents.
Coordinate this list with the submittal requirements listed in each specification section.
If an item has been omitted from either list but is included in the other, then provide
that item in the submittal. In case of conflicting or unclear requirements, contact the
engineer.

90 Percent

26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables
Line voltage conductors
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems
Grounding materials and devices
26 05 33.11 Raceways and Conduits for Electrical
Systems
Raceways and conduit
Fittings
Wireways
Supports for rooftop conduits
Labeling
26 05 33.13 Boxes and Fittings for Electrical Systems
Fittings
Cover plates
Junction boxes
Outlet boxes
Pull boxes
Extension rings
26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems
Label material
Sample identification tag
26 09 13 Electrical Power Monitoring and Control
Metering equipment
26 09 16 Time switches
Time switch product data
26 09 21 Contactors
Contactors
26 09 41 Lighting Controls
Motion Sensors
Wall sensors
Photocells
Smart switches
Time switches
Room controllers
Enhanced building controls (if required)
Software
Lighting contactors
Low voltage wiring
Shop drawing - RCP
Shop drawing - wiring diagrams
Sequence of operations for each unique space
List of switch types by unique space with
proposed button labels

90 Percent

26 22 13 Low voltage distribution transformers
Transformers
26 24 16 Panelboards
Switchgear
Electrical rooms (Drawn to scale & dimensioned)
26 27 26 Wiring devices
Devices
Device plates
Keys
26 28 13 Fuses
Fuses
26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
Safety switches
26 28 19 Ground fault protection system
Ground fault protection equipment
26 43 00 Surge Protective Devices (SPD)
Service entrance SPD
Sub-panel SPD
HVAC SPD
26 50 00 Lighting
Luminaires
LED drivers
Battery backup units
Automatic transfer devices for emergency lighting
Product warranty documentation
26 55 61 Theatrical Lighting
Light Luminaires
Lamps
Dimming system components
Dimming system wiring diagram
Dimensional drawings for entire system
Load schedules
Light Luminaires
26 56 23 Area Lighting
Poles
Pole base shop drawings
1 - Reviewed
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 26 05 19
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This section includes conductors for power circuits, including terminations and
connectors.
A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical
B. Section 26 00 90 – Electrical Submittal Procedures.
C. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
D. Section 26 05 19.19 – Metal Clad Cable
E. Section 26 08 11 – Testing of Electrical System
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires
B. ICEA S-61-402 -Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy
C. UL 44 - Rubber Insulated Wires and Cables
D. National Electric Code
E. UL 493 -Thermoplastic Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch Circuit Cables
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals required in this section shall conform to and be submitted in accordance

with the General Conditions, Division 1, and Division 26, Section 26 00 90 – Electrical
Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit product data for the following:

1. Conductors for power circuits
2. Conductor terminations
3. Connectors
C. Closeout Submittals: Closeout submittals shall include the following.

1. Submit letter certifying acceptable testing of all branch circuits.
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 1

90 Percent
2. Submit insulation test results for all new feeders installed in this project.
A. General work practices for electrical construction shall be in accordance with NECA
1, Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.
B. Regulatory Requirements: All products provided under this section shall be UL listed
for the intended use.
A. Storage and Protection: Material shall be stored in a clean and dry location until
installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Conductors shall be manufactured in the United States. Acceptable manufacturers

are:
1. Encore Wire
2. Southwire
3. Cerro Wire
4. General Cable
B. All other manufacturers shall require pre-approval in accordance with specification

section 26 00 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. All feeders to be soft-drawn annealed copper.
B. All branch circuit conductors shall be soft-drawn annealed copper.
2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Manufactured conductors for power circuits:

1. All conductors for power circuits shall be rated for at least 600 volts.
2. The insulation for power conductors shall be type THWN-2 or THHN/THWN.
3. Conductors for power circuits shall be #12 AWG or larger.
4. Conductors for power circuits that are #12 AWG or #10 AWG shall be solid.
Conductors for power circuits that are #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded.
5. Conductors sized #6 AWG and smaller shall have factory colored insulation.
B. MC Cable: MC cable is allowed only for light fixture whips. Total length not to exceed
six feet.

90 Percent
C. Manufactured conductor terminations and connectors:

1. All accessory materials such as connectors, splice and tap fittings, and
terminations shall be of a type designed or intended and suitable for the use.
They shall be compatible with the conductor material.
2. Conductors shall be connected and terminated using suitable listed clamps, listed
pressure connectors, listed compression terminals or listed lugs and hardware of
the proper size for the application.
3. Only connection devices that require the complete removal of the conductor
jacket or insulation and result in a connection to the complete conductor surface
area are suitable for use. Insulation piercing type connectors shall not be used.
4. Splices and taps shall have a mechanical strength and insulation rating at least
as that of the conductors.
5. Compression systems shall include crimped die index and company logo for
purposes of inspection. Aluminum shall not be used for connection purposes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SITE VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
A. Do not install the conductors until raceway system is complete.
B. Before installing the conductors for any power circuit or feeder, verify that the
conductor ampacity is at least as large as the rating of the overcurrent device
protecting it. In the event that the conductors would not be adequately protected,
notify the engineer before installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Wire Sizing: Provide conductors sized as indicated on drawings unless modified as

described below. Where conductor sizes have been omitted from drawings, base bid
shall include conductors with ampacity as least as large as the overcurrent protection
device protecting the conductors, or at least as large as the amp rating of the load
being served, whichever is greater. In such cases, notify the engineer before
installation for size verification. When pulling 120v branch circuits, #12 wire shall not
be run more than 90’, #10 wire shall not be run more than 120’, #8 wire shall not be
run more than 150’, etc.
B. Neutral Conductors: Provide a separate neutral conductor for each circuit. Multiple
circuits shall not share a common neutral. Neutral conductors shall be sized as large
as the phase conductors. Neutral conductors shall not be of a reduced size.
C. Equipment grounding conductors: Provide equipment grounding conductors in

accordance with specification section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems.

90 Percent
D. Number of Conductors per Conduit: When #12 AWG conductors are used on 20-amp
circuits, install no more than six conductors in a single conduit run. When #10 AWG
conductors are used on 20-amp circuits, install no more than nine conductors in a
single conduit run. Otherwise, there shall be no more than three conductors in each
conduit run. The equipment grounding conductor shall not be counted for the
preceding statements.
E. Installation in Raceways:
1. Install all conductors for power circuits in raceways.
2. All conductors to be installed in a raceway shall be pulled together. Use an
approved wire pulling compound when pulling large conductors.
3. Do not bend any conductor either permanently or temporarily during installation
to radii less than four times the outer diameter of conductors.
4. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended values for maximum pulling
tension.
5. When installing conductors in existing conduit, the interior of the existing conduit
shall be cleaned prior to the installation of the new conductors to insure that there
is nothing that will damage the insulation.
6. The pulling device shall be of a type that will not damage the raceway.
F. Terminations:
1. Use pressure type lugs or connectors for terminations or splices of all stranded
conductors. Use ring tongue type terminators on all control wiring. More than one
conductor shall not be installed in any termination unless the termination is
marked as suitable for more than one conductor. With the written approval of the
engineer’s office, an exception to this may be allowed for the installation of the
surge protective devices required in specification section 26 43 00 Surge
Protective Devices.
2. Conductors shall not be supported solely by their terminations.
3. Terminations shall be made such that the stripped length of the conductor is no
longer than required for the terminal, lug, or connector.
4. Conductive antioxidant shall be applied on all outdoor connections and
connections in damp or wet locations.
G. Splices:
1. Conductor splices shall be kept to a minimum.
2. Where splices are necessary, they shall be in a box or enclosure. Splices within
a conduit run are not acceptable.
H. Color Coding:
1. Provide factory colored insulated conductors for #6 AWG and smaller.
2. Color code larger insulated conductors with an approved field-applied tape 2"
wide on each end of conductors.
3. If existing wiring in renovation or addition work has a consistent color coding,
then match the existing and note in record documents. Otherwise, colors shall be
as follows:
Line 208/120V 240/120V 480/277V
A Black Black Brown
B Red Orange Orange
C Blue Blue Yellow

90 Percent
Neutral White White Gray

Ground Green Green Green
Isolated Ground Green +Yellow Green + Yellow Green + Yellow
4. Switch leg shall be the same color as the un-switched phase wiring. Travelers,
and special systems as selected by the Contractor. Note in record drawings.
I. Identification: All conductors in a panelboard shall be identified by means of tags or

tape.
3.3 SITE TESTS
A. Perform in accordance with manufacturer's printed testing procedures, applicable

industry standards, ANSI standards, IEEE standards, and NEMA standards. Provide
testing equipment in good working order and which complies with the applicable
industry standards and manufacturer's requirements. Submit a list of testing
equipment used and date of last calibration.
B. Insulation Test: The insulation of each feeder run and each branch circuit shall be
tested. The test shall be performed after the conductors have been pulled into the
conduit and after terminations have been added, but before final connections are
made.
C. Test the following:

1. Phase to phase resistance
2. Phase to neutral resistance
3. Phase to ground resistance
4. Neutral to ground resistance
D. Branch Circuits: The insulation of branch circuits may be tested with a standard ohm
meter. Readings must indicate an open circuit to be acceptable. Submit letter
documenting that all circuits have been tested and are acceptable.
E. Feeders:
1. Perform megger tests on all new feeder runs.
2. Tests shall be performed in accordance with the Publication "Instruction Manual
For Megger Insulation Testers" by the Biddle Company.
3. Written documentation of the test results shall be submitted in accordance with
specification section 26 08 11 – Testing of Electrical System.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 26 05 19.19
METAL CLAD CABLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section includes the following:

1. Metal Clad (Type MC) and Metal-Clad Interlocking Armor Ground Cable (Type
MCI-A).
2. Wiring connections and terminations.
3. Installation methods and procedures.
A. 26 05 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
B. 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
C. 26 08 11 - Testing of Electrical System
1.3 REFERENCES
A. UL 83 - Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables
B. UL 1569 - Standard for Metal Clad Cables
C. NEC - NFPA 70, National Electrical Code 2014
D. ASTM B3 - ASTM International Standard B3 Standard Specification for Soft or

Annealed Copper Wire
E. ASTM B8 - ASTM International Standard B8 Standard Specification for Concentric-

Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
F. ANSI/NETA ATS - International Electrical Testing Association Standard for

Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems,
2013 edition
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data Submittals: Submit product data for each type of metal clad cable and
fitting indicated.
B. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit qualification data for testing agency.
C. Closeout Submittals: Submit field quality-control test reports.
Metal Clad Cable 26 05 19.19 - 1

90 Percent
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and

capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the
International Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International

Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
A. Deliver materials to site in unopened cartons or bundles as appropriate, clearly

identified with manufacturer's name, Underwriter's or other approved label, grade or
identifying number.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. or approved equivalent.
2.2 ARMORED CABLE ASSEMBLY
A. Metal clad cable assemblies shall consist of 2 or more insulated current carrying
copper conductors and a green insulated copper ground conductor. The metal clad
cable (or armored cable assembly) shall be UL classified as a through-penetrating
product (XHLY) for use in one, two or three-hour through-penetration firestop systems
(XHEZ). The assembly shall be suitable for use in cable trays in accordance with the
NEC.
B. Current-Carrying Conductors: Soft annealed copper in compliance with the latest

edition of ASTM B3 and/or B8; size 12 AWG through 6 AWG. A separate neutral
conductor shall be supplied with each phase conductor. Neutral conductor shall be
oversized where indicated on the plans.
C. Insulated Equipment Grounding Conductor: The equipment ground shall be a full-

sized insulated conductor with a protective cover, sized in accordance with Table 6.1
of UL 1569. The grounding conductor shall be soft-annealed copper in compliance
with the latest edition of ASTM B3 and/or B8.
D. Isolated Grounding Conductor: An additional isolated, insulated grounding conductor

shall be provided where specified in section 26 05 26. The isolated ground shall be a
full-sized insulated conductor with a protective cover, sized in accordance with Table
6.1 of UL 1569. The isolated grounding conductor shall be soft-annealed copper in
compliance with the latest edition of ASTM B3 and/or B8.

90 Percent
E. Conductor Insulation: The insulated conductors shall be type THHN 90°C DRY with
an extruded polypropylene protective covering. The insulated conductors with
protective covering shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with UL 83 and
UL 1569.
F. Armor: A zinc coated galvanized steel armor shall be applied over the cabled wire
assembly with an interlock in compliance with Section 13 of UL 1569. Armor shall be
colored to identify the voltage and number of conductors.
2.3 FITTINGS
A. Fittings shall be UL listed and identified as MCI-A for such use with metal clad
interlocking armor ground.
B. Connectors shall be of steel or malleable iron and shall have saddle clamp to insure
a tight termination of MC or MCI-A cable to box.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Scope: Provide metal clad cable for lighting and receptacle branch circuits, excluding
home runs. Provide metal clad cable for exterior circuits, including area lighting
circuits, generator feeders, and cooling tower circuits.
B. Interior Routing: Route feeders over corridors. Route metal clad cable runs parallel
with or perpendicular to walls or structural elements. Route horizontal runs level.
Route vertical runs plumb. Rack groups together neatly with both straight runs and
bends parallel and uniformly spaced.
C. Supporting: Provide support for MC cable in accordance with NEC Article 330 or the
following, whichever is more stringent.
1. Use of cable tray: Basket, ladder rack, or ventilated cable tray may be utilized
for support of metal clad cabling. The sum of the cross-sectional areas of cables
shall not exceed the maximum allowable cable fill area allowed by NEC Article
392. Ampacity of cables installed in cable tray shall meet the requirements of
NEC 392.80.
2. In existing buildings, provide independently supported cable hangers.
These hangers are to be suitable for installation of MC cable.
3. In new buildings, provide a combination of cable tray and/or J cable
hangers.
4. Individual metal clad cables hung from roof structure or structural ceiling shall
be supported by split-ring hangers and wrought-iron hanger rods. Where three
or more metal clad cables are suspended from the ceiling in parallel runs, use
steel channels, Unistrut or equal, hung from 1/2-inch (13 mm) rods to support
the cables. The cables on these channels shall be held in place with metal clad
cable clamps designed for the particular channel that is used.

90 Percent
5. Secure metal clad cable support racks to concrete walls and ceilings by
means of cast-in-place anchors; die cast, rustproof alloy expansion shields;
or cast flush anchors. Wooden plugs, plastic inserts, or gunpowder driven
inserts shall not be used as a base to secure conduit supports.
6. Support metal clad cable immediately on each side of a bend and not more
than 1 foot (300 mm) from an enclosure where a run of metal clad cable
ends.
D. Clearances: Maintain clearances described below.

1. Where metal clad cable is installed parallel to framing members, such as studs,
joist, or rafters, support the cable so that the nearest outside surface of the
cable is at least 1-1/4 inches (31 mm) from the nearest edge of the framing
member. Where this distance cannot be maintained, protect the cable by a steel
plate, sleeve, or equivalent that is at least 1/16-inch thick.
2. Maintain at least 6-inch clearance between metal clad cables and other piping
systems.
3. Maintain 12-inch (300 mm) clearance between metal clad cables and heat
sources such as flues, steam pipes, and heating appliances.
4. No metal clad cable shall be fastened to other conduits or pipes or installed so
as to prevent the ready removal of other pipes or ducts for repairs.
E. Fittings: Follow manufacturer’s instructions for cable preparation for installation of

fittings. Cleanly cut the cable end with metal clad cable rotary cutting tool to ensure
flush seating of the cable into the fitting. Properly torque fitting securement screws.
F. Splices and Terminations: Make splices at junction boxes with an approved,

insulated, live spring type connector such as those manufactured by Scotchlock, 3M
or Ideal.
G. Conductors in Enclosures: Provide neat and workmanlike installation with conductors

tied with nylon wire ties in terminal cabinets, gutters and similar locations.
H. Terminating metal clad cables into panelboards:

1. Provide a junction box within plenum space with sweep elbows down to
panelboard, or
2. Use a ladder tray mounted vertically above the panelboard. Strap cables to
rungs and install cover on cable tray.
I. Identification: Identify all wiring with permanent wire labels, using alphanumeric
designations. Terminations and splices shall be identically labeled for the same wire
(i.e. common conductors terminated in multiple locations). Wire labels shall agree with
the circuit designations on the Construction Drawings. Identify conductors in outlets,
pull boxes and similar locations where conductors are accessible with printed plastic
adhesive tapes to show circuit numbers. Wrap tapes at least two turns around
conductor. Mark panel identification number with felt tip pen on cloth or plastic tag
and attach to entering conductors with nylon string.
3.2 SITE TESTS, INSPECTION
A. Hire an independent testing agency to perform acceptance testing.

90 Percent
B. All fittings and locknuts shall be re-examined for tightness. A continuity test is to
be performed at each connection as a final means of inspection for tightness of
joints.
C. Perform site tests in accordance with sections 26 08 11 and 26 05 19.
D. Perform field tests in conformance with the ANSI/NETA ATS.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. This Section includes solid grounding of electrical systems and equipment. It includes
basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and
systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in
other sections of these Specifications.
A. Section 26 00 00 - Electrical
B. Section 26 08 11 - Testing of Electrical System
1.4 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Code
B. ANSI/IEEE 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial

Power Systems.
C. ANSI/UL 467 - Safety Standard for Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

with the General Conditions, Division 1, and Division 26, Section 26 00 90
requirements.
B. Submit grounding materials and devices to be used.
C. Submit test results of megger reading to Engineer after installation of grounds with
records for Owner.
D. Revisions to grounding will be to satisfaction of the Engineer at no cost by the

Contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 1

90 Percent
2.1 GROUND RODS
A. Copper cladding permanently bonded to a high-strength steel core, molten welded to

core.
B. 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19mm by 30m) Straight, Conform to UL 467.
2.2 CONNECTIONS
2.2.1 GENERAL CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Listed and labeled as grounding connectors for the materials used.
2.2.2 OUTDOOR & BELOW GRADE GROUNDING CONNECTIONS
A. Welded.
B. Provide starting material in kit form.
C. Aluminum, copper and iron oxide.
D. No phosphorous or any other caustic, toxic or explosive substance may be used.
E. Manufacturer/Model
1. Erico Products "Cadweld Exothermic"
2. Thermoweld
2.2.3 OUTDOOR & ABOVE GRADE GROUNDING CONNECTIONS
A. Bonds and clamps.
B. Non-ferrous material which will not cause electrolytic action between the conductor
and connector.
C. Provide exothermal welding where clamping is not accessible.
2.2.4 INDOOR GROUNDING & POWER CONNECTIONS
A. Provide clamps as listed for outdoor applications.
B. Use low smoke/low emission welding where not accessible.
C. Manufacturer/Model: Erico Products "Cadweld Exolon".
D. Service Entrance Grounding Connections: U-bolt with pressure plate.
2.3 WIRING
A. Copper 600 volt insulated conductors with a green-colored insulation for bonding.

90 Percent
B. Grounding conductors to be in accordance with NEC Table 250-95.
C. Bonding jumpers to be minimum cross-sectional area greater than or equal to that of

the equivalent grounding conductor as determined from NEC Table 250-95.
D. Use to ground electrode and equipment grounding conductors.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS
A. Ground Bus: Bare annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section. 98% IAGS
conductivity, not less than 25% of feeders cross section area.
B. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided No. 3/0 AWG bare copper wire,
terminated with copper ferrules.
C. Bonding Strap Conductor/Connectors: Soft copper, 0.05 inch (1mm) thick and 2
inches (50mm) wide, except as indicated.
2.5 SERVICE ENTRANCE GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. Material:
1. Type K copper hollow tube filled with non-hazardous metallic salts.
2. Diameter: 2-1/8 inch
3. Length: 10 feet
4. Type: Straight
B. Manufacturer/Model
1. XIT Grounding Systems, K2-10 Series
2. Equals per XIT design and specifications
2.6 LIGHTNING ARRESTORS
A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers which meet the requirements

of these specifications are acceptable.
1. Anixter Brothers, Inc.
2. Blackhawk Industries
3. Burndy
4. Copperweld Corporation
5. Erico Products, Inc.
6. Ideal Industries, Inc.
7. Ilsco
8. ITT Blackburn
9. Joslyn
10. OZ/Gedney Co.
11. Raco, Inc.
12. Thomas & Betts Corp
PART 3 EXECUTION

90 Percent
3.1 APPLICATION
3.1.1 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR APPLICATION
A. Comply with NEC Article 250 for sizes and quantities of equipment grounding
conductors, except where larger sizes or more conductors are indicated.
B. All power circuits shall be provided with a separate copper insulated equipment
grounding conductor (EGC) run in the raceway with the power conductors. The
conduit is not to be used as the sole means of grounding. The insulation of the EGC
shall be green.
C. Bonding to the EGC shall be provided at each end of metallic conduit runs and at all
boxes and enclosures.
D. All branch circuits and feeders that require an isolated ground (IG) equipment
grounding conductor shall be provided with a separate copper insulated IG equipment
grounding conductor run in the raceway with the power conductors. The IG equipment
grounding conductor shall be provided in addition to the normal EGC. The insulation
of the IG equipment grounding conductor shall be green with a yellow stripe.
E. Conduits and boxes of IG circuits shall be bonded to the normal EGC as stated above.
At outlet locations, the IG equipment grounding conductor shall connect only to the
isolated ground terminal of an isolated ground outlet. There shall be no connection,
either directly or indirectly, between the normal EGC and the IG equipment grounding
conductor at any point other than at the source of a separately derived system
(transformer) or at the service entrance.
F. The following circuits shall be provided with an IG equipment grounding conductor:

1. Feeders providing power to panels equipped with an IG buss.
2. All branch circuits originating at a panel with an IG buss.
3.1.2 COMMUNICATIONS
A. For communication systems, provide a #2 AWG minimum green insulated copper

conductor in raceway from the grounding electrode system to each terminal cabinet
or central equipment location and to the ground bar in all IDF / MDF rooms.
3.1.3 METAL POLES SUPPORTING OUTDOOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Ground pole to a grounding electrode as indicated in addition to separate equipment

grounding conductor run with supply branch circuit.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1 GENERAL
A. Ground electrical systems and equipment in accordance with NEC requirements

except where the Drawings or Specifications exceed NEC requirements.

90 Percent
3.2.2 GROUND RODS
A. Locate a minimum of one-rod length from each other and at least the same distance
from any other grounding electrode. Interconnect ground rods with bare conductors
buried at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade. Connect bare-cable ground
conductors to ground rods by means of exothermic welds except as otherwise
indicated. Make these connections without damaging the copper coating or exposing
the steel. Use 3/4 inch by 10-ft. (19mm by 30 m) ground rods except as otherwise
indicated. Drive rods until tops are 6 inches (150mm) below finished floor or final
grade except as otherwise indicated. Provide "Powerfill" "Gem" or equal conducting
material in quantity recommended by manufacturer at all ground rods.
3.2.3 METALLIC WATER SERVICE PIPE
A. Provide insulated copper ground conductors, sized as indicated, in conduit from the
building main service equipment, or the ground bus, to main metallic water service
entrances to the building. Connect ground conductors to the main metallic water
service pipes by means of ground clamps. Where a dielectric main water fitting is
installed, connect the ground conductor to the street side of the fittings. Do not install
a grounding jumper around dielectric fittings. Bond the ground conductor conduit to
the conductor at each end.
B. Route bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment ground
conductors of pumps, fans, electric heaters, and air cleaners serving individual
systems.
3.2.4 TEST WELLS
A. Locate as directed by the Engineer and fabricate in accordance with details indicated
and/or required.
3.2.5 GROUND
A. Fabricate with 20 feet (60m) of conductor laid lengthwise in excavation for foundation
or footings. Install so conductor is within 2 inches (50mm) of the bottom of the
concrete. Where base of foundation is less than 20 feet (60m) in length, coil excess
conductor at base of foundation. Bond conductor to reinforcing steel at four locations,
minimum. Extend conductor below grade and connect to building grounding
electrode.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
3.3.1 GENERAL
A. Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or

electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection
methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
B. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and make

90 Percent
contact points closer in order of galvanic series. Make connections with clean bare
metal at points of contact.
C. Aluminum to steel connections shall be with stainless steel separators and

mechanical clamps. Aluminum to galvanized steel connections will be with tin-plated
copper jumpers and mechanical clamps.
D. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material such as red
lead paint to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
3.3.2 EXOTHERMIC WELDED CONNECTIONS
A. Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections except those
at test wells. Install at connections to ground rods and plate electrodes. Comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or that show
convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
B. Terminate insulated equipment grounding conductors for feeders and branch circuits
with pressure-type grounding lugs. Where metallic raceways terminate at metallic
housings without mechanical and electrical connection to the housing, terminate each
conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding
conductor to the ground bus in the housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits
at both entrances and exits with grounding bushing and bare grounding conductors.
C. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts,
in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors
and bolts. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten
connections to comply with torque tightening valves specified in UL 486A and UL
486B.
3.3.3 CONNECTION AT TEST WELLS
A. Use compression-type connectors on conductors and make bolted-and clamped-type

connections between conductors and ground rods.
3.3.4 COMPRESSION-TYPE CONNECTIONS
A. Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct circumferential pressure for
compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of
the connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a
visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground
conductor.
3.3.5 MOISTURE PROTECTION
A. Where insulated ground conductors are connected to ground rods or ground buses,
insulate the entire area of the connection and seal against moisture penetration of the
insulation and cable.
3.4 TESTS

90 Percent
A. Subject the completed grounding system to megger test at each location where a
maximum ground resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure
ground terminal, and at ground test wells. Measure ground resistance without the soil
being moistened by any means other than natural precipitation or natural drainage or
seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural
ground resistance. Perform tests by the 2-point method in accordance with Section
9.03 of IEEE 81, "Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance and
Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System". Submit test results in accordance
with Section 26 08 11 - Testing of Electrical System.
B. Ground/resistance maximum values shall be as follows:

1. Equipment rated 500 kVA and less: 10 Ohms
2. Equipment rated 500 kVA to 1000 kVA: 5 Ohms
3. Equipment Grounds: 25 Ohms
3.5 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original

grades except as otherwise indicated. Where sod has been removed, replace it as
soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching,
storing of dirt, cable laying and other work to their original condition. Include
necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or mulching.
Perform such work in accordance with Division 2 Section. Maintain disturbed
surfaces, restore vegetation and restore disturbed paving as indicated.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 26 05 33.11
RACEWAYS AND CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Electrical raceway and conduit systems.
A. Divisions 27 and 28 - Communications and Security
B. Section 26 00 00 - Electrical
C. Section 26 05 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
D. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
E. Section 26 21 00 - Low Voltage Electric Service Entrance
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ANSI C80.1 - Zinc-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit
B. ANSI/ANSI C80.4 - Zinc Coated Electrical Metallic Tubing
C. ANSI/ANSI C80.4 - Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing
D. ANSI/UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit
E. ANSI/UL 5 - Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings
F. ANSI/UL 651 - Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
G. ANSI/UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing
H. ANSI/UL 870 - Safety Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated
Fittings
I. ETL PVC-001 - PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit
Raceways and Conduits for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.11 - 1

90 Percent
J. NEMA TC2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80) and
Fittings
K. NEMA TC3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
L. UL 6 - Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit
M. UL 360 - Liquid tight Flexible Steel Conduit
N. UL 467 - Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment
1.5 SUBMITTALS

requirements. Included in this section are all raceways and conduit, fittings, wireways,
supports for conduit on roof, and labeling used. Provide samples upon specific
request. U.L. labels affixed to each item of material.
A. The use of the various raceway systems is restricted to the types and other
restrictions of the NEC and the local codes. Use of all such systems shall be verified
with the local code authority before use. In the case of questionable or denied use,
the contractor shall be required to use a raceway system permitted by the local code
at no additional cost.
B. Where conduits pass through beams, outside walls, fire rated walls, or structural
members, galvanized steel pipe sleeves shall be provided. The size of these sleeves
shall be such as to permit readily the subsequent insertion of conduit of the proper
size with adequate clearance for movement due to expansion and contraction. Where
conduits pass through outside walls, the inside diameter of the galvanized iron pipe
sleeves shall be at least 1/2" greater than the outside diameter of the service pipe.
After the conduits are installed, fill the annular space between the conduit and its
sleeve with a mastic or caulk. Use packing as required to accomplish this. At fire rated
wall penetrations, use fire barrier.
C. Grounding: The installation shall comply with all NEC grounding requirements. See
specification section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems for
additional grounding requirements.
D. Exposed surface raceways are specifically not permitted, in new construction. Where
a raceway is required, in existing construction, it shall be solid, without knockouts,
with hinged cover, placed so that cover is gravity closed.
E. Install complete, separate conduit systems for all electrical systems on this project to
include, but not limited to include the following.
1. New service entrance.
2. Electrical power and lighting feeders
3. Electrical power and lighting circuits

90 Percent
4. Isolated ground (computer “clean power”) circuits

5. Control wiring furnished by this contractor
6. Emergency and standby power and lighting circuits
7. Communication systems
8. Other electrical systems
F. Branch circuits shall not be installed in or under the ground floor slab and will not be
accepted. The only exceptions being circuits and locations specifically required on
the drawings to be in or under the floor slab.
G. Aluminum conduit shall not be installed in direct contact with concrete or masonry
construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
2.1.1 MINIMUM SIZES
A. Do not use conduit sized less than 3/4 inch steel, 3/4 inch for PVC conduit, 3/8 inch
flexible metal conduit, for lengths not to exceed 72 inches supplying light fixtures.
2.1.2 RIGID METAL CONDUIT. (RSC) (RAC) (IMC)
A. Hot-dipped galvanized rigid steel (RSC), Intermediate Metallic (IMC) with zinc-coated
threads and an outer coating of zinc chromate, Rigid Aluminum (RAC) accepted.
B. Fittings:
1. Malleable iron, either cadmium plated or hot-dipped galvanized. Die cast zinc.
Aluminum for aluminum conduit. To be insulated throat at terminations.
2. Use of set screw or bolt-on connectors and couplings is not accepted.
3. Use deflection and expansion couplings with bonding jumpers at all expansion
joints where required. Steel Clamps.
C. Usage: Where exposed on interior and exterior of buildings including roof. All elbows
of PVC conduit. Within or penetrating concrete slabs (RSC only).
2.1.3 PVC COATED RIGID METAL CONDUIT
A. NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as
complying with UL 6 and ETL PVC-001. The PVC coated galvanized rigid conduit
must be ETL Verified to the Intertek ETL SEMKO High Temperature H2O PVC
Coating Adhesion Test Procedure for 200 hours.
B. Fittings
1. Malleable iron. Steel.
2. Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL514B.
3. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mils.

90 Percent
4. Interior Coating: Urethane, minimum thickness of 2 mils.
C. Usage: Damp or wet locations. The stub-up from below grade to above grade
2.1.4 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Galvanized Electrical Steel, Galvanized Thin Wall, or Aluminum Tubing
B. Fittings: Set screw or compression type. Indenter type is not accepted. Die cast zinc.
Pressure cast. Malleable iron. Steel. Steel Clamps. To be insulated throat at
terminations.
C. Usage: Concealed in interior walls and ceiling spaces. Exposed only in interior
mechanical, electrical rooms, and equipment rooms. Gyms, activity spaces, stages
as directed, above 10'-0" A.F.F. where exposed. Installation in or under the floor slab
will not be accepted.
2.1.5 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT (RNC)
A. Schedule 40 heavy wall polyvinylchloride, high impact resistant.
B. Fittings: Solvent weld socket type
C. Usage: Underground, under slabs, all bends to be rigid steel. Do not penetrate slab
with PVC. Do not use above slabs, above grade, or exposed. Use long sweep rigid
steel 90's and rigid steel from 90's to and above grade.
2.1.6 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)
A. Spiral-wound, square-locked aluminum. Spiral-wound, square locked, hot-dipped

galvanized steel.
B. Fittings: Cadmium plated two-screw, double-clamp malleable iron. Hot-dipped

galvanized two-screw, double-clamp malleable iron. Malleable. Pressure cast. Steel
cast. Steel/Malleable for 90°. Zinc coated, aluminum. To be insulated throat at
terminations.
C. Usage:
1. May be used for light fixture whips.
2. May be used for final equipment connections, such as transformers, motors and
HVAC equipment.
3. Total length not to exceed 72” above ceiling, 48” exposed below ceiling.
4. Exposed only in interior mechanical or electrical rooms.
5. For renovation work, may be used in existing walls only under the following
conditions:
a. The use of EMT or rigid conduit is not feasible.
b. Written permission has been obtained from the engineer.
c. Surface mounted conduit is not desired.
6. Installation in or under the floor slab will not be accepted.

90 Percent
2.1.7 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFC)
A. Spiral-wound, square-locked, hot-dipped galvanized steel strip plus a bonded outer

jacket of PVC.
B. Fittings:
1. Cadmium plated, compression type, malleable iron. Hot-dipped galvanized,
compression type, malleable iron. To be insulated throat at terminations.
2. Aluminum - Copper free (1% or less)
C. Usage:
1. Exterior equipment - 5' 0" Maximum length
2. Kitchen equipment - 4' 0" Maximum length
2.1.8 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Metallic Conduits: American Conduit, Pittsburgh, Alflex, AFC, Wheatland, Allied,

Omega, Spang, and Nepco.
B. Nonmetallic Conduits: Carlon, Sedco, and Can-Tex.
C. PVC Coated Metallic Conduits: Plasti-Bond, Perma-Cote, and KorKap.
D. Fittings: Madison, Hubbell, Raco, Regal, Appleton, Thomas & Betts, Steel City, and
ECN Korns.
E. Others: As listed with products.
2.2 WIREWAYS
A. Not less than 16 gauge sheet steel. Cross section dimensions not less than 4 inches
by 4 inches, or as noted. ANSI gray epoxy paint over rust-inhibiting prime coat. NEMA
rated. Large enclosed surface metal raceway used where conduit is not accessible,
or use of conduit is not feasible.
B. Manufacturers: Square D., Hoffman
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Place sleeves in the cavities of walls and floor slabs for the free passage of conduits.
B. Set sleeves in place a sufficient time ahead of concrete placement so as not to delay
the work.
C. Apply caulking for sleeves through floors and through exterior walls.
D. Be sure that plugs or caps are installed before concrete placement begins.

90 Percent
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1 CONDUITS
A. Metallic conduits must be continuous between enclosures such as outlet, junction and
pull boxes, panels, cabinets, motor control centers, etc. The conduit must enter and
be secured to enclosures so that each system is electrically continuous throughout.
Where knockouts are used, provide double locknuts, one on each side. At conduit
terminations, provide insulated throat fittings. Where conduits terminate in equipment
having a ground bus, such as in switchgear, and panelboards, provide conduit with
an insulated grounding bushing.
B. Install conduit and tubing products as indicated, in accordance with applicable

requirements of NEC and the NECA "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function.
C. Cap open ends of raceways until conductors are installed.
D. Wherever possible and unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, install conduit
concealed in walls, partitions and above the ceiling. Install conduit exposed in ceiling
area at the structure in electrical rooms, mechanical rooms and other rooms where
ceilings are not present or scheduled.
E. In mechanical rooms install conduit to equipment not adjacent to walls, by dropping

conduits exposed from overhead.
F. Install conduits parallel and supported on Unistrut or equal trapezes and anchored
with split ring hangers, conduit straps or other devices specifically designed for the
purpose. Wire ties are not permitted. Do not support conduit from ceiling system
supports.
G. Installation of the PVC Coated Conduit System shall be performed in accordance with
the Manufacturer's Installation Manual. All clamping, cutting, threading, bending, and
assembly instructions listed in the manufacturer's installation guide should be
followed To assure correct installation, the installer shall be certified by Manufacturer
to install coated conduit.
H. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit on the roof shall be securely fastened in place by
an approved means within 12 inches of each box, cabinet, conduit body, or other
conduit termination, and shall be supported and secured at intervals not to exceed
4.5 feet. Flexible conduit cannot lay on roof.
I. Have rigid nonmetallic conduit adequately solvent welded at joints to form a tight,
waterproof connection. Run green ground wire in all PVC conduit and extend to
ground bus.
J. Run concealed conduit as directly and with the largest radius bends as possible. Run
exposed conduit parallel or at right angles to building or other construction lines in a
neat and orderly manner. Conceal conduit in finished areas. Branch circuits installed

90 Percent
in or under slabs on grade will not be accepted unless noted on drawings. Branch
circuits shall be installed below floor slabs above first floor.
K. Install each entire conduit system complete before pulling in any conductors. Clean
the interior of every run of conduit before pulling in conductors. See Section 26 05 19
Conductors for additional requirements for installation of conductors in raceways.
L. Conduit and raceways shall be suspended from building structure, not from ceiling
suspension system.
M. Make bends with standard ells or conduit bent in accordance with the NEC. Make
field bends using equipment designed for the particular conduit material and size
involved. Bends must be free from dents or flattening. Use no more than the
equivalent of four 90-degree bends in any run between terminals and cabinets, or
between outlets and junction boxes or pull boxes.
N. Securely fasten and support all conduit runs. Provide required clamps,
straps, clips, hangers and brackets. Raceways run in joists shall be secured to joists
with clamps at 20'0" maximum spacing. Raceways run parallel to joists shall be
supported by caddy clips (1 inch or smaller) or in unistrut/threaded rods/beam clamps
trapeze at 15'-0" centers. Raceways run perpendicular to bottom of joists shall be
secured with individual conduit hangers at 10'-0" maximum spacing or
unistrut/threaded rods/beam clamps at 15'-0" maximum centers. Raceways
supported by straps at walls shall be supported per NEC. Support all raceways within
one foot of each box, cabinet, disconnect, bend or other raceway termination.
O. Run flexible conduit to all recessed fluorescent fixtures in accessible ceilings. Do not
use more than 4 flexible metal conduits per junction box to supply light fixtures in a
location. Do not supply a fixture from another with any Raceway or FMC. Suspend
junction boxes and conduits from high roofs with hangers and trapeze.
P. Provide two spare 1 inch conduits stubbed into attic space at flush mounted electrical
cabinets.
Q. Provide a Greenlee #431 or equal (240 lbs.) nylon pulling line in conduits in which
wiring is not installed under this work, such as telephone, signal, and similar systems.
Identify both ends of the line by means of labels or tags reading "Pulling Line".
R. Use expansion-deflection fittings on conduits 2 inches and larger crossing structural

expansion joints and on exposed conduit runs where necessary. Provide bonding
jumpers across fittings in metal raceway systems.
S. Openings around electrical penetrations of fire resistance rated walls, partitions, floors
or ceilings shall be made using approved methods so as to maintain the original fire
resistance rating. See NEC 300-21.
T. See Section 26 21 00 for additional requirements for conduit at the electrical service.

90 Percent
3.2.2 WIREWAYS
A. Install wireways, where noted or required. Field apply a 90 percent grey zinc paint
coating over cuts or scratches before any other finish is applied.
3.2.3 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Install surface raceways, where noted or required. At metallic raceways, field apply a
90 percent zinc paint coating to cuts or scratches before any other finish is applied.
3.2.4 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
A. This contractor shall provide all raceways and conduits for all communication systems
shown and/or required on the drawings. Communication Systems may include but are
not limited to fire alarms, intercoms, telephones, television, security, computer data,
antenna and media management.
B. This contractor shall provide a conduit pathway above ceiling for fire alarm, data, av
systems, etc. between all spaces and the corridor, where walls go to deck. Coordinate
exact conduit size (1” to 2”) and quantity with low voltage contractors and installers.
C. Raceways and conduit requirements shall be coordinated by this contractor with each
Communication Systems Contractor and the general contractor.
D. See Specification Divisions 27 and 28 for additional requirements.
3.3 COLOR CODING
A. Provide color bands approximately two inches wide, applied at 10 foot centers and at
pull box locations.
B. Color Codes:
1. Fire Alarm System Red
2. Voice/Data Blue
3. Security System Green
4. Media Management Yellow
5. CATV/MATV Black
3.4 LABELING
A. Type: Write-on markers with a laminating portion for protection. The writing portion
shall be white in color. The laminate portion shall be clear.
B. Installation:
1. Install the write-on markers with the protective laminates securely over the
write-on markers.

90 Percent
2. Install and label the write-on markers and laminates on conduits in accessible attic
space at 4 to 6 inches above the point where the conduit exits the wall. If a conduit
cannot be labeled in this manner, install and label the write-on markers and
laminate behind the cover plate of the systems electrical box.
3. Where a junction box is to be installed for future use, install and label the conduit
on the cover plate as outlined above as to the destination of the raceway
(i.e. panelboard, fire alarm panel, intercom panel, room name etc.).
4. Label all boxes in a legible manner.
C. Systems To Be Labeled:
1. CATV/MATV system
2. Fire Alarm system
3. Voice/Data system
4. Media Management system
5. Security system
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 26 05 33.13
BOXES AND FITTINGS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Outlet boxes
B. Junction boxes
C. Pull and splice boxes
D. Floor boxes
A. Divisions 27 and 28 - Communication Systems
B. Section 26 00 00 - Electrical
C. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NEMA Publication No. OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers

and Box Supports, and Cast Aluminum Covers.
B. ANSI/UL 514 - Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings.
C. NEC 370-23(d)
A. The extent of electrical box and electrical fitting work is indicated by drawings and the
requirements of this section.
B. The types of electrical boxes and fittings required for the project include the following:
1. Outlet boxes
2. Junction boxes
3. Pull boxes
4. Conduit bodies
5. Floor boxes
Boxes and Fittings for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 - 1

90 Percent
1.6 SUBMITTALS

requirements.
B. Include cut sheets of fittings, cover plates, junction boxes, outlet boxes, pull boxes,
floor boxes and extension rings. Provide samples upon specific request.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTLET BOXES
A. Flush Device Boxes

1. Galvanized steel boxes, with extension rings as required. Use 1½ inch deep by
4 inches long, square or rectangular, unless otherwise noted on drawings.
2. Provide galvanized steel interior outlet wiring boxes of the type, shape and size,
including depth of box, to suit each respective location and installation;
constructed with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded holes
with screws for securing box covers or wiring devices.
3. In boxes with multiple switches, where the voltage between adjacent switches
exceeds 300 volts, provide an enclosure equipped with identified, securely
installed barriers between adjacent devices.
B. Exterior or Exposed Device Boxes: Use FS or FD cast boxes with threaded hubs.
C. Interior Lighting Fixture Boxes: Galvanized steel with fixture stud supports and
attachments to properly support ceiling and bracket-type lighting fixtures. Provide
galvanized steel interior outlet wiring boxes of the type, shape and size, including
depth of box, to suit each respective location and installation; constructed with
stamped knockouts in back and sides and with threaded holes with screws for
securing box covers or wiring devices. 1½ inch deep by 4 inches wide octagonal box,
unless otherwise noted.
D. Voice & Data Outlet: Provide back boxes at each voice and data outlet.
Communications wiring, device and plate to be provided by communications
contractor. See Specification Divisions 27 and 28 for additional requirements.
E. Masonry Boxes: Galvanized steel with gang capacity and extension ring covers to
match the number of devices installed.
2.2 JUNCTION, PULL AND SPLICE BOXES
A. Galvanized steel boxes conforming to NEC Article 370.
B. Use NEMA 1 type boxes at least 4 inches deep, interior spaces.
C. Use NEMA 3R type boxes at least 4 inches deep, exterior spaces.

90 Percent
D. Use NEMA 4 cast iron type with external recessed flanged cover when cast in
concrete.
2.3 MANUFACTURERS
A. Appleton
B. Eaton
C. Hoffman
D. Hubbell
E. Keystone
F. Lew
G. Orbit Industries
H. Raceway Components
I. RACO
J. Stahlin
K. Steel City
L. Walker
2.4 POWER AND COMMUNICATIONS FLOOR BOXES:
A. Provide all telecommunications and data plates in each box as specified and noted
on Communications Drawings. See Section 26 05 34 for more information. Floor box
lid color to be black on all RFB2, RFB4 and RFB6 floor boxes. Floor box lid color to
be black on all RFB9 and RFB11 floor boxes.
1. Wiremold RFB2-SS
2. Wiremold RFB4-SS
3. Wiremold RFB6-OG
4. Wiremold RFB9-OG with RFB119 pan, if required
5. Wiremold RFB11-OG with RFB119 pan, if required
B.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 OUTLET BOXES
3.1.1 GENERAL
A. Provide all standard boxes, pull junction, wiring device and/or splice boxes for all

90 Percent
systems in walls and slabs.
B. All low voltage systems in attic or crawl spaces specified in Division 23 are not
included.
C. At all ceiling-mounted receptacle and luminaire (exit light, pendants, linear

direct/indirect, etc.) locations, provide a heavy duty dual bar hanger with ceiling ties
to support the back box. Provide Cooper Industries BA50F or approved equal with
appropriate back box for the application.
3.1.2 FLUSH BOXES
A. Mount all outlet boxes flush within 1/4 inch of the finished wall or ceiling line unless
otherwise indicated. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knock out holes where
knock out holes have been removed. Install outlets flush with finish walls or ceiling
surfaces for concealed wiring.
B. Provide galvanized steel extension rings where required to extend the box forward in
conformance to NEC requirements. Attach ring with at least two machine screws.
Install electrical boxes and fittings in compliance with NEC requirements and in
accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry
practices to ensure that the boxes and fittings serve the intended purposes.
C. Locate boxes and conduit bodies so as to ensure accessibility of electrical wiring.
Install blank cover plates, painted to match surrounding, at pull boxes, junction boxes
and all others to which no fixture or device is to be attached.
D. Securely fasten outlet boxes in position using clips or other suitable means. Secure
boxes rigidly to the substrate upon which they are being mounted. Solidly embed
boxes in concrete or masonry. Boxes shall not be permitted to move laterally, or to
be supported only by EMT or conduit.
E. Provide plaster rings for all boxes in plastered walls and ceilings.
F. Where more than one switch occurs at the same location, use multiple gang outlet
boxes covered by a single plate. Separate switches ganged in one box by a grounded
metal barrier where system voltage exceeds 150 volts to ground. Fittings shall be
approved for grounding purposes or shall be jumpered with a copper grounding
conductor of appropriate ampacity. Leave terminations of such jumpers exposed. Use
masonry type boxes with square corners in unplastered tile walls to allow tile to be
sawed out neatly around box. Plates shall cover any cracks between box and tile. Use
oversize plates where necessary.
3.1.3 LIGHTING FIXTURE BOXES
A. Do not install boxes for suspended lighting fixtures which are attached to and
supported from suspended ceilings. Coordinate all lighting fixture outlets with
mechanical and architectural equipment and elements to eliminate conflicts and
provide a workable neat installation. Install approved 3/8" fixture studs in outlets from
which lights are suspended, fastened through from back of box. Anchor outlet boxes
and particularly those supporting fixtures, securely in place in an approved manner.

90 Percent
Support outlet boxes and fixtures from building structures, not from ceiling material.
Provide yokes, channels, studs or other supporting materials as required.
B. At all exit luminaires installed in grid ceilings (T-grid), provide a Cooper Industries
BA50F or approved equal.
3.1.4 WALL MOUNTING HEIGHT
A. Mounting height of a wall-mounted outlet box means the height from finished floor to
bottom of box.
B. Where outlets are indicated adjacent to each other, mount these outlets in a
symmetrical pattern with all tops at the same elevation.
C. Remove and relocate any outlet box placed in an unsuitable location.
3.1.5 BACK-TO-BACK BOXES
A. Do not connect outlet boxes back to back unless prior approval from Engineer is
obtained.
B. Where such a connection is necessary to complete a particular installation, fill the

voids around the wire between the boxes with sound insulating material.
3.1.6 BOX OPENINGS
A. Provide only the openings necessary to accommodate the conduits at each individual
location.
3.2 JUNCTION, PULL AND SPLICE BOXES
3.2.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install boxes as required to facilitate cable installation in raceway systems.
B. Provide boxes in conduit runs of more than 100 feet or as required in Division 26.
C. Locate boxes strategically and make them of such shape to permit easy pulling of
wire or cables.
D. Locate exposed pull or junction boxes subject to the owner's representative’s

approval. Protect boxes in such a manner as to prevent foreign material, such as
plaster, from entering boxes. Boxes shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign materials
before pulling conductors.
E. Install and support boxes per NEC 314-23 as required and as directed.
3.2.2 COVERS
A. Provide boxes so that covers are readily accessible and easily removable after

90 Percent
completion of the installation.
B. Include suitable access doors for boxes above suspended ceilings.
C. Select a practical size for each box and cover.
D. Label covers with permanent "black" felt-tip marker. Circuit numbers shall be provided
on power covers.
E. Spray paint fire alarm covers red.
3.3 POWER AND COMMUNICATIONS FLOOR BOXES:
A. Provide and install all wiring, devices, back boxes, covers, plates, conduit and
hardware as required for a complete installation. Do not daisy-chain floor boxes with
conduits unless otherwise noted on drawings. See Section 26 27 26 for wiring devices
to go in floor boxes.
1. Wiremold RFB2-SS. Provide and install one duplex isolated-ground outlet and
associated wiring per general notes on drawings. Provide power to outlet using
circuit shown on plans. Provide one 1” conduit from this box to nearest wall and
then up to accessible attic space for power. Provide one 1-1/4” conduit from this
box to nearest wall and then up to accessible attic space for data and
telecommunications wiring.
2. Wiremold RFB4-SS. Provide and install two duplex isolated-ground outlets and
associated wiring per general notes on drawings. Provide power to outlets using
circuits shown on plans. Provide one 1” conduit from this box to nearest wall and
then up to accessible attic space for power. Provide one 1-1/4” conduit from this
box to nearest wall and then up to accessible attic space for data and
telecommunications wiring.
3. Wiremold RFB6-OG. Provide and install three duplex isolated-ground outlets and
associated wiring per general notes on drawings. Provide power to outlets in
equal groups using circuits shown on plans. Provide two 1” conduits from this
box to nearest wall and then up to accessible attic space for power. Provide two
1-1/4” conduits from this box to nearest wall and then up to accessible attic space
for data and telecommunications wiring.
4. Wiremold RFB9-OG with RFB119 pan, if required. Provide and install six duplex
isolated-ground outlets and associated wiring per general notes on drawings.
Provide power to outlets in equal groups using circuits shown on plans. Provide
three 1” conduits from this box to nearest wall and then up to accessible attic
space for power. Provide three 1-1/4” conduits from this box to nearest wall and
then up to accessible attic space for data and telecommunications wiring.
5. Wiremold RFB11-OG with RFB119 pan, if required. Provide and install seven
duplex isolated-ground outlets and associated wiring per general notes on
drawings. Provide power to outlets in equal groups using circuits shown on plans.
Provide three 1” conduits from this box to nearest wall and then up to accessible
attic space for power. Provide four 1-1/4” conduits from this box to nearest wall
and then up to accessible attic space for data and telecommunications wiring.
3.4 LOCATION OF BOXES

90 Percent
A. The approximate location of boxes for switches, light outlets, power outlets, etc. is
indicated on the plans. These drawings, however, may not give complete and
accurate information in regard to locations of such items. The exact locations shall be
determined by reference to the general building plans and by actual measurements
during construction of the building, subject to the Architect's approval.
B. The Owner's representative reserves the right to make reasonable changes, up to six
feet, in the indicated locations before work is roughed in, without additional charge.
C. Unless otherwise shown or specified, install boxes for switches 44" and receptacles
18" above finished floor. Verify all door swings with the drawings and schedules and
locate switches and pull stations, unless specifically noted otherwise, on the strike
side of the door. If switch is indicated on hinged side of door, verify location with the
Owners Representative.
D. Where shown near doors, install wall switches shall be ganged in multiples as
required covered by a single multigang cover plate. Where convenience outlets,
telephone outlets, or data processing equipment outlets are near each other, outlet
boxes shall be joined or otherwise placed so that they are all the same level. Device
plates shall match for all outlets.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 26 05 34
PROVISIONS FOR COMMUNICATION, SECURITY AND SAFETY SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDES

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to this Section.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to provide and install in his
base proposal all conduit systems, raceways, standard electrical boxes, operating
power, and other provisions for all communication, security, and safety systems as
outlined in the drawings and specifications.
A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems
B. Section 26 05 33.11 - Raceways and Conduits For Electrical Systems
C. Section 26 05 33.13 - Boxes and Fittings For Electrical Systems
D. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems
E. Division 27 - Communications
F. Division 28 - Electronic Security and Safety
G. Any requirements for additional systems indicated by the plans and specifications.
A. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
B. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code.
C. NFPA 90A, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
D. NFPA 101, Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures.
E. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
F. ANSI/EIA/TIA-569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways

and Spaces.
G. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications.
Provisions for Communication, Security and Safety Systems 26 05 34 - 1

90 Percent
H. ASME/ANSI A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators
I. Americans with Disabilities Act.
J. Texas Accessibility Standards.
K. International Building Codes (IBC).
L. Local and State Building Codes.
M. All requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal procedures: See Section 26 00 90.

1. A submittal may be electronically transmitted in PDF file format (preferred) or
paper copies may be provided in quantities indicated in Division 1. Paper copies
shall be organized including index tabs in a 3-ring black binder of sufficient size.
B. Product Data:
1. Drawing location all components to be supplied indicating circuit routing, cable
type, and gauge.
2. Product data including special boxes, cable, and other material as requested by
the Architect as follows:
a. A cover sheet with the name and location of the project, the name, address,
and telephone number of the Contractor, and the name, address, and
telephone number of the submitting sub-contractor. Include on or after the
cover sheet sufficient space for review stamps.
b. Indicate any deviations from Contract Document requirements, including
variations and limitations. Show any revisions to equipment layout required
by use of selected equipment.
c. A product data index and complete equipment list including for each product
d. Cut-sheets or catalog data illustrating the physical appearance, size,
function, compatibility, standards compliance, and other relevant
characteristics of each product on the equipment list. Indicate by prominent
notation (an arrow, circle, or other means) on each sheet the exact product
and options being submitted.
e. Submit design data, when the scope of work requires, including calculations,
f. Submit shop or coordination drawings, when the scope of work requires,
including accurate to scale device layouts, diagrams, and schedules
specifically prepared to illustrate the submitted portion of work. Shop
drawings shall include information to allow to the Contractor to coordinate
interdisciplinary work and when necessary guide the manufacturer or
fabricator in producing the product.
g. Any resubmittal shall include a complete revised equipment list and any
product data that is revised.

90 Percent
C. Submit complete submittal package within 30 calendar days after award of this work
for approval. Equipment is not to be ordered without approval. Partial submittals are
not acceptable for review. Each submittal shall include a dated transmittal.
1.5 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND EQUIPMENT FOR COMMUNICATION, SECURITY, AND

SAFETY SYSTEMS
A. Electrical Contractor to provide in the base proposal:

1. Provisions for all communications, security, and safety systems equipment
(furnished under Division 26, Division 27, Division 28, a Division 1 allowance, or
by the Owner).
2. Provide building interconnect and service entry conduit as indicated on drawings.
3. Provide equipment mounting boards as indicated on drawings.
4. Provide line voltage operating power outlets and direct connection to all
communications, security, and safety equipment as required.
5. Provide ground conductors and bonding to the building grounding system for all
communications, security, and safety equipment panels and racks.
6. Provide all required standard back boxes and raceways / conduit as required for
cabling accessibility for devices furnished by communications, security, and
safety contractors.
7. Provide full conduit for all communications, security, and safety cabling that would
be exposed areas such as gyms, stages, field houses, or shop areas, and other
areas as directed and as required.
8. Provide installation of special boxes and equipment cabinets furnished by
communications, security, and safety contractor(s).
1.6 COMMUNICATIONS, SECURITY, AND SAFETY CONTRACTOR(S) TO PROVIDE

(UNDER DIVISION 26, DIVISION 27, DIVISION 28, A DIVISION 1 ALLOWANCE, OR
BY THE OWNER)
A. Communications, security, and safety systems complete with equipment, cabling,

special backboxes, hardware, and all other required devices.
B. Furnish special boxes in timely manner to the electrical contractor for installation as
required.
C. Provide and install prior to cable installation plastic snap in bushings at each box
opening, passage through a metal stud, and at the end of all open conduit stubs or
sleeves to protect the cabling from damage.
D. Attachments for all communications cable to be supported from the building structure
and bundled. Coordinate raceway, power, and outlet requirements with general and
E. Attachments to support from the building structure and bundle all communications
cable.
F. Coordinate raceway, power, and outlet requirements with Builder and Electrical
Contractor.

90 Percent
G. Final connection to the fire alarm system of duct mounted smoke detectors. Detector
housings, and control relays are to be mounted by the Division 23 Contractor.
H. Provide all required materials, equipment, tools, scaffolding, labor, and transportation
necessary for the complete installation of the communications, security, and safety
systems as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
I. It is the intent of these specifications to provide complete installations although each

item necessary is not specifically mentioned or shown.
1.7 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A. Contractors shall make no agreement that obligates the Owner to pay any company
providing communications, monitoring, or other services. Contractors shall not make
selection, purchase, or installation of interconnect instruments/equipment to be used
on this project.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with Owner requirements and provide accordingly.
B. Coordinate with Division 27 and Division 28 Contractor requirements and provide

accordingly.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COMMUNICATIONS, SECURITY, AND SAFETY SYSTEMS
A. Conduit and Backboxes:

1. Raceways will be used to route all communications cabling to accessible spaces.
Conduit (metal conduit where fire rated) in attic space is required at wall
penetrations, HVAC ducts, plenums, or other environmental air spaces (i.e.
non-ducted return air ventilation systems) per NEC Article 800.
2. Conduit is required in attic space only for accessibility. Communications cabling
shall be run open bundled and supported from structure by the communications,
security, and safety contractor.
3. Conduit shall be provided in through the floor sleeves for communications cable
risers as indicated on plans or required.
4. Provide 1" size conduit minimum for data and combination devices, or sized as
noted or required from junction box at devices to accessible attic space.
5. All wiring shall be enclosed in conduit in all visible or exposed areas such as
gymnasiums, play areas, field houses, shop areas, platforms, or stages.
6. All communications conduit to floor boxes shall be 1" minimum rigid conduit.
7. All conduit, duct, track, and raceway runs shall be spaced apart to allow for
maintenance, such as the installation of couplings, without disturbing adjacent
pathways.
2.2 BUILDING INTERCONNECT AND SERVICE ENTRY CONDUIT INSTALLATION

90 Percent
A. Intermediate Pull-Box and Hand-Hole construction shall be fiberglass or polymer-

concrete with a load rating appropriate for the installed location. Each pull-box shall
be an in-ground vault with a surface-level cover and gravel floor. The enclosure
should be sized for the number of conduits and configuration required. Hatch covers
shall be secured with two pentagonal-head bolts. All building interconnect and service
entry conduit ends are to be sealed internally with foam sealant after final cable
installation.
B. Building Interconnect and Service Entry Conduit shall consist of schedule 40 PVC
conduit with all elbows and turns of galvanized rigid steel. All conduit and fittings
above ground shall be galvanized rigid steel. Each conduit run shall be furnished with
pull cords and temporary caps shall be placed on all conduit ends.
1. Service entry conduits shall be stubbed up outside the property line, or if a utility
pole is near, stub up flush with the pole on the opposite side of any power
company risers. Verify exact requirements and location of stub up with the
Owners designated service company.
2. Inside the facility, conduits shall be placed directly below the equipment
backboard and as flush to the wall as possible.
3. Conduit runs in excess of 500' will require intermediate pull-boxes.
4. An intermediate pull-box shall be provided in any run, which has more than two
90° large radius bends, one at each end.
5. Conduit shall be a minimum of 30" below final paving or grade and at least 6" from
any high voltage conduit.
2.3 EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS
A. Provide a 4' x 8' x 3/4" C/D, exterior grade, plywood panel(s) as required, anchored
to wall as required at no less than six points per panel. Equipment backboards are to
be attached to wall studs or internal bracing with 1/4” minimum toggle bolts with
washers. Mount bottom of plywood 24”A.F.F. Plywood shall be new. Paint with fire
retardant paint meeting UL 723 requirements - two full coats - color to be white unless
otherwise directed by Architect.
2.4 GROUNDING
A. In the main telecommunications room (MDF) provide a 1/4" x 4"x 20" to 24” long
copper ground bar with insulated wall mounting brackets - Panduit part number
GB4B0624TPI-1, Newton Instrument Company ordering number 0030560010, or
approved equivalent.
B. In each intermediate (secondary) telecommunications room (IDF) provide a 1/4" x 4"

x 10” to 12" long copper ground bar with insulated wall mounting brackets - Panduit
part number GB4B0612TPI-1, Newton Instrument Company ordering number
0030580010, or approved equivalent.
C. The telecommunications grounding backbone, #2 AWG insulated wire minimum, shall

bond each telecommunications ground bar to the building ground system.
D. Each communications, security, and safety equipment cabinet, panel, amplifier back
box, power supply, and rack shall be bonded to the building ground system with #4

90 Percent
AWG minimum insulated wire, maximum length 20'.
2.5 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide 120-volt power as required to fire alarm system
through separate dedicated branch circuits, maximum 20 amperes. The fire alarm
control panel (FACP), digital communicator (DC), and the signal power expanders
(SPX) combine to form the fire alarm control unit. The FACP, DC, and a SPX, or two
or more SPXs, etc. may be fed from one circuit as long the amperage drawn is within
the limitations of a 20-ampere circuit. Each such circuit breaker shall be labeled in red
at the power distribution panel as FIRE ALARM. A breaker panel key shall be stored
within the locked cabinet of each fire alarm control unit. The location of all circuit
breakers serving the fire alarm control unit shall be posted in the fire alarm control
unit cabinets. Each cabinet shall be grounded securely to the building grounding
system.
B. Line voltage, 120 VAC, fire safety control circuits shall in all cases be of "fail safe"
operation and shall not have backup power. On activation of the fire alarm, or loss of
power, all connected devices shall actuate to their fire safety condition (i.e. HVAC
blower control relays shall open, smoke fire dampers shall close, and fire door holders
shall release). These circuits shall be controlled by a power relay located within three
feet of the breaker panel. Control relays shall be located within three feet of the unit
controlled. The power relay shall feature properly rated electrical contacts for a 120
VAC, 20-ampere circuit. These circuits shall be switched by a power relay controlled
by the fire alarm system and wired by the Electrical Contractor. Line voltage control
circuits shall be standard non-supervised line voltage circuits in conduit, with the same
type of conductors as specified in Division 26 for light and power circuits.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide only materials that are new, of the type and quality specified.
B. Coordinate with and provide all Owner requirements.
C. Cabinets and backboxes are to be level and square to wall.
D. Conduit and cable support systems shall be complete with bushings, de-burred,
cleaned, and secure prior to installation of cable.
E. Wiring and equipment installation shall be in accordance with good engineering

practices as established by the EIA and the NEC. Wiring shall meet all state and local
electrical codes. All wiring shall test free from all grounds and shorts.
F. Permanently mark all cables and install in a professional, neat, and orderly
installation.
3.2 DRAWINGS

90 Percent
A. All cables shall have both ends labeled and included in the as built documentation.
B. All cable or conduit paths and wiring methodology shall be documented.
3.3 WARRANTY
A. The contractor shall provide a warranty of the installed equipment against defects in
material or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial
completion. Any equipment or wiring shown to be defective shall be replaced,
repaired, or adjusted free of charge. All labor and materials shall be provided at no
expense to the Owner.
B. All equipment will carry a one year warranty or manufacturer's warranty whichever is
greater.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Identification required for electrical systems.
provided.
1.1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

Section.
B. See the following sections for related work.

2. Section 26 00 90 - Electrical Submittal Procedures
3. Section 26 21 00 - Low Voltage Electrical Service Entrance
4. Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards For Distribution Switchgear
5. Section 26 28 16 - Enclosed Safety Switches and Circuit Breakers
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.2.1 PRODUCT DATA

with the General Conditions, Division 1 and Division 26, Section 26 00 90
requirements.
B. Submit product data for sign materials. Refer to Electrical Identification detail on
drawings for additional information.
1.2.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL SUBMITTALS
A. After the owner’s room number list is finalized, submit a list of all electrical
identification tags. The list shall include the actual text that will appear on each tag.
Include the owner’s and architects room numbers on all tags. This list shall be
submitted for the review of the owner and architect.
Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 1

90 Percent
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Sign Materials:
1. Type:
a. Engraving-Stock
b. Melamine plastic laminate
2. Thickness:
a. Less than 25 square inches:
(1) 1/16 inch
b. 25 square inches or more:
(1) 1/8 inch
3. Color: Black Conform to FS L-P-287
B. Lettering:
1. Style: Engraved standard print, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Size: 3/16 inch to 1/4 inch
3. Color: White
2.2 SIGN INFORMATION:
A. Panelboard (New ):
1. Data:
a. Panelboard designation
b. Voltage, phase and wires
c. Source of service
2. Example:
a. CHAC
b. 277/480V., 3-phase, 4-wire
c. Fed from MDP
B. Switchboard:
1. Data:
a. Switchboard designation
b. Source of service
c. Panel type
d. Style
e. Amperage
f. Neutral amperage
g. Voltage of each branch circuit designation.
h. Phase and wires.
2. Example:
a. DPC – 277/480V.
b. 3 phase
c. 4 wire
d. Fed from MDP
C. Safety Switches:
1. Data:

90 Percent
a. Switch or load served designation.

b. Voltage and phase.
2. Example: In the following example, the text in parenthesis does not go on the
actual tag. It is for clarification only.
a. #112 (Owner’s Room Number)
b. A/C #C206 (Architect’s Room Number)
c. Circ. CHAC-15
d. 480V.
e. 3 phase
D. Time Clocks:
1. Data:
a. Time clock load(s) served
b. Voltage and phase
c. Source of service
2. Examples:
a. Parking Lot Lights
b. 480V.
c. Single Phase
d. Fed from CH-15
E. Soffit Lights
1. 277V.
2. Fed from CH-21
F. Water Heater:
1. 208V.
2. Single phase
3. Fed from AL2-25
G. Electrical Riser Diagram Signs:

1. Material:
a. Provide laminated copy of electrical riser diagram and screw to wall in each
electrical room.
2. Size:
a. Minimum: 12" x 17"
b. Maximum: 30” x 42”
3. Provide a riser diagram in each electrical room similar to the riser diagram shown
on the plans, and/or as required for the area served.
H. Device Engraving:
1. Any switch for load that is not in sight of the equipment served: custom engrave
on outside of switch cover plate.
2. Custom engrave switch function when called for on the plans.
I. Panelboard Directory:
1. For each panelboard, provide a directory-frame mounted inside the door with
heat-resistant transparent face and a directory card for identifying the load served.
2. Identify circuits by equipment served on by room numbers where room numbers
exist. Room numbers shall be as directed by Owner.

90 Percent
3. Verify nomenclature at job site.

4. Directory shall be typed, shall coordinate with panel breaker and be neat.
5. Indicate spares and spaces with erasable pencil.
J. Refer to Section 26 24 16 (Panelboards for Distribution Switchgear) and Section

26 21 00 (Low Voltage Electrical Service Entrance).
K. Nameplate Fasteners:
1. Securely attach nameplates to equipment with non-corroding stainless steel
screws.
2. Non-corroding pop rivets are acceptable.
3. Stick-ons or adhesives will not be allowed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate with the architect to obtain a list of the finalized owner’s room number list.
B. Prepare the quality control submittal of tag data as described in the Submittals article
of this specification.
C. After the submittal has been reviewed without comment by the architect and the
owner, proceed to order the identification tags.
D. Tags with incorrect data that have not been reviewed without comment by the
architect and owner do not comply with these specifications.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Provide signs for equipment requiring identification as shown on drawings and for
equipment as required by National Electric Code.
B. Provide for each main disconnect not grouped together.
C. Refer to Section 26 28 16 for Enclosed Safety Switches and Circuit Breakers.
D. Install signs on outside of cover for safety switches and time clocks.
E. Install signs on outside top, not on door, and at each circuit for panelboards,
switchboards and motor control centers.
F. Label spares and blank spares in light, erasable pencil.
G. Mount in an easily visible location.
H. All labeling identification shall contain both the owner’s and architect’s room names
and numbers. Coordinate with General Contractor to secure construction room
numbers.

90 Percent
I. Provide all additional signage required by local authority at no cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 26 08 00
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Commissioning:
1. Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all building systems
perform interactively according to the design intent and the owner’s operational
needs. Commissioning during the construction phase is intended to achieve the
following specific objectives according to the Contract Documents:
a. Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations and to industry accepted minimum
standards and that they receive adequate operational checkout by installing
contractors.
b. Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems.
c. Verify that O&M documentation is complete.
d. Verify that the Owner’s operating personnel are adequately trained
2. The systems to be commissioned include: electrical switchgear and panels,
emergency power systems (if included), UPS Systems (if included), electrical and
lighting controls, fire alarm system, and life safety systems and controls.
3. Commissioning requires the participation of affected Division contractors to
ensure that all systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Contract
Documents. All affected Division contractors shall be familiar with all parts of the
commissioning plan issued by the CA (Commissioning Authority) and shall
execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract
Documents.
4. Commissioning Team:
a. The members of the commissioning team consist of the Commissioning
Authority (CA), the designated representative of the owner, the General
Contractor (GC or Contractor), the Architect and Design Engineers, the
Mechanical Contractor (MC), the Electrical Contractor (EC), the Controls
Contractor (CC), the Fire Alarm Contractor, and any other installing
subcontractors or suppliers of equipment. The Owner’s building or plant
operator/engineer is also a member of the commissioning team.
1.2 COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY
A. The commissioning authority and/or agency shall be selected and employed by the
building owner. The commissioning agent shall be a licensed professional engineer
in the State where the work will be performed and shall be experienced in the
commissioning of mechanical and electrical systems of the type installed in this
project. Experience in construction process, direct digital control systems, test and
balance and ASHRAE Guideline 1 – 1998 is mandatory. The commissioning agent
shall not be associated with or employed by a mechanical contractor, or equipment
supplier.
Commissioning of Electrical Systems 26 08 00 - 1

90 Percent
1.3 COMMISSIONING PLAN:

A. Commissioning Plan:
1. The commissioning plan provides guidance in the execution of the
commissioning process. Just after the initial commissioning scoping meeting the
CA will provide the plan, which will continue to evolve and expand as the project
progresses. The Specifications will take precedence over the Commissioning
Plan.
B. Commissioning Process:
1. The following narrative provides a brief overview of the typical commissioning
tasks during construction and the general order in which they occur.
2. Commissioning during construction begins with a scoping meeting conducted by
the CA where the commissioning process is reviewed with the commissioning
team members.
3. Additional meetings will be required throughout construction, scheduled by the
CA with necessary parties attending, to plan, scope, coordinate, schedule future
activities and resolve problems. Generally, these meetings will be included with
or will be sequential with regular subcontractor meetings.
4. Equipment documentation is submitted to the CA during normal submittals,
including detailed start-up procedures.
5. The CA works with the Subs in developing startup plans and startup
documentation formats, including prefunctional checklists to be completed,
during the startup process.
6. In general, the checkout and performance verification proceeds from simple to
complex; from component level to equipment to systems and intersystem levels
with prefunctional checklists being completed before functional testing.
7. The Subcontractors, under their own direction, execute and document the
prefunctional checklists and perform startup and initial checkout. The CA
documents that the checklists and startup were completed according to the
approved plans. This may include the CA witnessing start-up of selected
8. The installing contractors, suppliers and manufacturers, develops specific
equipment and system functional performance test procedures with the
assistance of the CA.
9. The procedures are executed by the Subcontractors, under the direction of, and
documented by the CA.
10. Items of non-compliance in material, installation or setup are corrected at the
Subcontractor’s expense and the system retested.
11. The CA reviews the O&M documentation for completeness. All O&M
documentation must be submitted and approved before the start of training.
12. Commissioning shall be completed before Substantial Completion.
13. The CA reviews, pre-approves and coordinates the training provided by the Subs
and verifies that it was completed.
14. Deferred testing is conducted, as specified or required.

90 Percent
1.4 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. General Contractor (GC):

1. Facilitate the coordination of the commissioning work by the CA, and with the CA
ensure that commissioning activities are being scheduled into the master
schedule.
2. Include the cost of commissioning in the contract price.
3. Furnish a copy of all construction documents, addenda, change orders and
approved submittals and shop drawings related to commissioned equipment to
the CA.
4. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal
data, Systems/O&M data, commissioning tasks and training.
5. Ensure that all Subs execute their commissioning responsibilities according to
the Contract Documents and schedule.
6. A representative shall attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other
necessary meetings scheduled by the CA to facilitate the Commissioning
process.
7. Coordinate the training of owner personnel.
8. Prepare Systems/O&M manuals and Systems manuals, according to the
Contract Documents, including clarifying and updating the original sequences of
operation to as-built conditions.
B. Warranty Period:
1. Ensure that Subcontractors execute seasonal or deferred functional performance
testing, witnessed by the CA, according to the specifications.
2. Ensure that Subs correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M
manuals and as-built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal
testing.
C. Electrical Contractors and Sub-Contractors:

1. The commissioning responsibilities applicable to each of the subcontractors are
generally as follows (all references apply to commissioned equipment only).
Specific requirements are shown in the appropriate Divisions.
2. Construction and Acceptance Phases
a. Include the cost of commissioning in the contract price.
b. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for
submittal data, commissioning documentation, Systems/O&M data and
training.
c. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other meetings necessary to
facilitate the Commissioning process.
d. Contractors shall provide the CA with normal cut sheets and shop drawing
submittals of commissioned equipment as part of the normal submittal
process.
e. Provide additional requested documentation, prior to normal O&M manual
submittals, to the CA for development of start-up and functional testing
procedures.
(1) Typically this will include detailed manufacturer installation and start-up,
operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details of
any owner-contracted tests, full factory testing reports, if any, and full
warranty information, including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep

90 Percent
the warranty in force clearly identified. In addition, the installation, start-

up and checkout materials that are actually shipped inside the
equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the
factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Commissioning
Authority.
(2) The Commissioning Authority may request further documentation
necessary for the commissioning process.
f. Provide a copy of the Systems/O&M manuals and submittals of
commissioned equipment, through normal channels, to the CA for review
and approval.
g. Contractors shall assist (along with the design engineers) in clarifying the
operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the
specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient
for writing detailed testing procedures.
h. Provide assistance to the CA in preparing the specific functional
performance test procedures. Subs shall review test procedures to ensure
feasibility, safety and equipment protection and provide necessary written
alarm limits to be used during the tests.
i. Develop a full start-up and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s start-
up procedures and the prefunctional checklists from the CA for all
commissioned equipment. Submit to CA for review and approval prior to
startup.
j. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the prefunctional
checklists for all commissioned equipment.
k. Perform and clearly document all completed startup and system operational
checkout procedures, providing a copy to the CA.
l. Address current A/E punch list items before functional testing
m. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to execute
the functional performance tests. Ensure that they are available and present
during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the
necessary tests, adjustments and problem solving.
n. Perform functional performance testing under the direction of the CA for
specified equipment. Assist the CA in interpreting the monitoring data, as
necessary.
o. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed
performance) as interpreted by the CA, and A/E and retest the equipment.
p. Prepare Systems/O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents,
including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-
built conditions.
q. Prepare redline as-built drawings for all drawings and final as-builds for
contractor-generated coordination drawings.
r. Provide training of the Owner’s operating personnel as specified.
s. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific
requirements to maintain the validity of the warranty.
D. Warranty Period:
1. Execute seasonal or deferred functional performance testing, witnessed by the
CA, according to the specifications.
2. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-
built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.

90 Percent
E. Equipment Suppliers:
specific responsibilities of the Owner to keep warranties in force.
2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with Subs.
3. Include all special tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to
a piece of equipment) required for testing equipment according to these Contract
Documents in the base bid price to the Contractor, except for stand-alone data
logging equipment that may be used by the CA.
4. Provide information requested by CA regarding equipment sequence of operation
and testing procedures.
5. Review test procedures for equipment installed by factory representatives.
F. Commissioning Authority (CA):

1. The CA is not responsible for design concept, design criteria, compliance with
codes, design or general construction scheduling, cost estimating, or
construction management. The CA may assist with problem-solving non-
conformance or deficiencies, but ultimately that responsibility resides with the
general contractor and the A/E. The primary role of the CA is to develop and
coordinate the execution of a testing plan, observe and document performance -
that systems are functioning in accordance with the documented design intent
and in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractors will provide all
tools or the use of tools to start, checkout and functionally test equipment and
systems, except for specified testing equipment supplied and installed by the CA.
a. Coordinates and directs the commissioning activities in a logical, sequential
and efficient manner using consistent protocols and forms, centralized
documentation, clear and regular communications and consultations with all
necessary parties, frequently updated timelines and schedules and technical
expertise.
b. Coordinate the commissioning work and, with the GC, ensure that
commissioning activities are being scheduled into the master schedule.
c. Revise, as necessary, Commissioning Plan—Construction Phase.
d. Plan and conduct a commissioning scoping meeting.
e. Request and review additional information required to perform
commissioning tasks, including Systems/O&M materials, contractor start-up
and checkout procedures.
f. Before startup, gather and review the current control sequences and
interlocks and work with contractors and design engineers until sufficient
clarity has been obtained, in writing, to be able to write detailed testing
procedures.
g. Review and approve normal Contractor submittals applicable to systems
being commissioned for compliance with commissioning needs, along with
A/E reviews.
h. Perform site visits, as necessary, to observe component and system
installations. Attend selected planning and job-site meetings to obtain
information on construction progress. Review construction meeting minutes
for revisions/substitutions relating to the commissioning process. Assist in
resolving any discrepancies.

90 Percent
i. Approve pre-functional tests and checklist completion by reviewing

prefunctional checklist reports and by selected site observation and spot
checking.
j. Approve systems startup by reviewing start-up reports and by selected site
observation.
k. Review the functional performance test procedures for equipment and
systems developed by the subcontractors and suppliers. This may include
energy management control system trending, or manual functional testing.
l. Coordinate, witness and approve manual functional performance tests
performed by installing contractors. Coordinate retesting as necessary until
satisfactory performance is achieved.
m. Review equipment warranties to ensure that the Owner’s responsibilities are
clearly defined.
n. Oversee and approve the training of the Owner’s operating personnel.
o. Compile and maintain a commissioning record.
p. Review and approve the preparation of the Systems/O&M manuals.
q. Provide a final commissioning report.
G. Warranty Period:
1. Coordinate and supervise required seasonal or deferred testing and deficiency
corrections.
2. Return to the site at 10 months into the 12-month warranty period and review
with facility staff the current building operation and the condition of outstanding
issues. Also interview facility staff and identify problems or concerns they have
operating the building as originally intended. Make suggestions for improvements
and for recording these changes in the Systems/O&M manuals. Identify areas
that may come under warranty or under the original construction contract. Assist
facility staff in developing reports, documents and requests for services to
remedy outstanding problems.
H. Scheduling:
1. The CA will work with the GC according to established protocols to schedule the
commissioning activities. The CA will provide sufficient notice to the CM and GC
for scheduling commissioning activities. The GC will integrate all commissioning
activities into the master schedule. All parties will address scheduling problems
and make necessary notifications in a timely manner in order to expedite the
commissioning process.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and
required functional performance testing shall be provided by the Division contractor
for the equipment being tested.
B. Special equipment, tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a
piece of equipment) required for testing equipment, according to these Contract
Documents shall be included in the base bid price to the Contractor and left on site.

90 Percent
C. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure
system performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 MEETINGS
A. Scoping Meeting:
1. Within 90 days of commencement of construction, the CA will schedule, plan and
conduct a commissioning scoping meeting with the entire commissioning team
in attendance. Meeting minutes will be distributed to all parties by the GC.
Information gathered from this meeting will allow the CA to revise the
Commissioning Plan to its “final” version, which will also be distributed to all
parties.
B. Miscellaneous Meetings:
1. Other meetings will be planned and conducted by the CA as construction
progresses. These meetings will cover coordination, deficiency resolution and
planning issues with particular subs. The CA will plan these meetings and will
minimize unnecessary time being spent by Subs.
3.2 REPORTING
A. The CA will regularly communicate with all members of the commissioning team,
keeping them apprised of commissioning progress and scheduling changes through
memos, progress reports, etc.
B. Testing or review approvals and non-conformance and deficiency reports are made
regularly with the review and testing as described in later sections.
C. A final summary report by the CA will be provided focusing on evaluating

commissioning process issues and identifying areas where the process could be
improved. All acquired documentation, logs, minutes, reports, deficiency lists,
communications, findings, unresolved issues, etc., will be compiled in appendices and
provided with the summary report.
3.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The CA will provide appropriate contractors with a specific request for the type of
submittal documentation the CA requires to facilitate the commissioning work. These
requests will be integrated into the normal submittal process and protocol of the
construction team. At minimum, the request will include the manufacturer and model
number, the manufacturer’s printed installation and detailed start-up procedures, full
sequences of operation, Systems/O&M data, performance data, any performance test
procedures, control drawings and details of owner contracted tests. In addition, the
installation and checkout materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and
the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians
shall be submitted to the Commissioning Authority. All documentation requested by

90 Percent
the CA will be included by the Subs in their Systems/O&M manual contributions.
B. The Commissioning Authority will review and approve submittals related to the
commissioned equipment for conformance to the Contract Documents as it relates to
the commissioning process, to the functional performance of the equipment and
adequacy for developing test procedures. This review is intended primarily to aid in
the development of functional testing procedures and only secondarily to verify
compliance with equipment specifications. The Commissioning Agent will notify the
appropriate persons as requested, of items missing or areas that are not in
conformance with Contract Documents and which require resubmission.
C. The CA may request additional design narrative from the A/E and Controls Contractor,
depending on the completeness of the design intent documentation and sequences
provided with the Specifications.
3.4 START-UP, PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS AND INITIAL CHECKOUT
A. The following procedures apply to all equipment to be commissioned. Some systems

that are not comprised so much of actual dynamic machinery may have very simplified
PCs and startup.
B. General:
1. Prefunctional checklists are important to ensure that the equipment and systems
are hooked up and operational. It ensures that functional performance testing (in-
depth system checkout) may proceed without unnecessary delays. Each piece
of equipment receives full prefunctional checkout. No sampling strategies are
used. The prefunctional testing for a given system must be successfully
completed prior to formal functional performance testing of equipment or
subsystems of the given system.
C. Start-up and Initial Checkout Plan:

1. The CA shall assist the commissioning team members responsible for startup of
any equipment in developing detailed start-up plans for all equipment. The
primary role of the CA in this process is to ensure that there is written
documentation that each of the manufacturer-recommended procedures have
been completed. Parties responsible for prefunctional checklists and startup are
identified in the commissioning scoping meeting and in the checklist forms.
Parties responsible for executing functional performance tests are identified in
the testing requirements.
a. The CA assist in the development of checklists that indicate required
procedures to be executed as part of startup and initial checkout of the
systems and the party responsible for their execution.
b. The Contractor determines which trade is responsible for executing and
documenting each of the line item tasks and notes that trade on the form.
Each form may have more than one trade responsible for its execution.
c. The subcontractor responsible for the purchase of the equipment develops
the full start-up plan by combining (or adding to) the CA’s checklists with the
manufacturer’s detailed start-up and checkout procedures from the O&M
manual and the normally used field checkout sheets. The plan will include
checklists and procedures with specific boxes or lines for recording and

90 Percent
documenting the checking and inspections of each procedure and a

summary statement with a signature block at the end of the plan.
d. The full start-up plan could consist of something as simple as:
(1) The contractor and CA prefunctional checklists.
(2) The manufacturer’s standard written start-up procedures copied from
the installation manuals with check boxes by each procedure and a
signature block added by hand at the end.
(3) The manufacturer’s normally used field checkout sheets.
e. The subcontractor submits the full startup plan to the CA for review and
approval.
f. The CA reviews and approves the procedures and the format for
documenting them, noting any procedures that need to be added.
g. The full start-up procedures and the approval form may be provided to the
CM for review and approval, depending on management protocol.
D. Execution of Prefunctional Checklists and Startup:

1. Four weeks prior to startup, the Subs and vendors schedule startup and checkout
with the GC and CA. The performance of the prefunctional checklists, startup and
checkout are directed and executed by the Sub or vendor. When checking off
prefunctional checklists, signatures may be required of other Subs for verification
of completion of their work.
2. The CA shall observe, at minimum, the procedures for each piece of primary
equipment, unless there are multiple units, (in which case a sampling strategy
may be used as approved).
3. For lower-level components of equipment the CA shall observe a sampling of the
prefunctional and start-up procedures.
4. The Subs and vendors shall execute startup and provide the CA with a signed
and dated copy of the completed start-up and prefunctional tests and checklists.
5. Only individuals that have direct knowledge and witnessed that a line item task
on the prefunctional checklist was actually performed shall initial or check that
item off.
E. Deficiencies, Non-Conformance and Approval in Checklists and Startup:

1. The Subcontractors shall clearly list any outstanding items of the initial start-up
and prefunctional procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom
of the procedures form or on an attached sheet. The procedures form and any
outstanding deficiencies are provided to the CA within two days of test
completion.
2. The CA shall work with the Subcontractors and vendors to correct and retest
deficiencies or uncompleted items. The CA will involve the CM or GC and others
as necessary. The installing Subcontractors or vendors shall correct all areas that
are deficient or incomplete in the checklists and tests in a timely manner, and
shall notify the CA as soon as outstanding items have been corrected and
resubmit an updated start-up report and a Statement of Correction on the original
non-compliance report. When satisfactorily completed, the CA recommends
approval of the execution of the checklists and startup of each system using a
standard form.
3.5 FUNCTIONAL TESTING

90 Percent
A. This sub-section applies to all commissioning functional testing for all divisions.
1. Objectives and Scope:
a. The objective of functional testing is to demonstrate that each system is
operating according to the documented design intent and Contract
Documents. Functional testing facilitates bringing the systems from a state
of substantial completion to full dynamic operation. Additionally, during the
testing process, areas of deficient performance are identified and corrected,
improving the operation and functioning of the systems.
b. In general, each system should be operated through all modes of operation
where there is a specified system response. Verifying each sequence in the
sequences of operation is required.
2. Development of Test Procedures:
a. Before test procedures are written, the CA shall obtain all requested
documentation and a current list of change orders affecting equipment or
systems, including an updated points list, program code, control sequences
and parameters. Each Sub or vendor responsible to execute a test, shall
provide assistance to the CA in developing the procedures review
(answering questions about equipment, operation, sequences, etc.). Prior to
execution, the CA shall provide a copy of the test procedures to the Sub(s)
who shall review the tests for feasibility, safety, equipment and warranty
protection. The CA may submit the tests to the A/E for review, if requested.
b. The purpose of any given specific test is to verify and document compliance
with the stated criteria of acceptance given on the test form.
3. Test Methods:
a. Functional testing and verification may be achieved by manual testing
(persons manipulate the equipment and observe performance) or by
monitoring the performance and analyzing the results. The CA will determine
which method is most appropriate for tests that do not have a method
specified.
4. Coordination and Scheduling:
a. The Subs shall provide sufficient notice to the CA regarding their completion
schedule for the prefunctional checklists and startup of all equipment and
systems. The CA will schedule functional tests through the GC and affected
Subcontractors. The CA shall direct, witness and document the functional
testing of all equipment and systems. The Subs shall execute the tests.
b. In general, functional testing is conducted after prefunctional testing and
startup has been satisfactorily completed. Testing proceeds from
components to subsystems to systems. When the proper performance of all
interacting individual systems has been achieved, the interface or
coordinated responses between systems is checked.
3.6 DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVAL OF TESTS
A. Documentation:
1. The CA shall witness and document the results of all functional tests using the
specific procedural forms developed for that purpose. Prior to testing, these forms
are provided to the GC for review and approval and to the Subs for review. The
CA will include the filled out forms in the Commissioning Report.
B. Non-Conformance:
1. The CA will record the results of the functional test on the procedure or test form.

90 Percent
All deficiencies or non-conformance issues shall be noted and reported on a

standard non-compliance form.
2. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the tests at the
discretion of the CA. In such cases the deficiency and resolution will be
documented on the procedure form.
3. Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and minimize
unnecessary delays, while not compromising the integrity of the procedures.
4. As tests progress and a deficiency is identified, the CA discusses the issue with
the executing contractor.
a. When there is no dispute on the deficiency and the Sub accepts
responsibility to correct it:
(1) The CA documents the deficiency and the Sub’s response and
intentions and they go on to another test or sequence
b. If there is a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether it is a deficiency
or who is responsible:
(1) The deficiency shall be documented on the non-compliance form with
the Sub’s response and a copy given to the GC and to the Subcontractor
representative assumed to be responsible.
(2) Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible. Other
parties are brought into the discussions as needed. Final interpretive
authority is with the A/E. Final acceptance authority is with the Owner.
(3) Once the interpretation and resolution have been decided, the
appropriate party corrects the deficiency, signs the statement of
correction on the non-compliance form and provides it to the CA. The
CA reschedules the test and the test is repeated until satisfactory
performance is achieved.
C. Cost of Retesting:
1. The cost for the Subcontractor to retest a prefunctional or functional test, if they
are responsible for the deficiency, shall be theirs. If they are not responsible, any
cost recovery for retesting costs shall be negotiated with the GC.
2. The Contractor shall respond in writing to the CA at least as often as
commissioning meetings are being scheduled concerning the status of each
apparent outstanding discrepancy identified during commissioning. Discussion
shall cover explanations of any disagreements and proposals for their resolution.
3. The CA retains the original non-conformance forms until the end of the project.
D. Failure Due to Manufacturer Defect:

1. If 10%, or three, whichever is greater, of identical pieces (size alone does not
constitute a difference) of equipment fail to perform to the Contract Documents
(mechanically or substantively) due to manufacturing defect, not allowing it to
meet its submitted performance spec, all identical units may be considered
unacceptable. In such case, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with the
following:
a. Within one week of notification, the Contractor or manufacturer’s
representative shall examine all other identical units making a record of the
findings. The findings shall be provided within two weeks of the original
notice.
b. Within two weeks of the original notification, the Contractor or manufacturer
shall provide a signed and dated, written explanation of the problem, cause

90 Percent
of failures, etc. and all proposed solutions which shall include full equipment
submittals. The proposed solutions shall not significantly exceed the
specification requirements of the original installation.
c. The Owner will determine whether a replacement of all identical units or a
repair is acceptable.
d. Upon acceptance, the Contractor and/or manufacturer shall replace or repair
all identical items, at their expense and extend the warranty accordingly, if
the original equipment warranty had begun. The replacement/repair work
shall proceed with reasonable speed beginning within one week from when
parts can be obtained.
E. Approval:
1. The CA notes each satisfactorily demonstrated function on the test form. The CA
recommends acceptance of each test using a standard form. The Owner gives
final approval on each test using the same form, providing a signed copy to the
CA and the Contractor.
3.7 SYSTEMS/OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS
A. The following Systems/O&M manual requirements do not replace O&M manual

documentation requirements elsewhere in these specifications.
B. Each Division shall compile and prepare documentation for all equipment and
systems covered in that Division and deliver this documentation to the GC for
inclusion in the Systems/O&M manuals, according to this section, prior to the training
of owner personnel.
C. The CA shall receive a copy of the O&M manuals for review.
D. Field checkout sheets and logs should be provided to the CA for inclusion in the
Commissioning Record Book.
E. Review and Approvals:

1. Review of the commissioning related sections of the Systems/O&M manuals
shall be made by the A/E and by the CA.
3.8 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
A. The GC shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately
to ensure that training is completed.
B. The CA shall be responsible for overseeing and approving the content and adequacy
of the training of Owner personnel for commissioned equipment.
3.9 WRITTEN WORK PRODUCTS
A. Written work products of Contractors will consist of the start-up and initial checkout
plan described and the filled out start-up, initial checkout and prefunctional checklists,
manufacturer’s factory and field testing and inspection forms, contractors’ inspection
and functional testing forms, Systems/O&M Manuals, training plans and training

90 Percent
records.
B. These work products will be supplied to the CA to be included in the final

commissioning report.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 26 08 11
TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Complete testing and evaluations to assure that the electrical system is installed for
proper operation.
B. Section 26 05 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
C. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
D. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Biddle Instruments #21-P8a - Electrical Insulation Testing
B. Biddle Instruments #25Ta - Earth Resistance Testing
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate special tests and/or equipment start-up as specified or implied in related

sections.
1.6 SUBMITTALS

requirements. Included in this section are megger tests of all main feeders to all
switchboards and/or panelboards. Submit tests of insulation resistance, conductor
resistance, and ground resistance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Not used.
Testing of Electrical System 26 08 11 - 1

90 Percent
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING
A. Perform in accordance with manufacturer's printed testing procedures, applicable

industry standards, ANSI standards, IEEE standards, NEMA standards and as
directed by the Engineer. Provide testing equipment in good working order and which
complies with the applicable industry standards and manufacturer's requirements.
Include a list of testing equipment used and date of last calibration.
B. Test the following:

1. Feeder conductors to main switchboard.
2. Feeder conductors from switchboard to panelboards.
3. Grounding means for all switchgear.
4. Grounding of the Electrical system neutral: Ground resistance shall not exceed
10 ohms.
5. Equipment grounds for each feeder: Ground resistance shall not exceed 25
ohms.
6. Grounds for each transformer: Ground resistance shall not exceed 25 ohms.
7. Insulation resistance: Ground resistance shall not be less than one (1) megohm.
C. Perform all tests in the presence of the Engineer, Architect or the Owner in
accordance with the forms included in this section.
D. Submit each test form within ten (10) working days from the time the test is performed.
E. Document all test results and provide a signed report by the testing technician as
witnessed. Reports shall include date, time, weather conditions, field conditions, test
data, instruments used and brief description of the test. Include reports in operating
manuals. Submit tests.

90 Percent
Job Name: ___________________________________________
Person and Company Conducting Test: ____________________
Signature of Person Conducting Test: _____________________
Insulation Test Results (Megger)
Feeder Description Test Date Resistance Remarks

(megohms)
Notes:
1. Test shall be conducted after conductors are pulled.
2. Ground resistance on insulation shall be no less than one (1) megohm.
3. Make copies of this form if more blanks are needed.

90 Percent
Job Name: ___________________________________________
Transformer Test Results
Transformer Test Secondary Tap Setting Grounding of Remarks

Date Voltage Transformer Neutral
(ohms)
Notes:
1. Test on transformer neutral and tap settings shall be performed at time of substantial
completion.
2. Ground resistance of transformer neutral shall be no greater than ten (10) ohms.

90 Percent
Job Name: ___________________________________________
Feeder Ground Test Results
Feeder Test Date Resistance (ohms) Remarks
Notes:
1. Test shall be conducted at time of substantial completion.
2. Ground resistance shall not exceed 25 ohms.

90 Percent
Job Name: ___________________________________________
System Neutral Ground Test Results
Feeder Test Date Unbonded Bonded Remarks

resistance resistance (ohms)
(megohms) see note see note 2
1
Notes:
1. Neutral is not bonded to equipment and/or ground at any location. Resistance shall not
be less than one (1) megohm.
2. Neutral is connected to ground at transformer only. Resistance shall not exceed 25
ohms.
3. Test shall be performed at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 26 09 13
ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Switchboard instrumentation where shown on the plans.
B. Switchboards 1,000 amps and larger.
B. Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards For Distribution Switchgear
1.4 SUBMITTALS

requirements.
B. Manufacturers printed statement of accuracy. Color cut sheets of meter with all
accessories to be used.
C. Wiring diagram of meters and current transformers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TYPE
A. Microprocessor based monitoring meter to provide monitoring functions as well as

deliver inputs to HVAC controller.
Electrical Power Monitoring and Control 26 09 13 - 1

90 Percent
2.2 MONITOR PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
2.2.1 ACCURACY OF READINGS
A. AC Ampere: ±0.5%
1. Phase A
2. Phase B
3. Phase C
B. AC Voltage: ±0.5%
1. Phase A-B
2. Phase B-C
3. Phase C-A
4. Phase A - Neutral
5. Phase B - Neutral
6. Phase C - Neutral
C. Watts: ±1%
D. VARS: ±1%
E. Power Factor: ±1%
F. Frequency: ±0.5%
G. Watt Demand: ±1%
H. Watt Hours: ±1%
2.3 FEATURES
A. Communication port for building energy management system hook-up.
2.3.2 TRANSFORMERS
A. Current Transformers: 100/5 through 5,000/5
B. Potential Transformers:
1. Up to 600 Volts: Self-contained.
2. Above 600 Volts: Inputs to 14.4 KV.
C. Ratios field settable with DIP switches.
2.3.3 FIELD SETTABLE PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS WITH ALARM OUTPUTS
A. Voltage - Phase Loss: Occurs if less than 50% of nominal line voltage is detected.
B. Current - Phase Loss: Occurs if smallest phase current is less than 1/16 of the largest
phase current.

90 Percent
C. Phase Unbalance: Occurs if the maximum deviation between any two phases
exceeds the amount of unbalance as a percent of nominal line voltage preset by DIP
switches.
D. Range: 5 to 40% (5% increments).
E. Phase Reversal: Occurs if any two phases become reversed for more than one
second.
F. Overvoltage: Dip switch setting of percent of nominal line volts.
G. Range: 105 to 140% (5% increments).
H. Undervoltage: DIP switch setting of percent of nominal line volts.
I. Range: 95% to 60% (5% increments).
J. Delay: Allows existence of overvoltage, undervoltage, or voltage unbalance before an

alarm or trip occurs.
K. Range: 0-8 sec. (1 sec. increment).
L. Percent Trip Level and Trip Time Interval: Field settable.
2.3.4 SIMPLE ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Same as a watt meter.
B. 50/60 cycle, 3 or 4 wire systems.
C. Self-protected from fault.
D. Updated Data Response every 1.08 seconds. Unit shall be user friendly.
E. Replaces ampmeter, voltmeter, watt meter, selector switch, etc.
F. Only CT and PT hook-up required to a single device.
G. No separate potential source required.
H. Active or inactive protection relaying.
I. Interface capability to computer network for data collection.
J. Storage and/or print-out via INCOM.
K. Retains preset parameters in case of a power failure with use of filled settable DIP
switches (no batteries).
L. Separate alarm and trip relay outputs.

90 Percent
M. Energy Management features include kilowatt, power factors, demand kilovars, and
pulse initiator with each meter. Provide one system per service entrance, main and/or
grouped mains.
2.4 CONSTRUCTION
A. 4.5 inches deep.
B. Door mounted.
C. Panel shall be designed for a harsh industrial environment, and be UL recognized.
D. Main Service Metering

1. Square D Power Logic PM 5563 with integrated display & Ethernet.
E. Equal meters accepted by:

1. General Electric
2. Eaton Corporation (formerly Cutler-Hammer)
3. Siemens
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install meters so as to be easily removed.
B. Provide all fuse blocks and terminal strips as required.
C. Run 3/4 inch conduit to energy management control system (EMCS) panel. Engineer
to decide final location. Provide 120V hook-up to EMCS panel. All control wiring in
accordance with other Divisions 1, 23, 25, and 27.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 26 09 16
TIME SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Time switches for lighting control.
B. Time switches for circulating pumps.
A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical
B. Section 26 00 90 – Electrical Submittal Procedures
C. Section 26 05 53 – Electrical Identification
D. Section 26 28 16 – Enclosed Safety Switches and Circuit Breakers
1.2 SUBMITTALS

requirements.
B. Product Data: Submit product data for time switches.
C. Samples: Provide a non-returnable sample when requested.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Water Heater Time Clocks & Batteries:

1. Tork Model EH10/20 Digital Control Clock
2. Battery Backup - 9V lithium
a. Paragon Model EC4004P

section 26 00 90 – Electrical Submittal Procedures.
2.2 MATERIALS
Time Switches 26 09 16 - 1
90 Percent
A. Case:
1. Indoor/outdoor Nema 3R enclosure. Self-extinguishing high impact plastic.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install near the panelboard supplying service to lighting load per manufacturer's
direction.
B. Mount time switch not more than 12" above top of switchgear and so that the time
switch is readily accessible.
C. Programming:
1. Program the time switches as directed. Include programming and operating
instructions in "Records for Owner" as outlined in Section 26 00 00.
2. Instruct the Engineer in setting the switches before final inspection.
D. Label Time Clock.
3.2 WATER HEATER TIME CLOCKS
A. Provide a Digital Control Clock for each water heater. Located time clock in electrical
room and label "Water Heater - (Location)".
B. Set to Operate:
1. On: 7:00 a.m.
2. Off: 11:00 a.m.
3. On: 2:00 p.m.
4. Off: 6:00 p.m.
5. Off: Saturdays and Sundays
C. Provide battery backup - 9V lithium
D. Timer to control both the water heater and any circulating pump. Circulating pump to
run continuously as long as water heater is operational. When the water heater is
intentionally turned off to conserve energy, then turn off the circulating pump.
E. Provide mechanically held contactor for each water heater circulating pump.
F. Provide a non-fused disconnect at each water heater. Refer to Section 26 28 16 for

Enclosed Safety Switches and Circuit Breakers.
END OF SECTION
Time Switches 26 09 16 - 2
90 Percent
SECTION 26 09 21
CONTACTORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Contactors with enclosures
B. Section 26 00 90 - Electrical Submittal Procedures
1.2 REFERENCES
A. UL 508
B. NFPA 1C52-211B
1.3 SUBMITTALS

with the General Conditions, Division 1, Division 26 and Section 26 00 90
requirements.
B. Product Data: Voltage and ampere rating, wiring diagram, enclosure type, coil
voltage, and switching source(s).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Siemens
B. Square D
C. All other manufacturers shall require pre-approval in accordance with specification

section 26 00 00 – Electrical.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
2.2.1 GENERAL
Contactors 26 09 21 - 1
90 Percent
A. Rated for system voltage and continuously current rated.
B. Size as required for connected load. Locate, unless noted, in Electrical/Equipment

Room near panelboard with identification label as specified in other section.
C. Provide in an Enclosure Suitable for the Environment:

1. Indoor: NEMA 1
2. Outdoor: NEMA 4
D. Provide a lightning arrestor on all outdoor contactors.
2.2.2 MECHANICALLY-HELD LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Rating: Rated for all loads, tungsten ballasts and resistance heating, 30 amps contact
rating minimum.
B. Features:
1. Electrically operated by a solenoid mechanism.
2. Mechanically latched.
3. Coil clearing contacts to de-energized coils when device is held closed.
4. Required relays and controls for momentary latching and unlatching of single-
pole switch contactors.
C. Noted: "M.H. Contactor" or "M.H.C." on drawings.
2.2.3 ELECTRICALLY-HELD LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Rating: Rated for all loads, tungsten ballasts and resistance heating, 30 amps contact
rating minimum.
B. Features
1. Electrically held.
2. Coil suitable for continuous energizing.
C. Noted: "E.H. Contactor" or "E.H.C." on drawings.
2.2.4 CONTROL CIRCUIT
A. Compatible with the actuating devices.
B. Fused control circuit transformer where required.
C. Provide required control circuit (coil) voltage, including relays (also for distance
control) and coil clearing contacts. Two wire remote control relay for mechanically
held contactors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
90 Percent
A. Mount contactors in electrical room, mechanical room or designated area on plans.
B. Provide contactors with number of poles noted for exterior lighting.
C. Mount in an orderly manner between approximately 6'-0" above finish floor and secure
with appropriate mounting hardware.
D. Provide mechanically held lighting contactors with 24V coils for all exterior lights, even
if not shown on the plans, grouped by the following:
1. Exterior Wall Packs
2. Soffit Lights
3. Flag Pole Lights
4. Walk way Lights
5. Parking Lot Lights Designated as Security Lights
6. Each Individual Parking Lot
E. Each contactor shall have an override switch located at each contactor.
F. The contactors will be controlled by EMCS
G. Verify Energy Management Control requirements with EMCS installer. Run wire to
EMCS control panel as required.
END OF SECTION
90 Percent
SECTION 26 09 41
LIGHTING CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This section includes the provision of a lighting control system for the automatic
dimming and deactivation of indoor lighting, except for lighting intended for 24-hour
operation.
B. This section does not include controls for theater and stage equipment.
C. This section does not include controls for outdoor ball field lighting.
A. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
B. Section 26 05 33.11 - Raceways and Conduits for Electrical Systems
C. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems
D. Section 26 08 00 - Commissioning of Electrical Systems
E. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NEMA Guide Publication WD 7 Occupancy Motion Sensors Standard
B. 2018 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC)
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Motion Sensor – A sensor that detects when an occupant is in a space. This sensor
can be wired or configured to be an occupancy sensor or vacancy sensor.
B. Occupancy Sensor – A motion sensor designed or programmed to automatically turn

the lighting in a space “on” when an occupant enters the space (based on major
motion) and automatically turn the lighting in a space “off” after the occupant is no
longer present or detected (based on minor motion) for a predetermined length of
time.
Lighting Controls 26 09 41 - 1
90 Percent
C. Vacancy Sensor – A motion sensor designed or programmed to require an occupant

to manually turn the lighting in a space “on” and automatically turn the lighting in a
space “off” after the occupant is no longer present or detected (based on minor
motion) for a predetermined length of time.
D. Dual Technology Sensor – A motion sensor with both infrared and ultrasonic
technologies or both infrared and microphonic technologies.
E. Photocell – A light sensitive sensor used to communicate with a room controller to

dim the lighting in a daylight zone according to the ambient lighting entering a space
via any method other than electric lighting.
F. Room Controller – The local space lighting controller that interfaces with the
luminaires, motion sensors, photocells, smart switches, etc. in each space to control
on/off, “scenes”, dimming, and daylight harvesting. This may include the power pack,
distributed controller, ballast interface modules, interface components, etc. Some or
all of this function may be an integral part of the luminaires in the space.
G. Energy Management Control System (EMCS) – May also be called Building

Management System (BMS). This system is used to control mechanical systems in
the building via PC software.
H. Smart Switch – Intelligent programmable switch capable of communicating with the

lighting control system in the space to trigger on/off, “scenes”, dimming, etc.
I. Network Controller – The building-wide controller that connects Room Controllers

together into a central network.
J. Daylight Zone – Area in a space around/about a window, skylight or other fenestration

measuring how far exterior natural lighting can reach into a space. Not all daylight
zones can be combined. Luminaires in a daylight zone are to be controlled separately
from the luminaires in the rest of the space. Some daylight zones, after they are
identified in a space, will not require any change to the lighting controls already shown
and may therefore be disregarded. Those will usually be deleted from the reflected
ceiling plans to prevent confusion.
K. Enhanced Building Controls (EBC) – A building interface (digital control system)

intended to group all room controllers into a networked lighting control system to allow
load shedding, scheduling events, remote programming, remote control via software
interface, etc.
L. Functional Testing – Start-up or testing performed by the manufacturer or certified

representative to verify the operation of the complete lighting control system.
M. Commissioning Agent – Third party hired by Owner or the design team to meet IECC
commissioning requirements.
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. The system shall include all required devices for a complete and proper operating
90 Percent
system to automatically control the lighting to meet the intent of the IECC. The system
may include but not be limited to motion sensors, room controllers, enhanced building
controls (if required), low voltage control wiring, photocells, smart switches, intelligent
luminaires and all required boxes.
B. Sensor design and layout: Provide the quantity of motion sensors required for
complete and proper coverage without gaps within the range of coverage of controlled
areas. Rooms shall have 100% coverage to completely cover the controlled area to
accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location
within the room. The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are
diagrammatic and indicate only rooms that are to be provided with sensors. Provide
additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover the respective room.
Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the work so as to ensure the best
possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to
space limitations or interference of structural components.
C. Not all required components are shown on the plans.
D. A networked distributed lighting control system is required. Relay panels are not
acceptable unless noted on Lighting Control Chart.
E. Battery operated devices and controls are not acceptable.
F. Refer to Luminaire Schedule and Lighting Control Chart for additional requirements
and more information.
1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. All Spaces:
1. Refer to the reflected ceiling plans and Lighting Control Chart for additional
information and requirements for controlling the lighting in various areas
throughout the building. For projects beyond the scope of a single system,
multiple systems shall be networked together to accommodate any size
requirement.
2. When the fire alarm activates an alarm, the lighting controls shall turn all interior
and exterior building-mounted lights on to meet NFPA 101 section 7.8.1.2.2
requirements. This feature shall be provided via a single contact closure at the
fire alarm control panel (FACP) as a trigger to the lighting control system. Provide
all associated hardware and wiring from the FACP to the lighting control system
necessary for a complete and working system. Refer to Lighting Control Chart for
additional information.
3. All portions of the controls mounted above ceiling are to be plenum rated.
4. If a generator or UPS provides backup/auxiliary power to any luminaires, then
power shall be provided for all lighting controls in those spaces such that all
functions of the lighting control system remain operable under any power
condition.
5. If a generator or UPS provides emergency power to any emergency luminaires,
all emergency luminaires shall turn on to maximum lumen output. If battery packs
provide power for emergency lighting, all emergency luminaires shall turn on to
maximum lumen rating of the battery pack.
90 Percent
6. Wiring between sensors and control units shall be 18 AWG minimum (stranded
preferred) or CAT5/5e/6. Wiring shall be plenum rated in plenum spaces and UL
listed. Pre-terminated low voltage wiring from the lighting controls manufacturer
is preferred.
7. See the Sequences of Operation article in this specification section.
B. Motion Sensors
1. All motion sensors are to be corner (preferred) or ceiling mounted except in single
toilets or small closets (< 40sqft) or unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
2. Where allowed, wall-mounted motion sensors shall be suitable for 120v or 277v
lighting.
3. All motion sensors shall be dual technology.
4. All motion sensors to be set to a 20-minute time delay and adjusted to maximum
sensitivity, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Must be capable of being set
down to 5 minutes and 1 minute for testing.
5. Coverage areas for major motion and minor motion shall be determined in
accordance with Section 3 of NEMA WD 7 Guide.
6. Ultrasonic technology shall utilize a frequency that does not interfere with other
sensors, hearing aids, smartboards, etc.
7. All motion sensors on this project shall have masking or internal shielding
available to control coverage pattern in the field. Stickers or other external
adhesive masking will not be accepted.
C. Timer Switches: Where indicated on the plans, a timer switch control function shall
have an override not exceeding 2 hours to meet code.
D. Smart Switches
1. The smart switch shall control the luminaires in the space for all on/off, dimming
and/or “scene” controls as indicated in the Lighting Control Chart on the
drawings.
2. For device color and cover/trim color, see specification section 26 27 26.
3. The smart switch is to be used as a manual override when used with vacancy
sensors.
4. Where keyed switches are indicated on the plans, the “off” feature of the smart
switch is to be disabled for a schedule similar to 7a-5p. Coordinate exact
schedule with Owner.
5. All programmable switches are to be engraved or internally labeled so that the
function of each button is clearly identified. All labeling or engraving must be of
high quality and be provided by the lighting system manufacturer.
E. Room Controller
1. In the event of a hardware or software or component failure, the lighting in the
space is to default to the “ON” position.
2. Provide adequate room controllers in each space for proper operation of the
lighting to meet all code requirements and design intent shown on the plans.
3. All room controllers shall utilize zero-crossing circuitry.
F. Network Controller
90 Percent
1. Shall be capable of being programmed/reprogrammed via PC software. It shall

be capable of receiving input via contact closure, user PC software, fire alarm
control panel, etc. and issuing building-wide commands to enable/disable a
scene at all luminaires inside and outside the building.
2. Shall include astronomical time clock capable of seven different day types per
week, automatic holiday “shutoff” feature for 24-hours, 12-hour minimum
program backup capabilities to meet code.
3. Shall be BTL BACNET/IP listed for use to communicate with EMCS and HVAC.
G. See Lighting Control Chart on the drawings for controls by space and sequence of
operation.
1.7 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit product data for all components and accessories of the lighting control system
including, but not limited to:
1. Motion sensors
2. Photocells
3. Smart switches
4. Time switches
5. Room controllers
6. Enhanced building controls (if required)
7. Software
8. Lighting contactors
9. Low voltage wiring
10. Intelligent luminaires
B. Product data for motion sensors shall clearly indicate coverage areas for major motion
and minor motion determined in accordance with the testing procedures of NEMA
Guide Publication WD 7 Occupancy Motion Sensors Standard.
C. Submit a warranty letter with warranty requirements per this specification including
and describing coverage for systems that use multiple product brands to provide a
complete system.
D. Any product submitted other than from the manufacturers listed below in Part 2 will
be rejected.
1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings of each reflected ceiling plan in this project showing the specific
locations of all parts of the lighting control system including motion sensors,
photocells, smart switches, room controllers, enhanced building controls (if required),
etc. Motion sensors shown shall include sensor type, sensor mounting, and other
pertinent data to allow evaluation of the proposed system.
B. Submit a wiring diagram for all motion sensors, photocells, smart switches, room
controllers, etc.
90 Percent
C. Submit a sequence of operations for each unique space type describing the function
of each button on each switch and the effects on the lighting in the space. This
sequence of operations should be similar to the Lighting Control Chart with the added
information describing how the lighting control system pieces/parts work together.
D. Submit a list of switch types by unique space with a list of proposed button labels.
This list should be similar to the Button Info on Lighting Control Chart with added
information showing switch button layouts and actual labels for this project.
A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide 2 complete sets of operating,

maintenance, and adjustment instructions and other information necessary for proper
operation of the lighting control system. These documents shall be included as part
of the project operating and maintenance manuals.
B. As-built Drawings: Provide 2 complete sets of as-built reflected ceiling plans showing
the location and wiring configuration of all motion sensors, room controllers,
photocells, etc.
C. Warranty: Provide 2 copies of warrantees.
D. Training Documentation: Provide a letter in the final documents documenting that

Owner (give name of person, date, duration, and content of training) received training
required in this section.
E. System Functional Testing Documentation: Provide two (2) copies of documentation

reporting the manufacturer’s start-up, adjusting, and final testing of the completed
installation. Include a list of controllable points to the BMS provider upon completion
of lighting controls functional testing.
F. Software Maintenance Agreement: Provide 2 copies of the software maintenance

agreement.
1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. UL Label: All lighting control system products shall be UL-labeled, individually and as
a system, for the specific applications utilized on this project.
1.11 MOCK-UPS
A. Provide a product demonstration by the manufacturer of the lighting control system

including a sample of each piece and part demonstrating a complete working system.
If a product demonstration is not acceptable by Owner or Architect, provide, at
additional cost, a mock-up of required space types with complete controls for owner /
engineer / construction administration review before installation throughout the
building.
1.12 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
90 Percent
A. Meet with the manufacturer of the lighting controls on-site to review installation, wiring
methods and exact equipment locations of all components prior to starting installation.
At this meeting Contractor shall be trained by the manufacturer or vendor on the
installation, setup and functionality of the system. Failure to have this meeting will
result in Contractor assuming full responsibility of all costs incurred to move controls
and sensors, replace equipment due to product damage, costs due to installation
errors or failure to meet the full intent of the design.
1.13 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store all product in accordance with manufacturer’s storage requirements.
1.14 WARRANTY
A. Provide a five-year parts and one-year labor warranty on the entire control system.
Warranty coverage shall begin at the time of Project Substantial Completion.
1.15 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Provide the initial programming, aiming and start-up of the system.
B. After system startup and prior to substantial completion of the project, require the
manufacturer to test the operation of the complete system (all pieces, every space)
to ensure the proper operation of the system throughout the range of building
operating conditions. Provide documentation of such functional testing in the closeout
submittals. Do this functional testing on all projects, regardless of other additional
commissioning or testing requirements.
1.16 OWNER’S TRAINING
A. After functional testing is complete, manufacturer shall provide a minimum of 4 hours

of on-site training to Owner’s personnel in the operation, adjustment, and
maintenance of the system. Do this training in a location where it can be recorded by
Owner. Coordinate date, time and location of training one week prior to meeting and
provide documentation of such training in the closeout submittals.
1.17 THIRD PARTY COMMISSIONING
A. In addition to functional testing by Contractor and the manufacturer, additional third

party commissioning is required to meet IECC requirements. The manufacturer shall
be present during the third-party commissioning process. See specification section
26 08 00 for more information.
1.18 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. In addition to extra materials called for elsewhere in the specifications, include in the
base bid:
1. Provide 3 room controllers.
2. Provide 6 motion sensors.
3. Provide 3 smart switches (6 or more buttons).
90 Percent
1.19 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Provide a three-year manufacturer’s software service agreement with the system. The
agreement shall cover all minor updates, bug fixes and maintenance to the software
of the system to maintain all original functionality. The software service agreement
shall start at the time of substantial completion.
1.20 SYSTEM SUPPORT
A. Provide five-year complete system support starting from substantial completion. The
entire lighting control system (hardware and software) shall be included in the support.
The support shall include phone and email communication (as a minimum) for the
duration of the support. The system support shall include all technical support,
hardware and software questions, warranty help, etc.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. If they comply with these specifications, products of the following, and only the
following, manufacturers will be acceptable:
1. Acuity Controls - Chris Sears at 214-658-9030
2. Crestron - Chris Sears at 214-658-9030
3. Douglas Lighting Controls - Brendan Kenna at 214-247-7415
4. Eaton Controls - Allen Pilgrim at 817-267-9300
5. Encelium - Grant Grubb at 214-413-7034
6. Hubbell Controls - Grant Grubb at 214-413-7034
7. Intelligent Lighting Controls - Allen Pilgrim at 817-267-9300
8. Lutron - Randy Schwimmer at 972-406-8700
9. Philips Controls - Brendan Kenna at 214-247-7415
10. Touché Lighting Control - Allen Pilgrim at 817-267-9300
11. WattStopper - Grant Grubb at 214-413-7034
B. No other manufacturers will be accepted.
A. All parts of the lighting control system shall be warranted by the same company.
B. All parts of the lighting control system shall be from the approved list of manufacturers
above.
C. All parts of the lighting control system shall be aesthetically compatible. i.e., from the
same product line or family of products.
D. All sensors shall be from the latest release generation. Do not mix product of different
releases or generations.
90 Percent
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SITE VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
A. If the work is to be performed in an existing facility, visit the site of the proposed work
and observe its conditions so that you may be fully informed as to the materials, labor,
workmanship and conditions under which the work is to be done. If an existing lighting
control system exists, then the new system shall work with the existing system.
B. No allowances shall be made on account of any errors, negligence or failure to be

aware of the condition of the existing site.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Provide all lighting controls as required and where indicated, in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions and project shop drawings, applicable
requirements of the NEC, and recognized industry practices to ensure that
products serve the intended function.
2. Provide the room controller as required located above the ceiling above the
switches near the exit door. Provide a permanent label on the ceiling t-grid to
identify its location. The label material shall be as described in specification
section 26 05 53. The label shall say “Lighting Controller”. It is acceptable for a
room controller to serve more than one space.
3. Provide the network controller as required located on the wall of the main
electrical room near any EMCS, contactors, etc. It is acceptable for a single
network controller to serve an entire building if supported by the controller.
4. Provide conduit and wiring in accordance with specification sections 26 05 33.11
and 26 05 19.
5. All motion sensors and switches located in gyms, play areas, multipurpose
spaces, etc. shall have a wire guard.
B. Shop Drawing Preparation: At least five working days prior to bid time, provide a set
of floor plan drawings and a copy of these specifications to the manufacturer for the
purpose of system layout with quantities and creating shop drawings for the owner.
Coordinate with the manufacturer to determine the required medium (hard copy or
electronic) and the format required by the manufacturer.
C. Sensor Design and Layout by Manufacturer:

1. Refer to Design Requirements article regarding sensor design and layout.
2. Exact locations of control unit hardware boxes shall be based on observing good
installation practice and shall be coordinated with other elements of the reflected
ceiling plan. Control unit hardware shall be fully concealed.
3. Select the appropriate type of sensor for complete coverage of each space.
D. Lighting Control System Integration with EMCS:

1. Exterior lighting shall be integrated into lighting control system or EMCS through
BACnet interface.
2. Provide BACnet object list to EMCS contractor.
90 Percent
3. Contractor to expose BACnet objects related to footcandle levels, motion sensor

status and commanded light levels for each space.
4. BACnet objects need to be labeled or mapped to the room number they are
serving.
E. Lighting Control Cable Routing and Installation:

1. System wiring and equipment installation shall be in accordance with good
engineering practices as established by the EIA and the NEC. Wiring shall meet
all state and local electrical code requirements.
2. Cable pathways, conduit, and cable support systems shall be complete with
bushings, de-burred, cleaned, and secure prior to installation of cable.
3. All wiring shall test free from opens, grounds, or shorts. All lighting control cable
shall be supported from the building structure and bundled. Do not attach any
supports to joist bridging or other lightweight members.
4. Support system shall provide a protective pathway to eliminate stress that could
damage the cabling. The lighting control cable shall not be crushed, deformed,
skinned, crimped, twisted, or formed into tight radius bends that could
compromise the integrity of the cabling.
5. Lighting control cable must not be fastened to electrical conduits, mechanical
ductwork/piping, sprinkler pipes, or routed to obstruct access to hatches, doors,
utility access panels, or service work areas. Do not route cables through fire
doors, ventilation shafts, grates, or parallel with line voltage electrical conductors.
Lighting control cables shall not be run loose on ceiling grid or ceiling tiles.
6. Support shall be provided by mounting appropriate fasteners that may be loaded
with multiple cables. Provided that the weight load is carried by the support rod
or wire, the support assembly may attach to the ceiling grid for lateral
stabilization. The required support wires for the ceiling grid or luminaires shall not
be utilized. Any fastener attached to the ceiling grid shall not interfere with
inserting or removing ceiling tiles. The cable pathway of supports must be
positioned at least 12 inches above the ceiling grid.
7. Provide bushings to protect the cable from damage for conduit ends, box
openings, and passage through metal studs.
8. Lighting control cables shall be run in bundles above accessible ceilings and
supported from building structure. Cabling shall be loosely bundled with cable
Velcro hook ties randomly spaced at 30 to 48 inches on center, cable ties shall
not be tight enough to deform cabling and shall not be used to support the
cabling.
9. Each cable run shall include a three-foot service loop with Velcro hook ties
located in the ceiling above each device. This is to allow for future re-termination
or repair.
10. Lighting control cable will not be installed in the same conduit, raceway, tray,
duct, or track with line voltage electrical cable without a metallic barrier meeting
NEC requirements.
11. Maximum cable pulling tension should not exceed 25 pound-force (110 N) or the
manufactures recommendation, whichever is less.
12. Any pulling compounds utilized must be approved by the cable manufacturer and
13. No terminations or splices shall be installed in or above ceilings, other than in
designated end point housings.
14. Cable bends shall not be tighter that the manufacturers’ suggested bend radius.
90 Percent
15. Mount all equipment firmly in place. Route cable in a professional, neat and
orderly installation.
F. Lighting Control Cable Support

1. Conduit, duct, or track shall be used for lighting control cable in exposed areas.
2. Cable fill shall not exceed the manufacturers’ instructions for each type of
support.
3. All conduit, ducts, track, and raceways shall be supported from the structure at
industry standard intervals for the size specified, utilizing proper anchoring
devices.
4. All vertical supports shall be attached to the building support structure or concrete
ceiling with anchors load rated for 100-lbs. minimum. Down rods shall be a
minimum of 1/4” diameter. Steel uni-strut cross supports shall be 2” minimum.
G. Bushings
1. Provide a plastic snap in bushing at each box opening, passage through a metal
stud, and at the end of all open conduit stubs or sleeves prior to lighting control
cable installation to protect the cabling from damage:
a. Box openings - Thomas & Betts Knockout Bushing Series 3210, or
equivalent.
b. Metal stud passage - Thomas & Betts Twist It Bushing Catalog Number
SB1216-SC, or equivalent.
c. Conduit ends - Thomas & Betts Anti-Short Bushing Series 390 or Tite-Bite
Combination Couplings Series 442, or equivalent.
H. J-Hooks
1. Attachments for cabling support shall be spaced at approximately 48 to 60 inches
on center. Cable bundles shall not be allowed to sag down more than 12-inches
mid-span between attachments.
2. All attachments shall be approved for category rated twisted pair cabling.
Attachments shall be Caddy part numbers as follow, or equivalent, sized as
follows:
a. CAT16HP, 1” diameter Capacity 15 Category rated cables.
b. CAT21HP, 1.31” diameter Capacity 40 Category rated cables.
c. CAT32HP, 2” diameter Capacity 60 Category rated cables.
d. Split bundles greater than 2" dia. or provide cable tray.
3. Do not mix different signal strength cables on the same J-Hook (i.e. fire alarm
with data and telephone cable). Multiple J-Hooks can be placed on the same
attachment point, up to the rated weight load of the attachment device.
I. Cable Tie Wraps

1. Provide and install Panduit TAK-TY cable ties or equivalent.
2. Velcro hook cable ties shall be furnished and installed to attach wire bundles to
supports and for appropriate wire management as required.
3. Hard plastic or metal tie wraps will not be allowed on any data grade cable
(Category rated twisted pair cable).
3.3 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
A. Lighting Controls
90 Percent
1. The smart switch shall be required to be pressed to turn the lights on in all spaces
where a vacancy sensor is required. Otherwise, an occupancy sensor may
automatically turn the luminaires on. Two minutes prior to turning the lights off,
the lighting controls shall dim the luminaires in the space to 50% of their previous
output as a notification to the occupants that the controls will soon turn the lighting
off. A momentary “blink” is allowed if luminaires are not dimmable. If the motion
sensor is not triggered in two minutes, the lighting in the space is to turn off. If the
motion sensor is triggered, the lighting controls shall dim the lighting back up to
the previous lighting level and timeout is restarted. In spaces with timer switches,
the system shall accept an override signal at any time either before or after the
lighting is turned off. The occupant shall not be required to wait for the lights to
go out before issuing the override.
2. Where shown on the plans, a photocell is to be used to measure the light level
and signal to the room controller to dim the luminaires continuously (from 100%
to 15% or lower, including off) in the daylight zone to maintain a consistent (within
+10% and -0%) lighting level in the space.
3.4 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES
A. Coordinate with the sales representative to coordinate the below requirements with
the manufacturer.
1. The manufacturer shall provide instruction at the start of the job to Contractor
regarding the proper installation of the system.
2. As part of the system startup process, the manufacturer shall provide all initial
field programming of the system.
3. Using certified factory representatives, the manufacturer shall inspect the
finished installation against the shop drawings and installation instructions.
4. Using certified factory representatives, the manufacturer shall do functional
testing of the finished installation. Submit documentation of the functional testing
in accordance with Part 1 of this specification.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Motion sensors may be affected by various conditions in the room. It may be

necessary for Contractor to make adjustments, change the location or type of sensor
to obtain proper operation in a specific room. Contractor/equipment manufacturer
shall have final responsibility for proper operation and coverage of the system in each
room and should therefore make labor allowance for such changes and adjustments.
Contractor is also responsible for acquiring approval from Engineer for any changes
or deviations from project specifications.
B. Work with the manufacturer to correct all findings from manufacturer functional
testing.
C. Work with the manufacturer to correct all findings made by the third-party
commissioning agent or registered design professional, whichever entity performs the
commissioning service. This contractor is responsible for the entire lighting control
system and luminaires to pass the commissioning inspection and reporting.
3.6 OWNER’S TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATION
90 Percent
A. Upon completion of testing and adjustment, demonstrate operation of the system to

representatives of Owner.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper maintenance, adjustment, and operation of the

motion sensor lighting controls.
C. Discuss with Owner the time clock feature programming requirements (on/off times
and school schedule) and teach them to program the clock feature to match the
required schedule.
D. Upon completion of testing and adjustment (commissioning), Contractor and a direct

employee of the equipment manufacturer (who is already familiar with the details of
the project) shall demonstrate operation, proper maintenance, troubleshooting and
adjustment of the lighting control system and all sensors throughout the building.
Owner shall receive a minimum of 4 hours and a maximum of 8 hours in an on-site
training session. The length of the training session shall be at the discretion of Owner.
The training shall cover the following areas in detail:
1. Scope of system: Review the as-built documentation with Owner to detail extent
of system. Identify locations of all wall stations, wiring, and panels that fall within
the scope of the lighting control system. Define clear lines of scope between
lighting control system and EMS functions if applicable.
2. Operation of system: Cover normal operation of switches, push-buttons, LCD
interfaces and software (if provided). Provide documentation to Owner showing
the operational zoning of controlled circuits and all time-clock events
programmed into the Lighting Control System. Show Owner how to change and
add/delete events.
3. Maintenance and Troubleshooting of system: Detail any required or optional
preventive maintenance actions required of Owner. Go over step-by-step
procedures to troubleshoot all possible failure modes of each component type of
the lighting control system. Cover procedure to get lights turned on in any space
containing a lighting control system in the event the control system fails. Identify
any specialized equipment necessary to support all the above actions.
4. Service and Support of system: Identify nearest direct support contact for the
manufacturer and provide both telephone and email contact details.
END OF SECTION
90 Percent
SECTION 26 21 00
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Electrical service including underground primary requirements, transformer and

secondary enclosure requirements, overhead and underground service entrance
requirements, metering, and final connections.
1.2 RELATED SECTION
A. Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards for Distribution Switchgear
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate with the power utility company to obtain information regarding the
available short circuit current at the service point. Provide this information to the
electrical gear manufacturer for use in the overcurrent protective device coordination
study required by section 26 24 16.
B. Coordinate all requirements with the power utility company and include in the base
bid, including but not limited to the following.
1. Whether the service will be overhead or underground.
2. The extent of any underground primary.
3. The need for a secondary enclosure.
4. Any charges from the power utility company for providing service.
5. The need for a transocket for utility metering.
Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance 26 21 00 - 1

90 Percent
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All underground primary and secondary conduits: Provide schedule 40 PVC with PVC
coated rigid metal long sweep elbows in accordance with section 26 05 33.11.
Minimum cover shall be 24 inches from finished grade to top of highest conduit or
power utility company requirements, whichever is greater. No trench shall exceed 58
inches in depth. Encase conduits in concrete extending 3 inches in all directions
beyond the conduits perimeter. Install a pull wire and cap all conduits at both ends
until the conductors are installed. Provide red or yellow plastic identification tape no
more than 1'-0" below grade with the following wording: "Caution - Buried Conduit" or
reasonable facsimile over the entire length of the pipe ditch.
B. Underground primary: Provide two 4" conduits from the power utility company service
point to pad-mounted transformers. Primary conductors will be provided by the power
utility company. Coordinate exact location of service point with the power utility
company.
C. Pad-mounted transformer: Construct the transformer pad in accordance with the

power utility company specifications. Coordinate with the power utility company
before installation of concrete for exact size, location and all requirements. The
transformer will be provided by the power utility company.
D. Secondary enclosure: Coordinate with the power utility company and provide a
secondary enclosure where required to transition from the transformer output to the
service entrance feeder. Construct the pad for the secondary enclosure. Provide all
conduit, wire, and terminations between the transformer and the secondary
enclosure.
E. Underground service entrance: Provide all trenching, conduit, conductors and

electrical equipment from the secondary terminals of the transformer/secondary
enclosure to the main service disconnects.
F. Overhead service entrance: Provide all conduit, conductors, supports, weatherheads,

and sleeving from the electric service point to the main service disconnects.
G. Metering: Provide conduits, conductors, cabinets, racks, transocket, and supports as

required by the power utility company for service metering. All utility metering
equipment will be provided by the power utility company.
H. Final connection: Arrange for and provide final connection by the power utility
company.
END OF SECTION
Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance 26 21 00 - 2

90 Percent
SECTION 26 22 13
LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Dry-type transformers rated 600 volt and below for general power, computer power,
and lighting applications.
B. Section 26 00 30 - Warranty Period
C. Section 26 00 90 - Electrical Submittal Procedures
D. Section 26 05 19 - Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
E. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
F. Section 26 05 33.13 - Boxes and Fittings for Electrical Systems
G. Section 26 21 00 - Low Voltage Electric Service Entrance
H. Section 26 28 16 - Enclosed Safety Switches And Circuit Breakers
1.3 REFERENCES
A. UL 5085-1 Low Voltage Transformers - Part 1: General Requirements
B. UL 5085-2 Low Voltage Transformers - Part 2: General Purpose Transformers
C. ANSI - C33.4/C57.96
D. NEMA-ST-20 Dry Type Transformers for General Applications
E. IEEE 45
F. CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS, Title 10 Energy, Part 431 Energy Efficiency

Program for certain commercial and industrial equipment (10 CFR Part 431)
G. UL 1561 – Standard for Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers
A. Equipment items specified by manufacturer's name, brand name or catalog number
Low-Voltage Distribution Transformers 26 22 13 - 1

90 Percent
are the specific items upon which the electrical system design is based.
B. Proposed substitute equipment shall be evaluated for design compatibility as well as

for electrical and physical equality.
C. Provide transformers of capacity required per NEC required overload protection on

primary and secondary sides. Primary and secondary conductors shall be sized in
accordance with the NEC.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

requirements.
B. Product Data: Submit product data for the following:

1. Submit transformer cut sheets, shop drawings, and other pertinent data during
submittal phase with other switchgear.
2. Submit test data, after installation, with records for Owner manuals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The following are approved manufacturers.

1. Siemens
2. Square D

section 26 00 00.
A. Ventilated transformers shall be UL 1561 listed.
B. Insulation rating: Class 155 or higher.
C. Transformers installed indoors shall be completely enclosed except for ventilating

openings, to meet NEC 450.21 (A) & (B).
D. Temperature rise: Maximum temperature rise to be 150°C over 40° C ambient.

Reduced temperature rise to be 80°C or 115°C only where noted on drawings.
E. Load Rating: Capable of operating at 100% of nameplate rating continuously on

150°C rise, 115% on 115°C rise and 130% on 80°C rise while in an ambient
temperature not exceeding 40°C. Design transformers for continuous operation at
rated KVA, 24 hours per day, 365 days per year with normal life expectancy as
defined in IEEE 65.

90 Percent
F. Sound Rating: Audible sound levels shall be in accordance with NEMA ST-20.
G. Energy Efficiency: All ventilated transformers rated 15 kVA and above covered by this
specification section shall meet the minimum energy efficiency levels set forth in 10
CFR Part 431. Sealed and non-ventilated transformers are exempt from 10 CFR Part
431. Dry type transformers below 15 kVA are exempt from 10 CFR Part 431.
Submittals shall clearly indicate compliance with 10 CFR Part 431.
H. Coils: Continuous wound copper construction impregnated with non-hygroscopic

varnish.
I. Tap arrangement: Use in the high voltage winding unless noted otherwise on the
drawings. Provide taps as follows.
1. 3 KVA Through 25 KVA: 4 at 2.5% each, 2 above and 2 below nominal voltage
2. 30 KVA Through 112.5 KVA: 6 at 2.5% each, 2 above and 4 below nominal
voltage
3. 150 KVA Through 500 KVA: 6 at 2.5% each, 2 above and 4 below nominal
voltage
J. Cores: Constructed of high grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic
permeability and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Bolt completed core and coil
to the base of the enclosure and isolate by means of vibration-absorbing mounts.
Metal-to-metal contact between the core and coil and the enclosure is not permitted.
Visibly ground the core of the transformer to the enclosure by means of a flexible
grounding conductor sized in accordance with applicable UL and NEC standards.
K. Transformer Enclosures: Fabricate all transformer enclosures of heavy gauge, sheet

steel construction. Ventilate all enclosures. Maximum temperature of the top of the
enclosure: 50°C rise above a 40°C ambient. Provide a UL recognized coating for
outdoor use.
L. Color: ANSI 61 or 49 gray. Apply uniform coating to all edges and surfaces.
M. Non-Linear transformers: K-13 or K20 with 200% neutral bar.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide K-13 transformers when serving isolated ground electrical panels.
B. Provide K-20 transformers when serving electrical panels in major network operations
centers (NOC).
C. Mount transformers on additional vibration isolators and/or on rubber and spring

isolators at floor or other mounting points to meet sound ratings. Install as per
manufacturer's recommendations and/or Engineer's directions. Isolators are in
addition to isolators shipped with transformers from the manufacturers.

90 Percent
D. Install the transformer so that vibrations are not transmitted to the structural parts of
the building. Mounting should be on a solid wall, floor, or other wall, floor, or other
structure with solid mass. Mounts must be isolated and properly loaded avoiding
direct contact with other metal structures. Isolate the transformer by using flexible
couplings and conductors to help prevent vibrations being transmitted to other
equipment. Make sure shipping braces and hold-down bolts are loosened as specified
by the manufacturer's installation manual. Ventilated transformers should "float" on
vibration dampening pads located between the enclosure and the core and coil
assemble.
E. Exterior weatherproof transformers: Mount on 6" thick minimum steel reinforced

concrete slab. Extend slab 1'-0" beyond transformer on each side. Provide weather
shields from the manufacturer.
F. Install transformers as indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions,

applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices
to ensure that products fulfill requirements.
G. Coordinate transformer installation work with electrical raceway and wire/cable work,
as necessary for proper interface.
H. Set transformer plumb and level. Use flexible conduit, 6 ft. maximum length, for
connections to transformer. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.
I. Check for damage and tight connections prior to energizing transformer. Measure
primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.
A. Apply standard potential, loss ratio, polarity and continuity tests to each transformer.
B. Provide the test data results for each transformer. Provide certification of test data
accumulated on similar units to show the expected values of sound levels,
temperature rise, full-load losses, regulation and impedance.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS FOR DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Switchboards
B. Branch circuit panelboards
C. Switchgear
D. Section 26 22 13 - Low Voltage Distribution Transformers
E. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses
F. Section 26 43 00 - Surge Protective Devices
1.4 REFERENCES
A. UL 50 - Cabinets and Boxes.
B. UL 67 - Electric Panelboards.
C. NEMA AB1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
D. NEMA AB2 - Procedures for Verifying the Performance of Molded Case Circuit
Breakers.
E. NEMA PB1 - Panelboards.
F. NEC – NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 2017
Panelboards for Distribution Switchgear 26 24 16 - 1

90 Percent
1.5 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
A. For any project where service entrance equipment is added or changed, provide a
short circuit/coordination study for the entire system.
B. For any project where electrical panels are added or changed but the service entrance
equipment is not changed, provide a short circuit/coordination study for the service
entrance equipment and all affected panels.
C. For any project involving mechanical equipment changes including chillers, cooling
towers, air handlers, condensers, pumps, or rooftop units, provide a short
circuit/coordination study for the affected portion of the system including affected
panels and branch circuit overcurrent protective devices.
D. For any project where service entrance equipment and electrical panels are added,
provide a short circuit/coordination study for all service entrance equipment and
panels.
E. Submit the short circuit/coordination to the city. The level of detail and format shall
conform to city requirements.
F. Coordinate the short circuit current ratings of mechanical equipment with the available
short circuit current. The short circuit current ratings of all electrical and mechanical
equipment shall exceed the available short circuit current.
G. Adjust settings of adjustable circuit breakers to achieve selective coordination of the

system. Notify the engineer if selective coordination cannot be achieved.
1.6 ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY
A. For any project where service entrance equipment is added or changed, provide an
arc flash/fault study and all required labels for the new service entrance equipment
per NEC 110.16 and 110.21(B).
B. For any project where electrical panels are added or changed but the service entrance
equipment is not changed, provide an arc flash/fault study and all required labels for
all affected panels per NEC 110.16 and 110.21(B).
C. Install all required labels on all service entrance equipment and electrical panels per
the above NEC references.
A. All panelboards with 400 amp main circuit breakers, 400 amp main lugs or 400 amp
fused and larger shall be factory assembled.
B. The Contractor shall furnish and install approved panelboards of the types indicated
and specified herein at locations as shown on the drawings.
C. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled.

90 Percent
D. Where this specification conflicts with panelboard schedules, contact the Engineer for
clarification.
1.8 SUBMITTALS

requirements.
B. Provide shop drawings for each electrical equipment room showing the placement of
all panelboards, transformers, and other equipment such as mechanical equipment,
drawn to scale and dimensioned. Such shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance
with the intent of the contract drawings and the spaces available for the electrical
apparatus.
C. Clearly indicate on the submittals whether equipment is fully rated or series rated.
D. Arrangement: Arrange panelboard submittals in the order the panelboard schedules

appear on the panelboard sheets of the drawings as read from top to bottom, then left
to right.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ENCLOSURE
A. Minimum 16 gauge cold-rolled sheet steel. Gutter wiring space shall be a minimum of
4 inches on each side/industry standard. Provide standard conduit knockouts in ends
and sides of cabinet. Provide flush type combination catch and key door locks on all
panelboards and load centers. Key all locks alike, provide two keys with each
panelboard.
B. Flush mounted panelboards trims shall fasten to permit both horizontal and vertical
adjustment.
C. Surface mounted panelboards trims shall fasten to insure no overhang.
D. Bus Material shall be:

1. Phase Bus: 98% IACS conductivity copper with rounded edges, tin electro-plated.
2. Ground Bus: 25% phase rated, additional isolated bus in computer and
communication panels.
3. Neutral Bus:
a. 200% of phase rated copper, tin electro-plated - computer panels
b. 100% of phase rated copper, tin electro-plated - lighting and power panels
4. Current density to be the industry standard.
E. Install in allotted spaces so that devices can be added without additional machining,
drilling or tapping.
F. Brace to withstand symmetrical short circuit current as indicated on drawings.

90 Percent
G. Provide NEMA 3R panelboards where exposed to weather, with weatherproof

threaded hubs for top/bottom/side conduit entries into panel.
2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Quick-make, quick-break. Manual and automatic operation. Trip free and trip
indicating.
B. All switchgear bolt-on only. Number of poles and ampere ratings indicated for the
specified service.
C. Interrupting Ratings: As indicated on panel schedules. Panels may be noted on the

drawings as fully rated due to excessive motor loads. Otherwise, panels can be fully
rated or series rated for construction of new buildings. For addition and renovation
work, panels with main breakers can be fully rated or series rated unless noted on the
drawings as fully rated. Main lug only panels for addition and renovation work shall
be fully rated.
D. Bimetallic overload elements. Magnetic trip. Common trip type so that an overload or
fault on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Handle ties are not acceptable.
E. Connect to the main bus by means of a solid connection. Use breakers which are
capable of being operated in any position within the panel.
F. Independently mount so that a single unit can be removed from the front of the panel
without disturbing or removing main bus, other units or other branch circuit
connections.
G. Provide ground fault circuit breakers (GFCI) where indicated on the plans, panel
schedules and/or as required by NEC 422.5, 210.8(B), etc. Provide protection at all
EWCs, vending machines, kitchen equipment, concessions equipment, etc.
H. Provide HACR listed circuit breakers on all HVAC equipment 60 amps or less.
I. All circuit breakers that have an overcurrent trip setting fixed or adjustable to 1200A
or higher shall have an Energy-Reducing Maintenance Switch or similar approved
method for arc energy reduction and shall meet all requirements of NEC 240.87.
2.3 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Frame-mounted directory with a heat-resistant transparent face for identifying circuits.

Use equipment names as reflected by Engineer. Use numbers selected by the Owner,
which may differ from those shown on plans.
B. Indicate with light, erasable pencil marking, all spares and spaces.
C. Provide on all panelboards, revise existing panelboards per Division 26 with new
information.

90 Percent
D. Mount inside the panelboard door.
2.4 SWITCHBOARDS (1,000 AMPS OR MORE)
A. Factory-assembled, dead front, metal enclosed.
B. Switchboards rated 2,000 amps or greater shall have a minimum depth of 30”.
C. Features:
1. Phase Bus: Tin plated copper of sufficient cross-sectional area to continuously
conduct rated full load current with temperature rise limits in accordance with
NEMA Standards, and industry standards.
2. Ground Bus: Full length, sized at 25% of phase bus and bonded to each section.
3. Neutral Bus: Full length, sized at 100% of phase bus.
4. Fault Withstandability: Suitable for operation at the available fault current.
D. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Switchboard: More than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
E. Overcurrent protection devices: Provide circuit breakers unless the drawings indicate
that fused switches are required.
F. Switch Handles: Clearly indicate on and off positions and size of breaker or fused
switch.
G. Fused Switches: Provide with Class R fuses.
H. Circuit Breakers: Capable of field-installable shunt trip, ground fault shunt-trip or

under voltage trip.
I. Construction:
1. Provide a single-withstanding short circuit current rating for each switchboard as
shown on the plans.
2. Provide the required number of sections of the required size to fit in the space
provided.
3. Connect sections with bussing. Cabled connections are not allowed.
4. Use front accessible overcurrent protection devices.
5. Label to indicate the maximum available fault current rating. This rating consists
of the structure, bussing, switchboard main disconnects and switchboard branch
circuit devices.
6. Provide instrumentation as specified in Section 26 09 13 and in conjunction with
Division 23-Energy Management Control System requirements.
2.5 SURGE PROTECTION
A. Provide a surge protective device at the main switchgear in accordance with section
26 43 00.

90 Percent
2.6 IDENTIFICATION OF SWITCHGEAR
A. Information shall include the following:

1. Panel type
2. Style
3. Amperage
4. Neutral amperage
5. Panel voltage
6. Phase
7. Number of wires
B. Provide information on each piece of equipment, on factory or contractor made

nameplate.
C. Series Rated Panels: In accordance with NEC Article 240.86(B), provide a label
affixed by the manufacturer indicating the tested and approved series rating
combinations. Provide an additional label affixed behind the panel door to be field
marked in accordance with NEC Article 110.22(C).
2.7 MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D
B. Siemens
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. When isolated ground devices are shown being powered from a panel, provide a
complete isolated ground system including isolated ground panel with 200% neutral,
SPD and separate isolated ground bus.
B. Install in the locations as shown and as recommended in NEMA PB1.1. Mount the
panelboards such that the center of the switch or circuit breaker in the highest position
will not be more than 6-1/2 feet above the floor or working platform. Space all
panelboards and switchboards to meet the requirements of Article 110 and 340 of the
N.E.C. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they
are permanently and mechanically secured.
C. Provide required SPD breaker for each panel/switchboard as required by the

manufacturer.
D. Provide a sign at each switchboard 1600 amp and greater, which reads "Danger High
Voltage" in red/white/black.

90 Percent
E. Install panelboards and enclosures, including electrical connections, in accordance

with the manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of NEC and
the NECA "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that products serve the intended function.
F. Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and raceways

installation work.
G. Connect A, B and C phases respectively to bus number 1, 2 and 3 from left to right or
top to bottom. Balance panels by checking each phase of all panels under full load
and arrange so that all phases carry the same load as near as possible.
H. Furnish and install an engraved laminated nameplate for each circuit breaker or fused
switch in distribution panelboards. Refer to electrical equipment identification section
of the specifications. Place free standing or floor mounted equipment on
housekeeping pads.
I. Series rated panels: Field mark the factory furnished label in accordance with NEC
Article 110.22(C).
3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS
A. More than one conductor shall not be installed in any termination in a panelboard
unless the termination is marked as suitable for more than one conductor.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL

A. AC Switches
B. Receptacles
C. Connectors
D. Finish plates
E. Relays
D. Section 26 05 33.13 - Boxes and Fittings for Electrical Systems
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/UL 20 - General - Use Snap Switches
B. ANSI/UL 498 - Electrical Attachment Plugs and Receptacles
C. UL 943 – 2006 - Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters
D. NEMA WD 1 - General - Purpose Wiring Devices
E. NEC - National Electrical Code
F. Applicable Federal Specifications - WC - 596-F, WS-896E
G. Mounting heights per Americans with Disabilities Act
Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 1
90 Percent
1.5 SUBMITTALS

requirements.
B. Product Data: Clearly mark product data for each product specified and/or proposed
for use. Product cut sheet data shall include, but not limited to the following:
1. receptacle devices
2. switch devices
3. isolated ground receptacle devices
4. weatherproof receptacles
5. device plates
6. enclosures
7. keys
8. cord reels
A. Provide factory fabricated wiring devices of the type and electrical rating for the
service indicated, provide proper selection to fulfill the wiring requirements. Wiring
devices, including receptacles and switches shall be colored to match wall plates.
Special purpose outlets shall be of appropriate color.
B. Provide a compatible receptacle for the cap or plug and cord of all other equipment
installed in this project.
C. Relays, if any, shall be multipole, mechanically held, 30 amperes 120V operating coil,
600V contacts, auxiliary contacts as required for two wire operation, coil clearing
contacts: Zenith ESS Series or equal.
D. Provide switch, receptacle, outlet, conduit, and special purpose wall plates for wiring
devices, with ganging and cutouts as indicated, provided with metal screws for
securing plates to devices, screw heads colored to match finish of plate.
E. Provide oversize plates where required to completely cover wall opening. Where
oversize plates are used, all plates in room shall be oversize style.
F. Use plates and Raco narrow gang boxes in storefront mullions and where narrow
boxes are required.
G. Mount all switches, thermostats, etc. at the same height when located horizontally
within 6 feet on same wall. See mechanical drawings for thermostat locations.
90 Percent
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AC SWITCHES
A. Quiet-type, specification grade, heavy duty, back and side-wired with grounding
terminals. Furnish AC switches which comply with NEMA WD-1 Standards, UL20 and
Federal Specification WC896. Special purpose switches shall be of appropriate color.
Switches shall be rated for 120-277 volt AC, number of poles as required.
B. Provide 120/277 volt NEMA 5-20 self-grounding specification grade devices only.
C. Provide 20 ampere ratings for all loads. Rated amperage capacity shall be 100% for
all lighting loads, and 80% for all motor loads.
D. Single Pole:
1. Leviton 1221-S
2. Hubbell CS1221
3. P&S CSB20AC1
E. Double Pole:
1. Leviton 1222-S
2. Hubbell CS1222
3. P&S CSB20AC2
F. Three Way:
1. Leviton 1223-S
2. Hubbell CS1223
3. P&S CSB20AC3
G. Four Way:
1. Leviton 1224-S
2. Hubbell CS1224
3. P&S CSB20AC4
H. Keyed Switches:
1. Two-prong keys only. Single-prong keys will not be acceptable.
2. Provide 25 extra keys
3. Lock Single Pole: Leviton 1221-L (P&S 20AC1L)(Leviton 1221-2KL with WS-35
key code)
4. Lock Double Pole: Leviton 1222-L (P&S 20AC2L)(Leviton 1222-2KL with WS-35
key code)
5. Lock Three Way: Leviton 1223-L (P&S 20AC3L)(Leviton 1223-2KL with WS-35
key code)
6. Lock Four Way: Leviton 1224-L (P&S 20AC4L)(Leviton 1224-2KL with WS-35
key code)
I. Motor Rated Switches:

1. 20A. 2P Motor: 20AC2-HP (6806U-DAC); P&S PS20AC2HP
2. 30A. 2P Motor: 30AC2-HP (6808U-DAC); P&S PS30AC2HP
90 Percent
3. 30A. 3P Motor: 7803 (7810-UO); P&S 7803MD
J. Wall Timer Switches:

1. Watt Stopper TS-400 with optional flash warning
2. Equals by P&S RT24 series.
3. Paragon will not be accepted.
2.2 RECEPTACLES
A. Furnish receptacles which comply to NEMA WD-1 Standards, UL 498 and Federal
Specification WC596F.
B. 125 volt Nema 5-20R duplex, side wired, self-grounding with ground lug, specification
grade hard use
C. 20A. Duplex: Leviton 5362; P&S 5362
D. GFCI Receptacles: 20-amp, duplex. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498,

Federal Specification W-C-596, and UL943, Class A. Subject to compliance with
requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Pass & Seymour; 2097, 2097 (NAFTA Compliant), PT2097 (use with
PTRA6STRNA prewired pigtail connector), PT2097NA (NAFTA Compliant - use
with PTRA6STRNA prewired pigtail connector).
2. Equivalent by Leviton
3. Equivalent by Hubbell
E. Isolated Ground:
1. 5-20R, Leviton 5362-IGIGRAY . See Device Color article below for required color.
2. Provide at all computer/communications locations.
3. Four wire with self-ground mounting strap.
F. Clock Outlet: Leviton 5361-CH, P&S S3733SS
G. Weatherproof Outlets:
1. Provide GFCI receptacle as specified above.
2. Receptacle covers protected from rain shall be zinc die-cast weather-resistant
cover with self-closing lid, Leviton 4992, P&S WIUCAST1, or equivalent.
3. Receptacle covers not protected from rain shall be “While-In-Use” cover, Leviton
5977DGY, P&S WIUC10DGL, or equivalent.
4. Do not use feed through feature for any GFCI receptacle.
5. Install separate GFCI device at each location.
2.3 VOICE/DATA OUTLETS
A. Refer to Division 27. Device and plates provided.
90 Percent
2.4 DEVICE PLATES
A. In kitchens, gyms, gang toilets and mechanical rooms, use stainless steel device
plates and covers.
B. In other finished spaces use stainless steel device plates and covers.
C. At exposed boxes in dry interior spaces use heavy cadmium-plated sheet steel. Plate
edges must be flush with edges of boxes.
D. Device plate manufacturer and device manufacturer shall be the same so colors will
match. Stainless steel plates will not match the device.
2.5 DEVICE COLOR
A. Device color to be white, except as otherwise indicated or required by code.
2.6 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products to be equivalent to the manufacturer, Pass & Seymour (P&S), and model
numbers listed in this section. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
1. Eaton Corp. (Arrow Hart Division - formerly Cooper Industries)
2. Bryant
3. Coxreels
4. Hubbell Inc. – Richard Prather, 512-795-4058 x8325
5. KH Industries – Wendy Caparco, 716-312-0088 x144
6. Leviton MFG. Co., Inc. – Jordan Steele, 214-683-1438
7. Pass & Seymour/Legrand/Wiremold – Tracey Cain, 214-683-9726
2.7 POKE-THRU DEVICES
A. Provide all telecommunications and data plates in each poke-thru as specified and
noted on Communications Drawings. See Section 26 05 34 for more information. Lid
color to be black
B. Wiremold Evolution 8AT
2.8 POWER/DATA RACEWAY DEVICES
A. Provide all telecommunications and data plates in power/data raceways as specified

and noted on Communications Drawings. Devices to be compatible with power/data
raceways as specified in Section 26 05 33.11.
2.9 CORD REELS
A. Provide industrial duty cord reels with type “W” or “SJOW” cord, 4 roller outlet, ball
stop and receptacle on cable end. See detail or drawing notes for voltage, phase, wire
size, wire length and receptacle requirements.
90 Percent
B. Where a cord reel is to be installed above a ceiling, if above ceiling space is plenum
rated, provide a suitable box above ceiling to mount cord reel in so it is not in the
plenum space.
C. Cord reels in any kitchen or cooking demonstration area are to have a white housing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Wall Switches:
1. Install in a suitable outlet box on the strike side of the door.
2. Mount at a height of 44" from the finished floor to the bottom of the switch.
3. Position switches in a uniform position so that the same direction of operation will
open and close the circuits throughout the job. Position up or to the left for the
ON position.
4. Do not install behind markerboards, millwork, permanent mounted equipment,
etc. Verify on drawings before installation. Where installed in unsuitable location,
the Contractor will move as directed at no cost to Owner.
5. Prewired pigtail connectors that accommodate UL Fed Spec receptacles are
approved for installation. P&S PlugTail or equal.
B. Receptacles:
1. Install in a suitable steel outlet box.
2. Mount vertically at a height of 18 inches from the finished floor to the bottom of
the receptacle or as shown on the drawings.
3. The Architect can move any receptacle, before installation, up to 6 feet in any
direction at no additional cost.
4. Do not install behind markerboards, millwork, permanent mounted equipment,
etc. Verify on Architectural drawings before installation. Where installed in
unsuitable location, the Contractor will move as directed at no cost to Owner.
5. Prewired pigtail connectors that accommodate UL Fed Spec receptacles are
approved for installation. P&S PlugTail or equal.
C. Tamper resistant receptacles: Provide tamper resistant receptacles in the following

spaces in accordance with 2017 NEC / 2020 NEC article 406.12.
1. Dwelling and multifamily dwelling units
2. Guest rooms & suites of hotels, motels & common areas.
3. Child Care facilities or spaces
4. All spaces in preschool and elementary schools.
a. All spaces in higher grade level schools.
5. Offices, corridors, and waiting rooms of clinics, medical and dental offices, and
outpatient facilities.
6. Gyms, auditoriums, conference rooms, dining areas, and multipurpose rooms,
and assembly areas of places of worship.
7. All spaces in dormitories.
8. Exceptions: See NEC article 406.12 for exemptions.
D. Device plates:
90 Percent
1. Install device plates for each outlet box of the type required for service.
2. Use a single one-piece device plate for ganged devices (switches & receptacle).
3. Use separate device plates for dimmers, volume controls and electronic devices.
E. Cord Reels
1. Install cord reels per cord reel detail or plan notes on the drawings.
2. Where a cord reel is required to be installed above a ceiling, mount cord reel
such that roller assembly protrudes slightly through the ceiling. Provide trim plate
at ceiling cutout. If above ceiling space is plenum rated, cord reel must be
installed in a box so it is not in the plenum space.
F. Poke-Thru Devices:
1. Provide and install all wiring, devices, covers, plates, conduit and hardware as
required for a complete installation. Do not daisy-chain poke-thru devices with
conduits unless otherwise noted on drawings.
2. Wiremold Evolution 8AT. Provide and install three duplex outlets and associated
wiring per general notes on drawings. Provide isolated-ground outlets if indicated
by symbol on drawings. Provide power to outlet using circuits shown on plans.
END OF SECTION
90 Percent
SECTION 26 28 13
FUSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section supplements section 26 00 00 - Electrical and contains additional

requirements applicable to fuses.
A. Low voltage fuses rated below 600 volts and 2000 amperes.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for fuses in accordance with Section 26 00 90 Electrical Submittal
Procedures.
A. Prior to ordering fuses or fuse holders, coordinate fuse ratings with the mechanical
contractor to verify that fuses for HVAC equipment matches the MOCP values of the
HVAC equipment being provided.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare fuses: For each size and type fuse installed, provide to the owner at substantial
completion six each or 10% of the quantity used on the project, whichever is less.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. All fuses shall be from a single manufacturer. Products of the following manufacturers
are acceptable.
1. Bussman
2. Littelfuse
3. Mersen (formerly Ferraz Shawmut)
Fuses 26 28 13 - 1
90 Percent
A. 600-amp and less: Class RK-1 dual element, time delay.
B. 601-amp and larger: Class L or J
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Check fasteners on fuse clips for tightness when installing fuses.
B. Install fuses so label is in an upright, readable position. Fuses without labels are not
acceptable.
C. Do not install fuses until equipment is ready to be energized.
D. Fuse cabinet: For new buildings only, provide a fuse cabinet in the main electrical
room. Cabinet to be lockable with depth equal to largest fuse provided. Minimum of
24" W x 24" H x 4" deep.
END OF SECTION
Fuses 26 28 13 - 2
90 Percent
SECTION 26 28 16
ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Safety switches
B. Disconnect Switches
C. Section 26 05 53 - Electrical Identification
D. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses
E. Section 26 43 00 - Surge Protective Devices
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/UL 98 - Safety Standard for Enclosed Switches.
B. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.
A. Safety switches shall be of the same manufacturer as distribution switchgear.
B. The extent of safety switches, disconnect switches is indicated on the drawings and
by the requirements of this section.
C. In accordance with the service indicated, use 240 or 600 volt switches, single throw,
fusible, or non-fusible, horsepower rated, 100% load break and make rated, designed
for locking in "ON" or "OFF" position, in code gauge steel cabinets, as required by the
application and the N.E.C.
D. Use switches which have number of poles required, dependent on equipment

requirements.
E. Use NEMA 3R switches where exposed to weather, with weatherproof threaded hubs
for top or side conduit entries into switch.
Enclosed Safety Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 28 16 - 1

90 Percent
F. Use fuse clips which are rejecting type to accept Class RK or L fuses only.
G. Size fuses serving motor loads at 125% to 175% of motor nameplate rating, or the
next standard size and as specifically recommended by motor or equipment
manufacturer.
H. Provide a manual switch at each motor, class 2510 Square D, for motors shown with
"MS." Provide a 20-AMP rated switch at each motor not otherwise noted.
I. Where switches/breakers are listed as requiring GFCI protection in specifications or

drawings, coordinate with the equipment manufacturer to provide proper GFCI
requirements to determine whether they are intended to be for personnel (5ma) or
equipment (30ma).
1.4 SUBMITTALS

requirements.
1.5 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit product data for the following.

1. Safety and Disconnect Switches
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D
B. Siemens
2.2 SWITCHES
A. Provide safety switches and disconnects with a voltage rating suitable for the nominal
voltage of the system in which they are to be applied. Contacts are quick-make,
quick-break.
B. Provide surge protective devices in accordance with section 26 43 00.
2.3 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. All circuit breakers that have an overcurrent trip setting fixed or adjustable to 1200A
or higher shall have an Energy-Reducing Maintenance Switch or similar approved
method for arc energy reduction and shall meet all requirements of NEC 240.87.

90 Percent
2.4 CONSTRUCTION
A. Indoor dry locations, 30 amp thru 100 amp, use NEMA 1 general duty (GD).
B. All outdoor locations use NEMA 3R heavy duty (HD).
C. The handle shall be suitable for padlocking in the OFF position. Defeatable, front
accessible, coin-proof door interlock to prevent opening the door when the switch is
in the ON position and to prevent turning the switch ON when the door is open.
Incoming line terminals with an insulated shield.
D. Provide switches with rejection-type fuse holders suitable for use with fuses specified
under Section 26 28 13.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount switches no more than 6 inches above and within 6 feet of the equipment
served at the direction of the Engineer, so that operating handle is easily accessible.
Align tops of switches when grouped together.
B. Provide a housekeeping pad for all free standing or floor mounted safety switches
whether they are mounted inside or outside.
C. Mount vertically on required separate support system hardware with switch easily
accessible (door to open 90 degrees minimum).
D. Permanently mount safety switches from inside with plated or stainless bolts, toggle
bolts or anchors.
E. Exposed mounting bolts, screws, etc. are not acceptable.
F. Permanently install fusible switches with class R fuse kits so that fuses are readable
when looking at open switch.
G. Do not mount switches/disconnects to access panels or on nameplate data or

equipment.
H. Installation of Conductors: Switches shall not be used as “junction boxes” between

HVAC units (splicing or “pig tailing” is not permitted). The maximum number of
conductors allowed per termination is determined by the manufacturer’s approved
rating for each terminal or lug. Multiple conductor configurations shall be highlighted
in the contractor’s submittal package. Exceptions to this rating must be obtained in
writing from the engineer’s office on a case by case basis.
I. Coordinate and verify exact fuse sizes with mechanical contractor. Fuses shown on
drawings are based on one manufacturer. Fuse sizes vary depending on
manufacturer.

90 Percent
J. Identification: Refer to Section 26 05 53 for Electrical Identification. Provide name

plate identification on all HVAC equipment regardless of equipment location.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 26 28 19
GROUND FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Ground fault protection systems

Section.
2. Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards
3. Section 26 21 00 - Low Voltage Electrical Service Entrance
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NEC: 100, 230-95, 517-17, 700-27
B. UL: E51827
C. All other governing local codes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

requirements.
1.4 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit product data for the following:

1. Procedure for testing system performance as required by the NEC.
2. Operating procedures, schematics and wiring diagrams.
3. Calibration for current pickup adjustment and recommended settings for current
pickup and delay adjustments.
Ground Fault Protection System 26 28 19 - 1

90 Percent
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Refer to specification section 26 24 16 – Panelboards for approved manufacturers.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Ground Fault Protection System:

1. Ground sensor relay (GSR) system with ground break components, solid state
construction, adjustable current pick-up and time delay settings.
2. Coordinate ground sensor (CT) with integral test winding of sufficient size to
encircle all phase and neutral conductors, for zero sequence monitoring and a
solid state relay to operate the trip circuit on the main switches.
3. Provide required transformer to supply power for tripping switches and connect
phase to phase.
B. Accessories Included:
1. Ground fault relaying system for main switches to be zero-sequence type.
2. Ground fault current-detection range to be 100 to 1,200 amperes.
3. Time delay range to be instantaneous to 60 cycles.
4. Derive tripping and control power from control power transformers in
switchboard.
5. Components shall include static ground fault sensor, current monitor, and test
panel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide ground fault protection at all service entrance equipment in accordance with
2014 NEC 230.95 Ground Fault Protection of Equipment.
B. At health care facilities, provide an additional level of ground fault protection in

accordance with 2014 NEC 517.17 Ground Fault Protection.
C. Provide ground fault sensing and indication on emergency systems in accordance

with 2014 NEC 700.27 Ground Fault Protection of Equipment.
D. Provide ground fault protection at any additional locations indicated on the drawings.

90 Percent
A. Manufacturer to test for required calibration after switchgear is in operation but before
final acceptance.
B. Provide written documentation of manufacturer's testing and calibration to the

Engineer before final acceptance of project.
C. Setting shall be coordinated with the Power Company.

1. Initial settings: At the time of installation, adjust the settings of the ground fault
protection device as follows:
a. Time delay: Adjust the time delay to 0.3 seconds.
b. Pick-up: In no case can the setting exceed 1,200 amps. Observing this
absolute maximum, adjust the ground fault trip setting to the greater of the
following two options.
(1) 15% of the trip rating of the main breaker in the service entrance
equipment.
(2) At least as large as the trip rating of the largest downstream overcurrent
device that serves a single piece of equipment.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 26 33 53
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This specification section describes a three-phase uninterruptible power supply,

hereafter known as the UPS.
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 specifications, and section 26 00 00 apply to
this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. UL-1778, Standards for Uninterruptible Power Supply Equipment, April 1992 revision.
B. IEEE 587-1980/ANSI C62.41 1980 Standards for Surge Withstand ability
C. CSA 22.2, No. 107.1 (cUL equivalent).
D. IEC, Semiconductor Converter Standards.
E. ISO 9001 Quality Assurance program.
A. The UPS shall be a three phase, double conversion (on-line), continuous duty, solid-
state, uninterruptible power system. The UPS shall operate continuously at rated
capacity as an active power control system in conjunction with building electrical
systems to provide conditioned uninterruptible power. The system shall consist of a
rectifier (converter), battery bank and charger, inverter, associated transformers,
automatic static bypass transfer circuit, synchronizing equipment, protective devices,
maintenance bypass circuit, battery disconnect breaker, and accessories.
1.3.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. The UPS shall be designed in accordance with, and shall comply with, the following
standards:
1. UL 1778 and CSA 22.2 (cUL equivalent).
2. IEC, Semiconductor Converter Standards.
3. ISO 9001 Quality Assurance program.
90 Percent
B. System Type: The system shall be an on-line or double-conversion type system.
C. Future Expansion: The UPS shall be capable of a field upgrade to allow parallel
operation with additional UPS modules for increased capacity or for redundant
operation.
D. Features: The UPS shall have the following features.

1. Transistorized pulse width modulation (PWM) insulated gate bipolar transistor
(IGBT)/intelligent power module converter for input.
2. Digital signal processing (DSP) using PWM for direct digital control (DDC) of all
UPS control and monitoring functions.
3. Transistorized PWM IGBT intelligent inverter for output.
4. Output isolation transformer.
5. Fault memory and diagnostics.
6. Menu controlled operation.
7. Active control of output voltage distortion.
8. Automatic current walk-in.
9. Remote operation.
10. Automatic UPS restart and load pickup after the battery is depleted and the utility
power is restored.
11. Two strings of batteries. Systems utilizing a single battery string will not be
considered.
12. Internal DC disconnect and fuse protection.
13. Remote and local emergency power of (EPO).
14. Input AC disconnect and fuse protection.
15. Internal maintenance bypass switch.
16. Remote monitor panel.
17. Input isolation transformer.
E. Audible Noise: Noise generated by the UPS under any condition of normal operation
shall not exceed 65 dBA measured 1 meter from surface of the UPS.
F. Surge Protection: The UPS shall be able to sustain input surges without damage per
criteria listed in ANSI C62.41-1980.
1.3.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.3.2.1 CAPACITY
A. Power Rating: The power output rating of the UPS shall be at least 30kVA at 0.9
lagging power factor.
B. Run Time: At full load, the system shall have a minimum run time of 120 minutes.
90 Percent
C. Output Overload Capability: The UPS module shall be capable of supplying regulated
output voltage during overloads of up to 125% of its ratings for a period of 10 minutes
and 150% for one (1) minute. Overloads in excess of 167% of the UPS rating on an
instantaneous basis or in excess of the overload time periods previously stated shall
cause the static bypass transfer switch to reverse transfer and allow the AC bypass
input line to supply the necessary fault clearing current required.
1.3.2.2 FULL LOAD EFFICIENCY
A. The overall efficiency of the module (AC to AC), with nominal input voltage, battery
fully charged and the inverter supplying full rated load, shall be 93.0% at 100% load
and 93% at 50% load (excluding output transformer).
1.3.2.3 CURRENT RATINGS
A. Reflected Input Current THD: 6% maximum at 100% load. 9% maximum at 50% load.
1.3.2.4 VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS
A. Input:
1. Input voltage: The nominal UPS input voltage shall be 208volts, 3-phase, 3-wire.
2. Input voltage range: The allowable input voltage range shall be at least +10%
and at least -15%.
3. Input frequency and range: 60 Hz ± 10%.
4. Input power factor: .98 lagging minimum at 100% load; 0.95 lagging minimum at
50 % load without additional harmonic filters.
B. Output:
1. Nominal Output Voltage: 208V, 3 phase, 4 wire.
2. Nominal Dynamic Voltage Regulation: +/- 0.5% for balanced load, +/- 2% for 50%
unbalanced load.
3. Voltage Adjustment Range: +/- 5% manually.
4. Voltage Transient Response: Output voltage transients shall be limited to a
maximum of 2% deviation from nominal voltage on any and all phases. Output
frequency shall be maintained to within 0.1 Hz of the specified frequency during
transient conditions. The maximum voltage deviation for any phase on the output
of the UPS inverter shall be ± 2% for 100% step load change. The output voltage
shall return to within ± 0.5% of the steady state value within 16.67 milliseconds
(1 cycle) after a voltage transient.
C. Output Frequency Regulation: The UPS shall be capable of providing the nominal
output frequency of 60 Hz ± 0.05 Hz when the UPS inverter is not synchronized (free-
running) to the bypass AC input line. The UPS shall be capable of providing the
nominal output frequency 60 Hz ± 2.0 Hz (selectable in 0.25 Hz increments) when the
UPS inverter is synchronized to the bypass AC input line.
D. Phase Imbalance: Balanced loads 120 deg +/- 1 deg, 50% unbalanced loads 120 deg
+/- 3 deg.
E. Output Voltage Harmonic Content: Maximum < 1.5% THD Ph/Ph, < 2% THD Ph/N
90 Percent
when the UPS is connected to 100% linear loads. Output voltage total harmonic
distortion shall be less than < 2% Ph/Ph, < 3% Ph/N when connected to a 100% non-
linear load with a crest factor not to exceed 3.5.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

requirements.
1.4.1 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit product data for all components and accessories of the UPS.
1.4.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

operation of the UPS. These documents shall be included as part of the project
operating and maintenance manuals.
B. As-built Drawings: Provide 2 complete sets of as-built plans showing the location and
wiring configuration of all major components of the UPS.
C. Warranty: Provide 2 copies of warrantees.
D. Training Documentation: Provide letter in final documents documenting that the

E. Factory Check out Documentation: Provide documentation of manufacturer’s factory

testing.
F. Manufacturer’s Commissioning Documentation: Provide documentation of

manufacturer’s final testing, adjusting, and commissioning of the completed
installation.
1.5.1 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 20 years’ experience in the design,

manufacture, and testing of solid-state UPS systems.
B. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified.
C. Service Personnel: The UPS manufacturer shall directly employ a nationwide service
organization, consisting of factory trained field service personnel dedicated to the
start-up, maintenance, and repair of UPS equipment. The manufacturer shall provide
a national dispatch center to coordinate field service personnel schedules. One toll-
90 Percent
free number shall reach a qualified support person 24 hours/day, 7 days/week, 365
days/year. If emergency service is required, response time shall be 20 minutes or
less.
D. Replacement Parts Stocking: Parts shall be available through an extensive network

to ensure around-the-clock parts availability throughout the country. Recommended
spare parts shall be fully stocked by local field service personnel with back-up
available from national parts center and the manufacturing location. The national
parts center Customer Support Parts Coordinators shall be on-call 24 hours a day, 7
days a week, 365 days a year for immediate parts availability. Parts from the national
parts center shall be shipped within 4 hours on the next available flight out and
delivered to the customer’s site within 24 hours.
1.5.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. UL Label: All UPS products shall be UL-labeled for the specific applications utilized
on this project.
1.5.3 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. The contractor shall arrange a meeting with the UPS supplier prior to installation of
the equipment to coordinate all aspects of the installation process. The contractor
shall require the UPS manufacturer to provide instruction regarding the installation of
the system.
1.6.1 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. If temporary on-site storage is required before installation, then the contractor shall
strictly adhere to all prescribed storage requirements set forth by the manufacturer.
1.7 WARRANTY
1.7.1 SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. UPS Module: The UPS manufacturer shall warrant the UPS module against defects
in materials and workmanship for 12 months after initial start-up or 18 months after
ship date, whichever period expires first.
B. Battery: The battery manufacturer’s standard warranty shall be passed through to the
end user. The battery shall have at least a one (1) year full warranty and at least a
nine (9) year pro rate warranty under full float operation.
1.8 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. A system start-up service package shall be available to commission the units after
installation. This additional testing shall compliment the standard factory testing, and
verify that no problems have been introduced by shipping or installation damage.
90 Percent
1.9 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. The contractor shall require the UPS manufacturer to provide instruction to the
owner’s personnel in the operation, adjustment, and maintenance of the system. The
manufacturer shall provide documentation of such training in the closeout submittals.
1.10 COMMISSIONING
A. Prior to substantial completion of the project, the contractor shall require the
manufacturer to test the operation of the system to ensure the proper operation of the
system throughout the range of building operating conditions. The manufacturer shall
provide documentation of such commissioning in the closeout submittals.
1.11 MAINTENANCE
1.11.1 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Contracts: A complete offering of preventive and full service

maintenance contracts for both the UPS system and battery system shall be available.
An extended warranty and preventive maintenance package shall be available.
Warranty and preventive maintenance service shall be performed by factory-trained
service personnel.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. If they comply with these specifications, products of the following manufacturers will
be acceptable. Contact names are given only as an aid to the contractor with no
guarantee of accuracy.
B. Liebert
Contact Tech Plan Incorporated
717 Taylor Drive
Plano, Texas 75074
Phone (469) 467-4000
Fax (469) 467-4086
amoore@tplan.com
C. Mitsubishi Electric Automation Inc.

Contact Chris Howell
Datacom Power, Inc.
3020 Legacy Drive
Plano, Texas 75023
Phone (972) 491-0987
Fax (972) 491-0718
ChrisHowell@DataComPower.com
90 Percent
D. TSC
Contact Curt Herge
Improving Critical Facilities
1920 Hutton Court, Suite 500
Dallas, Texas 75234
Cell: (469) 859-0072)
Office: (972) 234-3855, Ext. 244
Curt@tubbesing.com
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Rectifier / Converter: The converter shall utilize pulse-width modulated (PWM)-

controlled insulated-gate bipolar transistors (IGBT) switching at a minimum of 6 kHZ.
B. Inverter: The Inverter shall be capable of providing rated output while operating from
any DC voltage within the battery operating range. The inverter shall utilize solid state
PWM controlled IGBT power transistors switching at a minimum of 6 kHZ and DSP
based control logic.
C. System Battery: The system battery shall consist of two strings of batteries to allow
for battery maintenance and replacement without disrupting the operation of the UPS.
D. Battery Circuit Breaker: A battery disconnect circuit breaker with undervoltage release
(UVR) and auxiliary contacts shall be included for isolation of the battery pack from
the UPS module. When opened, there shall be no battery voltage in the UPS
enclosure. The UPS shall be provided with a pushbutton to trip the breaker from the
control panel.
E. Static Transfer Switch: A static transfer switch and bypass circuit shall be provided as
an integral part of the UPS. The static switch shall be rated to conduct full load current
continuously. The switch shall have an overload rating of 110% rated load
continuously, 200% rated load for five seconds. The static transfer switch shall also
have fault-clearing capabilities.
F. Internal Maintenance Bypass Switch: A manually operated maintenance bypass

switch shall be incorporated into the UPS cabinet to directly connect the critical load
to the bypass AC input power source, bypassing the rectifier/charger, inverter, and
static transfer switch. All energized terminals shall be shielded to ensure that
maintenance personnel do not inadvertently come in contact with energized parts or
terminals. With the critical load powered from the maintenance bypass circuit, it shall
be possible to check out the operation of the rectifier/charger, inverter, battery, and
static transfer switch.
G. Enclosure: The UPS shall be equipped with standard forklift provisions to allow ease
of installation using conventional lifting/moving equipment. The UPS shall have front
access only for maintenance or service. Side access or rear access shall not be
accepted. The UPS shall be designed such that its rear can be pressed against a
back wall and its sides can be pressed against sidewalls.
H. Display and Controls: UPS start-up, shutdown, and bypass operations shall be
90 Percent
accomplished through the front-panel pushbutton controls. Menu-driven user prompts

shall be provided to guide the operator through system operation without the use of
additional manuals. Pushbuttons shall be provided to display the status of the UPS
and to test and reset visual and audible alarms. A mimic screen shall be available on
the LCD screen to depict a single-line diagram of the UPS, with switch positions and
power flow.
I. Emergency Module Off: The UPS control panel shall have a local emergency module
off pushbutton with protective cover. Pressing the emergency module off shall cause
uninterrupted transfer of the load to bypass, and the input, output, and battery
breakers to open, completely isolating the UPS (except bypass) from power.
J. Emergency Power Off (EPO): Provisions shall be available for a remote emergency
power off function, which completely removes power from the critical bus when
activated.
K. Remote Alarm Panel: The remote alarm panel shall have LED alarm lights. An audible
alarm shall sound upon any alarm condition.
L. Automated Battery Testing: The system shall be equipped with a battery management
system that logs battery environmental parameters, cycling history and monitors
general battery health. The system shall also perform battery performance tests at
predetermined intervals to assess battery health.
M. Automatic Diagnostics: The UPS shall be equipped with a continuously operating

auto-diagnostic system that evaluates the operating condition of the UPS and all the
sub components. In the event that the diagnostics system detects a problem, the
system shall sound an audible alarm to alert the operator.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Web/SNMP Software: The UPS shall come equipped with an internal SNMP adapter,
which will connect the UPS directly to any I.P. based network using Ethernet
communications. The UPS manufacturer shall provide a Web/SNMP software
package to enable full management of the UPS using a browser. In the event of a
utility failure the SNMP shall continue with live communication without the requirement
of additional or separate UPS equipment until such time as the UPS shuts down for
low battery. On resumption of utility power the SNMP shall resume full SNMP
communication automatically.
B. Computer System Shut-down Software: When the remaining battery capacity

discharges to a threshold level, the UPS system shall generate a signal to be sent to
the owner’s computer system that will be used to initiate a controlled shut-down of the
owner’s computer system. The UPS vendor shall provide any software that is required
on the owner’s computer system to accomplish this.
C. Internal Modem: The UPS shall come with an internal modem capable of dialing out
from the UPS to notify up to two remote computers, terminals, PC’s, or pocket pagers
when important events occur. The modem will also be capable of accepting incoming
calls, with the appropriate security, and connecting to a remote terminal, computer or
90 Percent
PC, to perform all those functions normally available on the front panel including
viewing monitoring screens.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
2.4.1 TESTS, INSPECTION
A. Factory Testing: Before shipment, the manufacturer shall fully and completely test the
system to ensure compliance with the specification. These tests shall include
operational discharge and recharge tests to ensure guaranteed rated performance.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1 SITE VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
A. If the work is to be performed in an existing facility, both the contractor and the
manufacturer’s representative shall visit the site of the proposed work and observe its
conditions so that they may be fully informed as to the materials, labor, workmanship
and conditions under which the work is to be done.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install the UPS as required and where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions and project shop drawings, applicable requirements of NEC, and
recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.
3.3.1 SITE TESTS
A. The systems shall be tested on-site by the manufacturer’s factory trained field service
personnel as part of the standard start-up procedure. Final UPS adjustments, if any,
shall be made as required. Start-up includes the following:
B. Load Bank Test: Site acceptance load bank testing of the system shall consist of two
hours of operation at 50% of full load rating, two hours of operation at 75% of full load
rating, and four hours operation of 100% of full load rating. The manufacturer shall
provide all load banks required for this testing, including all wiring required and
delivery to the site. If the UPS system fails the first test, the manufacturer shall rerun
the load test at no addition cost to the Owner.
C. Transient Test: Record output voltage, output current, bypass voltage and bypass
current during the transient tests of applying and removing 0% - 100% - 0% load.
D. Load Transfer Test: Record output voltage, output current, bypass voltage and
bypass current during transfer from inverter to bypass and bypass to inverter with no
load and 100% kW load.
90 Percent
E. Input Failure Test: With the module operating at full load and the battery connected,
disconnect the input power to the UPS. Record output voltage, output current, input
voltage and input current during battery operation. Verify and record the actual battery
protection time.
F. Battery Capacity Test: The battery capacity test shall include a full discharge
operation. This test shall utilize a microprocessor controller which shall be
programmed to monitor each cell. Within the processor, provide alarm circuits to warn
the operator of any performance problems. Overall battery voltage, individual cell or
mono-block cell voltages, current, and elapsed time shall be logged and recorded by
this system. The acquired data shall be analyzed to demonstrate measured ampere-
hour capacity of the battery system and integrity of cell-to-cell connections. The
measured battery system capacity shall be normalized to 77 deg. F. and compared
to the manufacturer’s published date to demonstrate compliance. Upon completion of
this test, completed copies of this test shall be submitted to the Owner and Engineer
for approval and acceptance of the battery system.
G. Battery Recharge Test: As part of the battery capacity test, verify the recharge time
of the battery.
3.3.2 INSPECTION
A. The following inspections and checks shall be performed by the manufacturer’s

factory-trained field service personnel during the UPS startup.
B. Visual Inspection:
1. Inspect equipment for signs of damage.
2. Verify installation per drawings.
3. Inspect cabinets for foreign objects.
4. Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly sized and configured.
5. Inspect battery cases.
6. Inspect battery for proper polarity.
7. Verify all printed circuit boards are configured properly.
C. Mechanical Inspection:
1. Check all control wiring connections for tightness.
2. Check all power wiring connections for tightness.
3. Check all terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs for tightness.
D. Electrical Inspection:
1. Check all fuses for continuity.
2. Confirm input voltage and phase rotation is correct.
3. Verify control transformer connections are correct for voltages being used.
4. Assure connection and voltage of the battery string(s).
3.3.3 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES
A. UPS Startup and Commissioning: The manufacturer shall use factory trained
personnel to provide the initial startup and commissioning of the UPS.
90 Percent
B. UPS Operator Training: The manufacturer shall train the owner’s UPS operator in
basic UPS operation.
C. UPS Maintenance Training: The manufacturer shall train the owner’s maintenance
personnel in basic UPS operation and UPS maintenance. Maintenance training for
customer employees is in addition to the basic operator training conducted as a part
of the system start-up. The training course shall cover UPS theory, location of
subassemblies, safety, battery considerations and UPS operational procedures. The
course shall include AC to DC conversion and DC to AC inversion techniques as well
as control metering, and feedback circuits to the Printed Circuit Board (PCB) level.
Troubleshooting and fault isolation using alarm information and internal self-
diagnostics shall be stressed. The training shall consist of at least two 4-hour training
sessions.
END OF SECTION
90 Percent
SECTION 26 43 00
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section supplements section 26 00 00 Electrical and contains additional

requirements applicable to surge protective devices.
A. Surge protective devices (SPD) provided in accordance with NEC article 285.
B. SPD for phone, data, security and other systems.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. NEC - NFPA 70 National Electrical Code, most current edition
B. UL 1449 - Underwriters Laboratories, UL 1449, Standard for Safety, Surge Protection

Devices 4th Edition March 2016 Type 1, Type 2 and Type 3 Protectors
C. ANSI/IEEE C62: Complete C62: Complete 1990 Edition: Guides and Standards for
Surge Protection
D. UL 497 Paired Conductor Communications Circuits
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 26 00 90 Electrical Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit product data for all SPD used on this project. Provide evidence
that SPD are listed to the most current edition of UL1449 by an OSHA approved safety
testing agency (i.e. UL, ETL, or CSA). Provide a submittal package that includes
specifications and 3rd party testing and listing letters.
Surge Protective Devices 26 43 00 - 1

90 Percent
1.6 WARRANTY
A. All surge suppression devices and supporting components shall be guaranteed by

the installing contractor to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period
of five years minimum excluding installation labor. Lightning damage to the SPD is
not grounds for voiding any/all warranties of the SPD.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following.

1. ACT Communications
2. Eaton Corporation (formerly Cutler Hammer)
3. Emerson - Liebert
4. ABB (formerly GE Industrial)
5. Mersen (formerly Ferraz Shawmut)
6. Schneider Electric - Square D
7. Surge Suppression - ILSCO
A. Technology: Construction shall be metal oxide varister (MOV) componentry with

bidirectional operation.
B. Protection Modes: Provide at least seven mode protection (L-N, L-G, N-G) with
discrete protection elements on each mode.
C. Protection: Each SPD shall be protected upstream by a dedicated UL rated fuse or

disconnecting means.
D. Filtering: Provide surge protection plus filtering of disruptive noises, EMI/RFI

interference to >-40db from 3kHz to 1 MHz according to NEMA LS-1 Specification.
E. Listing and ratings: SPD shall be tested and performance rated per UL1449. Clamping
voltage shall be clearly stated on both submittals and equipment installed.
F. Voltage ratings:
Maximum Continuous Voltage Protection

Rated Line Voltage Operating Voltage (MCOV) Rating (VPR)
120/240; 120/208 volt 150 volts 700 volts (L-N, L-G),
1000 (L-L)
240/480; 277/480 volt 320 volts 1000 volts (L-N, L-G),
1800 (L-L)
480 volts (2 ph. Delta) 600 volts 1800 volts (L-N, L-G),
3000 (L-L)
G. Alarms and monitoring: Provide SPD with the following.
1. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
2. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.

90 Percent
3. One set of dry contacts rated at 5A and 240V for remote monitoring of protection.
H. SPD at the electrical service entrance shall meet the following additional criteria.
1. Modular construction and field replaceable.
2. Bus Bar connected for low impedance connections.
3. UL rated as Type 1 and Type 2 SPD device
4. SCCR: 200kAIC
5. Nominal Discharge Current: 20,000 amperes (8x20 us- waveform)
6. Maximum Single Impulse Current rating: >135,000 amperes (8 X 20 us
waveform) / mode.
7. Repetitive Surge testing per IEEE C62.41.2 C3 10,000 amps: 20,000 impulses
I. SPD at electrical sub-panels shall meet the following additional criteria.

1. Modular or System construction
2. UL rated as Type 2 device
3. SCCR: 100kAIC or no less than specified rating of the electrical subpanel.
4. Nominal Discharge Current: 10,000 amperes (8x20 us- waveform)
5. Maximum Single Impulse Current rating: >65,000 amperes (8 X 20 us waveform)
/ mode.
6. Repetitive Surge testing per IEEE C62.41.2 C3 10,000 amps: >2,500 impulses
J. SPD at rooftop units and condensers shall meet the following additional criteria.
1. NEMA 4X enclosure suitable for outdoor installation
2. Nipple-mounted
3. SCCR: 100kAIC
4. Squared D SDSA series or equivalent.
K. Receptacles with Type 3 SPD installed – Use only when one or two outlets need SPD
and panel is not readily available:
1. SPD in a receptacle is able to employ a maximum of two IEC 320 receptacles
(NEMA 5-20R) and shall be rated not more than the current rating of the SPD
and voltage rating consistent with the voltage rating of the SPD.
2. A SPD receptacle used for outdoor use shall comply with the outdoor
requirements in UL 498 and shall be provided with a receptacle hood which is
weather-proof.
3. Permanently wired with high visibility LED indicator and/or damage alert beeper
4. Minimum Transient Suppression:
a. MCOV and VPR matches section 2.2 B 4
b. 6,500 amp peak current in each mode
5. Manufacturers:
a. Pass and Seymour 6262 Series
b. Hubbell 8200 H Series
c. Leviton 5300 Series
d. Wiremold "Sentrex 52TB2" series
L. SPD for telephone, video, data and alarm lines shall meet the following criteria.
1. Comply with appropriate UL 497, 497A, 497B and 497C standards for secondary
protectors.
2. Technology can be Gas Tube, Silicon Avalanche Diode or hybrid.
3. Rate Line Voltage (RMS): 150V for phone, 24V for data and control.

90 Percent
4. Maximum single line impulse 10,000 amps (8/20 us current waveform).

5. Clamp Voltage (Pair): Tip to ground and Ring to ground: 300 volts
6. Pulse Life: 1,000 - 3KA - 8/20 NS impulse with drift.
7. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: 180 VAC tip to ground, 180 VAC ring
to ground
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. For new construction, provide SPD at each of the following locations. For renovations
and additions, provide SPD at the following locations which are affected by the project
but do not already have SPD.
1. Each electrical service entrance equipment.
2. Each main computer panelboard and at each isolated ground panelboard.
3. At all emergency systems switchboards and panelboards.
4. At each panelboard noted on drawings in addition to above requirements.
5. On all outdoor rooftop HVAC units and on all condensing unit switches. Mount to
bottom of switch or as recommended by the manufacturer.
6. One SPD power outlet at each energy management control panel located by
project controls contractor.
7. At each new telephone and data incoming line.
8. On all new video or alarm system wire entering from the outside of the facility.
9. In or on each fire pump controller in accordance with NEC 2017 Article 695.15.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 26 50 00
LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section supplements section 26 00 00 - Electrical and contains additional

requirements applicable to all lighting systems.
A. Interior and exterior lighting systems, with the exception of sports lighting and
theatrical lighting.
B. Luminaires, LED drivers, emergency battery packs and emergency power transfer
devices.
C. Section 26 09 41 - Lighting Controls
D. Section 26 56 23 - Area Lighting
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Energy Star
B. DLC – DesignLights® Consortium
C. TCLP - Federal Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure
D. UL 1598 - Standard for Safety - Luminaires
E. UL 924 - Standard for Safety - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
F. UL 8750 - Standard for Safety - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in
Lighting Products
G. ANSI/UL 844 - Standard for Safety - Luminaires for Use in Hazardous (Classified)
Locations
H. ANSI C78.377 - Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid-State Lighting Products
Lighting 26 50 00 - 1
90 Percent
I. NECA/IESNA 500 - Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting

Systems
J. NECA/IESNA 501 - Recommended Practice for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems
K. IESNA LM-79 - Approved Method: Optical and Electrical Measurements of Solid-

State Lighting Products
L. IESNA LM-80 - Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED Packages,
Arrays and Modules
M. IESNA TM-21 - Projecting Long Term Lumen, Photon, and Radiant Flux Maintenance
of LED Light Sources
N. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 47, Part 15 - Radio Frequency Devices
A. All lighting systems shall be compatible with lighting controls shown on the drawings
or specified in 26 09 41 - Lighting Controls.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 26 00 90 - Electrical Submittal Procedures.
1.7 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit complete product information for the following:

1. Luminaires
2. LED arrays
3. LED drivers
4. Battery backup units
5. Automatic transfer devices for emergency lighting
6. Product warranty documentation
B. Submit luminaires shown on the Luminaire Schedule on the drawings and those noted
on the drawings but not on the schedule.
C. Include complete manufacturer’s part numbers.
D. Clearly highlight or otherwise indicate on the cut sheets all options and accessories.
E. Indicate if DLC listing applies only to certain color temperatures, beam spreads, or
other luminaire options. Indicate if any luminaire options void the DLC listing.
F. Indicate the L70 rating and the number of LM-80 testing hours for all LED luminaires.
Lighting 26 50 00 - 2
90 Percent
1.8 SAMPLES
A. Submit non-returnable samples of luminaires upon request. Include all components

necessary for a working product.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL SUBMITTALS
A. This project may require compliance with the Windstorm Inspection Program of the
Texas Department of Insurance (TDI). Refer to Division 01 specifications to determine
whether windstorm certification is required, and for submittal requirements of the TDI
Windstorm Inspection Program.
A. Provide owner a list of all luminaire types used on the project using manufacturer part
numbers.
B. Provide owner a list of all LED array and LED driver types used on the project using
ANSI and manufacturer codes. Provide on as-built drawings the location of all remote-
mounted LED drivers.
C. Provide owner a list of battery backup, automatic transfer devices, etc. on the project
using manufacturer part numbers. Provide on as-built drawings the location of all
remote-mounted battery backups.
1.11 QUALIFICATIONS
A. All luminaires shall be from manufacturers who has been regularly engaged in the
production of such products for the past five years.
A. All luminaires and components, including LED arrays, LED drivers, emergency
battery packs and automatic transfer devices shall be UL listed.
B. This project may require compliance with the Windstorm Inspection Program of the
whether windstorm certification is required, and for requirements of the TDI
1.13 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store all product in accordance with manufacturer’s storage requirements.
1.14 SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. Provide a 5 year manufacturer’s warranty for all LED luminaires. The warranty shall
include all luminaire components including, but not limited to, LED arrays, LED
drivers, luminaire body and hardware. LED arrays will be considered defective if a
total of 15% or more of the individual light emitting diodes fail to illuminate.
Lighting 26 50 00 - 3
90 Percent
B. Provide a 5 year manufacturer’s full warranty for all battery packs.
C. The warranties shall cover the cost of materials and labor for repair and installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Only those manufacturers of luminaires listed on the Luminaire Schedule are

acceptable.
2.2 EXISTING PRODUCTS
A. New luminaires must match existing luminaires in all areas including but not limited
to style, finish color, orientation, mounting height, color temperature, driver type,
switching capability, voltage, etc. The new luminaires must meet or exceed the quality
of the existing luminaires and must meet all current codes and standards for
efficiency.
2.3 LUMINAIRES
A. The following requirements apply to all luminaires. See following articles for additional
requirements for specific types of luminaires.
B. Only those products listed on the Luminaire Schedule or noted in the drawings are
acceptable.
C. Unless otherwise noted, consult Architect for luminaire color or finish.
D. All luminaires used in hazardous locations shall comply with UL 844 requirements
and be UL listed.
E. All luminaires used for emergency lighting, including exit lights, shall be UL 924 listed.
2.4 LED LUMINAIRES
A. LED luminaires shall meet the following requirements in addition to the general
requirements for luminaires listed above.
B. All LED luminaires shall comply with UL 8750 requirements and be UL listed.
C. All LED general purpose luminaires shall be either Energy Star or DLC approved.
D. Expected life: All LED luminaires shall have a minimum L70 of 50,000 hours. The
estimated L70 of LED luminaires shall be derived from LM-80 test data in accordance
with TM-21 procedures. LM-80 test data shall be measured in accordance with LM-
79 procedures.
Lighting 26 50 00 - 4
90 Percent
E. Color rendering: All interior LED luminaires shall have a minimum CRI of 80 or as
indicated on the Luminaire Schedule. All exterior LED luminaires shall have a
minimum CRI of 70.
F. Color temperature: Unless specified to the contrary, all LED luminaires on the same
project are to have the same correlated color temperature (CCT). See the Luminaire
Schedule for LED CCT. LED luminaire CCT shall be within a 3-step SCDM (Standard
Deviation Color Matching) in accordance with ANSI C78.377.
G. Maximum power: The maximum power input of all LED luminaires shall be as
indicated on the Luminaire Schedule, with a tolerance of +5% / -10%.
H. Efficacy: All general purpose LED luminaires shall have a minimum efficacy of 90
lumens/watt.
I. Lumen output: The lumen output of all LED luminaires shall be as indicated on the
Luminaire Schedule, with a tolerance of plus or minus 8%.
2.5 HIGH BAY LED LUMINAIRES
A. LED high bay luminaires shall meet the following requirements in addition to the
requirements for LED luminaires listed above.
B. All high bay luminaires located in gyms, play areas, multipurpose spaces, etc. shall
have a wire guard.
C. Lens, if provided, or wire guard of high bay luminaires shall be hinged and shall have
retainer latches for tool-less maintenance.
2.6 EXIT SIGNS
A. LED exit signs shall also meet the following requirements in addition to the general
requirements for LED luminaires.
B. LED exit signs shall be rated for at least 10 years unless otherwise noted.
C. LED exit signs shall be provided with maintenance free batteries good for at least 90
minutes.
D. LED exit signs shall be provided with status indicator lamp and test switch.
E. Powered LED exit signs shall be UL tested and approved with 100’-0” visibility.
F. Exit signs in gyms, play areas, multipurpose spaces, etc. shall have a wire guard.
2.7 POLE-MOUNTED EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES
A. LED pole-mounted luminaires shall meet the following requirements in addition to the
requirements listed above in the LED Luminaires article.
Lighting 26 50 00 - 5
90 Percent
B. Pole mounted luminaires shall have an option for internal glare control or external
glare shield where applicable.
C. All exterior surfaces of pole mounted luminaires shall be painted using powder coat
finish.
D. See section 26 56 23 - Area Lighting for additional site lighting requirements, including
poles.
2.8 LED DRIVERS
A. The following requirements apply to all LED drivers.
B. Drivers shall be UL Type TL or UL Class P and bear such labels.
C. Drivers shall comply with UL 8750 and be UL listed.
D. Input power: Driver input wattage for the supplied driver must be the same or less
than the input wattage listed on the Luminaire Schedule.
E. Voltage: Drivers shall be 60 Hz, universal input voltage (120V-277V) +/- 10% unless
otherwise indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. Drivers shall demonstrate no visible
change in light output with a variation of +/- 10% change in line voltage input.
F. Remote drivers: Remote drivers shall have remote wiring capability of up to 50 feet.
G. LED module compatibility: Drivers shall provide LED module starting conditions and
operating parameters consistent with LED module manufacturer’s recommendations
and shall be suitable for the luminaire operating conditions.
H. Wiring diagrams: Drivers shall have wiring diagrams and LED module connections
displayed on the driver.
I. Sensor compatibility: Drivers shall be compatible with and not cause interference with
the operation of occupancy sensors or other infrared control systems.
J. Power factor: Drivers shall have a power factor of 0.9 or greater.
K. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Drivers shall be 20% THD or less.
L. Dimming capability: Drivers shall dim to at least 10% or as noted in the Luminaire
Schedule.
M. Driver efficiency: Drivers shall have an efficiency of 85% or greater.
N. Case temperature: Indoor drivers shall have a maximum case temperature rating of
75ºC. Exterior drivers shall have a maximum case temperature rating of 85ºC.
O. Noise: Drivers shall have an audible noise rating of 27dB Class A or less.
Lighting 26 50 00 - 6
90 Percent
P. Electromagnetic compliance: Drivers shall comply with CFR Title 47 Part 15 Class A.
Q. Tandem wiring: Multiple luminaires shall not share a common driver (no tandem
wiring).
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Lenses: Lenses for LED troffers shall be 100% virgin acrylic and have a nominal
thickness of 0.125 inch.
B. Emergency Battery Packs: Emergency battery packs shall be factory installed. All
emergency luminaire troffers shall operate at 1400 lumen or greater output for at least
90 minutes. All battery backups installed in exterior luminaires shall be rated for damp
location and rated to operate at 32ºF.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide all luminaires of the types indicated, in accordance with NEMA standards,
manufacturer’s recommendations, and NEC requirements.
B. Install indoor lighting systems in accordance with NECA/IESNA 500.
C. Install exterior lighting systems in accordance with NECA/IESNA 501.
D. Provide luminaires complete with LED arrays, LED drivers, and other accessories
necessary for proper installation in the building construction and listed for fire rated
ceilings where required by code.
E. Provide parking lot, roadway and walkway lights, if any, in accordance with section
26 56 23 - Area Lighting.
F. Lighting control: Provide switches with matching technology (line voltage dimming, 0-
10V dimming, etc.) for dimming drivers in the locations shown on the drawings.
Provide lighting controls in accordance with sections 26 09 41 - Lighting Controls.
G. Emergency lighting: Provide a battery backup, transfer switch, internal wiring etc. in
each luminaire indicated as an emergency luminaire or night light. If a type
designation is omitted from an emergency luminaire then furnish a battery backup or
automatic transfer device in the standard luminaire and make it an emergency
luminaire. If the unswitched hot leg needed for proper operation does not exist,
provide a new unswitched hot leg to the luminaire as needed for proper operation.
The unswitched hot wire must come from the same branch circuit that powers the
luminaire.
H. Verify that the specified luminaires are compatible with the specified ceiling systems
as indicated on the Architectural drawings. Advise the Architect/Engineer of any
discrepancies before placing the luminaire order.
Lighting 26 50 00 - 7
90 Percent
I. Locate luminaires in mechanical and other similar equipment rooms to clear all
obstructions. Obtain approval from the Architect or Engineer before placing luminaires
where the location as shown on the drawings must be radically changed.
J. Support surface mounted luminaires from the building structure with a minimum of
two 1/4 inch threaded rods per luminaire. Use 1½ inch x 1½ inch steel framing channel
where required to span joists and otherwise facilitate structural support.
K. Mount recessed luminaires in the center of a ceiling tile or as shown on the drawings.
Provide support for recessed luminaires by means of bar hangers extended across
the main ceiling support members and also supported from the building structure.
L. Run lighting fixture whips (flex conduit/metal clad cable) from a junction box to each
luminaire (not to exceed four luminaires per junction box) access plate. Lighting fixture
whips between luminaires will not be accepted. Refer to luminaire installation details
for more information.
M. Locate all remote drivers or battery packs above the ceiling above each luminaire or
in an adjacent room with a low ceiling for easy access. Mount drivers on rubber
insulators.
N. Exit signs: Exit signs are not to be switched.
O. Prior to final inspection, check all luminaires for damages during construction and
replace damaged luminaires at no additional expense to the Owner. Test all
emergency luminaires for proper operation, including exercising all transfer switching,
battery backups, generator, etc. All luminaires shall be cleaned and completely
operational at the time of final acceptance of the building.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Move any luminaire up to six feet in any direction as directed at no additional cost.
END OF SECTION
Lighting 26 50 00 - 8
90 Percent
SECTION 26 55 61
THEATRICAL LIGHTING
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Provide all equipment, luminaires, wiring, panels and breakers, disconnects, conduit,
materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the
installation of theatrical lighting system as shown or indicated on the drawings, as
specified, and as required.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

requirements.
1.4 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit product data for all components of the house and theatrical lighting and
theatrical lighting control system.
B. Submit manufacturer's catalog data for all lighting instruments, equipment, and
components that shall include all technical data to demonstrate conformance with
these specifications.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit complete physical drawings of all items of equipment showing dimensions,

etc.
B. Submit complete load schedules that clearly indicate actual connected loads and
control channel assignment, cross-reference to internal equipment identifications to
circuit number where shown on the drawings, and all other scheduled information
which shall relate the equipment to the project requirements.
C. Submit complete internal and interconnection wiring diagrams showing number, size,
and types of conductors between equipment, and from equipment to loads, and
feeder quantity and sizes.
Theatrical Lighting 26 55 61 - 1
90 Percent

operation of the theatrical lighting system. These documents shall be included as part
of the project operation and maintenance manuals.
B. Warranty: Provide 2 copies of warrantees.
C. Training Documentation: Provide letter in final documents documenting that the

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide a five year parts and one year labor warranty on the entire theatrical lighting
system. Warranty coverage shall begin at the time of Project Substantial Completion.
1.8 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. It shall be the equipment manufacturers’ and contractors’ responsibility to provide the

initial programming and start-up of the system.
B. After system startup and prior to substantial completion of the project, the contractor
shall require the manufacturer to test the operation of the complete system to ensure
the proper operation of the system. The manufacturer shall provide documentation of
such functional testing in the closeout submittals. This functional testing is to be done
on all projects, regardless of other additional commissioning or testing requirements.
1.9 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. After manufacturer testing is complete, the contractor shall require the manufacturer
to provide a minimum of 4 hours of on-site training to the owner’s personnel in the
operation, adjustment, and maintenance of the system. This training shall be mutually
agreed upon by the two or more parties involved but shall take place no longer than
30 days after the system is completely installed. This training should be done in a
location where it can be recorded by the owner for future reference. The manufacturer
shall provide documentation of such training in closeout submittals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Refer to drawings for manufacturers, part numbers and quantities.
B. Equals by ETC. No other equals will be accepted.
90 Percent
C. All dimming equipment and devices, theatrical luminaires and control equipment
specified herein shall be the sole responsibility of a single manufacturer who shall
fabricate all assemblies and assemble all major sub-assemble. The manufacturer
shall have been producing theatrical lighting and SCR control equipment for at least
five consecutive years.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide a complete and operable system. All required equipment may not be noted
or shown on drawings. Provide a complete system installation including all required
equipment, hangers, plugs, outlets, pipes, connectors, etc. This will include but not
limited to the following.
1. Provide special control wiring (including houselight control wiring) and
multi-conductor SO cable (flexible borderlight cable).
2. Set up control console and dimmers - under supervision of dimmer manufacturer
technician.
3. Pull all load wiring to 4" X 4" X 24” long wireway above dimmer rack. Terminate
in dimmer per manufacturer's direction.
4. Provide all conduit, wiring, power requirements, and terminations of same in
dimmer rack.
5. Provide all load wiring to fixtures, or terminations at fixtures for house lighting.
6. Provide mounting of plugboxes, floor pockets, back boxes and grid-iron junction
boxes (locations to be coordinated with Architect and Owner).
7. For Front of House (FOH), conceal receptacles in architectural bulkheads where
FOH lighting is located. If architectural bulkheads are not available to conceal
luminaires and receptacles, locate receptacles in ceiling with all conduit
concealed above ceiling. FOH luminaire are to match the color of the ceiling.
3.2 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES
A. Provide the services of a qualified factory trained technician employed by the

manufacturer of the system, who shall check the installation and ensure its proper
operation. No part of the system shall be energized before being checked and the
installation approved. Failure to observe this provision shall automatically relieve the
owner or manufacturer of any responsibility concerning the proper operation of the
system, any part thereof and the replacement of parts that may have been damaged
by premature energizing. The technician shall be available on the job site within seven
working days (7) after the manufacturer has received notice.
B. As part of the system startup process, the manufacturer shall provide all field
programming of the system.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Upon completion of testing and adjustment, demonstrate operation of the theatrical

lighting system to representatives of the Owner.
90 Percent
B. Instruct the Owner’s personnel in proper maintenance, adjustment, and operation of

the theatrical lighting system.
C. Upon completion of testing and adjustment, the contractor and a direct employee of
the equipment manufacturer (who is already familiar with the details of the project)
shall demonstrate operation, proper maintenance, troubleshooting and adjustment of
the theatrical lighting controls system. The owner shall receive a minimum of 4 hours
of on-site training.
END OF SECTION
90 Percent
SECTION 26 56 23
AREA LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section supplements section 26 50 00 Lighting and contains additional

requirements applicable to pole-mounted area lighting.
A. Poles and pole bases
B. Exterior lighting systems
C. Testing to verify compliance with local lighting ordinances
A. Section 26 00 90 - Electrical Submittal Procedures
B. Section 26 09 41 - Lighting Controls
C. Section 26 50 00 - Lighting
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C150 - American Society for Testing and Materials Standard Specification for
Portland Cement
B. NECA/IESNA 501 - Recommended Practice for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Pole assemblies shall meet wind loading requirements for the area in which they are
installed or 90 mph, whichever is greater. Pole assemblies include the pole, the pole
base, pole-mounted luminaires, and any other component that would affect wind
loading. Pole bases shall be designed by a professional structural engineer licensed
to work in the state.
A. Exterior lighting shall meet current city ordinances.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 26 00 90 - Electrical Submittal Procedures.
Area Lighting 26 56 23 - 1
90 Percent
1.8 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit complete product information for the poles. Clearly highlight or otherwise
indicate on the cut sheets all options and accessories.
1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings of engineered pole bases.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the architect a letter of compliance attesting that the installed lighting
system has been tested and complies with local ordinances.
whether windstorm certification is required, and for submittal requirements of the TDI
A. Provide owner a list of all poles used on the project using manufacturer part numbers.
1.12 QUALIFICATIONS
A. All poles shall be from manufacturers who has been regularly engaged in the
production of such products for the past five years.
A. All poles shall be UL listed.
whether windstorm certification is required, and for requirements of the TDI
1.14 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Handle and store all product in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations

and NECA 501.
1.15 SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. Provide a one-year factory warranty on the pole structures. Provide a 5-year extended
factory warranty on pole finishes. Provide a 5-year contractor warranty to cover the
cost of equipment, materials and labor for repair and replacement.
90 Percent
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Only those manufacturers of poles listed on the Luminaire Schedule or listed in the
specifications are acceptable. Provide poles from one manufacturer, unless otherwise
required.
B. Accepted pole manufacturers:

1. Manufactures listed on the Luminaire Schedule
2.2 POLES
A. Pole height: Poles shall be of the height and with brackets, etc. as indicated in the
Luminaire Schedule. Where pole height has not been given, provide 30' minimum
length poles for parking lot and driveway lighting, and 10’ minimum length poles for
walkway lighting.
B. Aluminum Poles: All aluminum poles shall be seamless with all edges and parts
factory polished and ground to a smooth finish.
C. Concrete poles: Concrete poles shall conform to American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM) C-150, Type I or III, or other types for special conditions.
2.3 FINISHES
A. Painted poles: Factory finish poles as indicated in the Luminaire Schedule to match
luminaire finish. Paint all exterior surfaces using powder coat finish.
B. Unpainted aluminum poles: Provide a clear anodized finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide all exterior parking lot, area, site and walkway poles complete with luminaires,
any required mounting hardware, wiring, controls, etc. required for a complete system.
B. Install exterior lighting systems in accordance with NECA-501.
C. Luminaires: Provide luminaires in accordance with specification section 26 50 00 -

Lighting.
D. Lighting control: Provide lighting controls in accordance with sections 26 09 41 -

Lighting Controls.
90 Percent
3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK
A. Furnish hot-dipped galvanized anchor bolts, templates, ground rods, conduit elbows,
concrete base, etc., for the installation of concrete bases as detailed on the drawings.
A. After installation and lamp burn-in, conduct light level readings to confirm that the
installed lighting complies with local lighting ordinances. If the lighting is in
compliance, then submit a letter to the architect documenting the testing. If the lighting
does not comply, then provide louvers or shields.
END OF SECTION
90 Percent
SECTION 27 05 00
GENERAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDES

B. Communication Systems complete including cabling, special backboxes, hardware

and all other required devices and equipment.
C. Installation of system equipment per specifications.
D. Supply in a timely manner to the electrical contractor special backboxes for installation
as required.
E. Coordinate wireway, raceway, power, and outlet requirements with the builder and
the electrical contractor.
F. Communication Systems Contractors shall provide and install prior to cable

installation plastic snap in bushings at each box opening, passage through a metal
stud, and at the end of all open conduit stubs or sleeves to protect the cabling from
damage.
G. Furnishing of all required materials, equipment, tools, scaffolding, labor, and

transportation necessary for the complete installation of the communication systems
as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
H. Cable pathways, conduit, and cable support systems shall be complete with bushings,
de-burred, cleaned, and secure prior to installation of cable.
I. It is the intent of these specifications to provide complete installations although every

item necessary may not be specifically mentioned or shown.
1.2 WORK TO BE INCLUDED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IN BASE

CONTRACT PROPOSAL
A. Provide utility services conduit as outlined on drawings as required.
B. All required conduit for accessibility to attic space.
C. Furnishing and installation of all required standard back boxes and conduit.
D. Installation of special back boxes supplied by the Division 27 contractor(s).
General Communication Systems Requirements 27 05 00 - 1

90 Percent
E. Furnishing and installation of all floor boxes, surface raceways, and other wireways
which are detailed or specified under Division 26.
F. Provide equipment-mounting boards as outlined on drawings.
G. Provide equipment grounding system, conductors, and bus bars and as outlined in
Division 26.
H. Provide 120-volt power and hook-up to equipment provided in Division 27.
I. Coordination of requirements of Division 27 with the Builder.
on this project.
A. The conditions of the Division 0, Division 1, Division 26 requirements, and the contract
requirements that include the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions
apply to work of this division.
1.5 OWNER FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED (OFCI) EQUIPMENT
A. The contractor shall verify that new and existing products and site conditions are
satisfactory for installation or relocation of OFCI equipment. If unsatisfactory
conditions exist or other discrepancies are identified, the contractor shall immediately
document the conditions and notify the owner in writing.
B. The contractor shall coordinate all required equipment schedule quantities and any
dimensions or variations required to adapt to field conditions with the owner at the
earliest possible date.
C. The contractor shall verify compatibility, installation rough-in, mounting, and utility
requirements for the scheduled OFCI equipment.
D. The owner shall coordinate delivery dates with the builder to meet the construction
schedule.
E. The installation of items as identified in the plans and specifications as OFCI

equipment shall conform to the provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be
coordinated with the builder.
F. Installation shall be performed by competent and trained workers in accordance with

all applicable codes and governing regulations.
G. Installation, testing, and startup shall comply with the manufacturer’s instructions.

90 Percent
H. The contractor shall provide all miscellaneous hardware, structural support, cabling,
fittings, etc. that is not included by the manufacture, but required for installation.
I. The contractor shall clean and adjust all relocated and new OFCI products as
necessary.
J. All crating, packing materials, and debris shall be properly disposed of off-site.
K. Installation shall be subject to inspection by the architect, engineer, owner, and

builder. The installer shall not proceed until any unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected. Any damage caused by improper handling or installation procedures shall
be corrected at no cost to the owner.
L. For drop shipped equipment, the builder shall be the consignee and shall have a
representative on site for coordination of delivery, to receive shipments, and to inspect
each shipment for obvious signs of damage or shortages. The builder shall be
responsible for all shipping damage claims, including hidden damage, refusal of
shipment, and Return Authorization procedures. The builder shall provide secure
storage, handling, and protection from the elements, prior to the contractors’
acceptance for installation.
M. For equipment stored at an owner’s facility, the contractor shall load the equipment
and provide transportation to the work site. Prior to loading, the contractor shall
inspect the equipment for obvious signs of damage and document all quantities,
noting shortages from the project requirements, indicating acceptance of the
merchandise as is and in good order.
N. The contractor shall conduct and properly document testing of all installed equipment
to verify proper operation. When appropriate, on site operation and maintenance
instruction shall be provided to the owner’s personnel. This instruction shall include
demonstration of proper use, maintenance, and cleaning procedures.
O. The nature of the equipment procurement shall determine responsibility for resolving
any claims with the manufacturer or supplier relating to defects in material or
workmanship and warranty claims. The party that purchased the equipment shall
resolve these issues.
P. Wireless Access Points:

1. All wireless access points shall be Owner Furnished Contractor Installed (OFCI)
equipment. The Data Cabling contractor shall provide and install supporting
cables and miscellaneous hardware as required for a safe and secure
installation.
Q. Flat Screen Display brackets:

1. All Wall-mounted Flat Panel Displays and Brackets shall be Owner Furnished
Contractor Installed (OFCI) equipment. The AV contractor shall provide and
install supporting cables and miscellaneous hardware as required for a safe and
secure installation.

90 Percent
1.6 CODES, STANDARDS AND THEIR ABBREVIATIONS
A. General:
1. Perform all work in strict accordance with the requirements and
2. In addition to the requirements outlined in other sections of the specifications the
a. NECA standards for installation.
b. NFPA No. 70, National Electric Code.
c. Local Codes and Ordinances.
d. COG Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.
e. Title 25, Health Services, Part 2, Texas Department of Health, Chapter 145,
Long Term Care Subchapter Q.
B. Where local codes or practices exceed or conflict with the NEC, it shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to perform the work in accordance with the local code
C. Materials and components shall be UL listed and labeled by Underwriters

Laboratories, Inc. for the intended use under the latest appropriate testing standard.
D. The Contractor shall obtain all permits required to commence work and, upon
completion of the Work, obtain and deliver to the Owner's Representative a Certificate
of Inspection and Approval from the State Board of Fire Underwriters, the City of
Flower Mound, Texas and other authority having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall pay
required permit fees.
ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act.

ANSI: American National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway; New York, NY
10018.
ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street;
BICSI: (RCDD5 Standards), 8610 Hidden River Parkway, Tampa, FL 33637
CBM: Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association, 2116 Keith Building;
Cleveland, Ohio 44115.
IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, 345 East 47th Street;
New York, NY 10017.
ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, P.O. Box P, South Yarmouth, MA
02664.
NEC: National Electrical Code; NFPA No. 70.
NECA: National Electrical Contractors Association, Inc., 7315 Wisconsin Ave.;
NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 155 East 44th Street; New
York, NY 10017.
NESC: National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI 2.

90 Percent
NFPA: National Fire Protection Association, 60 Batterymarch Street; Boston, MA

02110.
OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration, US Department of Labor;
TAS: Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) Article 9102.
UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 333 Pfigsten Road; Northbrook, IL 60062.
A. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed to permit work not conforming
to these codes.
B. When two or more codes or standards are applicable to the same work, then the
C. The date of the code or standard is that in effect on the date of issue stated on the
contract documents, except when a particular publication date is specified.
D. The Contractor shall comply with all State, Federal, NFPA, local codes and
ordinances that may alter any part of the plans or specifications. The Contractor shall
E. Where local codes and ordinances are not in writing or on record but local precedence
have been set, the Owner shall pay for any additional resulting cost.
1.8 DEFINITIONS
B. The Builder: The primary contractor engaged to oversee the construction project.
They may be technically described as a Construction Manager, General Contractor,
Managing Construction Contractor, et cetera.
C. The Contractor: The Contractor engaged to execute the work included a particular
section only, although he may be technically described as a Subcontractor to the
Builder. If the Contractor, engaged to execute said work, employs Sub-Contractors to
perform various portions of the work included under a particular Section, they shall
be held responsible for the execution of this work, in full conformity with Contract
Document requirements. The Contractor shall cooperate at all times and shall be
responsible for the satisfactory cooperation of his Subcontractors with the other
Contractors on the job so that all of the various sections and phases of work may be
properly coordinated without unnecessary delays or damage.
D. The Electrical Contractor: The Electrical Contractor shall be engaged to execute the
work included Division 26 only.
E. PDF file or .pdf: The filename extension associated with “Portable Document Format”
files, which are multi-platform computer files in the ISO 32000-1:2008 open standard
format developed and licensed by Adobe Systems. These files are a digital electronic

90 Percent
representation of text, documents, images, and technical drawings in a font and color-
accurate fixed‐layout format that is platform and display resolution independent. PDF
files can be electronically transmitted, viewed or printed with various free PDF reader
application programs, and may allow markups/comments with various PDF editing
application programs.
F. Provide: Defined as requiring both the furnishing and installation of the item or facility
specifically noted.
1.9 SCHEDULE OF VALUES, APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. The Contractor shall in accordance with the General Provisions of the Contract,
including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1, complete a
Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment. When a portion of this work
separately funded, including donations or an E-Rate program, the contractor shall
accommodate this in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment. For E-
Rate eligible portions of this work, the contractor will be required to participate in the
E-Rate program, comply with all E-Rate regulations, and provide billing as needed.
The contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to file Form 470 and/or other forms as
may be required.
1.10 WARRANTY
resulting there from, which shall appear within a period of one year from date of
E. This Warranty shall not be construed to include the normal maintenance of the various
components of the system covered by these specifications.
1.11 SITE VISIT
A. Before submitting a proposal, each proposed contractor shall examine all plans and
specifications relating to the work, shall visit the site of the project and become fully
informed of the extent and character of the work required, including all required
utilities.

herein or indicated on the accompanying plans or required by nature of the site of

90 Percent
1.12 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide a complete submittal for each section as specified.
B. Submit complete submittal package within 30 calendar days after award of this work
C. Submittal may be electronically transmitted in PDF file format (preferred) or paper

copies may be provided in quantities indicated in Division 1. Paper copies shall be
organized including index tabs in a 3-ring black binder of sufficient size.
D. Each Product data submittal shall include:

6. When the contract requires extended product warranties, submit a sample of
warranty language.
E. Submit shop or coordination drawings, when specified or the required for the scope
of work, which include information that will allow to the Contractor to coordinate
interdisciplinary work and when necessary guide the manufacturer or fabricator in
producing the product. Shop or coordination drawings shall be specifically prepared
to illustrate the submitted portion of work, this may require diagrams, schedules,
details, and accurate to scale equipment and device layouts prepared using a CAD
or BIM engineering drawing program.
F. The Engineer's review of submittals is only for confirmation of adherence to design of

project and does not relieve the Contractor of final responsibility for furnishing all
materials required for a complete working system and in complying with the Contract
Documents in all respects.

90 Percent
Architect/Engineer, for subsequent transmittal to the Owner revised plans showing
"as installed" work.
following data in PDF file format (preferred) or paper copies to be turned over to the
Architect/Engineer for checking and subsequent delivery to the Owner:
1. All warranties, guarantees, and manufacturer's directions on equipment and
2. PDF file or paper copies of all Shop Drawing prints and CAD or BIM engineering
drawing program files.
3. Any software programs, data/programming files, passwords, special interface
cables, or keys that may be needed to maintain or access equipment.
6. Repair parts lists of all major items and equipment including name, address, and
a. Builder and all Contractors.
b. Major Equipment Suppliers
c. Submit communication systems warranties.
1.14 TRAINING
A. Upon completion of the work and at a time designated by the Architect, provide formal
training sessions for the Owner's operating personnel to include location, operation,
and maintenance of all communication systems equipment and systems.
B. See other sections for time requirements.
A. The intent of the project drawings is to establish the types of systems and functions,
but not to set forth each item essential to the functioning of the system.
extent of work.
indicated. Provide communication systems (including all hook-ups) complete in every
respect and ready to operate.

90 Percent
D. If clarification is needed, consult the Architect/Engineer.
immediately notify the Architect/Engineer for his interpretation.
F. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to make any reasonable change in the
1.16 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Descriptions and details, acceptable manufacturers' names listed, and specific

manufacturer and model number items indicated in the plans and specifications shall
establish a standard of quality, function, and design. Manufacturers and model
numbers listed "no exceptions" shall not be substituted without specific notice in an
addendum. Otherwise, where a specific manufacturer's product is indicated, products
of other manufacturers listed as acceptable may be submitted for approval based on
the substitute product being, in the opinion of the Engineer, of equivalent or better
quality than that of the product specified.
B. Proposed contractors wishing to propose systems which differ in manufacturer,

features, functions, or operating characteristics from those outlined in these
specifications must do so in writing to the specifying authority at least ten (10) days
prior to the proposal opening.
C. For manufacturers equipment or models other than that specified, the proposed
contractor shall supply proof that such substitute equipment equals or exceeds the
features, functions, performance, and quality of the specified equipment. Proposals
must include detailed information showing all deviations from the system as specified
and include relevant technical and cost data. This shall include a complete description
of the proposed substitution, drawings, catalog cuts, performance data, test data, or
any other data or information necessary for evaluation.
D. The Engineer will consider all such submittals and the Architect will issue an
addendum listing items that the Engineer considers acceptable. Only such items as
E. Substitute products for which the proposed contractor does not obtain prior approval
will not be considered acceptable for this project. Final approval of the alternate
system shall be based on the decision of the Owner and Architect. Prior approval to
make a proposal for this project does not automatically insure the system will be an
acceptable equivalent.
F. The Contractors’ proposal represents that the contract proposal price is based solely
upon the materials, equipment, and labor described in the Contract Proposal
Documents (including addenda, if any) and that he contemplates no substitutions or
extras.
G. The manufacturer of the proposed substitute unit shall provide samples for evaluation,
when required, at no charge and non-returnable.

90 Percent

specified.
a. The substitution is required for compliance with subsequent interpretations
of code or insurance requirements.
b. The specified product is unavailable through no fault of the Contractor.
c. The manufacturer refuses to warranty the specified products as required.
d. Subsequent information indicates that the specified product is unable to
perform properly or to fit in the designated space.
e. In the Engineer's sole judgment, the substitution would be in the Owner's
best interest.
f. Revisions to the electrical system caused by substitutions shall be under the
supervision of the Engineer, at a standard hourly rate charged by the
Engineer. Charges from the Engineer, Architect, and Electrical Contractor
shall be paid by the Contractor originating the changes.
1.17 FUTURE USE CABLING
A. When cabling is installed for future use, it shall be identified with a tag of sufficient
durability to withstand the environment involved.
B. Locations and Existing Conditions:

1. Location and condition of any existing equipment or services, when shown, have
been obtained from substantially reliable sources, are shown as a general guide
only, without guarantees as to accuracy.
2. The Contractor will examine the site, verify all requirements, service points, and
availability of all services required to complete this project. No consideration will
be granted for any alleged misunderstanding of the materials and labor to be
provided as necessitated by nature of the site including those items that may be
fairly implied as essential to the execution and completion of any and all parts of
this project.
1.18 IMPLEMENTATION
A. Verify phasing in regard to systems and coordinate before energizing any system.
B. When required during phases of construction to maintain existing systems in service

in particular areas, provide temporary wiring and connections as necessary to
accommodate construction.

90 Percent
1.19 OPERATION OF NEW EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO PROJECT COMPLETION
A. When the phasing of a project requires that communication systems are operable in
certain areas and the Owner needs to operate the equipment the contractor shall
make such provisions. The warranty period shall commence on new equipment when
it is operated for the beneficial use of the Owner. Regardless of whether or not the
equipment has or has not been operated, the Contractor shall properly clean the
equipment, properly adjust, and complete all punch list items before final acceptance
by the Owner. In these cases, the date of acceptance and the start of the warranty
may be different dates.
1.20 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment in areas of renovation that are to
remain or be reused.
A. The Contractor shall take such precautions as may be necessary to protect his
apparatus from damage.
B. This shall include the creation of all required temporary shelters to protect any
apparatus above the floor of the construction and the covering of apparatus in the
completed building with tarpaulins or other protective covering.
replacement by the Contractor.
1.22 FINAL OBSERVATION
A. It shall be the duty of the Contractor to make a careful observation trip of the entire
project, assuring themselves that the work on the project is ready for final acceptance
before calling upon the Architect/Engineer to make a final observation.
bonds, warranties, receipts, affidavits, et cetera, called for in the various articles of
these specifications, prepared and signed in advance, together with a letter of
transmittal, listing each paper included, and shall deliver the same to the
Architect/Engineer at or before the time of said final observation. The Contractor is
cautioned to check over each bond, receipt, et cetera, before preparing for submission
to verify that the terms check with the requirements of the specifications.
C. The following and other provision of Division 1 General Conditions will be required at
time of final completion:
2. All systems are fully operational, all material and devices installed.
3. As built (as installed) drawings and operations manuals.

90 Percent
1.23 PROHIBITED MATERIALS
A. No new asbestos, lead, or materials containing these substances shall be permitted

in this project. The Contractor shall consult the Architect concerning these materials
if their presence is suspected. All work in or around existing asbestos or lead materials
is at the sole risk of the Contractor and his personnel.
A. Notify the Builder sufficiently ahead of construction of any floors, walls, ceiling, roof,
et cetera, of any openings that will be required for his work.
B. The Contractor shall see that all sleeves required for his work are set at proper times
to avoid delay of the job.
C. All necessary cutting of walls, floors, partitions, ceilings, et cetera, as required for the
proper installation of the work under this Contract shall be done at the Subcontractor
or at the Subcontractor's expense in a neat and workmanlike manner, and as
approved by the Architect/Engineer.
D. Patching of openings and/or alterations shall be provided by the communications

Subcontractor or at the Subcontractor's expense in an approved manner.
E. No joists, beams, girders, or columns shall be cut by any Contractor without first
H. Seal voids around conduits penetrating fire-rated assemblies and partitions using fire
stopping materials and methods in accordance with NFPA and local codes.
1.25 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS



90 Percent
1.26 INSTALLATION

or trades performing continuations of this work under subsequent contracts are
considered a part of this work. In order to effect timely and accurate placing of work
and to bring together, in the proper and correct sequence, the work of such trades,
including work provided under a Division 1 allowance.
B. The Communications Contractor shall coordinate installation of the communication

systems with the Builder, Electrical, Mechanical, and Plumbing Contractors to insure
a complete working system for the Owner.
C. Where required for accessibility all conduit and boxes for all communication systems
shall be provided by the Electrical contractor as specified, including systems in
Division 27, any and all allowances shall be included. Normally low voltage wiring
shall run open and supported in accessible attic space. All low voltage wiring in
exposed areas such as gyms, stages, shops, and field houses shall be enclosed in
conduit. Coordinate with and verify with Division 26 to provide required conduit and
boxes at locations and heights as required.
D. Conduit, innerduct, track, or raceway shall conceal and protect wiring in exposed
areas, within walls, through inaccessible areas, floors, chases, under slab,
crawlspaces, or underground.
E. All conduit, duct, track, and raceway runs shall be spaced apart to allow for
pathways.
F. All work must be performed by workers skilled in their trade. The installation must be
G. Provide stainless screw/bolt hardware wherever stainless devices are used and in
potentially wet areas.
H. Coordinate the actual locations of devices and outlets and equipment with building
features and mechanical equipment as indicated on architectural, structural, and
equipment location. Relocation of devices, before installation, of up to 3 feet from the
1.27 ADDITIONAL MATERIALS: INCLUDE IN THE BASE CONTRACT PROPOSAL
A. All costs to provide 10 additional communication data outlet locations including all
cable and devices as directed by the Architect. Conduit and standard back boxes by
Division 26 Electrical Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

90 Percent
A. Not Applicable
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Not Applicable
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 27 10 30
DATA AND TELEPHONE CABLE PLANT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDES

B. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or
incidental to the installation and testing of a complete data (computer network) and
telephone cable plant providing all permanent premise cabling and wiring devices
required to support a facility wide computer network system and telephone system
and as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified.
C. All electronic equipment, security cameras, card access system electronics,

projectors, flat screen displays, telephone sets, network switching equipment,
wireless access points, transceivers, fiber optic patch cords/attenuators, routers,
network interface cards, computers, and software are not included in this section.
D. All wireless access points shall be Owner Furnished Contractor Installed (OFCI)
equipment. Data contractor shall coordinate exact installation requirements with
owner.
E. The station (horizontal) cabling shall extend from each designated data jack to the
nearest IDF or the MDF.
F. Each IDF (Intermediate Distribution Frame) shall be connected by the data backbone
cabling to the MDF (Main Distribution Frame). The backbone shall be fiber optic runs
from the MDF to each IDF, each consisting of a twelve-strand, 10Gig 50/125μm
(OM3) multi-mode fiber, fiber optic cable in a star pattern. Also provide two-strand,
10Gig 50/125μm (OM3) multi-mode fiber, fiber optic cable run from the MDF to the
marquee sign location, see the site plan.
G. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to provide and install all
conduit systems, standard boxes, ground bus bars (See Section 26 05 34), and
operating power for the data and telephone cable plant as outlined on the project
drawings. The Data and Telephone Cable Plant Contractor shall coordinate all system
requirements with and provide any special back boxes to the Electrical Contractor
prior to installation of conduit.
H. Spool Testing, as described in Part 3, for all requirements shall be performed on all
cable spools before installation.
Data and Telephone Cable Plant 27 10 30 - 1

90 Percent
I. Final testing, as described in Part 3, for all requirements shall be performed with all
labeling, cable, supports, wiring devices, and connectors in place. The cable shall not
be disturbed for any reason after successful final testing. A certification report will be
provided for each cable run.
J. Provide all documentation and training as outlined in these specifications.
K. Provide an extended warranty as outlined in these specifications.
A. Section 26 05 34 - Provisions For Communication, Security & Safety Systems.
B. Section 27 05 00 - General Communication Systems Requirements.
schedule.


necessary.
J. All crating, packing materials, and debris and shall be properly disposed of off-site.

90 Percent

P. Wireless Access Points:

1. All wireless access points shall be Owner Furnished Contractor Installed (OFCI)
equipment.
contract documents.
B. The equipment, materials, and installation shall confirm to the latest version, revision,
addendums, and amendments of all applicable codes, industry standards, and the
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including the following:
3. IEEE-SA 802.3, 803.11, and 803.16 series Standards for Ethernet, PoE, and
Wi-Fi Information Technology.
4. ANSI/TIA-568 series and ISO/IEC 11801 Standards for Structured
Telecommunications Cabling Installations.
5. ANSI/TIA-569-D Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

90 Percent
6. ANSI/TIA-606-C Administration Standard for Telecommunications

Infrastructure.
7. ANSI/TIA-1152-A Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements
for Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling.
8. All applicable parts will be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. approved.
9. All applicable parts will be FCC Class B approved.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit a complete submittal package within 30 calendar days after award of this work
C. Quality Assurance Submittal:

1. The Contractor must be a certified Integrator/Installer authorized by the
Manufacturer(s) to provide an extended warranty to the Owner covering all
network cable and connectivity hardware products comprising this installation
site. The system warranty shall be facilitated by the Contractor and be
established between the Customer and the cabling system manufacturer(s).
The Contractor and Manufacturer(s) shall jointly provide the Owner an extended
warranty of the installed system against defects in material or workmanship;
provide a copy of contractor certification and sample warranty text.
D. Product Data Submittal including special boxes, cable, and other material as
1. A cover sheet with the name and location of the project, the name, address,
and telephone number of the Contractor, and the name, address, and telephone
product on the equipment list. Indicate by prominent notation (an arrow, circle,
or other means) on each sheet the exact product and options being submitted.
6. Submit a sample of the extended product warranty language.

90 Percent
E. Submit shop drawings locating all components of the system. Shop or coordination
drawings shall include information that will allow to the Contractor to coordinate
producing the product. Shop or coordination drawings shall be specifically prepared
to illustrate the submitted portion of work, this may require diagrams, schedules,
details, and accurate to scale equipment and device layouts prepared using a CAD
or BIM engineering drawing program.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS OF A PROPOSED CONTRACTOR
A. Proposed contractors who do not currently possess the necessary qualifications,

trained and experienced personnel, financial capacity, and meet the other
requirements herein described will be disqualified.
B. The proposed contractor, as a business entity, shall be an authorized distributor and

designated representative of the equipment manufacturer, with full extended warranty
privileges. The proposed contractor shall have been actively engaged in the business
of selling, installing, and servicing commercial building commercial cable systems for
a period of at least 5 years. Selected contractor must be certified in specified system,
subcontracting other companies certified in proposed product shall not be allowed.
C. Recently formed companies are acceptable only if specific pre-approval is requested,

and granted by the Architect/Engineer, based on experience of key personnel, current
and completed projects, and all licensing requirements are met 10 working days prior
to the contract proposal date.
D. The proposed contractor shall have an office within 150-miles of the job site, staffed
with trained technicians who are qualified and licensed to supervise the installation,
to be responsible that the system is installed as submitted, to conduct system start
up and perform a 100 percent operational audit of all installed devices, to instruct the
Owners representatives in the proper operation of the system, and to provide service
throughout the warranty period. The contractor shall be capable of dispatching
technicians to repair a system within six hours of a service request.
E. The proposed contractor shall be fully experienced in the design and installation of
the type of system herein specified, and shall furnish with the contract proposal an
itemized list of the installations of the type specified herein. The list shall include the
name of the project, date of completion, the amount of the contract, the name, and
telephone number of a qualified person to contact for reference. This list must contain
at least two (2) projects within a 150-mile radius of the proposed project to allow
owner’s officials to visit the job site for review of the system installation and service.
Each reference project listed must utilize equipment by the same manufacturer as the
proposed system.
F. The contractor shall employ factory-trained technicians capable of supporting the

maintenance of the system. No contract employees are allowed. All installing

90 Percent
technicians shall be employed by the proposed contractor. Subcontracting workers

shall not be allowed.
G. The proposed contractor shall not have any grievances or complaints of record
regarding workmanship, code compliance, or service response. A proposed
contractor that has any prior finding(s) of a code violation or has any litigation in
process concerning the installation of a cable plant is unacceptable.
H. The ability of a proposed contractor to obtain plans and provide a performance bond
shall not be regarded as the sole qualification of the contractors’ competency and
responsibility to meet the requirements and obligations of the contract.
I. The Builder shall be satisfied that a proposed Contractor meets all the requirements
expressed herein before including the Contractor’s proposal in the project.
J. The Owner may investigate, as they deem necessary to determine the ability of the
proposed Contractor to perform the work. The proposed contractor shall furnish to the
Owner with any information or data requested for this purpose.
K. The Owner reserves the right to reject any contract proposal if the evidence
submitted, or their investigation, fails to indicate that the Contractor is qualified to fulfill
of any part of the contract or to complete the work contemplated therein.
L. The Owner reserves the right to reject the proposal of any contractor who has
previously failed to perform properly, or complete on time, contracts of a similar
nature.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All cable and wiring devices provided shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters
B. Label the cable run designator on both ends of all cables, patch panel jacks,
termination cabinet connectors, and all jack wall plates and housings. In addition,
label the cable run designator(s) on the ceiling grid bar at jack locations that are
concealed above a drop ceiling; including those for wireless access points, cameras,
projectors, etc. Labels shall be polymer film Turn-Tell flexible non-smear, or
equivalent, machine printed labels complying with ANSI/TIA-606-C standards.
C. Only equipment devices have been shown on the contract drawings. Specific wiring
between equipment has not been shown.
D. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturers’ current model.
All like devices shall be of the same manufacturer and model number.

90 Percent
E. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held
firmly in place (e.g., cable shall not be supported by or lay on suspended ceilings).
Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load.
F. The installation shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Architect/Engineer.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES
A. Descriptions and details, acceptable manufacturers' names listed and specific

B. Proposed contractors wishing to propose any product substitution must do so in

writing to the specifying authority at least ten (10) days prior to the proposal opening.
must include detailed information showing all deviations from the system as specified.
D. Substitute products for which the proposed contractor does not obtain prior approval
will not be considered acceptable for this project. Final approval of alternate products
shall be based on the decision of the Owner and Architect. Prior approval to make a
proposal for this project does not automatically ensure products will be an acceptable
equivalent.
E. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all features and functions as outlined
in these specifications. The functions and features specified are vital to the operation
of this facility; therefore, inclusion in the list of acceptable manufacturers does not
release the contractor from strict compliance with the requirements of this
specification.
F. The selected contractor must be a certified Integrator/Installer authorized by one of

the Manufacturers listed below to provide an extended warranty to the Owner
covering all network cable and connectivity hardware products comprising this
installation site. All UTP cable, fiber optic cable, and all wiring devices installed shall
be products of one approved manufacturer or joint manufacturers program and
approved for use in their extended warranty program. The Contractor and
Manufactured shall jointly provide the Owner an extended warranty of the installed
system against defects in material or workmanship; provide a copy of contractor
certification.
G. The manufacturers model numbers, functions, and features described in this

specification section are those of the Panduit and General Cable PanGen Plus 6A
Structured Cabling Solution with a 25 year warranty, and this shall constitute the

90 Percent
quality and performance of the equipment to be furnished. Any other proposed

suppliers must be pre-approved.
1. Belden IBDN Certified System Vendor Structured Cabling System with a 25 year
warranty (may include a Belden cable partner)
A. Each data or telephone jack shall be terminated and mounted in a suitable faceplate
for all wall, enclosure, millwork, floor box, modular furniture, etc. locations.
B. All jack wall plates and housings shall have machine printed labels meeting ANSI/TIA-
606-C standards inserted behind built-in clear plastic windows, or engraved plastic
nameplates permanently attached, indicating cable run identification number(s).
C. All jacks shall be suitable for data or telephone use; only the color, icons, and marking
cable shall be different.
D. The station cabling shall extend from each designated data and telephone jack to the
nearest IDF or the MDF in a star topology.
E. This system shall allow all the additional equipment required to complete the
telephone system and computer network to be plugged in. This specification section
does not specify or include any electronic equipment, telephone switching units or
cross connect, telephone sets, modular telephone cords, network switching
equipment, routers, fiber transceivers, network interface cards, computers, or
software that constitute a complete computer network or telephone system.
F. All outlets shall be Category 6A RJ-45 style jacks. All cabling and connectors provided
will meet and be tested to ANSI/TIA-568 Style B Pin/Pair assignment (T568B)
requirements.
G. The data and telephone cable plant will provide the permanent part of the building
wiring (cable plant) required to provide connection for telephones or network
computers.
2.4 WALL PLATE COLOR
A. Color of device/wall plates to best match project light switches and electrical outlets,
coordinate with the Electric Contractor.
2.5 COLOR CODING AND SEPARATE DEDICATED PATCH PANELS
A. Provide color-coded horizontal cabling jackets, jack insert faces in wall plates, patch
panels, and patch cords. Patch panels are to be separated with grouped patch panels
for each designated color and use (blue only in the data patch panels, green only in
the Security and Camera patch panels, etc.):
1. Blue Data (Computer Ethernet network, including VoIP, etc.)
2. Green Security and Camera (only).

90 Percent
B. Provide separate dedicated patch panels for each data device type:
1. Data patch panel
2. Security and camera patch panel
3. Intercom speaker patch panel
4. Wireless patch panel.
2.6 FIBER OPTIC SYSTEM COLOR CODING
A. Each type of fiber optic cabling shall feature distinctively colored labeling and jumper
connectors:
1. Any Single Mode cabling and jumper connectors shall be Yellow.
2. Any Multi Mode cabling and jumper connectors shall be Aqua or Orange (select
one color and be consistent throughout the project).
2.7 CABLE RUN DESIGNATOR LABELING SCHEME
A. Each patch panel jack, wall plate jack, terminal cabinet connector, both ends of each
cable run and on the ceiling grid bar at jack locations that are concealed above a drop
ceiling shall be labeled with a cable scheme run designator machine printed labels
installed according to EIA/TIA 606 standards. All labeling shall conform to industry
standards and best practices. Labeling types and scheme shall be verified and
coordinated with the Owner prior to any installation.
2.8 DATA/TELEPHONE CABLING PLANS
A. Provide adjacent to the equipment rack in each MDF and IDF a plan view of all
building areas covered by the equipment closet meeting the following requirements:
1. Framed and secured to the wall and plan covered with clear acrylic panel.
2. Size to clearly show all required information.
3. "YOU ARE HERE" indicator with arrow.
4. Room names and numbers. Verify with Owner.
5. Show each device with symbol and identification address number as
designated by owner.
6. Symbol legend.
7. True north arrow
8. Scale indicator
2.9 DATA STATION WALL PLATES AND JACK INSERTS, CATEGORY 6A
A. Provide single or multiple jack modular wall plates where shown on plans or required.
The number next to symbol on plans indicates the quantity of data lines/jacks at that
location, single outlets are not numbered. Each data or telephone jack shall be
terminated and mounted in a suitable faceplate for all wall, enclosure, millwork, floor
box, modular furniture, etc. locations. All terminations shall be made per the
manufacturers' instructions. Jack type to match colors above and shall be as follows:
1. Panduit part number CJS6X88TGxx, or equivalent.
2. Provide blanks for unused ports.
B. Use a single gang faceplate with label window for all standard wall outlets, use NEMA
duplex or Decora style frames as required for floor boxes, surface raceway, etc.

90 Percent
1. Two port faceplate Panduit part number CFPE2Ixx.

2. Four port faceplate Panduit part number CFPE4Ixx.
3. NEMA duplex style two port faceplate Panduit part number CF1062Ixx.
4. NEMA duplex style four port faceplate Panduit part number CF1064Ixx.
5. Decora style faceplate Panduit part number CFGXxx.
2.10 WALL TELEPHONE STATION JACKS
A. Stainless steel wall plate with telephone wall set mounting studs shall be:
1. Panduit part number KWP6PY.
2.11 INTERIOR WIRELESS ACCESS POINT DUAL JACKS
A. Note that when an interior wireless access point dual jack and a ceiling mount
intercom speaker jack are required in the same approximate location, they should be
combined as a triple jack on one "biscuit block" and ceiling tile support bridge.
B. Note that each location indicated for an Owner provided access point shall require
two Ethernet drop connections, two jacks.
C. Provide two (2) Category 6A non-keyed RJ-45 data jacks (blue) in a Surface Mount
Housing for a Mini-Com module, Panduit part number CBXQ2xx-A "biscuit block"
mounted securely to structure above the finished ceiling and two Category 6A cables
to nearest MDF/IDF patch panel. Provide visible machine printed labels with each
outlet address on ceiling tile grid below outlet location.
2.12 PROJECTOR/TV LOCATIONS, CATEGORY 6A
A. Provide a Category 6A non-keyed RJ-45 jack, mounted in an accessible location

above the finished ceiling near the projector, and Category 6A cable to nearest
MDF/IDF patch panel. Provide visible machine printed labels with each outlet address
on ceiling tile grid below outlet location.
2.13 CAMERA LOCATIONS, CATEGORY 6A
A. Provide a Category 6A non-keyed RJ-45 data jack (blue) in a Mini-Com module,

Panduit part number CBXQ2IW-A "biscuit block" mounted to a ceiling tile support
bridge Atlas Sound model 81-4 or equivalent above the finished ceiling and Category
6A cable to nearest MDF/IDF patch panel.
B. For exterior (WP) weather proof camera locations, mount the jack inside the building
in an accessible location 12” above the finished ceiling.
2.14 EMERGENCY SERVICE/VOICE LINES
A. Provide connectivity for emergency service/voice lines from the MDF, one line to each
elevator phone and 911 emergency telephone, two lines to each alarm system digital
communicator (DC).

90 Percent
2.15 ABOVE CEILING/STRUCTURE MOUNTED JACK LOCATIONS
A. Jack type to match colors above and shall be as follows:

1. Panduit part number CBXQ2xx-A securely mounted to structure above the
finished ceiling with Category 6A jacks and blanks as required.
2.16 UTP STATION CABLING (RISER)
A. Cabling shall be Category 6A and color as noted above:

1. General Cable part number 71335xx.
2.17 DATA AND TELEPHONE PATCH PANELS
A. Provide the required quantity of 19" rack mount flat patch panels, plus 20% spare
capacity for future expansion, at each MDF/IDF. Permanently mark patch panels with
ANSI/TIA-606-C compliant machine printed labels.
1. Panduit part number CPPL24WBLY, or equivalent with strain relief bar.
2. Panduit part number CPPL48WBLY, or equivalent with dual strain relief bars.
B. Provide separate dedicated patch panels for each data device type:
1. Data patch panel
2. Security and camera patch panel
3. Intercom speaker patch panel
4. Wireless patch panel.
C. Permanently mark patch panels with EIA/TIA 606 compliant machine printed labels.
1. To be Panduit part number CPPL24WBLY, 24-port modular patch panel, flat style
panel, 1 RU high. Provide complete with CJS6X88TGxx * series RJ-45, Category
6A jacks, color coded as required.
2. To be Panduit part number CPPL48WBLY, 48-port modular patch, flat style
panel, 2 RU high. Provide complete with CJ688TG* series RJ-45, Category 6
(GP6™ PLUS) jacks, color coded as required.
2.18 DATA CATEGORY 6A UTP PATCH CORDS
A. The Contractor shall provide one (1) distribution frame patch cord (25% 1-foot, 50%
3-foot, and 25% 5-foot lengths) and one (1) 12-foot equipment connection patch cord
per installed run indicated on plans. Color as noted above.
B. Patch cords to be:

1. Panduit part number UTP28X3xx (3 foot) or equivalent, and color as noted
above.
2. Panduit part number UTP28X7xx (7 foot) or equivalent, and color as noted above
2.19 INTERIOR MULTIMODE FIBER OPTIC DATA BACKBONE CABLE
A. Interior data backbone runs from the MDF to each IDF shall consist of twelve multi-
mode fiber optic cable assemblies with 900µm tight buffered fibers, dielectric
construction with strength elements. Multi-mode glass strands shall be 50/125/900

90 Percent
µm 10Gig™ OM4 laser optimized optical fiber. Outer jackets to provide 2,000 N/cm
crush resistance and 2,000 impacts w/1.6 N-cm impact resistance.
B. Provide twelve (12) multi-mode fibers per run with all fibers terminated with duplex LC
style connectors and bulkhead splice bushings at each end. Labeling shall note cable
type, run designation, "Tx" for the transmit fiber connectors, and "Rx" for the receive
fiber connectors.
C. Fiber optic cable jumpers/attenuators are not included in this Sections’ scope of work.
D. All interior fiber optic backbone cables shall be fully enclosed in continuous orange
innerduct / conduit for additional protection. The innerduct shall provide a readily re-
pullable cable pathway and providing other arrangements such as armored cable in
lieu if of innerduct and conduit is not acceptable.
E. Multi-mode cable shall be Panduit Part Number FODRZ12Y Opti-Core® Fiber Optic
Distribution Cable, 12 fiber, aqua color, 10Gig™ 50/125μm (OM4) multi-mode riser
(OFNR) rated distribution cable.
2.20 INDOOR / OUTDOOR FIBER OPTIC DATA BACKBONE CABLE (MARQUEE)
A. The Indoor/Outdoor data backbone run from the MDF to the marquee sign location
shall consist of two-strand, 10Gig™ 50/125 (OM3) multi-mode fiber, fiber optic cable
with water-blocking technology. Multi-mode glass strands shall be 50/125/900 μm 10
10Gig™ OM3 laser optimized optical fiber. Outer jackets shall provide 2,000 N/cm
crush resistance and 2,000 impacts and 2,000 impacts w/1.6 N-cm impact resistance.
B. Provide two (2) stand multi-mode fibers per run with all fibers terminated with duplex
LC style connectors and bulkhead splice bushings at each end. Labeling shall note
cable type, run designation, “Tx” for transmit fiber connectors, and “Rx” for the receive
fiber connectors.
C. Fiber optic cable jumpers/attenuators are not included in this Section’s scope of work.
D. All underground fiber optic backbone cable installations shall include an 18-gauge
copper trace wire and shall be fully enclosed in continuous underground or overhead
conduit for additional protection.
E. Multi-mode underground cable shall be Panduit Part Number FOCRX02Y Opti-Core®

Fiber Optic Indoor/Outdoor Cable, 2-fiber, 10Gig™ 50/125μm (OM3) multi-mode riser
(OFNR) Riser rated indoor/outdoor central cable.
2.21 RACK MOUNT FIBER OPTIC TERMINATION CABINETS
A. Provide as required and mount in the top of rack, above the patch panels. Size for the
number of terminations required plus 25% spare fiber optic connector mounting holes.
1. To be Panduit OPTICOM™ QuickNet, FRME, or HD series rack mount Fiber
Optic Module Enclosures or equivalent.
2. Provide Panduit LC OPTICOM™ part number FAP6WAQDLC, 10Gig
50/125μm (OM4) multi mode Fiber Adapter Panels (FAPs) or equivalent.

90 Percent
B. Fiber optic cable jumpers/attenuators are not included in this Sections’ scope of work.
2.22 19" OPEN EQUIPMENT RACKS
A. In the MDF, provide one (1) one Four Post Rack, rack space to be reserved for server
equipment provided and installed by the Owner, and at least one (1) Two Post Rack
as required to accommodate the drop count.
B. In each IDF, provide at least two (2) Two Post Racks as required to accommodate
the drop count.
C. Four post rack to be:

1. Chatsworth Product Inc. (CPI) Part No. 15217-703 Cable Rack.
D. Two post rack to be:

1. Chatsworth Product Inc. (CPI) Part No. 55053-703 Cable Rack.
E. Vertical cable management to be:

1. CPI Part No. 13912-703 6” wide vertical cable manager shall be provided at
each open end of a row of racks and on both sides of a single rack.
2. CPI Part No. 13915-703, 12” wide vertical cable manager shall be provided at
each location between two banked racks.
F. Isolated ground power strip mounted on the lower portion of the left side of each rack
to be:
1. Middle Atlantic Products Part No. PDT-2X320, or equivalent.
G. Ladder type cable tray shall be routed over all floor mounted racks from wall to wall.
H. Mount fiber termination cabinets in the top portion of the rack and then the patch
panels. Reserve the lower 50% of rack space for mounting of network electronics by
the Owner.
2.23 CABLE ROUTING AND INSTALLATION
A. System wiring and equipment installation shall be in accordance with good

engineering practices as established by the EIA and the NEC. Wiring shall meet all
state and local electrical code requirements.
B. Cable pathways, conduit, and cable support systems shall be complete with bushings,
C. All wiring shall test free from opens, grounds, or shorts. All communications cable
shall be supported from the building structure and bundled. Do not attach any
supports to joist bridging or other lightweight members.
D. The support system shall provide a protective pathway to eliminate stress that could
damage the cabling. The cable shall not be crushed, deformed, skinned, crimped,

90 Percent
twisted, or formed into tight radius bends that could compromise the integrity of the
cabling.
E. Communications cable must not be fastened to electrical conduits, mechanical

ductwork/piping, sprinkler pipes, or routed to obstruct access to hatches, doors, utility
access panels, or service work areas. Do not route cables through fire doors,
ventilation shafts, grates, or parallel with line voltage electrical conductors.
Communication cables shall not be run loose on ceiling grid or ceiling tiles.
F. Support shall be provided by mounting appropriate fasteners that may be loaded with
multiple cables. Provided that the weight load is carried by the support rod or wire,
the support assembly may attach to the ceiling grid for lateral stabilization. The
required support wires for the ceiling grid or light fixtures shall not be utilized. Any
fastener attached to the ceiling grid shall not interfere with inserting or removing
ceiling tiles. The cable pathway of supports must be positioned at least 12 inches
above the ceiling grid.
G. Communication cables shall be run in conduits, where stubs are provided, from wall
or floor jacks to accessible areas above finished ceilings. Conduit shall be required
only within walls and concealed spaces to provide access.
H. Provide bushings to protect the cable from damage for conduit ends, box openings,
and passage through metal studs.
I. Communication cables shall be run in bundles above accessible ceilings and

supported from building structure. Cabling shall be loosely bundled with cable Velcro
hook ties randomly spaced at 30 to 48 inches on center, cable ties shall not be tight
enough to deform cabling and shall not be used to support the cabling.
J. Each cable run shall include a three-foot service loop with Velcro hook ties located in
the ceiling above the rack. This is to allow for future re-termination or repair.
K. All cabling shall be placed with regard to the environment, EMI/RFI interference, and
its effect on communication signal transmission.
L. Non-conductive fiber optic cable is immune from EMI/RFI interference. Give priority
when selecting a route to minimize exposure to possible cable damage from
maintenance or service of all systems in the attic space.
M. Do not route any data cable within two feet of any light fixture, HVAC unit, service
access area, electric panel, or any device containing a motor or transformer.
N. Communication cable will not be installed in the same conduit, raceway, tray, duct, or
track with line voltage electrical cable without a metallic barrier meeting NEC
requirements.
O. Maximum cable pulling tension should not exceed 25 pound-force (110 N) or the

90 Percent
P. Any pulling compounds utilized must be approved by the cable manufacturer and
Q. No terminations or splices shall be installed in or above ceilings, other than in

designated end point housings.
R. Cable bends shall not be tighter that the manufacturers’ suggested bend radius.
S. Mount all equipment firmly in place. Route cable in a professional, neat and orderly
installation.
T. Provide for adequate ventilation to all equipment racks and take precautions to
prevent electromagnetic or electrostatic hum.
2.24 UTP CABLE TERMINATION PRACTICES
A. Insulation Displacement Contact (IDC) connectors shall be used and installed per the
manufactures' recommendations.
B. Strip back only as much cable jacket as required to terminate.
C. Preserve wire-pair twists as closely as possible to point of termination (0.5" maximum)

to keep signal impairment to a minimum.
D. Avoid twisting cable jacket during installation.
E. Take care to ensure all data UTP wiring devices are designed for T568B wiring,
T568A devices use a different pair assignment and should not be mixed.
F. Data and Telephone Cable UTP T568B, Identical to AT&T 258A and WECO, Pin/Pair
Assignments (All RJ-45 modular jacks):
Pin: Line/Pair: Color:
1 Tx 2 White/Orange Band
2 Rx 2 Orange
3 Tx 3 White/Green Band
4 Rx 1 Blue
5 Tx 1 White/Blue Band
6 Rx 3 Green
7 Tx 4 White/Brown Band
8 Rx 4 Brown
2.25 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE INSTALLATION AND TERMINATION PRACTICES
A. The following fiber optic connector installation methods are acceptable; fusion splice
connection of factory made pigtail connectors, epoxy/polish style connectors, or non-
epoxy compression cam gel style connectors. In each case, the connector
manufactures’ instructions shall be followed and the recommended tools and
supplies, including break out kits when required, shall be used for termination and
testing. All Fiber strands to be terminated including future use pairs.

90 Percent
B. As per industry standard - IEC 61300-3-35 during optical fiber connector termination,
certify, all terminations with a 200-power microscope (minimum). Follow all of the
connector manufacturers’ recommendations. Unacceptable flaws in the termination’s
will include, but not be limited to, scratches, full or partial cracks, bubbles, pits, or
residual dirt, dust, oil, moisture, grinding or sanding debris in the connector. The
acceptable final inspection shall show a connector tip that is properly aligned and free
of imperfections in 100% of the core and 80% of the cladding. Any connectors that
fail testing shall be inspected and re-tested after rework.
C. During installation of optical fiber cable, do not allow pulling tension to exceed cable
manufacturers’ specification for the cable being installed. Only the strength member
of the cable shall be subjected to the pulling tension.
D. Clean all optical fiber connector tips prior to inserting them into mating receptacles or
bulkheads and re-install dust covers. Clean the tester launch cord prior to each
insertion, as well.
2.26 CABLE SUPPORT
A. Conduit, duct, or track shall be used for communication cable in exposed areas.
B. Cable fill shall not exceed the manufacturers’ instructions for each type of support.
C. All conduit, ducts, track, and raceways shall be supported from the structure at
industry standard intervals for the size specified, utilizing proper anchoring devices.
D. Solid, ladder, or mesh cable tray/duct shall be required for narrow depth cable routes
that would allow sags to rest upon the ceiling, electrical conduits, HVAC equipment,
ducts, or lighting fixtures.
E. Vertical cable runs exceeding 12” in equipment closets shall require ladder or mesh
type cable support tray. Attachment shall utilize appropriate mounting hardware and
accessories for vertical placement and allow a minimum of 2” clearance between the
wall and runway. Cable attachment shall be made by Velcro hook ties in a basket
type configuration.
F. All vertical supports shall be attached to the building support structure or concrete
ceiling with anchors load rated for 100-lbs. minimum. Down rods shall be a minimum
of 1/4” diameter. Steel uni-strut cross supports shall be 2” minimum.
G. Cable runway or tray shall be grounded to an appropriate building ground at each end
and bonded at each joint.
H. Rubber or plastic boots shall be installed at the ends of horizontal support rails to
prevent cable damage or injuries to personnel.

90 Percent
2.27 BUSHINGS
A. Provide a plastic snap in bushing at each box opening, passage through a metal stud,
and at the end of all open conduit stubs or sleeves prior to cable installation to protect
the cabling from damage:
1. Box openings - Thomas & Betts Knockout Bushing Series 3210, or equivalent.
2. Metal stud passage - Thomas & Betts Twist It Bushing Catalog Number SB1216-
SC, or equivalent.
3. Conduit ends - Thomas & Betts Anti-Short Bushing Series 390 or Tite-Bite
Combination couplings Series 442, or equivalent.
2.28 J-HOOKS
A. Attachments for cabling support shall be spaced at approximately 48 to 60 inches on

center. Cable bundles shall not be allowed to sag down more than 12-inches mid-
span between attachments.
B. Category 6A, all attachments shall be approved for Category 6A cabling. Attachments
shall be Caddy part numbers as follow, or equivalent, sized as follows:
1. CAT16HP, 1” diameter Capacity 7 to 10 Category 6A cables.
2. CAT21HP, 1.31” diameter Capacity 12 to 24 Category 6A cables.
3. CAT32HP, 2” diameter Capacity 25 to 35 Category 6A cables.
4. CAT48HP, 3” diameter Capacity 48 Category 6A cables.
5. Split bundles greater than 48 cables (maximum allowed bundle size) or provide
cable tray.
C. Do not mix different signal strength cables on the same J-Hook (i.e. fire alarm with
data and telephone cable). Multiple J-Hooks can be placed on the same attachment
point, up to the rated weight load of the attachment device.
2.29 CABLE TIE WRAPS (PLENUM RATED)
A. Plenum rated Velcro hook cable ties shall be furnished and installed to attach wire
bundles to supports and for appropriate wire management as required. Provide and
install Panduit TAK-TY HLTP series cable ties with UL 94-V2 flammability rating, or
equivalent.
B. Hard plastic or metal tie wraps will not be allowed on any data cable (Category rated
UTP).
2.30 MEASURING PULLING TAPE (MULE TAPE)
A. All future use innerduct and conduit cable pathways shall include a Measuring Pulling
Tape (Mule Tape) made of woven Polyester, Aramid, Kevlar, or an equivalent fiber
blend. Measuring Pulling Tape shall have a minimum tensile strength of 1250 lbf. or
as required and shall be pre-lubricated for prevention of burn though and marked for
measuring in feet. Measuring Pulling Tape installed in underground pathways shall
incorporate a 22 gauge minimum solid corrosion resistant copper conductor for use
in radio signal locating procedures.

90 Percent
2.31 LADDER TYPE CABLE TRAY
A. Ladder type cable tray shall be routed over all floor mounted racks from wall to wall,
provide all necessary hardware to attach the ladder rack to the top of the floor rack
and to the walls. All field cuts shall be filed smooth, dressed square, and painted to
match with CPI Part No. 25401-700 Black Touch-up Paint. Utilize tray splicing,
support, and coupling hardware supplied by and installed as recommended by the
manufacturer. Cable tray and rack shall be securely supported and grounded. Cable
tray shall be of heavy-duty tubular steel construction with black powder coat finish,
12" wide, with cross members at 12" intervals. Chatsworth Product Inc. (CPI) Part No.
10250-712 Tubular Runway. At each ladder rack joint, provide a CPI Part No. 40164-
001 Grounding Kit. Provide CPI Part No. 10642-001 fire-retardant flat black colored
rubberized material end caps to cover all exposed ends of ladder rack. At the top of
each rack, provide a CPI Part No. 10595-712 Rack-to-Runway Mounting Plate, CPI
Part No. 10506-702 Cable Runway Elevation Kit, and CPI Part No. 12100-712 Cable
Runway Radius Drop. At each wall, provide a CPI Part No. 11421-712 Horizontal Wall
Angle Support. Provide CPI 12362-712 Cable Runway Center Support hanger
brackets and similar and 5/8” all-thread rod hanger supports from the building
structure at any span that exceeds 60” from other support (rack and wall mounting
locations), at intervals of 60” on center maximum.
2.32 MESH CABLE TRAY
A. Mesh constructed cable tray systems shall be utilized for high capacity and special
pathway support requirements. Mesh cable tray shall be constructed from steel wires.
All edges and welds are to be smooth and free of burs or sharp edges. Mesh tray
assemblies shall be zinc plated after fabrication. All field cuts shall be filed smooth,
dressed square, and touched up with zinc bearing paint to prevent rust formation.
Mesh openings shall not exceed 2” x 4”. Provide sizes from 3” wide x 2” deep up to
24” wide x 4” deep as required for a 50% maximum initial fill rate. Provide straight
sections, vertical offsets, tees, crosses, radiused bends, reducers, and radiused
dropouts as required. Utilize tray splicing, support, and coupling hardware supplied
by and installed as recommended by the manufacturer. Support from building
structure. Provide Mono-Systems Inc. Mono-Mesh Cable Tray MM2-12-118 series as
required or equivalent.
2.33 FIRE OR DRAFT STOPPING, PENETRATIONS, AND CORING
instructions.

90 Percent
D. Draft/Noise Stopping - This Contractor prepares for and applies draft/noise stopping
to all non-rated wall penetrations. Draft/Noise stopping shall minimize the movement
of air and sound from enclosed areas to other parts of the building. This shall include
but not limited to:
1. Neatly cutting all non-rated wall/floor penetrations with a 1” maximum clearance.
All gypsum board or plaster penetrations shall tool cut using an appropriate hole
saw / mandrel or manufactured assembly. The hole shall be neatly cut, not
oversize or irregular. Do not share wall/floor penetrations with two types of
ductwork, piping, line voltage electrical conduits, communications cabling, etc.
caulk, and sealant as required. Seal the interior of conduit sleeves around the
caulk or putty, install according to the manufacturers’ instructions.
Engineer, Builder and Electrical Contractor to have sleeves placed in new
temporary and final fire stopping. Special care shall be taken not to stress, overheat,
or penetrate any building support member. Coring shall be made with equipment
appropriate for the dry penetration of concrete and block materials. Under no
circumstances shall penetrations be made utilizing a chisel or percussion type
only.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WARRANTY, SERVICE, TESTING, CERTIFICATION
A. The Contractor must provide an extended warranty that is inclusive of the

Manufacturer’s warranty to the Owner covering all network cable and connectivity
hardware products comprising this installation site. The Contractor and Manufactured
shall jointly provide the Owner an extended warranty of the installed system against
defects in material or workmanship for a period of no less than twenty years (period
as is customary for the Manufacturer) from the date of substantial completion. Any
equipment or cabling shown to be defective shall be replaced, repaired, or adjusted
free of charge. All labor and materials shall be provided at no expense to the Owner.
B. The System Contractor shall make a thorough inspection of the complete installation
to ensure the following:
1. Complete and functional system.

90 Percent
2. Installed in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions.

3. All cabling shall test free from all grounds, opens, and shorts.
4. A representative of the Owner shall have an opportunity to be present for all final
testing. Coordinate final testing with Owner, schedule as near as possible to
acceptance date.
3.2 UTP CABLES AND LINK TESTING
A. Acceptance Testing: Test each conductor of every cable on the reel to verify length
and continuity. Cables that have been damaged in transit must be replaced. Installed
cable that proves to be defective will be replaced at the contractor’s expense.
B. Final Testing: All UTP cabling will be certified to meet and or exceed the specifications
as set forth for Permanent Link Testing of all Power over Ethernet electrical
parameters including alien crosstalk performance. Mechanical requirement testing
and test methods shall meet ANSI/CEA S–90–661 or ANSI/CEA S–102–732.
Certified cable channel performance shall meet or exceed the requirements of
ANSI/TIA-568, ANSI/TIA-1152-A, and ISO/IEC 11801 Standards for Structured
Telecommunications Cabling Installations in a configuration up to 100 meters at
swept frequencies of:
1. 1 to 500 MHz Level IIIe Class EA for Category 6A.
C. Test alien crosstalk (near-end and far-end loss) for a cabling system using a network
analyzer with 100-Ω pair terminations as follows;
1. The test device consists of two jacks; one jack is connected to a main test unit
and the other to a remote test unit; the main test unit and the remote test unit
are connected with a field tester communication channel (patch cord or link);
2. Six-around-one cable-bundle configuration throughout the tested length;
3. Cable ties placed 12 inches apart for the entire length of the bundle, except the
last 3.2 feet from each end; no cable-tie-induced deformation of the bundle;
4. Modeling four-connector channel configurations using the worst-case maximum
and minimum configurations to determine the worst-case for different
parameters;
5. Long channels with 90 meters of permanent link, 5 meters between the
consolidation point and the telecommunications outlet, 10 meters of patch cords
used to connect active equipment and cross-connect panels;
6. Measurement of alien crosstalk (near-end and far-end loss) between all pairs
of the middle disturbed cable and each pair of all adjacent cables;
7. Measurement of power sum of all 24 adjacent pair cables.
D. The cable tester shall be ETL verified to IEC Level V accuracy or equivalent with the
latest version of firmware and shall produce an electronic or printed report, noting
label information, for each cable run. These reports are to be included in the close-
out documentation. Testing shall be conducted with a Fluke DSX-5000 with OLTS
and OTDR functions, or equivalent, permanent link adapters, high-performance
channel adapters, termination plugs, 8-pin modular couplers and analysis software.
Certifications shall include the following parameters for each pair of each cable
installed:
1. Characteristic Impedance 100 Ω +/- 15%
2. Wire map (pin to pin and ground connectivity)

90 Percent
3. Cable Length Permanent Link Test, station (horizontal) cable from patch panel
to jack, should not exceed 295 feet (Channel length not to exceed 328 feet)
4. DC Loop Resistance
5. DC Resistance Unbalanced (Difference in DC Resistance between conductors
of the same pair)
6. DC Resistance Unbalanced (Difference in DC Resistance between conductors
between pairs)
7. Return Loss
8. Insertion Loss
9. Near End Crosstalk Loss (NEXT)
10. Power Sum Near End Crosstalk Loss (PSNEXT)
11. Far End Crosstalk Loss (FEXT)
12. Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far End (ACRF)
13. Power Sum Attenuation Crosstalk Ration Far End (PSACRF)
14. Transverse Conversion Loss (TCL)
15. Equal Level Transverse Conversion Transfer Loss (ELTCTL)
16. Coupling Attenuation
17. Propagation Delay
18. Propagation Delay Skew
19. Power Sum Alien Near–End Crosstalk Loss (PSANEXT)
20. Average Power Sum Alien Near End Crosstalk Loss (Average PSANEXT)
21. Power Sum Alien Far–End Crosstalk Loss (PSAFEXT)
22. Power Sum Alien Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Far–End (PSAACRF)
3.3 OPTICAL FIBER TESTING
A. Acceptance Testing: Test each strand of every optical fiber cable on the reel with an
OTDR, to verify length and continuity. Fiber cables that have been damaged in transit
must be replaced. Installed fiber cable that proves to be defective will be replaced at
the contractor’s expense.
B. Final Testing: After termination, each individual fiber of each cable segment shall be
tested bi-directionally using an OTDR, both to determine the installed length and
continuity. All individual fibers of each cable segment will be tested using a power
meter to determine the actual loss. These readings will be taken at the 850 nm and
1300 nm windows for Multi-mode and 1310 nm and 1550 nm windows for single-
mode. Testing will be in both directions. The final readings shall be listed in the
certification report. These readings must not be higher than the “Optimal Attenuation
Loss.” The OAL will be calculated using the manufacturers’ factory certified test
results, (dB/Km) converted to the actual installed lengths plus the manufacturers’ best
published attenuation losses for the connector and/or splice installed on this project.
(0.20 for Connectors and 0.10 for splices.) The OAL shall be used for comparison
with the end to end power loss test results prior to acceptance by the construction
manager.
C. Fiber optic cable shall be subjected to bi-directional testing meeting ANSI/TIA-568

requirements. The cable tester shall produce a printed report, noting label information,
for each cable run. These reports are to be included in the close-out documentation.

90 Percent

transmitted in PDF file format.
testing, and maintenance of the system. Place final cable certification test results in
manuals.
D. All cable paths and wiring methodology shall be documented. All cables shall have
both ends labeled and included in the as-built documentation. Provide an MS Excel
worksheet compatible format spreadsheet file cross referencing all cable run
numbers, architectural room number, and owners room number for the origin and
destination of each cable run.
E. A formal on-site training session shall be provided by the Contractor to the Owners
Representative / Maintenance personnel and shall include instruction on the
documentation, location, inspection, maintenance, testing, and operation of all system
components. Provide a minimum of two (2) hours of documented general instruction.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 27 40 18
AUDIO-VIDEO EQUIPMENT, BRACKETS AND CABLING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. For each site provide new A/V systems and devices as noted on plans and specified
in this section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDES
A. General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. Reference all Division 0,
Division 1, Division 26 Division 27 specifications, Electrical Drawings, Audio-Visual
Drawings, and Technical drawings for additional information. The specification and
the drawings are complementary and must be understood together.
B. The work of this section also includes:

1. Required licenses, insurance, and permits including payment of charges and fees
2. Verification of dimensions and conditions at the job site
3. Preparation and delivery of submittal information within 30 days of contract award
4. Pick-up of Owner Furnished Equipment (OFE) and incorporation into project if
applicable
5. Development and implementation of AV control system software code and
control panel layouts, which shall become the property of the Owner
6. Installation in accordance with the contract document, manufacturer's
recommendation, and in conformity with applicable codes and authority having
jurisdiction (AHJ)
7. Extension of electrical service, including ground, to equipment locations if
required.
8. Final tests and adjustments, written report, and documentation.
9. Instruction of operating personnel
10. Provision of manuals
11. Maintenance services and warranty
Audio-Video Equipment, Brackets and Cabling 27 40 18 - 1

90 Percent
schedule.


necessary.
J. All crating, packing materials, and debris shall be properly disposed of off-site.


90 Percent
P. Flat Screen Display brackets:

1. All Wall-mounted Flat Panel Displays and Brackets shall be Owner Furnished
Contractor Installed (OFCI) equipment. The AV contractor shall provide and
install supporting cables and miscellaneous hardware as required for a safe and
secure installation.
1.4 RESPONSIBILITY
A. OTHER MATERIALS
1. All materials, equipment, transportation, equipment rental, and labor necessary
to achieve a complete and functionally working system as shown or inferred on
the Drawings and in the Specifications. Supply accessories and minor equipment
items (such as, but not limited to: power strips, adapters, connectors, mounting
hardware, etc.) as needed for the complete system, even if not specifically
mentioned in these Specifications or on associated Drawings, without claim for
additional payment.
B. DISCREPANCIES
1. Notwithstanding any detailed information in the Contract Documents, it is the
responsibility of the Contractor to supply a complete working, tested, and
calibrated system or systems. Notify the Architect of any discrepancies in part
numbers or quantities before bid. Failing to provide such notification, the
Contractor must supply items, and quantities according to the intent of the
Specification and Drawings, without claim for additional payment.
C. CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1. Specifications and Drawings are complementary. Work called for by one is
binding as if called for by both. Any discrepancies between the Specifications and
Drawings shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for clarification during
the bidding period. No allowance shall subsequently be made to the contractor
by reason of his failure to have brought said discrepancies to the attention of the
Architect. It is the contractor’s responsibility to know the specification and the
plans for the project, and to verify that specified or drawn systems will function
as intended.
D. COMPLIANCE
1. Execute all work in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC), the
National Electrical Safety Code, the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
and all applicable State and Local codes, ordinances, and regulations. If a conflict
develops between the contract documents and the appropriate codes and is
reported to the Architect prior to the bid opening, the Architect shall prepare the
necessary clarification. Where a conflict is reported after contract award, propose
a resolution of the conflict and, upon approval, perform Work, without claim for
additional payment, unless authorized by the Architect.

90 Percent
E. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

1. Electrical Work
a. Conduit, wireways, floor boxes, wall boxes, pull boxes, junction boxes, AC
power circuits, and ground wiring to be provided by the awarded electrical
contractor. Do not attempt to connect any equipment that does not simply
“plug-in” to an electrical circuit. The jobsite’s licensed electrical contractor is
responsible for all high voltage work.
2. Structural Work
a. Any structural alterations of the building structure must be approved by the
Structural Engineer and Architect before any work can be performed. Once
approved, the proper rigging contractor, erection contractor, steel contractor,
or others need to perform the work. This does not relate to connecting
Unistrut, threaded rod, clamps, or similar devices to the structural steel.
However, loads must be taken into account. Verify with the Architect that all
loads have been reported to the Structural Engineer and have been
approved prior to suspending equipment.
3. Drywall/Paint Work
a. If the contractor must open a space that has been covered with drywall
and/or paint, communicate this with the drywall and/or paint contractor and
the general contractor to make sure that the work is properly covered up
once complete.
1.5 REFERENCES
A. Published specification standards, tests, or recommended methods of trade, industry,

or governmental organizations apply to Work in this section where cited below:
1. American National Safety Institute (ANSI)
2. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
3. Electronics Industries Association (EIA)
4. Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
5. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
6. National Electrical Code (NEC)
7. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
8. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
9. Building Industry Consulting Service International (BISCI)
1.6 DEFINITIONS
A. In addition to those Definitions of Division 1, the following list of terms as used in these
specifications shall be defined as follows:
1. Furnish - To purchase, procure, acquire, and deliver complete with related
accessories
2. Install - To set in place, join, attach, link, setup, or otherwise connect together
and test until complete before turning over to the Owner, all parts, items, or
equipment supplied by Contractor.
3. Provide - To furnish and install
A. ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act.

90 Percent
B. ANSI: American National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway; New York, NY 10018.
C. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street; Philadelphia,
PA 19103.
D. BICSI: (RCDD5 Standards), 8610 Hidden River Parkway, Tampa, FL 33637
E. CBM: Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association, 2116 Keith Building; Cleveland,

Ohio 44115.
F. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, 345 East 47th Street; New
York, NY 10017.
G. ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, P.O. Box P, South Yarmouth, MA

02664.
H. NEC: National Electrical Code; NFPA No. 70.
I. NECA: National Electrical Contractors Association, Inc., 7315 Wisconsin Ave.;

J. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 155 East 44th Street; New
York, NY 10017.
K. NESC: National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI 2.
L. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association, 60 Batterymarch Street; Boston, MA

02110.
M. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration, US Department of Labor;

N. TAS: Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) Article 9102.
O. UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 333 Pfigsten Road; Northbrook, IL 60062

3. The date of the code or standard is that in effect on the date of issue stated on
the contract documents, except when a particular publication date is specified.
4. The Contractor shall comply with all State, Federal, NFPA, local codes and
shall bear all costs for correcting any deficiencies due to non-compliance.
5. Where local codes and ordinances are not in writing or on record, but local
precedence have been set, the Owner shall pay for any additional resulting cost.

90 Percent
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1,

Submittal Procedures section unless otherwise indicated.
B. Supplementary submittal requirements:

1. Provide the following in one electronic submission for review within thirty days of
issuance of Notice to Proceed (NTP) and prior to commencement of Work:
a. Complete schedule of submittals.
b. Chronological schedule of Work in bar chart form.
c. Manufacturer's Data Sheets:
(1) Provide a complete table of contents with the following information:
• Project title
• Submittal number
• Date of submission
• Provide a list of Manufacturer's data sheets on products to be
incorporated with Work. Arrange data sheets in the same order they
appear in this specification. Where a data sheet shows more than
one product, indicate the model being proposed with an arrow or
other appropriate symbol.
• Submit manufacturer's product literature for each type of fire stop
material.
• Upon Owner's and/or Consultant's request, provide (3) copies of
the submittals. Submittals to be bound in a 3-ring-binder sized for
150 percent of the material.
• Submissions that do not follow the format and configuration
described above, shall be returned without review.
d. Shop Drawings
(1) Functional Diagrams/Schematics:
• Detailed, redrawn wiring diagrams showing interconnection of
components and products, wiring and cabling diagrams depicting
cable types and designators, and device designators for each
system. Provide connector designations and terminal strip
identifications, along with color codes for cables connecting to these
devices. Give each component a unique designator and use this
designator consistently throughout the project.
e. Coordination Drawing
(1) Prepare and submit a set of coordination drawings showing major
elements, components, and devices of the audio and video system in
relationship with other building components. Prepare drawings to an
accurate scale of 1/8" = 1'-0" or larger on suitable sized media.
(2) Prepare floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and
details to conclusively coordinate and integrate all equipment. Indicate
locations where space is limited, and where sequencing and
coordination of installations is of importance to the efficient flow of the
Work including but not necessarily limited to the following:
• Equipment housings
• Wall mounted devices
• Ceiling mounted devices
f. Equipment:

90 Percent
(1) Location of equipment within racks, consoles, or on tables with

dimensions; wire routings, and cabling within housings; AC power outlet
and terminal strip locations.
g. Patch Panel(s):
(1) Layouts and designation (labeling) strips, including color schemes.
h. Full fabrication details of any custom enclosures and millwork indicating size,
material, finish and openings for equipment.
i. Projector, loudspeaker, camera mounting details, include hardware types
and load capacity.
j. Fabricated Plates and Panels:
(1) Provide complete drawings on custom fabricated plates or panels.
Drawings shall include dimensioned locations of components,
component types, engraving information, plate material and color, and
bill of material.
k. Labeling: Equipment and cabling labeling scheme - include font sizes and
styles, explanation of scheme, and designator schedule.
l. Schedules: Wiring schedule showing source and destination of wiring and
indicating which wiring is in conduit. Junction box schedule showing type of
box, size, mounting, and location. Include this information with remainder of
wiring diagrams.
m. Consultant's project documents in electronic format shall not be supplied to
the contractor for their use as part of the submittals.
n. Detail drawings executed at an appropriate scale, but not smaller than 1/8"
= 1'-0".
o. Submissions that do not follow the format and configuration described above
shall be returned without review.
p. Any other pertinent data which is necessary to provide the work.
2. Control Systems Software
a. Provide electronic copies of proposed control system user interfaces within
(60) days of issuance of Notice to Proceed (NTP).
3. Structural rigging and mounting details:
a. Structural rigging and mounting details of all loudspeakers suspended from
or mounted to the building structure. These drawings shall identify all types
of hardware, fittings and material to be used. Detail the product
manufacturer, part numbers, and load capacities of the hardware, fittings,
and materials selected. All loudspeaker structural rigging and mounting
detail drawings shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer
licensed to practice in the State of Texas and shall include a copy of the
design calculations.
b. The signed and sealed drawings noted above to include the following:
(1) Attachment method to building structure for suspended loudspeakers or
mounted brackets.
(2) Any secondary steel required for attachment to the building structure.
(3) All fittings, hardware, materials, and cable used for suspended
loudspeakers.
(4) All custom brackets, mounts, suspension grids or trusses and
loudspeaker cabinet frames or brackets not supplied by the
manufacturer of the specific loudspeakers to be mounted or suspended.

90 Percent
c. Loudspeaker Pole details: Include foundation, material types, load capacity

and wind loading information. Structural information to include design
calculation and copy of engineer's seal licensed to practice in the State of
Texas.
(1) Custom Control Software programming for review: It is anticipated that
the Owner and Owner's Representative shall have a significant role in
originating and reviewing certain software items although it is the
Contractor's responsibility to develop this.
(2) Any other pertinent data generated which is necessary to provide the
Work.
C. Resubmission requirements
1. Make all requested corrections or change in submittals required. Resubmit for
review until no exceptions are taken.
2. Indicate all changes that have been made other than those requested.
1.9 CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTS
A. Provide submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1,

Submittal Procedures section unless otherwise indicated, after substantial completion
but prior to final observation.
B. Supplementary submittal requirements:

1. Provide the following in one electronic submission for review
2. Equipment Manuals:
a. Manufacturer's owner/instruction manual for each type of Product by
manufacturer and model or part number unless specified otherwise herein.
b. Supply an equipment log for each system including brands, model/part
numbers, and serial numbers for each piece of equipment.
c. For custom circuits or modifications, a description of the purpose,
capabilities, and operation of each of them
d. Separately bind list by manufacturer and model or part number of Products
incorporated within the Work, arranged in alpha numeric order. When
applicable, bind Manufacturer's warranty statements separately.
3. Test Reports: Recorded findings and Commissioning.
4. System Operation and Instructions; Prepare a complete and typical procedure
for the operation of the equipment as a system, organized by subsystem or
activity.
a. This procedure should describe the operation of system capabilities.
b. Assume the intended reader of the manual to be technically inexperienced
and unfamiliar with the components and the facility.
5. Service Information, including service phone number(s) and hours; service
schedule; description of products recommended or provided for maintenance
purposes, and instructions for the proper use of these products.
6. Any other pertinent data generated during the Project or required for service.
7. Within three weeks of final observation, submit the following in one electronic
submission for review. Upon Owners and/or Consultant's request, provide (3)
copies of the following:
a. Record drawings: Final rendition of Shop Drawings depicting what is actually
incorporated within the Work.

90 Percent
b. Hardcopy full size set of Record drawings

c. Three compact disc or DVD's containing Record drawings in AutoCAD
editable DWG format and Adobe PDF format. Resolution to be sufficient to
permit Owner's technician to be able to clearly read all notes and text on
screen.
d. One set of signed proof-of-training documents
8. Submittal Format:
a. Record Drawings: Drawings executed at an appropriate scale, but not
smaller than 1/8" = 1'-0".
b. Segregate documents into separate binders containing data relevant to
operational, maintenance, and warranty issues. Appropriately duplicate data
within the separate bindings when it shall reasonably clarify procedures, e.g.,
operational data in maintenance binding.
c. Bind Project Record Manual in titled three ring D style binders sized for 150
percent of the material. Maximum size: three-inch spine. Use multiple
volumes as required. Separate major grouping with labeled binder tabs.
C. Resubmission requirements
1. Make all requested corrections or change in submittals required. Resubmit for
review until no exceptions are taken.
2. Indicate all changes that have been made other than those requested.
A. Qualifications: Contractor to be experienced in the provision of systems similar in

complexity to those required for this project; and meet the requirements listed below.
Provide documentation at the time of bid to support these qualifications. If these
qualifications are not met at the time of bid, the bidding contractor will be disqualified.
1. No less than three years of experience with equipment and systems of the
specified types.
2. Experience with at least three comparable scale projects within the last three
years.
3. Be a franchised dealer and service facility for the manufacturer's products
furnished.
4. Maintain a fully staffed and equipped service facility with full time field
technicians.
5. Have at least one supervisory on-site employee having completed and certified
CTS by Infocomm.
6. At the request of the Owner, Architect, or Engineer, demonstrate that:
a. Adequate plant and equipment is available to complete the work.
b. Adequate staff with commensurate technical experience is available.
B. Work: Perform Work in compliance with the applicable standards listed herein and
governing codes and regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction and the Contract
Documents.
1. Drawings and specification requirements govern where they exceed Code and
Regulation requirements.
2. Where requirements between governing Codes and Regulations vary, the more
restrictive provision applies.

90 Percent
3. Nothing in the Contract Documents grants authority or permission to disregard or

violate any legal requirements.
C. Coordinate exact location and installation of equipment, power, grounding, and

raceway requirements with the Architect.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Ship Products in its original container, to prevent damaging or entrance of foreign

matter.
B. Handling and shipping in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendation.
C. Provide protective covering during construction of all installed devices, to prevent

damaging or entrance of foreign matter.
D. Wrap and/or cover all wiring to after installation to prevent other trades from damaging
wires.
E. Replace at no expense to Owner, General Contractor, Engineer, or Architect,

Products damaged during storage, handling or the course of construction.
1.12 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify conditions on the job site applicable to this work. Notify Architect in writing of
discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions promptly upon discovery.
B. The Drawings diagrammatically show cabling and arrangements of equipment fitting

the space available without interference. If conditions exist which make it impossible
to install work as shown, recommend solutions and/or submit drawings to the
Architect for approval, showing how the work may be installed.
C. Any employees of the awarded contractor are required to clean up the jobsite after
himself/herself. The awarded contractor is to ensure that the jobsite is keep clean and
free of clutter so as not to hinder other contractors from performing their work. Should
the general contractor be required to clean up after the contractor, the general
contractor can issue an invoice for work performed to clean up the jobsite.
D. Adhere to all jobsite safety regulations, including but not limited to, those set by the
general contractor, OSHA, Architect, and others. Delays due to being removed from
a jobsite for unsafe procedures will not be the responsibility of the General Contractor,
Engineers, or Architect.
E. Use of equipment, including but not limited to, scissor lifts, boom lifts, fork trucks, sky-
tracks, and more, are the responsibility of the contractor owning or renting the
equipment. Any damage caused by use of equipment by the contractor is the
contractor’s responsibility.

90 Percent
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Warrant labor and equipment for one year following the date of substantial completion
to be free of defects and deficiencies, and to conform to the drawings and
specifications as to kind quality, function, and characteristics. Repair or replace
defects occurring in labor or equipment within the Warranty period without charge.
B. This warranty is in addition to any specific warranties issued by manufacturers for

greater periods of time
C. Within the warranty period, answer service calls within twenty-four (24) hours during
normal working hours and correct the deficiency within forty-eight (48) hours.
D. Provide Owner with the name and telephone number of the person to call for service.
This information to be part of Project Closeout Documents.
E. Thirty days prior to the end of the warranty period provide a complete checkout of all
system components. Repair or replace any defective equipment discovered during
the testing. Correct any defects in wiring or other functional problems reported by
Owner. Warranty replacement and service of equipment shall not apply to Owner
furnished equipment (OFE). Coordinate observation visit with the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Only representative equipment symbols have been shown on the contract drawings.
Specific devices and wiring between equipment may not be shown.
B. All devices provided shall be new and shall be the latest product of a manufacturer of
established reputation and experience of quality electronic equipment. The
manufacturer shall have supplied similar apparatus to comparable installations
rendering satisfactory service for at least three years. All like devices shall be of the
same manufacturer and model number.
C. All basic equipment, cable, and wiring devices for which Underwriters' Laboratories
(UL) standards are established for their intended use shall be UL listed and be so
labeled or bear equivalent labeling from a recognized certification laboratory
acceptable to local authorities.
D. All wire shall be UL listed for audio/video applications. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions. All wire exposed in attic spaces shall be rated non-conduit per NEC.
E. Both ends of all cables shall be labeled utilizing self-laminating polymer film non-
smear, machine printed labels.
F. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held
firmly in place (e.g., cable shall not be supported by or lay on suspended ceilings).

90 Percent
G. Installation subject to approval, inspection, and test of the Architect/Engineer.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Descriptions and details, acceptable manufacturers' names listed and specific


proposal for this project does not automatically insure products will be an acceptable
equivalent.
specification.
F. The functions and features identified in this specification section are vital to the
operation of this facility; therefore, inclusion in the list of acceptable manufacturers
does not release the contractor from strict compliance with the requirements of this
specification.
2.3 COLOR OF DEVICE/WALL PLATES
A. Device/Wall Plate colors to closely match the light switches in the rooms.
2.4 CLASSROOM AUDIO-VISUAL PROVISIONS
A. Audio-Video Input Plates

1. Single Gang
2. 1 HDMI Input
3. 1 USB 3.0 Input

90 Percent
4. Acceptable product
a. Panelcrafters part # E75702-CQ96635-1 with HDMI pass-through
5. Required accessories
a. RiteAV Part# EMA-USB3AB-KCD-BLK USB 3.0 Female B keystone to
Female A patch cable
B. Audio-Video Output plate

1. Single Gang
2. 1 HDMI Output
3. 1 USB 3.0 Output
4. Acceptable product
a. Panelcrafters model # E75702-CQ96635-1 with 1 HDMI pass-through
a. 1 Tripp Lite PN U324-001-KPA-BK USB 3.0 Female A keystone to Male A
patch cable
C. HDMI Cables
1. C2G Active High-Speed HDMI Cable (Length as required)
D. USB cabling
1. C2G #39939 Active USB cable
2. USB Active cables installed are directional and must be installed starting with
male end behind plate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Coordinate incorporation of the Work specified herein with other project work so as to
facilitate a cohesive final Products.
B. The installation recommendations contained within ASDI and Telecommunications
C. Distribution Methods Manual are mandatory minimum standards and requirements.
D. Mount equipment and enclosures plumb and level.
E. Permanently installed equipment to be firmly and safely held in place. Design

equipment supports to support loads imposed with a safety factor of at least five.
Seismic bracing shall be installed on appropriate equipment where local codes
require such installation.
F. Verify all locations of equipment in all rooms with Owner's Representative, Owner,
and Consultant.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of cable and wiring

1. Cabling and Wiring:

90 Percent
a. Install cable in a manner to adhere to manufacturer's specifications for

maximum cable pulling tension, minimum bend radius, and restrictions.
b. Provide appropriate support at all horizontal-to-vertical transitions in order to
keep the weight of the cable from degrading at the point of transition.
c. If a J-hook or trapeze system is used to support cable bundles, all horizontal
cables shall be supported at a maximum of 48-inch (1.2 meter) intervals. At
no point shall the cables rest on light fixtures, acoustic ceiling grids, panels,
conduits, sprinkler pipe, water pipe and/or HVAC system ducting.
d. Horizontal distribution cables shall be bundled in groups of no more than 50
cables when being supported by J-Hook or trapeze systems. Cable bundle
quantities in excess of 50 cables may cause deformation of the bottom
cables within the bundle and degrade cable performance. An exception to
this rule is when cable is installed in cable tray systems.
e. Cable shall be installed above fire-sprinkler systems and shall not be
attached to the system or any ancillary equipment or hardware. The cable
system and support hardware shall be installed so that it does not obscure
any valves, fire alarm conduit, boxes, or other control devices
f. Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting fixture wires. Where
support for horizontal cable is required, install appropriate carriers to support
the cabling.
g. Any cable damaged or exceeding recommended installation parameters
during installation shall be replaced prior to final acceptance at no cost to the
Owner.
h. Cables shall be identified by a self-adhesive machine label in accordance
with the System Documentation Section of this specification and
ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A. The cable label shall be applied to the cable behind
the faceplate on a section of cable that can be accessed by removing the
cover plate.
i. Unshielded twisted pair cable shall be installed so that there are no bends
smaller than four times the cable outside diameter at any point in the run and
at the termination field.
j. Provide splice free wiring and cabling from origination to destination. Cables
shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination (no splices).
Properly designed transition points, or consolidation points are not
considered 'splice points.
k. Make joints and connections with rosin-core 60/40 solder or with mechanical
connectors specifically intended for the type and class of cable being used.
Where spade lugs are used, crimp properly with ratchet type tool.
l. Take precaution to prevent and guard against electromagnetic and
electrostatic hum. For line-level audio signal, float cable shield at one end.
Shield not connected to be folded back over cable jacket and covered with
heat-shrink tubing. Do not cut off unused shield.
m. Isolate cables and wires of different signals or different levels; and separate,
organize, and route to restrict channel crosstalk or feedback oscillation in
any amplifier section. Keep wiring separated into groups for microphone
level circuits, line level circuits, loudspeaker circuits, and power circuits.

90 Percent
n. Connect cable to active components through XLR connections whenever

multiple formats are available. Make connections to speaker transformers
with properly sized closed end connectors crimped with factory approved
ratchet type tool. Wire nut or "Scotchlock" connectors are not acceptable. Do
not wrap audio cable splices or connections with adhesive backed tape.
o. Cover edges of cable and wire pass-through holes in chassis, housings,
boxes, etc., with rubber grommets or Brady GRNY nylon grommetting.
p. Execute wiring in strict adherence to:
(1) Phillip Giddings. Audio System Design and Installation. Indianapolis:
Howard W. Sams & Co., 1990.
(2) Don Davis and Carolyn Davis. Appendix II, Recommended Wiring
Practices. Sound System Engineering, 2nd Edition. Indianapolis:
Howard W. Sams & Co., 1989.
(3) AV Installation Handbook Second Edition: The Best Practices for Quality
Audiovisual Systems, Infocomm, 2009
2. Equipment Housing Cabling and Wiring:
a. Lace, tie, or harness wire or cable as required herein, and in accordance
with accepted professional practice. Dress, lace or harness all wire or cable
to prevent mechanical stress on electrical connections; no wire or cable shall
be supported by a connection point. Install cable and wire neatly tied in
manageable bundles with cable lengths cut to minimize excess cable slack
but still allow for service and testing. Provide horizontal support bars if cable
bundles sag. Reference photos below for standard of quality.
b. Provide adequate service loops so that equipment mounted on rack slides
may be pulled fully out, to their locked position without straining cable.
c. Neatly bundle excess AC power cable from housing mounted equipment with
plastic cable ties.
d. Provide plastic cable ties or Velcro straps to bundle cabling and wiring.
Electrical tape and adhesive backed cable tie anchors are not acceptable.
e. Install with connections completely visible and labeled.
f. Provide termination resistors, if required, of 5 per cent tolerance; fully visible
and not concealed.
3. Approved Products
a. Cabling and Wire
(1) The Contractor shall provide and install new and unused ASTM bare
solid copper conductor wire per ANSI/NEMA codes. Follow the
manufacturer's instructions. All wire shall be UL listed for communication
and control circuits. All wire exposed in attic spaces shall be plenum
rated.
(2) All cable shall have labels on both ends utilizing self-laminating, flexible
vinyl film and non-smear nylon marking pens. Utilize Tyton Corporation
Part No. RO175 Rite-On labels and Part No. FTP1 nylon marking pens,
machine printed labels, or equivalent.
(3) Microphone and line level cable runs shall be NEC type CMP Plenum,
22 AWG, 2-conductor twisted pair with 100% coverage foil shield, and
24 AWG stranded drain wire, West Penn Wire Number 25291 or
equivalent.
(4) 25-volt or 70-volt speaker wire shall be 16-gauge twisted pair, NEC type
FPLP, West Penn Wire Number 25225 or equivalent.

90 Percent
(5) 8-ohm full range, mid or high speaker wire shall be 12-gauge stranded
THHN wiring fully enclosed in metallic conduit, West Penn Wire Number
25227 or equivalent.
(6) 8-ohm sub-woofer speaker wire shall be 12-gauge stranded THHN
wiring fully enclosed in metallic conduit, West Penn Wire Number 25227
or equivalent.
(7) Furnish an insulated #6 copper ground wire run from all amplifier
racks/housings to the building earth ground system.
(8) Wireless Microphone Antenna wire shall be a 20-gauge tinned copper
conductor insulated by a Foam FEP insulator 0.102” in diameter. The
insulator shall be surrounded by a 100% aluminum foil, which shall be
surrounded by a 90% tinned coper braid. West Penn Wire Number
25812 or equivalent.
(9) Wires shall not be painted. Any wires found to be painted shall cause
wire warranty to be voided, and therefore the wire must be replaced.
Replacement of the wire shall be the responsibility of the contractor
responsible for painting it.
b. Cable Ties
(1) It is preferred that Velcro be used to support and secure wires. Velcro
all wires not run in conduits, above and off ceiling grids, sprinkler pipes,
conduits, and other trades work.
(2) Nylon cable ties may be used in equipment racks. Nylon cable ties shall
be furnished and installed to attach wire bundles to supports and for
appropriate wire management as in equipment racks.
• Nylon wire tie, 3.9”, miniature - Panduit PLT1M-C or equivalent.
• Nylon wire tie, 5.6”, miniature - Panduit PLT1.5M-C or equivalent.
c. Installation of connectors, plates & panels:
(1) Install panel mounted connectors rigidly attached to panels, plumb and
level.
(2) Custom rack panels shall be 1/8-inch-thick aluminum, standard EIA
sizes, brushed black anodized finish (brushed in direction of aluminum
grain only), unless otherwise noted.
(3) Custom connector plates (speaker, microphone, etc) are typically
stainless steel, unless otherwise noted or specified. However, verify
plate finish with the Architect.
(4) Install XLR type connectors in accordance with IEC-268 standard, with
a wiring scheme of pin 2 hot (high), pin 3 (low), and pin 1 screen (shield).
(5) Other Plates and Panels may be required to satisfy the requirements of
the Work.
d. Installation power and grounding:
(1) Coordinate final connection of power and ground wiring to housings.
(2) Hardwire power wiring directly to internal AC receptacles to ensure
uninterrupted operation.
(3) Provide 3-conductor, isolated ground, 120 VAC outlets as required
within each housing. Provide a minimum of two spare outlets in each
rack.

90 Percent
(4) Provide a copper ground buss top to bottom in each housing, insulated
from the housing. Ground equipment chassis not having a three-wire
power cord to these busses using 6/32 nuts, bolts and lock-washers with
No. 12 wire. Connect green ground wire from each AC outlet in housing
to this buss bar.
(5) Replace manufacturers supplied 18-gauge IEC power cords with UL
listed 18-gauge pre-molded 6", 12", 18", or 24". Use minimum length
required. No looped or cable tied IEC power cords shall be permitted
within the equipment rack.
(6) Replace manufacturers supplied 14-gauge IEC power cords with UL
listed 14-gauge pre-molded 18" or 36" for all equipment IEC capable.
Use minimum length required and minimize looped or cable tied IEC
power cords present in the equipment Rack.
e. Installation of electronic equipment:
(1) Take appropriate precautions against electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Establish a personal ground before handling electronic equipment
through the use of a grounded wrist wrap and/or an anti-static floor pad.
(2) Take appropriate precautions to protect the equipment from damage
during installation. Equipment to be installed free of damages,
scratches, dents, etc.
(3) Mount trim potentiometers, custom circuit cards, relays, and
transformers (except large 70V units) in shielded enclosures and mark
their function and connections with engraved Lamicoid labels.
(4) Mount equipment plumb and level, firmly and safely held in place.
f. Installation of equipment housing:
(1) Mount equipment in racks and consoles and fully wire and test before
delivery to job site. If field conditions prevent prior assembly of racks,
notify Owner in writing that racks shall be fabricated on site and the
reasons for the change.
(2) Provide rear support for housing mounted equipment greater than 15
inches deep.
(3) Provide blank panels to fill unused panel space within the equipment
housing.
(4) If Key door locks are required, key each housing type alike.
(5) Looking at the rack from the rear, locate AC power and speaker wiring
on the left; line level audio, video, and RF wiring on the right.
(6) Provide shaft locks or security covers on non-user operated equipment
having front panel controls. These panels are to be installed at the
conclusion of testing.
(7) If forced air active thermal management is used, provide ventilation
blocking material on the front, sides, and rear of the equipment rack as
needed. Reference Middle Atlantic Products "Controlling the
Temperature Inside Equipment Racks".
(8) Panels or equipment mounted on the rear rack rails shall not block
access to any front mounted components.
(9) If equipment rack is not equipped with casters, provide two-inch-high
wood base to isolate equipment rack from floor. Wood base should be
capable of supporting the load.

90 Percent
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION PRACTICES
A. This contractor shall supply all speakers, racks, wire, cabinets, connectors, materials,
parts, equipment and labor necessary for the complete installation of the system, in
full accordance with the recommendations of the equipment manufacturers and with
the requirements of the specifications and drawings.
B. System wiring and equipment installation shall be in accordance with good

engineering practices as established by the NEC and the TIA/EIA. Wiring shall meet
C. Cable pathways, conduit, and cable support systems shall be complete with bushings,
D. All installation shall follow broadcast wiring and installation practice, with particular
note given to installation instructions given in the equipment section of these
specifications and drawings.
E. Sound system wires of dissimilar signal types (microphone level, line level, speaker
level) shall not share any common conduit with each other or with any other wiring.
F. No cables shall be wired with a polarity reversal between connectors, at either end.
Special care shall be taken when wiring microphone cables, to ensure that constant
polarity is maintained.
G. Route all cable and wiring within equipment racks and cabinets according to function,
separating wire of different signal levels (microphone, line level, amplifier output, AC,
intercom, etc.) by as much distance as possible. Neatly arrange and bundle all cable
loosely with plastic ties.
H. Provide all circuits balanced and floating, except as noted in the Specifications.
I. All cables are to be continuous lengths without splices. All system wire, except spare
wire, after being cut and stripped, shall have the wire strands twisted back to their
original lay and be terminated by approved soldered or mechanical means. No
unterminated wire ends shall be accepted. Heat-shrink type tubing shall be used to
insulate and dress the ends of all wire and cables including a separate tube for the
ground or drain wire.
J. All solder connections shall be made with rosin-core solder. Temperature controlled
soldering irons rated at least 60 watts shall be used for all soldering work. No
soldering guns or temperature unregulated irons shall be used on the job site.
K. All mechanical connections shall be made with approved non-insulated crimp lugs of
the correct size and type for the connection. Wire nuts are not permitted. Each
connector shall be attached with the proper size controlled-duty-cycle ratcheting
crimp tool, which has been approved by the manufacturer of the connectors.
Conventional non-ratcheting type crimping tools are unacceptable and shall not be
used on the job site.

90 Percent
L. Clearly and permanently label ALL jacks, controls, connections, and so forth, with
engraved laminated plastic labels supplied with adhesive backing. Do not use
embossed or printed label tape. All labeling shall be completed prior to final system
acceptance. Black background with white lettering.
M. All cable shall have a label on both ends utilizing self-laminating, flexible vinyl film,
Brady IDXPERT XSL-30-427 labels (or similar), with a White on Black Contrast, 1-
1/2” in height and 0-3/4” wide. The laminate shall complete wrap around the printed
area of the label, and secure smoothly without rippling. Handwritten labels and
electrical wire maker labels will not be accepted. Do not write on the cable.
N. All equipment shall be held firmly in place with proper types of mounting hardware.
All equipment shall be installed to provide reasonable safety to the operator. Supply
adequate ventilation for all enclosed equipment items that produce heat.
O. Shields of audio cables shall be grounded at one end only, at the inputs of the various
equipment items in the system.
P. System wiring and equipment installation shall be in accordance with good

engineering practices as established by the EIA and the NEC. Wiring shall meet all
state and local electrical code requirements.
Q. All wiring shall test free from opens, grounds, or shorts. All communication cable shall
be supported from the building structure and bundled. Do not attach any supports to
joist bridging or other lightweight members.
R. The support system shall provide a protective pathway to eliminate stress that could
cabling.
S. In all exposed areas such as stages, gymnasiums, shops, field houses, janitors’
closets, or mechanical / electrical rooms all communication cable shall be fully
enclosed in conduit.
T. Communication cables shall be run in conduit stubs from wall boxes to accessible
areas above finished ceilings. Conduit shall be required only within walls and
concealed spaces to provide access.
U. Provide bushings to protect the cable from damage for conduit ends, box openings,
V. Communication cables shall be run in bundles above accessible ceilings and

supported from building structure. Cabling shall be loosely bundled with cable ties
randomly spaced at 30 to 48 inches on center, cable ties shall not be tight enough to
deform cabling and shall not be used to support the cabling.

90 Percent
W. Communication cable must not be fastened to electrical conduits, mechanical

ventilation shafts, grates, or parallel for more than four feet with line voltage electrical
conductors. Communication cables shall not be run loose on ceiling grid or ceiling
tiles. Communication cable bundles shall not be cinched with zip ties, damaging the
cable.
X. Support shall be provided by mounting appropriate fasteners that may be loaded with
multiple cables. Provided that the weight load is carried by the support rod or wire the
support assembly may attach to the ceiling grid for lateral stabilization. The require
support wires for the ceiling grid or light fixtures shall not be utilized. Any fastener
attached to the ceiling grid shall not interfere with inserting or removing ceiling tiles.
The cable pathway of supports must be positioned at least 12 inches above the ceiling
grid.
Y. All cabling shall be placed with regard to the environment, EMI/RFI interference, and
Z. Do not route any data communication cable within two feet of any light fixture, HVAC
unit, service access area, electric panel, or any device containing a motor or
transformer.
AA. Communication cable will not be installed in the same conduit, raceway, tray, duct, or
requirement.
BB. Maximum cable pulling tension should not exceed 25 pounds force (110 N) or the
CC. Any pulling compounds utilized must be approved by the cable manufacturer and
DD. No terminations or splices shall be installed in or above ceilings.
EE. Cable bends shall not be tighter that the manufacturers’ suggested bend radius.
FF. Mount all equipment firmly in place such that vibration or jarring will not activate an
alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal. Route cable in a professional, neat and orderly
installation.
GG. Provide for adequate ventilation to all equipment and take precautions to prevent
electromagnetic or electrostatic hum.
HH. All conduit, ducts, track, and raceways shall be supported from the structure at
Cable fill may not exceed the manufacturers’ instructions for each type of support.

90 Percent
II. All installation hardware shall be Grade 5 or higher and must be rated for overhead
rigging where applicable. Verify grade of each nut, bolt, and other hardware prior to
installation.
JJ. Use Locktite “ThreadLocker” on nuts and bolts to make the connect tighter.
KK. Use lock or “split” washers inside of every nut. Double nutting and lock nuts are
allowed, but lock or “split” washers are required.
LL. All eyebolts or eye nuts must be forged steel, not turned or welded.
MM.Shackles and Turnbuckles shall be used as necessary. All shackles and turnbuckles
must be rated for overhead rigging and lifting. Secure shackle and turnbuckle pins
with Locktite “ThreadLocker”. Carabiners, Quick Links, and other similar devices are
not to be used under any circumstances.
NN. 3/16” Aircraft Cable/Wire Rope is to be used to mount speakers, unless otherwise
noted. Aircraft cable is to be secured using aluminum 3-16” x 1” wire rope swage
sleeves, not copper. Avoid using wire rope clips.
3.4 TERMINATION PRACTICES
A. Use Neutrik standards for all stripping and soldering practices.
B. Preserve wire twists as closely as possible to point of termination (0.5" maximum) to

keep signal impairment to a minimum.
C. Avoid twisting cable jacket during installation.
D. Install Teflon tubing on drain or ground wires, to prevent the drain or ground wire
making incorrect contact with other wires or the connector.
E. Install Heat Shrink on the end of the PVC jacket surrounding the wire pairs.
F. The Contractor shall observe proper circuit polarity and loudspeaker wiring polarity.
Properly and clearly label all connections and wires as to function and polarity.
Connectors shall be wired as follows:
1. 3-Pin XLR connectors
Pin Number Connection Wire Color
1 Ground (shield) Bare
2 Positive + (High) Red
3 Negative - (Low) Black
2. 5-Lug Screw Terminals

Pin Number Connection Wire Color
1 Ground (shield) Bare
2 Positive + (High) Red
3 Negative - (Low) Black
4 RVC White
5 RVC Ground Green

90 Percent
3.5 BUSHINGS
1. Box openings - Thomas & Betts Knockout Bushing Series 3210, or equivalent
SC, or equivalent
Combination Couplings Series 442, or equivalent
B. Bushings must be put on boxes, stud passages, and conduits prior to wires being run
in the space. Bushings that are cut indicate that the bushing was put on after the wires
were pulled, and the wires may be damaged. Therefore, the wire must be replaced.
Verifying that the bushings are in place is the responsibility of the contractor pulling
the wire.
3.6 J-HOOKS

center. The cable bundle shall not be allowed to sag more than 12 inches mid-span
1. Single cables or bundles up to four cables may be supported directly by the
building structure.
2. Bundles up to 1/2" dia. (Ten 1/4" cables) 2" bridle ring, Caddy #4BRT32 or
equivalent
3. Bundles up to 3/4" dia. (Sixteen 1/4" cables)3/4" J-Hook, Caddy #CAT12 or
equivalent
4. Bundles up to 1-5/16" dia. (Fifty 1/4" cables)1-5/16" J-Hook, Caddy #CAT21 or
equivalent
5. Bundles up to 2" dia. (Eighty 1/4" cables)2" J-Hook, Caddy #CAT32 or equivalent
B. Do not mix different signal strength cables on the same J-Hook (i.e. fire alarm with
telephone/data cable). Multiple J-Hooks can be placed on the same attachment point,
up to the rated weight load of the attachment device.
C. J-Hooks must be attached directly to structure where possible.
3.7 FIRESTOP
A. A fire-stop system is comprised of the item or items penetrating the fire rated
structure, the opening in the structure and the materials and assembly of the materials
used to seal the penetrated structure. Fire-stop systems comprise an effective block
for fire, smoke, heat, vapor and pressurized water stream.
B. All penetrations through fire-rated building structures (walls and floors) shall be sealed
with an appropriate fire-stop system. This requirement applies to through penetrations
(complete penetration) and membrane penetrations (through one side of a hollow fire
rated structure).

90 Percent
C. Any penetrating item i.e., riser slots and sleeves, cables, conduit, cable tray, and
raceways, etc. shall be properly fire-stopped.
D. Fire-stop systems shall be UL Classified to ASTM E814 (UL 1479) and shall be
approved by a qualified Professional Engineer (PE), licensed (actual or reciprocal) in
the state where the work is to be performed.
E. A drawing showing the proposed fire-stop system, stamped/embossed by the PE

shall be provided to the Owner's Technical Representative prior to installing the fire-
stop system(s).
F. All fire-stop systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and shall be completely installed and available for observation by
the local authorities prior to cable system acceptance.
3.8 LABELING OF EQUIPMENT
A. Provide each terminal strip with a unique descriptor and a numerical designator for
each terminal. Show terminal strip descriptor and designator on system schematic
drawing.
B. Provide logical and legible cable and wiring label permanently affixed for easy
identification.
1. Labels on cables to be adhesive strip type covered with clear heat-shrink tubing.
Factory stamped heat shrink tubing may be used in lieu of the adhesive strip
style.
2. Wiring designator to be an alpha-numeric code unique for each cable. Actual
cable designation assignments to be determined by Contractor. Add cable
designation codes to system schematic drawings.
3. Locate the cable designator at the origination and destination of each circuit
within 3 inches of the point of termination or connection. Provide cable designator
on circuits with intermediate splice points with an additional suffix to indicate each
segment.
3.9 ENGRAVING
A. Text font: 1/8-inch block sans serif characters unless noted otherwise.
B. On dark materials, provide white characters; on stainless steel or brushed natural

aluminum plates, or light-colored materials, provide black characters.
C. Provide at least two lines of text with first line listing the general device name, e.g.,
amplifier. Second line to include schematic reference of the device, e.g., AMP-1.
D. Equipment label: black with white characters except where indicated.
3.10 COMMISSIONING
A. Prior to energizing or testing the system, ensure the following:

90 Percent
1. All products are installed in proper and safe manner according to manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Insulation and shrink tubing are present were required.
3. Dust, debris, solder splatter, etc. is removed.
4. Cable is dressed, routed, and labeled; connections are consistent with regard to
polarity.
5. Labeling has been provided.
6. Temporary facilities and utilities have been properly disconnected, removed and
disposed of off-site.
7. Products are neat, clean and unmarred and parts securely attached.
8. Broken work, including glass, raised flooring and supports, ceiling tiles and
supports, walls, doors, etc. have been replaced or properly repaired, and debris
cleaned up and discarded.
B. Prior to energizing the System verify and perform the following tests and adjustments
in compliance with applicable EIA standards.
1. Electronic devices are properly grounded.
2. Test each AC power receptacle with a circuit checker for proper hot, neutral and
ground connections.
3. Verify each individual component is operating properly.
4. Verify each individual component's performance meets the manufacturer's
published performance for this unit.
5. Measure and record the DC resistance between the technical ground in any
equipment rack or console and the main building ground. Resistance should be
0.15 ohms or less.
C. Audio Signal Paths

1. Verify operation from each source device through all switching, amplification and
distribution devices.
D. Remote Input Verification Test

1. Using a microphone or portable signal generator, connect to each
microphone/line level receptacle throughout the facility.
2. Verify that the receptacle under test appears at the correct input and is operating
properly.
3. In a similar manner, check all remote tie-lines and media related lines for correct
wiring and labeling.
E. RFI and Parasitic Oscillation

1. With systems operating check to ensure that all systems are free from spurious
oscillation and radio frequency interference in the absence of audio signal.
F. Buzzes, Rattles and other Distortions

1. Adjust the system for normal operating level in the space. Apply a slow sine wave
sweep from 60 Hz to 3 kHz and listen carefully for buzzes, rattles and other
objectionable distortions.
2. Correct the cause of the defect. If the cause is not from the system. Bring the
cause to the attention of the GC, indicating cause and suggestive corrective
actions. 41

90 Percent
3.11 FINAL OBSERVATION & TESTING
A. Upon completion of installation, initial adjustments, tests and measurements specified

in Part 3, and submission and review of the results, a final observation and test shall
be performed by the Owner or Owner's representative no earlier than two weeks after
receipt of the written results.
B. Provide a minimum of one (1) person for observation and testing familiar with aspects
of the System to assist the Owner.
C. The process of testing the System may necessitate moving and adjusting certain
components.
D. Testing includes operation of each major system and any other components deemed
necessary. Perform tests and provide required test equipment, tools and material
required to make any necessary repairs, corrections, or adjustments.
E. The following procedures shall be performed on each System:

1. Observation of the methods and means employed to incorporate the System
within the facility.
2. Verification of proper operation, from controlling devices to controlled devices.
3. Verification of proper adjustment, balance, and alignment of equipment for
optimum quality and to meet the manufacturer's published specifications.
Establish and mark normal settings for each level control, and appropriately
record these settings within the Record Documents.
4. Other tests on equipment or systems deemed appropriate.
F. In the event the need for further adjustment or work becomes evident during testing,
the Contractor is to continue his work until the System is acceptable at no addition to
the contract price. If approval is delayed because of defective equipment, or failure of
equipment or installation to meet the requirements of these specifications and any
extension of the observation and testing period is required, the Contractor shall pay
for additional time and expenses of the Owner at the standard rate in effect at that
time.
3.12 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Thirty days prior to start of testing, provide a list to the Owner of test equipment make,
model numbers and calibration dates that shall be set.
B. The following equipment shall be available on site for the entire test period through
final system testing.
1. Sound Level Meter: ANSI S1.4-1971 Type S1A with digital or analog display.
Meter to provide ranges of 40 to 120 dBA.
2. Pink Noise Source - Equal energy per octave bandwidth 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz, ±1
dB (long-term average) at 0 dBm output. Stability: ±2 dB per day.
3. Dual-trace oscilloscope - 100 MHz bandwidth, 1 mV/cm sensitivity.
4. Impedance Meter - Capable of testing audio lines at three frequencies, minimum,
between 250 Hz and 5k Hz. Measurement Range: 1 ohm to 100k ohms.

90 Percent
5. Audio Oscillator: bandwidth 20 Hz to 20k Hz ±.5 dB at 0 dBm output. Output to

be balanced. Oscillator to include adjustable output level over the range from -30
dBu to +10 dBu.
6. Multimeter - Measurement range, DC to 20k Hz, 100 mV to 300 V, 10 ma to 10
A, dB.
7. NTSC Test generator
8. Real time analyzer with LED or CRT display. The unit shall meet the filter
requirements of ANSI S1.11 Class III for one third octave filters.
9. Ladders and scaffolding necessary to inspect elevated equipment, junction
boxes, etc.
C. Provide three portable VHF or UHF business band radios for use during acceptance
testing with transmission range sufficient to cover entire project. Include rechargeable
batteries and recharger along with holster for wearing on belt. Radios to be available
for duration of testing process, including any follow-up visits required prior to final
acceptance.
3.13 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL
A. Provide 8 hours instruction to Owner designated personnel focusing on the use,

operation and maintenance of the systems, scheduled as a minimum of two separate
sessions, by an instructor fully knowledgeable and qualified in system operation. The
System Reference
B. Manuals should be complete and on site at the time of this instruction. Coordinate
schedule of demonstration with Owner's Representative.
C. Video record all training sessions and compile a training video to be provided to the
Owner on DVD.
D. Provide sign in sheet to document the attendee's presence.
E. If Contractor is not properly equipped to conduct Owner training on particular

equipment, arrange for factory representatives of the equipment to be present to
provide training at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.14 CLEANUP AND REPAIR
A. Upon completion of the work, remove refuse and rubbish from and about the
premises. Leave areas and equipment clean and in an operational state. Repair any
damage caused to the premises by the installation of systems at no cost to the Owner.
3.15 WARRANTY AND SERVICE
A. All equipment shall carry a minimum one-year warranty or manufacturer’s warranty

whichever is greater.
B. A qualified representative of the contractor shall supervise the final connections and
testing of the system(s) and it shall be subject to the final acceptance of the
Architect/Engineer and Owner.

90 Percent
C. The contractor shall provide a warranty of the installed system(s) against defects in
material and/or workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year from the date of
substantial completion, unless otherwise indicated. Any equipment or wiring shown
to be defective shall be replaced, repaired, or adjusted free of charge. All labor and
materials shall be provided at no further expense to the Owner.
D. The contractor shall make available a service contract offering continuing factory
authorized service of the system(s) after the initial warranty period. This contract shall
automatically renew each year at the owner’s discretion. Contractor will submit the
cost of the renewal to the owner thirty (30) days prior to the expiration of the contract
after the first year.
E. The system manufacturer shall maintain engineering and service departments

capable of rendering advice regarding installation and final adjustment of the system.
A. As-built drawings and operating & maintenance manuals may be electronically

transmitted in PDF format (preferred) or paper copies may be provided in quantities
indicated in Division 1. Paper copies shall be printed 8-1/2”x11” copies of the
manuals, organized including index tabs in a 3-ring black binder of sufficient size.
Manuals that are shipped with the product WILL NOT be accepted as a substitute.
furnish as-built drawings. Reissuance of the Architect/Engineer drawings as the “as-
built” drawings WILL NOT be accepted.
C. In addition, the contractor shall furnish complete operating & maintenance manuals
listing the manufacturer’s name(s), including technical data sheets. Manuals shall
number for commonly replaced parts. Include complete instructions for inspection,
testing, and maintenance of the system including wiring diagrams. Include
manufacturer’s operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting manuals. Include copies
of manuals for each item that is powered or passive that impacts the system from an
operational value or from a troubleshooting value. Also, copies of all programming
sheets used to program the system. Maintain one (1) complete and up-to-date manual
at the contractor’s place of business for the life of the system.
D. All cables shall have both ends labeled and included in the as-built documentation.
All cable paths and wiring methodology shall be documented.
E. The Contractor shall conduct formal on-site training sessions. The sessions shall be
conducted by the contractor. The personnel conducting the training shall have the
proper qualifications to conduct said training. Provide documented general
instructions as follows:

90 Percent
1. Provide Instruction to the maintenance personnel to include the location,

inspection, maintenance, testing, and operation of all system components.
Provide a minimum of one (1) hour per system.
2. Provide instruction to the designated users on the operation of the system(s) and
how to utilize the system to their best benefit. Provide a minimum of two (2) hours
per system.
3. A log of each attendee of the training shall be included with the final
documentation. Each attendee shall print and sign their name and include their
email address and phone number as a record of their attendance.
4. The individual conducting the training shall provide their direct contact
information, including but not limited to, phone number and email address, for
direct contact from anyone involved in the training.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 27 51 25
SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide a complete separate system in Lecture Hall 1107 as herein specified and as
indicated on plans.
1.2 WORK INCLUDES

B. Furnish and install all equipment, accessories, materials, labor, and supervision
necessary in accordance with these specifications and drawings to provide a
complete and operating systems.
C. Equipment specified herein is designed to provide specific functional and operational

characteristics. It is the responsibility of the Sound Reinforcement System Contractor
to provide all features and functions as outlined in these specifications.
D. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical contractor to provide and install all conduit
systems, standard electrical boxes, and operating power for the communications
systems as outlined on the project drawings. The Sound Reinforcement System
Contractor shall coordinate all system requirements with and provide special back
boxes to the Electrical Contractor prior to installation of conduit.
E. Conduct and document testing, as described in Part 3, for all requirements shall be
performed with all equipment, speakers, cable runs, and wiring devices in place.
F. Provide a service contract and warranty as outlined in Part 3 of these specifications.
G. Provide all documentation and training as outlined in these specifications.
A. Section 26 05 34 - Provisions For Communication, Security, and Safety Systems.
C. Section 27 40 18 Audio/Video Cabling.
A. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
Sound Reinforcement Systems 27 51 25 - 1

90 Percent
B. NFPA 101, Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures.
C. FCC Rules, Part 76.
D. All applicable parts will be FCC Class B approved.
E. Americans with Disabilities Act.
F. Texas Accessibility Standards.
G. International Building Codes (IBC).
H. Local and State Building Codes.
I. All requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Submittal may be electronically transmitted in PDF file format (preferred) or paper

C. Product Data Submittal including special boxes, cable, and other material as

90 Percent
D. Submit shop drawings locating all components and labeling of cable systems. Submit
wiring diagrams of each system showing typical connections for all equipment,
indicating circuit routing, cable type, and gauge. Shop or coordination drawings shall
include information that will allow to the Contractor to coordinate interdisciplinary work
and when necessary guide the manufacturer or fabricator in producing the product.
Shop or coordination drawings shall be specifically prepared to illustrate the submitted
program.

B. The Sound System Contractor shall be an established communications and

electronics contractor that has had and currently maintains a locally run and operated
business. The contractor shall be a duly authorized distributor for the equipment
supplied, with full manufacturer's warranty privileges. The contractor shall stock spare
parts and maintain a staff of trained technicians. The contractor shall have been
actively engaged in the business of selling, installing, and servicing similar systems
for a period of at least five (5) years under the same business name.

D. The proposed Contractor shall have an office within 150-miles of the job site, staffed
sound systems as herein specified, and shall furnish with the contract proposal an
at least two (2) projects within a 150-mile radius of the school district to allow school
administration officials to visit the job site for review of the system installation and
service. Each reference project listed must be a sound reinforcement system of
similar scope or larger.

90 Percent
F. The Contractor shall employ factory-trained technicians capable of supporting the

maintenance of the system. No contract employees are allowed unless they have
been to the factory service school within the last 18 months. A certificate of this
training shall be provided with the contractors’ submittal.
G. The Proposed Contractor shall not have any grievances or complaints of record
regarding workmanship, code compliance, or service response. A Proposed
Contractor that has any prior finding(s) of a code violation or has any litigation in
process concerning the installation of a communication system is unacceptable.
H. The ability of a proposed Contractor to obtain plans and provide a performance bond
shall not be regarded as the sole qualification of the Contractors’ competency and
proposed Contractor to perform the work. The proposed Contractor shall furnish to
the Owner with any information or data requested for this purpose.
L. The Owner reserves the right to reject the proposal of any Contractor who has
nature.
1.7 PRE-APPROVAL
A. Proposed Contractors wishing to propose systems which differ in manufacturer,

features, functions, or operating characteristics other than those outlined in these
B. For manufacturers equipment or models other than that specified, the Proposed
Contractor shall supply proof that such substitute equipment equals or exceeds the
C. Proposed Contractors that do not obtain prior approval will not be considered an
acceptable supplier for this project. Final approval of the alternate system shall be
based on the decision of the Owner and Architect. Prior approval to make a proposal
for this project does not automatically insure the system will be an acceptable
equivalent.

90 Percent
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Product quantities are as required. If a quantity is given, provide at least the given
amount. Some products listed may not be required to fulfill the obligations of the Work.
B. Equipment and materials shall be new and conform to applicable UL or ANSI

provisions.
C. Regardless of the length or completeness of the descriptive paragraph herein, provide

Products complying with the specified manufacturer's published specifications.
D. Remove or blank out all manufacturer's names, logos, or other symbols from
loudspeakers or other objects placed in view of the public. If logos are removable,
remove and repaint to the color of the adjacent surface reattach.
E. Take care during installation to prevent scratches, dents, chips, etc...
2.2 INTENTION AND SCOPE OF WORK
A. It is the intention of the designer that this sound system be capable of reproducing
quality speech and quality music at the same time. The sound system shall be
equalized and delayed properly to allow each seat a +/- 3dB level variation from seat
to seat.
B. The scope of work for this project shall include delivering and installing the following
equipment:
1. Cafeteria
a. (1) Main Equipment Rack
b. (1) Digital Signal Processor with Remote
c. (1) Power Amplifier
d. Ceiling Mounted Loudspeakers (as required)
e. (4) Wireless Microphones with Antenna Systems
f. (1) CD/Media Player
g. (1) Power Conditioning System
h. Microphone inputs (as required)
i. (1) Auxiliary input
j. Delivery of portable equipment
2. Gymnasium
a. (1) Main Equipment Rack
b. (1) Digital Signal Processor with Remote
c. (1) Power Amplifier
d. Centrally mounted Loudspeaker
e. (2) Wireless Microphones with Antenna Systems
f. (1) CD/Media Player
g. (1) Power Conditioning System
h. Microphone inputs (as required)
i. (1) Auxiliary input
j. Delivery of portable equipment

90 Percent
A. Model numbers and manufacturers included in this specification are listed as a

standard of function, performance, and quality.
B. Refer to General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications

Sections for equipment substitution procedure.
C. If a specified product has been discontinued by a manufacturer, provide the

replacement model (as certified by the manufacturer) at no additional cost.
D. Where required, provide manufacturer's rack mount adapter or one manufactured by

Middle Atlantic unless specified elsewhere.
E. Acceptable Manufacturers Include:
Atlas IED Phoenix, AZ

BSS Audio South Jordan, UT
Community Professional Chester, PA
Loudspeakers
Crown Audio Elkhart, IN
Denon Professional Cumberland, RI
Electro-Voice Fairport, NY
Furman Contractor Petaluma, CA
JBL Professional Northridge, CA
Listen Technologies Corporation Bluffdale, UT
Middle Atlantic Products Fairfield, NJ
Neutrik Charlotte, NC
Octasound Ajax, ON CA
QSC, LLC Costa Mesa, CA
Radio Design Labs, Inc. Prescott, AZ
Sennheiser Old Lyme, CT
Shure Incorporated Niles, IL
Soundcraft Northridge, CA
Toa Electronics, Inc. South San Francisco, CA
West Penn Wire Washington, PA
F. Other manufacturers must be approved by Architect/Engineer, unless indicated by

these specifications.
2.4 CAFETERIA
A. Main Equipment Rack

1. Wall Mounted Equipment Rack
2. 16 Rack Units
3. Locking Ventilated Front Door
4. Locking Swivel Rack

90 Percent
5. Acceptable Product:
a. Middle Atlantic DWR-16-22
b. Or equivalent
6. Required Accessories
a. Middle Atlantic LVFD-16 Ventilated Front Door
b. Middle Atlantic DWR-RR16 Rear Rack Rails
c. Middle Atlantic D3 Drawer
d. Middle Atlantic EB1 blanks to fill empty spaces
e. Or equivalent
B. Power Conditioner System

1. Rack Mounted Power Conditioning System
2. 20-Amp 120-Volt AC Power
3. 9 Outlets
4. Front-mounted Switch
5. Acceptable product:
a. Middle Atlantic PD-920R
b. Or equivalent
C. Digital Signal Processor and Mixer

1. Processor and Mixer
2. 12 Input Channels
3. 8 Output Channels
4. Euro-block type mic/line input and output connectors
5. System must be programmed to duck for Intercom Paging
6. Custom programming included
7. Acceptable products:
a. BSS BLU-100
b. Or approved equivalent
a. BSS BLU-10 Controller
D. Audio Network Switch

1. 8-Port POE/POE+
2. Gigabit speed
3. Unmanaged switch
4. Approved product
a. Netgear GS108PP
E. Ducking Module
1. Inputs For 25V, 70V, Microphone and Line Levels
2. 1 Audio Output
3. 2 Relays
4. Adjustable Delay
a. Bogen VAR1
b. Or approved equivalent.
F. Power Amplifier

90 Percent
1. Two-Channel Power Amplifier

2. Minimum 600-Watts @ 70 Volts and 4-ohms
3. Acceptable Products:
a. Crown DCi 2|600
G. Loudspeaker (S1)
1. Two-Way Ceiling Mount Loudspeaker
2. 8-Inch Woofer and a .75-Inch High Frequency Driver
3. Frequency Response: 65 - 20,000Hz
4. Power Handling: 30 Watts @ 70-Volts, 300 Watts @ 8 Ohms
5. Approved product
a. Electro-Voice EVid C8.2
H. Digital Wireless Microphone Systems

1. Shure QLX-D4 Wireless Microphone Receiver (Qty: 4)
2. Shure QLX-D2/SM58 Handheld Vocal Microphone Transmitter (Qty: 3)
3. Shure QLX-D1 Belt-Pack Transmitter (Qty: 1)
4. Shure WL185 Lapel Microphone (Qty: 1)
5. Shure UA844+SWB Wireless Microphone Antenna Combiner
6. Shure UA860SWB Passive Wide Band UHF Omni Dipole Antenna (Qty: 2)
7. Single-gang wall plate with Female x Female BNC Pass-through [WA] (Qty: 2)
I. CD/Media Player
1. Single Disc CD Player
2. USB Input
3. SD/SDHC Input
4. Bluetooth Input
a. Denon DN-300Z
J. Wall Plates
1. Microphone Plates [MIC]
a. Single gang stainless steel
b. Single Female XLR Connector with Release Tab
c. Acceptable products:
(1) Rapco-Horizon
(2) Proco
(3) Or equivalent
2. Monitor Plates [MON]
b. Single Female Speak-On
(1) Rapco-Horizon
(2) Proco
(3) Or equivalent
3. Auxiliary Inputs [AUX]
a. Dual RCA Inputs

90 Percent
b. Single 3.5 Input

c. Combined Mono Balanced Output
d. Acceptable product
(1) RDL C-DIJ3
(2) Or Equivalent
4. Audio-Video Input Wall Plates [AVI]
a. Single Gang
b. Single HDMI Connector
(1) Panelcrafters PC-G1791-E-P-C
(2) Comprehensive CHE-HDBTWP100K
(3) Or equivalent
K. Assistive Listening System

1. In Compliance with ADA General Guidelines 2010 Section 219 Per Americans
with Disabilities Act (2010) Section 219 - Assistive Listening Systems
2. 219.1 General.
a. “Assistive listening systems shall be provided in accordance with 219 and
shall comply with 706.”
3. 219.2 Required Systems.
a. “In each assembly area where audible communication is integral to the use
of the space, an assistive listening system shall be provided.”
b. EXCEPTION: “Other than in courtrooms, assistive listening systems shall
not be required where audio amplification is not provided.”
4. 219.3 Receivers.
a. “Receivers complying with 706.2 shall be provided for assistive listening
systems in each assembly area in accordance with Table 219.3. Twenty-five
percent minimum of receivers provided, but no fewer than two, shall be
hearing-aid compatible in accordance with 706.3”
b. EXCEPTIONS:
(1) “1. Where a building contains more than one assembly area and the
assembly areas required to provide assistive listening systems are
under one management, the total number of required receivers shall
be permitted to be calculated according to the total number of seats in
the assembly areas in the building provided that all receivers are
usable with all systems.”
(2) “2. Where all seats in an assembly area are served by an induction
loop assistive listening system, the minimum number of receivers
required by Table 219.3 to be hearing aid-compatible shall not be
required to be provided.”
Table 219.3 Receivers for Assistive Listening Systems
Capacity of Receivers
Seating In Minimum Number of Required Required to be
Assembly Area Receivers Hearing-Aid
Compatible
50 or Less 2 2
51 to 200 2, plus 1 per 25 seats over 50 2
seats

90 Percent
Compatible
201 to 500 2, plus 1 per 25 seats over 50 1 per 4 receivers
seats
seats
seats
2001 and over 55, plus 1 per 100 seats over 2000 1 per 4 receivers
seats
5. Equipment
a. Transmitter
(1) 72 MHz band (72.025 to 75.950 MHz)
(2) +/-0.005% Channel Tolerance
(3) Transmission Power: 72 MHz-8,000 ohm/Volts @ 3M Minimum
(4) Signal-to-Noise Ratio 80dB with SQ Enabled
(5) Line input with automatic level control
(6) Rack mounting bracket for transmitter base unit
(7) Remote antenna with cable and bracket
(8) Acceptable Product:
(9) Listen Technologies LT-800-072
(10) Williams Sound PPA T45
b. Required Accessories
(1) Listen Technologies
• LA-326 Rack Mount Kit
• LA-122 Antenna
• LA-30 Remote Antenna Kit
(2) William Sound
• RPK 005 Rack Mount Kit
• ANT-024 Dipole Wall-Mount Antenna Kit
c. Personal Receiver Sets - (Verify Quantities for Number of Seats)
(1) 72 MHz band (72.025 to 75.950 MHz)
(2) Compatible with ANSI S3.22 Hearing Aid Characteristics
(3) Sensitivity: 2-Ohm/Volts max for 12Db SINAD
(4) Antenna: Integral with earphone cord
(5) Audio frequency response 40 Hz to 15 kHz minimum
d. Distortion not to exceed 1.5% THD at rated output
(1) Provide Rechargeable Batteries for each unit
(3) Listen Technologies LR-400-072
(4) Williams Sound PPA R38N
e. Required Accessories:
• LA-164 Ear Buds
• LA-166 Neck Loops
• LA-365 Rechargeable Batteries
(2) William Sound

90 Percent
• EAR 022 Ear Buds

• NKL 001 Neck Loops
• BAT 026-2 Rechargeable Batteries
f. Wall Plaque
(1) Self-Adhesive
(2) Availability and Type of assistive listening system
(3) International Symbol of access for hearing loss
(4) Meet ADA requirement
(5) Mount as directed by Architect
(6) Acceptable Products:
• LA-304
(8) Williams Sound
• IDP 008
6. Charging Station
a. Quantity as needed
b. Acceptable Products
• LA-317 4-Unit Charger
(2) William Sound
• CHG 3512 PRO 12-Unit Charger
L. Hand-Over Equipment
1. (2) Shure SM58-S Vocal Microphone
2. (2) Shure C25F Microphone Cables
3. (4) Atlas MS-20E Heavy Duty Microphone Stand
4. (2) Electro-Voice ZX1-90 Stage Monitors
5. (2) 25-Foot 14-Gauge Speak-On to Speak-On Speaker Cables
M. Projector
1. Native Aspect Ratio: 1920 x 1200
2. Light Source: Laser
3. Brightness: 6,000 Lumens
a. Epson PRO L1060UNL
5. Provide proper lens to fill screen.
6. Provide audio feed to local sound system
a. Epson Middle-Throw Zoom Lens #1 (ELPLM08)
N. Projector Mount
1. Premier Mounts PBL-UMS (as required)
2.5 GYMNASIUM
A. Main Equipment Rack

1. Wall Mounted Equipment Rack

90 Percent
2. 16 Rack Units
3. Locking Ventilated Front Door
4. Locking Swivel Rack
a. Middle Atlantic DWR-16-22
b. Or equivalent
a. Middle Atlantic LVFD-16 Ventilated Front Door
b. Middle Atlantic D3 Drawer
c. Middle Atlantic EB1 blanks to fill empty spaces
d. Or equivalent
B. Power Conditioner System

1. Rack Mounted Power Conditioning System
2. 20-Amp 120-Volt AC Power
3. 9 Outlets
4. Front-mounted Switch
5. Acceptable product:
a. Middle Atlantic PD-920R
b. Or equivalent
C. Digital Signal Processor and Mixer

1. Processor and Mixer
2. 4 Input channels
3. 4 Output channels
4. Euro-block type mic/line input and output connectors
5. Custom programming included
6. System must be programmed to duck for Intercom Paging
7. Acceptable products:
a. BSS BLU-50
a. Half Rack Adapter for BLU-50
b. BSS AC-V Controller
c. Or approved equivalent
D. Ducking Module
1. Inputs For 25V, 70V, Microphone and Line Levels
2. 1 Audio Output
3. 2 Relays
4. Adjustable Delay
a. Bogen VAR1
b. Or approved equivalent.
E. Power Amplifier
1. Two-Channel Power Amplifier
2. Minimum 300 Watts @ 8 Ohms
a. Crown DCi 2|300

90 Percent
F. Loudspeaker (S2)
1. Octagonal shaped loudspeaker containing one (1) 12” low frequency driver with
four (4) 6” x 6” wide dispersion exponential compression horns.
2. Power handling of 200 watts (RMX) at 8 ohms nominal
3. Dispersion shall cover 360-degrees horizontally and 180-degrees vertically +/-
6dB 100 Hz to 10 kHz.
a. Octasound SP820-A
G. Digital Wireless Microphone Systems

1. Shure QLX-D4 Wireless Microphone Receiver (2)
2. Shure QLX-D1 Belt-Pack Transmitter (1)
3. Shure QLX-D2/SM58 Handheld Vocal Microphone Transmitter (1)
4. Shure SM31FH Headset Microphone (1)
5. Shure UA221 Wireless Microphone Antenna Combiner
6. Shure UA860SWB Passive Wide Band UHF Omnidirectional Dipole Antenna (2)
(WA)
H. CD/Media Player
1. Single Disc CD Player
2. USB Input
3. SD/SDHC Input
4. Bluetooth Input
a. Denon DN-300Z
a. Extron ASA 141 Adapter
I. Wall Plates
1. Microphone Plates [MIC]
b. Single Female XLR Connector with Release Tab
(1) Rapco-Horizon
(2) Proco
(3) Or equivalent
2. Auxiliary Inputs [AUX]
a. Dual RCA Inputs
b. Single 3.5 Input
c. Combined Mono Balanced Output
d. Acceptable product
(1) RDL C-DIJ3
(2) Or Equivalent
J. Assistive Listening System

1. In Compliance with ADA General Guidelines 2010 Section 219 Per Americans
with Disabilities Act (2010) Section 219 - Assistive Listening Systems

90 Percent
2. 219.1 General.
a. “Assistive listening systems shall be provided in accordance with 219 and
shall comply with 706.”
3. 219.2 Required Systems.
a. “In each assembly area where audible communication is integral to the use
of the space, an assistive listening system shall be provided.”
b. EXCEPTION: “Other than in courtrooms, assistive listening systems shall
not be required where audio amplification is not provided.”
4. 219.3 Receivers.
a. “Receivers complying with 706.2 shall be provided for assistive listening
systems in each assembly area in accordance with Table 219.3. Twenty-five
percent minimum of receivers provided, but no fewer than two, shall be
hearing-aid compatible in accordance with 706.3”
b. EXCEPTIONS:
(1) “1. Where a building contains more than one assembly area and the
assembly areas required to provide assistive listening systems are
under one management, the total number of required receivers shall
be permitted to be calculated according to the total number of seats in
the assembly areas in the building provided that all receivers are
usable with all systems.”
(2) “2. Where all seats in an assembly area are served by an induction
loop assistive listening system, the minimum number of receivers
required by Table 219.3 to be hearing aid-compatible shall not be
required to be provided.”
Table 219.3 Receivers for Assistive Listening Systems
Compatible
50 or Less 2 2
51 to 200 2, plus 1 per 25 seats over 50 2
seats
seats
seats
seats
2001 and over 55, plus 1 per 100 seats over 2000 1 per 4 receivers
seats
5. Equipment
a. Transmitter
(1) 72 MHz band (72.025 to 75.950 MHz)
(2) +/-0.005% Channel Tolerance
(3) Transmission Power: 72 MHz-8,000 ohm/Volts @ 3M Minimum
(4) Signal-to-Noise Ratio 80dB with SQ Enabled

90 Percent
(5) Line input with automatic level control

(6) Rack mounting bracket for transmitter base unit
(7) Remote antenna with cable and bracket
(9) Listen Technologies LT-800-072
(10) Williams Sound PPA T45
b. Required Accessories
• LA-326 Rack Mount Kit
• LA-122 Antenna
• LA-30 Remote Antenna Kit
(2) William Sound
• RPK 005 Rack Mount Kit
• ANT-024 Dipole Wall-Mount Antenna Kit
c. Personal Receiver Sets - (Verify Quantities for Number of Seats)
(1) 72 MHz band (72.025 to 75.950 MHz)
(2) Compatible with ANSI S3.22 Hearing Aid Characteristics
(3) Sensitivity: 2-Ohm/Volts max for 12Db SINAD
(4) Antenna: Integral with earphone cord
(5) Audio frequency response 40 Hz to 15 kHz minimum
d. Distortion not to exceed 1.5% THD at rated output
(1) Provide Rechargeable Batteries for each unit
(3) Listen Technologies LR-400-072
(4) Williams Sound PPA R38N
e. Required Accessories:
• LA-164 Ear Buds
• LA-166 Neck Loops
• LA-365 Rechargeable Batteries
(2) William Sound
• EAR 022 Ear Buds
• NKL 001 Neck Loops
• BAT 026-2 Rechargeable Batteries
f. Wall Plaque
(1) Self-Adhesive
(2) Availability and Type of assistive listening system
(3) International Symbol of access for hearing loss
(4) Meet ADA requirement
(5) Mount as directed by Architect
(6) Acceptable Products:
• LA-304
(8) Williams Sound
• IDP 008
6. Charging Station
a. Quantity as needed
b. Acceptable Products

90 Percent

(2) William Sound
• CHG 3512 PRO 12-Unit Charger
K. Hand-over Equipment
1. (1) Shure SM58-S Vocal Microphone
2. (1) Shure C25F Microphone Cables
3. (1) Atlas MS-20E Heavy Duty Microphone Stand
2.6 CABLES & WIRING
A. All electrical conductors installed under this contract, except where otherwise
specified, shall be soft drawn annealed stranded copper having a conductivity of not
less than 98% of pure copper, and meet appropriate ratings (e.g. CMR, CMP, etc.)
B. Cable shall carry appropriate fire rating (e.g. CMR, CMP, OFNR, OFNP, etc.) on
jacket of cable.
C. Where cables are routed through cable tray, provide tray rated cable of equal
specification.
D. Where speaker cables are run exposed through a return air plenum, provide plenum
rated cable of equal specification.
E. Shielded cables located in raceways shall have aluminum foil shield with drain wire.
F. The West Penn cables listed below are approved for use on this project and are listed
to set the acceptable standard of performance. If field conditions or actual cable
pathway requires tray or plenum cable, provide version of cable that meets required
rating. Cables from Liberty, Commscope, Gepco, and Belden are also acceptable
provided they meet the performance specifications of the approved listed cables.
G. Loudspeaker Cables adhere to table below
Wire Size 2Ω Load 4Ω Load 8Ω Load 70-Volt Load

22 AWG Up to 3 Feet Up to 7 Feet Up to 13 Feet Up to 661 Feet
20 AWG Up to 5 Feet Up to 11 Feet Up to 21 Feet Up to 1,068 Feet
10 AWG Up to 52 Feet Up to 110 Feet Up to 219 Feet Up to 11,072
Feet
8 AWG Up to 78 Feet Up to 174 Feet Up to 349 Feet Up to 17,598
Feet
6 AWG Over 78 Feet or Over 174 Feet Over 349 Feet Over 17,598 or
Relocate Amp or Relocate Amp or Relocate Amp Relocate Amp
Rack with Rack with Rack with Rack with

90 Percent
approval approval approval approval

1. Minimum of CMR Rated, but CMP Rated where required
2. Jacket color: black
3. Approved products:
a. West Penn 454 (22 AWG)
b. West Penn 25454 (22 AWG Plenum Rated where required)
c. West Penn 222 (20 AWG)
d. West Penn 25222 (20 AWG Plenum Rated where required)
e. West Penn 224 (18 AWG)
f. West Penn 25224 (18 AWG Plenum Rated where required)
g. West Penn 225 (16 AWG)
h. West Penn 25225 (16 AWG Plenum Rated where required)
i. West Penn 226 (14 AWG)
j. West Penn 25226 (14 AWG Plenum Rated where required)
k. West Penn 227 (12 AWG)
l. West Penn 25227 (12 AWG Plenum Rated where required)
m. West Penn HA210 (10 AWG)
n. West Penn 25210 (10 AWG Plenum Rated where required)
o. West Penn C208 (8 AWG)
p. Or approved equivalent(s)
H. Microphone/Line Level Wire:

1. Provide shielded 22 AWG cable
2. Bonded jacket
3. Minimum of CMR Rated, but CMP Rated where required
4. Jacket color: black
a. West Penn 454
b. West Penn 25454 (Where required)
c. Or approved equivalent
I. Twisted Pair Cable:

1. Digital Media Shielded Twisted Pair:
a. 350 MHz ultra-high-performance shielded CAT5e (F/UTP)
b. NEC® Type CM and CSA® Type CMR rated
c. Meets HDBT requirements.
d. Color: Blue
e. Acceptable Product:
(1) Crestron DM-CBL-8G-NP
(2) Crestron - DM-CBL-8G-P (where required)
(3) Or approved equivalent
2. Low-Skew/Skew-Free Video Twisted Pair
a. Acceptable Product:
(1) Extron Skew-Free UTP 22-141-03
(2) Extron Skew-Free UTP-P 22-142-03 (where required)
(3) Or approved equivariant
3. Ethernet/LAN Cable (UTP):
a. Enhanced category 6A
(1) 4 pair, 23-AWG Bare Copper
(2) Minimum of CMR Rated, but CMP Rated where required

90 Percent
(3) Standard Termination T568B

(4) Color - Yellow
• West Penn 4246A
• West Penn 254246A (Where required)
• Or approved equivalent
J. RF Antenna Cables (as required by manufacturer’s specifications)

1. RG-58/U Type
a. Minimum of CMR Rated, but CMP Rated where required
b. 20 (19x32) Tinned Copper Conductor
c. 100% Bi-Foil, Tinned Copper Braid Shield with 95% or better coverage
d. Nominal Impedance of 50Ω
e. Acceptable Products:
(1) West Penn 812
(2) West Penn 25812 (Where required)
2. RG-213/U Type
b. 13 (7x21) Tinned Copper Conductor
c. Bare Copper r Braid Shield with 95% or better coverage
(1) West Penn 810
(2) West Penn 25810 (Where required)
3. RG-8/U Type
b. 10 AWG Solid Tinned Copper Conductor
c. 100% Bonded Bi-Foil + 90% Tinned Cu Braid Shield
(1) West Penn 98G8
(2) West Penn 2598G8 (Where required)
K. Other Misc. Cables:

a. As per manufacturer specifications
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SETUP AND TESTING
A. The completed sound system is to be tested for compliance with the specifications.
2. Installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

90 Percent
C. Prior to the testing, insure that the system is free of short circuits, ground loops,
excessive system noise beyond published specifications of the equipment, hum, RF
interference, or instability of any form.
D. The testing and equalization work shall be performed after installation has been
completed, but prior to any use of the system.
E. The system shall be set up for a general audience and at no point in the testing or
operation of the system shall output be allowed to exceed 95 dB at any seating
position to prevent possible hearing damage, and system damage. It is prohibited at
any time to “ring out” the system by turning it up until it distorts.
F. The installer shall maximize the gain structure (see below), equalize, and balance
each system to provide the least possible seat-to-seat variation in sound level and
frequency response. The testing and equalization shall be performed with a minimum
of the following equipment:
1. Professional 1/3 octave Real Time Analyzer (RTA) and Type One sound
pressure level (SPL) meter- Ivie IE-30A or PC-40 with calibrated microphone or
equivalent by Crown or White Instruments.
2. Pink Noise Generator - Ivie IE-20B or equivalent by Crown or White Instruments.
3.2 MAXIMIZING GAIN STRUCTURE
A. Quite often sound reinforcement systems are setup with the amplifier input controls
turned all the way up in the incorrect assumption that this is the only way to get the
maximum output level. Amplifiers are fixed gain devices, turning down the amplifier
input attenuators does not change the potential output of the amplifier; it only requires
more input voltage to get full output power. Many amplifiers will clip with an input level
greater than +6 dBu when the input attenuators are turned all the way up. Most mixing
consoles can deliver over + 18 dBu of output level before clipping. This means that
with the amps tuned all the way up that 12 dB of headroom is sacrificed, resulting in
poorer noise performance and the potential of system clipping.
B. Each system shall be setup to maximize the gain structure of all components. Gain
structure refers to aligning the gain of each device so that they all clip at the same
point, and the noise floor of the entire system is at its absolute minimum. This shall
be set up by using the clip indicators of the mixer or console and the amplifiers
themselves.
C. Adjustments should be made using built in attenuators, unless no adjustment is

available or the required level is out of range, then the contractor shall use a
temporary level-matching interface to determine the dB value for a fixed audio
resistive attenuator made up of two parallel resistors, which shall be permanently
installed.
D. For the first step, disconnect the loudspeakers from the amplifier outputs and replace
them with dummy load resistors. Turn the input sensitivity and output level controls
on all components all the way down. Turn on the system and supply a continuous
pink noise input signal to the mixer. Turn up the output of the mixer until it begins
clipping. If there are no clip indicators on the mixer, the contractor should use output

90 Percent
meters to determine this setting. Once the mixer is just clipping, back the output gain
down slightly until the clip indicator turns off.
E. For the second step run the maximized pink noise signal through any processors and
into the amplifier (with all crossover and output gain setup for each amplifiers
channels’ particular speaker load). Make sure that the processor output limiters are
turned off. Run this signal into the amplifiers and turn up the input attenuators until
the amplifier clip indicator begins to turn on. Turn the attenuators down slightly, so the
clip indicator no longer is on. This procedure will maximize the gain through the
system. This amplifier setting should provide maximum gain without clipping, in other
words when the output of the mixer is clipping the amplifiers would also be at the clip
point. Once the clip point of each amplifier channel is determined, mark this position.
F. The third step is to set up the limiters of the processors. Turn each amplifier channel
gain back up to just the point where they are clipping. Then use the processor output
limiters to protect the amplifier from clipping no matter what is done at the mixer. With
all amplifier channels clipping, go to the processor limiter control and turn the limiter
for each output band on. Make sure that the threshold is all the way up to +20 dB.
Now slowly reduce the threshold until the clip indicator of each amplifier channel turns
off. This should set the output limiters up such that the amplifiers will not clip, no
matter what the input is. Repeat this process for each output band. Once all the
limiters are set up turn the amplifiers back down to the marked (gain maximized)
position.
G. Fourth step, once all the limiters are set up and the gain is maximized, reduce the
main output of the mixer, and reconnect the loudspeakers. Play some familiar music
through the system and verify that the output is loud enough with a decibel meter. If
the system is not loud enough, verify that all components are operating properly. Then
check the amplifier and speaker output ratings to insure the proper devices were
installed in the correct channels. If the setup is too loud for safe operation, turn down
and balance all amplifier channel input attenuators for safe balanced operation.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. After equalization, the sound system shall meet or exceed the following specifications:
1. System shall be free of short circuits, ground loops, parasitic oscillation,
excessive system noise, hum, and instability of any form, including RF
interference.
2. Maximum SPL with band-limited pink noise input to the system shall be 95 dB
before audible distortion occurs.
3. Seat-to-seat variation in SPL at 4 kHz octave band shall be plus or minus 3 dB
or less.
B. Acoustic response of the system shall be plus or minus 1.5 dB along a line which is
flat from 100 Hz to 1250 Hz and which rolls off at 2 dB per octave to 8 kHz.
C. The Sound System Contractor shall make any required revisions to design or
installation at no cost to Owner to provide a quality operating, understandable system.

90 Percent
D. The final acceptance of the system by the Owner/Architect/Engineer will be based

upon the proper performance of the completed system.
3.4 WARRANTY, SERVICE
A. All equipment will carry a one-year warranty or manufacturer's warranty whichever is

greater.
B. A qualified representative of the contractor shall supervise the final connections and
testing of the system and it shall be subject to the final acceptance of the
Architect/Engineer and Owner.
C. The contractor shall provide a warranty of the installed system against defects in
expense to the Owner. All equipment will carry a one-year warranty or manufacturer's
warranty whichever is greater.
D. The contractor shall make available a service contract offering continuing factory
authorized service of this system after the initial warranty period. This contract shall
automatically renew each year at the owner's discretion. Contractor will submit the
cost of renewal to the owner thirty (30) days prior to the expiration of the contract after
the first year.
E. The system manufacturer shall maintain engineering and service departments


quantities indicated in Division°1. Paper copies shall be organized including index
testing, and maintenance of the system including wiring diagrams. Include
manufacturer's operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting manuals. Include copies
of manuals for each item that is powered or passive that impacts the system from an
operational value or from a troubleshooting value. Also, copies of all programming

90 Percent
sheets used to program the system. Maintain one (1) complete and up-to-date manual
at the contractor's place of business for the life of the system.
D. All cables shall have both ends labeled and included in the as built documentation.
All cable paths and wiring methodology shall be documented.
E. Formal on-site training sessions shall be conducted by this contractor. Provide

documented general instruction as follows:
1. Provide instruction to the maintenance personnel to include the location,
Provide a minimum of one (1) hour per system.
2. Provide instruction to the designated users on the operation of the sound system
and how to utilize the system to their best benefit. Provide a minimum of two (2)
hours per system.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
SECTION 27 53 13
CLOCK SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDES

B. Furnish and install all equipment, accessories, cabling, devices, and materials in
accordance with the project specifications and drawings to ensure a fully operational
master clock, secondary clock, and class change time tone communication system of
the highest quality.
C. Equipment specified herein is designed to provide specific functional and operational

characteristics. It is the responsibility of the Clock System Contractor to provide all
features and functions as outlined in these specifications.
D. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical contractor to provide and install all conduit
systems, standard electrical boxes, and operating power for the communication
system as outlined on the project drawings.
E. The Clock Communication System Contractor (The Contractor) shall coordinate all
system requirements with and provide special back boxes to the Electrical Contractor
prior to installation of conduit.
F. Provide testing, as described in Part 3, for all requirements shall be performed with
all cable runs and wiring devices in place.
G. Provide a service contract and warranty as outlined in Part 3 of these specifications.
H. Provide all documentation and training as outlined in these specifications.
A. Section 26 05 34 - Provisions For Communication, Security & Safety Systems.
contract documents.
Clock System 27 53 13 - 1
90 Percent
applicable codes, standards and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction
including the following:
3. FCC Rules, Part 76.
4. UL 50, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
6. All equipment, cable, devices, and accessories provided shall be listed and
labeled by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for the intended use under the latest
appropriate testing standard.
10. State and Local Building Codes with Amendments.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

D. Quality Assurance Submittal:

1. Letter from Clock Equipment Manufacturer stating that the Contractor is an
Authorized Factory Distributor for the area where the project is located.
E. Product Data Submittal including special boxes, cable, and other material as
1. A cover sheet with the name and location of the project, the name, address,
and telephone number of the Contractor, and the name, address, and telephone
90 Percent

product on the equipment list. Indicate by prominent notation (an arrow, circle,
or other means) on each sheet the exact product and options being submitted.
F. Submit shop drawings locating all components of the clock system and indicating
circuit routing, cable type, and gauge. Shop or coordination drawings shall include
program.


designated representative of the equipment manufacturer, with full warranty
privileges. The proposed contractor shall have been actively engaged in the business
of selling, installing, and servicing commercial building commercial communication
systems for a period of at least 5 years.

D. The proposed Contractor shall have an office within 150 miles of the job site, staffed
the type of system herein specified and shall furnish with the contract proposal an
at least two (2) projects within a 150-mile radius of the school district to allow school
90 Percent
service. Each reference project listed must utilize equipment by the same
manufacturer as the proposed system.
F. The Contractor shall employ factory-trained technicians capable of supporting the

training shall be provided with the contractors’ submittal.
G. The Proposed Contractor shall not have any grievances or complaints of record
Contractor that has any prior finding(s) of a code violation or has any litigation in
process concerning the installation of a communication system is unacceptable.
H. The ability of a proposed Contractor to obtain plans and provide a performance bond
nature.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide only materials that are new, of the type and quality specified. All like devices
provided shall be of the same manufacturer and model number.
B. All basic equipment for which there are Underwriters' Laboratories Standard
requirements shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and be so labeled, or shall
recognized laboratory acceptable to the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
C. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with

manufacturers' recommendations and the requirements of the components UL listing.
Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics,
90 Percent
electrical requirements, cable types, and physical equipment sizes, etc., before
beginning system installation.
D. All date keeping hardware, firmware, and software provided shall be fully compliant
with the calendar year designated in four-digit date format. Any time equations must
function normally, leap year, and daylight savings time must be supported.
E. All equipment shall be new and shall be the latest product of a manufacturer of
established reputation and experience of quality electronic equipment. Model
numbers indicate current equipment types; if later models exist, the Contractor shall
provide those. All like devices shall be of the same manufacturer and model number.
The manufacturer shall have supplied similar apparatus to comparable installations
rendering satisfactory service for at least three (3) years.
F. It is the responsibility of the Clock System Contractor to provide all features and
functions as outlined in these specifications.
G. All wire shall be UL listed for audio/video applications. Follow the manufacturer's
H. All cable shall have labels on both ends utilizing self-laminating, flexible vinyl film and
non-smear nylon marking pens. Utilize Tyton Corporation part number RO175 Rite-
On labels and part number FTP1 nylon marking pens or equivalent.
I. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held
firmly in place (e.g., speakers shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings).
J. Only equipment devices have been shown on the contract drawings. Specific wiring
K. The installation shall be subject to approval, inspection, and test of the

Architect/Engineer.


90 Percent

equivalent.
specification.
F. The manufacturers model numbers, functions, and features described in this

specification section constitute the quality and performance of the equipment to be
furnished. The following are acceptable manufactures; any other proposed suppliers
must be pre-approved:
Bogen Communications, Inc., Ramsey, New Jersey
Sapling Inc., Warminster, PA.
G. The model numbers used are those of Sapling Inc. Warminster, Pennsylvania or an
equivalent system by Bogen.
H. This shall constitute the quality and performance, and open distribution channels of
the equipment to be furnished, no exceptions; any other proposed suppliers must be
pre-approved.
I. The existing system and model numbers used are those of Sapling Inc. This shall
constitute the quality, compatibility, and performance of the equipment to be
furnished; any other proposed clock equipment manufactures devices must be pre-
approved.
2.3 MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
A. The master clock system shall include an easy-to-use web-based interface that allows
for configuration via Internet UTC World Time Clock Synchronization.
B. The master clock system shall include an easy-to-use web-based interface that allows
for configuration via the Internet or LAN/WAN. The editor shall allow staff to create
and modify schedules, music on class change, holidays, page, program, and time
zones, etc. Password protected user accounts may be assigned different access
privilege levels that determine what can be modified on a system.
C. Internet UTC World Time Clock Synchronization: Provide World Time Clock
Synchronization for the master clock system. Interface shall connect via a TCP/IP
Internet network connection that provides time correction with any Internet atomic
clock. Unit shall provide digital communication as needed to interface to the intercom
system master clock. Rack mount unit shall include LED display to indicate status.
90 Percent
D. The system shall include a built-in Master Clock capable of performing the following
functions:
1. Provide a minimum of 255 discrete time event entries including the following:
a. The time of day in hours and minutes.
b. The day or any combination of (7) days of the week the event is to occur.
c. Selection of any one or any combination of (8) zones or outputs to be
activated.
d. Selection of any one or any combination of (8) schedules to allow maximum
flexibility due to special circumstances or seasonal changes.
2. The Master Clock shall be able to simultaneously correct intercom system
displays, digital, synchronous analog secondary clocks, and electronic video
display clocks.
3. In the event of a power failure, all programmed data shall be retained in non-
volatile memory. Time keeping shall be held by an internal lithium battery
providing a 5-year back-up so that there is no need to re-enter the time or date
after the power has been restored. The clock shall provide an accurate,
dependable time base. Upon restoration of power, the system will automatically
correct secondary clocks.
4. Output points, activated by the Master Clock, shall be provided in the system for
controlling external sounds and other devices.
5. Direct, Select, Editing, and Review routines shall be provided to permit the user
to change and edit time, events, zones, and schedules without having to
reprogram the entire sequence.
6. The system shall be configured to allow mechanical bells and loudspeaker class
change tones to operate simultaneously within the same system.
2.4 WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM
A. A wireless master/satellite time system should be provided for the facility, in order to
accomplish this coordination. The master transmitter for the clock system should be
located in the Distribution Closet (MDF Room). An acceptable system is the Sapling
Wireless Clock System.
B. The clock system must interface with the public address or bell system, in order to
provide tone generation (ring bells) coordinated with the class schedule. The Master
Clock shall also have the capability to “ring bells” manually, as well as the capability
to turnoff all “bell” set to ring automatically.
C. Wireless analog and/or digital clock system with interface capability to GPS, network,
internet, once a day reset, 2-wire digital communication, and RS485 communication.
The system shall be able to work as a stand-alone system or in conjunction with a
wired.
D. The system shall be capable of working in 915-928 MHz frequency-hopping

technology. The system shall be capable of automatic transmission of data along 51
alternating frequencies that allows for an enhanced signal, even if there is interference
in one of the frequencies.
90 Percent
E. Each clock in the system shall be capable of simultaneous receiving and transmitting
the wireless signal, which allows it to operate as a receiver and as a repeater boosting
the broadcast field. The clocks shall automatically work together without causing
interference with each other.
F. The Master Clock / Transmitter shall be the Sapling STR 2000 Transceiver. The
transmitter shall be capable of transmitting data to the SAL wireless analog clock and
the SBL wireless digital clock. The transmitter shall be capable of receiving a signal
from an atomic clock web site via the Internet. The transmitter will be capable of
receiving signals from all Sapling Master Clocks via RS485, as well as 59-minute
correction, 58-minute correction, National Time, and Rauland protocols. The
transmitter shall have the capability of transferring a wired system into a wireless
system. The transmitter shall have a programmable auxiliary relay and shall be
programmed anywhere from 1—99 seconds. Upon utilization of the relay, the
transmitter will be capable of interfacing with a once a day closure or interfacing with
intercom systems. The transmitter shall be capable of acting as a repeater while
receiving a signal wired or wirelessly from the main transmitter. The time base shall
be temperature controlled allowing calibration of the time base during temperature
changes. The transmitter will have two (2) switches for operation of the menu system.
The transmitter shall be capable of interfacing with the SRM Series analog clocks and
SBD 1000 digital clock via RS-485. The transmitter shall utilize 915–928 MHz
frequency–hopping technology. The transmitter shall be FCC compliant, part 15
Section 15,247.
G. The repeater shall be a Sapling Wireless Repeater. The STR 1000 shall wirelessly
transmit and receive data. The repeater shall be capable of transmitting to the SAL
wireless analog clock and the SBL wireless digital clock. The repeater shall work on
915–928 MHz frequency–hopping technology. The repeater shall wirelessly transmit
and receive data. The repeater is to have a maximum antenna size of seven (7)
inches. The repeater shall have an RF input sensitivity of –103 dbm. The repeater is
to have a RF power output of 27 dbm. The voltage input for the repeater shall be 110
volts/60 Hz or 220 volts/50 Hz. The repeater shall have three (3) knockouts with a
diameter of 7⁄8”. The case shall be a compact, smooth surface metal enclosure. The
repeater is to weigh 3.5 pounds. The repeater shall be FCC Compliant, part 15
Section 15,247.
H. All wireless secondary clocks shall be Sapling SAL series. Each clock will be capable
of receiving a signal from multiple clocks. The clock shall receive and transmit with
915–928 MHz frequency–hopping technology. Each clock is to be capable of
transmitting the time simultaneously without interfering with others. The clocks shall
include automatic calibration, as well as a diagnostic function that allows the user to
view the quality of the signal, the last time the clock received a correction signal, a
gearbox test, and a comprehensive analysis of the entire clock. The clock shall have
a maximum correction time of five (5) minutes. It shall be designed to be used with
the Sapling Transceiver or the Sapling Repeater, which can be regulated via Sapling
wireless communication protocol. Upon receipt of the wireless signal, the clock will
immediately self–correct. The clock shall have a semi–flush smooth surface ABS
case. The dial is to be made of durable polystyrene material. The crystal is to be
shatterproof, side molded polycarbonate. Glass and visible molding marks are
90 Percent
unacceptable. The clock shall have black hour and minute hands as well as a red
second hand. The clock shall be FCC compliant, part 15 Section 15,247.
I. Provide Sapling wireless secondary 12" ∅ single face analog display wall clocks as
indicated on plans.
J. Provide Sapling wireless secondary 12" ∅ double face analog display wall clocks in
corridors as indicated on plans.
K. Provide Sapling wireless secondary 16" ∅ single face analog display wall clocks in
gymnasiums as indicated on plans. Provide wire guards for gymnasium clocks.
L. Digital Corridor clocks shall be installed and programmed through the Intercom
Headend System.
2.5 SECONDARY CLOCKS
A. Provide as indicated on plans wired digital secondary clocks connected to the master
clock system 24 VAC operation, RS-485 synchronization, four-digit, minimum
character height 2.5" red LEDs and black housing with gray frame, as follows:
1. Classroom and Office Digital Clocks, Single Face Surface Wall Mount Housing
-- Sapling model SBD-32S-254-4R clock face with the included SBD-005-254-
0 housing or equivalent.
2. Double Face Corridor Digital Clocks, Surface Wall Mount Housing -- Sapling
model SAB-4GD-254-0 double housing with two SBD-32S-254-4R clock faces
or equivalent.
B. Provide as indicated on plans wired digital secondary clocks connected to the master
character height 4" red LEDs and black housing with gray frame, as follows:
1. Classroom and Office Digital Clocks, Single Face Surface Wall Mount Housing
-- Sapling model SBD-32S-404-4R clock face with the included SBD-005-404-
0 housing or equivalent.
2. Double Face Corridor Digital Clocks, Surface Wall Mount Housing -- Sapling
or equivalent.
C. Provide as indicated on plans wired analog secondary clocks connected to the master
clock system 24 VAC operation, RS-485 synchronization, black ABS housing with 16”
diameter white face, as follows:
1. Large Room Cafeteria and Gymnasium Clocks -- Sapling model SRM-1BS-
16R-4 or equivalent.
2. In Gymnasium locations, provide a protective device guard -- Sapling model
SAG-1200 wire guard or equivalent.
D. Provide as indicated on plans wired digital secondary clocks connected to the master
character height 2.5" red LEDs and black housing with gray frame, as follows:
90 Percent
1. Classroom and Office Digital Clocks: Single Face Surface Wall Mount Housing,
Sapling model SBD-32S-254-4R clock face with the included SBD-005-254-0
housing or equivalent.
2. Double Face Corridor Digital Clocks - Surface Wall Mount Housing, Sapling
or equivalent.
E. Provide as indicated on plans wired analog secondary clocks connected to the master
clock system 24 VAC operation sync wire communication, black ABS housing with
16” diameter white face, as follows:
1. Large Room Cafeteria and Gymnasium Clocks, Sapling model SRM-1BS-16R-
4 or equivalent.
2. In Gymnasium locations, provide a protective device guard -- Sapling model
SAG-1200 wire guard or equivalent.
F. Wall Mount Digital Secondary Clocks: Provide 24 VAC operation digital secondary
clocks connected to the master clock system, minimum character height 1.8" LEDs.
Single face surface mount wall clocks to be Rauland Model No. 2422, Dukane
24F750A, or equivalent. Double face clocks in corridors to be Rauland Model No.
2434, Dukane 24DW750, or equivalent.
G. Wall Mount Digital Secondary Clocks: Provide 24 VAC operation digital secondary
clocks connected to the master clock system, minimum character height 2.5" LEDs.
Single face surface mount wall clocks to be Rauland Model No. 2522 or equivalent.
Double face clocks in corridors to be Rauland Model No. 2522 with 2534 double-
mount housing or equivalent.
H. Wall Mount Digital Secondary Clocks: Provide 24 VAC operation digital secondary
clocks connected to the master clock system, minimum character height 4" LEDs.
Single face surface mount wall clocks to be Rauland Model No. 2422-DDC4-S or
equivalent. Double face clocks in corridors to be Rauland Model No. 2434-DDC4-S
or equivalent.
I. Digital Secondary Clocks: Provide 24 VAC operation digital secondary clocks

connected to the master clock system, minimum character height 4" LEDs. Single
face surface mount wall clocks to be Telecor model no. 2430 or equivalent. Double
face clocks in corridors to be the same with Telecor model no. 2423 dual mounting
kits for digital clocks or equivalent.
J. Secondary Display Clock for Gymnasium: Provide in the Gymnasium as indicated on

the plans a 24 VAC operation digital secondary clock connected to the master clock
system, minimum character height 4" LEDs. Single face surface mount wall clock to
be Telecor model no. 2431-24 with 2431-BSS surface mount backbox or equivalent.
Provide a Telecor model no. 2433-A device guard to protect the clock from damage.
K. Ceiling Mount Digital Secondary Clocks: Provide 24 VAC operation digital secondary
clocks connected to the master clock system, minimum character height 4" LEDs.
Single face surface ceiling mount clocks to be Rauland Model No. 2422-DDC4-S or
equivalent. Double face ceiling mount clocks in corridors to be Rauland Model No.
2434-DDC4-S or equivalent. Provide and AtlasIED 81-4 tile support bridge, or
90 Percent
equivalent. The clock/support bridge assembly shall be supported by wire from the
building structure; in no case shall these assemblies be supported solely by the ceiling
grid.
L. Analog Secondary Clocks: Provide 24 VAC operation analog secondary clocks. The
master clock system shall regulate secondary analog clocks each hour for minute
hand correction and every twelve hours for hour hand correction. Each analog clock
shall have a standard 12-hour display with black numerals at least 1-1/4" high. Clocks
shall feature a red full face second hand. The clock shall be supplied with a sway-
proof hanger for secure wall mounting. The surface mounted clock shall require a
standard single-gang wall box for installation. Provide 12" ∅ double face clocks in
corridors to be Rauland Model No. 2465, Dukane 24SS12RDAGC, or equivalent. 12"
∅ single face clocks shall be Rauland Model No. 2461, Dukane 24SS12RSAGC, or
equivalent.
M. Provide 15” to 16" ∅ single face analog clocks in large rooms such as cafeterias and
gymnasiums as indicated on plans, to be Rauland Model No. TCCKAN16, Dukane
24SS15RSAGC or equivalent. Provide Rauland TCCKANG or equivalent wire guards
for gymnasium clocks.
N. Large Room Analog Secondary Clocks: Provide 24 VAC operation analog secondary
clocks. The master clock system shall regulate secondary analog clocks each hour
for minute hand correction and every twelve hours for hour hand correction. Each
analog clock shall have a standard 12-hour display with black numerals at least 1-
1/4" high. Clocks shall feature a red full face second hand. The clock shall be supplied
with a sway-proof hanger for secure wall mounting. Each surface mounted clock shall
require a standard single-gang wall box for installation. Provide 24" ∅ single face
clocks in large rooms such as cafeterias and gymnasiums as indicated on plans, to
be Rauland Model No. 2460-A010-24E-X or equivalent. Provide Rauland 2472 or
equivalent wire guards for gymnasium clocks.
2.6 CABLE
A. The Contractor shall provide and install new and unused ASTM bare solid copper
conductor wire per ANSI/NEMA codes. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. All
wire shall be UL listed for communication and control circuits.
B. All cable shall have labels on both ends utilizing self-laminating, flexible vinyl film and
non-smear nylon marking pens. Utilize Tyton Corporation Part No. RO175 Rite-On
labels and Part No. FTP1 nylon marking pens or equivalent.
C. Cabling between buildings shall be fully enclosed in rigid threaded conduit, including
underground and over canopy installations. Cable used between buildings shall be
rated for direct burial. Cable shall be moisture, abrasion, and crush resistant. Use
shielded or unshielded cabling as recommended by the manufacturer. When
recommended, shielded cable should be utilized to minimize electrical noise
interference with signal transmission. All between building wiring shall be West Penn
Wire Aquaseal or equivalent water blocked construction.
90 Percent
D. For RJ-45 modular cable system connections utilize data grade UTP eight conductor
cabling, NEC type CM or MP, Category 6 minimum, at lengths up to 2700 feet using
a single home run cable.
E. Each call button shall be wired with data grade Category 6 cable and punched down
on 110 type blocks to allow flexibility for future equipment. Cable shall be NEC type
CM or MP, West Penn Wire No. WP52995, 24 AWG, unshielded twisted pair, 4-pair
- (8) conductor. Equivalent by Belden, Carol or Comtran.
F. Each speaker cable shall be NEC type CMR, West Penn Wire No. 291, 22 AWG,
overall shielded, two (2) conductor, plus one (1) drain wire. Equivalent by Belden,
Carol, or Comtran.
G. Secondary clock wire shall be NEC type CMR, West Penn Wire No. 222, 20 AWG,
two conductor unshielded, or equivalent by Belden, Carol, or Comtran.
H. Microphone cable runs shall be West Penn Wire No. 77291, NEC type CM, 22 AWG,
2 conductor twisted pair with 100% coverage foil shield and 24 AWG stranded drain
wire.
I. Furnish an insulated #6 copper ground wire run from the amplifier to an earth ground,
attached securely to the amplifier case, and terminated at each end to bare metal.
2.7 CABLE TIES
A. Nylon cable ties shall be furnished and installed to attach wire bundles to supports
and for appropriate wire management as required.
Nylon wire tie, 3.9”, miniature - Panduit PLT1M-C or equivalent.
Nylon wire tie, 5.6”, miniature - Panduit PLT1.5M-C or equivalent.
Nylon wire tie, 11.4”, intermediate - Panduit PLT3I-C or equivalent.
Nylon wire tie, 14.6”, intermediate - Panduit PLT4I-C or equivalent.
2.8 CABLE (PLENUM RATED)
wire shall be UL listed for communication and control circuits. All wire exposed in attic
spaces shall be plenum rated.
C. Cabling between buildings shall be fully enclosed in rigid threaded conduit, including
underground and over canopy installations. Cable used between buildings shall be
rated for direct burial. Cable shall be moisture, abrasion, and crush resistant. Use
shielded or unshielded cabling as recommended by the manufacturer. When
recommended, shielded cable should be utilized to minimize electrical noise
interference with signal transmission. All between building wiring shall be West Penn
Wire Aquaseal or equivalent water blocked construction.
90 Percent
D. For RJ-45 modular cable system connections utilize data grade UTP eight conductor
cabling, NEC type CMP, Category 6 minimum, at lengths up to 2700 feet using a
single home run cable.
E. Each call button shall be wired with data grade Category 6 cable and punched down
on 110 type blocks to allow flexibility for future equipment. Cable shall be NEC type
CMP or MPP plenum cable, West Penn Wire No. WP54854, 24 AWG, unshielded
twisted pair, 4-pair - (8) conductor. Equivalent by Belden, Carol, or Comtran.
F. Each speaker cable shall be NEC type CMP plenum cable, West Penn Wire No.
25291, 22 AWG, overall shielded, two (2) conductor, plus one (1) drain wire.
Equivalent by Belden, Carol, or Comtran.
G. Secondary clock wire shall be NEC type CMP, West Penn Wire No. 25222, 20 AWG,
two conductor unshielded, or equivalent by Belden, Carol, or Comtran.
H. Microphone cable runs shall be West Penn Wire No. 25291, NEC type CMP plenum
cable, 22 AWG, 2 conductor twisted pair with 100% coverage foil shield and 24 AWG
stranded drain wire.
I. Furnish an insulated #6 copper ground wire run from the amplifier to an earth ground,
attached securely to the amplifier case, and terminated at each end to bare metal.
2.9 CABLE TIES (PLENUM RATED)
A. HALAR Fluoropolymer cable ties shall be furnished and installed to attach wire
bundles to supports and for appropriate wire management as required.
HALAR wire tie, 4.0”, miniature - Panduit PLT1M-C702 or equivalent.
HALAR wire tie, 7.4”, standard - Panduit PLT2S-C702 or equivalent.
HALAR wire tie, 11.6”, standard - Panduit PLT3S-C702 or equivalent.
2.10 CABLE ROUTING, INSTALLATION, AND SUPPORT

B. Cable pathways, conduit, and cable support systems shall be complete with bushings,
C. All wiring shall test free from opens, grounds, or shorts. All communication cable shall
cabling.
90 Percent
E. In all exposed areas such as gymnasiums, shops, field houses, janitors’ closets, or
mechanical / electrical rooms all communication cable shall be fully enclosed in
conduit.
F. Ring and String: For low voltage Class 2 devices, indoor use in non-corrosive
environments, in non-fire rated fishable walls only, ring and string open cable
placement may be utilized with a metal bracket/mounting plate with wing attachments
in the drywall opening, provide in wall cable management where cable passes through
metal studs and top plates, and a pull wire in lieu of an electrical back box and conduit
stub. Mounting plate brackets shall be Caddy MP1S single gang or MP2S two gang
for attachment to wall studs, and for cut-in Caddy MPLS single gang or MPLS2 two
gang, no exceptions. Plastic or flimsy thin metal brackets are not acceptable.
G. In wall cable management for open cables may include, but shall not be limited to:
1. Arlington Industries SB series non-metallic stud bushings and 440# plastic
snap-in bushings.
2. Caddy ESG series easy snap grommets.
3. Carlon Plenum-Gard plenum rated lightweight corrugated conduit.
4. Panduit MSG and CSM series cable stud managers and grommets.
H. Communication cables shall be run in conduit stubs from wall boxes to accessible
I. Provide bushings to protect the cable from damage for conduit ends, box openings,
J. Communication cables shall be run in bundles above accessible ceilings and

K. Communication cable must not be fastened to electrical conduits, mechanical

ductwork/piping; sprinkler pipes, or routed to obstruct access to hatches, doors, utility
ventilation shafts, grates, or parallel for more than four-feet with line voltage electrical
tiles.
L. Support shall be provided by mounting appropriate fasteners that may be loaded with
multiple cables. Provided that the weight load is carried by the support rod or wire,
the support assembly may attach to the ceiling grid for lateral stabilization. The
required support wires for the ceiling grid or light fixtures shall not be utilized. Any
fastener attached to the ceiling grid shall not interfere with inserting or removing
ceiling tiles. The cable pathway of supports must be positioned at least 12 inches
above the ceiling grid.
M. All cabling shall be placed with regard to the environment, EMI/RFI interference, and
90 Percent
N. Do not route any data communication cable within two feet of any light fixture, HVAC
transformer.
O. Communication cable will not be installed in the same conduit, raceway, tray, duct, or
requirements.
P. Maximum cable pulling tension should not exceed 25 pound-force (110 N) or the
Q. Any pulling compounds utilized must be approved by the cable manufacturer and
R. No terminations or splices shall be installed in or above ceilings.
S. Cable bends shall not be tighter that the manufacturer’s suggested bend radius.
T. Mount all equipment firmly in place such that vibration or jarring will not activate an
alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal. Route cable in a professional, neat, and orderly
installation.
U. All cable shall have a label on both ends utilizing self-laminating, flexible vinyl film and
non-smear nylon marking pens. Utilize Tyton Corporation Part number RO175 Rite-
On labels and Part number FTP1 nylon marking pens or equivalent.
V. Each cable run shall include a three-foot service loop with wire tie located in the ceiling
above the control unit panel. This is to allow for future re-termination or repair.
W. Provide for adequate ventilation to all equipment racks and take precautions to
X. All conduit, ducts, track, and raceways shall be supported from the structure at
Y. Devices mounted on a drop ceiling shall feature a backbox fitted with a support hanger
(Caddy #512 or #512A for deep boxes), or equivalent with independent drop wires to
support the weight of the device.
A. Strip back only as much cable jacket as required to terminate.

90 Percent
2.12 BUSHINGS
2. Metal stud passage - Thomas & Betts Twist It Bushing Catalog Number
SB1216-SC, or equivalent.
combination couplings Series 442, or equivalent.
2.13 J-HOOKS

Single cables or bundles up to four cables may be supported directly by the building
structure.
Bundles up to 1/2" dia. (Ten 1/4" cables) 2" bridle ring, Caddy #4BRT32 or
equivalent.
Bundles up to 3/4" dia. (Sixteen 1/4" cables) 3/4" J-Hook, Caddy #CAT12 or
equivalent.
Bundles up to 1-5/16" dia. (Fifty 1/4" cables) 1-5/16" J-Hook, Caddy #CAT21 or
equivalent.
Bundles up to 2" dia. (Eighty 1/4" cables) 2" J-Hook, Caddy #CAT32 or
equivalent.
Split bundles greater than 2" dia. or provide cable tray.
B. Do not mix different signal strength cables on the same J-Hook (i.e. intercom with
telephone/data cable). Multiple J-Hooks can be placed on the same attachment point,
up to the rated weight load of the attachment device.
2.14 COMMUNICATIONS CIRCUIT SURGE PROTECTION
A. Provide surge protection shall be provided for all exterior devices, communications
service, or antenna entrance connections, and for each circuit that connects one
building to another (i.e. any other portion of a building complex not under one
continuous roof) at both entry/exit points to prevent damage to equipment.
B. Each surge protector shall be mounted in a standard grounded metallic electric box
or equipment backboard with a separate ground wire ran directly to the ground bus
bar or equipment panel ground stud, do not daisy chain ground wires.
C. Surge protectors for low voltage communications signal and control circuits with a
data rate from 200kbps to 2Mbps, nominal voltage as listed below AC or DC. Each
module shall protect up to two pairs using hybrid design multi-stage SAD technology,
shall be Ditek 2MHLP series field replaceable modules with MB Series mounting
bases for one to five modules, or equivalent, model numbers as follows:
1. 70 to 75 Volt circuit, 4 wire protector with base DTK-2MHLP75BWB.
2. 48 to 50 Volt circuit, 4 wire protector with base DTK-2MHLP48BWB.
90 Percent
3. 36 Volt circuit, 4 wire protector with base DTK-2MHLP36BWB.

6. 0 to 6 Volt circuits, 4 wire protector with base DTK-2MHLP5BWB.
D. Surge protectors for Ethernet network runs rated up to Category 6A and operating at
up to 10-Gigabit data rates. Each module shall protect up all four pairs using hybrid
design multi-stage SAD technology which shall automatically reset to protect against
multiple surges, Ethernet surge protectors shall be Ditek DTK-CAT6A series as
follows:
1. DTK-110RJC6APOE with 110 to RJ-45 connections with PoE.
2. DTK-110C6APOE with 110 to 110 connections with PoE.
3. DTK-110RJC6A with 110 to RJ-45 connections without PoE.
4. DTK-110C6A with 110 to 110 connections without PoE.
E. Surge protectors for analog copper pair PSTN telephone service POTS/Trunk/C.O.
line alarm Digital Communicator service lines shall be Ditek DTK-2MHTPWB, or
equivalent, 2-pair/lines, maximum ring-up voltage 110V, includes base. In addition, At
Telco service connection demarcation point locations servicing an alarm Digital
Communicator, provide per line a Suttle Solutions Part # 635B-48, or equivalent,
RJ31X surface mount jack with 8-conductor screw terminal board input and factory
wired DATA and VOICE labeled, non-keyed RJ-45 output ports, with line seizure port
shorting bar (1&4, 5&8) for alarm reporting device service.
instructions.

oversize or irregular. Do not share wall penetrations with other types of ductwork,
piping, line voltage electrical conduits, communications cabling, etc.
90 Percent
only.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REVISION AND DEMOLITION OF THE EXISTING CLOCK SYSTEM FOR

RENOVATION
A. The clock contractor shall be responsible for selective removal and rework of portions
of the existing clock system. This shall also include demolition of any devices and
cable previously abandoned. Demolition shall include disconnection and removal of
all devices not to be reused and off-site disposal, in a legal manner, of all materials
not requested to be turned over to the Owner. Comply with government regulations
pertaining to environmental protection, and disposal of materials and equipment. Do
not burn any materials on the site.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing field conditions, circuiting arrangements, cabling, and devices served
in areas as shown on the Drawings. Adjust all circuiting, cabling, and materials to be
provided as required by job conditions.
B. Identify and verify abandoned equipment, wiring, and devices. All visible
disconnected or abandoned devices and cabling shall be removed i.e. non-functional
bells, speakers, call buttons, etc.
C. Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.
Report discrepancies to the Engineer before disturbing existing installation.
D. The Contractor accepts the existing conditions when beginning demolition.
90 Percent
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect clock devices in walls, floors, and ceilings as shown or required.
B. Provide temporary wiring and connections as required to maintain the operation of

existing systems during construction.
C. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel

experienced in such operations. Verify phasing on existing equipment and coordinate
new phasing before energizing revised service.
D. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new

construction as required.
E. Remove abandoned wiring to the source of the supply.
F. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit, brackets, stems,

hangers, and other accessories above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush
with walls, floors, and patch surfaces.
G. Disconnect and remove abandoned devices. Remove abandoned devices if conduit

servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned
devices that are removed in masonry construction.
H. Disconnect and remove clock devices and equipment serving equipment that has
been removed.
I. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension
work.
J. Confirm with Owner/Architect regarding the handling and disposal/reuse of removed

material, equipment, devices, etc.
A. When the phasing of a project requires that clock systems are operable in certain
areas and the Owner needs to operate the equipment, such provisions shall be made
by the contractor. The warranty period shall commence when the equipment is
operated for the beneficial use of the Owner. Regardless of whether or not the
by the Owner. The date of acceptance and the start of the warranty may not be the
same date.
3.5 OCCUPANCY ADJUSTMENTS
A. On-Site Assistance: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide

on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting transformer taps, and adjusting
controls to meet occupancy conditions. Provide up to three on-site assistance visits
within one year of Substantial Completion.
90 Percent
3.6 TESTING, CERTIFICATION, WARRANTY, SERVICE
A. A factory trained service technician shall supervise the final connections and testing
of the system and it shall be subject to the final acceptance of the Architect, Engineer,
and local authorities. Testing shall ensure the following:
1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test
for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.
B. Upon completion of the testing, the manufacturer or his representative shall issue to
the Owner a letter of certification attesting to the fact that he has tested and adjusted
the system, that all components are properly installed and free of defects, and that
the system is in compliance with this specification.
C. The contractor shall provide a warranty and service contract for the installed system.
The warranty shall be against defects in material or workmanship for a period of one
(1) year from the date of substantial completion. Any equipment or wiring shown to
be defective shall be replaced, repaired, or adjusted free of charge. All labor and
materials shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. All equipment will carry a
one year warranty or manufacturer's warranty whichever is greater.
D. The service contract shall provide a minimum of the following:

1. Diagnostics of the system should a problem occur.
2. The Clock Systems Contractor will provide service software upgrades to the
system that become effective during the period of the service contract.
E. The contractor shall make available a service contract offering continuing factory
authorized service of this system after the initial warranty period. This contract shall
automatically renew each year at the owner's discretion. Contractor will provide the
cost of renewal to the owner thirty (30) days prior to the expiration of the contract after
the first year.
F. The system manufacturer shall maintain engineering and service departments

G. The contractor shall provide a warranty and service contract for all system devices.
The warranty shall be against defects in material or workmanship for a period of one
(1) year from the date of substantial completion. Any equipment or wiring shown to
be defective shall be replaced, repaired, or adjusted free of charge. All labor and
materials shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. All equipment will carry a
one year warranty or manufacturer's warranty whichever is greater.
H. The contractor shall provide a warranty and service contract for all newly installed
system devices. The warranty shall be against defects in material or workmanship for
a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. Any new equipment
or wiring shown to be defective shall be replaced, repaired, or adjusted free of charge.
All labor and materials shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. All new
90 Percent
equipment will carry a one year warranty or manufacturer's warranty whichever is

greater.
A. The contractor shall furnish complete operating and maintenance manuals listing the
manufacturer's name(s), including technical data sheets. Manuals shall include wiring
diagrams to indicate internal wiring for each device and the interconnections between
the items of equipment. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that
gives, in detail, the information required to properly operate the equipment and
system. Provide a parts list with manufacturer and model number for commonly
replaced parts. Include complete instructions for the inspection, testing, and
maintenance of the system. Include copies of all programming sheets used to
configure the system.
B. The Contractor shall conduct formal on-site training sessions. Provide documented
general instruction as follows:
Provide a minimum of four (4) hours--two 2-hour sessions separated by a
minimum of two weeks.
2. Provide instruction to designated personnel on the functions and operation of the
master clock system including emergency and service request procedures.
Provide a minimum of four (4) hours--two 2-hour sessions separated by a
END SECTION
Argyle
ArgyleElementary
ElementarySchool No.#4
School 4 Project 22296.0000
90 Percent
90% Review Progress Set 20 April 2023
SECTION 28 05 00
GENERAL ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDES
B. Electronic Safety and Security Systems complete, including new equipment and
devices to be installed, special backboxes, cabling, structured cabling systems and
supports, hardware and all other required devices, equipment and systems
programming for complete and functioning systems.
C. Installation of system equipment per specifications.
D. Supply in a timely manner to the Electrical Contractor special backboxes for
installation as required.
E. Coordinate conduits, raceways, power, and outlet requirements with the builder and
the electrical contractor.
F. Furnishing of all required materials, equipment, tools, scaffolding, labor, and
transportation necessary for the complete installation of the Electronic Safety and
Security systems as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
G. It is the intent of these specifications to provide complete installations although every
item necessary may not be specifically mentioned or shown.
1.2 WORK TO BE INCLUDED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IN BASE CONTRACT
PROPOSAL
A. Provide utility services conduit as outlined on drawings as required.
B. All required conduit for accessibility to attic space.
C. Furnishing and installation of all required standard back boxes and conduit.
D. Installation of special back boxes supplied by Division 28 contractor(s).
E. Furnishing and installation of all floor boxes, surface raceways, and other wireways
which are detailed or specified under Division 26.
F. Provide equipment-mounting boards as outlined on drawings.
G. Provide equipment grounding system, conductors, and bus bars and as outlined in
Division 26.
H. Provide 120-volt power and connections to equipment provided in Division 28.
I. Coordination of requirements of Division 28 with the Builder.
General Electronic Safety and Security System Requirements 28 05 00 - 1

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent

providing communications, monitoring, or other services.
B. Contractors shall not make selection, purchase, or installation of interconnect
instruments and/or equipment to be used on this project.
A. The conditions of the Division 0, Division 1, Division 26 requirements, and the
contract requirements that include the General Conditions and the Supplementary
Conditions apply to work of this division.
B. Section 26 05 34 - Provisions for Communication, Security and Safety Systems.
1.5 CODES, STANDARDS, AND THEIR ABBREVIATIONS
A. General:
1. Perform all work in strict accordance with the requirements and
are exceeded by the contract documents.
2. In addition to the requirements outlined in other sections of the specifications the
a. OSHA Safety and Health Regulations for Construction.
b. NFPA No. 70 National Electrical Code.
c. NESC National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI Standard C2.
d. NEiS National Electrical Installation Standards.
e. Local Codes and Ordinances.
B. Where local codes or practices exceed or conflict with the NEC, it shall be the
Contractor`s responsibility to perform the work in accordance with the local code
C. Materials and components shall be UL listed and labeled by Underwriters
D. The Contractor shall obtain all permits required to commence work. Upon completion
of the Work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner's Representative a
Certificate of Inspection and Approval from the State Board of Fire Underwriters, the
City of Northlake, Texas, and other authorities having jurisdiction. The Contractor
shall pay required permit fees.
1.6 ASSOCIATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. Associations and Standards:
1. ADA Standards: Americans with Disabilities Act.
2. ANSI: American National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway; New York, NY
10018.
3. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street;
4. BICSI: (RCDD5 Standards), 8610 Hidden River Parkway, Tampa, FL 33637.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
5. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, 345 East 47th Street;
New York, NY 10017.
6. ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association, P.O. Box P, South Yarmouth, MA
02664.
7. NEC: National Electrical Code; NFPA No. 70.
8. NECA: National Electrical Contractors Association, Inc., 7315 Wisconsin Ave.,
9. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 155 East 44th Street; New
York, NY 10017.
10. NESC: National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI Standard C2.
11. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association, 60 Batterymarch Street; Boston, MA
02110.
12. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration, US Department of Labor;
13. TAS: Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) Article 9102.
14. UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 333 Pfigsten Road; Northbrook, IL 60062.
B. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed to permit work not conforming
to these codes.
C. When two or more codes or standards are applicable to the same work, then the
D. The date of the code or standard is that in effect on the date of issue stated on the
contract documents, except when a particular publication date is specified.
E. The Contractor shall comply with all State, Federal, NFPA, local codes and
F. Where local codes and ordinances are not in writing or on record but local
1.7 DEFINITIONS
B. The Builder: The primary contractor engaged to oversee the construction project.
They may be technically described as a Construction Manager, General Contractor,
Managing Construction Contractor, et cetera.
C. The Contractor: The Contractor engaged to execute the work included a particular
section only, although he may be technically described as a Subcontractor to the
Builder. If the Contractor, engaged to execute said work, employs Sub-Contractors to
perform various portions of the work included under a particular Section, they shall be
held responsible for the execution of this work, in full conformity with Contract
Document requirements. The Contractor shall cooperate at all times and shall be
responsible for the satisfactory cooperation of his Subcontractors with the other
Contractors on the job so that all of the various sections and phases of work may be
properly coordinated without unnecessary delays or damage.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
D. The Electrical Contractor: The Electrical Contractor shall be engaged to execute the
work included Division 26 only.
E. PDF file or .pdf: The filename extension associated with “Portable Document Format”
files, which are multi-platform computer files in the ISO 32000-1:2008 open standard
format developed and licensed by Adobe Systems. These files are a digital electronic
representation of text, documents, images, and technical drawings in a font and color-
accurate fixed-layout format that is platform and display resolution independent. PDF
files can be electronically transmitted, viewed, or printed with various free PDF reader
application programs, and may allow markups/comments with various PDF editing
application programs.
F. Provide: Defined as requiring both the furnishing and installation of the item or facility
specifically noted.
1.8 SCHEDULE OF VALUES, APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. The Contractor shall in accordance with the General Provisions of the Contract,
including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1, complete a
Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment. When a portion of this work
separately funded, including donations or E-Rate, the contractor shall accommodate
this in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment. For E-Rate eligible
portions of this work, the contractor will be required to participate in the E-Rate
program, comply with all E-Rate regulations, and provide billing as needed. The
contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to file Form 471 or latter edition and/or
other forms as may be required.
1.9 WARRANTY
C. He shall remedy any defects due thereto, and pay for any damage to other work
resulting there from, which shall appear within a period of one year from date of
E. This Warranty shall not be construed to include the normal maintenance of the
1.10 SITE VISIT
A. Before submitting a proposal, each proposed contractor shall examine all plans and
specifications relating to the work, shall visit the site of the project, and become fully
informed of the extent and character of the work required, including all required
utilities.
be furnished or the amount of work to be done, it being fully understood that the
tender of a proposal carries with it the agreement to all items and conditions referred

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
to herein, or indicated on the accompanying plans or required by nature of the site of

1.11 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal procedures shall be per Division 1 - General Requirements.
B. Provide a complete submittal for each section as specified.
C. Submit complete submittal package within 30 calendar days after award of this work
D. A submittal may be electronically transmitted in PDF file format (preferred) or paper
E. Each Product data submittal shall include:
6. When the contract requires extended product warranties, submit a sample of
warranty language.
F. Submit shop or coordination drawings, when specified or the required for the scope of
work, which include information that will allow to the Contractor to coordinate
producing the product. Shop or coordination drawings shall be specifically prepared to
illustrate the submitted portion of work, this may require diagrams, schedules, details,
and accurate to scale equipment and device layouts prepared using a CAD or BIM
engineering drawing program.
G. The Engineer`s review of submittals is only for confirmation of adherence to design of
project and does not relieve the Contractor of final responsibility for furnishing all
materials required for a complete working system and in complying with the Contract
Documents in all respects.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent

A. Upon submitting his request for final payment, he shall turn over to the Architect, for
subsequent transmittal to the Owner revised plans showing "as installed" work.
B. In addition to the above, the Contractor shall accumulate during the jobs progress the
following data in PDF file format (preferred) or paper copies to be turned over to the
Architect for checking and subsequent delivery to the Owner:
1. All warranties, guarantees, and manufacturer`s directions on equipment and
2. PDF file or paper copies of all Shop Drawing prints and CAD or BIM engineering
drawing program files.
3. Any software programs, data/programming files, passwords, special interface
cables, or keys that may be needed to maintain or access equipment.
6. Repair parts lists of all major items and equipment including name, address, and
8. Builder and all Contractors.
9. Major Equipment Suppliers
10. Submit communication systems warranties.
1.13 TRAINING
A. Upon completion of the work and at a time designated by the Architect, provide formal
training sessions for the Owner`s operating personnel to include location, operation,
and maintenance of all Electronic Safety and Security systems equipment and
systems.
B. See other sections for time requirements.
extent of work.
indicated. Provide Electronic Safety and Security systems (including all hook-ups)
complete in every respect and ready to operate.
D. If clarification is needed, consult the Architect.
immediately notify the Architect for his interpretation.
F. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in the location of any
part of this work without additional cost to the Owner.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
1.15 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Descriptions and details, acceptable manufacturers` names listed, and specific
addendum. Otherwise, where a specific manufacturer`s product is indicated, products
B. Proposed contractors wishing to propose systems which differ in manufacturer,
features, functions, or operating characteristics from those outlined in these
must include detailed information showing all deviations from the system as specified
and include relevant technical and cost data. This shall include a complete description
of the proposed substitution, drawings, catalog cuts, performance data, test data, or
any other data or information necessary for evaluation.
D. The Engineer will consider all such submittals and the Architect will issue an
addendum listing items that the Engineer considers acceptable. Only such items as
E. Substitute products for which the proposed contractor does not obtain prior approval
will not be considered acceptable for this project. Final approval of the alternate
system shall be based on the decision of the Owner and Architect. Prior approval to
make a proposal for this project does not automatically ensure the system will be an
acceptable equivalent.
F. The Contractors’ proposal represents that the contract proposal price is based solely
upon the materials, equipment, and labor described in the Contract Proposal
Documents (including addenda, if any) and that he contemplates no substitutions or
extras.
G. The manufacturer of the proposed substitute unit shall provide samples for
evaluation, when required, at no charge and non-returnable.
specified.
3. Will, at no cost to the Owner, replace the substitute item with the specified
product if the substitute item fails to perform satisfactorily.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent

8. Subsequent information indicates that the specified product is unable to perform
properly or to fit in the designated space.
9. In the Engineer`s sole judgment, the substitution would be in the Owner`s best
interest.
10. Revisions to the electrical system caused by substitutions shall be under the
supervision of the Architect, at a standard hourly rate charged by the Engineer.
Charges from the Architect, Engineer and Electrical Contractor shall be paid by
the Contractor originating the changes.
1.16 FUTURE USE CABLING
A. When cabling is installed for future use, it shall be identified with a tag of sufficient
durability to withstand the environment involved.
B. Locations and Existing Conditions:
1. Location and condition of any existing equipment or services, when shown, have
been obtained from substantially reliable sources, are shown as a general guide
only, without guarantees as to accuracy.
2. The Contractor will examine the site, verify all requirements, service points, and
availability of all services required to complete this project. No consideration will
be granted for any alleged misunderstanding of the materials and labor to be
provided as necessitated by nature of the site including those items that may be
fairly implied as essential to the execution and completion of any and all parts of
this project.
1.17 OPERATION OF NEW EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO PROJECT COMPLETION
A. When the phasing of a project requires that electronic safety and security systems are
operable in certain areas and the Owner needs to operate the equipment the
contractor shall make such provisions. The warranty period shall commence on new
equipment when it is operated for the beneficial use of the Owner. Regardless of
whether or not the equipment has or has not been operated, the Contractor shall
properly clean the equipment, properly adjust, and complete all punch list items
before final acceptance by the Owner. In these cases, the date of acceptance and the
start of the warranty may be different dates.
A. The Contractor shall take such precautions as may be necessary to protect his
apparatus from damage.
B. This shall include the creation of all required temporary shelters to protect any
apparatus above the floor of the construction and the covering of apparatus in the
completed building with tarpaulins or other protective covering.
C. Failure to comply with the above to the satisfaction of the Owner`s inspector will be
replacement by the Contractor.
1.19 FINAL OBSERVATION
A. It shall be the duty of the Contractor to make a careful observation trip of the entire
project, assuring themselves that the work on the project is ready for final acceptance

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
before calling upon the Architect to make a final observation.

B. To avoid delay of final acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall have all
necessary bonds, warranties, receipts, affidavits, et cetera, called for in the various
articles of these specifications, prepared and signed in advance, together with a letter
of transmittal, listing each paper included, and shall deliver the same to the
Architect at or before the time of said final observation. The Contractor is cautioned to
check over each bond, receipt, et cetera, before preparing for submission to verify
that the terms check with the requirements of the specifications.
C. The following and other provision of Division 1 General Conditions will be required at
time of final completion:
2. All systems are fully operational, all material and devices installed.
3. As built (as installed) drawings and operations manuals.
1.20 PROHIBITED MATERIALS
A. No new asbestos, lead, or materials containing these substances shall be permitted
in this project. The Contractor shall consult the Architect concerning these materials if
their presence is suspected. All work in or around existing asbestos or lead materials
is at the sole risk of the Contractor and his personnel.
A. Notify the Builder sufficiently ahead of construction of any floors, walls, ceiling, roof, et
cetera, of any openings that will be required for his work.
or at the Subcontractor`s expense in a neat and workmanlike manner, and as
approved by the Architect.
D. Patching of openings and/or alterations shall be provided by the Electronic Safety and
Security Subcontractor or at the Subcontractor`s expense in an approved manner.
obtaining written permission of the Architect.
1.22 MANUFACTURERS` INSTRUCTIONS
specifications, manufacturer`s instructions, and applicable codes.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent

manufacturer`s instructions and/or where manufacturer`s instructions are required for
installation of a product, it shall be the contractor`s responsibility to obtain the
necessary applicable manufacturer`s instructions and install the product in
accordance with the manufacturer`s instructions.
C. It shall be the Contractor`s responsibility to install all equipment, materials, and
manufacturer`s instructions are absolutely unattainable.
1.23 INSTALLATION
B. The Electronic Safety and Security Contractor shall coordinate installation of the
Electronic Safety and Security systems with the Builder, Electrical, Mechanical, and
Plumbing Contractors to ensure a complete working system for the Owner.
C. Where required for accessibility all conduit and boxes for all Electronic Safety and
Security systems shall be provided by the Electrical contractor as specified, including
systems in Division 28, any and all allowances shall be included. Normally low
voltage wiring shall run open and supported in accessible attic space. All low voltage
wiring in exposed areas such as gyms, stages, shops, and field houses shall be
enclosed in conduit. Coordinate with, and verify with Division 26 to provide required
conduit and boxes at locations and heights as required.
pathways.
G. Provide stainless screw/bolt hardware wherever stainless devices are used and in
potentially wet areas.
H. Coordinate the actual locations of devices and outlets and equipment with building

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
1.24 ADDITIONAL MATERIALS: INCLUDE IN THE BASE CONTRACT PROPOSAL

A. All costs to provide five (5) additional electronic safety and security system devices
including all cable and devices as directed by the Architect. Conduit and standard
back boxes by Division 26 Electrical Contractor.
B. All costs to provide five (5) additional fire alarm system signaling line circuit (SLC)
devices including all cable and devices as directed by the Architect. Conduit and
standard back boxes by Division 26 Electrical Contractor.
C. All costs to provide five (5) additional fire alarm system notification devices including
all cable and devices as directed by the Architect. Conduit and standard back boxes
by Division 26 Electrical Contractor.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT APPLICABLE
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 NOT APPLICABLE
END OF SECTION

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
SECTION 28 05 44
EMERGENCY RESPONDER RADIO COVERAGE SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDES
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 apply to this Section.
B. Provide preliminary testing, design, furnish, install, and final field test a complete and
operating in-building Distributed Antenna System (‘System’ or ‘DAS’) to provide
complete coverage for emergency responder portable radios as required by the local
fire department and the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). The system will support
only Emergency Responder and Public Safety Land Mobile Radios (‘LMR’). The
system shall not support District Radio, Cellular, and/or Wi-Fi Signals.
C. All aspects of this scope of work shall comply with the International Fire Code (IFC)
Section 510 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for the project. Refer to the
AHJ for the current adopted edition of the IFC and of any local amendments to the
code.
D. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or
incidental to the installation of a complete Emergency Responder Radio Coverage
System. The purpose is to extend and amplify the emergency responder radio signal
to a strength of -95dBm or better in all areas of the facility including command
centers, fire pump rooms, elevators, stairwells and all floors. The building shall be
considered to have acceptable signal strength coverage when 95% coverage is
achieved on each floor.
E. It shall be the responsibility of the Emergency Responder Radio Coverage System
contractor to obtain all required permits, approvals and certifications from the
authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ).
F. All fees associated with the licensing shall be paid by the Contractor.
G. Testing of the system shall conform to the testing requirements as described in the
International Fire Code (IFC) Section 510.5.3 Acceptance Test Procedure.
H. All testing must be done on frequencies authorized by the FCC and in use by local
agencies as directed by the AHJ.
I. Final acceptance and approval shall be required from the AHJ.
J. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to provide if licensed, or to contract with
a Licensed Electrical contractor to provide, installation of all conduit and raceway
systems, standard electrical boxes for the systems as outlined on the project
drawings. This Contractor shall coordinate all system requirements with and provide
special back boxes to the Electrical Contractor prior to installation of conduit. These
expenses will not be included in the electrical contractor primary bid.
Emergency Responder Radio Coverage System 28 05 44 - 1

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
K. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to provide if licensed, or to contract with

a Licensed Electrical contractor to provide 120-volt power through separate dedicated
branch circuits, maximum 20 amperes each. Each such circuit shall be labeled at the
power distribution panel as EMERGENCY RESPONDER RADIO SYSTEM. The
location of all circuit breakers serving the Emergency Responder Radio Coverage
System shall be posted in the control unit cabinets. Each cabinet and all surge
protection devices shall be grounded securely to the building grounding system.
These expenses will not be included in the electrical contractor primary bid.
L. Provide all testing, documentation, training, and warranty service contract as outlined
in these specifications.
A. Section 26 05 34 - Provisions for Communication, Security and Safety Systems.
B. Section 28 05 00 - General Electronic Safety and Security System Requirements.
C. Section 28 46 21 - Fire Detection and Alarm System (Performance Specification)
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Attenuation: The reduction in signal power, expressed in decibels, as a result of
coupling, heat loss, or transmission distance in a cable or in air.
B. Bi-Directional Amplifier (BDA): A device used to amplify band-selective or multi-band
RF signals in the uplink, to the base station for enhanced signals and improved
coverage. Also known as a signal booster.
C. Coupled Bonding Conductor (CBC): a bonding conductor placed on the outside of
any technology cable. Used to suppress transient noise.
D. Delivered Audio Quality (DAQ) Definitions: The universal standard often cited in
system design, specifications, and testing reports for DAS.
1. DAQ 1: Unusable, speech present but not intelligible.
2. DAQ 2: Understandable with considerable effort. Frequent repetition required
due to noise and/or distortion.
3. DAQ 3: Speech understandable with slight effort. Occasional repetition required
due to noise and/or distortion.
4. DAQ 3.5: Speech understandable with repetition only rarely required. Some
noise and/or distortion
5. DAQ 4: Speech easily understood. Occasional noise and/or distortion.
6. DAQ 4.5: Speech easily understood. Infrequent noise and/or distortion.
7. DAQ 5: Speech easily understood.
E. Distributed Antenna System (DAS): A network of service antennas connected at
intervals along shielded coaxial transmission lines and all connected to head-end
electronics amplifying the signals to be distributed. Often refers to a system that
includes both the passive distribution system and the active amplifying electronics.
F. Directional Coupler: A component which directs a small portion of downstream RF
energy to a port which can be connected to an antenna or another branch of
distribution cabling, and also serves as a combiner of upstream energy between the
tap port and through the connection port.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
G. Donor Antenna: The antenna, usually mounted on the outside of a structure where a
DAS is installed, which picks up signals over-the-air from a donor source.
H. Donor Source: The repeater, transceiver, cell site, or other radio site that produces
signals which a DAS will relay and distribute.
I. Emergency Responder Radio Coverage System (ERRCS): A two-way radio
communication system installed to assure the effective operation and coverage of
radio communications systems for fire, emergency medical services, and/or law
enforcement agencies within a building or structure. The system is not designed for
use with District LMR, Cellular Services, or Wi-Fi Services.
J. Federal Communications Commission (FCC): federal agency responsible for
implementing and enforcing America’s communications laws and regulations.
K. Near-far Effect: a situation where a handheld radio that is closer to an antenna, when
keyed, takes signal strength away from a handheld radio that is farther from the same
antenna.
L. OET 65 Standards: The FCC’s Bulletin that provides Guidelines for Human Exposure
to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields.
M. Public Safety and/or First Responder: agencies which are charged with the
responsibility of responding to emergency situations. These include, but are not
limited to, law enforcement, fire departments, and emergency medical services.
N. Reflected Power: Power which is reflected back along a transmission line as a result
of discontinuities in line impedance caused at connectors or close proximity of
metallic objects.
O. Radio Frequency (RF): Energy from electromagnetic waves, or alternating currents
that produce electromagnetic waves, in the spectrum of radio frequencies (30 kHz to
300GHz)
P. Signal Booster: See Bi-Directional Amplifier (BDA).
Q. Splitter: A passive component that has a single input port and two or more output
ports, effectively splitting the signal equally amongst the output ports. It also serves
to combine upstream signals from the “output” ports into composite signals at the
“input” port.
contract documents.
applicable codes, standards and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including
the following:
1. NFPA 1 - The National Fire Code (including Annex O from 2009)
2. NFPA 70 - The National Electrical Code
3. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code
4. NFPA 1221 - Standard for the Installation, Maintenance and Use of Emergency
Services Communication Systems

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
5. UL 2524 - Standard for In-building 2-Way Emergency Radio Communication

Enhancement Systems
6. FCC 47 CFR - Private Land Mobile Radio
7. FCC 47 90.219-2007 - Services-Use of Signal Boosters
8. IFC 2015 - International Fire Code
9. ADA “Americans with Disabilities Act”
10. FCC’s OET 65 Standards “Guidelines for Human Exposure to Radio Frequency
Electromagnetic Fields”
11. FCC Rules Part 22, Part 90, and Part 101
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit a complete submittal package within 30 calendar days, for approval, after
award of this work. Equipment is not to be ordered without approval. Partial
submittals are not acceptable for review. Each submittal shall include a dated
transmittal.
D. For each submittal provide a cover sheet with the name and location of the project,
the name, address and telephone number of the Contractor, and the name, address
and telephone number of the submitting sub-contractor. Include on or after the cover
sheet sufficient space for review stamps.
E. Quality Assurance:
1. Letter from manufacturer stating that the Contractor is an Authorized Factory
Distributor for the area where the project is located.
2. Copies of FCC Licenses for both the Designer and Project Manager.
3. The Contractor and Manufacturer shall supply sufficient information to indicate
that the proposed system is based on the latest hardware, software technology
and products comply with specified requirements and FCC Regulations.
4. The system described in the submittals shall be certified by an FCC Licensed
Designer and installation shall be supervised by an FCC Licensed Project
Manager.
F. Product Data:
submitted for approval the manufacturers name and part number including
compatibility, standards compliance and other relevant characteristics of each
product on the equipment list. Indicate by prominent notation (an arrow, circle or
other means) on each sheet the exact product and options being submitted for
approval.
3. Indicate by prominent notation (an arrow, circle, or other means) on each sheet
the exact product and options being submitted.
4. Submit design data when the scope of work requires, including passband curves
for both uplink and downlink for all bands, calculations, schematics, risers,
sequences or other data.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent

7. Any rejected submittals must be corrected and resubmitted to the AHJ and
Architect/Engineer within 10 days of receipt of the rejected material.
G. Shop Drawings:
1. Locate all equipment and components of the system, conduit placement, circuit
routing, cable type, and gauge.
2. Illustrate the submitted portion of work, this may require diagrams, schedules,
details, risers, floor plans and accurate to scale, (minimum of 1/8” = 1’-0”),
equipment and device layouts prepared using a CAD or BIM engineering
drawing program.
3. Information that will allow the Contractor to coordinate interdisciplinary work and
when necessary guide the manufacturer or fabricator in producing the product.
H. Testing:
1. Submit all field test records of the radio systems. These shall include, but not be
limited to:
a. Preconstruction Tests: Performed with the AHJ prior to construction of the
new facility to verify that the Emergency Responder Radio System has
signal coverage in that area.
b. Mid-Construction Tests: Performed with the AHJ during construction, once
walls and glazing have been constructed and the exterior roof is installed.
1) Final Tests: Performed in conforming with IFC Section 510.5.3 and
Section 510.6. This testing is to be approved by the AHJ. Engineers
shall also be present for the final testing process.
2. All testing records shall be submitted with O&M information and close-out
documents.
designated representative of the emergency responder radio coverage system
manufacturer, with full warranty privileges, and shall have been actively engaged in
the business of selling, installing, and servicing emergency responder radio coverage
systems for a period of at least 5 years.
D. The Contractor shall employ factory trained technicians capable of supporting the
training shall be provided with the Contractors submittal.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
E. The contractor shall employ full time local technicians and installers. The
manufacturer shall maintain a full-time factory employed service staff for product
support and service.
F. The proposed Contractor shall have an office within 150-miles of the job site, staffed
with trained technicians who are qualified and licensed to supervise the installation, to
be responsible that the system is installed as submitted, to conduct system start up
and perform a 100 percent operational audit of all installed devices, to instruct the
throughout the warranty period.
G. All testing shall be conducted, documented and signed by a person in possession of
an FCC General Radio Telephone Operators License and be a full-time employee of
contractor.
H. The proposed contractor shall be fully experienced in the design and installation of
the type of system herein specified and shall furnish with the contract proposal an
at least two (2) projects within a 150-mile radius of the project to allow prospective
Owners to visit the job site for review of the system installation and service. Each
reference project listed must utilize equipment by the same manufacturer as the
proposed system.
I. The Proposed Contractor shall not have any grievances or complaints of record
Contractor that has any prior finding(s) of a code or license violation or has any
litigation in process concerning the installation of a system is unacceptable.
J. The ability of a proposed Contractor to obtain plans and provide a performance bond
K. The Builder shall be satisfied that a proposed Contractor meets all the requirements
L. The Owner may investigate, as they deem necessary to determine the ability of the
M. The Owner reserves the right to reject any contract proposal if the evidence
N. The Owner reserves the right to reject the proposal of any Contractor who has
nature.
1.7 SYSTEM PRICING, PHASING AND AWARD
A. Contractor shall provide a proposal for new installation based on separate pricing for
each of the following steps as outlined below:

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
1. Step One - site test: This price shall include verifying the outdoor signal strength
at the facility’s location. When there is no signal the following steps are not
required.
2. Step Two - full test (in accordance with IFC Section 510, Grid Testing): This
price shall include verification of signal strength throughout the entire facility.
3. Step Three - complete system installation price: This price shall include a full
system design and installation, including costs for permit, design, components,
materials, labor and testing. This pricing shall be for a complete system
throughout the facility for budgeting purposes. When the building envelope is
substantially complete the “Step Two” test shall be performed to determine the
final design. A revised installation price shall then be proposed.
B. The project must be budgeted as a complete set of processes, thus the reason for the
three-step pricing prior to performing any work. This pricing will provide a budget
before the work begins.
C. The award of the work will be made in phases, in accordance with the three (3) steps
outlined above. The phases are:
1. Phase I award authorizes step one. Once step one is completed, results are to
be provided to the General Contractor, Architect, and Engineer for review.
Following this review, step two may be delayed, pending adjustment to the
donor signal. If donor signal strength at the facility does not meet IFC Section
510 requirements, the AHJ must be consulted, prior to moving to step two. If the
donor signal strength is adequate to meet IFC Section 510 requirements,
authorization for step two will be given.
2. The Phase II award authorizes step two. Testing of the facility to determine
signal strength status and to provide a base for a full system design. Step two
testing shall only be authorized to be completed when the building exterior walls,
glazing, interior walls and HVAC duct and electrical systems are in place.
Basically, all building components that will affect a portable radio transmission
are installed. Testing shall be completed as follows:
a. Full building test (in accordance with IFC Section 510 Grid Testing and AHJ
adopted codes) of the public safety RF signal strength throughout the entire
facility.
b. Testing shall be accomplished by the use of a calibrated spectrum analyzer
measurement tool. The spectrum analyzer shall be an RF Explorer or
equivalent instrument.
c. Testing shall include capturing and recording the public safety spectrum and
individual channel RSSI measurements throughout the building.
d. Provide the full testing documentation and data from the spectrum analyzer
showing each grid area pass/fail for the building.
e. Provide a building floor plan layout of the testing grid with plotted testing
results showing signal strength, color coded, with a minimum of three
parameters to include:
1) Red color, -95dBm or weaker, below signal strength threshold, radios
unlikely to key up, reception unachievable.
2) Yellow color, at or slightly above signal strength threshold, radios likely
to key up, reception on certain channels, some distortion in DAQ.
3) Green color, -95dBm or stronger, above signal strength threshold,
radios likely key up, reception on all channels, minimum distortion in
DAQ.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
f. Provide one digital copy of all testing documentation and data, in pdf format,
for all areas of the building.
g. After testing, a final revised proposal for a full system design, installation and
final testing shall be issued to the General Contractor for review. No further
work is authorized until award of Phase III is granted.
3. Phase III award authorizes step three. Final design, installation, and final testing
of the Emergency Responder Radio Coverage System. Provide a code
compliant design and system installation. The final system shall be tested for
compliance per IFC 510 and the AHJ.
1.8 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available integrators offering products that
may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to:
1. Farenhyt
2. Westell
3. Gamewell-FCI
4. Notifier
5. SOLiD Technologies
6. Other manufacturers upon approval.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The system shall conform to the requirements as identified in IFC Section 510.4 and
Section 510.5. Testing records are required to confirm performance of the system.
B. Compatibility: The equipment, including but not limited to repeaters, transmitters,
receivers, signal boosters, cabling, fiber distributed antenna systems, etc., shall not
interfere with the existing communication systems utilized by the Public Safety and
First Responder agencies.
C. Power Supplies: At least two (2) independent and reliable power supplies shall be
provided: one primary and one secondary. The primary power source shall be
supplied from a dedicated 20-ampere branch circuit and comply with 10.6.5 of NFPA
72. The secondary power source shall be a dedicated battery back-up, capable of
operating the in-building system for at least 12 hours at 100% operation. The battery
system shall automatically charge in the presence of external power input. The
battery system shall be contained in one NEMA 3R or higher rated type enclosure.
Monitoring the integrity of the power supplies shall be in accordance with 10.6.9 of
NFPA 72.
D. Equipment and Circuit Protection:
1. Fire Performance: All main risers or trunks of the antenna system shall be
installed with resistance to attack from fire using one of the following methods:
a. A 2-hour fire rated cable or cable system.
b. Routing the cable through a 2-hour fire rated enclosure(s) or shaft(s).
2. Cabinet: The signal booster and all associated equipment shall be housed in a
single NEMA 4 certified, painted steel weather tight box. The cabinet shall be
large enough to dissipate internal heat without venting from inside of the cabinet
to outside atmosphere. Equipment installed on the roof of structures shall be
rated for the expected extreme temperature and weather associated with rooftop

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
installation.
3. Batteries that require venting shall be in a NEMA 3R type enclosure.
4. The BDA location shown on the drawings is for reference only. The BDA location
may change due to the emergency public radio signal strength in relation to the
building. Where an alternative location is required for optimum performance of
the BDA and the Yagi antenna, and the system in general, coordinate with the
Architect for approval of the BDA and exterior Yagi antenna relocation.
5. Rooftop Installations shall require a Pitch Pocket for proper weather-tight roof
penetrations.
2.2 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Signal Strength
1. The emergency responder radio coverage system signal strength shall meet all
the requirements of inbound and outbound signal strength per IFC 510.4.1.
2. Signal strength and coverage shall meet all requirements of the local fire officials
and AHJ.
B. Permissible Systems
1. Buildings and structures shall be equipped with an FCC Certified Class B Bi-
Directional VHF, UHF, and 700-900 MHz amplifier(s) as needed.
2. The distributed antenna system may utilize a radiating cable, fixed antennas, or
a combination of both.
C. Supported Frequencies: The system shall support VHF, UHF, and 700-900 MHz as
required for local public safety and first responder bands as utilized by the local fire
service.
D. Degraded Performance in Emergencies: The system shall be designed to allow
degraded performance in adverse conditions, such as abnormally high temperatures
resulting from nearby fires, extreme voltage fluctuations and/or other abnormal
conditions that may occur during an emergency. Circuits that intentionally disable the
signal booster in such situations (i.e. under/over voltage, over/under current,
over/under temperature, etc.) shall not be implemented as the standard mode for
public safety applications.
E. Mode of Operation: The system shall be normally powered on and shall continuously
provide passing of frequencies within the Public Safety and First Responder bands.
F. All in-building radio systems shall be compatible with both analog and digital
communications simultaneously at the time of installation.
2.3 SYSTEM MONITORING
A. The emergency responder radio coverage system shall include connections to the fire
alarm system to monitor the operational integrity of the signal booster, power supplies
and annunciate malfunctions by a listed fire alarm control unit. Coordinate and
provide this integration, as part of this system, with the fire alarm system contractor
that is authorized to service the facility’s fire alarm system. The integration of the
emergency responder radio coverage system with the fire alarm system shall comply
with Chapter 10.14 of NFPA 72. The automatic monitored conditions shall include the
following:
1. Loss of normal AC power supply.
2. System battery charger(s) failure.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
3. Malfunction of the donor antenna(s).

4. Failure of active RF-emitting device(s).
5. Low-battery capacity at 70-percent reduction of operating capacity.
6. Failure of critical system components.
7. The communications link between the fire alarm system and the emergency
responder radio coverage system.
B. A sign shall be located at the fire alarm panel with the name and telephone number of
the local municipality indicating that they shall be notified of any failures that extend
past the 2-hour time limit.
C. A dedicated supervised monitoring panel shall be provided within the emergency
command center or other location as designated by AHJ to annunciate the status of
all emergency responder radio coverage component locations. The monitoring panel
shall provide visual and labeled indication of the following for each signal booster:
1. Normal AC power
2. Loss of Normal AC Power
3. Battery Charger Failure
4. Low-battery Capacity
5. Donor Antenna Failure
6. Active RF-emitting Device Malfunction
7. Active System Component Malfunction
A. System wiring, and equipment installation shall be in accordance with good
engineering practices. Wiring shall meet all state and local electrical code
requirements.
B. Wires and cables shall enter each equipment enclosure, console, cabinet or rack in
such a manner that all doors or access panels can be opened and closed without
removal or disruption of the cables.
C. Cable pathways, conduit, and cable support systems shall be complete with
D. Before energizing the system check all cables for correct connections and test for
short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.
E. In all exposed areas such as mechanical rooms, parking garages, stairwells, etc.,
cable shall be fully enclosed in conduit.
F. Do not attach any supports to joist bridging or other lightweight members. The
support system shall provide a protective pathway to eliminate stress that could
damage the cabling.
G. Mount all equipment firmly in place such that vibration or jarring will not interfere with
system operation. Route cable in a professional, neat, and orderly installation.
H. The cable shall not be crushed, deformed, skinned, crimped, twisted, or formed into
tight radius bends that could compromise the integrity of the cabling.
I. Cable must not be fastened to electrical conduits, mechanical ductwork or piping,
sprinkler pipes, or routed to obstruct access to hatches, doors, utility access panels,
or service work areas. Do not route cables through fire doors, ventilation shafts,

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
grates, or parallel for more than four-feet with line voltage electrical conductors.
System cables shall not be run loose on ceiling grid or ceiling tiles.
J. Provide for adequate ventilation to all equipment housings and take precautions to
K. All conduit, duct, track, and raceway runs shall be spaced apart to allow for
pathways.
L. Each cable run shall be free of splices. No terminations, splices, or equipment will be
installed in or above ceilings.
M. Do not route any communication cable within two feet of any light fixture, HVAC unit,
service access area, electric panel, or any device containing a motor or transformer.
N. System cable will not be installed in the same conduit, duct, or track with line voltage
electrical cable.
O. Any pulling compounds utilized must be approved by the cable manufacturer and
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. Contractors shall coordinate with an FCC licensed engineering firm regularly
employed in the business of designing and implementing Emergency Responder
Radio Coverage Systems for emergency responders.
B. Proposed Contractor is required to provide for and coordinate with Electrical
Contractor for any, and all required electrical work, including but not limited to,
circuiting, conduits, back boxes, and more. These expenses will not be included in
the electrical contractor primary bid.
3.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to job site in OEM’s original unopened containers, clearly
labeled with the OEM’s name and equipment model and serial identification numbers.
B. Store and protect equipment in a conditioned space until installation.
3.3 SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
A. Coaxial antenna cabling shall not be installed in the same conduit, raceway, or cable
trays used for other systems.
B. All equipment shall be connected according to the OEM’s specifications to insure
correct installation and system performance.
C. Coordinate all roof penetrations with General Contractor and Roofing Contractor.
3.4 GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment per Manufacturer’s requirements.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
B. Antenna mast shall be grounded per NFPA 70 NEC requirements and antenna
manufacturer’s requirements. Provide grounding blocks and surge protection for
outside coaxial cabling. Bond the antenna mast to the existing lightning protection
system.
3.5 TESTING, WARRANTY SERVICE
A. A factory trained representative of the manufacturer shall supervise the final
connections and testing of the system and it shall be subject to the final acceptance
of the Architect/Engineer and Owner. All testing shall meet the testing standards set
forth in IFC Section 510.
B. This contractor will thoroughly test all components of the systems and devices
proposed herein to assure equipment specifications are met. This contractor will start
up, test, and debug systems to ensure that all aspects of the system are working,
documented, and reporting properly.
C. This Contractor shall make a thorough inspection and test of the complete installed
Emergency Responder Radio Coverage System including all components and
controls to ensure the following:
2. Installed in accordance with manufacturer`s instructions.
3. Verify proper operation and processing of signals.
4. Verify that units and controls are properly labeled, and interconnecting wires and
terminals are identified.
5. Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely re-test work affected by
such deficiencies at Contractor’s expense.
D. A final System Acceptance Test shall be performed in the presence of a designated
Owner representative and the AHJ. In the event that a system does not pass or only
partially passes the Acceptance Test, the Project Manager will file a discrepancy
report. Corrected items will be re-tested via a punch list to ensure that they comply
with the system requirements.
E. This Contractor shall provide a warranty of the installed system against defects in
completion. Any equipment, cabling or wiring shown to be defective shall be replaced,
expense to the Owner. All equipment will carry a one-year warranty or manufacturer`s
F. Immediately prior to the end of the warranty period, the system shall be inspected and
certified for the following year at no additional cost to the Owner.
A. As-built drawings and operating and maintenance (O&M) manuals may be
electronically transmitted in PDF file format (preferred) or paper copies may be
provided in quantities indicated in Division 1. Paper copies shall be organized
including index tabs in a 3-ring black binder of sufficient size.
1. Provide one (1) digital copy of all close-out documents.
2. Provide three (3) copies of closeout documents bound in a 3-Ring binder with
dividers and table of contents.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
listing the manufacturer`s name(s), including technical data sheets. Manuals shall
testing, and maintenance of the system. Include copies of all calculation sheets used
to configure the system.
D. Formal on-site training sessions shall be conducted by the Emergency Responder
Radio Coverage System contractor. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
coordinate time and location of training sessions with the Owner. Provide
documented general instruction as follows:
inspection, normal maintenance, testing, and operation of all system
components. Provide a minimum of two (2) hours—two 1-hour sessions
separated by a minimum of two weeks.
system provided including capabilities, limitations, and the meaning of status
messages. State the proper procedure for testing, routine maintenance, and
request for service. Provide detailed instruction on the operation of the system.
Provide a minimum of four (4) hours—two 2-hour sessions separated by a
END OF SECTION

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
SECTION 28 13 27
BUILDING ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDES
B. Provide a credential card, cloud based, Building Access Control System that shall
serve the doors as indicated on the project plans. The system shall utilize door
controllers, functions, and features described in this specification section and as
indicated on the drawings.
C. Provide an audio/video intercom station at the main visitor entry door. The
audio/video intercom station allows Owner's personnel to communicate with visitors
and to remotely control the visitor entry door lock to allow entry into the secure
vestibule of the building.
D. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, software, licensing, supervision, and services
necessary for or incidental to the installation of a card reader operated door access
control system.
E. This access control system shall provide for controlled entry doors to be released
when a valid credential card is presented to the credential card reader located
adjacent to the door. This system shall monitor for unauthorized entry attempts,
control access to the building, and log entry information. The system shall in no way
impede free emergency exit from the building. Exit from the building shall not require
special effort or knowledge.
F. Provide visitor entry door control pushbuttons in the reception area, as shown on the
drawings and as specified herein, that will allow remote control of secure entry door
locks by District personnel that will allow the passage of visitors into secure areas of
the building.
G. Provide Video Surveillance System integration.
H. In shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to obtain all required approvals, permits
and certifications from authorities having jurisdiction.
I. It shall be the responsibility of the Division 26 contractor to provide and install all
conduit systems, standard electrical boxes, and operating power for the building
access systems as outlined on the project drawings. This Contractor shall coordinate
all system requirements with and provide special back boxes to the Electrical
Contractor prior to installation of conduit.
J. The Division 26 contractor shall provide 120-volt power as required to the security
system through separate dedicated branch circuits, maximum 20 amperes each.
Each such circuit shall be labeled at the power distribution panel as ACCESS
CONTROL – [LOCATION]. The location of all circuit breakers serving the system
shall be posted in the control unit cabinets. Each cabinet shall be grounded securely
BUILDING ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 28 13 27 - 1

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
to the building grounding system.

K. The Contractor shall provide all testing, documentation, training, and warranty service
as outlined in these specifications.
L. NOTE: All electric door locks shall be configured for fail-safe un-delayed egress
operation and fail-secure to prevent unauthorized entry on loss of power.
A. Section 26 05 34 - Provisions for Communication, Security & Safety Systems.
B. Section 27 10 30 - Data and Telephone Cable Plant.
C. Section 28 05 00 - General Electronic Safety and Security System Requirements.
D. Section 28 23 20 - Video Surveillance System.
contract documents.
the following:
2. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
C. Submittal may be electronically transmitted in PDF file format.
1. Letter from manufacturer stating that this contractor is an Authorized Factory
2. This contractor and Manufacturer shall supply sufficient information to indicate
available.
3. Current copy of this contractors Electronic Access Control Device Security
Company license issued by the Texas Department of Public Safety Private
Security Board.
a. Calculations for device circuit current drop and battery backup calculations.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
telephone number of this contractor, and the name, address, and telephone
F. The Awarded Contractor shall submit shop drawings locating all components of the
system, indicating circuit routing, cable type, and gauge. Shop or coordination
drawings shall include information that will allow to this contractor to coordinate
interdisciplinary work and when necessary, guide the manufacturer or fabricator in
producing the product. Shop or coordination drawings shall be specifically prepared to
illustrate the submitted portion of work, this may require diagrams, schedules, details,
and accurate to scale equipment and device layouts prepared using a CAD or BIM
engineering drawing program.
B. Proposed contractor shall be currently licensed under the Texas Department of Public
Safety Private Security Board as an Electronic Access Control Service Installer
Company to sell, install, and service private security systems.
C. The proposed contractor, as a business entity, shall be an authorized distributor and
designated representative of the security panel manufacturer, with full warranty
privileges, and shall have been actively engaged in the business of selling, installing,
and servicing commercial building alarm systems for a period of at least 5 years.
D. Recently formed companies are acceptable only if specific pre-approval is requested,
E. All employees working on the project must be registered alarm system installers. this
contractor shall employ factory trained technicians capable of supporting the
maintenance of the system. A certificate of this training shall be provided with this

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
contractor’s submittal.
F. Proposed contractor shall employ full time local technicians and installers. The
G. The proposed Contractor shall have an office within 150-miles of the job site, staffed
throughout the warranty period. this contractor shall be capable of dispatching
the type of security system herein specified and shall furnish with the contract
proposal an itemized list of the installations of the type specified herein. The list shall
include the name of the project, date of completion, the amount of the contract, the
name, and telephone number of a qualified person to contact for reference. This list
must contain at least two (2) projects within a 150-mile radius of the school district to
allow school administration officials to visit the job site for review of the system
installation and service. Each reference project listed must utilize equipment by the
same manufacturer as the proposed system.
I. This contractor shall employ factory-trained technicians capable of supporting the
maintenance of the system.
J. The Proposed Contractor shall not have any grievances or complaints of record
litigation in process concerning the installation of a communication system is
unacceptable.
K. The ability of a proposed Contractor to obtain plans and provide a performance bond
shall not be regarded as the sole qualification of this contractors’ competency and
L. The Builder shall be satisfied that a proposed Contractor meets all the requirements
expressed herein before including this contractor’s proposal in the project.
M. The Owner may investigate, as they deem necessary to determine the ability of the
N. The Owner reserves the right to reject any contract proposal if the evidence
submitted, or their investigation, fails to indicate that this contractor is qualified to fulfill
O. The Owner reserves the right to reject the proposal of any Contractor who has
nature.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. This contractor shall provide complete and satisfactorily operating Access Control
System as described herein, using materials and equipment of types, sizes, ratings,
and performances as indicated. Use materials and equipment that comply with
referenced standards and manufacturers’ standard design and construction, in
accordance with published product information. Coordinate the features of all
materials and equipment so they form a functional system, with components and
interconnections matched for optimum performance of specified functions.
B. The system and all components shall be tested and found suitable for the specified
purpose as part of a commercial building security system by a nationally recognized
approvals agency acceptable to the AHJ.
C. The control units, power supplies, batteries, subassemblies, software, firmware, and
all cable, devices control units, power supplies, batteries, subassemblies, software,
firmware, cable, and all accessories provided shall be listed and labeled by
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for commercial security system use under the latest
appropriate testing standard.
E. Only equipment devices have been shown on the contract drawings. Specific wiring
F. The system shall include but not be limited to all control units, power supplies,
batteries, subassemblies, card sensors, software, firmware, and all cable, door
release equipment, and all accessories required to provide a complete operating
system.
G. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with
manufacturers' recommendations and the requirements of the components UL listing.
beginning system installation. Refer to the manufacturers' riser / connection diagrams
for all specific system installation/termination/wiring data.
H. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model.
firmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings).
2.2 RELATED WORK - NETWORK CONNECTIVITY
A. The system shall be utilizing the customer’s Ethernet system backbone for all security
devices communications.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
B. No Ethernet cabling, network RJ-45 jacks, or patch cords are included in the scope of
this Specification Section.
C. The Owner will provide this Contractor with a terminated network drop at security
devices, and the required TCP/IP configuration settings: static IP address, domain,
gateway, and subnet mask.
D. This contractor will program and test all access control system devices for connection
to the network.
E. This contractor will provide complete programming of all device parameters in
accordance with the Owners requirements.
2.3 ACCEPTABLE BUILDING ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM MANUFACTURER
A. Descriptions and details, acceptable manufacturers' names listed, specific
manufacturers’ model numbers indicated in the project plans and specifications, and
other pertinent information herein are intended to establish minimum standards of
quality, compatibility, functions, features, and performance of the equipment to be
furnished. Manufacturers and model numbers listed "no exceptions" shall not be
substituted without specific notice in an addendum. Otherwise, where a specific
manufacturer's product is indicated, products of other manufacturers listed as
acceptable may be submitted for approval based on the substitute product being, in
the opinion of the Engineer, of equivalent or better quality than that of the product
specified.
equivalent.
E. It is the responsibility of this contractor to provide all features and functions as
outlined in these specifications. The functions and features specified are vital to the
operation of this stadium complex; therefore, inclusion in the list of acceptable
manufacturers does not release this contractor from strict compliance with the
requirements of this specification.
F. The system manufacturers model numbers, functions, and features described in this
specification section are those of Verkada. This shall constitute the quality and
performance of the equipment to be furnished, no exceptions.
2.4 BUILDING ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractors shall provide all material, labor, tools, and equipment required to perform
the work described and make complete, safe, and functional systems.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
B. Contractors shall pay for and acquire all permits and inspections required by the
Authority Having Jurisdiction and/or other controlling authorities.
C. All work shall be installed in accordance with state, local, and national codes.
D. Contractors shall warrant his workmanship and materials for a period of one year
from the date of acceptance upon completion of the project.
E. All work shall be done by mechanics skilled in the particular trade involved, under
responsible supervision.
F. No surface mounted raceway or conduit will be accepted on any new construction
job.
G. Seal all wall and floor penetrations with approved sealant and to the original rating.
H. All cabling must be suspended up off the ceiling grid.
I. Contractor must provide the Owner with all security equipment MAC addresses and
network drop information.
J. The access control contractor shall provide and install all required parts and local
cabling to get the system online and operational; this includes power supplies
required to operate the electrified exit devices.
K. Where 110 Volt electrical receptacles as needed to accommodate system
transformers, they shall be provided by the Division 26 contractor at exact locations
coordinated with the access control contractor.
L. Where 110 Volt electrical receptacles as needed to accommodate door release
hardware/ electrified exit devices, they shall be provided by the Division 26 contractor
in an accessible location at 12” above the finished ceiling and within 20 feet of door
location.
M. Data drops shall be provided by the cabling contractor for security equipment. See
Section 27 10 30 - Data-Telephone Cable Plant.
N. Exterior card reader locations shall be prepared including a recessed single-gang
weatherproof metal back box located approximately 44’’ centered from the ground
and 12’’ off the opened door edge to the side, with a ½” secured rigid or flex conduit
with pull string to an accessible interior location concealed above the finished ceiling.
O. Controlled door frames shall be prepared as detailed on the plans including a ½”
secured rigid or flex conduit with pull string to an accessible interior location
concealed above the finished ceiling.
P. Continuous hinges with built in power transfers (concealed ribbon wire) are not
acceptable.
Q. Mag-locks are not acceptable.
2.5 BUILDING ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. Provide access/licensing for each door controller for the connection and programming
on the Verkada Command platform, a cloud-based access management solution and
browser based (web) platform for both access control and video surveillance in one

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
application.
B. The Verkada Command access/video management software can be accessed from
any device with an internet connection and an internet browser. The Verkada
Command platform shall also include a Mobile Client that allows access from cellular
smart phones.
C. The system shall feature over 75 standard reports including card access events,
cardholder and card listings, evacuation reports, and cardholder time and attendance.
D. Provide, with the Verkada Command access/video management software, an
interactive map feature that shall give operators full functional control of the entire
system through the use of dynamic device and alarm icons displayed on graphic map
screens. Alarms can be acknowledged and cleared at the map level with the same
functionality as at the device or alarm level. Maps have full drill-down capabilities to
allow precise location of alarms, as well as full camera control.
2.6 DOOR CONTROLLERS
A. Provide access control door controllers that shall control the doors as shown on the
contract drawings. Each controller shall be installed complete with licensing.
B. Provide ten (10) year licensing for each door controller furnished and installed.
C. Door controller panels shall be managed through the Verkada Command cloud-based
platform. Verkada Command shall recognize each door controller connected to the
network and shall receive updates automatically.
D. The Verkada Command platform shall seamlessly integrate access-controlled doors
with Verkada IP cameras.
E. Each controller requires a RJ-45 connection to the network, IEEE 802.3af Power over
Ethernet (PoE).
F. For door control provide Verkada access controllers as shown on the drawings.
Verkada access controllers are powered by 110-240VAC/50-60Hz, provided with
RJ-45 jacks for network connection, automatic firmware/software updates, automatic
cloud backup, unlimited users, normal operation during network downtime, remote
door unlock and ten year warranty.
G. Refer to the contract drawings for required model/part numbers to be provided.
H. An unsecured "plug-in" transformer in an exposed electrical receptacle is not
acceptable.
2.7 DOOR CREDENTIAL READERS
A. Controlled access door locations, as indicated on the drawings, shall be provided with
a door credential reader to allow access to authorized individuals with a valid
credential.
B. The door credential readers shall be capable of operation in indoor or outdoor
environments with a temperature range of -22° to 149° F with physical damage
ratings of IP66 and IK08.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
C. Each smart credential reader shall mount on a standard single-gang electrical wall
box, or on the surface of an interior or exterior wall. Standard size 3.0" x 4.7" x 0.85".
D. Each reader requires a RJ-45 connection to the network, IEEE 802.3af Power over
Ethernet (PoE). PoE power consumption shall be 200mA at 12V.
E. The reader casing shall be grounded to prevent electrostatic discharge from
interfering with the operation of the reader.
F. Refer to the contract drawings for required model/part numbers to be provided.
G. See sub-section 2.14 Cabling, for approved cable type and manufacturer.
2.8 CREDENTIAL CARDS
A. Additional credential cards are not required.
2.9 SMARTPHONE TOUCHLESS ENTRY CREDENTIAL
A. Smart digital keycard access that allows use of smartphones to unlock doors through
SSO integration.
B. Configurable with Command platform and the Verkada Pass smartphone application
(available in the Apple App Store and on Google Play), Bluetooth wireless (touchless
BLE) technology allows users to securely activate door readers and unlock doors
using a smartphone.
2.10 REQUEST-TO-EXIT SWITCH OR SENSOR
A. The system shall not be programmed to unlock a door automatically from a request to
exit signal, as this presents a security breach. The request to exit signal shall be used
only to indicate a normal exit status, as opposed to a forced entry from the outside.
Exit shall be made with the normal door hardware and shall not be impeded or
assisted by the electronic system. Exit shall not be affected if the power is off and the
battery backup exhausted.
B. When no request-to-exit switch is provided integrated into the door hardware (see
above), provide at the exit side of each controlled door a request-to-exit passive
infrared detector with x-y targeting and digital signal processing.
C. Refer to the contract drawings for required model/part numbers to be provided.
2.11 DOOR SWITCHES (ACCESS SYSTEM DOOR CONTACTS)
A. Provide door switches for each controlled door panel and as indicated on floor plans
with conduit run to a nearby, accessible, junction box located concealed above
finished ceiling. Shall be dual contact Double Pole-Double Throw (DPDT) switches
with wire leads to support both access and security system connections.
B. Refer to the contract drawings for required model/part numbers to be provided.
2.12 ENTRY DOOR VIDEO INTERCOM
A. Provide at the main visitor entry door an intercom door station that shall allow District
personnel to view and speak with visitors requesting entry to the building.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
B. The intercom station audio streaming two-way, fully duplex with echo cancellation and
noise suppression, 5MP (2688x1944) sensor resolution, fixed lens, 5W speaker
output. Provide ten (10) year licensing for the intercom door station furnished and
installed.
C. The intercom station alerts device status, motion detection, people detection, vehicle
detection, Person of Interest search, crowd detection. The people analytics
capabilities are people search, attribute search, face search.
D. The intercom door station shall be managed through the Verkada Command cloud-
based platform. Verkada Command shall recognize the intercom door station to allow
for configuration to the network. Once connected the intercom station shall receive
updates automatically.
E. The intercom station requires a RJ-45 connection to the network, IEEE 802.3af Power
over Ethernet (PoE).
F. The Verkada Command platform shall seamlessly integrate with the access-control
and video surveillance systems.
G. The intercom station allows control of the respective door lock for remote unlocking of
the door using the internal relay contacts.
H. Refer to the contract drawings for required model/part numbers to be provided.
Provide all accessores required for the surface mounting of the device. Provide
necessary accessories to allow Owner's designated representative to control the
secure vestibule and the visitor front door locks.
2.13 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM INTEGRATION
A. Provide video surveillance system integration with the access control system. See
Section 28 21 23 Video Surveillance System, 2.7 Access Control System Integration.
2.14 CABLING
A. All wiring shall be NEC type CM low voltage cable.
B. All exterior cabling shall be in threaded rigid metallic conduit. All connectors must be
fastened, tied, and crimped for maximum reliability.
C. Avoid, if at all possible, junctions or splicing - all junctions in cable shall be made by
proper splicing techniques in a junction box.
D. All cabling is to be concealed where construction permits.
E. This contractor shall provide and install new and unused ASTM bare stranded copper
wire shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the application.
F. All cable shall have a machine printed label located within 2” from every terminal
block and within 6” from all other connections utilizing self-laminating flexible vinyl film
labels.
G. Minimum wire gauge shall be selected based on cable length and current
requirements.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
H. Access control multi-conductor, shielded cable (card reader, lock power, REX, door
contact), per District Standard shall be:
2.15 CABLE TIES
A. Nylon cable ties shall be furnished and installed to attach wire bundles to supports
and for appropriate wire management as required.
1. Nylon wire tie, 3.9”, miniature - Panduit PLT1M-C or equivalent.
2. Nylon wire tie, 5.6”, miniature - Panduit PLT1.5M-C or equivalent.
3. Nylon wire tie, 11.4”, intermediate - Panduit PLT3I-C or equivalent.
4. Nylon wire tie, 14.6”, intermediate - Panduit PLT4I-C or equivalent.
engineering practices as established by the NFPA. Wiring shall meet all state and
local electrical code requirements.
B. Cable pathways, conduit, and cable support systems shall be complete with
C. Before energizing the system check all cables for correct connections and test for
short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.
D. In all exposed areas such as gymnasiums, shops, field houses, janitors’ closets, or
mechanical / electrical rooms all access system cable shall be fully enclosed in
conduit.
E. Access system cables shall be run in conduit stubs from wall boxes to accessible
concealed spaces to provide access. Provide bushings to protect the cable from
damage for conduit ends, box openings, and passage through metal studs.
F. Access system cables shall be run in bundles above accessible ceilings and
supported from building structure by j-hooks, conduit, or cable tray. Cabling shall be
loosely bundled with cable ties randomly spaced at 30 to 48 inches on center, cable
ties shall not be tight enough to deform cabling and shall not be used to support the
cabling.
G. Do not attach any supports to joist bridging or other lightweight members. The
support system shall provide a protective pathway to eliminate stress that could
damage the cabling.
H. Mount all equipment firmly in place such that vibration or jarring will not interfere with
system operation. Route cable in a professional, neat, and orderly installation.
I. The cable shall not be crushed, deformed, skinned, crimped, twisted, or formed into
J. Access system cable must not be fastened to electrical conduits, mechanical
ductwork / piping, sprinkler pipes, or routed to obstruct access to hatches, doors,
utility access panels, or service work areas. Do not route cables through fire doors,
conductors. Access system cables shall not be run loose on ceiling grid or ceiling
tiles.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
K. Support shall be provided by mounting appropriate fasteners that may be loaded with
multiple cables. If the weight load is carried by the support rod or wire, the support
assembly may attach to the ceiling grid for lateral stabilization. The required support
wires for the ceiling grid or light fixtures shall not be utilized. Any fastener attached to
the ceiling grid shall not interfere with inserting or removing ceiling tiles. The cable
pathway of supports must be positioned at least 12 inches above the ceiling grid.
L. All cable shall have a label on both ends utilizing self-laminating, flexible vinyl film,
non-smear, machine printed labels.
M. Each cable run shall include a three-foot service loop with wire tie located in the
ceiling above the control unit panel. This is to allow for future re-termination or repair.
N. Provide for adequate ventilation to all equipment housings and take precautions to
O. All conduit, ducts, track, and raceways shall be supported from the structure at
P. All conduit, duct, track, and raceway runs shall be spaced apart to allow for
pathways.
Q. Each cable run shall be free of splices. No terminations, splices, or equipment will be
installed in or above ceilings.
R. All cabling will be placed with regard to the environment, EMI/RFI interference, and its
effect on communication signal transmission.
S. Do not route any communication cable within two feet of any light fixture, HVAC unit,
T. Access system cable will not be installed in the same conduit, duct, or track with line
voltage electrical cable.
U. Maximum cable pulling tension shall not exceed 25 pounds force (110 N) or the
V. Any pulling compounds utilized must be approved by the cable manufacturer and
B. Do not "loop" over wiring terminals, the cable could come loose, and the condition is
not detected as an open circuit or disconnected device.
C. Preserve wire twists as closely as possible to point of termination (0.5" maximum) to
D. Avoid twisting cable jacket during installation.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
2.18 BUSHINGS
SC, or equivalent.
Combination Coupling Series 442, or equivalent.
2.19 CEILING MOUNTED DEVICE BOX HANGERS
A. All ceiling mounted devices including smoke detectors, heat detectors, remote
power/status LEDs, ceiling mounted strobes and horn/strobes, et cetera, when
mounted in a drop ceiling shall be supported by an electrical box hanger (Caddy #512
or #512A for deep boxes - 24" span), or equivalent. Box hangers shall be attached to
the ceiling grid only for lateral stabilization, separate support wires shall be provided.
The required support wires for the ceiling grid or light fixtures shall not be utilized. The
backbox shall be flush and level with the bottom of the ceiling tile and the hole neatly
cut for a finished appearance when the device is installed.
B. Device and box hanger assemblies shall not be supported solely by suspended
ceilings. Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load.
2.20 J-HOOKS
center. Each cable bundle shall be routed with enough slack to prevent damage to
cables but not allowed to sag more than 12 inches mid-span between attachments.
Attachments shall be sized as follows:
1. Single cables or bundles up to four cables may be supported directly by the
building structure.
2. 2" bridle ring, Caddy #4BRT32 or equivalent
3. 3/4" J-Hook, Caddy #CAT12 or equivalent
4. 1-5/16" J-Hook, Caddy #CAT21 or equivalent
5. 2" J-Hook, Caddy #CAT32 or equivalent
6. Split bundles greater than 2" dia. or provide cable tray.
B. Do not mix different signal strength cables on the same J-Hook (i.e., access system
with telephone/data cable). Multiple J-Hooks can be placed on the same attachment
point, up to the rated weight load of the attachment device.
penetrated are to be used at all fire barrier penetrations. Seal the interior of the
conduit sleeve around the cables and around the outside of the sleeve on each side
of the penetration with fire-stop caulk or putty, install according to the manufacturers’
instructions.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
C. All gypsum board or plaster penetrations shall tool cut using an appropriate hole saw /
mandrel or manufactured assembly.
oversize or irregular. Do not share wall penetrations with other types of
E. This contractor shall make every effort to coordinate with the building Architect,
required. this contractor must consult with the building Architect, Engineer, and
F. Upon approval, this contractor shall be required to supply all labor, equipment, tools,
temporary and final fire stopping. Exceptional care shall be taken not to stress,
overheat, or penetrate any building support member. Coring shall be made with
equipment appropriate for the dry penetration of concrete and block materials. Under
no circumstances shall penetrations be made utilizing a chisel or percussion type
equipment. Concrete, block, or plaster cores shall be made by dry saw methods only.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Scheduled automatic door unlocking/locking of specific entry doors shall be
programmed to require verification before being enacted. A credential card from a
select group at the local facility (including the principal/vice principals, etc. as
requested) must be presented at the facility within a two-hour period prior to the
scheduled unlocking event. This is to prevent the entrance doors from be unlocked
when no one is present to supervise the students, such as due to a snow day or other
unscheduled occurrence. If a scheduled unlocking event is delayed, and a credential
card from the select group is presented within two hours after the unlocking event
was scheduled, the unlocking shall be enacted immediately.
B. This access control system shall provide for controlled access through entry doors
and into restricted areas when a valid credential card is presented to the credential
card reader located adjacent to the door, only if the users group access rights and
time schedules allow for access. This system shall monitor for unauthorized entry
attempts, control access to the building, and log entry information. The system shall in
no way impede free emergency exit from the building. Exit from the building shall not

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
require special effort or knowledge. Controlled door locks shall fail secure from
outside entry on loss of power and backup power.
C. Door Forced and/or Door Held Open alarms shall have the capacity to be locally
annunciated via Auxiliary Output relays on the individual controllers. This
annunciation shall be controlled as follows. A direct one-to-one relationship shall be
able to be programmed between the Door Forced and/or Door Held Open alarm and
the auxiliary output. When either condition exists, the auxiliary output is energized.
When either condition is cleared, the auxiliary output is de-energized.
D. The system shall provide the capability for individual controlled door locations as
noted on plans to include a local sounder. Unless otherwise required, the local
sounder shall annunciate when a door is held open, left ajar, or propped open for
over one minute. If the door remains held open for over three minutes, a system Door
Held Open Alarm alert shall pop-up and generate an entry in the log file for later
review, the alert shall be automatically silenced and cleared once the door is closed.
E. Controlled doors with frame or mullion retractable strike, on a valid credential card
read, activate the output to retract the door strike and immediately allow the exit door
to be entered by standard pull lever operation; the door may then be opened without
retracting the latch bolt.
F. Where required, the system shall interface with electric door openers utilized for ADA
access. This interface shall interconnect to door control interface to mechanically
open the door when a valid credential card is read, and the exterior door button is
pressed. The exterior button shall also open the door when the door is scheduled to
be unlocked without a credential card read. The interior door open button shall always
be functional, allowing full egress, regardless of the status of the access control
system; the interior button shall also be interfaced to the request to exit function.
G. The request-to-exit switch or sensor shall provide a means for the system to monitor
the status of the controlled door and detect a forced entry condition. The request-to-
exit signal shall be used only to indicate a normal exit status, as opposed to a forced
entry. Exit shall be made with the normal door hardware and shall not be impeded or
assisted by the electronic system. Exit shall not be affected if the power is off and the
battery backup exhausted.
H. The access system door contact switch shall provide a means for the system to
monitor the open/closed status of the controlled door and detect if the door is held
open or left ajar after a valid credential card read.
3.2 TESTING, WARRANTY SERVICE
connections and testing of the system, and it shall be subject to the final acceptance
of the Architect/Engineer and Owner.
B. This contractor will thoroughly test all components of the systems and devices
proposed herein to assure equipment specifications are met. This contractor will start
up, test, and debug systems to ensure that all aspects of the system are working,
documented, and reporting properly.
C. This Contractor shall make a thorough inspection and test of the complete installed
security system including all components and controls to ensure the following:

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent

3. Verify proper operation and processing of signals.
D. The installation will be verified through use of testing procedures designed to test all
specific functions and requirements of your system under various operating
conditions.
E. This Contractor shall provide a warranty of the installed system against defects in
expense to the Owner. All equipment will carry a one-year warranty or manufacturer's
A. Upon completion of the installation, and prior to final inspection, the Building Access
Control Contractor shall furnish four (4) hard copies and one (1) electronic CAD and
PDF copy on CD-R of as-built drawings. In addition, the Building Access Control
contractor shall furnish four (4) hard copies and one (1) electronic PDF copy on CD-R
of a complete operating and maintenance manuals listing the manufacturer's
name(s), including technical data sheets. Manuals shall include wiring diagrams to
indicate internal wiring for each device and the interconnections between the items of
equipment. Provide the Owner a copy of the panel control software including the
licensed program, site specific data file, and passwords that the Owner may require to
maintain the system. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives,
in detail, the information required to properly operate the equipment and system.
Provide a parts list with manufacturer and model number for commonly replaced
parts. Include complete instructions for the inspection, testing, and maintenance of
the system. Include copies of all programming sheets used to configure the system.
As-built drawings and operating and maintenance manuals may be electronically
transmitted in PDF file format (preferred), or paper copies may be provided in
B. Provide the Owner a copy of the panel control software including the licensed
program, site specific data file, and passwords that the Owner may require to
maintain the system.
C. Formal on-site training sessions shall be conducted by this Contractor. It shall be the
responsibility of this Contractor to coordinate time and location of training sessions
with the Owner. Provide documented general instruction as follows:
Provide a minimum of four (4) hours—two 2-hour sessions separated by a

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent

building access system including capabilities, limitations, reporting, monitoring,
and the meaning of status messages. State the proper procedure for testing,
routine maintenance, and request for service. Provide detailed instruction on the
operation of the system including group scheduling, adding users, deleting
users, and changing passwords. Provide a minimum of four (4) hours—two 2-
hour sessions separated by a minimum of two weeks.
END OF SECTION

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
SECTION 28 21 23
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDES
B. Provide IP connection and programming to a network, cloud based, video
surveillance system utilizing PoE IP cameras.
C. This contactor shall provide and install IP network video surveillance cameras and
provide all related work specified in this section. Cameras shall be as herein specified
complete with licensing and network connection configuration.
D. Configure for network connection, mount, and align IP network cameras as herein
specified and located as shown on the contract drawings.
E. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or
incidental to the installation of a complete networked video surveillance, digital
recording, security monitoring systems as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or
as specified.
F. The primary purpose of this system is to provide continuous monitoring of entrances,
exits, and sensitive areas.
G. The client software shall provide authorized users password protected network
access to live and archive video with extensive search tools.
H. The Power over Ethernet (PoE) switches shall be furnished by the Owner.
I. In shall be the responsibility of the Video Surveillance System Contractor to obtain all
required approvals and certifications from authorities having jurisdiction.
J. Provide all testing, documentation, training, and warranty service contract as outlined
in these specifications.
A. Section 26 05 34 - Provisions For Communication, Security, and Safety Systems.
B. Section 27 10 30 - Data and Telephone Cable Plant.
C. Section 28 05 00 - General Electronic Safety and Security System Requirements.
D. Section 28 13 27 - Building Access Control System.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 28 21 23 - 1

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
contract documents.
the following:
1.4 SUBMITTALS
C. Submittal may be electronically transmitted in PDF file format (preferred), or paper
1. Letter from manufacturer stating that the Contractor is an Authorized Factory
2. The Contractor and Manufacturer shall supply sufficient information to indicate
available.
4. Cut sheets or catalog data illustrating the physical appearance, size, function,
F. Submit shop drawings locating all components of the system, indicating circuit

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
when necessary, guide the manufacturer or fabricator in producing the product. Shop
program.
B. The Contractor shall be currently licensed by the State Board of Private Investigators
and Private Security Agencies to sell, install, and service security systems.
C. The proposed contractor, as a business entity, shall be an authorized distributor and
designated representative of the security panel manufacturer, with full warranty
and servicing commercial surveillance systems for a period of at least 5 years.
D. Recently formed companies are acceptable only if specific pre-approval is requested,
and granted by the Architect/ Engineer, based on experience of key personnel,
current and completed projects, and all licensing requirements are met 10 working
days prior to the contract proposal date.
E. All employees working on the project must be registered security system installers.
The Contractor shall employ factory trained technicians capable of supporting the
maintenance of the system. A certificate of this training shall be provided with the
Contractors submittal.
F. The contractor shall employ full time local technicians and installers. The
G. The proposed Contractor shall have an office within 150-miles of the job site, staffed
the type of security system herein specified and shall furnish with the contract
proposal an itemized list of the installations of the type specified herein. The list shall
include the name of the project, date of completion, the amount of the contract, the
name, and telephone number of a qualified person to contact for reference. This list
must contain at least two (2) projects within a 150-mile radius of the school district to
allow school administration officials to visit the job site for review of the system
installation and service. Each reference project listed must utilize equipment by the
same manufacturer as the proposed system.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
I. The Contractor shall employ factory-trained technicians capable of supporting the

contractors’ submittal.
J. The Proposed Contractor shall not have any grievances or complaints of record
litigation in process concerning the installation of a communication system is
unacceptable.
K. The ability of a proposed Contractor to obtain plans and provide a performance bond
L. The Builder shall be satisfied that a proposed Contractor meets all the requirements
M. The Owner may investigate, as they deem necessary to determine the ability of the
N. The Owner reserves the right to reject any contract proposal if the evidence
O. The Owner reserves the right to reject the proposal of any Contractor who has
nature.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide a complete and satisfactorily operating, cloud based, Video Surveillance
System as described herein, using materials and equipment of types, sizes, ratings,
and performances as indicated. Use materials and equipment that comply with
referenced standards and manufacturers’ standard design and construction, in
accordance with published product information. Coordinate the features of all
materials and equipment so they form an integrated system, with components and
interconnections matched for optimum performance of specified functions.
B. All field wiring shall be individually supervised for opens or shorts to security devices.
C. The system and all components shall be tested and found suitable for the specified
purpose as part of a commercial security surveillance system by a nationally
recognized approval agency acceptable to the AHJ.
E. The control units, power supplies, batteries, subassemblies, software, firmware, and
all cable, detection, and notification devices control units, power supplies, batteries,
subassemblies, software, firmware, and all cable, cameras, recording equipment, and

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
all accessories provided shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories,

Inc. for commercial security system use under the latest appropriate testing standard.
F. The system shall include but not be limited to all control units, power supplies,
batteries, subassemblies, keypads, software, firmware, and all cable, detection,
notification, and all accessories required to provide a complete operating system.
G. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with
manufacturers' recommendations and the requirements of the component's UL listing.
beginning system installation. Refer to the manufacturers' riser / connection diagrams
for all specific system installation / termination / wiring data.
H. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model.
firmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings).
J. Only equipment devices have been shown on the contract drawings. Specific wiring
K. Installation is subject to approval, inspection, and test of the Architect/Engineer.
2.2 RELATED WORK - NETWORK CONNECTIVITY
A. Refer to Section 27 10 30 - Data and Telephone Cable Plant for all Ethernet network
drop connections. All Ethernet cabling and jacks used to connect to the building
network shall be provided as indicated on the plans under Section 27 10 30. All
system devices provided in this section, which will require a network connection, shall
be coordinated with contractor.
B. All system devices provided in this section that require a network connection shall be
coordinated with district IT department to be assigned TCP/IP configuration settings
including a static IP address, domain, gateway, and subnet mask.
C. This contractor will implement all device network configuration and device
programming required to provide a complete and functional system under this
specification including any special connecting network jumpers and all other types of
cabling, and interconnects wires and cables required.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent

equivalent.
E. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all features and functions as
specification.
F. The Owner’s system video management system is VerkadaCommand platform with
Verkada IP Cameras and mounting hardware, and this shall constitute the
functionality, quality, compatibility, and performance of the system to be furnished, no
exceptions.
2.4 HARDWARE
A. All IP video surveillance cameras shall require a power over ethernet (PoE)
connection. PoE enabled routers and switches shall be furnished by the Owner.
2.5 NETWORK VIDEO MANAGEMENT
A. The Verkada Command platform video management system, hereafter “System,”
shall be a hybrid cloud-based system and shall not require the installation and
maintenance of onsite software to manage cameras and have the ability for mobile
device accessibility to securely access and view footage both on and off site at any
time.
B. The System shall provide multiple levels of system administration to accommodate
different staff who will have varying roles viewing or managing cameras, authenticate
users before granting access to the system and the capability to audit account usage.
C. The System shall have the capability to provide email and SMS notification of critical
system events such as a camera failure.
D. The System shall have the ability to export industry standard video formats of
selected video footage that can be viewed on standard platforms without a proprietary
viewer. Ability to be viewable on browser-based platforms to include Windows,
Chrome OS, MacOS, iOS and Android without using third party plugins.
E. The System shall digitally sign recorded and exported video using 256-bit encryption
providing for video to be authenticated for evidentiary purposes.
F. Each camera shall be configured by the System to be identified according to facility
and specific camera group and/or location to include but not limited to (by example):

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
1. Facility 1.
2. Indoor cameras.
3. Outdoor cameras.
4. Hallway cameras.
5. Lobby camera.
G. Each camera shall be configured by the System to be accessible by defined groups of
users to include but not limited to:
1. Personnel to view all or select cameras across multiple sites.
2. Personnel to view all or select cameras at only one site.
3. Authorized personnel to view any camera at any site.
4. Law enforcement to view outdoor cameras anytime at one or at all sites.
5. Law enforcement to view all cameras at a site under an “emergency” condition.
H. The system shall support the ability to create a map that represents the physical
location of cameras and other devices throughout the surveillance system. Maps shall
be created from images stored in JPEG, BMP, PNG, or GIF image formats. Maps
shall have the ability to contain links so as to create a hierarchy of interlinked maps,
including the ability to highlight a camera on a map when an alarm linked to the
camera is triggered.
I. The System shall utilize an Verkada fully licensed software solution, no exceptions.
Provide all required software, programming, and licenses for all cameras furnished.
Provide the viewing client software and licenses' at least four locations to
simultaneously view video from all system servers. Coordinate with owner to identify
designated workstation computers and install and test the viewing client software.
J. Cameras shall have built in solid state hard drive capable of recording 30 day of
continuous high-definition video with system provided unlimited cloud archiving.
K. Provide Verkada licensing packages for camera channels as required.
L. The Video Surveillance contractor shall configure the system to the Owners
requirements.
2.6 IP DOME CAMERAS
A. IP camera configuration shall be through the Verkada Command platform.
B. Provide ten (10) year licensing for each camera furnished and installed.
C. All cameras shall be full high definition (1080p) resolution or better.
D. Indoor cameras shall be IP66 rated against dust and environmental elements and IK8
vandal resistant. Outdoor cameras shall be IP67 rated against dust and
environmental elements and IK10 vandal resistant.
E. Shall have infrared illumination for night visibility.
F. Standard RJ-45 connectivity including IEEE 802.3af Power Over Ethernet (PoE)
connection.
G. Capable of recording 30 days of continuous HD video via an onboard solid state hard
drive and the ability to record audio.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
H. Provide all network cameras with license. Provide with all required mounting and
installation accessories.
I. Where IP cameras cannot be installed on a smooth, level, horizontal, finished ceiling,
camera arm mounts with wall mounting bases and accessories shall be required.
J. Refer to the contract drawings for required model/part numbers to be provided.
K. Video surveillance contractor shall test, aim, and focus cameras as required by
owner.
2.7 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM INTEGRATION
A. The Verkada Command, combined with the Verkada Viewing Station, shall provide
advanced security settings integrating IP cameras with specific access-controlled
doors.
B. The integrated system alarm monitors such that at a minimum:
1. Alarms generated by the building access control system shall link to video; both
live and recorded, on the system.
2. Any alarm/event in the building access control system shall have the ability to be
associated with a digital video clip in real time.
3. Each alarm/event in the building access control system shall trigger the system
to store:
a. A pre-defined: number of seconds of video before the event occurred
b. A pre-defined number of seconds of video after the event occurred.
4. Device Association - Each access control field hardware device that is
configured in the building access control system shall have the ability to be
associated with a camera from the video surveillance.
a. A camera shall have the ability to be associated with multiple access control
hardware devices.
5. An access control hardware device shall have the ability to be associated with
multiple cameras.
a. Where multiple cameras are associated to a single access control hardware
event or alarm, all associated cameras shall appear in the video player in the
appropriate matrix view.
6. Pre-Roll and Post-Roll Marking of Event Based Video - When an alarm triggers,
the building access control system shall notify the system to mark a pre and post
roll time for the associated recorded video clip.
a. Pre-Roll shall be the number of seconds of video that the VMS will store
previous to the event time.
b. Post-Roll shall be the number of seconds of video that the VMS will store
after an associated event is generated.
7. The pre and post roll times shall be configurable up to 100 seconds.
8. Stored Video Events - Each alarm / event condition shall have the ability to mark
the start of a video event or the end of a video event in real time. For example,
when a door held open is activated, the system shall mark the start of the video
event. When the alarm restores, the system can mark the end of the video event.
9. Event Reporting - The access control system shall support following incoming
video surveillance events:
a. Motion Detection / No More Motion Detected. This event shall report motion
events from cameras on the system.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
b. Video Loss / Video Restored. This event shall report connection losses and
restores of connected IP Cameras.
10. Connection Loss / Connection Restored. The event shall report connection
losses and restores of connected IP Cameras.
11. Video Recall - Upon generation of an alarm that has associated video, the
Operator shall be able to recall the video segment associated with the alarm.
a. Once launched, the Operator shall have the ability to adjust the start and
end time of the video segment.
12. Viewing Station - Shall support a Matrix View for On-line cameras.
a. The number of video windows in the matrix shall be dependent on the frame
rate and resolution of the cameras / number of video clips viewing.
b. The Matrix view shall allow sizing the matrix windows.
c. The Viewing Station shall provide the ability to launch more than one camera
on a generated alarm.
d. When an alarm with multiple cameras is generated, a matrix window shall
launch displaying all associated cameras.
e. The Operator shall also have the ability to switch between other cameras if
the device that generated the event has more than one camera associated
with it.
f. Operators shall be able to concurrently playback recorded video from any
clip, even as that video clip is being recorded.
g. The Operator shall have the option to switch to live mode from a camera at
any time during the operation.
h. The Viewing Station shall show the date and time of the video clip frame, as
well as the current mode of the player (play or live).
13. Playback Control - The Viewing Station shall provide the following playback
controls for viewing recorded video:
a. Start and Stop Playback - The Operator shall be able to start and stop
playback.
b. Pause and Resume - The Operator shall be able to pause and resume
current playback.
c. Play in Reverse - The Operator shall be able to reverse video in normal
speed.
d. Skip Backward - The Operator shall be able to use the Skip Backward button
to rewind the playback.
14. Frame Advance - The Operator shall be able to use the Frame Advance button
to advance the video clip one frame at a time.
a. Auto-Launch of Video Display - Any alarm / event generated shall be
configurable to automatically launch the Video Display in the building access
control system.
15. Video Motion Detection Alarms - The building access control system shall report
video motion detections alarms such that:
a. When a monitored camera senses motion in its range of site, it will report a
“Motion Detection” alarm to the building access control system.
b. When the camera no longer senses motion, it will report a “Motion Detection
Restored” alarm to the building access control system.
16. Off-line Alarms - Should any associated cameras go off-line; a specific alarm
shall be sent to the Viewing Station.
17. Still Image View - During playback of recorded of video, the Operator shall use
the Pause button to create a still picture. This operation shall not affect any other
operation and shall not alter the recorded video.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
18. Video Icons - The building access control system shall support video icons.
Alarms that enter the system generated by a device that has an associated
camera shall display an icon next to the alarm to alert the Operator that video is
associated with the alarm.
2.8 CABLING
A. All camera cabling shall be installed, tested, and terminated by the data contractor.
Camera contractor shall coordinate all camera locations with the data contractor prior
to installation.
A. All ceiling mounted devices including video cameras, when mounted in a drop ceiling,
shall be supported by an electrical box hanger (Caddy #512 or #512A for deep boxes
- 24" span), or equivalent. Box hangers shall be attached to the ceiling grid only for
lateral stabilization, separate support wires shall be provided. The required support
wires for the ceiling grid or light fixtures shall not be utilized. The backbox shall be
flush and level with the bottom of the ceiling tile and the hole neatly cut for a finished
appearance when the device is installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING, WARRANTY, SERVICE
connections and testing of the system, and it shall be subject to the final acceptance
of the Architect/Engineer and Owner.
B. The Video Surveillance System Contractor shall make a thorough inspection and test
of the complete installed system to ensure the following:
3. Confirm at the headend, with an ohm meter, that each cable run is not open or
shorted prior to connection of equipment.
4. Confirm that each camera is located, properly aimed, and focused for the
intended coverage area.
5. Verify that units and controls are properly labeled, and interconnecting wires and
terminals are identified.
6. Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely re-test work affected by
such deficiencies at Contractor's expense.
7. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and
complies with applicable standards.
C. The contractor shall provide a warranty of the installed system against defects in

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
expense to the Owner. All equipment will carry a ten (10) year manufacturer’s
warranty.
transmitted in PDF file format (preferred) as indicated in Division 1.
listing the manufacturers’ name(s), including technical data sheets. Manuals shall
END OF SECTION

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
SECTION 28 32 22
ELEVATOR LOBBY EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDES
B. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or
incidental to the installation of a complete elevator lobby emergency (Hall Push-
Button Station) two-way audible and visual communication call system as shown or
indicated on the project plans and as specified herein.
C. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to provide and install all
conduit systems, standard electrical boxes, and operating power for the call as
outlined on the project drawings.
D. The call system contractor shall coordinate all system requirements with and provide
special back boxes to the Electrical Contractor prior to installation of conduit.
E. Equipment specified herein is designed to provide specific functional and operational
characteristics. It is the responsibility of the Intercom System Contractor to provide all
features and functions as outlined in these specifications.
F. Provide all testing, documentation, training, and a warranty service contract as
outlined in these specifications.
on this project.
A. Section 26 05 34 - Provisions for Communication, Security, and Safety Systems.
B. Section 28 05 00 - General Electronic Safety and Security System Requirements.
contract documents.
the following:
Elevator Lobby Emergency Call System 28 32 22 - 1

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
3. FCC Rules, Part 76.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
D. Product Data Submittal including special boxes, cable, and other material as
E. Submit shop drawings locating all components of the system, indicating circuit
program.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
B. The proposed contractor, as a business entity, shall be an authorized and designated

representative of the equipment manufacturer and shall have been actively engaged
in the business of selling and installing commercial building communication systems
for a period of at least 5 years.
D. The proposed Contractor shall have an office within 150-miles of the job site, staffed
throughout the warranty period.
the system herein specified and shall furnish with the contract proposal an itemized
list of the installations of the type specified herein. The list shall include the name of
the project, date of completion, the amount of the contract, the name, and telephone
number of a qualified person to contact for reference. This list must contain at least
two (2) projects within a 150-mile radius of the school district to allow school
service.
F. The proposed Contractor shall not have any unresolved grievances or complaints of
record regarding workmanship, code compliance, or service response. A Contractor
that has any prior finding(s) of a code violation or has any litigation in process is
unacceptable.
G. The Proposed contractor shall employ full time local technicians and installers. The
manufacturer shall maintain a full time factory employed service staff for product
H. The ability of any proposed contractor to obtain plans and provide a performance
bond shall not be regarded as the sole qualification of the Contractor`s competency
and responsibility to meet the requirements and obligations of the contract.
nature.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PART 1 -GENERAL
A. Provide only materials that are new, of the type and quality specified.
B. All basic equipment for which there are Underwriters` Laboratories Standard
requirements shall be listed by Underwriters` Laboratories and be so labeled, or shall
recognized laboratory acceptable to the Local Authority.
C. All date keeping hardware, firmware, and software provided shall be fully compliant
with years designated in four digit data format. Any time equations must function
normally, leap year, and daylight savings time must be supported.
D. All basic equipment shall be new and shall be the latest product of a manufacturer of
established reputation and experience of quality electronic equipment. The
manufacturer shall have supplied similar apparatus to comparable installations
rendering satisfactory service for at least three (3) years.
E. All wire shall be UL listed for audio/video applications. Follow the manufacturer`s
F. All cable shall have labels on both ends utilizing self-laminating, flexible vinyl film and
non-smear nylon marking pens. Utilize Tyton Corporation part number RO175 Rite-
On labels and part number FTP1 nylon marking pens or equivalent.
G. Installation subject to approval, inspection, and test of the Architect/Engineer.
addendum. Otherwise, where a specific manufacturer`s product is indicated, products
equivalent.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent

specification.
F. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all features and functions as
specification.
G. The manufacturers model numbers, functions, and features described in this
specification section are vital to the operation of this facility; therefore, inclusion in the
list of acceptable manufacturers does not release the contractor from strict
compliance with the requirements of this specification. The following are acceptable
manufactures; any other proposed suppliers must be pre-approved:
1. Talk-A-Phone Co., 5013 North Kedzie Avenue, Chicago, IL 60625-4988, Phone
773-539-1100
2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. Momentary actuation of a "PUSH FOR HELP" button shall cause the following actions
or effects to take place:
1. A call for assistance shall be initiated.
2. Audible and visual notification is provided at call station to confirm that call has
been placed.
3. Visual notification at call station is maintained until manually reset by control
station operator.
4. Two-way communication is established between call station and the primary
programmed telephone number.
5. If the call has not been acknowledged during a programmed time delay, a call to
the secondary programmed telephone number is initiated and two-way voice
communication is established.
2.4 ELEVATOR LOBBY EMERGENCY TWO-WAY COMMUNICATIONS
A. Provide a two-way communication system (Hall Push-Button Station) in each elevator
lobby as indicated on the project plans, each consisting of a sign and a hands-free
auto-dial wall communications station.
B. The owner shall provide a telephone exchange port and auto-dial service to an
approved central control point and/or monitoring service staffed 24 hours each day
with people who are capable, trained, and authorized to provide emergency
assistance. The emergency phone station shall include both audible two-way voice
communication and a visible light indicating when the call is connected.
C. The sign shall be engraved plastic made of 1/16" thick two-ply black/white acrylic
sheet engraving stock with all sides beveled. Provide 5/8" minimum height lettering
with written identification of the location. Permanently post the sign adjacent to the
emergency communications station as detailed on plans.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
D. The emergency communications station shall be flush wall mounted with a call button,
one (minimum) call received/connected indicator light, talk-back speaker, and ADA
compliant with an auto dialer programmable for at least three emergency telephone
numbers.
E. Provide a SIP protocol phone for integration with the VoIP telephone system, unit
shall be an Area of Rescue Analog Flush Mount Call Station, Talk-a-Phone Model
Number AOR-CSE-FM
F. Provide an analog protocol phone for connection to a C.O. line, PBX, or key system
analog POTS port, unit shall be a Talk-a-Phone ETP-400 or equivalent.
G. Provide a cellular interface and auto-dial wall phone for connection through a GSM or
CMDA interface to the public telephone system, set shall include a Talk-a-Phone
ETP-400 with a Cellular Connect LinkLine GSM or CMDA device as required, or
equivalent.
2.5 CABLE (PLENUM RATED)
conductor wire per ANSI/NEMA codes. Follow the manufacturer`s instructions. All
wire shall be UL listed for communication and control circuits. All wire exposed in attic
spaces shall be plenum rated.
non-smear nylon marking pens. Utilize Tyton Corporation Part Number RO175 Rite-
On labels and Part Number FTP1 nylon marking pens or equivalent.
C. Provide Category 5e minimum Ethernet network grade cabling as required to support
the elevator lobby emergency (Hall Push-Button Station) two-way audible and visual
communication system in this specification section. Extend from the in-wall telephone
station to the to the building Telco Demarcation Point/Main Distribution Frame
location and terminate at in a surface mount block. Coordinate Telco or Data
termination location with the owner prior to installation. The network grade cabling
shall be NEC type CMP cable, TX5500 Category 5e UTP cable, Panduit part number
PUP5504BU-UY with a
2.6 CABLE TIES (PLENUM RATED)
A. HALAR Fluoropolymer cable ties shall be furnished and installed to attach wire
bundles to supports and for appropriate wire management as required.
1. HALAR wire tie, 4.0”, miniature - Panduit PLT1M-C702 or equivalent.
2. HALAR wire tie, 7.4”, standard - Panduit PLT2S-C702 or equivalent.
3. HALAR wire tie, 11.6”, standard - Panduit PLT3S-C702 or equivalent.
B. Cable pathways, conduit, and cable support systems shall be complete with

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
C. All wiring shall test free from opens, grounds, or shorts. All communication cable shall
cabling.
E. In all exposed areas such as gymnasiums, shops, field houses, janitors’ closets, or
mechanical / electrical rooms all communication cable shall be fully enclosed in
conduit.
F. Communication cables shall be run in conduit stubs from wall boxes to accessible
G. Provide bushings to protect the cable from damage for conduit ends, box openings,
H. Communication cables shall be run in bundles above accessible ceilings and
I. Communication cable must not be fastened to electrical conduits, mechanical
tiles.
J. Support shall be provided by mounting appropriate fasteners that may be loaded with
multiple cables. If the weight load is carried by the support rod or wire, the support
assembly may attach to the ceiling grid for lateral stabilization. The required support
wires for the ceiling grid or light fixtures shall not be utilized. Any fastener attached to
the ceiling grid shall not interfere with inserting or removing ceiling tiles. The cable
pathway of supports must be positioned at least 12 inches above the ceiling grid.
K. All cabling shall be placed with regard to the environment, EMI/RFI interference, and
L. Do not route any data communication cable within two feet of any light fixture, HVAC
transformer.
M. Communication cable will not be installed in the same conduit, raceway, tray, duct, or
requirements.
N. Maximum cable pulling tension should not exceed 25 pound-force (110 N) or the

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
O. Any pulling compounds utilized must be approved by the cable manufacturer and
P. No terminations or splices shall be installed in or above ceilings.
Q. Cable bends shall not be tighter that the manufacturers’ suggested bend radius.
R. Mount all equipment firmly in place such that vibration or jarring will not activate an
alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal. Route cable in a professional, neat, and orderly
installation.
S. All cable shall have a label on both ends utilizing self-laminating, flexible vinyl film and
non-smear nylon marking pens. Utilize Tyton Corporation Part number RO175 Rite-
On labels and Part number FTP1 nylon marking pens or equivalent.
T. Each cable run shall include a three-foot service loop with wire tie located in the
U. Provide for adequate ventilation to all equipment racks and take precautions to
V. All conduit, ducts, track, and raceways shall be supported from the structure at
W. Devices mounted on a drop ceiling shall feature a back-box fitted with a support
hanger (Caddy #512 or #512A for deep boxes), or equivalent with independent drop
wires to support the weight of the device.
2.9 BUSHINGS
1. Box openings - Thomas & Betts Knockout Bushing Series 3210, or equivalent
SC, or equivalent
Combination couplings Series 442, or equivalent
2.10 J-HOOKS
between attachments. Bundles up to 1/2" dia. (Ten 1/4" cables) shall use a 2" bridle
ring, Caddy #4BRT32 or equivalent or J-hook.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
B. Do not mix different signal strength cables in the same bridle ring or J-Hook (i.e.
intercom with telephone/data cable). Multiple J-Hooks can be placed on the same
attachment point, up to the rated weight load of the attachment device.
2.11 COMMUNICATIONS CIRCUIT SURGE PROTECTION
A. Provide surge protection shall be provided for all exterior devices, communications
service or antenna entrance connections, and for each circuit that connects one
building to another (i.e. any other portion of a building complex not under one
continuous roof) at both entry/exit points to prevent damage to equipment.
B. Each surge protector shall be mounted in a standard grounded metallic electric box or
equipment backboard with a separate ground wire ran directly to the ground bus bar
or equipment panel ground stud, do not daisy chain ground wires.
C. Surge protectors for Ethernet network runs rated up to Category 6A and operating at
follows:
1. DTK-110RJC6APOE with 110 to RJ-45 connections with PoE.
2. DTK-110C6APOE with 110 to 110 connections with PoE.
3. DTK-110RJC6A with 110 to RJ-45 connections without PoE.
4. DTK-110C6A with 110 to 110 connections without PoE.
D. Surge protectors for analog copper pair PSTN telephone service POTS/Trunk/C.O.
line alarm Digital Communicator service lines shall be Ditek DTK-2MHTPWB, or
equivalent, 2-pair/lines, maximum ring-up voltage 110V, includes base. In addition, At
Telco service connection demarcation point locations servicing an alarm Digital
Communicator, provide per line a Suttle Solutions Part # 635B-48, or equivalent,
RJ31X surface mount jack with 8-conductor screw terminal board input and factory
wired DATA and VOICE labeled, non-keyed RJ-45 output ports, with line seizure port
shorting bar (1&4, 5&8) for alarm reporting device service.
instructions.
C. All gypsum board or plaster penetrations shall tool cut using an appropriate hole saw /
mandrel or manufactured assembly.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
oversize or irregular. Do not share wall penetrations with other types of
caulk or putty, install materials according to the manufacturers` instructions.
only.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING AND WARRANTY SERVICE
A. A factory trained service technician shall supervise the final connections and testing
of the system and it shall be subject to the final acceptance of the Architect, Engineer,
and local authorities. Testing shall ensure the following:
1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test
B. The contractor shall provide a warranty of the installed system against defects in
expense to the Owner. All equipment will carry a one year warranty or manufacturer’s

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
listing the manufacturer`s name(s), including technical data sheets. Manuals shall
D. The Contractor shall conduct a formal on-site training session for the Owners
Representative/Maintenance personnel, which shall include instruction in the
operation, testing, location, inspection, telephone number programming, and
maintenance, of all system components. Provide a minimum of two (2) hours of
documented general instruction.
END OF SECTION

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
SECTION 28 46 21
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1, apply to this Section.
B. This specification provides requirements for the installation of an addressable fire
alarm and voice evacuation system. The specification reflects the intent of the design
and installation.
C. Provide an addressable fire alarm and voice evacuation system as herein specified.
Size the panel to allow space for the addition of subassemblies (contained within the
panel housing) to provide coverage by addressable devices plus a 30% expansion of
all devices at a future date. Each signaling line circuit (SLC) shall be limited to 80% of
its total device capacity during the initial installation.
D. Equipment specified herein is designed to provide specific functional and operational
characteristics. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all features and
functions as outlined in these specifications.
E. Furnish and install all equipment, accessories, materials, tools, scaffolding, man lifts,
labor and transportation in accordance with these specifications to provide a complete
and operating fire alarm and voice evacuation system.
F. It is the intent of these specifications to provide complete installations although every
item necessary may not be specificially mentioned or shown.
G. This project shall include preparation of construction plans locating the fire alarm
system devices and having the plans reviewed by the Engineer, Owner, and local
AHJ for permitting.
H. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to obtain all required approvals, permits,
and certifications from Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
I. The system devices shall be provided in accordance with Part 2 - Product
Requirements, Function, and Performance.
J. Provide installation, testing, documentation, training, and warranty service
documentation in accordance with Part 3 - Project Execution and Installation.
K. The Division 26 Electrical Contractor shall provide:
1. Dedicated 120VAC power to the fire alarm control units maximum 20 amps
each. Each electrical disconnect device shall be labeled "FIRE ALARM". An
access key to the disconnect device shall be stored in the fire alarm control
panel. Secure disconnect in the "ON" position with a lockout clip, Space Age
Electronics model Elock or equivalent.
2. Provide and install all conduit and standard electrical boxes for the fire alarm
system as specified herein. The fire alarm contractor shall coordinate all conduit
Fire Detection and Alarm System 28 46 21 - 1

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
and box requirements and locations with, and provide special back boxes to, the
electrical contractor prior to installation.
3. Fire alarm cabing in all open ceiling areas shall be enclosed in conduit.
4. Provide required conduit for accessibility to attic or plenum space.
5. Installation of special back boxes supplied by Division 28 contractors.
6. Provide equipment mounting boards as indicated on the drawings.
7. Provide utility services conduit as outlined on the drawings.
8. Coordination of requirements of Division 28 with the Builder.
L. Fire safety control devices and equipment installed by others:
1. Include any function that is designed to make the building occupants safer from
the impact of fire and smoke during evacuation. For each controlled device, the
contractor providing the device shall wire it internally for fail-safe shut-down and
provide a labeled 3` coil of cable outside the unit to allow the fire alarm
contractor to make final connection to the controlling relay. These may include
but are not limited to:
a. Fire/smoke curtains, shutters and doors.
b. Air handler shutdown.
c. Fire/smoke damper control.
d. Elevator fire service functions and cab recall.
e. Automatic door unlocking.
2. Each Fire Safety Control Function circuit controlled device shall be configured
such that when the fire alarm system safety control circuit is re-energized, by the
fire alarm control panel, the device shall return to normal operation (e.g. re-start
or be ready to re-start) without a need for manual or environmental control
system intervention. Line voltage, 120 VAC fire safety control function circuits
shall be wired by a qualified electrical contractor and shall be standard non-
supervised line voltage circuits in conduits.
providing communications, monitoring, or other services.
B. Contractors shall not make selection, purchase, or installation of interconnect
instruments and/or equipment to be used on this project.
A. Section 26 05 34 - Provisions for Communication, Security and Safety Systems.
B. Section 28 05 44 - Emergency Responder Radio Coverage System.
1.4 PRESCRIPTIVE CODES, STANDARDS, AND REGULATIONS
contract documents.
B. In addition to requirements outlined in other sections of the specifications these codes
and standards are imposed as applicable to the work in each instance.
C. The equipment, materials, and installation shall confirm to the latest version of all
applicable codes, standards and regulations including the following:

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
1. NFPA 1 - Uniform Fire Code

2. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
3. NFPA 70 - (NEC) National Electrical Code, Articles 250, 300, 725, 760, and 800.
4. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
5. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems
6. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures
7. NESC - National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI Standard C2
8. NEiS - National Electrical Installation Standards
9. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
10. ICC (IECC) - 60268-16:2011(E) Sound system equipment – Part 16: Objective
rating of speech intelligibility by speech transmission index
11. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
12. ISO 7240-24:2016 - Fire detection and fire alarm systems - Part 24: Sound-
system loudspeakers
13. ANSI 117 - American National Standard for Accessible and Useable Buildings
and Facilities
14. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators
15. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
16. BICSI - RCDD5 Standards
17. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act
18. OSHA - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction
19. TAS - Texas Accessibility Standards
20. Texas Insurance Code - Chapter 6002 - Fire Detection and Alarm Device
Installation and 28 TAC §§ 34.600 The Fire Alarm Rules
21. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code
22. ICC (IFC) - International Fire Code
23. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
24. Local and State Building Codes and Ordinances.
25. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)
D. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed to permit work not conforming
to these codes and standards.
E. When two or more codes or standards are applicable to the same work, then the
F. The date of the code or standard is that in effect on the date of issue stated on the
contract docuements, except when a particular publication date is specified.
G. The Contractor shall comply with all State, Federal, NFPA, local codes and
H. Where local codes and ordinances are not in writing or on record but local
extent of work.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
indicated. Provide Electronic Safety and Security systems (including all hook-ups)
complete in every respect and ready to operate.
D. If clarification is needed, consult the Architect/Engineer.
immediately notify the Architect/Engineer for his interpretation.
F. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to make any reasonable change in the
1.6 SUBMITTALS
B. Submittal may be electronically transmitted in PDF file format (preferred) or paper
C. For each submittal provide a cover sheet with the name and location of the project,
the name, address and telephone number of the Contractor, and the name, address
and telephone number of the submitting sub-contractor. Include on or after the cover
sheet sufficient space for review stamps.
D. Product Data Submittal to include:
1. Letter from the fire alarm control panel manufacturer stating that the contractor is
a Factory Authorized Distributor for the area where the project is located.
2. Current copy of the contractors Alarm Certificate of Registration (ACR) for sales,
service, and installation of fire alarm systems issued by the Texas State Fire
Marshal’s Office.
3. Copy of the commercial (non-residential) Alarm Planning Superintendent`s
License (APS) responsible for the design of the system submitted.
product on the equipment list. Include special boxes, cable and other material as
requested by the Architect.
7. Indicate by prominent notation (an arrow, circle, or other means) on each sheet
the exact product and options being submitted.
8. Submit design data, when the scope of work requires, including schematics,
risers, sequences, or other data.
9. If not included in the Shop Drawings, calculations for notification device circuit
current drop, conductor size, and battery backup for each unit.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
E. Shop Drawings Submittal to include:
1. A cover page that includes project name and address, index of drawings, scope
of work description, code editions designed under, local AHJ information, a
sequence of operation input/output matrix, bill of material, device and cable
legends, typical device connections and installation height details, schedules and
location map.
2. Resubmittal of shop drawings shall include a revision notation and clouded
changes.
3. Produce accurate to scale (min. 1/8” = 1’) drawings showing equipment and
device layouts prepared using a CAD or BIM engineering drawing program.
When CAD background files are not available for existing buildings the
Contractor shall inspect the site and collect information to create a floor plan.
Walls shall be double line showing the thickness, single line diagrams are not
acceptable.
4. Every room shall have a name and number identifying the use of the space with
ceiling heights notated for each space or group of spaces throughout the design.
5. Indicate and/or notate door swings, glass walls, half walls, floor to ceiling
windows, skylights, and other openings, projections, ceiling features, elevation
changes, et cetera that affect the placement of alarm devices.
6. Show fire-rated walls, fire/smoke rated doors, fire rated shutters, fire rated rolling
doors.
7. Locate and label all components of the system, label and indicate circuit routing,
cable type, and gauge. The fire alarm panel location and all device locations
shall be clearly identified by symbols matching the symbol legend. The labeling
of circuits and devices shall correspond with the riser diagram.
8. Riser diagrams showing all components of the system. Show control panels,
power supply panels, amplifiers, annunciators, network interfaces, all initiation
and notification devices. Partial or typical riser diagrams are not acceptable.
9. If not included in the Product Data Submittal, include calculations for notification
device circuit current drop, conductor size, and battery backup for all panels.
10. When multiple buildings make up the system, provide a block diagram of the
project site showing all buildings to be covered by the fire alarm system and
detailing the route and type of Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) connection between
buildings. Note building entry points, conduit type and size, and routing pathway
(underground or over canopy installation). Provide a separation in the outgoing
and return conductors for all building connections as required for Class A circuits
per NFPA 72, 12.3.8.
11. Shop or coordination drawings shall include information that will allow the
Contractor to coordinate interdisciplinary work and when necessary guide the
manufacturer or fabricator in producing the product.
12. Any resubmittal shall include clouded changes and revision notation.
trained and experienced personnel, financial capacity, required current licenses, and
meet the other requirements herein described will be disqualified.
B. The contractor shall be licensed by the State of Texas Fire Marshal to sell, install, and
service commercial fire alarm systems in accordance with the Texas Insurance Code.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
C. The contractor shall not have any grievances or complaints of record regarding
workmanship, code compliance, or service response with either the Owner or the
State Fire Marshal’s Office.
D. The Contractor shall have a full-time employee who is a state licensed Fire Alarm
System Planning Superintendent. They shall be responsible for the design of the
system submitted and shall sign all submittal drawings.
E. All work associated with the installation of the fire alarm system shall be under the
direct supervision of a state licensed Fire Alarm Technician.
F. The proposed contractor, as a business entity, shall be an authorized and designated
representative of the fire alarm panel equipment manufacturer, with full warranty
and servicing commercial building fire alarm systems for a period of at least five (5)
years.
G. The Contractor shall employ factory-trained technicians capable of supporting the
contractors’ submittal.
H. The proposed Contractor shall have an office within 150-miles of the job site and shall
be capable of dispatching technicians to repair a system within six hours of a service
request.
I. The proposed contractor shall be fully experienced in the design and installation of
the type of Fire Alarm System herein specified and shall furnish with the contract
proposal an itemized list of the installations of at least two (2) projects of the type
specified herein. Each reference project listed must utilize a fire alarm control panel
by the same manufacturer as the proposed system.
J. The ability of a proposed Contractor to obtain these specifications and provide a
performance bond shall not be regarded as the sole qualification of the Contractors’
competency and responsibility to meet the requirements and obligations of the
contract.
K. The Builder shall be satisfied that a proposed Contractor meets all the requirements
L. The Owner may investigate, as they deem necessary, to determine the ability of the
M. The Owner reserves the right to reject the proposal of any Contractor who is
unqualified, has previously failed to perform properly, or complete on time, contracts
of a similar nature.
PART 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS, FUNCTION AND PERFORMANCE

2.1 GENERAL
A. Type: Complete 24 VDC, closed circuit, electrically supervised, analog addressable,
intelligent reporting, microprocessor-controlled fire detection and alarm system
including a voice evacuation system.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
B. The system shall meet all requirements for a protected premises and supervising
station fire alarm system per NFPA 72.
C. All equipment and components shall be new and the manufacturer`s current model.
D. The system and all components shall be tested and found suitable for the specified
purpose as part of a protected premises protective signaling (fire alarm) system by a
nationally recognized approvals agency acceptable to the local AHJ.
E. All date keeping hardware, firmware, and software provided shall be fully compliant
F. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with
manufacturers` recommendations and the requirements of the components UL listing.
G. The control units, power supplies, batteries, subassemblies, software, firmware, all
cable types, detection, notification, control devices, and all accessories required to
provide a complete operating system shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. for fire alarm system use under the latest appropriate testing
standard including but not limited to the following:
UL 38 - Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes for Use with Fire Protective
Signaling Systems
UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
UL 193 - Alarm Valves for Fire-Protection Service
UL 217 - Single and Multiple Station Smoke Detectors
UL 228 - Door Closers-Holders, With or Without Integral Smoke Detectors
UL 268 - Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 268A - Smoke Detectors for Duct Application
UL 346 - Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 444 - Communications Cables
UL 464 - Audible Signal Appliances
UL 497B - Protectors for Data Communications and Fire Alarm Circuits
UL 521 - Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 539 - Single and Multiple Station Heat Detectors
UL 793 - Automatically Operated Roof Vents for Smoke and Heat
UL 864 - Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems, Ninth Edition
UL 910 - Test for Cable Flame-Propagation and Smoke-Density Values for
Electrical and Optical Fiber Cables Used in Spaces Transporting Environmental
Air
UL 1424 - Cables for Power-Limited Fire Alarm Circuits
UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops
UL 1480 - Speakers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 1481 - Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 1581 - Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords
UL 1635 - Digital Alarm Communicator System Units
UL 1638 - Visual Signaling Appliances - Private Mode Emergency and General
Utility Signaling
UL 1711 - Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 1971 - Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
UL 2043 - Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products
and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces
UL 2572 - Control and Communication Units for Mass Notification Systems
H. Consult the manufacturer`s installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics,
electrical requirements, cable types, and physical equipment sizes, et cetera, before
beginning system installation. Refer to the manufacturers` riser and connection
diagrams for all specific system installation, termination, and wiring data.
I. The contractor shall be responsible for sizing, verifying and supplying proper power
supply(s) necessary to operate the system and audible/visual signals.
J. Provide stainless steel screw/bolt hardware wherever stainless devices are used and
in potentially wet areas.
K. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies utilizing a
structured cabling system and shall be held firmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be
supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and supports shall be adequate
to support the required load.
manufacturer and model number items indicated in this specification shall establish a
standard of quality, function, and design. Manufacturers and model numbers listed
"no exceptions" shall not be substituted without specific notice in an addendum.
Otherwise, where a specific manufacturer`s product is indicated, products of other
manufacturers listed as acceptable may be submitted for approval based on the
substitute product being, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, of equivalent or
better quality than that of the product specified.
equivalent.
specification.
F. The manufacturers model numbers, functions, and features described in this
specification section are those of Silent Knight Intelliknight, Maple Grove,
Minnesotaand this shall constitute the quality and performance of the equipment to
be furnished, no exceptions.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
2.3 CIRCUIT TYPES

A. General: All low voltage fire alarm circuits shall be power limited, electrically or
electronically supervised, and of the correct cable type and gauge. Low voltage fire
alarm cables of various types are to be permitted within the same raceway or conduit.
Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1 circuits, and
shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box, or raceway containing these
conductors, as per NEC Article 760. T-taps in any electrically supervised circuit are
prohibited by this specification. All junction boxes and conduit ends shall be marked
red for all low voltage fire alarm circuits.
B. All fire alarm systems shall be installed in such a manner that the failure of any single
alarm-actuating or alarm-indicating device will not interfere with the normal operation
of any other such devices. All circuit types shall comply with NFPA 72 Chapter 12.
1. Signaling Line Circuit (SLC): SLC circuits shall be wired Class A redundant path.
Class A separation of outgoing and return cable routing shall be observed per
NFPA 72, Chapter 12.
2. Voice Evacuation Notification Appliance Circuits (Voice NAC): Speaker circuits
may be 25 or 70 VRMS to be determined by the contractor. Shielded cable shall
be utilized to minimize electrical noise interference with voice transmission.
These circuits shall be wired Class B with electrical supervision and end of line
devices.
3. Visual Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC): These circuits shall be wired Class B
with electrical supervision and end of line devices.
4. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC): Initiating device circuits shall be arranged to
serve like categories (beam detectors, heat detectors, tamper switches). Mixed
category circuitry shall not be permitted in a single IDC. A two-wire IDC shall
contain only devices that require point-contact to operate. A four-wire IDC shall
include an additional supervised circuit to supply 24 VDC operating power to
devices that require it. These circuits shall be wired Class B with electrical
supervision and end of line devices for circuits less than 10 feet in length,
otherwise, the circuit shall be Class A redundant path. Class A separation of
outgoing and return cable routing shall be observed per NFPA 72, Chapter 12.
5. Low voltage, 24 VDC, device power circuits provide power to fire alarm system
devices that are not powered by the SLC or the IDC circuit. These circuits have
backup power and are supervised by an end of line relay and monitor module
combination. These types of circuits are required to remotely power devices
such as detector sounder bases, stand-alone CO detectors, etc.
6. Low voltage, 24 VDC, fire safety control function circuits shall in all cases feature
Class D "fail safe" operation and shall not have power backup. These circuits
shall be controlled by a fire alarm system activated addressable control relay
located within three feet of the device controlled and on activation, or loss of
power, the connected device shall actuate to its fire safety condition (i.e. HVAC
blower control circuits shall open).
7. Line voltage, 120 VAC, fire safety control function circuits shall in all cases
feature Class D "fail safe" operation and shall not have power backup. These
circuits shall be controlled by a fire alarm system activated addressable control
relay and auxiliary relay pair located within three feet of the device controlled and
on activation, or loss of power, the connected devices shall actuate to their fire
safety condition (i.e. fire door holders shall release, smoke dampers and
fire/smoke dampers shall close). Line voltage fire safety control function circuits
shall be wired by the Electrical Contractor and shall be standard non-supervised

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
line voltage circuits in conduit, utilizing the type of conductors specified in

Division 26 for light and power circuits.
2.4 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
A. Type: Microprocessor based modular design, analog intelligent addressable reporting
fire detection and alarm system with integrated in-building emergency voice
evacuation control system.
B. Manufacturer / Model: Silent Knight IntelliKnight analog addressable fire alarm control
panel model 6820EVS, 1,110 addressable points maximum, with integrated in-
building emergency voice evacuation system, microphone inside panel, no
exceptions.
C. Locate the fire alarm control panel as indicated on the electrical drawings. An area
smoke detector shall be located at the fire alarm control panel.
D. The following are required system components and functions:
1. Size the panel to allow space for the addition of subassemblies (contained within
the panel housing) to provide coverage by addressable devices of the entire
existing facility, plus a 30% expansion of all devices at a future date. Each
signaling line circuit (SLC) shall be limited to 80% of its total device capacity
during the initial installation.
2. Provide a UL listed cabinet suitable for semi-flush mounting. The door shall
include a transparent opening for viewing of all alarm, supervisory, and trouble
indicators on an LCD display. The door shall be for right- or left-hand hinging as
required. When the door is opened all operator controls shall be accessible and
all internal components shall be enclosed (i.e. dead front panel). All components
shall be securely mounted, all cable shall be routed, and tie wrapped in a neat,
professional manner. Conduit shall enter the fire alarm control panel only where
conduit entry is specified by the FACP manufacturer.
3. The microprocessor shall provide a real-time clock for time annotation of system
displays, printer, and history file. The time-of-day and date shall not be lost if
system primary and secondary power supplies fail. The real time clock may also
be used to control non-fire functions at programmed time of day, day of week,
and day of year.
4. The fire alarm panel shall provide for a custom alphanumeric message location
identifier to be associated with each addressable device hardware address. For
any event or alarm, the alphanumeric display will show the devices hardware
address and a custom message clearly identifying the location of the device
involved.
5. Fire alarm, supervisory alarm, trouble, and maintenance alert conditions, with
device hardware address and custom message location identifier, shall be
displayed on an 80-character minimum Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). The
chronological event history of alarm and trouble conditions may also be
displayed.
6. Keypad for functions and programming, buttons for scrolling data on the LCD,
front panel switches for RESET, ALARM SILENCE, TROUBLE SILENCE, and
DRILL/ALL CALL and LEDs for Normal, Fire Alarm, Supervisory Alarm, Trouble,
and Test/Program. When multiple devices are reporting alarm condition, there
shall be a visual indication that other devices are in alarm.
7. Power supply/charger and batteries to supply power limited 24 VDC operating
and emergency power to the system. The charger shall be capable of

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
maintaining batteries in a fully charged state without damage and of bringing

batteries from a fully discharged to a fully charged state within 48 hours of
normal operation. Provide audible alarm and diagnostic LEDs to indicate AC
power failure, brown out, control unit CPU failure, low battery detection, battery
disconnection, and system ground fault detection. Upon AC power failure, the
power supply shall automatically transfer the system to battery backup. Provide
sufficient battery capacity for operation without AC power for twenty-four hours of
normal supervision and fifteen minutes alarm operation at the end of this period;
include a 20% safety factor in battery calculations to ensure adequate
performance for the service life of batteries.
8. An integrated UL approved IP and digital communicator transmitter control unit
with the option of adding a cellular module. The communicator shall report
system status signals to a remote UL listed monitoring service with the option of
multiple transmission protocols including Contact ID and SIA.
9. The FACP shall check for the presence of ground faults in field wiring and report
results on the LCD readout, is it a violation of this specification for any ground
fault detection system to be disabled.
10. A single ground or open on any system SLC, IDC, NAC, or fire safety control
function circuit shall not cause a system malfunction or the loss of ability to
report an alarm.
11. The FACP shall have 20% spare capacity on the power supply, the signaling line
circuit and all input and output circuits at final acceptance to allow for future
expansion by the Owner.
12. The CPU and associated equipment are to be protected consistent with UL 864
standards so that voltage surges or line transients will not affect them. All
external connections of the FACP shall withstand six kilovolt transients to
chassis ground.
13. All field wiring shall be completely supervised. In the event of a primary power
failure, disconnected standby battery, removal of any internal modules, or any
open circuits in the field wiring; a trouble signal will be activated until the system
and its associated field wiring are restored to normal condition. The FACP shall
check for the presence of ground faults in field wiring and report results on the
LCD readout, is it a violation of this specification for any ground fault detection
system to be disabled.
14. A single ground or open on any system SLC, IDC, NAC, or fire safety control
function circuit shall not cause a system malfunction or the loss of ability to
report an alarm.
15. Walk test, the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall permit testing by manually placing
each initiating device in alarm. The control panel shall pulse the system audible
devices on detection of each such alarm and automatically reset the panel,
permitting a single technician to perform a function test of the entire system.
2.5 INTERNET AND GSM DIGITAL CELLULAR ALARM COMMUNICATOR
A. The fire alarm control panel internal communicator allows for system status reporting
to a UL Central Station as well as for local and remote up/downloading of system
operating options, event history and detector sensitivity.
B. Provide IP and/or cellular communication to a UL Central Station as required by the
Owner. The Owner shall select the monitoring service, remote supervising station, or
central station and be responsible for connections and monthly monitoring costs. For
central station service, the installation shall be certificated or placarded by the
selected central station.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
C. Communications to the Central Station shall transmit alarm, supervisory and trouble
signals descriptively as defined in NFPA 72 and the AHJ, with the correct
addressable device designation, identification, and location. Alarms shall not be
permitted to be transmitted as a general alarm or zone condition.
D. IP communication works over an Ethernet 10/100 Base network connection. All
equipment used for the IP connection (such as a router, switch, etc.) must be
powered from an un-switched branch circuit with UPS standby power.
E. IP and cellular communication transmission shall utilize the Honeywell commercial
fire communicator model HWF2-COM with metal enclosure and keylock. The HWF2-
COM is an IP and cellular option for commercial fire alarm control panels and shall be
NFPA 72 compliant for sole, primary, and backup communicator and programmed to
operate per UL864 requirements. The communicator shall be installed per
manufacturer’s written instructions.
F. The HWF2-COM shall be installed in the same room and within twenty-feet of the fire
alarm control panel. The cellular provider model to be determined by the greater
signal strength on site. When required provide an external antenna for signal strength
optimization. Installation of the external antenna shall be per manufacturer’s
instruction and shall consist of the following:
1. Fifty-foot antenna cable model 7626-50HC.
2. 3dBA gain antenna model CELL-ANT3DB.
3. SMA to N adapter model WA7626-CA.
G. The fire alarm contractor shall provide all activation circuits and the communicator
shall be ready for programming by the UL Central Station monitoring provider
selected by the Owner. The fire alarm contractor shall coordinate with and provide all
necessary information to the representative of the service provider selected by the
Owner.
H. Surge protectors for Ethernet network runs rated up to Category 6A and operating at
follows:
1. DTK-110RJC6A with 110 to RJ-45 connections.
2. DTK-110C6A with 110 to 110 connections.
2.6 NETWORK GRADE CABLING FOR DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR SERVICE
A. Provide two parallel runs of Ethernet network grade cabling as required to support the
digital communicator systems in this specification section. Category listing of the
cable shall be by the Owner’s and/or the Facility’s current Network Standards. Extend
from the drop location inside the digital communicator panel to the building Telco
Demarcation Point/Main Distribution Frame location and terminate at each end in a
surface mount block. Coordinate Telco or Data termination location with the owner
prior to installation. Cable runs shall be tested to industry standards to verify
performance.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
2.7 INTERFACE FOR OPTIONAL PUBLIC ADDRESS INPUT

A. The system shall include a line level audio input that has the lowest priority, below
any fire alarm function, and may be used for connecting to a telephone paging or
similar system. The paging system is not included in the scope of work for this
section. When used, the audio signal shall be interfaced through a low priority input to
all the interior Fire Detection and Alarm System speakers, which would include
corridors, classrooms, offices, and special use areas.
2.8 FIRE ALARM FLOOR PLAN MAP
A. Provide adjacent to the fire alarm control panel a plan view of all building areas
covered by the fire alarm system meeting the following requirements:
1. Framed and secured to the wall and plan covered with clear acrylic panel,
SpaceAge Electronics Inc. model SSU52003 Display Frame or equivalent.
2. Size plan to clearly show all required information.
3. Orient building to place the entry nearest to control panel at the bottom of plan.
4. "YOU ARE HERE" indicator with arrow.
5. Logical alarm zones.
6. Room names and numbers. (Verify with Owner)
7. Show each initiating device with symbol and identification number programmed
in the panel. Do not show audio/visual devices.
8. Symbol legend.
9. True north arrow.
10. Scale indicator.
2.9 SYSTEM RECORD DOCUMENT CABINET
A. Provide, in accordance with NFPA 72, an adequately sized record documentation
cabinet located at the system control unit or at an on-premises location approved by
the AHJ and identified at the system control unit. Printed and/or electronic
documentation shall include an owner’s manual, published instructions, a design
narrative and layout, record drawings, site specific software, passwords, and a record
of installed software and firmware version numbers. The record documentation
cabinet shall be 18-gauge minimum cold rolled steel with a red powder coat finish, a
stainless steel-piano hinge, and keyed door lock. The cover shall be permanently
screened with 1" high lettering stating "SYSTEM RECORD DOCUMENTS" in white
letters. The interior shall accommodate as required standard 8.5” x 11” manuals and
loose document records, a permanently mounted digital flash drive with USB-B
connector, a business card holder, and key ring hooks. The cabinet shall be a Space
Age Electronics, Inc. Part # SSU00689 System Record Document Cabinet or
equivalent.
2.10 POWER SUPPLY PANELS
A. Provide as required additional power supplies for notification appliance circuits or as a
remote power supply. Provide Silent Knight model PS-6 or PS-10 conventional
remote power supplies.
B. The primary locations shall be in IDF/MDF rooms, electrical rooms, wiring closets,
custodial closets, or storage rooms. An area smoke detector shall be located at each
fire alarm power supply location.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
C. An area smoke detector shall be located at the power supply panel locations.
D. Each power supply shall individually report a trouble condition including battery
charging failure, battery failure, NAC loss, AC power loss (delay acceptable), power
brownout, or ground fault detection.
E. A trouble condition on a power supply shall not interfere with normal operation the
rest of the system.
F. In the event of a trouble condition, each power supply shall provide location
annotated individual point supervisory incident reporting to the main fire alarm control
panel. This may be accomplished using one addressable module per power supply or
via power supplies with multiplexed system bus communication or an integrated
addressable interface.
G. Provide sufficient battery capacity for operation without AC power for twenty-four
hours of normal supervision and fifteen minutes of alarm operation at the end of this
period; include a 20% safety factor in battery calculations to ensure adequate
H. Each power supply shall be labeled in a visible area with its device hardware address
utilizing self-laminating, flexible vinyl film, non-smear, machine printed labels.
I. Conduit shall enter the power supply backbox only where conduit entry is specified by
the manufacturer.
2.11 VOICE EVACUATION SPEAKER AMPLIFIERS
A. Provide as required Silent Knight model EVS-50W, EVS-100W or EVS-125W
amplifiers as required.
B. An area smoke detector shall be located at speaker amplifier locations.
C. Each speaker amplifier shall individually report a trouble condition including battery
charging failure, battery failure, NAC loss, AC power loss (delay acceptable), power
brownout, or ground fault detection.
D. A trouble condition on an external power supply shall not interfere with normal
operation of the remainder of the system.
E. In the event of a trouble condition, each speaker amplifier shall provide location
annotated individual point supervisory incident reporting to the main fire alarm control
panel. This may be accomplished using one addressable module per amplifier or via
amplifier with multiplexed system bus communication or an integrated addressable
interface.
F. Provide sufficient battery capacity for operation without AC power for twenty-four
hours of normal supervision and fifteen minutes alarm operation at the end of this
period; include a 20% safety factor in battery calculations to ensure adequate
G. Each speaker amplifier shall be labeled in a visible area with its device hardware
address utilizing self-laminating, flexible vinyl film, non-smear, machine printed labels.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
H. Conduit shall enter the amplifier backbox only where conduit entry is specified by the
manufacturer.
2.12 EMERGENCY VOICE/ALARM STROBES, SPEAKERS AND SPEAKER/STROBES
A. Provide as indicated below and as required per NFPA, federal, state and local code
and ADA standards, notification appliances to include strobes, speakers and
speaker/strobes that alert the building occupants to an emergency.
B. NFPA 72 prescribes the use of both ceiling and wall mounted audible/visual
notification appliances. For this project, the preferred use is ceiling mounted strobe,
speakers and speaker/strobe devices in areas with a finished ceiling. Provide wall
mounted devices in areas where the ceiling type or height prevents mounting and
servicing of devices on the ceiling.
C. Notification appliance circuits serving employee work areas shall be initially installed
with a minimum of 20% spare capacity for visible notification appliances to facilitate
future additional device installation to accommodate hearing-impaired employees.
D. Audible signals shall be designed to provide at least 15 dB above ambient sound
levels measured at 5 feet above the floor in the occupied area. Sound levels shall not
exceed 110 dbA at the minimum hearing distance from the audible appliance.
E. Strobe intensity (candela output) and audible decibel level shall be sized for the room
size and area of coverage per ADA and NFPA/ANSI and local codes and standards.
F. All interior strobe flashing shall be synchronized. Provide synchronization control such
that all strobe circuits are synchronous, for all notification appliance circuits. Note that
signal appliances that can synchronize on a single circuit, but not across all circuits
are not acceptable.
G. Signal housings and grilles shall be white in color, imprinted `FIRE` and the strobe
lens shall be clear.
H. Each speaker shall include audio IN and OUT wiring terminals, each designed to
accept two #12 to #18 AWG wires at each terminal and a 10 uF, or as required,
blocking capacitor for compatibility with standard reverse polarity DC voice NAC
circuit supervision.
I. Provide where indicated on plans or as required protective polycarbonate or wire
Device Guards. Minimum of 1/8” thick clear polycarbonate or 10-gauge welded steel
wire constriction with a corrosion resistant finish. To be Space Age Electronics, Inc.
models: SSU03503 HSG Wall Mount Device Guard, SSU03504 FDG Flush Wall
Mount Device Guard, or SSU03500 Ceiling Mount Device Guard as required or
equivalent.
J. Provide strobes, speakers and speaker/strobes as follows:
1. Ceiling Mount Strobe Only full candela range 15/30/75/95/115/150/177 candela:
a. Wheelock model STWC.
b. System Sensor model SCWL.
c. Approved equivalent.
2. Wall Mount Strobe Only full candela range, 15/30/75/95/110/135/185 candela:
a. Wheelock model STW.
b. System Sensor model SWL.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
3. Ceiling Mount Speaker Strobe, small area, low candela range, 15/30 candela:
a. Wheelock model E90H-24MCC-FW.
b. System Sensor model SPSCWL.
4. Ceiling Mount Speaker Strobe, candela range 75/95/115/150/177 – provide:
a. Quam, UL22/25/DM, 2’X2’, tile replacement, outfit with strobe appliance
Wheelock model STWC or System Sensor model SCWL.
b. Quam, UL22/70/DM, 2’X2’, tile replacement, outfit with strobe appliance
Wheelock model STWC or System Sensor model SCWL.
5. Wall Mount Speaker Strobe low candela range 15/30/75/95/110 candela:
a. Wheelock model E70H-24MCW-FW.
b. System Sensor model SPSWL.
6. Wall Mount Speaker Strobe high candela range 135/185 candela:
a. Wheelock model E70H-24MCWH-FW.
b. System Sensor model SPSWL.
7. Ceiling Mount Speaker Only provide:
a. System Sensor model SPCW8.
b. Quam, model UL-7, 8” loudspeaker.
c. Quam, model UL-5, 8” loudspeaker.
d. Quam, model UL22/25, 2’X2’ tile replacement.
e. Quam, model UL22/70, 2’X2’ tile replacement.
f. Approved equivalent.
8. Wall Mount Speaker Only provide:
a. Wheelock model E70H.
b. System Sensor model SPWL.
9. Ceiling mount, outdoor, speaker/strobe provide System Sensor SPSCWK with
weatherproof backbox or approved equivalent.
10. Waterflow speaker/strobe shall be wall mounted above the fire department
connection (Siamese Port) and shall be non-silenceable while water is flowing
through the fire sprinkler system. The outdoor rated speaker/strobe shall be
Wheelock model ET70WP-2475-FW, System Sensor SPSRK, or approved
equivalent. Flush mount exterior devices when possible. For surface mount
applications provide manufacturer furnished backbox.
11. For waterflow speaker/strobe provide a weatherproof sign approximately 12”
wide x 6” high, white with red letters reading, “WATERFLOW FIRE ALARM
SIGNAL”. Configure fire alarm system to activate this strobe signal on waterflow
alarm only and be non-silenceable while the sprinkler system is active (water
flowing). Center signal and sign directly over Fire Department Connection
(Siamese Port).
2.13 MANUAL PULL STATIONS
A. Provide manual fire alarm pull stations as shown on the drawings. Manual fire alarm
pull stations shall be Silent Knight model SK-PULL-DA or equivalent.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
B. Manual stations shall be double action and provide a visible indication they have
been operated. Manual stations shall require a key to be returned to normal condition,
key alike to FACP. It is the responsibility of the Fire Alarm Contractor to ensure that
the pull stations provided allow key reset with the station protector frame/spacer in
place.
C. Provide a tamper proof clear Lexan shield with horn station protector over each pull
station. The protector shall be a Stopper II Manual Station Protector with horn as
manufactured by Safety Technology International, Inc. Waterford, Michigan, part
number STI 1100 flush mount or STI 1130 for surface mount backboxes as required.
For potentially wet areas, provide a similar cover with weather gasket, part number
STI 1150 flush mount or STI 1155 for surface mount backboxes.
D. Each manual station shall be labeled in a visible area with its device hardware
2.14 SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Furnish and install analog spot type photoelectric smoke detectors as as shown on
the drawings. Analog spot type photoelectric smoke detectors shall be Silent Knight
model SK-Photo with B300-6 base.
B. Except for temporary testing, smoke detectors shall not be installed until the building
is ready for occupancy and cleaned as dust free as possible.
C. Each detector head shall be labeled in a visible area with its device hardware address
2.15 CARBON MONOXIDE ALARMS
A. Provide as indicated on plans CO Alarm units listed and rated for commercial
occupancies to be connected to an alarm control panel (system-connected). CO
Alarm units shall be UL Listed and installed in accordance with IBC/IFC and NFPA
requirements.
B. CO Alarm units shall be installed as Single-Station Carbon Monoxide Alarms (non-
tandem operation) and they shall be zoned on a Class A (Style D) four-wire IDC
circuit (six-wire interface (4+2) total between CO Alarm Units including power circuit).
Zoned as indicated on the plans, provide at least one zone per floor.
C. Each zone of CO Alarm units shall be supervised for Alarm and Trouble conditions
through interconnection with an addressable monitor module, which in turn is
supervised through an SLC loop on the main control panel. Each CO Alarm unit shall
be operate as a stand-alone detection and notification subsystem and the function of
each shall not be impaired by any alarm or trouble condition on the other CO Alarm
units in the same zone.
D. All system connected CO Alarm units function as a single system providing zone
notification at the control panel for reporting of CO Alarm or CO Trouble conditions.
CO Trouble includes integral supervision for loss of power.
E. If a dangerous level of Carbon Monoxide gas is detected by a CO Alarm unit, the red
LED alarm light will come on and stay on, the temporal-four pattern audible alarm will
sound, and the Alarm relay will be activated. The CO Alarm unit will automatically

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
reset when CO is no longer detected. If the test/hush button in pushed during an

alarm, it will silence the integral sounder for five minutes, the red LED alarm light will
stay on, and if CO is still present after five minutes, the detector will once again sound
the audible alarm.
F. If there is a problem identified within a CO Alarm unit, on loss of power, or if the end
of unit life indicator expires, the Trouble relay will be activated, in addition to the
various LED blink rates will indicate the exact trouble.
G. The status of each zone of CO Alarm units shall be descriptively annunciated at the
main control panel by zone and shall be distinct from fire alarm status conditions. CO
Alarm signals must take precedence over a CO Trouble signals. CO zone status
signals shall be indicated visually (alphanumeric display description and/or indicator
lights) and audibly (sounder) at the control panel and distinctly transmitted to the
supervising station, in addition to each CO Alarm unit shall include a test/hush button,
multicolored LED status indicator, and a built-in 85 dB Code-4/TC4 (temporal-four
pattern) audible alarm.
H. Each zone of CO Alarm units, as indicated on the plans, shall be a complete
functional interconnected system of devices that includes supervised interface circuits
to the main control panel. These circuits shall be arranged to monitor and annunciate
the status of the CO Alarms and to initiate the appropriate response to those
conditions. The power circuit shall be monitored via the CO Trouble relay when it
indicates loss of power. The power source must be a regulated, filtered, power-
limited, non-resettable, output from a system main or auxiliary control unit, providing
24 VAC operating power with primary (AC Main) and secondary (Battery Backup)
capacity sufficient for operation without AC power for twenty-four hours of normal
supervision and two hours of emergency operation at the end of this period.
I. Each CO Alarm unit shall be labeled in a visible area with its device zone
identification utilizing self-laminating, flexible vinyl film, non-smear, machine printed
labels.
J. Manufactures/Models:
1. Provide as required - System Sensor CO1224TR Carbon Monoxide Detector
Alarm units.
2. Provide one (1) per zone - Addressable Monitor Module to supervise an IDC
zone interface for 4-wire type conventional initiating devices, Class A (Style D) –
Silent Knight model SK-Zone, or equivalent.
3. Provide as required IDC four-conductor wiring, shall be NEC type FPLP Plenum
rated, 16 AWG or 14 AWG, solid four conductor signaling cable. Equivalent by
Atlas, Belden, BSCC, or Remee.
4. Provide as required power circuit two-conductor wiring, shall be NEC type FPLP
Plenum rated, 16 AWG or 14 AWG, solid two conductor signaling cable.
Equivalent by Atlas, Belden, BSCC, or Remee.
2.16 HEAT (THERMAL) DETECTORS
A. Analog spot type rate of rise detectors shall be provided as shown on the drawings.
Provide Silent Knight model SK-HEAT-W-ROR with B300-6 base. The rate of rise
element shall operate when the rate of temperature rise exceeds 15 Fahrenheit per
minute.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
B. Analog fixed temperature heat detector shall be rated at 135 Fahrenheit for areas
where ambient temperatures do not exceed 100 Fahrenheit and shall be Silent
Knight model SK-HEAT-W with B300-6 base.
C. In areas where the ambient temperature does not exceed 150 Fahrenheit the
analog fixed temperature heat detector shall be rated at 190 Fahrenheit and shall
be Silent Knight model SK-HEAT-W-HT with B300-6 base.
D. Each detector head shall be labeled in a visible area with its device hardware address
E. Heat detectors shall be provided where smoke detector coverage is prescribed by this
specification, but ambient conditions prohibit installation due to the likelihood of
nuisance alarms, such as:
1. Very dusty or dirty areas, wood/metal shops.
2. Damp or very humid areas, next to showers.
3. Near furnaces, hot water heaters, or gas space heaters.
4. Near large fresh air inlets, air returns, or excessively drafty areas.
5. Insect-infested areas.
6. Garages or cart parking areas.
7. Outdoor elevator lobbies.
8. Unheated buildings or outdoor rooms subject to extreme temperature changes.
2.17 ISOLATOR MODULE
A. Provide isolator modules in each SLC Class A circuit placed between every 25 or less
devices. Isolator modules shall be Silent Knight model SK-ISO.
2.18 MONITOR MODULE
A. Addressable Monitor Modules shall be provided where an interface is required to
supervise wiring and monitor contact alarm devices. Monitor modules shall be Silent
Knight model SK-MONITOR, SK-MONITOR-2 with end-of-line devices as required.
B. Mini-monitor modules concealed in an electrical box with a blank cover are not
acceptable.
C. Monitor Module to supervise an IDC zone interface for compatible 2 or 4-wire circuit
powered 24 volt normally open conventional smoke or heat detectors – Silent Knight
model SK-ZONE or SK-ZONE-6 with end-of-line devices as required.
D. Each monitor module shall be labeled in a visible area with its device hardware
2.19 CONTROL MODULE
A. Addressable Signal Control Modules shall be provided where required to provide a
NAC control interface for fire alarm signal functions and shall be an SK-CONTROL,
SK-CONTROL-6 as required.
B. Each control module shall be labeled in a visible area with its device hardware

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
2.20 CONTROL RELAY

A. Addressable Control Relays shall be provided where required to provide a control
interface for fire alarm system functions and shall be SK-RELAY, SK-RELAY-2, SK-
RELAY-6 as required.
B. Addressable Control Relays shall be located within three feet of the controlled device
or unit and the relay output (load) wiring shall be configured a fail-safe Fire Safety
Control Function circuit.
C. Each Fire Safety Control Function circuit-controlled device shall be configured such
that when the fire alarm system safety control function circuit is re-energized, by the
fire alarm control panel, the device shall return to normal operation (e.g. re-start or be
ready to re-start) without a need for manual or environmental control system
intervention.
D. Addressable Control Relays shall be used to directly control only pilot duty loads,
those not exceeding 0.5 amps, up to 120 volts, and without transient voltage spikes.
For all applications exceeding these parameters also provide with an Auxiliary Relay
to handle the load.
E. Each control relay shall be labeled in a visible area with its device hardware address
2.21 AUXILIARY RELAY
A. Provide a hardwired Auxiliary Relay paired with the addressable Control Relay for all
fire safety control function applications in which the load exceeds 0.5 amps, 120 volts,
or with high transient voltage spikes.
B. Each relay shall be mounted in a surface mount red metal enclosure with conduit
knockouts. Relays shall be UL recognized and rated for ten million mechanical
operations.
C. Auxiliary relays shall be labeled in a visible area with its device function utilizing self-
laminating, flexible vinyl film, non-smear, machine printed labels.
D. Single pole standard duty Auxiliary Relays shall be operated by a multi-voltage coil
(24 VDC, 24 VAC, 120 VAC, or 230 VAC), feature SPDT dry Form C contacts rated
10 Amps @ 120 VAC, and a status LED to indicate that the relay is energized.
Provide Air Products & Controls model MR-101/C/R, multi-voltage coil, control relay
with red metal enclosure or approved equivalent.
E. Double pole standard duty Auxiliary Relays shall be operated by a multi-voltage coil
(24 VDC, 24 VAC, 120 VAC, or 230 VAC), feature DPDT dry Form C contacts rated
10 Amps @ 120 VAC, and a status LED to indicate that the relay is energized.
Provide Air Products & Controls model MR-201/C/R, multi-voltage coil, control relay
with red metal enclosure or approved equivalent.
F. Double pole heavy duty Auxiliary Relays shall be operated by a 24 VDC or a 120
VAC coil and feature DPDT dry Form C contacts rated at 30A @ 240VAC; 20A @
277VAC; 2HP @ 240VAC / 1.5HP @ 120VAC. Provide Air Products & Controls
model MR-199X-13/C/R (24VDC coil) or MR-199X-14/C/R (120 VAC coil) as
required, heavy duty relay with red metal enclosure or approved equivalent.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
2.22 DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS

A. Refer to mechanical system drawings and schedules and site visit observation for air
handler sizes to determine the locations and quantities of addressable duct smoke
detectors and addressable modules required to monitor and/or control HVAC units,
dampers, smoke control systems, etc.
B. It shall be the sole responsibility of the fire alarm system contractor to furnish and
install all of the fire alarm system devices that are required by the code and the AHJ
for the mechanical systems.
C. The duct smoke detector shall be Silent Knight model SK-DUCT housing with SK-
PHOTOR photoelectric detector head, DSTx series sampling tube, and RA100Z
remote LED or equivalent.
D. Duct mounted smoke detector housings and sample tubes shall be furnished by the
Fire Alarm Contractor and mounted by the Mechanical Contractor. Coordinate with
the mechanical contractor.
E. When smoke is detected by a duct mounted smoke detector it shall activate a
supervisory fire alarm condition at the fire alarm control panel.
F. Install duct smoke detector in the supply or return duct of units supplying greater than
2000 cfm per local AHJ requirements. Install duct smoke detectors in the supply and
return duct of units supplying greater than 15,000 cfm.
G. Each HVAC unit for which a duct mounted smoke detector is installed shall also have
a blower shutdown relay.
H. The activation of any duct mounted smoke detector shall actuate all related fire safety
control functions: air handler shut down relays, smoke fire damper motors, fire door
release devices, et cetera.
I. Each duct mounted detector housing shall be labeled in a visible area with its device
hardware address utilizing self-laminating, flexible vinyl film, non-smear, machine
printed labels.
J. Each detector shall be provided with a remote power/status LED and remote testing
function. The remote LED indicator shall be located in the nearest corridor ceiling
unless otherwise directed.
K. The status LED shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is
operational and in regular communication with the control panel. The LED shall be
placed into steady illumination when a supervisory fire alarm condition has been
detected.
L. Each remote LED faceplate shall have a self-laminating, flexible vinyl film, non-smear,
machine printed label indicating the HVAC unit number, type, and device identification
number as programmed in panel.
2.23 HVAC UNIT BLOWER SHUT-DOWN AND SMOKE DAMPER OR FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER
OPERATION
A. Refer to the mechanical system drawings, schedules and site visit observation to
determine the locations and quantities of addressable modules required to control

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
HVAC blowers, dampers, smoke control systems, etc.

B. It shall be the sole responsibility of the fire alarm system contractor to furnish and
install all of the fire alarm system devices that are required by the code and the AHJ
for the mechanical systems.
C. The contractor providing the device shall wire it internally for fail-safe shut-down and
provide a labeled 3` coil of cable outside the unit to allow the fire alarm contractor to
make final connection to the dry contacts on the controlling relay.
D. Provide an addressable control relay to control air handler shutdown of each unit
without smoke dampers or fire/smoke dampers located in that unit’s duct system as
indicated on the project mechanical plans.
E. Provide an addressable control relay, a double pole auxiliary relay, and a line voltage
120 VAC, fire safety control function circuit to control air handler shutdown of each
unit with smoke dampers or fire/smoke dampers located in that unit’s duct system as
indicated on the project mechanical plans.
F. Units with at least one supply grille serving a major path of egress (corridors, open
concept classroom groups) shall have a shut-down control relay, even if unit is less
than 2,000 CFM capacity. The shut-down will be activated on general alarm, which
shall include any alarm from the smoke detectors in the corridor.
G. Duct detector supervisory alarm condition shutdown function shall be limited to a
single unit or group of units as required. A shutdown of all the facility’s units on a
single duct detector supervisory alarm shall be prohibited.
2.24 EMERGENCY RESPONDER RADIO COVERAGE SYSTEM MONITORING
A. The Emergency Responder Radio Coverage System (ERRCS), bi-directional
amplifier shall provide contacts to monitor status of the system per IFC Chapter 510.
Coordinate with the ERRCS Contractor.
2.25 AUTOMATIC FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
A. All automatic fire suppression systems shall be monitored by the fire alarm system.
The activation of any automatic fire suppression system shall produce an alarm
condition. Refer to the drawings and site visit observation to determine quantities and
locations of the kitchen hood suppression system controls.
B. The kitchen ventilation hood suppression system shall provide contacts to monitor
activation of system, coordinate with existing conditions and the Food Service
Equipment Contractor. Provide monitor modules as required for alarm functions.
2.26 BUILDING LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Provide a fire alarm addressable control relay, located at the FACP, configured to
activate on general alarm building illumination per NFPA 101 Section 7.8 Illumination
of Means of Egress. The lighting control system contractor shall provide all
associated hardware and wiring from this single fire alarm output to the lighting
control system.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
2.27 SOUND SYSTEM AND HOUSE LIGHTING CONTROLS

A. When required, provide a fire alarm addressable control relay, located at the sound
system head end equipment location, to activate on general alarm that shall override
the stage and theater production sound and lighting equipment. Configure one set of
contacts to provide a dry contact input to the sound system to shut down the theater
sound, and the second set of contacts to provide an input to override the theatrical
lighting and to turn on or turn up the house lighting to normal levels. The theatrical
equipment system contractor shall provide all associated hardware and wiring from
the fire alarm addressable control relay output to the sound and lighting system
equipment.
2.28 ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLD OPEN AND RELEASE
A. Refer to the Architectural drawings, door and door hardware schedules and site visit
observation to determine the locations and quantities of electromagnetic door hold
open devices required. Unless otherwise provided with door assembly, supply Rixson
Firemark FM-998 series, Edwards model DH150A or 1504-AQN5 series door holders;
24 VAC, mounting style, single or double, or equivalent.
B. Provide required devices and connections for holdbacks integrated into door systems
when supplied.
C. The fire alarm contractor shall verify voltages, exact style, and quantity required with
architectural plans and door schedules.
D. Secure hardware to door drilled through with “Chicago Bolts” (barrel nut/mating screw
with a low-profile head on each side to prevent pull out.
E. Provide adequate blocking in wall for the magnet installation. The backbox and
magnet installation shall withstand the force of the door being separated from the
magnet while energized.
F. Operating power shall be 24VDC and power shall be from a fire alarm power supply
panel. Program an output circuit on the fire alarm power supply panel as a “door
holder power” circuit.
G. A “door holder power” circuit shall provide a constant 24VDC to the electromagnetic
door hold open devices in a system “normal” state. On any alarm the “door holder
power” circuit shall discontinue power to the electromagnetic door hold open devices
allowing the doors to close. The 24VDC will be restored to the circuit on a fire alarm
system reset.
H. When AC power to the fire alarm power supply panel is off for more than 15 seconds
the “door holder power” will be discontinued to conserve the battery backup power.
2.29 SPRINKLER RISER WATERFLOW AND TAMPER SWITCHES
A. Refer to fire protection drawings, specifications and site visit observation to determine
quantities of fire sprinkler devices that requiring monitoring and supervision. It shall be
the sole responsibility of the fire alarm system contractor to furnish and install all fire
alarm system devices required by the code and the AHJ to monitor and supervise the
fire protection systems.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
B. Waterflow switches shall be provided and installed by the sprinkler system contractor.
Provide an addressable monitor module for each sprinkler waterflow switch on a riser
zone. The monitor module shall be programmed for a fire alarm condition.
C. Sprinkler and standpipe valve supervisory switches shall be provided and installed by
the sprinkler system contractor. Provide an addressable monitor module for each
sprinkler system water supply control valve riser or zone control valve, and each
standpipe system riser control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch
device with a normally open dry contact for supervision by the fire alarm system. The
addressable monitor module shall be programmed for a supervisory condition.
D. Each Post Indicator Valve (PIV) or main gate valve shall be equipped with a
supervisory switch and shall be provided and installed by the sprinkler system
contractor. Provide and addressable monitor module for each PIV or gate valve. The
addressable monitor module shall be programmed for a supervisory condition.
E. When applicable, provide dry contact input fire alarm system monitor modules for
individual additional sprinkler system alarm and supervisory conditions such as fire
pump controller, pre-action sprinkler riser and dry pipe system air pressure status
supervision.
F. All wiring, monitor modules, end of line devices, and connection to the fire alarm
system shall be by the fire alarm contractor.
G. All sprinkler system alarm and supervisory conditions shall be annunciated at the
panel and transmitted to the monitoring service by the digital communicator.
H. Valve tamper switches and other supervisory devices as required shall initiate a
supervisory condition and may be grouped up to twenty devices per IDC when
acceptable to the AHJ. Grouping shall be limited to risers within the same room by
this specification. Coordinate with Section 21 13 14.
2.30 ELEVATOR RECALL FOR FIRE FIGHTER’S SERVICE
A. Elevator recall functions are to be activated by the presence of smoke only in the
elevator lobby, elevator hoistway, elevator machine room, elevator control room, and
elevator control space. This shall be accomplished by smoke detectors at the
locations mentioned and control relays or circuits to activate the elevator recall
functions. The fire alarm system shall be programmed or circuited to activate the
appropriate control circuit when smoke is detected at these specific locations only.
The functions shall be elevator control circuit (designated level recall), elevator control
circuit (alternate level recall), and elevator warning signal (warning that the elevator is
not safe to use). Refer to NFPA 72 Section 21.3.13 and ASME A17.1 Section 2.27
(Electric Elevators) or 3.27 (Hydraulic Elevators) for control sequence. Smoke
Detectors shall be installed in each elevator lobby. Smoke detectors shall be located
at the top of the elevator hoistway when sprinklers are located above the lowest level
of recall. Where sprinklers are located in the bottom of the hoistway, a smoke
detector listed for the environment shall be is installed within the pit. Smoke detectors
shall be located in the elevator machine room if the machine room is sprinklered.
Elevator equipment room smoke detectors and any smoke detectors in a sprinklered
elevator shaft shall be programmed at the fire alarm panel to alert fire fighters when
elevators are not safe to use. Provide control relays programmed for each recall
function at the elevator controls.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
2.31 ELEVATOR SHUTDOWN

A. When an elevator shaft or equipment room is sprinklered, a shunt-trip breaker shall
be provided on the elevator main power line circuit. The shunt-trip shall be activated
by heat detectors prior to the application of water and the means shall not be self-
resetting. The activation of sprinklers outside of the hoistway or equipment room shall
not disconnect the main line power supply. Refer to NFPA 72 Section 21.4 and ASME
A17.1 Section 2.8 (2.8.2.3.2) for control requirements. Means shall be provided to
automatically disconnect the main power supply line to the affected elevator upon or
prior to the application of water from sprinklers located in the machine room or in the
hoistway more than 24 inches above the pit floor.
B. The heat detectors provided shall feature both a lower temperature rating and a
higher sensitivity than the sprinkler heads located these areas. Coordinate with the
sprinkler system contractor. A heat detector shall be located within two feet of each
sprinkler head in the elevator equipment room and hoistway.
C. Provide fixed temperature heat detectors, they may be either addressable type
attached to a SLC or point contact type devices on a dedicated two-wire IDC zone
wired Class B with electrical supervision and end of line device. Provide a control
relay to activate the shunt-trip breaker control circuit only when these particular heat
detectors detect an alarm condition.
D. Provide a monitor module for the Fire Alarm Voltage Monitoring Relay of the power
disconnection interface (to monitor shunt trip voltage). Main line power disconnection
shunt trip breaker operating power shall be monitored for the presence of operating
voltage, per NFPA 72 - 2016 Section 24.4.4, and initiate a supervisory condition on
detection of power loss.
E. Local Authorities Having Jurisdiction may have amended code requirements for
elevator systems in their jurisdiction. Reference local amended code requirements
and provide elevator fire alarm controls per the local AHJ requirements.
2.32 CABLING
A. The fire alarm contractor shall provide and install new and unused ASTM bare solid
or stranded copper conductor cable per ANSI/NEMA, NEC and NFPA codes. Follow
the manufacturer`s instructions. All cable shall be UL listed for fire protective, power
limited applications. All cable exposed in plenum attic spaces shall comply with UL
910, UL 1424, and UL 1581 vertical tray flame test.
B. Cabling shall be in accordance with local, state, and national codes (e.g., NEC Article
760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and
size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer,
but not less than 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for initiating device circuits and signaling line
circuits, and 14 AWG (1.63 mm) for notification appliance circuits.
C. Cable not installed in conduit shall have a fire resistance rating suitable for the
installation as indicated in NFPA 70 (e.g., FPLP).
D. Signaling Line Circuit (SLC): Use shielded, or unshielded cabling as recommended by
the FACP manufacturer. When recommended, shielded cable should be utilized to
minimize electrical noise interference with data transmission. Shield drain wire to be
grounded at one end only.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
E. Between Building Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) or Network Node Circuits: Cabling
between buildings shall be enclosed in conduit, including underground and over
canopy installations. Cable installed in conduit between buildings shall be rated for
direct burial. Use shielded or unshielded cabling as recommended by the FACP
manufacturer.
F. Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC): All audible/visual signaling circuits shall be NEC
type FPLP as required. Equivalent by West Penn, Atlas, Belden, BSCC, or Remee.
G. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC): All conventional contact alarm circuits and low voltage
control circuits shall be NEC type FPLP as required. Equivalent by West Penn, Atlas,
Belden, BSCC, or Remee.
H. Remote, supervised, 24 volt fire alarm device power: Two-conductor unshielded
wiring, shall be NEC type FPLP, 16 AWG, 14 AWG, or 12 AWG, solid two conductor
signaling cable. Equivalent by West Penn, Atlas, Belden, BSCC, or Remee.
2.33 CABLE ROUTING, INSTALLATION
A. The system cable, support and raceway installation shall be in accordance with good
engineering practices and as established by the NFPA, the NEC and the Texas
Insurance Code. Wiring shall meet all state and local electrical code requirements.
B. All cable shall have a label on both ends utilizing self-laminating, flexible vinyl film,
non-smear, machine printed labels.
C. Fire alarm cables shall be run in bundles above accessible ceilings and supported
from building structure building structure by j-hooks, conduit or cable tray.
D. No terminations or splices shall be installed in or above ceilings.
E. Fire alarm cables shall not be run loose on ceiling grid or ceiling tiles.
F. Each cable run shall include a three-foot service loop with wire tie located in the
G. All cabling shall be placed with regard to the environment, EMI/RFI interference, and
its effect on fire alarm signal transmission.
H. Do not route any fire alarm cable within two feet of any light fixture, HVAC unit,
I. Fire alarm cable must not be fastened to electrical conduits, mechanical
ductwork/piping, sprinkler pipes.
J. Plenum rated Velcro hook cable ties shall be furnished and installed to attach wire
bundles to supports and for appropriate wire management as required. Tie wraps
made of hard plastic or metal will not be allowed.
K. Cabling shall be loosely bundled with cable ties randomly spaced at 30 to 48 inches
on center, cable ties shall not be tight enough to deform cabling and shall not be used
to support the cabling.
L. Attachments for cabling support shall be spaced at approximately 48 to 60 inches on

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
between attachments. Provide J-hoods as follows:

1. Bundles up to 1/2" diameter - 3/4" J-Hook
2. Bundles up to 1" diameter - 1-1/2" J-Hook
3. Bundles up to 1-1/2" diameter - 2" J-Hook
4. Bundles greater than 1-1/2" diameter - provide cable tray.
M. Do not mix different signal cables on the same J-Hook (i.e. fire alarm with
telephone/data cable).
N. Cable shall not be installed in the same conduit or surface track raceway with line
voltage electrical cable without a metallic barrier meeting NEC requirements.
O. Cable bends shall not be tighter that the manufacturers’ suggested bend radius.
P. The cable shall not be crushed, deformed, skinned, crimped, twisted, or formed into
Q. Maximum cable pulling tension should not exceed 25 pound-force (110 N) or the
R. Any pulling compounds utilized must be approved by the cable manufacturer and
S. The cable pathway supports of ceiling installed devices must be positioned at least 12
inches above the ceiling grid. The required support wires for the ceiling grid or light
fixtures shall not be utilized for support attachment.
T. Cable routing must not obstruct hatches, doors, utility access panels, fire doors,
ventilation shafts, grates, service work areas or parallel for more than four-feet with
line voltage electrical conductors.
2.34 VELCRO CABLE TIE WRAPS (PLENUM RATED)
A. Plenum rated Velcro hook cable ties shall be furnished and installed to attach wire
bundles to supports and for appropriate wire management as required. Provide and
install Panduit TAK-TY HLTP series cable ties with UL 94-V2 flammability rating, or
equivalent.
B. Tie wraps made of hard plastic or metal will not be allowed on this project.
2.35 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT POWER
A. Line voltage for each fire alarm system control unit shall be provided as follows:
1. Through individual dedicated branch circuits.
2. Each fire alarm control unit cabinet shall be grounded securely to the building
grounding system.
3. Each branch circuit shall not be supplied through ground-fault circuit interrupters
or arc-fault circuit interrupters.
4. Circuit breakers shall be labeled in red as FIRE ALARM.
5. Secure the “ON” breaker handle with a lockout clip that is red and clearly labeled
“FIRE ALARM”
a. Provide Space Age Electronics “ELOCK” or equivalent.
6. A breaker panel key shall be stored within the locked cabinet of each fire alarm
control unit served by the breaker panel.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
7. The location of the circuit breaker panel serving each fire alarm control unit shall
be posted in the fire alarm control unit cabinet.
2.36 CONDUIT, SURFACE TRACK RACEWAY, ROUTING, INSTALLATION
A. Conduit and surface track raceway and support installation shall be in accordance
with good engineering practices and as established by the NFPA, the NEC and the
Texas Insurance Code. Conduit installation shall meet all state and local electrical
code requirements.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the fire alarm electrical contractor to provide and install
all conduit systems and standard electrical boxes for the fire alarm system.
C. The fire alarm contractor shall coordinate all requirements with, and provide special
back boxes to, the electrical contractor prior to installation of conduit.
D. In all exposed and open ceiling areas such as gymnasiums, shops, field houses,
janitors’ closets, elevator hoist ways, and mechanical / electrical rooms all fire alarm
cable shall be fully enclosed in conduit.
E. Definitions:
1. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) for indoor applications. Compression fittings for
EMT shall be used. Set screw fittings are not acceptable.
2. Rigid metallic tubing (RMT) for outdoor applications. Threaded fittings for shall
be used for RMT conduit.
3. Flexible metallic conduit (FMC) for indoor applications. FMC is approved for
short protected cable connections to the device. Support FMC per NEC.
4. Surface track raceway shall be Wiremold® or equivalent. Surface track raceway
shall be utilized for indoor finished surfaces where concealed cable is
impracticable or impossible. Back boxes of the same manufacturer and color
shall be installed.
5. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) for underground installations. Follow burial depth,
protection and conduit fill per NEC.
F. Conduit and surface track raceway shall be complete with bushings, de-burred,
cleaned, and secure prior to installation of cable.
G. Conduit and surface track raceway bends shall not be tighter that the manufacturers’
suggested bend radius.
H. All conduit and surface track raceway shall be supported from the structure at
Cable fill may not exceed the standard set forth by the NEC.
I. All conduit and surface track raceway runs shall be spaced apart to allow for
maintenance without disturbing adjacent pathways.
J. Conduit and surface track raceway shall not obstruct hatches, doors, utility access
panels, fire doors, ventilation shafts, grates or service work areas.
K. Conduit stubs from wall boxes to accessible areas above finished ceilings shall be
provided for wall mounted devices. Provide bushings to protect the cable from
damage from metal openings as follows:
1. Box openings - Thomas & Betts Series 3210 or equivalent.
2. Conduit ends - Thomas & Betts Series 390 or equivalent.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent

A. All ceiling mounted devices including smoke detectors, heat detectors, remote
power/status LEDs, ceiling mounted strobes and horn/strobes, et cetera, when
mounted in a drop ceiling shall be supported by an electrical box hanger (Caddy #512
or #512A for deep boxes - 24" span), or equivalent. Box hangers shall be attached to
the ceiling grid only for lateral stabilization, separate support wires shall be provided.
The required support wires for the ceiling grid or light fixtures shall not be utilized. The
backbox shall be flush and level with the bottom of the ceiling tile and the hole neatly
cut for a finished appearance when the device is installed.
2.38 SURGE PROTECTION
A. Each incoming 120VAC power circuit shall be provided with an electrical surge
protection module. Provide one for each fire alarm control unit, this shall include every
fire alarm control panel, digital communicator, signal power expander and any other
120VAC powered fire alarm control units. Each power circuit surge protector module
shall be Ditek DTK-120SRD or equivalent.
B. Surge protection shall be provided for all exterior devices, communications service or
antenna entrance connections, and for each circuit that connects one building to
another (i.e. any other portion of a building complex not under one continuous roof) at
both entry/exit points to prevent damage to equipment. Each surge protector shall be
UL listed and mounted in a standard grounded metallic electric box or equipment
backboard with a separate ground wire ran directly to the ground bus bar or
equipment panel ground stud, do not daisy chain ground wires.
A. Notify the Builder sufficiently ahead of construction of any floors, walls, ceiling, roof, et
cetera, of any openings that will be required for his work.
or at the Subcontractor's expense in a neat and workmanlike manner, and as
approved by the Architect/Engineer.
D. Patching of openings and/or alterations shall be provided by the Electronic Safety and
Security Subcontractor or at the Subcontractor's expense in an approved manner.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
2.40 FIRE STOPPING, DRAFT/NOISE STOPPING, PENETRATIONS, CORING
instructions.
wall/floor penetrations with ductwork, piping, line voltage electrical conduits, et cetera.
C. Penetrations through non-rated walls shall include draft/noise stopping to minimize
the transfer of air and sound between enclosed areas. Provide the penetration as in
the rated wall instructions and install non-combustible mineral, wool, fiberglass,
cellulose insulation, caulk, and/or sealant as required.
D. Sleeves placed for new construction shall be coordinated with the building Architect,
Engineer, Builder and Electrical Contractor so that later coring or drilling of building
structural members will not be required. The Contractor must consult with the building
Architect, Engineer, and Builder to place sleeves at approved, appropriate locations.
E. Any concrete coring required this Contractor shall supply all labor, equipment, tools,
materials and pay for the X-ray and concrete coring contractor to create any
additional penetrations. Approval shall be required by the Architect/Engineer before
coring can take place. Under no circumstances shall penetrations be made without
approval. Care shall be taken not to stress, overheat, or penetrate any building
support member. Utilizing a chisel or percussion type equipment is forbidden.
PART 3 PROJECT EXECUTION AND INSTALLATION

3.1 INSTALLATION
B. The Electronic Safety and Security Contractor shall coordinate installation of the
electronic safety and security systems with the Builder, Electrical, Mechanical, and
Plumbing Contractors to insure a complete working system for the Owner.
C. Where required for accessibility all conduit and boxes shall be provided by the
Electrical Contractor as specified, including systems in Division 28, any and all
allowances shall be included. Normally low voltage wiring shall run open and
supported in accessible attic space. All low voltage wiring in exposed areas such as
gyms, stages, shops, and field houses shall be enclosed in conduit. Coordinate with,
and verify with Division 26 to provide required conduit and boxes at locations and

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
heights as required.
pathways.
G. Coordinate the actual locations of devices and outlets and equipment with building
3.2 IMPLEMENTATION
A. Verify phasing in regard to systems and coordinate before energizing any system.
B. When required during phases of construction to maintain existing systems in service
in particular areas, provide temporary wiring and connections as necessary to
accommodate construction.
A. When the phasing of a project requires that fire alarm systems are operable in certain
areas and the Owner needs to operate the equipment, such provisions shall be made
by the contractor. The warranty period shall commence when the equipment is
operated for the beneficial use of the Owner. Regardless of whether or not the
by the Owner. The date of acceptance and the start of the warranty may not be the
same date.
3.4 SIGNAL TYPES (SYSTEM STATUS)
A. General: The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall indicate various conditions or signals
depending on system inputs. In all instances, a more severe signal shall override all
less severe signals. All events are to be recorded with time and date in an electronic
event history log maintained by the fire alarm control panel. The following is a short
description of conditions that the Fire Alarm Control Panel is required to indicate in
order of severity.
1. WATERFLOW FIRE ALARM: A waterflow signal is a special alarm condition that
is only applicable when an automatic building sprinkler or similar system is
monitored. It indicates that at least one sprinkler head is open, so in addition to a
fire, the premises are subject to water damage. This signal is transmitted on a
special channel on the digital communicator. This is a fire alarm condition and all
actions listed under fire alarm shall take place.
2. FIRE ALARM: This alarm signal is indicative of fire. Such a signal indicates an
emergency requiring immediate action. All premises audible and visual

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
notification appliances shall operate and the protected premises evacuated. A

local audible alert shall sound, the alarm LED illuminate, and descriptive
message appear on the LCD display at the panel and any remote annunciators
until the panel is reset. The digital communicator transmits a fire alarm signal.
3. SUPERVISORY ALARM: A supervisory signal indicates the need for action
concerning a duct mounted smoke detector, or the maintenance of related
systems. An audible alert shall sound, the supervisory LED illuminate, and
descriptive message appear on the LCD display at the panel and any remote
annunciators until silenced. The digital communicator transmits a supervisory
signal.
4. TROUBLE: A trouble signal indicates a fault in a monitored circuit or component
of the fire alarm system. This could be a short, open, or ground in a supervised
circuit. It could also indicate a device or battery failure. A local audible alert shall
sound, the trouble LED illuminate, and descriptive message appear on the LCD
display at the panel and any remote annunciators until silenced. The digital
communicator transmits a trouble signal.
5. MAINTENANCE ALERT: A maintenance alert is an early warning of a condition
before a device becomes inoperable. This is often a smoke detector that needs
cleaning or other normal maintenance item. The maintenance alert shall display
on the panel and any remote annunciator LCD display until acknowledged. No
audible alert shall sound and no signal transmitted, in order that this condition
not be confused with a supervisory or trouble condition.
6. NORMAL: All systems and supervised circuits functioning normally.
A. Alarm Condition: When a fire alarm condition is indicated by any manual pull station,
heat detector, area smoke detector shall cause the following actions or effects to take
place:
1. At the panel and any remote annunciators, a system alarm LED shall flash and a
local sounding device shall activate.
2. The 80-character LCD display shall indicate all pertinent information associated
with the alarm condition and its location.
3. The digital communicator shall activate and transmit a GENERAL ALARM signal
to the monitoring company.
4. All audible and visual signal devices shall activate and operate until silenced
manually, or until automatically silenced, by the control panel. Any subsequent
alarm from another device shall automatically reactivate all audible and visual
signal devices.
5. Fire safety control functions related to providing free egress from the facility shall
be activated on general alarm, including the automatic opening of any controlled
motorized security grills and automatic unlocking for egress of any controlled
non-fire rated security doors or gates.
6. Fire safety control functions conditional on the detection of an alarm condition in
one or more designated adjacent area smoke detectors shall be activated
independently on a one-for-one basis, these functions may include air handler
shutdown of units without a duct mounted smoke detector, electromagnetic door
hold back release, release of overhead coiling or hinged fire or smoke rated
doors or shutters (those designed to close in order to control the spread of fire or
smoke), high volume low speed (HVLS) fan shut down, and any other conditional
operations such as elevator recall.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
7. Each Fire Safety Control Function circuit controlled device shall be configured
such that when the fire alarm system safety control function circuit is re-
energized, by the fire alarm control panel, the device shall return to normal
operation (e.g. be ready to re-start) without a need for manual or environmental
control system intervention.
8. The FACP event history storage equipment shall log the information associated
each new fire alarm control panel condition, along with time and date of
occurrence.
B. When a dangerous accumulation of Carbon Monoxide gas is detected on any CO
detection unit zone the following actions or effects shall take place:
1. At the individual initiating CO detection unit, the red LED alarm light will come on
and stay on, the temporal-four pattern audible sounder base alarm will sound.
2. At the panel and any remote annunciators, a system alarm LED shall flash and a
local sounding device shall activate.
3. The 80-character LCD display shall indicate Carbon Monoxide Alarm, the zone
number, and its location.
4. The digital communicator shall activate and transmit a Carbon Monoxide Alarm,
the zone number, and its location to the monitoring company.
5. The FACP event history storage equipment shall log the information associated
each new fire alarm control panel condition, along with time and date of
occurrence.
C. The detection of any system internal or external trouble condition or the actuation of
any supervisory alarm condition, as applicable, including any duct mounted smoke
detector shall automatically cause the following actions to take place:
1. At the panel and any remote annunciators, a system supervisory alarm LED or
trouble LED shall flash as appropriate and a local sounding device shall activate.
Audible supervisory or trouble alerts that have been silenced shall automatically
resound every twenty-four hours or less until repairs are made.
2. The 80-character LCD display shall indicate all pertinent information associated
with the trouble or supervisory condition and its location; however,
unacknowledged alarm messages shall have priority over trouble messages.
3. The digital communicator shall activate and transmit a SUPERVISORY or
TROUBLE signal to the monitoring company.
4. Conditional activation on supervisory alarm of any automatic programs assigned
to the supervisory alarm point shall be executed and the associated indicating
devices and relays shall be activated. When duct mounted smoke detectors
indicate a supervisory alarm provide instantaneous activation of related fire
safety control functions including any electromagnetic door hold back and
release devices and any air handler shut down relays and smoke fire damper
motors.
5. Detection of a supervisory alarm in a duct mounted smoke detector shall initiate
shutdown of the associated air handler and closing of any smoke dampers or
fire/smoke dampers located in that unit’s duct system, on a conditional one-for-
one basis.
3.6 BASIC SETUP AND TESTING
A. The completed system is to be tested for compliance with the specifications.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent

C. Prior to the testing, ensure that the system is free of short circuits, ground loops,
excessive system noise beyond published specifications of the equipment, hum, RF
interference, or instability of any form.
D. The testing work shall be performed after installation has been completed, but prior to
any use of the system.
E. All audio inputs, including live microphone, automated evacuation messages,
temporary testing signal, and any additional low priority inputs such as an
intercom/public address, telephone system paging, and background music (if
approved by the LAHJ), shall be adjusted and matched to the produce proper
effective volume output from the system.
F. Always operate audio amplifiers and speakers within their specified ratings.
Excessive input may distort sound quality and may damage audio equipment. Do not
exceed +130% of speaker input voltage per UL 1480. Improper input voltage can
damage speaker. If distortion is heard, check for clipping of the audio appliance with
an oscilloscope and reduce the amplifier input level or gain level to eliminate any
clipping.
G. Check the installation instructions of the manufacturers of other equipment used in
the system for any guidelines or restrictions on wiring and/or locating Voice
Notification Appliance Circuits (Voice NAC) and notification appliances. Some system
communication circuits and/or audio circuits, for example, may require special
precautions to assure electrical noise immunity (e.g. audio crosstalk).
H. The system shall be set up for a general occupancy and at no point in the testing or
operation of the system shall output be allowed to exceed 95 dB at any occupiable
position to prevent possible hearing damage, and system damage. It is prohibited at
any time to “ring out” the system by turning it up until it distorts.
I. The installer shall maximize the gain structure and balance each system component
to provide the least possible variation in sound level and frequency response in each
area as required. The testing shall be performed with a minimum of the following
equipment:
1. Professional 1/3 octave Real Time Analyzer (RTA) and Type One sound
pressure level (SPL) meter - Ivie IE-30A or PC-40 with calibrated microphone or
equivalent by Crown or White Instruments.
2. Pink Noise Generator - Ivie IE-20B or equivalent by Crown or White Instruments.
3.7 PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. After basic setup and testing, the sound system shall meet or exceed the following
specifications:
1. System shall be free of short circuits, ground loops, parasitic oscillation,
excessive system noise, hum, and instability of any form, including RF
interference.
2. Maximum SPL with band-limited pink noise input to the system shall be 95 dB
before audible distortion occurs.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
B. Acoustic response of the system shall be plus or minus 1.5 dB along a line which is
flat from 100 Hz to 1250 Hz and which rolls off at 2 dB per octave to 8 kHz.
3.8 VOICE INTELLIGIBILITY TESTING
A. Once the basic setup is complete, the gain structure is maximized, and the
performance testing as outlined above is completed, this contractor shall conduct
voice intelligibility testing as prescribed in the NFPA 72, the local AHJ, and as follows:
1. The building shall be divided into Acoustically Distinguishable Spaces for testing
by basic areas of the building and single rooms.
2. Final voice intelligibility testing shall be conducted in accordance with the test
instrument manufactures written instructions and during normal hours of
operation and under normal building occupancy conditions including all final
room finishes, furnishings, and with a nominal number of occupants at their
normal activity level, or as near as these conditions can be simulated. Simulation
may include taking sample background noise measurements or “captured
curves” for each designated ADS with stand in personnel for use in the testing
process.
3. From each designated fixed-point test location in each ADS, the technician shall
calibrate the test instrument, measure, and record the STI value while the test
signal is played through the entire building emergency communication system.
4. Voice intelligibility test results for this emergency communication system will be
acceptable if at least 90% of the measurement locations within each ADS has a
measured STI of not less than 0.45 (CIS of not less than 0.65), and an average
STI of not less than 0.50 (an average CIS of not less than 0.70). The contractor
shall make any system adjustments or modifications needed for each ADS to
pass the indelibility testing.
5. If an ADS does not meet the above requirements due to low readings, the testing
procedures shall be verified, and adjustments made that may include increasing
the volume of individual speakers, changing types or adding additional speakers,
or working with the Architect to provide acoustical treatments that will reduce
inordinate background noise and/or reverberation.
6. The final acceptance of the system by the Owner/Architect/Engineer will be
based upon the proper performance of the completed system.
3.9 SYSTEM RECORD OF COMPLETION, INSPECTION AND TESTING, WARRANTY,
SERVICE
A. A factory-trained representative of the manufacturer shall supervise the final
connections and testing of the system and it shall be subject to the final acceptance
of the Architect, Engineer, and local authorities. Testing shall be per NFPA 72,
Chapter 7 Documentation. Provide applicable forms for each Record of Completion,
Inspection and Testing and other documents from NFPA 72, Chapter 7. Testing shall
include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Before energizing the system check all cables for correct connections and test
2. Close each sprinkler system valve with a tamper switch, when applicable, and
verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP.
3. Verify alarm activation of waterflow switches by operation of the test port valve
on each riser (when applicable).
4. Open each initiating device circuit and verify that the trouble signal actuates.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
5. Open and short each signaling line circuit and verify that the trouble signal
actuates.
6. Open and short each notification appliance circuit and verify that trouble signal
actuates.
7. Individually ground each circuit and verify response of trouble signals.
8. Check for presence of strobe signal and audibility of tone at all alarm notification
devices.
9. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all area detectors using the walk
test.
10. Check installation, configuration, and operation of all duct mounted smoke
detectors. Verify that there is adequate airflow through the sample tubes and
housing to activate the detector when smoke is present in the duct.
11. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be
introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of
the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points.
12. Verify proper operation of all fire safety control functions including when
applicable fire door hold open/release, coiling fire door release, air handler
shutdown, smoke damper or fire/smoke damper control, high volume low speed
(HVLS) fan shut down, and the automatic opening of any controlled motorized
security grills and automatic unlocking for egress of any controlled non-fire rated
security doors or gates.
13. Check operation of elevator recall and shunt-trip when applicable.
14. Ensure that all dust covers are removed from smoke and heat detectors at
B. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall be ultimately responsible for safe and complete
operation of the system. Any issues affecting proper operation of the system relating
to the Electrical, Mechanical, Fire Protection, Fire Suppression or other contractors
shall be resolved by the Fire Alarm Contractor, at no additional cost to, and without
requesting intervention by the Owner.
C. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall provide a complete, dated, installation certificate
meeting state requirements for each installation including a System Record of
Completion and an Emergency Communications Systems Supplementary Record of
Completion. A Fire Alarm Installation Record sticker listing the; installation firm`s
name, address, and telephone number; signature of Licensee and license number;
Fire Alarm Planning Superintendents name and license number; and the installation
date, meeting state requirements shall be attached to the main fire alarm control
panel. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall submit a copy of the installation certificate,
final testing forms with final results and speech intelligibility testing results to the
Architect at the time of substantial completion.
D. The contractor shall provide a labor warranty of the installed system against defects
in material or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial
completion. Provide the equipment manufacturer’s warranty information with the
operating and maintenance (O&M) manual.
E. Equipment or cabling shown to be defective shall be replaced, repaired, or adjusted
free of charge. All equipment will carry a one-year warranty or manufacturer’s
warranty whichever is greater. All labor and materials shall be provided at no expense
to the Owner.

Argyle
ArgyleElementary
90 Percent
F. Immediately prior to the end of the warranty period, the system shall be inspected and
certified for the following year at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.10 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS, MANUALS, TRAINING
A. As-built drawings and operating and maintenance (O&M) manuals may be
electronically transmitted in PDF file format (preferred) or paper copies may be
provided in quantities indicated in Division 1. Paper copies shall be organized
including index tabs in a 3-ring black binder of sufficient size.
B. Upon completion of the installation, and prior to final inspection, the fire alarm
Contractor shall furnish as-built drawings.
C. In addition, the fire alarm contractor shall furnish complete operating and
maintenance manuals listing the manufacturer`s name(s), including technical data
sheets. Manuals shall include wiring diagrams to indicate internal wiring for each
device and the interconnections between the items of equipment. Provide a clear and
concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information required to
properly operate the equipment and system. Provide a parts list with manufacturer
and model number for commonly replaced parts. Include complete instructions for the
inspection, testing, and maintenance of the system.
D. Provide fire alarm testing frequency information to the owner in the O&M manual per
NFPA 72, Section 14.4.4.
E. Provide the Owner a copy of the panel control software including the licensed
program, site specific data file, and passwords that the Owner may require to
maintain the system.
F. The fire alarm contractor shall conduct formal on-site training sessions. It shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate time and location of training sessions
with the Owner. Provide documented general instruction as follows:
Provide a minimum of four (4) hours-two 2-hour sessions separated by a
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM including capabilities, limitations,
monitoring, and the meaning of status messages. State the proper procedure for
fire drills, routine maintenance, and request for service. Provide a minimum of
four (4) hours-two 2-hour sessions separated by a minimum of two weeks.
END OF SECTION

Argyle Elementary School No. 4 Project 22296.0000
90 Percent Package 20 April 2023
SECTION 31 10 00
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for site clearing and
grubbing, and stripping topsoil as required, in accord with provisions of Contract
Documents.
B. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
C. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary
or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation. Also included in this section is the
preparation of the “Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan” (SWPPP), installation of
the erosion control devices per the SWPPP, completion of the “Notice of Intent”
(NOI), and submittal of the NOI per the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and
City requirements.
A. Section 31 22 00 - Grading
B. Section 31 22 19 - Finish Grading
A. Perform work in accord with OSHA, EPA, state and local requirements.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Complete EPA “Notice of Intent” and submit per the EPA and City requirements.
2.2 PROTECTION
A. Provide barricades, coverings, and other protection necessary to prevent damage to

existing improvements to remain.
1. Protect improvements on adjoining properties as well as those on Owner's

property.
2. Restore improvements damaged by this work to original condition, as
acceptable to Owner, other parties, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Protect existing vegetation, including trees, to remain against damage.

C. Repair or replace vegetation, including trees, damaged by construction operations.
2.3 IMPROVEMENTS ON ADJOINING PROPERTY:
A. Owner will obtain authority for performing removal and alteration work, if any, on
adjoining property.
Site Clearing 31 10 00 – 1
2.4 SITE CLEARING - GENERAL
A. Install Erosion Control Devices
B. Remove vegetation, improvements, or obstructions that interfere with new

construction.
1. Removal includes stumps of the trees and their roots.
2. Removal includes all structures that interfere with new construction to a
depth of two feet below finished grade outside of proposed building areas
and to a depth of five feet below finished grade in proposed building areas.
3. All open structures below grade, shall be filled to finish grade. Backfill of
open structures shall meet the requirements as specified in Section 31 22
00.
C. Remove other items when specifically indicated.
2.5 CLEARING
A. Clear from above surface of existing ground all brush, downed timber, rotten wood,
heavy growth of grass and weeds, vines, rubbish, debris that interferes with new
construction and legally dispose of offsite. Remove stones larger than 4 inches in
any dimension and all tree roots larger than 2 inches in diameter and legally dispose
of offsite.
B. Limits of clearing to include all areas that are disturbed in the course of work.
2.6 REMOVAL OF IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove surfacing and pavements, including bases, concrete slabs, concrete and
masonry walls, structures, buildings, posts, poles, fences, and other items on the
property.
2.7 STRIPPING SITE
A. Strip all vegetated areas that are to be disturbed by construction to a depth of two
inches.
1. Strip to prevent intermingling with underlying topsoil.

2. Strippings shall be removed from the site.
2.8 TOPSOIL REMOVAL AND SALVAGE
A. DEFINITIONS
Topsoil: A layer of organic material typically 6 to 12 inches thick below the two inches of
material to be stripped. Topsoil should be friable, fertile, dark, loamy soil, free of
clay lumps, sub-soil stones, and other extraneous material and reasonably free
of weeds and foreign grasses.
B. Remove topsoil under proposed pavements, extending 2 ft. minimum beyond the
pavement edge. Remove to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or
objectionable material.
C. Stockpile the amount of topsoil required to complete the work specified in Section 31
22 19.
D. Stockpile topsoil in areas as indicated by the Engineer.
1. Maximum stockpile height shall be 8 feet.

2. Maximum stockpile side slopes shall be 3 (horizontal) to 1 (vertical).
3. Construct storage pile to freely drain surface water.
4. Seed or cover storage piles to prevent erosion.
2.9 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
A. Burning of materials is not allowed.
B. Remove all waste materials from site and dispose of in a legal manner.
C. Remove concrete and masonry from site and dispose of in a legal manner.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 31 22 00
GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Perform all work required to complete the project as indicated by the Contract
Documents, and furnish all supplementary items necessary for the completion of all
work specified in this Section.
B. The work included in this Section shall include furnishing all labor, tools, materials
and incidentals required to complete the work; excavate and fill to the lines,
elevations and limits shown on the drawings as per the drawings for all pavements,
landscape areas, etc. as indicated below and cleaning up. Earthen areas shall be
graded to an elevation 6 inches below finished grade allowing for topsoil placement.
Pavement areas shall be graded to an elevation below finished grade allowing for
pavement placement. Also included in this section is the maintenance of erosion
control devices per the “Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan” (SWPPP) and the
"Notice of Intent" (NOI) per the E.P.A. requirements. The Contractor shall comply
with all requirements of the geotechnical investigation, the E.P.A. requirements and
with the standards and specifications stated herein. The most stringent shall apply.
A. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing
B. Section 31 22 19 – Finish Grading
C. Section 32 11 13 Subgrade Modification (Lime)
A. Codes and Standards
1. Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of

governing authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Testing and Inspection Service
1. The Owner will engage a soil testing and inspection service for quality
control testing during earthwork operations to inspect and test all soil
materials proposed for use in all excavation and fill operations.
2.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Site Information
1. Test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by the

Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
B. Existing Utilities
Grading 31 22 00 – 1
1. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify the location (horizontal and

vertical depth) of all utilities prior to beginning earthwork operations. If
utilities are to remain in place, provide protection from damage during
construction operations.
2. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be
encountered during excavation, consult Owner immediately for directions as
to proceed. Cooperate with Owner, public and private utility companies in
keeping services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to
satisfaction of utility Owner.
3. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by
Owner, except when permitted in writing by Owner and then only after
temporary utility services have been provided.
C. Use of Explosives
1. The use of explosives is not permitted.
D. Protection of Persons and Property
1. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with
warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities
having jurisdiction.
2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from

damages caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout
and other hazards created by excavation operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Fill Material (General site grading):
1. Onsite excavated soils free from deleterious matter, vegetation, rocks or soil
particle larger than 4 inches in diameter or other objectionable material.
B. Imported Fill Material (General site grading):
1. Similar to onsite soils.

2. Imported fill material, if required, shall be obtained offsite at no additional
expense to the owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which earthwork and site grading
operations are to be performed. All areas to receive fill and the subgrades of
excavations shall be proofrolled with a heavy pneumatic tired roller, loaded dump
truck or similar equipment weighing approximately 25 tons or greater to help
compact pockets of loose soil and expose additional areas of weak, soft or wet soils
in the presence of the Owner's Representative. Proof rolling shall not be performed
within 10 feet of existing structures in order to not damage the structures. Notify the
Owner in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the
work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in an acceptable manner.
Grading 31 22 00 – 2
3.2 EXCAVATION
A. The Contractor shall excavate to the lines and elevations shown on the Drawings,
and as previously indicated herein, regardless of the type, condition, or moisture
content of the material encountered. The Owner does not guarantee that materials
other than those shown on the Drawings will be encountered, or that the proportions
of various materials will not vary from those shown or indicated in the subsurface
investigation. Conduct excavation operations to provide positive drainage, at
Contractor's expense, at all times during construction.
B. All areas shall be cut accurately to the indicated grades. Care shall be taken to
prevent excavation below the grades indicated and any bottoms or slopes that have
been undercut shall be backfilled with approved materials and compacted to the
required fill density.
C. Excavation required for rough grading shall be finished within a tolerance of 0.10
foot above or below the rough grade and in no case shall depressions be left that
will not completely drain. All excavated clay soils shall be used for the construction
of fills and embankments and no material shall be wasted without the authority of
the Owner.
D. If rock is encountered in the subgrade it shall be loosened to a depth of 6 inches

below the required subgrade elevation. It shall then be replaced with suitable
materials from the excavation and compacted as specified. The surface shall be
shaped to the grades and slopes shown on the plans.
E. All excavation and preparation in building areas shall be performed per the
recommendations in the geotechnical investigation and the Structural Engineers
specifications and drawings.
3.3 FILLING – (OUTSIDE OF BUILDING AREAS)
A. Remove all vegetation, organic materials and debris prior to placing fill.
B. Areas to receive fill or pavement shall be scarified to a depth of twelve (12) inches
and compacted as specified in paragraph “D” below.
C. Compaction shall be obtained by use of sheeps foot rollers, rubber-tired rollers, or

other approved equipment capable of obtaining the required density. In the event
the embankment material is too wet or too dry for adequate compaction, the
Contractor shall add moisture or dry the material as required to the extent necessary
to obtain the required density.
D. Place subsequent lifts of fill in thin, loose layers eight (8) inches or less in thickness
with the maximum particle or rock size being four inches in diameter prior to
compaction. Uniformly compact each lift to at least 95% of maximum dry density as
defined by ASTM D698, with the moisture content a minimum three (3) percent
above optimum in pavement and landscape areas.
E. All fill placement in building areas and within ten feet of the building structure shall
be performed per the recommendations in the geotechnical investigation and the
Structural Engineers specifications and drawings.
3.4 MOISTURE CONTROL
Grading 31 22 00 – 3
A. Where soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly

apply required amount of water to surface of soil material in such manner as to
prevent free water appearing on surface during, or subsequent to, compaction
operations.
B. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry soil material that is too wet to permit
compaction to specified percentage of maximum density.
C. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may
be stockpiled or spread on surface where directed by Owner's Representative and
permitted to dry. Assist drying by disking, harrowing or pulverizing, until
moisture-density relation tests fall within the herein specified range.
A. Quality Control Testing During Construction
1. Allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before
further construction work is performed.
2. If, in the opinion of the testing lab, based on testing service and inspection,
the subgrade or fills, which have been placed below the specified density,
provide additional compaction and testing at no additional expense to the
Owner.
3. The results of density tests will be considered satisfactory when they are in
each instance equal to or greater than the specified density, and if not more
than 1 density test out of 5 has a value greater than 2% below the required
density.
3.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Protection of Graded Areas
1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and
debris.
2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to the
specified tolerances.
B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas
1. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent

construction operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, reshape,
and compact to the required density prior to further construction. Use hand
tamping for recompaction over underground utilities.
3.7 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS
1. Remove all trash, debris and waste materials, and legally dispose of offsite
at no additional expense to the Owner.
2. Excess earthwork material shall be disposed of offsite at no additional
expense to the owner.
END OF SECTION
Grading 31 22 00 – 4
SECTION 31 22 19
FINISH GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all topsoiling and
finished grading, as indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
B. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
C. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary
or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
1.2 LOCATION OF WORK
A. All areas within limits of construction, areas of surplus material disposal, and all
areas, which are disturbed in the course of the work.
A. Section 31 10 00- Site Clearing
B. Section 31 22 00 - Grading
A. Finish Grading Tolerance:
1. 0.1 ft. (30 mm) plus/minus from required elevations.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Verify amount of topsoil stockpiled and determine amount of additional topsoil, if

necessary to complete work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil:
1. Topsoil: A layer of organic material typically 6 to 12 inches thick below the

two inches of material to be stripped. Topsoil should be friable, fertile, dark,
loamy soil, free of clay lumps, sub-soil stones, and other extraneous material
and reasonably free of weeds and foreign grasses. Topsoil containing
dallisgrass, nutgrass or weeds shall be rejected.
a. Use existing topsoil stockpiled under Section 31 10 00.
b. Physical properties of topsoil should be as follows:
Clay - between 7-27 percent
Silt - between 28-50 percent
Finish Grading 31 22 19 – 1
Sand - less than 52 percent

The soil shall be tested at a lab and the results, including suggested
treatments for soil, sent to the landscape architect.
b. If amount of topsoil stockpiled is less than amount necessary for the
work, furnish all additional topsoil required at no additional cost to the
Owner.
c. Contractor may import topsoil to the site with prior review and
approval by the Engineer.
B. Surplus Topsoil:
1. Spread and compact to 90 percent maximum dry density in locations on site

designated by the Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ROUGH GRADE REVIEW
A. Rough grading reviewed by Engineer in Section 31 22 00, Grading.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Correct, adjust and/or repair rough graded areas.
1. Cut off mounds and ridges.

2. Fill gullies and depressions.
3. Perform other necessary repairs.
4. Bring all sub-grades to specified contours, even and properly compacted.
B. Remove all stones and debris over 2 in. in any dimension.
3.3 PLACING TOPSOIL
A. Do not place topsoil when subgrade is either wet or frozen enough to cause
clodding.
B. Spread topsoil to minimum compacted depth of 6 in for all disturbed earth areas.
C. Make finished surface free of stones, sticks, dirt clods or other material 1 in.or more
in any dimension.
D. Drag finish with harrow (or hand rake) to insure smooth finish to the lines and
grades indicated.
E. Restore areas occupied by stockpiles to condition of rest of finished work.
3.4 ACCEPTANCE
A. Upon completion of topsoiling, obtain Engineer's acceptance of grade and surface.
END OF SECTION
Finish Grading 31 22 19 – 2
SECTION 31 63 29
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Drilled shafts and where applicable, bells.
1.2 UNIT PRICES
A. Drilled Piers: Actual net volume of drilled piers in place and approved. Actual length,
shaft diameter, and bell diameter if applicable, may vary, to coincide with elevations
where satisfactory bearing strata are encountered. These dimensions may also vary
with actual bearing value of bearing strata determined by an independent testing and
inspecting agency. Adjustments are made on net variation of total quantities, based on
design dimensions for shafts and bells.
1. Base bids on indicated number of drilled piers and, for each pier, the design
length from top elevation to bottom of shaft, extended through the bell, if
applicable, and the diameter of shaft and bell.
2. Unit prices include labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals required for
excavation, trimming, shoring, casings, dewatering, reinforcement, concrete fill,
testing and inspecting, and other items for complete drilled-pier installation.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site or location or method as

mutually agreed upon.
1. Review methods and procedures related to drilled piers including, but not limited
to, the following:
a. Review geotechnical report with site geotechnical engineer who will be
determining approved bearing stata.
b. Discuss existing utilities and subsurface conditions.
c. Review coordination with temporary controls and protections.
d. Review measurement and payment of unit prices.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For concrete reinforcement, detailing fabricating, bending, supporting,

and placing. Provide dimensioned plan layout including pier identifier, dowel and
anchor bolt setting plans and templates, drilled pier shaft sizes, and bell sizes, as
applicable, casing sizes (if required), and top of pier elevations.
Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts 31 63 29 - 1

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
A. Record drawings.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer that has specialized in drilled-pier

work.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities before excavating drilled piers. If
utilities are to remain in place, provide protection from damage during drilled-pier
operations.
1. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered
during excavation, adapt drilling procedure if necessary to prevent damage to
utilities. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping services and
facilities in operation without interruption. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction
of utility owner.
B. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility to facilities occupied by

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify all affected parties, including Owner no fewer than five days in advance of
proposed interruption of utility.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Owner’s written permission.
C. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and
is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of
geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and
results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner is not responsible for
interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data.
1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary
for drilled piers.
2. The geotechnical report is referenced elsewhere in the Project Manual.
D. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to perform

surveys, layouts, and measurements for drilled piers. Before excavating, lay out each
drilled pier to lines and levels required. Record actual measurements of each drilled
pier's location, shaft diameter, bottom and top elevations, deviations from specified
tolerances, and other specified data.

1. Record and maintain information pertinent to each drilled pier and indicate on
record Drawings. Cooperate with Owner's testing and inspecting agency to
provide data for required reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Drilled-Pier Standard: Comply with ACI 336.1 except as modified in this Section.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reference Section 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing and Structural General Notes.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Reference Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete and Structural General Notes.
2.4 STEEL CASINGS
A. Steel Pipe Casings: ASTM A283, Grade C, or ASTM A36, carbon-steel plate, with
joints full-penetration welded according to AWS D1.1.
B. Corrugated-Steel Pipe Casings: ASTM A929, steel sheet, zinc coated.
C. Sufficient strength to withstand handling stresses, concrete pressure, and earth and
surcharge pressure.
D. Diameter of casing in relation to diameter of excavation shall be such that void space
outside casing is minimized.
2.5 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Reference Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete and Structural General Notes.
2.6 REINFORCEMENT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Reference Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete and Structural General Notes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage
caused by settlement, lateral movement, vibration, and other hazards created by
drilled-pier operations.
3.2 EXCAVATION
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to bearing elevations regardless of character of

surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may
include rock, soil materials, and obstructions.
1. Obstructions: Unclassified excavated materials may include removal of
unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions.
Payment for removing obstructions that cannot be removed by conventional
augers fitted with soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets, or underreaming tools
attached to drilling equipment of size, power, torque, and downthrust necessary
for the Work is according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
B. Prevent surface water from entering excavated shafts. Conduct water to site drainage
facilities.
C. Excavate shafts for drilled piers to indicated elevations. Remove loose material from
bottom of excavation.
1. Excavate bottom of drilled piers to level plane within 1:12 tolerance.
2. Remove water from excavated shafts before concreting.
3. Excavate rock sockets of dimensions indicated. Penetrations into bearing
material are indicated on Drawings. If casing is used, measure required
penetration below bottom of casing.
D. Notify and allow testing and inspecting agency to test and inspect bottom of
excavation. If unsuitable bearing stratum is encountered, make adjustments to drilled
piers as determined by Architect.
1. Do not excavate shafts deeper than elevations indicated unless approved by
Architect.
2. Payment for additional authorized excavation is according to Contract provisions
for changes in the Work.
E. Temporary Casings: Install watertight steel casings of sufficient length and thickness to
prevent water seepage into shaft; to withstand compressive, displacement, and
withdrawal stresses; and to maintain stability of shaft walls.
1. Remove temporary casings, maintained in plumb position, during concrete
placement and before initial set of concrete.

F. Bells: Excavate bells to shape, base thickness, and slope angle indicated. Excavate
bottom of bells to level plane and remove water and loose material before placing
concrete.
G. Tolerances: Construct drilled piers to remain within ACI 336.1 tolerances.

1. If location or out-of-plumb tolerances are exceeded, provide corrective
construction. Submit corrective construction proposals to Architect for review
before proceeding.
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating,

placing, and supporting reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce
or destroy bond with concrete.
C. Fabricate and install reinforcing cages symmetrically about axis of shafts in a single
unit.
D. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during

concreting. Maintain minimum cover over reinforcement.
E. Use templates to set anchor bolts, leveling plates, and other accessories furnished in
work of other Sections. Provide blocking and holding devices to maintain required
position during final concrete placement.
F. Protect exposed ends of extended reinforcement, dowels, or anchor bolts from

mechanical damage and exposure to weather.
3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Place concrete in continuous operation and without segregation immediately after

inspection and approval of shaft by project’s Geotechnical Engineer of Record.
1. Construct a construction joint if concrete placement is delayed more than one
hour. Level top surface of concrete. Before placing remainder of concrete, clean
surface laitance, roughen, and slush concrete with commercial bonding agent or
with sand-cement grout mixed at ratio of 1:1.
B. Dry Method: Place concrete to fall vertically down the center of drilled pier without
striking sides of shaft or steel reinforcement.
1. Where concrete cannot be directed down shaft without striking reinforcement,
place concrete with chutes, tremies, or pumps.
2. Vibrate top 60 inches of concrete and remove excess water.
C. Coordinate withdrawal of temporary casings with concrete placement to maintain at

least a 60-inch head of concrete above bottom of casing.

1. Vibrate top 60 inches of concrete after withdrawal of temporary casing and

remove excess water. If temporary steel casing does not sufficiently prevent
migration of ground water into hole and depth of water in hole exceeds 3 inches,
place concrete under water as specified herein.
D. Screed concrete at cutoff elevation level and apply scoured, rough finish. Where cutoff
elevation is above the ground elevation, form top section above grade and extend shaft
to required elevation.
E. Protect concrete work, according to ACI 301, from frost, freezing, or low temperatures
that could cause physical damage or reduced strength.
1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other mineral-containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators.
F. If hot-weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of
concrete, place concrete according to ACI 301 to maintain delivered temperature of
concrete at no more than 90 deg F.
G. If water depth in shaft exceeds 2 inches, place concrete under water as follows:
1. Place concrete using a flexible pipe (tremie or concrete pump hose) with
adequate strength, weight, and water-tightness to perform desired operation and
with a diameter approximately eight times size of largest aggregate.
2. Proportion concrete mix as follows:
a. Slump: Adjust slump as required.
3. Deposit concrete in a slow, smooth and continuous operation.
4. Plug end of pipe with adequate seal before lowering into water. Exercise care to
assure concrete does not segregate as it pushes water out of bottom of hole.
5. Bottom of pipe shall remain in plastic concrete at all times after placement has
begun. When concrete flow must be stopped for a short time, lower pipe deeper
into plastic concrete.
6. Vibration, agitation and adverse movement of pipe in plastic concrete is not
permitted. Provide adequate equipment to lift pipe from excavation.
7. Placement should be controlled by qualified personnel through continuous
observation.
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the
special inspections indicated in the Structural General Notes.
1. Contractor is responsible for providing to project’s Geotechnical Engineer of
Record, site elevations and top of pier center alignment.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage the project’s Geotechnical Engineer of Record to
perform tests and inspections.
C. Drilled-Pier Tests and Inspections: For each drilled pier.

1. Before reinforcing cage and concrete is placed, each drilled shaft shall be
observed by project’s Geotechnical Engineer of Record to ensure seating in
bearing strata that produces foundation capacities indicated on Drawings, and
that holes are properly cleaned and dried.
D. Concrete Tests and Inspections: Reference Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39/; one set for each drilled pier but not
more than one set for each truck load.
2. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency to make additional tests of
concrete if test results indicate that compressive strengths, or other requirements
have not been met, as directed by Architect.
a. Continuous coring of drilled piers may be required, at Contractor's
expense, if temporary casings have not been withdrawn within specified
time limits or if observations of placement operations indicate deficient
concrete quality, presence of voids, segregation, or other possible defects.
3. Perform additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
4. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not
comply with the Contract Documents.
E. An excavation, concrete, or a drilled pier will be considered defective if it does not pass
tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports for each drilled pier as follows:
1. Actual top and bottom elevations.
2. Actual drilled-pier diameter at top, bottom, and bell.
3. Top of bearing strata elevation.
4. Description of soil materials.
5. Description, location, and dimensions of obstructions.
6. Final top centerline location and deviations from requirements.
7. Variation of shaft from plumb.
8. Shaft excavating method.
9. Design and tested bearing capacity of bottom.
10. Penetration into bearing strata.
11. Levelness of bottom and adequacy of cleanout.
12. Pier reinforcement.
13. Ground-water conditions and water-infiltration rate, depth, and pumping.
14. Description, purpose, length, wall thickness, diameter, tip, and top and bottom
elevations of temporary or permanent casings. Include anchorage and sealing
methods used and condition and weather tightness of splices if any.
15. Description of soil or water movement, sidewall stability, loss of ground, and
means of control.
16. Bell dimensions and variations from original design.
17. Date and time of starting and completing excavation.
18. Condition of reinforcing steel and splices.

19. Position of reinforcing steel.

20. Concrete placing method, including elevation of consolidation and delays.
21. Elevation of concrete during removal of casings.
22. Locations of construction joints.
23. Concrete volume.
24. Concrete testing results.
25. Remarks, unusual conditions encountered, and deviations from requirements.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory
soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 01 90
LANDSCAPE GROUNDS MAINTENANCE
The Contractor is to render the following Landscape Maintenance Services during the term of
the initial construction contract. In addition, the Contractor shall maintain the project per the
following specifications until the landscape and irrigation is accepted by the Architect. The
school district shall take over maintenance of the project following final completion and
acceptance.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Work included in project: Perform all work necessary utilizing acceptable

horticultural practices for the exterior landscape maintenance of the project as
required herein. Such work includes, but is not limited to the following:
1. Monitoring adjustment and minor repair of the landscape irrigation

system.
2. Protection of vacuum breakers against freeze damage.
3. Mowing, edging and trimming of lawn areas.
4. Pruning and trimming of trees and shrubs.
5. Restaking and adjustment of stakes and guying if required.
6. Application of fertilizers, insecticides and herbicides.
7. Replacement of plant material (extra service if not under warranty).
8. General site clean up; removal of trash, and products of maintenance.
B. Extra Services: The intent of the contract is to provide a comprehensive

maintenance program to include all required services, except those services
specifically excluded, to perform the work for the stated time period.
1. All services not included in the base bid shall be considered “extra
services” and will be charge for separately according to the nature of the
item of work. The written consent and authorization of the Owner or their
authorized representative must be obtained prior to the performance or
installation of such “extra service” items and prior to purchase of any
chargeable materials.
2. Such work may include replacement of dead plant materials or major

repairs of irrigation system created by acts of vandalism or other
contractors working on other site related work.
3. The Owner is not bound by the specification or contract to utilize the

landscape maintenance contractor in the performance of “extra services
work”.
4. The landscape maintenance contractor shall coordinate his activities with

other contractors on the site so as to not hinder the performance of any
work.
Landscape Grounds Maintenance 32 01 90 - 1

1.2 SCHEDULE
All work under this Contractor shall be performed in accordance with the Schedule
included.
1.3 CONTRACTOR’S PERFORMANCE
A. The Contractor’s workmen shall be neat in appearance, perform their work in a

professional manner, keep noise to a minimum and stage their work from a
location on the site out of the way of the mainstream of the users.
1.4 NEGLECT AND VANDALISM
A. Turf, trees or plants that are damaged or killed due to Contractor’s operations,
negligence or chemicals shall be replaced at no expense to the Owner. If plant
damage or death is caused by conditions beyond the Contractor’s control,
replacement shall be at the Owner’s expense.
B. Sprinklers or structures that are damaged due to the Contractor’s operations

must be replaced by the Contractor promptly.
C. All water damage, either natural or man-made, resulting from Contractor’s

neglect shall be corrected at the Contractor’s expense.
D. All damage to or thefts of landscaping and irrigation installations not caused or

allowed by the Contractor shall be corrected by the Contractor.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Contractor shall acquaint himself with all site conditions. Should excavation be
required the Contractor shall promptly notify the utility coordination committed for
utility locations. Failure to do so will make Contractor liable for any and all
damage thereto arising from his operations.
B. Contractor shall take necessary precautions to protect site conditions, irrigation

and plants. Should damage be incurred, this Contractor shall repair damage to its
original condition or furnish and install equal replacement at this expense.
1.6 EMERGENCIES
A. The Contractor shall answer emergency or complaint calls within twelve (12)
hours and corrective action shall be complete within 24 hours.
B. The Contractor shall answer emergency calls regarding the landscape irrigation
system failure or need of repair, and take corrective action within eight (8) hours.
Such work, unless caused due t neglect on the part of the Landscape
Maintenance Contractor, shall be considered “Extra Services”.
1.7 RESTRICTION
A. Do not use growth regulators or growth retardants on this job.

PART 2 - MATERIALS AND MACHINERY
2.1 IRRIGATION SYSTEM MATERIALS
Replacement materials throughout the system shall be as specified and/or noted on the
“Contract Documents”, new and in perfect condition.
2.2 MATERIALS
Materials listed under this Section are expressly specified for use but does not prohibit or
restrict the Contractor from providing other approved materials not listed in order to
complete the work required herein. All materials shall be new and in perfect condition.
A. Pre-Emergence Weed Control: Contractor option (granular).
B. Post-Emergence Weed Control: Contractor option.
C. Herbicide/Insecticide/Fungicide: Contractor option.
D. Fire Ant Control: Shall be slow release applied at six (6) week intervals. Spot
treat weekly with a contact product where mounds appear. Alternate products for
effective control.
E. Shrub Bed Fertilizer: Apply at manufacturer’s recommended rates for each plant
used. Shall be Osmacote Slow Release.
F. Lawn Fertilizer: 15-5-10 with 50% sulphur coated urea and 4% iron.
G. Tree Fertilizer: Davey Arborgreen: apply using the maximum manufacturer’s

recommended rate and procedures.
H. Mulch: Shredded Hardwood mulch unless noted otherwise on plans.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
The Contractor shall monitor and program the automatic controlling device a total of 18
times a year to provide optimum moisture levels in all planted areas.
A. Irrigation cycles shall be set to take place prior to sunrise (usually 4:00 - 5:00 am
unless otherwise instructed by the Owner.
B. Do not program controllers operating on the same water meter to water during
the same time period so as to prevent over-draft of water meters. Do not switch
controller to “off” at any time, except as required for testing and for maintenance
operations.
C. Complete sprinkler system servicing shall be performed as required to maintain

sprinklers in correct operating condition, including all required labor. April
through September the operation of sprinklers shall be inspected and monitored

on a twice-per-month basis to assure proper cover and operation. October

through March monitor and inspect sprinklers once per month or upon the
request of the Owner. This check shall include visual “inspection” of all
accessible components of the irrigation system including but not limited to
controllers, remote control valves, quick couplers and heads.
D. Adjust sprinklers to avoid damage to windows, buildings and sign walls, also
adjust heads to keep water off the street. Make repairs and alterations to the
sprinkling system and water lines. All sprinkler repairs such as cleaning of heads
or breaks caused by the Contractor shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.
3.2 TREE MAINTENANCE
A. Contractor shall maintain tree supports at all times.
B. All suckers shall be continually removed from trees. Grass shall be trimmed at
the base of trees in a manner that shall protect tree trunks from cutting of bark.
C. Annual tree pruning and/or shaping as needed. Always prune out dead wood.
Refer to schedule. CONTACT OWNER PRIOR TO COMMENCING ANY
PRUNING OR SHAPING WORK.
D. Maintain mulch at tree wells.
E. Spray all trees four times per years to control foliar feeding insects. The spray
shall consist of alternately spraying 2 time (s) with an insecticide spray and 2
time (s) with a fungicide beginning in March, with the last spray in September.
3.3 TURF MAINTENANCE
A. Mowing: All common Bermuda and/or St. Augustine grass shall be mowed
approximately every seven days March - October. During periods of mild
weather the cut should not be lower than two (2") inches from the soil. Never
scalp the lawn or cut more than one-half (½) the existing top growth in one
mowing. On irrigated areas, remove the clippings, never allowing visible
clippings to remain on lawn surface more than four (4) hours. All sidewalks and
curbs shall be edged as well as other objects (non-living) in the grass zone.
Allow grass to grow up to but not over sprinkler heads. Trim grass around heads
with a circular sprinkler head trimmer. DO NOT USE “WEED-EATERS” TO
TRIM AROUND SPRINKLER HEADS.
B. Watering: Provide a regular, deep watering program. The established turf should
not be kept wet but should dry out somewhat between waterings. A twice weekly
watering is good under regular conditions, but if it is hot or windy, water more
often. In very hot weather, a fast watering with fine spray will cool the turf zone
and can supplement the regular, deeper watering program. In shaded areas
caused by trees, water more frequently because of the competition for soil
moisture. If lawn wilts (shows grey-brown) water more frequently.

C. Lawn Fertilizer:
April 1 22-0-6 analysis at the rate of 10 pounds fertilizer per 1,000 square
feet, nitrogen content shall consist of 50% sulphur coated urea.
Analysis shall include 4% iron (10# per 1,000 equals 2.1# actual
nitrogen per 1,000 square feet.
May 15 24-6-12 analysis at the rate of 10 pounds fertilizer per 1,000

square feet, nitrogen content shall consist of 50% sulphur coated
urea. Analysis shall include 4% iron. (10# per 1,000 equals 2.1#
actual nitrogen per 1,000 square feet.
July 1 15-5-10 analysis at the rate of 10 pounds fertilizer per 1,000

August 15 15-5-10 analysis at the rate of 10 pounds fertilizer per 1,000

October 1 22-0-06 analysis applied at the rate of 10# per 1,000 square feet.
No sulphur coated urea, no iron.
D. Fertilizer: Trace elements in fertilizer shall be based on the recommendations of

the soil laboratory.
The fertilization program will be closely monitored by the Owner. The Contractor
shall prepare submittals prior to each application showing the area to be covered.
The quantity of fertilizer to be applied and the rates of application. The Owner
will monitor the application to insure that materials and procedures are as
specified.
E. Weed Control and Undesirable Grass - General:
1. Contractor shall use extreme care in the use of chemicals for weed
control. Before such applications are made, the turf should be well
established and in a vigorous conditions.
2. All chemical applications shall be properly licensed with the proper

governing authorities.
3. The contractor shall carry the insurance required by the governing

authority.
4. Apply chemicals at the manufacturer’s recommended rate to achieve

complete control of weeds and undesirable grasses.
5. All products utilized on this project must be labeled for turf use.

6. Spot treatment of weeds and undesirable grasses shall be achieved

without damaging the surrounding turf.
F. Weed and Undesirable Grass Control Schedule:
All Bermuda grass turf shall be sprayed 2 time(s) in early spring for preemergent
control of crabgrass, dallasgrass, and other broadleaf grasses, and 2 time(s) in
June-August for pre emergent control of winter weeds, for a total of 4 cycles.
NOTE: IF PERMANENT TURF ESTABLISHMENT IS NOT COMPLETE, DO NOT

APPLY PRE-EMERGENT HERBICIDE.
Summer/Fall Spot treat turf areas to achieve a minimum 98% pure stand of turf.
G. Insects: Control insects with regular applications of commercial insecticides at

the manufacturer’s recommended rate.
H. Diseases: When they first appear, spray for diseases with an approved
commercial fungicide strictly according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
I. Maintain mulched saucers around all trees until establishment. Trim grass as
required to prevent grass from encroaching into the saucer area. No
“Weedeaters” shall be used around the trunk of any tree now, or at any time in
the future.
J. If initial installation (any or all) of the project site is in winter rye, the Contractor
will at that time change the mowing and trimming rate to 45 times a year.
Contractor shall also during the 1 year maintenance period and at the
appropriate season, chemically kill out Winter Rye and Hydromulch Bermuda.
K. One application of herbicide will be applied to overseeded turf to aid in the

eradication of Rye Grass.
3.4 SHRUB AND GROUNDCOVER BED MAINTENANCE
A. Weeding of all shrub, groundcover beds and seasonal color beds shall be
performed twice monthly (total 24 times).
B. All shrub and groundcover beds shall be pruned 8 times a year March - October
in an attempt to develop the natural form of the plant.
C. Pre-emergent weed control shall be applied 1 time in early spring and 1 time in
late fall in planter beds only after careful thought of what is to occur in planters
during the growing season.
D. All shrub, groundcover beds and seasonal color areas shall be fertilized 3 times
per year at a rate of 2 pounds of fertilizer per 1,000 square feet.
April 1 - 22-0-6 July 1 - 15-5-10 October - 22-0-6

3.5 USE OF HERBICIDES, INSECTICIDES, POISON, AND ANIMAL TRAPS
A. The Contractor is hereby granted permission to use such herbicides,

insecticides, poison, and animal traps as it may find necessary and
advantageous in its grounds maintenance activities. Herbicides, insecticides,
sterilants, and animal traps must be used responsibly and in conformance with
Federal, State and Local laws and regulations. The Contractor assumes all
liability for damage and/or injury resulting from accident or misuse of these
products and/or equipment.
B. Product leaving an undesirable residue or odor (i.e., weed oil shall not be used.
C. The Owner shall be notified prior to application and advised of any danger
associated with the use of these product (i.e., to avoid personal contact with
sprayed areas, etc.
D. Apply insecticides as needed to protect all plant materials from damage. The
insect control program shall include slugs and snails and advance preventive
spraying for twip borers. The Contractors shall be responsible for the choosing
of chemicals and insecticides he uses and shall be accountable for any misuse of
same.
E. Apply the proper fungicide, herbicide and pesticides for the control of pests,
weeds and plant diseases or treat cuts on turf, plants and trees.
3.6 GENERAL CLEAN UP
A. The Contractor shall dispose of all waste materials or refuse from his operations
off the property. See plans for contract area.
B. All plant growth shall be prevented in any cracks in walks or within paved areas.
C. Leaves, papers, grass clippings or other debris shall be removed at least weekly
or at each visit from all areas.
D. Sweep roads and walks or refuse, dirt and other materials which may be
deposited as a result of the maintenance operation.
E. Contractor will evaluate bark mulch 4 times a year during the 1 year maintenance
period and replace bare spots as needed.
PART 4 - SCHEDULE
The Schedule as included herein shall govern the Work. Should the Contractor require
an alteration of the Schedule, contact the Owner.

PART 5 - MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
ITEM J F M A M J J A S O N D TOTAL
Mow/ Edge/Trim 2 4 4 5 5 5 5 4 2 36
Clean/Weed beds/Trash 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 24
Sprinkler 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 18
Fertilize (lawn) 1 1 1 1 1 5
Post-Emergent (lawn) 1 1 1 1 4
Post emergent Post emergent of crabgrass and
of winter weeds other broadleaf grasses
Fertilize (beds, Incl. 1 1 1
ground cover
Pre-emergent (beds) 1 1
Cultivate beds 1 1 1 1 1
Prune shrubs/ground 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
cover
Prune (trees) 1
Insect/Disease control As
(lawn and beds) needed
Trees (insecticide) 1 1
Trees (fungicide) 1 1
ITEM J F M A M J J A S O N D TOTAL
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 11 13
SUBGRADE MODIFICATION (LIME)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Perform all work required to complete, as indicated by the Contract Documents, and
furnish all supplementary items necessarily for the completion of all work specified in
the Section.
1.2 RELATE WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
B. Section 32 13 00 – Rigid Paving
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. TXDOT 1993 Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets, and

Bridges.
B. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, North Central Texas Council of
Governments (NCTCOG).
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sub-grade preparation with earthwork grades.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Hydrated lime, TXDOT Item 264, type A
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Insure that surfaces have been brought to approximate rough grades (plus/minus 0.10
feet). Loosen and pulverize soil to a depth of 8 inches beneath designated paving areas
including a distance of two feet beyond the curb line as indicated on the plans.
Coordinate with soils testing lab prior to application of lime to have sulfate tests
performed in order to determine if the water-soluble sulfate content does not exceed the
acceptable amount for lime stabilized subgrade. If an excessive amount is present,
notify owner’s representative prior to proceeding. Coordinate with soils testing lab to
have Lime Series tests performed in order to determine actual percentage of lime
required.
Subgrade Modification (Lime) 32 11 13 - 1

3.2 STABILIZATION
A. Introduce lime to soil and thoroughly mix to a minimum depth as indicated on the
plans. Methods shall be in accordance with Standard Specifications for Public
Works Construction, North Central Texas Council of Governments Item 4.6.
B. Uniformly compact lime-treated subgrade to a minimum 95% of its maximum

standard proctor (ASTM D-698) density at a moisture content above optimum.
Compacted material should be immediately covered with the paving or kept moist
until the paving is placed
C. Grade surfaces smooth to within plus/minus 0.10 feet of established subgrade

elevations. Maintain in smooth compacted condition until pavement is placed.
A. In-place density testing as specified.
END OF SECTION
Subgrade Modification (Lime) 32 11 13 - 2

SECTION 32 13 00
RIGID PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
furnish all supplementary items necessary for completion of all work specified in this
Section.
B. The work included in this Section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, shall
include furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to provide
the installation of all portland cement concrete paving, curbs, sleeving for utilities,
sleeving for future use, gutters and sidewalks, complete-in- place, as shown on the
Construction Drawings and as specified herein.
A. Section 31 22 00 – Grading
B. Section 32 11 13 Subgrade Modification (Lime)
A. The Contractor shall comply with TXDOT Standards and Specifications and with the
standards and specifications specified herein. The most stringent shall apply.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Immediately upon receipt of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit the
following to the Engineer for his review and approval:
1. Material Certificates: Provide two copies of materials certificates signed by

the material producer and the Contractor, certifying that each material item
complies with, or exceeds, specified requirements.
2. Mix Design: Submit two copies of concrete mix design for each use of
concrete.
1.5 TRAFFIC CONTROL
A. New pavement shall be closed to all traffic, including vehicles of the Contractor, until
the concrete is at least seven days old.
B. The Paving Contractor shall maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as
required for other site activities.
C. Utilize flagmen, barricades, warning signs and warning lights as required by the
authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Rigid Paving 31 13 00 – 1
A. Forms
1. Steel, wood or other suitable material and strength to resist movement

during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment
until removal. Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects.
2. Use flexible spring steel forms of laminated boards to form radius bends as
required.
3. Coat forms with a non-staining form release agent that will not discolor or
deface the surface of the concrete.
B. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185.
C. Supports: Chair spacers or other required supports shall conform to the

requirements of the ACI Detailing Manual 315.
D. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60, unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Cement: Shall be Portland Cement conforming to current ASTM Specifications

Cl50, Type 1.
F. Coarse Aggregate:
1. Shall consist of durable particles of gravel, crushed blast furnace slag and/or
crushed stone of reasonably uniform quality throughout, free from injurious
amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter or other objectionable material,
either free or as an adherent coating on the aggregate.
2. Shall be stockpiled in such a manner to prevent segregation and maintained

as nearly as possible in a uniform condition of moisture.
G. Fine Aggregate: Shall consist of sand or a combination of sands, and shall be

composed of clean, hard, durable, uncoated grains.
H. Air-entraining Agent: Shall conform to ASTM C260.
I. Water: Shall be drinkable.
J. Curing Compound: Shall conform to ASTM C309.

K. Expansion Joint Filler: Shall conform to requirements of ASTM D1751. An
approved sealant shall be used in all construction and expansion joints and shall be
compatible with joint fillers.
L. Epoxy Resin Grout: FS MMM-F-650.
2.2 CONCRETE MIX, DESIGN AND TESTING
A. Comply with requirements as herein specified for concrete mix design, sampling and
testing, and quality control. Design the mix to produce standard-weight concrete
consisting of Portland cement, aggregate, air-entraining admixture and water to
produce the following properties for vehicular pavement sections:
1. Compressive Strength: minimum at 28 days, as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Slump Range: 2" to 4".
3. Air Content: 4% to 6%.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which concrete curbs,
walks and paving are to be installed and notify the Owner in writing of conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with
the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable
manner. Do not proceed with the work until the necessary sleeves for irrigation, site
lighting, electrical, gas, telephone, future use, and cable T.V. have been installed.
3.2 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. The subgrade shall be uniform in composition and compaction of material and

comply with the requirements in Section 31 22 00 and Section 32 11 13. All organic
material shall be removed. The subgrade shall be in a moist condition at the time
concrete is deposited thereon.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Maintain subgrade in a smooth, compacted condition at the required section and

grade until the pavement is ready to be placed. Keep subgrade thoroughly wetted
down sufficiently in advance of placing pavement to insure a firm, moist condition for
at least 2 inches below the prepared surface.
B. Prepare only sufficient amount of subgrade in advance of the placing of pavement to

enable the work to proceed smoothly and effectively. Avoid placing equipment or
hauling equipment over completed subgrade until placement of pavement has been
completed.
3.4 FORM CONSTRUCTION
A. Set forms to the required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. Install
sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuous progress of the work so that forms
can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
3.5 REINFORCEMENT
A. Locate, place and support reinforcement as specified on the Drawings.
3.6 MIXING OF CONCRETE
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Shall be used and shall conform to ASTM C94. The ready
mix producer shall be certified for compliance to the standards of N.R.M.C.A.
B. Cold Weather Concreting: Shall conform to the standards set forth in ACI-306.
C. Hot Weather Concreting: Shall conform to the standards set forth in ACI-305.
A. General:
1. Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line
and grade. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at
the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or
other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.
2. Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of the mix.
Consolidate concrete along the face of forms and adjacent to transverse
joints with an interval vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies,
reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for
hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent
dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices.
B. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints as

far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint.
3.8 CURBS AND GUTTERS
A. Automatic machine may be used for curb and gutter placement at Contractor's
option, if acceptable to the Owner. If machine placement is to be used, submit
revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed the minimums
herein specified. Machine placement must produce curbs and gutters to the
required cross-section, lines, grades, finish and jointing as specified for formed
concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete as
specified.
3.9 JOINTS
A. General: Construct expansion, weakened-plane (contraction), and construction

joints true-to-line with face perpendicular to surface of the concrete, unless
otherwise indicated. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline,
B. Weakened-Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened-plane (contraction) joints

with a maximum spacing of fifteen (15) feet unless noted otherwise on the
Construction Documents. Construct weakened-plane joints for a depth equal to at
least 1/4 concrete thickness, as follows:
1. Sawed Dummy Joints: Form weakened-place joints using powered saws

equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut joints
into hardened concrete as soon as surface will not be torn, abraded, or
otherwise damaged by cutting action, generally within 12 hours or as
directed by the Owner’s Representative.
C. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at the end of all pours and locations
where placement operations are stopped for a period of more than 1/2 hour, except
where such pours terminate at expansion joints.
D. Expansion Joints:
1. Provide premolded joint, filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs,
catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks and other fixed objects,
2. Locate expansion joints at a maximum spacing of 65 feet unless indicated
otherwise on the plans.
3. Extend joint fillers full-width and depth of joint, and not less than 1/2" or more
than 1" below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. If no joint
sealer, place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface.
4. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for the full width being placed,
wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint
filler sections together.
5. Protect the top edge of the joint filler during concrete placement with a metal
cap or other temporary material. Remove protection after concrete has been
placed on both sides of joint.
3.10 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth the surface by screeding and
floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust
the floating to compare the surface and produce a uniform texture.
B. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10-foot straightedge. Distribute
concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to
provide a continuous smooth finish.
C. Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb and formed joints with an
edging tool and round to 1/2" radius, unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate any tool
marks on concrete surface.
D. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has
disappeared, complete surface finishing, as follows:
E. Burlap finish curb and gutter and pavement by dragging a seamless strip of damp
burlap across the concrete in a perpendicular line to traffic or away from the
building. Repeat operation to provide a gritty texture acceptable to Owner.
F. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form
removal, clean ends of joints and point-up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove
and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Engineer.
G. Traffic shall not be allowed on the concrete for a minimum period of seven days.
3.11 CURING
A. Protect and cure finished concrete paving. Use moist-curing methods or curing
compounds as approved by the Engineer.
3.12 REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS
A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Owner, at no

additional cost to the Owner.
B. Drill test cores when directed by Owner, when necessary to determine magnitude of
cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with
Portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy resin grout.
C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Backfill all curbs and
remove debris from site. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after
placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as
possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other
foreign material just prior to final inspection.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 32 13 23
STAMPED CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Stamped and sealed concrete paving.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of

blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, and other pozzolans.
B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.
A. Product Data: Technical data for each type of product.
B. Samples: Submit samples for each type of product, ingredient, or admixture requiring
color, pattern, or texture selection.
C. Design Mixtures: For each decorative concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design
mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or
other circumstances warrant adjustments.
A. Qualification Data: Submit data for qualified Installer, ready mix concrete manufacturer,
and testing agency.
B. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:

1. Cementitious materials.
2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
3. Fiber reinforcement.
4. Admixtures.
5. Applied finish materials.
6. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive.
7. Joint fillers.
C. Material Test Reports: Submit data for each of the following:

1. Aggregates include service record data indicating absence of deleterious
expansion of concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity.
D. Field quality control reports.
Stamped Concrete Paving 32 13 23 - 1

A. Installer Qualifications: Entity having minimum 10 years documented experience and

employing workers trained and approved by manufacturer of decorative concrete paving
systems.
B. Ready Mix Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing

ready mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements
for production facilities and equipment.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329
for testing indicated.
1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
D. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) unless otherwise indicated.
E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand
from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain
admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.
F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups of full thickness sections of decorative concrete paving to
demonstrate typical joints; surface color, pattern, and texture; curing; and standard
of workmanship.
2. Build mockups of decorative concrete paving in the location and of the size not
less than 96 inches (2400 mm) by 96 inches (2400 mm).
a. For color concrete, mix a minimum of 3 cubic yards concrete to produce the
sample.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
deviations in writing.
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed work if undisturbed at time
of Substantial Completion.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to decorative concrete paving, including
but not limited to, the following:
a. Concrete mixture design.
b. Quality control of concrete materials and decorative concrete paving
construction practices.
1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to

perform preconstruction testing on decorative concrete paving mixtures.

A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic required for
construction activities.
B. Cold Weather Concrete Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or
reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply
with ACI 306.1 and the following:
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F (4.4
degrees C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a
concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and
not more than 80 degrees F (27 degrees C) at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents
or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design
mixtures.
C. Hot Weather Concrete Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and as follows
when hot weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90
degrees F (32 degrees C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped
ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is
calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is
Contractor's option.
2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap, so steel temperature will not
exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMS
A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal framed plywood, or approved panel type
materials to provide full depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.
1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves of a radius of 100 feet (30.5 m)
or less. Do not use notched and bent forms.
B. Forms for Textured Finished Vertical Concrete Surfaces: Units of face design, size,
arrangement, and configuration indicated. Provide solid backing and form supports to
ensure stability of textured form liners.
C. Form Release Agent: Commercially formulated form release agent that will not bond
with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Plain Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, fabricated from as
drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed.
C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420)
deformed bars; assembled with clips.
D. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, as drawn.
E. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) plain-steel bars. Cut bars
true to length with ends square and free of burrs.
F. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture
bar supports according to CRSI Manual of Standard Practice from steel wire, plastic, or
precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified:
1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material
will not support chair legs.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Materials:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, gray or white portland cement Type I.
2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120.
B. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 4S, uniformly graded. Provide
aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10
years' satisfactory service in similar paving applications and service conditions using
similar aggregates and cementitious materials.
1. Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal.
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.
D. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass
of cementitious material.
1. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A, colored where
required to match approved samples.
2. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D, colored
where required to match approved samples.
3. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.
E. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
2.4 STAMPING DEVICES
A. Stamp Mats: Semirigid polyurethane mats with projecting textured and ridged underside
capable of imprinting texture and joint patterns on plastic concrete.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
a. Advanced Surfaces Inc.

b. Bomanite Co.
c. Bon Tool Co.
d. Brickform; a division of Solomon Colors.
e. Butterfield Color, Inc.
f. Matcrete Inc.
g. Proline Concrete Tools, Inc.
h. Scofield, a Business Unit of Sika Corporation.
i. Specialty Concrete Products, Inc.
j. Stampcrete International, Ltd.
k. SuperStone, Inc.
B. Stamp Tools: Open grid, aluminum or rigid plastic stamp tool capable of imprinting joint
patterns on plastic concrete.
of the following:
a. Matcrete Inc.
b. Scofield, a Business Unit of Sika Corporation.
c. SuperStone, Inc.
C. Rollers: Manually controlled, water filled aluminum rollers with projecting ridges on drum
capable of imprinting texture and joint patterns on plastic concrete.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a. Bon Tool Co.
D. Texture Rollers: Manually controlled, abrasion-resistant polyurethane rollers capable of

imprinting texture on plastic concrete.
of the following:
a. Artcrete, Inc.
b. Bon Tool Co.
c. Butterfield Color, Inc.
d. Proline Concrete Tools, Inc.
2.5 SEALING MATERIALS
A. Curing Paper: For use at stained concrete.

1. Nonstaining, waterproof paper, consisting of two layers of kraft paper cemented
together and reinforced with fiber, and complying with ASTM C 171.
B. Curing Products:
1. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
2. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film burlap-polyethylene
sheet.
a. Color:
1) Ambient Temperature Below 50 deg F: Black.
2) Ambient Temperature between 50 deg F and 85 deg F: Any color.
3) Ambient Temperature Above 85 deg F: White.
3. Water: Potable or complying with ASTM C1602.

C. Penetrating Hardener and Sealer: Clear, inorganic silicate or siliconate materials or

magnesium siliofluoride and proprietary components that chemically reacts with alkaline;
odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Master Builders; MasterKure HD 300WB.
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Surfhard.
c. Laticrete International; L&M Lion Hard.
d. Meadows, W.R., Inc.; Liqui-Hard.
e. NoxCrete; Duro-Nox LSC.
D. Slip Resistance Enhancing Additive: Finely graded aggregate or polymer additive,

designed to be added to clear acrylic sealer to enhance slip resistance of sealed paving
surface.
of the following:
a. Advanced Surfaces Inc.
b. Bomanite Co.
c. Bon Tool Co.
d. Dayton Superior.
e. H&C Decorative Concrete Products; a brand of Sherwin-Williams Co.
f. QC Construction Products.
g. Vexcon Chemicals Inc.
E. Film-Forming Curing or Sealing Compounds: Not permitted.
2.6 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or
self expanding cork in preformed strips.
B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or
styrene butadiene.
C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, two component epoxy resin capable of
humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces; of class suitable for application
temperature, of grade complying with requirements, and of the following types:
D. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 1 mil (0.025 mm) thick, clear.
E. Color Pigment: ASTM C979/C979M, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-

reducing admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.
1. Colors: As selected by Architect.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Obtain each color, size, type, and variety of concrete mixture from single manufacturer
with resources to provide concrete of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties.

B. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), for each type
and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial
mixtures or field experience.
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed
concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method.
C. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed
to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not
less than 40 percent.
D. Add air entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight

concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:
1. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal
maximum aggregate size.
E. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight

of cement.
F. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water reducing admixture, water reducing and retarding admixture, or water
reducing and accelerating admixture in concrete required for placement and
workability.
2. Use water reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures,
low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
G. Concrete Mixtures: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3500 psi (24.1 MPa).
2. Maximum W/C Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches (125 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
2.8 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete
according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged
and used in the work.
1. When air temperature is between 85 degrees and 90 degrees F (30 degrees and
32 degrees C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes;
when air temperature is above 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), reduce mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes.
B. Project Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according
to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum type batch machine
mixer.
1. For concrete batches of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least
1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before
any part of batch is released.
2. For concrete batches larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by
15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m).
3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the work, indicating
Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time, quantity,
and amount of water added.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements
for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.
B. Proof roll prepared subbase surface below decorative concrete paving to identify soft
pockets and areas of excess yielding.
1. Completely proof roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular
direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).
2. Proof roll with a pneumatic tired and loaded, 10 wheel, tandem axle dump truck
weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes).
3. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth
of 1/2 inch (13 mm) according to requirements in Section 31 20 00.
C. Proceed with installation after correcting unsatisfactory conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing
concrete.
B. Protect adjacent construction from discoloration and spillage during application of color
hardeners, release agents, stains, curing compounds, and sealers.
3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to
required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work
and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice for fabricating, placing, and supporting
reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond reducing
materials.
C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position
during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
D. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces
at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to
prevent continuous laps in either direction.

E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them
flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace
units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2 inch (50 mm) overlap to
adjacent mats.
3.5 JOINTS
A. Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces
perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to
centerline unless otherwise indicated.
1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed
joints unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and
at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one/half hour unless
paving terminates at isolation joints.
1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise
indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Butt Joints: Use bonding agent or epoxy bonding adhesive at joint locations not
subject to traffic where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially
hardened concrete surfaces.
3. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway section forms or bulkhead forms with
keys unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into
concrete.
4. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where
indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one/half of dowel length to prevent
concrete bonding to one side of joint.
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint filler strips abutting concrete
curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where
indicated.
1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet (15.25 m) unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.
3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm)
below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated.
4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not
indicated.
5. Furnish joint fillers in one piece lengths. Where more than one length is required,
lace or clip joint filler sections together.
6. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or
other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been
placed on both sides of joint.
D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into
areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one/fourth
of the concrete thickness,:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and
finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4 inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat

grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate grooving

tool marks on concrete surfaces.
a. Tolerance: Ensure that grooved joints are within 3 inches (75 mm) either way
from centers of dowels.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide joints into concrete
when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before
developing random contraction cracks.
a. Tolerance: Ensure that sawed joints are within 3 inches (75 mm) in both
directions from centers of dowels.
3. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints
where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one/half of dowel length to prevent
concrete bonding to one side of joint.
E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete
with an edging tool to a 1/4 inch (6 mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying
surface finishes. Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.
A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel

reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast-in.
B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before placing
concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed.

Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required
finish elevation and alignment.
D. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and
placing concrete.
E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at site. Do not add water to fresh concrete
after testing.
F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do

not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M) by mechanical vibrating

equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.
1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an
internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side
forms. Use square faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation.
Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint
devices.
H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.
I. Initial Float: Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open
textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on

the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing
operations or spreading surface treatments.
3.7 FLOAT FINISHING
A. Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleedwater sheen has
disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float
surface with power driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to
power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots.
Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.
3.8 STAMPING
A. Mat Stamping: After floating and while concrete is plastic, apply mat stamped finish.
1. Pigmented Powder Release Agent: Uniformly distribute onto concrete at a rate of
3 to 4 lb/100 sq. ft. (1.5 to 2 kg/10 sq. m).
2. Liquid Release Agent: Apply liquid release agent to the concrete surface and the
stamp mat. Uniformly mist surface of concrete at a rate of 5 gal/1000 sq. ft. (0.2
L/sq. m).
3. After application of release agent, accurately align and place stamp mats in
sequence.
4. Uniformly load mats and press into concrete to produce required imprint pattern
and depth of imprint on concrete surface. Gently remove stamp mats. Hand stamp
edges and surfaces unable to be imprinted by stamp mats.
5. Remove residual release agent according to manufacturer's written instructions,
but no fewer than three days after stamping concrete. High pressure wash surface
and joint patterns, taking care not to damage stamped concrete. Control, collect,
and legally dispose of runoff.
B. Tool Stamping: After floating and while concrete is plastic, apply tool stamped finish.
1. Cover surface with polyethylene film, stretch taut to remove wrinkles, lap sides and
ends 3 inches (75 mm), and secure to edge forms. Lightly broom surface to remove
air bubbles.
2. Accurately align and place stamp tools in sequence and tamp into concrete to
produce required imprint pattern and depth of imprint on concrete surface. Gently
remove stamp tools. Hand stamp edges and surfaces unable to be imprinted by
stamp tools.
3. Carefully remove polyethylene film immediately after tool stamping.
C. Roller Stamping: After floating and while concrete is plastic, apply roller-stamped finish.
1. Cover surface with polyethylene film, stretch taut to remove wrinkles, lap sides and
ends 3 inches (75 mm), and secure to edge forms. Lightly broom surface to remove
air bubbles.
2. Accurately align roller and perform rolling operation to produce required imprint
pattern and depth of imprint on concrete surface. Hand stamp surfaces
inaccessible to roller.
3. Carefully remove polyethylene film immediately after roller stamping.

3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures.
B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold weather protection.
C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from
concrete surface.
D. Wet Curing: Provide wet curing only in accordance with Work of Division 03. Use of
curing compound not permitted.
E. Curing Paper: Cure stained concrete with unwrinkled curing paper in pieces large
enough to cover the entire width and edges of slab. Do not lap sheets. Fold curing paper
down over paving edges and secure with continuous banks of soil to prevent
displacement or billowing due to wind. Immediately repair holes or tears in paper.
3.10 SEALER APPLICATION
A. Penetrating Sealer: Allow stained concrete surfaces to cure in accordance with sealer
manufacturer requirements before applying sealer.
1. Spray apply sealer to comply with manufacturer's instructions except where project
conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory
performance of the work.
2. Apply sealer to produce surface without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines
and color breaks. Do not permit sealer to pond and dry on concrete surface.
Squeegee ponding sealer to spread.
3. Thoroughly mix slip resistance enhancing additive into sealer before applying
sealer according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stir sealer occasionally
during application to maintain even distribution of additive.
3.11 PAVING TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 (ACI 117M):

1. Elevation: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3. Surface: Gap below 10 foot (3 m) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2
inch (13 mm).
4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch (25 mm).
5. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
6. Alignment of Dowel Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4
inch per 12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm) of dowel.
7. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm).
8. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.
9. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for first 100 cu. yd. (76
cu. m) and for each 5000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete
mixture placed each day.
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength
tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five
randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite
sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method; one test for each composite
sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air
temperature is 40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C) and below and when it is 80
degrees F (27 degrees C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one
set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one specimen at seven
days and two specimens at 28 days.
a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from
two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28
days.
C. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive
compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no
compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than
500 psi (3.4 MPa).
D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and

Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in work, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7 day and 28 day tests.
E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may

be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.
G. Decorative concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to

determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
I. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.13 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace stamped concrete paving that is broken or damaged or does not
comply with requirements. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless
otherwise approved by Architect.
B. Detailing: Grind concrete "squeeze" left from tool placement. Color ground areas with
slurry of color hardener mixed with water and bonding agent. Remove excess release
agent with high velocity blower.
C. Protect stamped concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least
14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean
as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D. Maintain stamped concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign
material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial
Completion inspections.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 17 23
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents: General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract,
Division 1 - General Requirements, and Drawings are applicable to this Section.
B. Section Includes:
1. Pavement markings including parking spaces, crosswalks, painted
handicapped symbols at designated spaces and fire lane markings as
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
A. Installer: Having a minimum of 2 years experience in the layout and striping of
parking lots.
B. Job Conditions: Do not apply marking paint when weather is foggy or rainy, or
ambient or pavement temperatures are below 40 degrees F., nor when such
conditions are anticipated during eight hours after application.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Paint:
1. Type: Non-bleeding, pigmented, alkyd-chlorinated rubber composition.
2. Non-Volatiles: 70 percent by weight; 50 percent by volume.
3. Application Thickness per Coat: 15 mils wet (7 mils dry).
4. Application Rate per Coat: 300 to 320 linear feet of 4 inches wide line per
gallon.
5. Colors:
a. White: Parking stall striping, directional emblems, restricted parking
zone striping, disabled accessibility paths.
b. Blue with White Copy: Disabled parking emblems.
c. Red with White Copy: Fire lanes.
6. Acceptable Product: Chlorinated Rubber Traffic Paint by Centerline Supply,
Inc.
B. Substitutions: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions.
2.2 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT

A. Pressurized, self-contained paint machine capable of applying a straight line from 2
to 6 inch wide, with consistent coverage.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Locate markings as indicated on Drawings. Provide qualified technician to
supervise equipment and application of markings. Lay out markings using guide
lines, templates
and forms.
Pavement Markings 32 17 23 – 1
B. Thoroughly clean pavement surfaces free of dirt, sand, gravel, oil and other foreign
materials.
C. Allow paving to cure before painting as required by manufacturer of traffic paint.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply one coat to portland cement concrete paving and asphaltic concrete paving
with protective seal coat. Apply two coats to asphaltic concrete paving without
protective seal coat.
C. Restrict traffic on pavement until striping if fully cured.
END OF SECTION
Pavement Markings 32 17 23 – 2
SECTION 32 18 13
NON-ATHLETIC SYNTHETIC GRASS SURFACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes synthetic grass surfacing, underlayment, and artificial slope shapes.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For synthetic grass surfacing.
1. Include sections and details.

2. Show locations of seams and method of seaming.
3. Show layout of artificial slope shapes, seaming patterns of synthetic turf,
transitions, terminations, and related information required for a complete
installation.
C. Samples: For each type of synthetic grass surfacing and artificial sloping shape module
(partial size).
A. Product test reports.
B. Sample warranties.
A. Maintenance data.
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are
trained and approved by manufacturer.
Nonathletic Synthetic Grass Surfacing 32 18 13 - 1

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace synthetic grass surfacing

that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 8 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Turf Fabric: Turf fabric tested according to the following methods, with additional test
method conditions for each method according to ASTM F1551.
1. Tuft Bind without Infill: ASTM D1335 Not less than 10 lbf according to.
2. Pile Weight: ASTM D418. 60 ounces per square yard
a. Primary Yarn, Monofilament: 40 ounces per square yard
b. Secondary Yarn, Thatch: 20 ounces per square yard
3. Primary and Secondary Backing Weight: ASTM D5848; 7.9 ounces per square
yard
4. Total Weight: ASTM D5848; Not less than 88 ounces per square yard
5. Monofilament Yarn Denier: ASTM D1907; 12.400
6. Tufting Gage: ASTM D5793; 1/2 inch
7. Pile Height: Nominal 1-1/4 to 1-1/2 inch
8. Backing: Three-layer polyurethane and geotex non-woven fabric
9. Seaming: Micromechanical bonding
10. Infill: Nominally 2 to 4 pounds rounded sand.
11. Flammability (pill burn): ASTM D2859; Pass
12. Turf Permeability: ASTM D4991; Greater than 40 inches per hour
2.2 SYNTHETIC GRASS SURFACING
A. Basis of Design, Turf: Kickabout Turf; A Hellas Construction Product
B. Basis of Design, Artificial Slope Shapes: Playmounds; Forever Lawn
C. Other Acceptable Products and Manufacturers:

1. Turf: Playground Grass and Safetyfoam; Forever Lawn
D. Synthetic Grass Surfacing: Assembly tested according to the following methods, with
additional test method conditions for each method according to ASTM F1551.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Sand Infill: Uniformly sized silica sand free of silts, clays, and contaminants, and of
subangular or rounder shape according to ASTM F1632; mesh size as recommended
by synthetic grass surfacing manufacturer.

B. Seam Adhesive: One- or two-part urethane, recommended or approved by synthetic

grass surfacing manufacturer, and suitable for ambient conditions at time of
installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine base and other conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, permeability, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Avoid disturbance of base during installation of turf fabric.
B. Roll out turf fabric and allow to relax at least four hours prior to seaming.
C. Provide seams flat and snug, with no gaps or fraying. Remove yarns that are trapped
within seams. Attach turf fabric to perimeter restraint system as recommended by the
manufacturer.
D. Repair loose seams and bubbles formed due to expansion of turf fabric prior to
installation of infill.
E. Evenly broadcast and groom infill by machine in proportions and depth after settling as
recommended by the manufacturer, and to meet indicated performance requirements.
Rake fibers trapped by infill to surface.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in proper maintenance procedures for synthetic

grass surfacing.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 18 16.33
PLAYGROUND SURFACE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes playground surface materials and installation.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Product Data: Submittal for each playground surfacing material:

1. Manufacturer's technical data describing physical and performance
characteristics.
2. Installation instruction indicating special procedures and conditions requiring
special attention.
A. Quality Control Submittals: Certificates, signed by manufacturer, certifying that each

material meets or exceeds specified requirements.
A. Contract Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance instructions; including

recommended cleaning and soil sterilant materials, application methods and
precautions in use of maintenance materials which may be detrimental to playground
surface if improperly implied.
B. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s 5 year warrantee against U.V. deterioration and

playground surface failure.
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products
specified with minimum five year documented experience.
Playground Surface 32 18 16 - 1
2. Install Qualifications: Engage an experience installer or applicator who has

specialized in installing surfacing similar to that required for this Project for five
years and who is acceptable to manufacturer of primary materials.
3. Land Surveyor: Registered in State of Texas acceptable to Architect, Contractor,
and Owner.
B. Design and Detailing

1. General
a. Playground System is utilized wherever an impact, absorbing cushioned
surface is required.
b. Playground areas should meet criteria set by the CPSC.
2. Substrate and Substrate Systems: Check application manual for specific
instructions on substrate.
3. Acceptable Substrates for the include asphalt. concrete and compacted stone.
4. Other Substrates shall be approved by manufacturer prior to application.
5. The Trained Applicator shall verify that the proposed Substrate is acceptable with
application of the product.
6. Substrate Systems shall be engineered with regard to structural performance.
7. Follow Manufacturer's published details with specific recommendations for this
project.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain primary surfacing materials, including base

rubber granules, acrylic latex binders, vinyl acrylic latex surface coat, binder, and
pigments from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials from a source
recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical as shown on Drawings.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves
such deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part
of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
A. Deliver all materials in original unopened packages with labels intact.
B. Store all materials protected from weather and at temperature not less than 40 F (4 C).
A. Ambient air temperature should be 32 F at the time of installation of the playground

surface. The System may be installed with temperatures below 40. The temperature
only affects the system in workability of the materials and the dry time. The lower the
temperature, the thicker the viscosity of the binder and the dry time may become
delayed.
B. The playground surface shall be protected during installation while curing and/or
unattended from weather and other damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Vitriturf V-

10 System or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Safe Play International Turf
2. Vibra Whirl and Company Turf
3. Hummer Turfgrass Systems
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,

crushed stone, crushed slag, and natural or crushed sand.
B. Primer: A single component moisture cured polyurethane primer.
C. Binder: Elastic Polyurethane Pre-Polymer, MDI based. Extremely low odor, capable of
excellent weathering and binding characteristics. Binder shall contain no TDI
Monomers.
D. Black SBR: Shall be recycled SBR Rubber, shall be cryogenically processed, be

chopped to 1-3mm or 3/8" shredded granules and contain less than 4% dust and shall
be packed in suitable bags to protect SBR from moisture.
E. Base Mat- A combination of post-consumer, non-tire shredded rubber with various

sizes. The Base Mat shall be granular in appearance and provide for a flat base for the
Wearing Course.
F. EPDM Rubber: A man-made rubber containing minimum of 30% EPDM and having a
density of 1.5-0.05.
1. Is available in assorted colors and available in three sizes: 1-3mm, 0.5-1.5mm
and 0.40-08mm (dust). A predetermined combination of sizes from Hanover
Specialties Inc. will ensure proper wearing course to meet the requirements for
issuance of a Ten-Year Warranty.
G. The Playground System shall have been tested for shock attenuation under ASTM-F-
1292 and HIC. Tested for non slip characteristics under ASTM-E303, ease of ignition
under BS-5696 and ASTM-D-2859 for fire resistance under UL94.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Examine playground surface materials before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Base Course Replacement:

1. Replace base course at failed areas of playground surface as needed.
2. Maintain lines and slope of sub-grade course.
3. Place base course material on sub-grade in layers of uniform thickness,
conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture
content for compacting base material during placement operating.
B. When a compacted base course is 6 inches thick or less, place material in a single
layer. When indicated to be more than 6 inches thick, place material in equal layers,
except that no single layer shell be more than 6 inches or less than 3 inches in
thickness when compacted.
C. Surface of base course after compaction shall be smooth and even with not more than
1/4" deviation in 10' straight in my direction.
D. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact base material at 95 percent

maximum density in accordance with ASTM D 1557.
E. Leveling Course:
1. Mix 5 to 7 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture in accordance with
State of Texas Standards to a depth of 1-1/2".
2. Surface of leveling course shall be in a smooth uniform plane with no variance
greater than 1/8 inch in 10'-0" in any direction.
3. Level and slope leveling course to match or continue existing slope as indicated.
4. After completion, leveling course should be flush with or above level of inside
curb.
3.3 APPLICATION - SURFACING
A. General: Apply each component of playground surfacing system according to

manufacturer's written instruction to produce a uniform nonolithic wearing surface of
thickness indicated.
B. Prime Coat: Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended

spreading rate of 300 so. ft. per gallon. Coordinate applying primer with surfacing to
ensure optimum adhesion between playground surface materials and substrate.
C. Playground Surfacing Materials:
1. Mixing: Granules, dispersing pigment, and elastic Polyurethane Pre-Polymer,

MDI based binder shall be thoroughly mixed in a mechanical mixer to produce a
homogeneous blend a ratio of 82/18 in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Placement: Mix materials shall be put in place in structural layers to a minimum
thickness of 3/8 inch as specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Wearing Course:
a. Mix EPDM to Binder in a ratio of 82/18 b. Apply with a steel trowel
b. For compacting: Lubricate trowel with diesel fuel or soapy water.
c. For finishing: Spray a light mist of water on surface and trowel smooth.
Apply at a minimum of 1".
END OF SECTION
SECTION 32 80 00
IRRIGATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
Installation of the irrigation system shall be by a Texas Licensed Landscape Irrigation

contractor. It is intended that the cost of all work incidental to the completion of the
system as shown or indicated on the plans or in these specifications, be included in the
bid except as specifically noted herein.
This is a 2-Wire system. There are 3 separate independent irrigation loops designed for
the site. No cross connections will be allowed. Each loop system shall have one meter
and one controller. Different color control wires are required for each loop. Reference
legend.
1.2 CODES AND PERMITS
All work shall be done in accordance with all applicable ordinances of the City. The
contractor shall take out all required permits, arrange for all necessary inspections, and
shall pay all fees and expenses in connection with same as part of the work under this
contract.
1.3 WORK BY OTHERS
A. Electric power (115 VAC) to be furnished by the general contractor to supply

power for the automatic controller unless noted otherwise on the plans.
“Complete” electric service, ( if called for on the plans ) shall include a new
electric meter, disconnect, breaker, and all required coordination with the electric
utility company.
Final hard-wire connection to the controller shall be the responsibility of the
irrigation contractor and shall be performed by a licensed electrician.
B. Sleeves shall be installed by the general contractor. The irrigation contractor

shall be responsible for locating sleeves as they are shown on the plans or
directed by the owner.
C. Water meters, and all associated costs shall be as called for on the plans.
1.4 LAY OUT
The contractor shall lay out and stake the system according to the plans provided,
making minor adjustments as required by the site to provide a complete system with
uniform coverage. Any discrepancies, including required static water pressure,
unanticipated obstructions, or site conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the
owner’s representative before authorization can be given to proceed with corrective
measures.
Irrigation 32 80 00 - 1
PART 2 – MATERIALS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Plastic PVC Pipe: All lateral pipe and mainline pipe shall be class 200, SDR-21
solvent weld type. All pipe shall conform to National Sanitation Foundation
Standard 14 for Thermoplastic pipe and shall bear the NSF seal. ASTM
standard D2241 shall apply. Pipe shall be free from visible cracks, holes, foreign
materials, blisters or dents.
B. PVC Pipe Fittings: All solvent weld pvc fittings shall be type I, medium weight
Schedule 40, as manufactured by LASCO Manufacturing Company, or equal.
Swing joint assemblies for rotary heads and quick coupling valves shall be as
manufactured by LASCO. Gasket pipe fittings shall be ductile iron as
manufactured by Harco Industries.
C. Solvents: Pvc solvent cement and primer shall be as recommended by the

manufacturer.
D. Valve Boxes: Valve box enclosures for electric valves shall be rectangular. Use
rectangular box for all quick coupling valves and gate valves. All boxes to be
made of polypropylene with a snap lid as manufactured by Highline (Formerly
Armor) and shall be a minimum of 11” x 17”. Box lids shall be green. All boxes
and lids shall be of the same manufacture (Highline).
E. Wire: Wiring from the electric controller to the control valves shall be type UF
600 volt solid copper single conductor with 4/64” insulation which is Underwriters
Laboratory approved for direct underground burial when used in National Electric
Code Class II Circuits, ( 30 Volts AC, or less ). Wire connections shall be
encased in a water-proof compound or gel, as manufactured by 3-M or
WEATHER*MATIC dry splice. DIFFERENT COLORED WIRE SHALL BE USED
ON EACH OF THE SEPARATE IRRIGATION LOOPS.
F. Automatic Controller: Shall be as shown on the plans.
G. Electric Valves: Shall be as shown on the plans. All electric valves shall have
ball valve upstream from electric valve in same valve box.
H. Ball Valves: Shall be of PVC construction. Use NIBCO or SPEARS.
I. Quick Coupling Valves: Shall be as shown on the plans. All quick coupling
valves shall have ball valve upstream from quick coupler valve in same valve
box.
J. Spray Heads: Shall be as shown on the plans. Reference legend on irrigation

note sheet.
K. Backflow Preventor: Shall be as shown on the plans.
2.2 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
All materials shall be new and without flaws or defects and shall be the best of their
class and kind. All materials and equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike
manner. The architect or the owner’s representative reserves the right to direct the
removal and replacement of any items, which in their opinion shall not present an orderly
and reasonably neat appearance. Such removal and replacement shall be done, when
directed, at the contractor’s expense without additional cost to the owner. The
contractor shall be responsible for full and complete coverage of all irrigated areas and
shall make any necessary minor adjustments at no additional cost to the owner. The
contractor shall visit the site prior to bidding to acquaint himself with all conditions
requiring consideration to provide a complete system.
2.3 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Contractors desiring to substitute materials shall submit to the landscape

architect the following:
1. actual samples of each equipment item

2. manufacturer’s catalog sheet showing complete specifications
3. detailed pressure loss computations based upon use of the proposed
item
The decision of approval will be based on the comparative ability of the

equipment to perform fully all purposes and functions of mechanics and general
design. Approval of a substitute must be obtained before the bid is submitted.
Approval shall not relieve the contractor of his responsibility to demonstrate that
the final installed system will operate according to the intent of the original
design.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Plastic Pipe and Fittings: Plastic pipe and fittings shall be solvent welded using
solvents and methods as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe, except
where screwed connections are required. Pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly
cleaned of dirt, dust, and moisture before applying solvent with a non-synthetic
bristle brush. Pipe may be assembled and welded on the surface. Snake pipe
from side to side of trench to allow for expansion and contraction. Make all
connections between plastic and metal items with threaded plastic male
adapters. Teflon tape or other non-oil based thread sealant shall be used to seal
threads. Oil based sealants will not be allowed.
B. Mainline pipe shall be installed at a minimum depth of 18” and a maximum depth
of 24”. Lateral pipe shall be installed between 12” and 18”. Multiple pipes in the
same trench shall not rest directly against each other. Crosses shall not be
allowed. Use multiple tees. A 4” minimum wide trench is required for pipe up to
2” size. A 6” trench is required for pipe up to 3”size.
C. Trenching and Backfill: All excavation in this contract shall be unclassified and is
to include earth, loose rock, solid rock, or any combination thereof, in a wet or dry
state. All trenches shall be backfilled with the material removed except for rocks
larger than 1”. Backfill shall be flooded and tamped to prevent settling. Should
solid rock be encountered, contractor shall remove such rock within 4” of contact
with pipe and bed trenches with clean sand fill. Removal of excavated rock shall
be included in the cost of this contract.
D. Wire: All wiring shall be installed under lateral pipes and to the side of mainline
piping. Expansion coils shall be provided every 100’, and at all changes in
direction. Wires shall be bundled and taped together, by controller, every 20’. All
splices shall be located in a valve box. No field splices shall be allowed. Use
different color wire for each controller. Label each wire at the controller terminal
strip. DIFFERENT COLORED WIRE SHALL BE USED ON EACH OF THE
SEPARATE IRRIGATION LOOPS.
E. Valves: Valves shall be installed as per detail shown. Valves shall be grouped
in orderly arrangement. No valves shall be within 24” of another, or within 5’ of a
curb or 3’ of a sidewalk. Valve boxes shall be grouped in straight lines at the
same grade. Hand tamp and fill around all valve boxes. Valve boxes shall be
flush with grade or no final acceptance will be given. All remote valves shall have
a ball valve installed upstream in same 11” X 17” valve box.
F. Heads: Install all spray heads and rotary heads as per detail. Allow a 3” to 4”
space between all heads and any hardscape edge. Thoroughly flush all debris
from lines before installing spray head nozzles or rotary internal assemblies.
Filters are required as supplied by the manufacturer on all spray heads. Hand
tamp and fill if necessary around all heads after nozzle installation. All heads
shall be plumb, level, and flush with grade unless noted otherwise.
G. Quick Coupling Valves: Quick coupling valves shall be installed as per details.
Locate valve within box to insure unobstructed operation of valve key. All quick
coupling valves shall have a ball valve installed upstream in same 11” X 17”
valve box. All quick coupling valves shall be installed on a Lasco swing joint.
H. Controllers: Automatic controllers shall be installed as per detail shown. The

controller shall be installed level and secure. Wire conduits to controller shall be
straight and secured with appropriate clamps as needed. Controller sensors
shall be installed in optimum locations at the direction of the landscape architect
within access of the controller location. Assign zone numbers as indicted on the
plans. Each valve wire end shall be labeled within the controller with zone
number tape markers.
3.2 COORDINATION
The irrigation contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with other contractors to enable
the work to proceed as rapidly and efficiently as possible.
3.3 “AS-BUILT DRAWINGS”
Prepare an “as-built” drawing on a reproducible print which shall show deviations from
the bid documents made during construction affecting the mainline pipe, controller
location, remote control valves, quick coupling valves and all sprinkler heads. The
drawing shall include dimensions from two separate landmarks to locate all electric,
manual, and quick coupling valves. The drawing shall be delivered to the owner before
final acceptance will be given.
3.4 FINALIZATION: Contractor to complete the following before requesting a final

acceptance inspection.
A. Clean Up: Contractor shall remove from the site all debris resulting from work of
this section.
B. Adjustment: Contractor shall test entire system for proper operation of all
functions. Adjust all spray nozzles and rotary arcs for complete coverage with
minimum overspray onto walls, walks, and streets. Repair any leaks. Refill and
compact any settled areas.
C. Submittals: Contractor to deliver “as-built” drawings, quick coupler keys, and any
required additional materials to the owner’s representative along with a detailed
list of such material items. A zone chart shall be included within the controller
cabinet with a description of the location of each section.
3.4 ACCEPTANCE:
The date of final acceptance shall be the date when any “punch items” are completed to
the satisfaction of the owner’s representative. Until the date of final acceptance it shall
be the responsibility of the contractor to maintain and protect the system by all means
within his control.
3.5 WARRANTY:
The contractor shall guarantee for a period one full year from substantial completion
date, that the entire system shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship.
Any such defects shall promptly be repaired or replaced at no cost to the owner. Any
after-settling of trenches shall be refilled and compacted within the warranty period at no
additional cost to the owner. Repairs required due to abuse, misuse, or neglect of the
system are not included in this warranty.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 32 92 00
LAWNS AND GRASSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
Furnish all labor, tools, transportation, materials, equipment, supervision, etc., required
to adequately establish a dense lawn of permanent grasses, free from lumps and
depressions as indicated by plans and specifications.
Redo any part of the area failing to show uniform cover until a dense lawn is established.
The cost of miscellaneous labor and materials for topsoil, weeding, tilling, pest control,
fertilizing, etc., are not separate pay items and shall be includes in the bid price for
grassing.
A. Irrigation System
B. Landscaping
1.3 MAINTENANCE OF GRASS
The Contractor shall maintain the grass until final acceptance. Such maintenance shall
include spraying, weeding, cultivation, fertilizing, watering, disease and insect control,
top dressing low spots, plus any procedures consistent with horticultural practice
necessary to insure normal, vigorous, and healthy grass.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Water: Will be available on site. Provide necessary hoses and other watering
equipment required to complete work. Not all areas shown to have grass will be
receiving automatic irrigation
B. Lawn areas will be left within 1/10 of a foot of finish grade by other trades. Fine
grading, raking and smoothing will be the responsibility of the landscape
contractor.
1.5 SCHEDULE
A. Sodding: Sod Bermuda year round under favorable conditions.
1.6 ACCEPTANCE
The work will be accepted when a completed, undamaged stand of grass is achieved, as
approved by the Owner’s Representative.
Lawns and Grasses 32 92 00 - 1

PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 TOPSOIL (6” in all landscape areas):
A. No topsoil shall be removed from the site. General contractor shall excavate and
stockpile topsoil on site if the soil is of good quality. A minimum of four soil
samples shall be taken of on-site soil. There shall be at least one sample taken
from each location from which topsoil is imported. On site samples shall be
spread out evenly throughout the site. All soil samples shall be tested by a
certified institution. The testing institution shall provide recommendations (for the
turf specified for this project) for any adjustment needed in the soil condition. The
landscape contractor shall be responsible for any soil amendments as
recommended. The contractor shall forward two copies of all the soil reports,
recommendations and a list of soil amendments to the owner and landscape
architect.
B. General contractor shall be responsible for distributing the stockpiled soil back to
all areas of the site if the top soil is of good quality. The general contractor shall
be responsible for providing specified amount of top soil in all landscape areas.
If there is not enough topsoil stockpiled on site the general contractor shall be
responsible for purchasing and transporting quality top soil to the site including
the distribution throughout the site.
C. In the event that there is more stockpiled top soil than was required to provide
the specified topsoil the top soil shall be retained for the school district. No topsoil
shall be hauled off of the site unless directed by the owner.
D. Topsoil should be friable, fertile, dark, loamy soil, free of clay lumps, sub-soil
stones, and other extraneous material and reasonable free of weeds and foreign
grasses. Topsoil containing dallisgrass, nutgrass or weeds shall be rejected.
E. Physical properties of topsoil should be as follows:

Clay - between 7-27 percent / Silt - between 28-50 percent / Sand - less than 52
percent
F. Landscape contractor shall be responsible for verifying positive flow of water

away from building in all areas.
G. General contractor shall be responsible for placing top soil on site within twenty
days of the completion of rough grading and utilities.
H. General contractor shall provide a unit price for a cubic yard of the above
specified topsoil to be delivered to the site and installed.
2.2 GRASS
A. Bermuda Sod: Solid rolled sod, live, rich, dark green in color, free of foreign
grasses, weeds, nutgrass, cut with a full ¾” min. layer of soil covering roots.
Deliver to site in standard rolls (24” min width). Do not stack for more than 24
hours between time of cutting and time of delivery. ALL SOD NETTING SHALL
BE REMOVED DURING INSTALLATION.

2.3 FERTILIZER
Fertilizer shall be organic base, uniform in composition, dry and free flowing. Deliver
fertilizer to site in original, unopened containers, each bearing manufacturer’s
guaranteed statement of analysis.
A. First application: 12-12-12 element percentage with minimum 8% sulfur and 4%

iron, plus micro nutrients.
B. Second application: 3:1:2 element ratio. Nitrogen source to be a minimum 50%

slow release organic nitrogen (SCU or UF) plus minimum 8% sulfur and 4% iron
plus micro nutrients.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Scarify lawn areas where excessive compaction is greater than 85% Standard
Proctor to a depth of 4-inches by discing or rototilling. Repeat cultivation as
required to thoroughly loosen soil.
B. Leave areas free of weeds and ready for final grading.
C. Provide barricades around scarified areas to prevent compaction by vehicles.
3.2 FINAL GRADING
A. Remove from site and legally dispose of stones ¾-inch and larger, clods 1-inch
or larger, sticks, and other debris exposed during this operation. Continue to
remove these items as they may appear after watering or rain.
B. Topdress with sharp sand, raked in carefully to fill joints. Roll to eliminate
undulations and provide complete soil contact. Continue topdressing and rolling
until all seams and undulations have been eliminated and levels are within
tolerances of 1 inch in ten feet of run in landscape areas.
C. Provide finish grading leaving surface uniform without depressions and

undulations. Grade should be approximately 1-inch below paving on low side of
concrete and flush on the high side of concrete to facilitate water flowing across
walks and drives and to avoid standing water on concrete surfaces.
3.3 HERBICIDE
Apply herbicide to remove any remaining weeds. This work is to be performed by a

licensed applicator following the manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.4 FERTILIZER
A. Place first application with hydromulch at rate of 12 pounds per 1,000 square
feet.

B. Uniformly distribute second application using a rotary type fertilizer spreader 3-4
weeks after first application at 12 pounds per 1,000 square feet.
3.5 SOLID SOD
A. Solid Rolled Sod: Plant grass edge to edge with staggered joints. Topdress with
sharp sand raked in carefully to fill joints. Roll to eliminate undulations and
provide complete soil contact. Continue topdressing and rolling until all seams
and undulations have been eliminated and levels are within tolerances of 1 inch
in ten feet of run in landscape areas. ALL SOD NETTING SHALL BE REMOVED
DURING INSTALLATION.
B. Sod shall be top dressed prior to rolling as indicated above. After 2 weeks,
landscape contractor shall review all sod areas again and top dress any
remaining open or uneven joints. Grass will be required to have a very smooth
finish in all playing surfaces. No grass area with undulations or uneven joints will
be accepted until leveled and finished out to the owners satisfaction.
C. Fertilizing: Fertilize immediately after grass is planted at rate of 4 lbs. Per 1,000
square foot. Repeat fertilizing at the same rate 3-4 weeks later.
3.6 ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE OF LAWN AREAS
A. Watering
1. Water lawn areas immediately after grassing operation.
2. Continue watering as required to keep soil uniformly moist to a minimum

depth of 4-inches.
3. Be alert to over-watering newly planted grass, particularly in heavy clay

soils.
4. Some areas will require hand watering or temporary irrigation.
B. Replanting/Erosion Control
1. Correct any erosion that may occur during the establishment of grass.
2. Reseed (sod) any areas not showing sufficient growth within 3 weeks
after initial grassing. Continue seeding (sodding) until a stand of grass is
achieved.
3. A stand of grass will be defined as a uniform cover of activity growing turf.
C. Mowing/Weed Control
1. Mow lawn areas weekly until a stand of grass is achieved. Begin mowing
when the lawn reaches a height of 3-inches; set mower to cut at 2-inches.
A minimum of two mowings is required.

2. Weed lawn areas until acceptance, removing all foreign vegetation, either
by hoeing or pulling. If approved, herbicide spot treatments may be used.
3.7 CLEANUP
During work, keep premises neat and orderly, including organization of storage areas.
Remove trash, including debris resulting from removing weeds and rocks from site daily
as work progresses. Keep paved areas clean by sweeping or hosing.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 93 00
PLANTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
Provide all labor, materials, and equipment for complete installation of landscaping, as
indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
A. Irrigation System
B. Lawns
C. Earthwork
D. General Requirements
A. Provide plant materials in compliance with applicable State and Federal laws
relating to inspection for diseases and inset infestation at growing site.
B. Plants are subject to inspection and approval by the Landscape Architect. Plants
required for the work may be inspected and tagged at the growing site before
being dug.
C. Observation at growing site does not preclude right of rejection at job site. Plants
damaged in transit or at job site may be rejected.
D. Employ only qualified personnel familiar with required work.
E. Off-site topsoil and topsoil on-site Testing (paid by Landscape Contractor):
1. Provide source of off-site soil (If Required For Job) to the Owners
representative for the purpose of soil investigation.
2. Take random representative soil samples from area to be planted.
3. Test soil samples from both sources for ph, alkalinity, total soluble salts,
porosity, sodium content and organic matter.
F. File certificate of Inspection of plant material by State and Federal authorities

with Landscape Architect, if required by State.
Planting 32 93 00 - 1
1.4 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. American Standard for Nursery Stock, approved 1986 by American National

Standards Institute, Inc. - Plant materials.
B. Hortus Third, 1976 - Cornell University - Plant nomenclature.
C. ASTM - American Standard Testing Material - Sharp sand.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver packaged materials in sealed containers showing weight, analysis and

name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and
while stored at site.
B. Do not deliver more plant materials than can be planted in one day unless
adequate storage and watering facilities are available on job site. Storage of
materials and equipment at the job site will be at the risk of the landscape
contractor. The owner will not be held responsible for theft or damage.
C. If balled plants cannot be planted within 24 hours after delivery to site, protect
root balls by heeling in with saw dust or other approved material.
D. Protect during delivery to prevent damage to root ball or desiccation of leaves.
E. Remove rejected plant material immediately from site.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Planting Restrictions:
Perform actual planting only when weather and soil conditions are suitable in
accordance with locally accepted practice. In no way shall any trees, plants,
ground cover or seasonal color obstruct drainage or block a 2% minimum
positive slope away from buildings.
B. Utilities:
1. Determine locations of underground utilities and perform work in a

manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, if required, to
minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities.
2. Maintain grade stakes until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties

concerned.
3. Coordinate work with irrigation contractor to prevent damage to

underground sprinkler system.
Planting 32 93 00 - 2
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty for plants and trees shall be for one year after final acceptance.
Replace dead materials and materials not in vigorous, thriving condition as soon
as weather permits and on notification by Owners Rep. Replace plants, including
trees, which in opinion of Landscape Architect have partially died thereby
damaging shape, size, or symmetry.
B. Replace plants and trees with same kind and size as originally planted, at no cost
to the Owner. Provide one-year warranty on replacement plants. These should
be replaced at start of next planting or digging season. In such cases, removed
dead trees immediately. Protect irrigation system and other piping conduit or
other work during replacement. Repair any damage immediately.
C. Warranty excludes replacement of plants after final acceptance because of injury

by storm, drought drowning, hail, freeze, insects or diseases.
D. At the end of the warranty period, staking and guying materials if required shall
be removed from the site.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Water: Will be available on site. Provide necessary hoses and other watering
equipment required to complete work. Some proposed grass areas will not have
automatic irrigation and some temporary irrigation or hand watering will be
required for establishing grass.
B. Until final acceptance, maintain plantings and trees by watering, cultivating,

mowing, weeding, spraying, cleaning and replacing as necessary to keep
landscape in a vigorous, health condition and rake bed areas as required.
C. A written notice requesting final inspection and acceptance should be submitted

to Landscape Architect or owners representative within seven (7) days prior to
completion. At that time owner and Landscape Architect will prepare a final
punch list to be reviewed with the landscape contractor.
D. Following final acceptance, maintenance of plant material will become the

Owner’s responsibility. The Contractor shall provide Owner with a recommended
maintenance program.
E. All dead wood and suckers shall be removed from all existing trees on this
property. Prune any branch lower than eight feet above vehicular or pedestrian
pavement up to a minimum of eight feet.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLANTS
A. Quantities: The drawings and specifications are complementary: anything called

for on one and not the other is as binding as if shown and called for on both. The
plant schedule is an aid to bidders only. Confirm all quantities on plan.
Planting 32 93 00 - 3
B. Plants shall be equal to well formed No. 1 grade of better; symmetrical, heavily
branched with an even branch distribution, densely foliated and/or budded, and a
strong, straight, distinct leader where this is characteristic of species. Plants
shall possess a normal balance between height and spread. The Landscape
Architect will be the final arbiter of acceptability of plant form, either before or
after planting and shall be removed at the expense of the Landscape Contractor
and replaced with acceptable plants as specified.
C. Plants shall be healthy and vigorous, free of disease, insect pests and their eggs,
and larvae.
D. Plants shall have a well-developed fibrous root system.
E. Plants shall be free of physical damage such as scrapes, broken or split

branches, scars, bark abrasions, sun scalds, fresh limb cuts, disfiguring knots, or
other defects.
F. Pruning of all trees and shrubs, as directed by Landscape Architect, shall be

executed by Landscape Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
G. Plants shall meet the sizes indicated on the Plant List. Where a size or caliper
range is stated, at least 50% of the material shall be closer in size to the top of
the range stated.
H. Plants indicated “B&B” shall be balled and burlapped. Plants shall be nursery
grown unless otherwise specified in plant list. Balls shall be firm, neat, slightly
tapered and well burlapped. Non-biodegradable ball wrapping material will not
be accepted. Any tree loose in the ball or with broken ball at time of planting will
be rejected. Balls shall be ten(10") inches in diameter for each one (1") inch of
trunk diameter, measured six (6") inches above ball.
I. Container grown plants shall be well rooted and established in the container in
which they are growing. They shall have grown in the container for a sufficient
length of time for the root system to hold the planting medium when taken from
the container, but not long enough to become root bound.
2.2 SOIL PREPARATION MATERIALS
A. Peat Moss: Commercial sphagnum moss or hyphum peat.
B. Pre mixed soils can be used as long as samples are submitted with
manufacturer’s data and laboratory test reports.
C. Sandy Loam:
1. Friable, fertile, dark, loamy soil, free of clay lumps, subsoil, stones, and
other extraneous material and reasonably free of weeds and foreign
grasses. Soil containing Dallisgrass or Nutgrass shall be rejected.
Planting 32 93 00 - 4
2. Physical properties as follows:

Clay - between 7-27 percent
Silt - between 28-50 percent
Sand - less than 52 percent
D. Sharp Sand: Clean, washed sand, (fine aggregate) ASTM C-33.
2.3 COMMERCIAL FERTILIZER
A. Fertilizer shall be delivered in manufacturer’s standard container printed with

manufacturer’s name, material weight, and guaranteed analysis. Fertilizers with
N-P-K analysis other than that specified may be used provided that the
application rate per square foot of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium is equal
to that specified.
B. Commercial Fertilizer for Planting Beds: Complete fertilizer 5-10-5 element ratio
with minimum 8% sulfur and 4% iron plus micro-nutrients.
C. Controlled-Release fertilizer planting tablets for tree planting pits, shall be equal
to Agriform 20-10-15 planting tablets as manufactured by Sierra Chemical Co.,
Milpitas, California 95035 or approved equal.
2.4 MULCH
Bark mulch shall be hardwood mulch chips, ranging in size from 1-inch to 2-inches in
size, medium texture, shredded. Some planting beds have river rock for mulch as noted
on the plans.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDITION OF SURFACES
A. New bed areas will be left within one tenth of a foot of finish grade by other
trades. Contractor will be responsible for raking and smoothing of grade.
Remove from site and legally dispose of stones ¾-inch and larger, clods 1-inch
or larger, sticks, and other debris exposed during this operation.
B. Examine subgrade upon which work is to be performed. Notify the Landscape

Architect or owner’s representative of unsatisfactory conditions.
3.2 SHRUB PLANTING
A. Bed preparation: excavate bed area to a depth of six inches. Till bed to a depth
of six inches, and backfill with three inches of approved topsoil and three inches
of living earth compost. Till until well blended to a depth of twelve inches. TOP
OF MULCH IN BEDS SHALL BE GENERALLY FLUSH WITH ADJACENT
GRADE. Some soil may need to be removed after tilling so beds are flush.
B. Excavate planting hole 3" larger than the width and height of the root ball.
Backfill with 1/3 (soil mix and/or peatmoss), 1/3 native soil and 1/3 sandloam.
Planting 32 93 00 - 5
C. Plant where shown, setting plants with tops of balls even with tops of beds, and
compact soil carefully around each plant ball. ALL BED AREAS SHALL HAVE
WEED BARRIER MAT BELOW MULCH LAYER.
D. Water each plant thoroughly with hoses to eliminate air pockets.
E. Carefully prune plants to remove dead or broken branches, various tags, and
hand-rake bed areas to smooth even surfaces, and mulch bed areas 1 inch
deep.
3.3 TREE PLANTING
A. Plant ornamental trees in pits 12-inches larger than the root ball. Plant shade
trees in pits two feet greater in diameter than root ball and equal to depth of root
ball.
B. After excavation of tree pits, review water percolation. If tree pit does not drain
adequately prepare hole for sump. (Pit should drain 6” of water in 24 hours)
C. In the event rock or underground construction work or obstructions are

encountered in any plant pit excavation work to be done under this section,
alternate locations may be selected by the Landscape Architect. Where
locations cannot be changed the obstructions shall be removed to a depth of not
less than six (6") inches below bottom of ball when plant is properly set at the
required grade. The work of this section shall include the removal from the site
of such rock or underground obstructions encountered at the cost of the
Landscape Contractor.
D. Prepare soil for planting by thoroughly mixing two parts sandy loam and one part
peatmoss or other approved organic matter. If planting soil does not fall within
the ph range of 5.5 to 7.0 add limestone or aluminum sulphate to bring soil into
the specified ph range.
E. Backfill tree pits with a mixture of ½ prepared soil and ½ existing site soil. Lightly
tamp every 6-inches to fill all voids and pockets. When pit is 2/3 full, water
thoroughly and leave water to soak in. Place fertilizer planting tablets per
manufacturer’s recommendations. Complete backfilling and form a saucer
around the tree.
F. Completely fill each tree saucer with mulch to a depth of three inches.
G. Contractor shall keep trees plumb until established. Reference details
H. Pruning: Prune trees to preserve the natural character of the plant in a manner
appropriate to its particular requirements in the landscape design as directed by
the Landscape Architect. In general, remove at least one-third of wood by
thinning and pruning. DO NOT cut back terminal branches. Remove sucker
growth and broken or badly bruised branches.
Planting 32 93 00 - 6
3.4 CLEANUP
During work, keep premises neat and orderly including organization of storage area.
Remove trash, including debris resulting from removing weeds or rocks from planting
areas, preparing beds, or planting plants from site daily as work progresses. Keep walk
and driveway area clean by sweeping or hosing.
END OF SECTION
Planting 32 93 00 - 7
SECTION 33 00 00
UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Perform all work required to complete the project as indicated by the Contract
Documents, and furnish all supplementary items necessary for the completion of all
work specified in this Section.
include furnishing all labor, tools, materials and incidentals required to complete the
work; the complete installation of conduit for site lighting and sleeving for future use;
and cleaning up.
1.3 STANDARDS
A. Standards will meet the requirements and recommendations of applicable portions

of the standards listed:
1. American Society of Testing and Materials, ASTM.

2. TXDOT Standard Specifications.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Site Information:
1. The data on indicated subsurface conditions is not intended as

representations or warranties of the accuracy or continuity between soil
borings. It is expressly understood that the Owner will not be responsible for
interpretation or conclusions drawn there from by the Contractor. The data
is made available for the convenience of the Contractor. Additional test
borings and other exploratory operations may be made by the Contractor at
no cost to the Owner.
B. Existing Utilities:

vertical depth) of all utilities prior to beginning construction. If utilities are to
remain in place, provide protection from damage during construction
operations.
2. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative and utility companies
when working in areas where utility lines might be encountered. The
Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to utility lines as a result of
Utilities 33 00 00-1
work under this contract.

3. The Contractor shall not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied
and used by the Owner. In the event that service from an active utility line
should need to be discontinued for any period of time, the utility will be shut
down by the respective utilities. Prior to discontinuing service on any active
utility line, the Contractor shall submit a request, in writing, to the Owner’s
Representative stating the need to shut down a specific utility. This request
shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative a minimum of seven (7)
days prior to service being discontinued.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Underground Pipe Conduit and sleeving shall be Schedule 40 PVC Pipe unless
otherwise noted on the Drawings. The Contractor shall locate and flag all conduits
so that it will be readily identifiable by the Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of TXDOT Standards and with
those specified herein. The most stringent will apply.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to insure that all trenches resulting
from the placement of underground utilities are backfilled in accordance with the
specifications set forth for this project. In the event that any subcontractor or public
utility company fails to properly backfill their trenches, the Contractor at no additional
cost shall do this work.
3.2 EXCAVATION
A. The Contractor shall excavate all materials encountered regardless of the difficulties
encountered. The ditch shall be no greater in width or depth than is necessary to
permit construction in accordance with the plans and these specifications. The
maximum width of trench at top of pipe without sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall
not be more than the external diameter of pipe plus 16 inches.
B. All trench excavations shall meet the requirements of the TXDOT and O.S.H.A.
C. Soft, spongy or otherwise unstable material which will not provide a firm foundation
for the pipe shall be removed and replaced to the extent required by the Owner’s
Representative. The material thus removed shall be replaced with suitable selected
material from the excavation or other sources approved by the Owner’s
Representative and shall be compacted as provided in these Specifications. When
unstable conditions are not corrected by the above means, the Contractor will be
required to use rock, gravel, concrete or timber foundations. The type of foundation
shall be determined by the Owner’s Representative. There will be no extra
compensation for this work.
3.3 BEDDING
A. The bedding for pipe shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density throughout
the entire length of the pipe. Recesses for bells of the pipe shall be excavated for
every joint and shall be of sufficient size and depth to relieve the bell of the load,
permitting the barrel of the pipe to lie firmly throughout the entire length. The pipe
positively will not be supported on blocks in order to raise the bell.
B. Earth bedding shall be used unless another type is designated on the Drawings or
specified per the City of Allen standards and specifications for construction. The
pipe shall be placed on the natural undisturbed earth foundation, which has been
carefully shaped to fit the lower part of the conduit for not less than 1/4 of its
circumference. When rock, shale or boulders are encountered in the trench, they
shall be removed to a depth of six (6) inches below the grade line and the trench
shall be replaced with, gravel or granular material up to the original grade and
tamped into place. Bell holes will be required as above. Bedding material shall be
replaced with clay plugs in pipe trenches, along three linear feet of the pipe trench,
where crossing building lines and pavement edges to prevent water from migrating
along the trench bedding material and entering beneath building or pavement areas.
C. Other types of bedding and embedment shall be provided when designated on the
Drawings.
3.4 EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILLING
A. After the pipe has been installed and the joints completely set, selected material
from the excavation, at a moisture content with which the required density can be
obtained, shall be placed equally along both sides of the pipe in layers not
exceeding six (6) inches loose depth. Care shall be taken to insure thorough
compaction of the fill under the haunches of the pipe. Each layer shall be
thoroughly compacted by hand or pneumatic tamper until the fill has reached an
elevation of 12 inches above the top of the pipe. Clay plugs shall be installed in pipe
trenches where crossing building lines and pavement edges to prevent water from
migrating along the trench backfill and entering beneath building or pavement areas.
B. In all pavement and sidewalk areas the remainder of the backfill shall be compacted
as specified in section 31 22 00 Grading In landscape areas the remainder of the
backfill shall be placed in layers not exceeding eight (8) inches loose depth and shall
be compacted by an approved method which will obtain the density of the adjacent
undisturbed soil. Clay plugs shall be installed in pipe trenches along three linear feet
of the pipe trench where crossing building lines and pavement edges to prevent
water from migrating along the trench backfill and entering beneath building or
pavement areas.
3.5 CLEANING UP
A. Upon completion of the work covered by this Section, the Contractor shall clean up
all work areas by removing all debris, surplus material and equipment from the site.
The ground surface will be restored to within 0.10 foot of its original position.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 33 40 00
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
furnish all supplementary items necessary for completion of all work specified in this
Section.
include furnishing all labor, tools, materials and incidentals required to complete the
work; preparation of a trench safety plan and obtaining City approval of the trench
safety plan; laying out all lines and structures; the complete installation of storm
drains, grate inlets, catch basins, area drains, curb inlets, headwalls, etc. and
cleaning up. For work within public rights-of-way and proposed easements, the
Contractor shall comply with all requirements of the local governing standards,
TXDOT standards, and with the standards and specifications stated herein. The
most stringent shall apply.
1.3 STANDARDS
A. Construction will meet the requirements and recommendations of applicable

portions of the Standards listed:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM.

2. TXDOT 1993 Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and
Bridges
3. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, North Central Texas
Council of Governments, NCTCOG.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Site Information
1. The data indicated in the geotechnical investigation is made available for the
convenience of the Contractor. The Owner will not be responsible for
interpretations of the geotechnical investigation made by the Contractor.
Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
B. Existing Utilities
Storm Drainage Utilities 33 40 00 – 1


vertical depth) of all utilities prior to beginning earthwork operations. If
utilities are to remain in place, provide protection from damage during
construction operations.
2. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be
encountered during excavation, consult Owner immediately for directions as
to proceed. Cooperate with Owner, public and private utility companies in
keeping services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to
satisfaction of utility Owner.
3. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by
Owner, except when permitted in writing by Owner and then only after
temporary utility services have been provided.
C. Use of Explosives
1. The use of explosives is not permitted.
D. Protection of Persons and Property
1. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with
warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities
having jurisdiction.
2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from
damages caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout
and other hazards created by excavation operations.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 STORM DRAINAGE PIPE
A. All storm drainage pipe 18 inches in diameter or larger, as well as all storm drainage
pipe located under drive or parking pavement, shall be Class III, reinforced concrete
pipe with tongue and groove joints and shall conform to the latest ASTM
Designation C 76.
B. All storm drainage pipes smaller than 18 inches in diameter shall be HDPE storm
piping or approved equal. HDPE storm pipe shall be installed per the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Portland Cement shall be of a standard brand and shall conform to the latest ASTM
Designation C 150 Type 1.
D. Mortar and grout shall be composed of two parts fine aggregate and one part
cement and mixed with water to produce a homogeneous mixture of such
consistency that it can be easily handled and spread by trowel. Mortar and grout
which has been retempered or has attained its initial set shall not be used.
E. Aggregates for concrete shall be considered as either fine or coarse and shall meet
the requirements of NCTCOG Item 2.1.
F. Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, coarse aggregate, fine aggregate,

water, mineral filler and/or admixtures if permitted by the Owner. Concrete shall
have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of not less than 3000 psi and
shall have a maximum water-cement ratio of 7.0 gallons per sack, minimum cement
content of 5.0 sacks per cubic yard, and a slump from two (2) to three (3) inches.
Measuring materials, batching and mixing shall conform to ASTM Designation C 94.
G. Reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM Designation A 615, Grade 60.
H. Cast iron rings, cover and grates shall be true to pattern in form and dimensions,
free from pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blow holes and other defects in
positions affecting their strength and value for the service intended. Angles shall be
filleted and arises shall be sharp and true. Surfaces shall be machined where
indicated or where otherwise necessary to secure true, flat surfaces. Cover and
grates shall fit properly into frames, and seat uniformly and solidly.
1. Castings shall conform to the following ASTM Designations:
a. Gray-iron Castings A 48 Class 30

b. Malleable Castings A 47 25018
c. Ductile Iron Castings A 395 60-45-15
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. The Contractor shall excavate all materials encountered regardless of the difficulties
encountered. The ditch shall be no greater in width or depth than is necessary to
permit construction in accordance with the Plans and these Specifications. The
maximum width of trench at top of pipe without sheeting, shoring and bracing shall
be as follows: Up to 33" External Diameter of Pipe + 16", 36" and larger External
Diameter of Pipe + 24".
B. The Contractor shall provide sheeting, shoring and bracing, whenever the
excavation or trench is more than five feet in depth and eight feet or more in length.
When sheeting and bracing are necessary the trench or excavation shall be dug to
such width that proper allowance is made for the space occupied by the sheeting.
All sheeting, shoring and bracing shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to
withstand the pressure exerted and protect all persons or property from injury or
damage. Neither sheeting nor shoring shall be left in place, but shall be removed in
such a manner as not to endanger or damage new or existing structures. All holes
or voids left by the removal of sheeting shall be backfilled.
C. Soft, spongy or otherwise unstable material which will not provide a firm foundation
for the pipe shall be removed and replaced with a suitable selected material from the
excavation or other sources approved by the Construction Manager and shall be
compacted as provided in the Specifications. When unstable conditions are not
corrected by the above means, the Contractor will be required to use rock, gravel,
concrete or timber foundations. There will be no extra compensation for this work.
3.2 BEDDING

A. The bedding for the pipe, which shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density
throughout the entire length of the pipe, shall be as designated on the drawings.
Bedding material shall be replaced with clay plugs in pipe trenches, along three
linear feet of the pipe trench, where crossing building lines and pavement edges to
prevent water from migrating along the trench bedding material and entering
beneath building or pavement areas.
3.3 PLACING STORM SEWER
A. No pipe shall be laid until it has been inspected and approved. All pipes shall be
laid and jointed in the dry. The pipe shall be laid up-grade beginning at the lower
end of the line. Pipe shall be laid accurately to line and grade with the tongue end
downstream entering the groove to full depth and in such manner as not to drag
earth into the annular space for joint grouting. When the entering pipe has been
checked for line and grade, the body of the pipe shall be backfilled with enough
earth, rock or concrete on both sides to hold the pipe firmly in position.
3.4 PIPE JOINTS
A. The ends of the pipe shall be cleaned thoroughly and wetted before making the
joint. The groove of the pipe as laid and the tongue of the pipe section being laid
shall be plastered thoroughly with an even layer of mortar. The pipes shall then be
pulled together taking care that the inner surfaces are flush and even. The entire
inner circumference of the joints of pipe 24 inches and larger in diameter shall be
sealed and packed with mortar and finished smooth. A bead shall be formed on the
pipe exterior extending at least one inch on either side of the joint and of
approximately semicircular cross section and covering the top half of the pipe
circumference.
B. For pipe less than 24 inches inside diameter, a tight stopper of burlap or other
equivalent materials shall be dragged through the pipe past the new joint. Curing
compound shall be used to protect the mortar. No jointing shall be done when the
atmospheric temperature is below 40°F. Mortar shall be protected from freezing
temperatures for 48 hours after being applied to joints.
C. Alternate methods of joints may be used at the option of the Contractor. The
alternate methods are (1) cold applied, plastic asphalt sewer joint compound, (2)
rubber gasket and (3) cold applied performed plastic gaskets. If the alternate
method is used it shall meet all requirements for materials and installation of TxDot
Item 464.
3.5 PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Wye Connections: The connection of one pipe to another may be accomplished

with a precast wye or by means of pipe-to-pipe connection. A pipe-to-pipe
connection shall be made by cutting a hole in the larger pipe slightly larger than the
outside diameter of the pipe to be connected. The smaller pipe to be connected
shall not project into the larger pipe. A concrete collar not less than six (6) inches
thick and six (6) inches wide shall be placed around the smaller pipe on the exterior
surface of the larger pipe.

B. End-To-End Connections: Wherever a smaller pipe is jointed end-to-end to a larger

pipe, the inside tops of the two pipes shall be matched, unless otherwise shown on
the Plans. The void between pipes shall be filled with cemented brickwork or where
this is not possible the void shall be filled with concrete mortar. In either case, a
concrete collar not less than six (6) inches thick and six (6) inches wide shall be
placed around the pipes over the joint.
3.6 INLETS, DRAINS, CLEANOUTS AND MANHOLES
A. Inlets, drains, cleanouts and manholes shall be constructed as per the plans.
B. Grates shall have continuous and even bearing on frame and shall be set to avoid
rocking.
C. Coordinate with paving construction to assure proper elevation of inlets as shown on

plans.
D. Install and seal joints at connection pipes.
3.7 BACKFILL
A. After the pipe has been installed and the mortar joints completely set, selected
material from the excavation at a moisture content with which the required density
can be obtained shall be placed equally along both sides of the pipe in layers not
exceeding six (6) inches loose depth. Care shall be taken to insure thorough
compaction of the fill under the haunches of the pipe. Each layer shall be
thoroughly compacted by hand or pneumatic tamper until the fill has reached an
elevation of 12 inches above the top of the pipe. Clay plugs shall be installed in pipe
trenches along three linear feet of the pipe trench where crossing building lines and
pavement edges to prevent water from migrating along the trench backfill and
entering beneath building or pavement areas.
B. The remainder of the backfill shall be placed in layers not exceeding eight (8) inches
loose depth and shall be compacted by an approved method which will obtain the
density of the adjacent undisturbed soil. Backfill for pipes under pavements shall be
compacted as specified in section 31 22 00, “Grading”. Water jetting will not be
permitted.
3.8 CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of the work covered by this Section, the Contractor shall clear
interior of piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material by flushing or
other means as approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall also clean up all
work areas by removing all debris, surplus materials, and equipment from the site.
The ground surface shall be restored to within 0.10 foot of original condition.
Excess trench excavation, which cannot be utilized onsite, shall be legally disposed
of offsite at the Contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION

Argyle ES#4 Specs 04212023 V2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Argyle ES#4 Specs 04212023 V2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Argyle Elementary School #4 75 Percent Package Project Manual

Contract Conditions and Specifications for the general

Argyle Elementary School No. 04

SECTIONS ISSUE DATE REVISED

DIVISION 00 — PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 41 00 Proposal Form ................................................................................

DIVISION 01 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 06 — WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

DIVISION 07 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

10 44 13 Fire Protection Cabinets..................................................................

DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 14 — CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 21 — FIRE SUPPRESSION

22 16 01 Natural Gas Piping and Appurtenances ..........................................

DIVISION 23 — HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

26 28 19 Ground Fault Protection System .....................................................

DIVISION 28 — ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

DIVISION 32 — EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

BASIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Basic fire protection requirements necessary to provide complete installation of all

1.3 WORK INCLUDED

A. This section of work comprises furnishing of all materials, equipment, tools,

1.4 RELATED SECTIONS

Basic Fire Protection System Requirements 21 00 10 - 1

1.5 CODES & REFERENCE STANDARDS

B. Applicable Codes and Standards for All Division 21 Work:

C. National Electrical Code

D. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards:

E. National Fire Protection Association

F. Fire Sprinkler System:

G. National Appliance Energy Conservation Act of 1987

H. Texas State Board of Insurance Standards

I. Clean Air Act and Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990

J. Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators

Basic Fire Protection System Requirements 21 00 10 - 2

L. Local Municipal Codes and Ordinances

1.6 SCHEDULE OF ABBREVIATIONS

A. Reference Standards are listed in Section 21 using abbreviations listed below:

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide complete installations of all systems.

Basic Fire Protection System Requirements 21 00 10 - 3

Basic Fire Protection System Requirements 21 00 10 - 4

a. The Contractor engaged to execute the work included in a particular section

1.10 SITE VISIT

B. No consideration will be granted for any alleged misunderstanding of the materials to

Basic Fire Protection System Requirements 21 00 10 - 5

1. Bidding requirements, contract forms, conditions of the contract, Division 1 -

Basic Fire Protection System Requirements 21 00 10 - 6

C. Coordination Correspondence: The contractor may desire to verify the acceptability

1.12 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

Basic Fire Protection System Requirements 21 00 10 - 7

4. Set of operating instructions. Operating instructions shall also include

1.14 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

F. Contractor, subcontractor, vendors and suppliers are required to waive subrogation

Basic Fire Protection System Requirements 21 00 10 - 8

1.15 UTILITIES, LOCATIONS, AND ELEVATIONS

1.16 SUBSTITUTION OF PRODUCTS

F. Requests for substitution are understood to mean that the Contractor:

Basic Fire Protection System Requirements 21 00 10 - 9